Customer Ebhoso Documents Catalogues Siemens PowerProducts

pr
ouddi
s
t
r
i
but
or
of
Vi
s
i
tour
www.
yout
ube.
com/us
er
/ebhor
s
man
ShopOnl
i
ne
ebhor
s
man.
com
Residential
Commercial
Industrial
Power Product Catalogue

Low voltage electrical distribution products
siemens.ca/powercat
Reliable Products From

The Technology Leader
Technology Enabling Reliability.
When it comes to ready availability, easy
installation, and fewer callbacks, you need
a manufacturer you can trust. Our products
and systems are engineered to take on
the most demanding conditions, always
available day after day.
RESIDENTIAL
1 Safety & Disconnect Switches

2 Meter Centers
3 Dry Type Transformers
4 Loadcentres
5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
6 Panelboards
7 Low Voltage Motor Starters
8 Switchboards
9 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs)
10
COMMERCIAL
Power Monitoring
11 Renewable Energy Products

12
Switchgear
13
Busway Systems
14 Motor Control Centres
INDUSTRIAL
15
Application Data
16
Product Index
Detailed Table of Contents

located at beginning of each section
Your single point of contact for general inquiries, customer service, sales office information, and product inquiries:
Siemens Customer Interaction Centre: (888) 303-3353 | email: cic.ca@siemens.com | siemens.ca/powercat
POWER PRODUCT
Safety & Disconnect Switches

1
Contents - Safety Switches
Cross Reference and Replacement Parts for SE and ID Switches

Double-Throw Switches
Selection

Accessories

Dimensions

Enclosed Rotary Disconnect Switches
1-30 1-31
1-32
1-33
1-34
1-35 1-36
SAFETY & DISCONNECT

SWITCHES
Air Conditioning Disconnects 1-3

Safety Switch Guide Form Specifications
1-5
Feature Comparison
1-6
Enclosure Types
1-7
Catalogue Numbering System
1-8
General Duty Safety Switches
Plug Fuse Enclosed Type, 120/240V FusibleSelection
1-9
60A Special Application Type, 240V Non-FusibleSelection
1-10
General Duty SwitchesFeatures
1-11
240V Fusible and Non-FusibleSelection
1-11
Heavy Duty Safety Switches
Heavy Duty SwitchesFeatures
1-12
240V FusibleSelection
1-13
600V FusibleSelection
1-14
600V Non-FusibleSelection
1-15
Type 4/4X and 12 with Viewing WindowSelection
1-16
Special Applications Safety Switches
4-Pole and 6-PoleSelection
1-17
Interlocked ReceptacleSelection
1-18
AccessoriesGeneral and Heavy Duty Switches
Class R Fuse Clips
1-19
Class J Fusing
1-19
Class T Fuse Adapter Kits
1-19
Neutral Kits
1-19
200% Neutral Kits
1-19
Fuse Puller Kits
1-19
Auxiliary Contacts
1-20
Copper Lug Kits
1-20
Equipment Ground Kits
1-20
Isolated Ground Kits
1-20
Interchangeable Hubs
1-21
Compression Lug, Neutral Barrier Kits
1-21
Lugs and Wire Ranges
1-21
Multiple Padlocks
1-21
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts 1-22
Dimensions and Weights
General and Heavy Duty Switches
1-23 1-26
Type 1 and 3R Knockout Diagrams
1-26 1-28
4-Pole and 6-Pole Switch Dimensions
1-29
SAFETY & DISCONNECT

SWITCHES
POWER PRODUCT
Safety & Disconnect Switches
Contents - Disconnect Switches

Compact Non-Fusible Switches
Rotary and Toggle SwitchSelection
Dimensions and Wire Ranges
Type VBII (30-600A)
Features and Ordering Information
Switch and Handle Selection
Accessories
Dimensions and Lug Wire Ranges
Type MCS (30-200A)
Switches, Fuse, and No Fuse KitSelection
Handle Operators and Accessories
Type CFS Compact Fusible Switches
Switch and HandleSelection
Accessories & 600-800 Handle Selection
Dimensions and Technical Characteristics
Type HCP Switchboard Units
Selection and accessories
Dimensions
1-37 1-39
1-40
1-41
1-42
1-43 1-44
1-45
1-46
1-47
1-48
1-49
1-50
1-51
1-52
1-53
Safety Switches
Non-Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects
Selection
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
Horsepower
Disconnect
Type
Std.
Pkg.
WN2060
60
10
Non-Fused Pullout
SAFETY
SWITCHES
240V Non-Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure
5.14
3.049
R.156
Features
Benefits
b Ample Wiring Space
b The larger enclosure allows for ample wiring space.
5.14
3.049
@ 0.312
b R
ugged Design b
Manufactured with powder coated G90 galvanized
steel for fade, scratch
5.14
3.049 R.156
x3
2.750

and corrosion resistanceR.156
b N
umerous Knockouts
b All (6) knockouts are easy to remove. The sidewall knockouts provide access from the

sides of the device. Every knockout has 1/2", 3/4" and 1" provisions.
b R
aised Mounting Embosses
b (4) Raised mounting embosses keep the unit away from the wall, preventing dirt
build-up. The upper mounting hole is shaped to be used as a hanger.
2.250
@ 0.312
x3
b C
opper Conductors
b C
opper current carrying part allows for 2.750
a cooler, longer lasting operation.
@ 0.312
7.250
1.562
x3
b P
ullout Switch b
The pullout switch design
allows you to safely and
easily de-energize the load terminals.
2.750
0.750
b R
emovable Door
b The easily removable door makes it possible to wire the device with absolutely no
7.250

interference.
1.375
2.250
Dimensions - Inches*
Non-Fused
2.750
2.375
4.750
1.562
1.562
0.750
5.14
2.250
3.049
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
R.156
0.219
1.375
1.562
1.562
0.667
2.750
0.750
2.375
4.750
0.867
1.375
@ 0.312
x3
0.219
0.667
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.752.750
x @ 1.00
1.375
2.375
2.750
2.7504.750
@.240
7.250
Wiring Diagram
0.867
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
1.375
2.250
2.750
Pullout Disconnect
@.240
1.562
1.562
0.867
0.750
0.219
1.375
1.375
2.750
0.667
2.750
2.375
4.750
LINE
@.240
Removable Door
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
Wire Range Table

Connector
0.867
1.375
2.750
LOAD Bonded LOAD

LINE
Neutral
Copper
Aluminum
Solid
Standard
Solid
Line
#14-8
#14-3
#12-8
Standard
#12-3
Load
#14-8
#14-3
#12-8
#12-3
Neutral
#12-8
#12-2
#12-8
#12-2
Equip Grnd.
#12-8
#12-2
#12-8
#12-2
@.240
* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 2014
1-3
7.250
1.562
Safety Switches
Selection
240V Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
Horsepower
Fuse
Class
Std.
Pkg.
WF2030
30
WF2060
60
10
5.144
3.50
2x @ 0.875 MAX
3.425
Features
Benefits
b Ample Wiring Space
b The larger enclosure allows for ample wiring space.
b R
ugged Design b Manufactured
with powder coated G90 galvanized steel
for fade, scratch
5.144
3.425
5.14
3.049
3x @ 0.50
2x @ 0.875 MAXand corrosion3.50resistance
R.156
b N
umerous Knockouts
b All (6) knockouts are easy to remove. The sidewall knockouts provide access from3xthe

@ 1.00
2.921

sides of the device. Every knockout has 1/2", 3/4"
and 1" provisions.
3x @ 0.312
THRU
b R
aised Mounting Embosses
b (4) Raised mounting embosses keep the unit away from the wall, preventing
dirt
build-up. The upper mounting hole is shaped to be used as a hanger.
b C
opper Conductors
b C
opper current carrying part allows
cooler, longer lasting operation.3.00
3x @ 0.50 for a2.25
@ 0.312
b P
ullout Switch b
The pullout switch design allows you to safely
and easily de-energize the load terminals.
x3
9.09
2.750
b R
emovable Door
b2.921
The easily removable
door makes3x @it1.00
possible to wire the device with absolutely no
7.2503x @ 0.312

interference.
2.375
THRU
4.750
Dimensions - Inches*
1.00
1.375
2.25
2.250
5.144
3.50
2x @ 0.875 MAX
3.425
2.375
4.750
1.562
1.00
0.219
1.562
1.375
0.750
1.000
2.750
0.25
1.00
0.219
1.375
0.667
2.750
2.375
@ 0.250 THRU
3x @ 0.50
4.750
3x @ 1.00
2.921
@ 0.250 THRU
2.25
1.375
2.750
9.09
Wiring Diagram
0.25
1.00
3x @ 0.312
THRU
6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00
1.375
2.750
3.00
6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00

KNOCKOUT
Fuse Block
Bonded
Neutral
0.867
2.375
4.750
0.219
1.00
1.375
1.375
LOAD
1.000
2.750
2.750
LINE
@.240
Removable Door
0.25
1.00
@ 0.250 THRU
1.375
2.750
* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

LOAD
LINE
Wire Range Table

Connector
1-4
1.000
6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00

2.750
KNOCKOUT
3.00
Fused
9.09
Copper
Aluminum
Solid
Standard
Solid
Line
#14-8
#14-3
#12-8
Standard
#12-3
Load
#14-8
#14-3
#12-8
#12-3
Neutral
#12-8
#12-2
#12-8
#12-2
Equip Grnd.
#12-8
#12-2
#12-8
#12-2
Type VBII Safety Switches

Guide Form Specifications
General Duty
Heavy Duty
Double Throw
General Duty Switches are intended for

applications where reliable performance and
continuity of service are needed, but where duty
requirements are not severe and usual service
conditions prevail. (These switches are intended for
use primarily with supply circuits rated 240V AC or
less where the available fault current is less than
100,000A when used with Class R or T fuses or
10,000A max. when used with Class H fuses.)
Heavy Duty Switches are intended for use in

applications where:
1. Rugged construction, reliable performance,
continuity of service and ease of maintenance are
emphasized, or
2. Available fault currents higher than 10,000A are
likely to be encountered, such as in manufacturing
plants, mass production industries, and
commercial, institutional and other large buildings
served by network systems or transformers of
higher capacities.

3. System
voltage is 600V AC or DC Max.
Double throw switches are intended to

transfer loads from one power source to another.
All double throw switches are CSA certified.
Switches are rated for use on systems with an
available fault current of up to 10,000 AIC when
protected with Class H fuses or 200,000 AIC when
protected with Class R, J or Class T fuses. They
can also be used to connect a single source of
power to either of two loads. In this application
it is necessary to field modify fusible switches
so that the fuses are on the load side of the
switching mechanism.
4. A Type 12 or 4/4X enclosure is required.
Short Circuit
Suitable for use on systems capable of

delivering not more than 100,000 RMS
symmetrical amperes of fault current as
follows:
Sw. Rating AIC Rating Protective Devicea
30-200A
10,000
Circuit Breaker
30-200A
10,000
Class H Fuse
30-200A
100,000
Class R Fuse
100-200A
100,000
Class J or T Fuse
Suitable for use on systems capable of delivering not more than 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes of
fault current as follows:
Sw. Rating & Tpye AIC Rating
Protective Devicea
All Heavy Duty & DT
10,000
Circuit Breaker
30-600A HD & DT
10,000
Class H Fuse
30-600A HD
200,000
Class R, J or T Fuse
30-600A DTFC & DTNFC DT
200,000
Class R, J or T Fuse
800 &1200A HD
200,000
Class L or T Fuse
Fuses
Fusible switches will accept the following CSA

class fuses:

class fuses:

class fuses:
30 LF - 30A max plug Fuses

30-200A GD Class H & K, Class R with kit
100-200A GD Class J-move base
100-200A GD Class T with kit
30-600A HD Class H & K, Class R with kit

30-600A, 600V HD Class J-move base
100-600A, 240V HD Class J-move base
100-200A HD Class T with kit
400-600A HD Class T-move bases
800-1200A HD Class L, Class T with kitb
30-200A DT - Class H & K, Class R with kit

30 & 60A 600V DT - Class J-move base
100-200A DT - Class J-move base, Class T with kit
400-600A DT - Class J-standard, Class T-move
bases
Cover
Interlocks
Voidable cover interlocks on switches prevent

the switch door from being opened when in the
ON position. No cover interlock on plug fuse type
switches.
Voidable dual cover interlocks standard on all

heavy duty switches. Prevents cover from being
opened when switch is in the ON position and
prevents switch from being turned ON when door
is opened.
Dual cover interlocks standard on all double

throw switches. Prevents cover from being
opened when switch is in the ON position and
prevents switch from being turned ON when
door is opened.
Specifications
CSA certified under file #24563 as enclosed switches. Fusible switches also suitable as service
entrance when neutral bonded to the enclosure is installed. Meets CSA C22.2 No.4 Enclosed
Switches.
CSA certified under file #24563 as enclosed

switches. Meets CSA C22.2 No.4 Enclosed
switches.
Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 for type GD

switches.
Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 type HD for

DT switches.
Withstand
Ratings
Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 for type HD

switches.
Seismic
Qualifications
All GD & HD switches and DT type double throw switches have been tested and comply with the 2010 California Building Code (CBC)
and with the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) - Compliance Level SDS = 1.85 g
Groundable
Neutral
Fusible switches have groundable neutral blocks

factory installed.
All switches (both Fusible and Non-Fusible) are

either supplied with factory installed neutrals or
accept field addable neutrals.
All 2-3 pole DT will accept field addable

neutrals.
Padlocks
Padlockable cover latch. OFF padlock

provisions on handle.
Padlockable cover latch and multipleOFF

padlock provisions on handle.
Padlockable cover latch and multipleOFF

padlock provisions on handle.
HP & Load

Break Ratings
All General Duty, Heavy Duty and Double Throw Switches are both load break and horsepower rated.
(All neutrals are

bondable for service
entrance use.)
a The
protective device can either be a fuse installed in a

fusible switch or an upstream fuse or circuit breaker
protecting a non-fusible switch. The ampere rating of the
upstream protective device must not exceed the switch
ampere rating.
b Class
T kit available for 240V max. applications on

1200A switches.
1-5
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Application
Product Overview
Feature Comparison
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Product Overview
General
Duty
Heavy
Double
Features /
Duty Throw Ratings
30 thru 600 Amps
800 and 1200 Amps
600 Volt AC
b
b
240 Volt AC
250 Volt DC
600 Volt DC
on
Double-break visible blade design

b
b
b
(30-200A)
Quick-make, quick-break switching action
b
b
Handle design for hook stick operation

Padlockable cover latch
Highly visible ON/OFF handle indication
b
b
bc
Single voidable cover interlock
Dual voidable cover interlock
b
b
Padlockable handle
in operation
Type 1 enclosure
Type 3R enclosure
Type 12 enclosure
Type 4/4X enclosures
Generous wiring gutters that meet CSA and

b
b
b
CEC wire-bending space requirements
b
b
b

Lugs suitable for copper or aluminum at

60 or 75C
b
b
b

CU/AL wire lugs that meet CSA C22.2

No.65-03 requirements
Suitable for field-convertible

compression connectors
bf
b
b

All plated copper current carrying parts

(except lugs)
b
b
b

Spring reinforced Fuse Clips

(except 30A general duty)b
b
b

b
b
Field addable 200% neutral
bag
ba
Provisions for CSA Class T, R and H Fuses

Metal nameplate
b
b
bd
Type 4X with stainless steel interior parts
Rolled flange enclosure design (30-200A)
Isolated ground kits
b
bg
bag

60-200A
be

a 400,
b
b
Clear pivoting line terminal shield

Replacement parts
Provisions for CSA Class J and L Fuses

Aux. switch kits
600V & 600A fusible, double-throw switches accept

only Class J or T fuses. Only 800 & 1200A HD switches
will accept Class L fuses.
b 30A general duty switches have fuse clips constructed
of spring type copper.
1-6
c Not
supplied on 30A outdoor & plug fuse switches.

Type VBII in stainless steel enclosures.
d 30-200A
e 60-200A.
off
Double Break Switching Action
Like the time-proven Vacu-Break Design,
the Siemens VBII double break switching
action breaks the arc in two places in
30-200A ratings. This reduces heat
generation and increases switching
speed by doubling the breaking d
istance.
The result is enhanced performance and
increased longevity. We also provide the
most visible blade design available today.
Unlike conventional knife blade switches,
the blades are self-aligning to ensure
positive contact. In addition, they have
no wear and friction point since the
electrical hinge has been eliminated.
The result is a very fast, positive and
reliable switching action for even the
most severe applications.
f 200A
general duty switches have aluminum neutral

assemblies.
GD, 100-600A DT and 100-1200A HD switches
will accept Class T fuses.
g 100-200A
Safety Switches
General Duty and Heavy Duty
Product Overview
Enclosure Types
SAFETY
SWITCHES
h
A Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
provide protection against contact with the enclosed equipment
in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist.
B Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily
h
to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and sleet
and must remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the
enclosure. They are not intended to provide protection against
conditions such as dust, internal condensation, or internal icing.
h
C Type 4, 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor
use primarily to provide a degree of protection against
windblown dust, rain, splashing water and hose-directed water.
They are not intended to provide protection against conditions
such as internal condensation or internal icing. Also meets
4X definition by providing a high degree of protection
against corrosion. Siemens 30-200A stainless steel 4X switches
are supplied stainless interior parts and hardware as standard.
h
A
h
B
h
h
C D
h
E
h
D Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use
primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown
dust, rain, splashing water and hose-directed water. They are
not intended to provide protection against conditions such as
internal condensation or internal icing.
h
E Type 12a enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and
dripping water. They are not intended to provide protection
against conditions such as internal condensation.

Load Break Ratings

All Siemens safety switches are load break rated. The load
break rating is assigned by CSA after the switching unit has
successfully performed the following tests:

Number of
Switch ON/OFF Number of Operations
Ampere Operations With
Without
Rating per Minute Current Current
Total
30100
6000 4000 10000
200
6000 2000 8000
400
1000 5000 6000
600
1000 4000 5000
800
500 3000 3500
1200
500 2000 2500
Horsepower Ratings
Non- Fusible Safety Switch AIC Ratings

When Protected by a Circuit Breaker
Breaker Frame
NEG, NGB, ED4
NEB, NEG, NGG,
NGB, ED4
NEB, NEG, NGG,
NGB, ED4
ED6
FD6-A, JD6-A
JD6-A, LD6-A
JD6-A, LD6-A
LD6-A
LD6-A
NNG
Non-Fused Switch
30 DT (240V)
60-100A GD & DT (240V)
Short Circuit Current

Rating
18 kA Thru 240 VAC
18 kA Thru 240 VAC
30-100A HD & DT (600V)
18 kA Thru 480 VAC
30-100A HD & DT (600V)

200A HD & DT (600V)
400A DT (240V)
400A HD & DT (600V)
600A DT (240V)
600A HD & DT (600V)
1200A HD (600V)
18 kA Thru 600 VAC

18 KA Thru 600 VAC
18 kA Thru 240 VAC
18 kA Thru 600 VAC
25kA Thru 240 VAC
25kA Thru 600 VAC
25 kA Thru 600 VAC
All Siemens safety switches, where appropriate, are horsepower rated. The assignment of such ratings is made by CSA
only after the switching unit has undergone testing to determine its acceptability which includes repeated interruption
of the locked rotor current of the motor for which it is to be
rated as follows:
Max HP
Number of ON/OFF
Rating Operations per minute
Number of Cycles
of Operation
100
50
500
10
VBII
Type 12 switches are also rated 3R & 3S for outdoor use. Type 3R is defined in B
above. 3S rated enclosures provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and
allow operation when the enclosure is ice laden.
All switches above are rated at 10 KA when protected by any CSA certified or cUL Listed CB
Circuit breaker trip rating must not exceed switch ampere rating
1-7
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Type VBII Safety Switch Catalogue Numbering System

H F C 3 6 4 N R CH
Product Overview
Special Applications With:
Switch Type
L = General Duty
10k AICMax.
(Plug Fused &
60A Max
Non-Fused)
G = Gen. Duty
H = Heavy Duty
DT = Double Throw
CH
W
= Crouse-Hinds Receptacle
= Viewing Window
Fused or Non-Fused
F = Fused
NF = Non-Fused
Enclosure Type
Omit = Type
R
= Type
S
= Type
J
= Type
C = Built to meet Canadian requirements

Number of Poles
1, Indoor
3R, Outdoor
4/4X, Stainless Steel
12, Industrial
1 = 1
2 = 2
3 = 3
4 = 4
6 = 6
With or Without Neutral

Voltage
Omit = Less Neutral

N
= With Neutral
1 = 120V or 120/240V
2 = 240V
6 = 600V
Amperes
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
30A
60A
100A
200A
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
400A
600A
800A
1200A
Type VBII Accessories Catalogue Numbering System

H R 6
Switch Type
Amperes
H = Heavy Duty
G = General Duty
Accessory Type
A1 =
A2 =
A3 =
CL =

G =
G2 =
LC =
NC =
NC2 =
P =
R =
T =
1-8
Auxiliary Switch 1/NO and 1/NC

Auxiliary Switch 2/NO and 2/NC
Auxiliary Switch Low Current
Compression Lug Barrier /
Mounting Kit
Ground Lug Kit
Insulated Ground Lug Kit
Copper Lug Kit
Neutral
200% Neutral
Fuse Puller Kit
Class R - Fuse Clip Kit
Class T - Fuse Kit
1
2
12
3
23
123
1234
4
56
5678
78
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
30A
60A
30/60A
100A
60/100A
30/60/100A
30/60/100/200A
200A
400/600A
400/600/800/1200A
800/1200A
Maximum Voltage
2 = 240V Max
6 = 600V Max
General Duty Enclosed Switches

Plug Fuse and 60A Special Application Type
Selection
Features
b
b
b
b
CSA Certified under file #24563

Compact size
Horsepower rated
Indoor and outdoor enclosures
Quick make-quick break mechanism
Visible ON-OFF indications
Padlock-off handle feature
Door padlock provision
All fusible switches suitable for use as service
entrance equipement
Bondable neutral (where indicated)
Lugs suitable for copper or aluminum wire
Switches accept plug fuses only - fuses
not included
Hubsc see page 1-21
Lugs see page 1-21
Ground Bar Kit: GSGK60c
Knockout diagrams see page 1-26 and 1-27
SAFETY
SWITCHES
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Dimensions - in. (mm)

Enclosure Type
Height
Width
814 (210)
512 (140)
Depth
3 (76)
3R
814 (210)
538 (137)
318 (79)
Wire Range Table

Switch Type
Wire Range
120/240 Volt Fusible

30 Amp
#14 AWG - #8 AWG Al/Cud
120/240 Volt Non-Fusible

60 Amp
#14 AWG - #3 AWG Al/Cu
Ampere
Rating
Indoor Type 1
Horsepower Ratings a
Outdoor Type 3R
Catalogue Number
1-Phase, 2-Wire
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)
Catalogue Number
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)

Pkg. of 10
3.6
3.5
LFC211NR
35
LNFC222R c
35
Standard
Maximum
120/240 Volt Fusible

1-Pole and Solid Neutral b
30
LFC111N
2-Pole and Solid Neutral

30
LFC211N
120 Volt 1-Phase, 2-Wire

1/2
120/240 Volt 2-Phase, 3-Wire
1/2
240 Volt Non-Fused

2-Pole Special Application Switch
60
a Dual
240 Volt 1-Phase, 2-Wire
horsepower ratings:
Std. applies when non-time delay plug fuses
are installed.
Max applies when time-delay plug fuses are installed.
b Has
service entrance label. CSA certified as

"Enclosed Switches" (suitable for use as service
equipment where indicated).
c Bottom cable entry and exit only. No hub provision
supplied. GSGK60 is included and factory installed.
d Line
10
lugs are CSA approved for #14 to #6 Cu/Al cable.
1-9

Features (60-200A)
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Product Overview
11
10
3
6
1
8
4
2
12
1. Cover interlock
2. Tangential knockouts through
200A for easy conduit lineup
3. Quick-make, quick-break operating
mechanism that ensures positive
operation
4. Provisions for T, R, J, H, and K
class fuses (T & J 100-200A)
1-10
5. Generous wiring gutters that

meet or exceed CEC
wire-bending space requirements
6. Visible blade, double-break switch
action
7. Positive 2 or 3 point mounting
8. Highly visible red handle grip
9. Informative door labeling which
includes replacement parts list
10. Handle and cover padlocking

provisions
11. Side-hinged door that opens
180 degrees for easier wiring
12. A unique enclosure design that
adds rigidity and strength. Its
rolled edge prevents cuts and
scrapes to conductors and to
installers hands

Selection
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Horsepower Ratings a
Indoor Type 1
System
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue Number
240V AC
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)

Std. Pkg.
1-Phase, 2-Wire
2-Phase, 4-Wire
3-Phase, 3-Wire
Std.
Std.
Std.
Max.
Max.
Max.
250 Volt DC
Std.
240 Volt Fusible

2-Pole, 2-Fuse, and Solid Neutral bcd
30
60
100
200
240 Volt AC/250 Volt DC

35
14
23
47
GFC221N
GFC222N
GFC223N
GFC224N
11/2
3
71/2
15
3
10
15
3-Pole, 3-Fuse, and Solid Neutral d

30
60
100
200
71/2
15
30
60
5
10
20
40

24
15
25
49
GFC321N
GFC322N
GFC323N
GFC324N
ual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time

D
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when timedelay fuses are installed.
T
hese switches are CSA certified for application on
grounded B-phase systems.
3
71/2
15
25
11/2
3
71/2
15
3
10
15
3
71/2
15
25
71/2
15
30
60
5
10
20
40
c Suitable
d
for use on 3-phase motor loads.

Suitable for use as service entrance when neutral is
bonded to the enclosure.
e 10 switches per standard package.
f 5 switches per standard package.
1-11
Features
15
3
SAFETY
SWITCHES
20
2
11
17
16
4
1
5
18
6
13
19
8
14
12
1. Quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism
that ensures positive operation.
7
2. Visible blade, double-break switching action.

13. Spring reinforced fuse clips that assure reliable
3. Arc chutes dissipate heat and prolong switch life. contact for cool operation.
4. Highly visible red handle grip.
Designed for hook stick operation.
14. Door latch securely holds door closed and

allows cover padlocking.
5. Defeatable dual cover interlock.
15. Front removable mechanical lugs that are

suitable for CU/AI 60 or 75 C conductors.
6. Center punch provided for field drilling

to allow ON padlocking.
10
7. Handle can be padlocked in the OFF position

with up to (3) padlocks with 5/16" hasps.
8. Generous top, bottom and side gutters that
meet or exceed CEC wire-bending space
requirements.
9. Informative door labeling which includes
replacement parts list.
10. Tangential knockouts through 600A for easy
conduit lineup.
11. Side-hinged door that opens past 180 degrees
for easier wiring.
1-12
12. Unique enclosure design increases rigidity and

prevents cuts and scrapes to conductors and
installers hands.
16. Lugs are field convertible to copper

body and to a wide variety of compression
connectors.
17. Hinged clear line terminal shield
with probe holes for inspecting or
testing line side terminals.
18. Embossed aluminum nameplate on Heavy
Duty Switches.
19. Drawn cover for increased rigidity
and resistance to abuse.
20. Top key hole and bottom mounting holes
provide easy 2 or 3 point mounting.

Selection
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Indoor Type 1
System
Horsepower Ratings b
Outdoor Type 3R
240V AC
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)

Std. Pkg.
Catalogue
Number
Ship. Wt. (lbs.)

Std. Pkg.
Hub
Typed
1-Phase, 2-Wire
Std.
Max.
3-Phase, 3-Wire
Std.
250 Volt DC
Max.
240 Volt Fusiblea

2-Pole, 2-Fuse and Solid Neutral c
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HFC221N
HFC222N
HFC223N
HFC224N
HFC225N
HFC226N
HFC227N
HFC228N
(Also used for 2-Pole, 2-Wire Applications)

12
18
23
47
153
155
365
385
3-Pole, 3-Fuse and Solid Neutral

30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HFC321N
HFC322N
HFC323N
HFC324N
HFC325N
HFC326N
HFC327N
HFC328N n
HFC221NR
HFC222NR
HFC223NR
HFC224NR
HFC225NR
HFC226NR
HFC227NR
HFC228NR
13
19
24
48
157
159
365
385
ECHS
ECHV
11/2
3
71/2
15
15
15

3
10
15
(Also used for 3-Pole, 3-Wire Applications)

14
19
25
49
158
161
375
395
HFC321NR
HFC322NR
HFC323NR
HFC324NR
HFC325NR
HFC326NR
HFC327NR
HFC328NRn
15
20
26
50
162
165
375
388
ECHS
ECHV
11/2
3
71/2
15
15
15
3
71/2
15
25
50
75
100
100
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
250
250
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50

3
10
15
3
712
15
25
50
75
100
100
712
15
30
60
125
200
250
250
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
240 Volt Fusiblea

2-Pole, 2-Fuse

Type 4/4X Stainless
30
60
100
200
3-Pole, 3-Fuse
13
19
24
48
HFC221NS
HFC222NS
HFC223NS
HFC224NS
13
19
24
48
HFC321NS
HFC322NS
HFC323NS
HFC324NS
HFC325NS
HFC326NS
HFC327NSn
Type 12 Industrial f
14
20
25
49
154
157
370
SSH
11/2
3
71/2
15
3
10
15
HFC321NJ
HFC322NJ
HFC323NJ
HFC324NJ
HFC325NJn
HFC326NJn
HFC327NJn
3
71/2
15
25
71/2
15
30
60
5
10
20
40
Hub Typeg
14
20
25
49
110
161
365
SSH
11/2
3
71/2
15
15
15
3
10
15
3
71/2
15
25
50
75
100
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
250
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
Built to order.
S
uitable for use as service equipment when neutral is
D
ual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when time-delay
fuses are installed.
HFC221NJ
HFC222NJ
HFC223NJ
HFC224NJ
Hub Typeg
(Also used for 2-Pole, 2-Wire Applications in 400800A Ratings)

Type 4/4X Stainlesse
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
Type 12 Industrial f
These
switches are CSA certified for application on

grounded B-phase systems and are suitable for
3-phase motor applications.
Hub catalogue numbers available p. 1-21
304 grade stainless steel.
Also
rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided

drain plug must be removed from the bottom of the
enclosure for type 3S/3R application.
g Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12
applications.
* Consult Siemens representant.
1-13

SAFETY
SWITCHES
Selection
Indoor Type 1
System
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Horsepower Ratings d
Outdoor Type 3R
Ship.
Catalogue
Wt. (lbs.)
Number
Std. Pkg.
480V AC
600V AC
1-Phase,
Ship. Wt.
(lbs.)
Hub Typef 2-Wire
Std. Pkg.
Std.
Max.
3-Phase,
3-Wire
1-Phase,
2-Wire
3-Phase,
3-Wire
Std.
Std.
Std.
Max.
Max.
Max.
250
Volt
DC
600
Volt
DC
600 Volt Fusible

2-Pole, 2-Fuse c
30
60
100
400
600
HFC261
HFC262
HFC263
HFC265n
HFC266n

15
20
26
149
150
480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/600 Volt DC

HFC261R
HFC262R
HFC263R
HFC265R n
HFC266R n
15
20
27
152
155
ECHS
ECHV
3
10
15
71/2
20
30
50
50
3-Pole, 3-Fuse
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
3
10
15
50
50
10
25
40
5
10
20
40
50
15
30
50
50
50
480 Volt AC/600 Volt AC/250 Volt DC a

HFC361
HFC362
HFC363
HFC364
HFC365
HFC366
HFC367
HFC368
14
19
24
48
154
157
365
383
HFC361R
HFC362R
HFC363R
HFC364R
HFC365R
HFC366R
HFC367R
HFC368R
15
20
25
49
157
161
365
385
ECHS
ECHV
3
5
5
25
71/2
20
20
50
3
5
10
25
71/2
5
15
25
50
100
150
200
200
3-Pole, 3-Fuse and Solid Neutral e

30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HFC361N
HFC362N
HFC363N
HFC364N
HFC365N
HFC366N
HFC367N
HFC368N
14
19
25
49
158
161
375
395
15
30
60
125
250
400
500
500
3
10
15
30
10
25
40
50
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
250
250
20
50
75
150
350
500
500
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
30b
50b
50

HFC361NR
HFC362NR
HFC363NR
HFC364NR
HFC365NR
HFC366NR
HFC367NR
HFC368NR
15
20
26
50
162
165
375
388
ECHS
ECHV
20
30
50
5
15
25
50
100
150
250
250
15
30
60
125
250
400
500
500
3
10
15
30
10
25
40
50
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
250
250
20
50
75
150
350
500
500
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
30b
50b
50
600 Volt Fusible g (For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches)
2-Pole, 2-Fuse c
Type 4/4X Stainlessi
30
60
100
400
600
HFC261S
HFC262S
HFC263Sn
HFC265Sn
HFC266Sn
15
20
27
153
156
Type 12 Industrial g
HFC261Jn
HFC262Jn
HFC263Jn
HFC265Jn
HFC266Jn
Hub Typefj
15
20
27
155
156
SSH
*
3
5
10
71/2
20
30
50
50
3-Pole, 3-Fuse
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
n
3
10
15
50
50
10
25
40
5
10
20
40
50
15
30
50
50
50

HFC361S
HFC362S
HFC363S
HFC364S
HFC365S
HFC366NSk
HFC367NS k
HFC368NSkn
13
20
25
49
158
161
370
388
HFC361J
HFC362J
HFC363J
HFC364J
HFC365J
HFC366J
HFC367NJ kn
HFC368NJ kn
14
20
25
49
160
161
365
388
SSH
5
15
25
50
100
150
200
250
15
30
60
125
250
400
500
500
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
250
250
20
50
75
150
350
500
500
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
30b
50b
50
Built to order.
0-200A 3-Pole switches are also rated 600V DC.

6
b 600V DC & 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires
(2) poles to be connected in series.
c Use 3-Pole switch for 200A applications.
d Dual horsepower ratings: Std.- applies when non-time
delay fuses are installed. Max.- applies when time-delay
fuses are installed.
a
1-14
e Suitable
for use as service equipment when neutral is

bonded to the enclosure, except for 1200A when used on
480V or 600V grounded wye system.
f Hub catalogue number available p.1-21
g When a neutral is required use neutral kit displayed on
p.1-19
h Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided
i 304
grade stainless steel.

type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12
applications.
k 3-Pole, 3-Fuse with solid neutral factory installed, suitable
for use as service equipment.
* Consult Siemens representative
j Hub

Selection
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Indoor Type 1
Ampere
System
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Ship.
Wt.
(lbs.)
Outdoor Type 3R
Catalogue
Number
Ship.
Wt.
(lbs.)
Horsepower Ratings
Hubd
Type
240 Volt
1-Phase
480 Volt
3-Phase
1-Phase
15
15
71/2
20
30
50
50
5
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
10
20
40
60
125
200
250
250
71/2
20
30
50
50
50
50
50
600 Volt
3-Phase
1-Phase
3-Phase
250V
DC
600V
DC
600 Volt Non-Fusible

2-Polec
30
60
100
400
600
HNFC261
HNFC262
HNFC263
HNFC265
HNFC266n
12
19
24
109
111
HNFC261R
HNFC262R
HNFC263R
HNFC265R
HNFC266R n
13
20
25
113
115
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HNFC361
HNFC362a
HNFC363a
HNFC364a
HNFC365
HNFC366
HNFC367
HNFC368
12
18
23
46
114
116
295
305
HNFC361R
HNFC362Ra
HNFC363Ra
HNFC364Ra
HNFC365R
HNFC366R
HNFC367R
HNFC368R
13
19
24
47
118
120
295
307
ECHS
ECHV
480 Volt AC / 600 Volt AC / 600 Volt DC
3-Pole
10
25
40
50
50
5
10
20
40
50
15
30
50
50
50

ECHS
ECHV
20
50
75
125
250
400
500
500
10
25
40
50
50
50
50
50
30
60
100
150
350
500
500
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
30f
50f
50
600 Volt Non-Fusibleb

2-Polec

Type 4/4X Stainlessg
Type 12 Industrial
30
60
100
400
600
HNFC261S
HNFC262S
HNFC263Sn
HNFC265Sn
HNFC266Sn
13
20
25
113
115
HNFC261J
HNFC262J
HNFC263Jn
HNFC265Jn
HNFC266Jn
13
20
25
114
120
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HNFC361S
HNFC362Sa
HNFC363Sa
HNFC364Sa
HNFC365S
HNFC366S
HNFC367S
13
19
24
47
118
120
295
HNFC361J
HNFC362Ja
HNFC363Ja
HNFC364Ja
HNFC365J
HNFC366J
HNFC367J n
HNFC368J n
13
19
24
47
119
120
295
310
Hub
Typedh
SSH
*
15
15
71/2
20
30
50
50
5
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
10
20
40
60
125
200
250
250
71/2
20
30
50
50
50
50
50
3-Pole
10
25
40
5
10
20
40
50
15
30
50
50
50
Built to order.
rated 600V DC.
When neutral is required, use neutral kit displayed on p.1-19
c Use 3-Pole switch for 200A application.
d Hub catalogue numbers available p.1-21
e Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided drain
plug must be removed from the bottom of the enclosure for
type 3S/3R application.
SSH
20
50
75
125
250
400
500
500
10
25
40
50
50
50
50
50
30
60
100
150
350
500
500
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
50
50
30f
50f
50
a Also
b
f 600V
DC horsepower rating shown requires (2) poles to be

connected in series.
grade stainless steel.
Hub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and type 12
applications.
*Consult Siemens representative.
g 304
h
1-15

Type 4/4X & 12 with Viewing Window
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Description
30600A, 3-pole 600V max. in fusible and

non-fusible versions in Type 4/4X stainless
steel and Type 12 enclosures.
All allow viewing of visible blade position.
30200A also allow viewing of indicating
type fuses.
Features
b Rugged installer-friendly enclosure
design features a gasket flange with
continuously welded seams
b Tool-free cover latches
b Two, three and four point mounting
Selection
b Metal handle with large insulating grip

features a positive stop in both ON and
OFF position
b Ground lugs provided as standard
b Type 12 enclosures are fabricated from
galvanized steel and are also rated for
3R/3S outdoor applications
b Type 4X stainless steel switches
(30200A) are 304 grade stainless steel
and are provided with stainless steel
interior parts
b The widest range of accessories
available including 200% neutrals,
gold plated PLC auxiliary contacts
and isolated ground kits
Maximum Horsepower Ratings
System
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue Number
Hub
Type
3-Pole, 3-Wire Fusible, Type 12 d

30
60
100
200
400
600
HFC361JW
HFC362JW
HFC363JW
HFC364JW
HFC365JW
HFC366JW
3-Pole, 3-Wire Non-Fusible, Type

30
60
100
200
400
HNFC361JW
HNFC362JW
HNFC363JW
HNFC364JW
HNFC365JW
Ship.
Wt. (lbs.)
HFC361SW
HFC362SW
HFC363SW
HFC364SW
HFC365SW
1-Phase, 2-Wire
480V AC
3-Phase, 3-Wire
3-Phase, 3-Wire
17
22
26
53
166
168
SSH
3
10
15
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
15
30
60
125
250
400
12
a 200A
HNFC361SW
HNFC362SW
HNFC363SW
HNFC364SW
HNFC365SW
14
21
25
51
133
SSH
*
SSH
*
SSH
*
switches are also rated 600V DC.

HP ratings listed apply only when time delay
fuses are used.

Also rated for Type 3S/3R application. Factory provided
Maximum
1-16
3-Phase, 3-Wire
3
10
15
15
15
10
20
40
60
125
20
50
75
125
250
(For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches)

17
23
28
55
168
3
10
15
15
15
23
27
54
134
250V
DC
600V
DC
Volt AC / 250 Volt DC

20
50
75
150
350
500
5
10
20
40
50
50
30
30
50
600 Volt AC / 250 Volt DC
7 2
15
30
60
125
1
15
30
60
125
250
3-Pole, 3-Wire Non-Fusible, Type 4X Stainless

30
60
100
200
400
600V AC
(For 2-Pole Applications use outside poles of 3-Pole Switches)

600
3-Pole, 3-Wire Fusible, Type 4X Stainless

30
60
100
200
400
240V AC
30
60
100
150
350
5
10
20
40
50
30
50
50

20
50
75
150
350
5
10
20
40
50
30
50
50

3
10
15
15
15
Suitable
10
20
40
60
125
for use as service equipment when neutral is

DC horsepower rating shown requires (2) poles to
be connected in series.
f 304 grade stainless steel.
* Consult Siemens representative.
600V
20
50
75
125
250
30
60
100
150
350
5
10
20
40
50
30
50
50
Type VBII 4 & 6-Pole Heavy Duty Safety Switches
Description
4 & 6-pole switches are available in
30-200A ratings and in both fusible and
non-fusible versions. 4-pole switches are
supplied with either Type 1 or Type12/3R
enclosures.
6-pole switches are available with either
Type 12/3R or Type 4X stainless steel
enclosures.
Standards
b cUL & UL listed under file #E4776

b Meets UL98 for enclosed switches
b Meets NEMA Standard KS-1 for
enclosed switches
b Meets CEC wire bending space
requirements
SAFETY
SWITCHES
4 & 6-pole Switches are commonly

used as a disconnecting means for
two-speed, two-winding motors.
Fused switches provide both over
current and short circuit protection.
Non-fusible switches normally provide
a local disconnection means for twospeed motors which are remote from
their motor controller. 4-pole switches
are also used in 3-phase, 4-wire circuits
when a switching neutral is required.
Application
Selection
Features
b Visible blade, double break switching

action
b Highly visible ON/OFF indication
b Defeatable dual cover interlock
b Padlock option in OFFposition
a
b All copper current carrying parts
b Tangenital knockouts (Type 1,
4-pole switches)
HNF663S
4-Pole Type VBII Switchesa

Indoor Type 1
System
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Horsepower Ratingsb
Type 12/3R Industriald

Ship.
Wt. (lbs.)
Catalogue
Number
Ship.
Wt. (lbs.)
Hub
Typee
240V, 2, 4W
240V 3
480V, 3
600V, 3
Std.
Max.
Std.
Max.
Std.
Max.
Std.
Max.
250V
DC
10
20
30
50
3
712
15
25
712
15
30
60
5
15
25
50
15
30
60
125
712
15
30
60
20
50
75
150
5
10
20
40
10
20
30
50
10
20
40
60
20
50
75
125
30
60
100
150
5
10
20
4
Fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC 4-Pole, 4 Fusec

30
60
100
200
36
40
43
88
HF461
HF462
HF463
HF464n
HF461J
HF462J
HF463J
HF464Jn
36
40
43
88
SSH
3
712
15
25
32
34
36
78
SSH
Non-fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC 4-Pole

30
60
100
200
32
34
36
78
HNF461
HNF462
HNF463n
HNF464n
HNF461J
HNF462J
HNF463Jn
HNF464Jn
6-Pole Type VBII Switchesad
System
Ampere
Rating
Type 12 Industrial
Type 4X Stainless Steel
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Ship.
Wt. (lbs.)
Ship.
Wt. (lbs.)
Horsepower Ratingsc
Hub
Typeef
240V 3
480V, 3
600V, 3
Std.
Max.
Std.
Max.
Std.
Max.
250V
DC
712
15
30
60
5
15
25
50
15
30
60
125
712
15
30
60
20
50
75
150
5
10
20
40
10
20
40
60
20
50
75
125
30
60
100
150
5
10
20
40
Fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC 6-Pole, 6 Fusec

30
60
100
200
HF661J
HF662J
HF663Jn
HF664Jn
37
41
44
90
HF661S
HF662S
HF663S
HF664Sn
37
41
44
90
SSH
3
712
15
25
33
35
37
80
SSH
Non-fusible 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC 6-Pole

30
60
100
200
HNF661J
HNF662J
HNF663J
HNF664J
33
35
37
80
Built

to order.
are aluminum alloy as standard. Optional copper body lugs are available.

b Dual

horsepower ratings: Std. applies when
non-time-delay fuses are installed. Max. applies
when time delay fuses are installed.
n
HNF661S
HNF662S
HNF663S
HNF664Sn
a Lugs

F
usible switches accept Class H Fuses as the standard. Class R & J fuses can also be installed and
increase the rating from 10,000 to 200,000 AIC. For
Class J, the load base is moved upward. For Class R
fuses, rejection kits are required.
d
e
f
S
upplied with factory installed ground lugs.
H
ub catalogue number available p. 1-21
H
ub type SSH are suitable for type 4/4X and
type 12 applications.
1-17
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Special Application Switches / Interlocked Receptacle Switches

Application
Description ab
Receptacle Safety Switches

provide cord connection protection
of heavy-duty portable equipment
(welders, infrared ovens, batch
feeders, portable conveyors, assembly line fixtures and tools, refrigerator
trucks, etc.) under load or fault
conditions.
Type 12 and 4/4X Receptacle Safety

Switches are available with 3-phase,
4-wire grounded type Crouse-Hinds
Arkite, pre-wired and mounted with
interlock linkage to the switch mechanism. Insertion or removal of the plug
is prevented by the interlock linkage
while the switch is in the ON position. Receptacle prevents operation of
switch if incorrect plug is inserted.
Standards
Selection
All receptacle switches with a viewing window are CSA certified under
file #24563 and UL listed under file
#E4776.
Crouse-Hinds Interlocked Receptacle Switches

Ampere
Ratingc
Type 12b
Type 4/4Xc
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Hub
Typed
Shipping
Wt. (lbs.)
Std. Pkg.
Accepts Crouse-Hinds
Arktite a Plug
Catalogue Number
D
E
600V Fusible, 3-Pole, 3-Wire with Viewing Window

30
60
100
HF361JCHW
HF362JCHW
HF363JCHW
HF361SCHW
HF362SCHW
HF363SCHW
24
30
36
SSH
APJ3485 & NPJ3485

APJ6485 & NPJ6485
APJ10487 & NPJ10487
600V Non-Fusible, 3-Pole, 3-Wire with Viewing Window

30
60
100
HNF361JCHW
HNF362JCHW
HNF363JCHW
HNF361SCHW
HNF362SCHW
HNF363SCHW
22
29
35
SSH
APJ3485 & NPJ3485

APJ6485 & NPJ6485
APJ10487 & NPJ10487
Receptacle switches dimensions

Ampere
Rating
Dimensions - Inches (mm)

A
6.22 (158)
6.34 (161)
6.80 (172)
1.52 (39)
1.52 (39)
1.52 (39)
6.1( 155)
6.4 (163)
6.5 (165)
6.0 (152)
7.4 (188)
7.6 (193)
6.22 (158)
6.34 (161)
6.80 (172)
1.52 (39)
1.52 (39)
1.52 (39)
6.1 (155)
6.4 (163)
6.5 (165)
6.0 (152)
7.4 (188)
7.6 (193)
Cr-H Type Fusible (240 & 600V)

30
60
100
14.27 (363)
16.27 (413)
21.96 (558)
7.42 (188)
9.17 (233)
9.65 (245)
9.02 (229)
11.47 291)
12.02 (305)
Cr-H Type Non-Fused (600V max.)

30
60
100
a Arktite

14.27 (363)
16.27 (413)
21.96 (558)
7.42 (188)
9.17 (233)
9.65 (245)
9.02 (229)
11.47 (291)
12.02 (305)
is a registered trademark of the CrouseHinds Company. Plugs are not sold or supplied by
Siemens.
A
lso rated Type 3R/3S.
1-18
c
d
E
nclosure is constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.
H
ub catalogue available p.1-21
General and Heavy Duty Safety Switches

Accessories
Selection
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
HT63
HR612
HNC612
Class R Fuse Clip Kits
All General Duty and Heavy Duty

Switches are field convertible to accept
Class R Fuse Clip Kits. The kits prevent
the installation of Class H and K fuses
(one kit required per 3-pole switch).
All 100-600A, General Duty and 1001200A Heavy Duty Switches are field
convertible to accept Class T fuses.
400-600A switches are field convertible
to accept Class T fuses by moving the
load base to a pre-drilled T fuse position.

Catalogue
Number Description
GSRK321
30A, 240V Kit (GD only)
HR21
30A, 240V Kit (HD only)
HR612
30A, 600V Kit/60A, 240V Kit
HR62
60A, 600V Kit
HR63
100A Kit
HR64
200A Kit
HR656
400A/600A Kit
Class J Fusing
All 30-600A, 600V and 100-600A,240V
fusible Heavy Duty Switches are field
convertible to accept Class J fuses by
moving the load base to a pre-drilled J
fuse position. All 100-600A, 240V
fusible General Duty switches can
also be field converted to accept Class J
fuses.
Internal Shield Kits
(for fusible switches)
Kits provide a clear plastic inner door
to prevent accidental contact with live
parts. Test probe holes are provided
and fuses can be replaced without
removal of kit.
NEW
Class T Fuse Adapter Kitsa

Catalogue
Number Description
HT23
100A, 240V Kit
HT63
100A, 600V Kit
HT24
200A, 240V Kit
HT64
200A, 600V Kit
TFAK72
800A, 240V Kit
TFAK75
800A, 600V Kit
TFAK82
1200A, 240V Kit
Neutral Kits
Standard Neutral Kits can be field
installed in General and Heavy Duty
Switches.
Switch
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
30 GD W410190
Switch
Wire Range
Ampere Catalogue Line & Load
Rating
Number
Lugs (Cu/Al)
100 HNC263
(2) #14 AWG - 1/0 AWG
30 HD, 60 GD HNC612
60, 100 HD, 100 GD HNC623
200 HNC64
400 & 600 HNC656
800 & 1200 HNC678
200 HNC264
(2) #6 AWG - 300 Kcmil
(2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
400 HNC656

(4) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
600 HNC678
(4) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil
Fuse Puller Kits

Fuse Puller Kits are field installable in
30-100A Type VBII Heavy Duty Switches
(one kit required per 3-pole switch).
Fuse Puller Kits

Switch
Ampere
Fuse Puller Kit
Rating
Catalogue Number
030
HP61
60A HD HSK62SSW
CSA certified 200% Neutrals are available on 100-600A Heavy Duty Switches.
They are typically used with non-linear
transformers or where increased neutral
ampacity/lug capacity is required.
200% Neutral Kits
Switch
Ampere Rating
Kit Catalogue Number
30A HD HSK61SSW
200A HD HSK64SSW
200% Neutral Kits
Neutral Kits
Internal Shield Kits
100A HD HSK63SSW
HNC264
HP61
060
HP62
100
HP63
O
ne kit per pole required.
1-19
Selection
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Accessories
HLC612
HA161234
HA261234
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts are available only for Heavy Duty Switches.
The auxiliary contacts are available in 1 normally open and
1 normally closed or 2 normally open and 2 normally closed
configurations. Siemens offers a PLC Auxiliary Switch (30200A) that has very low resistance for low voltage and current
typical in PLC circuits. All auxiliary contacts make after and
break before main switch contacts.
Auxiliary Contacts
Switch
Ampere
Aux. Switch
Catalogue
Number
HG261234
Kit Ampere
Rating
125V
250V
AC
AC
Max.
Max.
28V
DC
Max.
Horsepower
Rating
125V
250V
AC
AC
Max.
Max.
With 1 NO & 1 NC Isolated Contacts

30-200
400-1200
10
10
HA161234
HA165678
10
10
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4

30-200
400-1200
10
10
HA261234
HA265678
10
10
7
7
Low Current PLC Type with 1 NO &

1 NC Gold Plated Contacts
30-200
400-1200
10
10
HA361234
HA365678
10
10
Copper Lug Kits

Heavy duty switches are CSA approved to accept
field installed copper lug kits.
Copper Lug Kits

Switch
Copper Lug
Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Description
3060 HLC612
(9) Lugs/Kit #14-4 AWG Cu
100 HLC63s
(9) Lugs/Kit #14-1/0 AWG Cu
200 HLC64s
(9) Lugs/Kit #6 AWG-300 Kcmil Cu
4001200 HLC65678
(1) Lugs/Kit #1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil Cu

Isolated Ground Kits are available on 30-600A Heavy Duty
Switches. They are normally used on circuits with a high
content of computer or other electronic loading which
require a ground which is isolated from the building ground
and neutral circuits. The kit includes both isolated and
grounded terminals as listed below.
Equipment Ground Lug Kits are available for all General

and Heavy Duty Switches. They are field installable in
Type 1 and Type 3R Switches and are factory installed
as standard in Type 4/4X, Type 12 and also in all VBII
4&6-pole Switches.

Switch
Ampere
Catalogue
Rating
Number
30A GD GSGK60
Number of
Terminals
2
Wire Range
Per Terminal (Cu/Al)
#14-8 AWG
Switch
Ampere Catalogue Number of Terminals
Rating
Number
Isolated
Grounded
30200 HG261234 2
2
Wire Range
#14-4 AWG
60200 GD HG61234
#14-4 AWG
30200 HD
HG61234
#14-4 AWG
400 & 600
HG656
#14-2/0 AWG
400600 HG2656
#14-2/0 AWG
8001200 HG678
#6 AWG-250 Kcmil
1-20
General and Heavy Duty

Hub and Lug Data
Selection
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
SSH150
ECHV300
Interchangeable Hubs
Conduit hubs are available for Type 3R,
12 and 4 / 4X applications. 30-200A
Type 3R Switches are provided with a
conduit hub provision and a removable
hub plate on their top rainshed.
Hubs
Conduit
Size
(inches)
Catalogue
Number
Used On
Type 3R a
Cover
ECHA000
3/4
ECHA075
1
ECHA100 30A GD Only
1 1/4 ECHA125
Cover
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
ECHS000
ECHS075
ECHS100
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
2 1/2
3
3 1/2
4
ECHV250
ECHV300
4001200A
ECHV350
ECHV400
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
SSH075
SSH100
SSH125 30200A
SSH150
SSH200
Multiple Padlock Accessory
Compression Lug Mounting &

Neutral Barrier Kit
A tamper-proof device to provide for

multiple padlocking to meet OSHA or
plant requirements. Accepts up to 6
1/4 padlocks. Catalog number SL0420.
Standard Carton-12.
All Heavy Duty Switches are field

convertible for crimp type lugs.
When compression lugs are required for
30-100A switches, a neutral barrier kit is
required for 1-Phase, 3W or 3-Phase, 4W
applications. When compression lugs
are required on 400-1200A switches, lug
mounting kits are required.
Wire Ranges
(Line, Load and Standard Neutral)
Compression Lug Mounting c

and Neutral Barrier Kits

30200A

Type 4/4Xb
SL0420
ECHS200
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Lug Wire Range
Switch
Ampere Catalogue
Rating
Number Kit Description
30
HCL612 Neutral Barrier Kit
60 & 100 HCL623
30HD
Neutral Barrier Kit
30GD
#14-8 AWG (Cu/Al)f

#14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)
1 Pole, Compression
400 d HCL65
Lug Mounting Kit
60h
#14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)
100
#14-1/0 AWG (Cu/Al)
400
1 Pole, Compression
e
HCL65678
& 600

Lug Mounting Kit
200g
#6 AWG-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al)
400

(1) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) or

(2) 1/0 AWG-250 Kcmil (Cu/Al)
600


800

(3) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load

(4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral
1200

(4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) Line Load

(4) 1/0 AWG-750 Kcmil (Cu/Al) neutral
800
1 Pole, Compression
e HCL65678
& 1200

Lug Mounting Kit
Lugs
30 & 60A Switches are suitable for use
with 60 or 75C wire. 1001200A are
suitable for use with 75C rated wire.
Note: 30 thru 200A Type 3R Switches have

removable hub plates on rainshed. 400A and
larger Type 3R Switches have no provisions for
mounting hubs. Drill or punch hole in the field to
accommodate hub size desired.
a
b
c
Hubs suitable for 3R Switches.

Also suitable for Type 12 applications.
Neutral Barrier kits are required on 30-100A switches
only and only with 1-Phase / 3W or 3-Phase / 4W loads.
Compression Lugs mounting kits are required on 4001200A switches only.
d
e
f
g
Provides mounting for a single line or load lug.

rovides mounting for (2) compression lugs per phase
P
on line or load.
Line lugs are CSA approved to accept #14-6 CU/Al cable.
All 200A Heavy Duty Switches have a wire range
& wire bending space for (1) #6-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al).
ll but 60A GD are also CSAapproved for #2 Cu/Al

A
conductors.
1-21
General and Heavy Duty
Selection
SAFETY
SWITCHES
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts
VBII Safety Switch Replacement Parts

Line Base
Load Base
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Handle / Handle Guard

General Duty Heavy Duty
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Fusible 2- and 3-Pole 60-600A General Duty &30-1200A Heavy Dutyeh

30 HD240V
60 GD
60 HD240V
30 600V
60 600V
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HFB21b
HFB612b
HFB22b
HFB612b
HFB62b
HFB63b
HFB64b
HFB65cf
HFB66cf
HFB67Abf
HFB68bf
HBB21b
HBB612b
HBB22b
HBB612
HBB62
HBB63
HBB64
HBB656
HBB656
HBB67A
HBB68

HH6123g
GH223

HH6123g

HH6123g

HH6123g
GH223

HH6123g
GH24

HH64g
HH65678

HH65678g
HH65678

HH65678g

HH65678g

HH68g
HBB612
Non-Fusible 3-Pole 60-600A General Duty &30-1200A Heavy Dutyeh

30 HD
60 GD
60 HD
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HNB612b
HNB612b
HNB623b
HNB623b
HNB64b
HNB65cf
HNB66cf
HNB67Abf
HNB678f
Ampere
Rating
Mechanism Assembly Line & Load Lugs

Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

GH223

GH223
GH24
HH65678
HH65678

HH6123g
HH6123g
HH6123g
HH64g
HH65678g
HH65678g
HH65678g
HH68g
HNB623
Fusible 2- and 3-Pole 60-600A General Duty &30-1200A

Heavy Dutyeh

30 HD240V
60 GD
60 HD240V
30 600V
60 600V
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HM6123g
HM6123
HM6123g
HM6123g
HM6123g
HM6123g
HM64g
HM65
HM66
HM67A
HM678
HL612a
HL612a
HL612a
HL612a
HL612a
HL63a
HL64a
HL65678d
HL65678d
HL67Afi
i
HM6123
HFB656
HFB612
HH6123
Non-Fusible 3-Pole 60-600A General Duty &30-1200A

Heavy Dutyeh

a
b
c
d
e
30 HD
60 GD
60 HD
100
200
400
600
800
1200
HM6123g
HM6123
HM6123g
HM6123g
HM64g
HM65
HM66
HM67A
HM678
T
hree lugs included in kit.
Includes lugs.
L
ugs not included.
O
ne lug per kit.
O
ne per switch required unless otherwise noted.
1-22
HL612a
HL612a
HL612a
HL63a
HL64a
HL65678d
HL65678d
HL67Afi
i
f
g
h
O
ne required per pole.
F
or type 4/4X stainless steel switches add S to end of
catalogue number.
F
or replacement door for heavy duty switches add
DOORto end of switch catalogue number.
L
ugs included with line and load bases.

Dimensions
Safety Switch Dimensions & Shipping Weights
Height - Inches (mm)
Depth - Inches (mm)
Width - Inches (mm)
Box
A
With
Door
B
With
Rain Shed
C
Box
D
With
Handle
E
Box
F
With
Handle
G
Knockout
Diagrama
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
GFC221N
GFC222N
GFC223N
GFC224N
7.79 (202)
14.26 (362)
21.95 (558)
29.90 (760)
8.13 (207)
15.45 (392)
23.15 (588)
31.07 (789)
5.50 (140)
6.64 (169)
9.84 (245)
14.62 (391)
5.94 (151)
8.70 (221)
11.70 (297)
16.68 (424)
3.00 (76)
5.05 (128)
5.05 (128)
6.36 (162)
5.88 (149)
8.63 (219)
8.63 (219)
10.92 (277)
S1
S6
S10
S12
35j
14
23
47
GFC321N
GFC322N
GFC323N
GFC324N
7.97 (202)
14.26 (362)
21.95 (558)
29.90 (760)
8.19 (208)
15.45 (392)
23.15 (588)
31.07 (789)
7.19 (183)
6.64 (169)
9.64 (245)
14.62 (371)
7.69 (195)
8.70 (221)
11.70 (297)
16.68 (424)
3.00 (76)
5.05 (128)
5.05 (128)
6.36 (162)
5.88 (149)
8.63 (219)
8.63 (219)
10.92 (277)
S2
S6
S10
S12
24e
15
25
49
HFC221NJ
HFC221N
HFC221NR
HFC221NS
14.27
14.26
14.39
14.27
(363)
(362)
(366)
(263)
17.33 (440)
15.45 (392)
17.33 (440)
15.77 (401)
6.64
6.64
6.64
6.64
9.02 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.01(229)
5.32
5.05
5.05
5.32
(135)
(128)
(128)
(135)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S6
S8
13
12
13
13
HFC222NJ
HFC222N
HFC222NR
HFC222NS
16.22
16.26
16.26
16.22
(412)
(413)
(413)
(413)
19.31 (491)
17.46 (444)
19.31 (491)
17.77 (451)
9.17(233)
9.15 (232)
9.16 (233)
9.17 (233)
11.47
11.53
11.53
11.47
5.33
5.05
5.05
5.33
(135)
(128)
(128)
(135)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S16
S17
19
18
19
19
HFC223NJ
HFC223N
HFC223NR
21.96 (558)
21.95 (558)
21.95 (558)
23.16 (588)
23.15 (588)
23.46 (596)
9.65 (245)
9.64 (245)
9.64 (245)
12.02 (305)
12.01 (305)
11.97 (304)
5.34 (136)
5.05 (128)
5.05 (128)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
S10
S11
24
23
24
(169)
(169)
(169)
(169)
(291)
(293)
(293)
(291)
K
nocks not provided on Type 4 / 4X and 12 or on 800 & 1200A switches.
1-23
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Catalogue
Number

Dimensions

SAFETY
SWITCHES
Width - Inches (mm)
Depth - Inches (mm)

With
Handle
G
Knockout
Diagrama
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
(136)
(168)
(162)
(162)
(168)
10.46 (266)
12.58 (269)
12.33 (313)
12.33 (313)
12.58 (269)
S12
S13
24
48
47
48
48
(234)
(234)
(234)
(234)
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
S14
S15
S14
S15
153
162
155
159
14.68 (373)
14.68 (373)
360
362
9.24 (235)
9.24 (235)
14.68 (373)
14.68 (373)
352
364
(666)
(672)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(372)
S14
S15
149
155
152
153
(666)
(672)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
S14
S15
155
156
155
161
9.02 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.02 (229)
5.32
5.05
5.05
5.32
(135)
(128)
(128)
(135)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S6
S8
14
14
15
14
(233)
(232)
(233)
(233)
11.47
11.53
11.53
11.47
(291)
(293)
(293)
(291)
5.33
5.05
5.05
5.33
(135)
(128)
(128)
(135)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S16
S17
20
19
20
20
(245)
(169)
(169)
(245)
12.02 (305)
12.01 (305)
11.97 (304)
12.02 (305)
5.34
5.05
5.05
5.34
(136)
(128)
(128)
(136)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S10
S11
25
25
26
25
(371)
(371)
(371)
(371)
16.95
16.98
16.99
16.95
(431)
(431)
(432)
(431)
6.63
6.36
6.36
6.63
(168)
(162)
(162)
(168)
12.58
12.33
12.33
12.58
(269)
(313)
(313)
(269)
S12
S13
49
49
50
49
24.82
24.65
24.65
24.82
(630)
(626)
(626)
(630)
26.44
26.21
26.70
26.44
(672)
(666)
(678)
(672)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.64
14.68
14.68
14.64
(372)
(373)
(373)
(372)
S14
S14
S15
160
158
162
158
57.19 (1453)
24.82
24.64
24.64
24.82
(630)
(626)
(626)
(630)
26.44
26.21
26.70
26.44
(672)
(666)
(678)
(672)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.64
14.68
14.68
14.64
(372)
(373)
(373)
(372)
S14
S15
161
161
165
161
67.16 (1706)
67.16 (1706)
67.16 (1706)
64.74 (1721)
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
39.96
39.96
40.25
39.96
(1015)
(1015)
(1022)
(1015)
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
367
380
383
367
66.67 (1693)
66.67 (1693)
67.16 (1706)
67.74 (1721)
38.40 (975)
38.40 (975)
39.96 (1015)
40.25 (1022)
9.24 (235)
9.24 (235)
14.68 (373)
14.68 (373)
382
385
14.26 (302)
14.27 (413)
14.26 (362)
14.39 (366)
14.39 (366)
14.27 (413)
16.26 (413)
15.45 (1545)
17.33 (440)
15.45 (1545)
17.33 (440)
17.46 (443)
15.77 (401)
15.77 (401)
6.64 (169)
6.65 (245)
6.64 (169)
6.64 (169)
6.64 (169)
6.65 (245)
9.15 (232)
9.01 (229)
9.02 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.02 (229)
11.53 (313)
5.05
5.32
5.05
5.05
5.05
5.32
5.05
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
S6
S6
S8
S8
S16
14
14
14
15
15
15
19
Catalogue
Number
Box
A
With
Door
B
HFC223NS
HFC224NJ
HFC224N
HFC224NR
HFC224NS
21.96 (558)
29.96 (761)
29.90 (760)
29.90 (760)
29.96 (761)
23.16 (508)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.42 (798)
9.65 (245)
14.62 (371)
14.62 (371)
14.61 (371)
14.62 (371)
12.02
16.95
16.98
16.99
16.95
(305)
(431)
(431)
(432)
(431)
5.34
6.63
6.36
6.36
6.63
HFC225N
HFC225NR
HFC226N
HFC226NR
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1424)
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1429)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
57.19 (1453)
57.19 (1453)
24.65
24.65
24.65
24.65
26.21
26.70
26.21
26.70
(666)
(678)
(666)
(678)
9.23
9.23
9.23
9.23
HFC227N
HFC227NR
66.67 (1693)
66.67 (1693)
67.16 (1706)
67.74 (1721)
38.40 (975)
38.40 (975)
39.96 (1015)
39.96 (1015)
9.24 (235)
9.24 (235)
HFC228N
HFC228NR
66.67 (1693)
66.67 (1693)
67.16 (1706)
67.74 (1721)
38.40 (975)
38.40 (975)
39.96 (1015)
39.96 (1015)
HFC265
HFC265J
HFC265R
HFC265S
56.00 (1422)
56.14 (1426)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
57.19 (1453)
24.65
24.82
24.65
24.82
(626)
(630)
(626)
(630)
26.21
26.44
26.70
26.44
HFC266
HFC266J
HFC266R
HFC266S
56.00 (1422)
56.14 (1426)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
57.19 (1453)
24.65
24.82
24.65
24.82
(626)
(630)
(626)
(630)
26.21
26.44
26.70
26.44
HFC321NJ
HFC321N
HFC321NR
HFC321NS
14.27
14.26
14.39
14.27
(363)
(362)
(366)
(363)
17.33 (440)
15.45 (392)
17.33 (440)
15.77 (401)
6.65
6.64
6.64
6.65
(169)
(169)
(169)
(169)
HFC322NJ
HFC322N
HFC322NR
HFC322NS
16.27
16.26
16.26
16.27
(413)
(413)
(413)
(413)
19.31 (490)
17.46 (443)
19.31 (440)
17.77 (451)
9.17
9.15
9.16
9.17
HFC323NJ
HFC323N
HFC323NR
HFC323NS
21.96
21.96
21.95
21.96
(558)
(558)
(558)
(558)
23.16 (588)
23.15 (588)
23.16 (588)
23.46 (596)
9.65
6.64
6.64
9.65
HFC324NJ
HFC324N
HFC324NR
HFC324NS
29.96 (761)
29.90 (760)
29.90 (760)
21.96 (558)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.42 (798)
14.62
14.62
14.61
14.62
HFC325NJ
HFC325N
HFC325NR
HFC325NS
56.14 (1426)
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
57.19 (1453)
HFC326NJ
HFC326N
HFC326NR
HFC326NS
56.14 (1426)
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57 (1183)
56.57 (1183)
56.67 (1183)
HFC327NJ
HFC327N
HFC327NR
HFC327NS
66.67
66.67
66.67
66.67
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
HFC328N
HFC328NR
HFC361
HFC361J, JW, NJW
HFC361N
HFC361NR
HFC361R
HFC361S, SW, NSW
HFC362
With
Rain Shed
C
Box
D
With
Handle
E
Box
F
(626)
(626)
(626)
(626)
K
nocks not provided on Type 4/4X and 12 or on 800 & 1200A switches.
1-24
(235)
(235)
(235)
(235)
(128)
(135)
(128)
(128)
(128)
(135)
(128)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)

Dimensions

Width - Inches (mm)
Depth - Inches (mm)

Knockout
Diagrama
Shipping
Weight
(lbs.)
(135)
(128)
(128)
(128)
(135)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S16
S17
S17
20
19
20
20
20
5.05
5.34
5.05
5.05
5.05
5.34
(128)
(136)
(128)
(128)
(128)
(136)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S10
S10
S11
S11
24
25
25
26
25
35
(431)
(431)
(431)
(431)
(431)
(431)
6.36
6.63
6.36
6.36
6.36
6.63
(162)
(168)
(162)
(162)
(162)
(168)
12.33
12.58
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.58
(313)
(320)
(313)
(313)
(320)
(320)
S12
S12
S13
S13
48
49
49
48
49
49
26.21
26.44
26.21
26.70
26.70
26.44
(666)
(672)
(666)
(678)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(372)
S14
S14
S15
S15
154
160
158
162
157
158
(626)
(630)
(626)
(626)
(626)
(630)
26.21
26.44
26.21
26.70
26.70
26.44
(666)
(672)
(666)
(678)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(372)
S14
S14
S15
S15
157
161
161
165
161
161
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
39.96
39.96
39.96
40.25
40.25
39.96
(1015)
(1015)
(1015)
(1022)
(1022)
(1015)
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
(234)
(234)
(234)
(234)
(234)
(234)
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
380
380
382
386
382
380
67.74 (1712)
67.74 (1712)
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
39.96
39.96
40.25
40.25
(1015)
(1015)
(1022)
(1022)
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
(234)
(234)
(234)
(234)
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
383
385
388
385
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
45.19 (1148)
24.65
24.82
24.64
24.82
(626)
(630)
(626)
(630)
26.21
26.44
26.70
26.44
(666)
(672)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(372)
S14
S15
109
119
118
118
44.00 (1118)
44.14 (1121)
44.07 (1119)
44.14 (1121)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
45.19 (1148)
24.65
24.82
24.64
24.82
(626)
(630)
(626)
(630)
26.21
26.44
26.70
26.44
(666)
(672)
(678)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(372)
S14
S15
111
115
120
115
HNFC361
HNFC361J, JW
HNFC361R
HNFC361S, SW
HNFC362
HNFC362J, JW
HNFC362R
HNFC362S, SW
11.11 (282)
11.12 (282)
11.11 (282)
11.12 (282)
16.26 (413)
16.27 (413)
16.26 (413)
16.27 (413)
12.31 (313)
14.14 (359)
14.14 (339)
17.46 (444)
17.46 (444)
17.46 (444)
12.63 (321)
17.77 (451)
6.64 (169)
6.65 (169)
6.64 (169)
6.65 (169)
9.15 (232)
9.17 (232)
9.16 (233)
9.17 (233)
9.01 (229)
9.02 (229)
9.01 (229)
9.02 (229)
11.53 (293)
11.47 (291)
11.53 (293)
11.47 (291)
5.05
5.56
5.05
5.56
5.05
5.33
5.05
5.33
(128)
(141)
(128)
(141)
(128)
(135)
(128)
(135)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S7
S9
S16
S17
12
13
13
13
18
19
19
19
HNFC363
HNFC363J, JW
HNFC363R
HNFC363S, SW
21.95
21.95
21.95
21.96
(558)
(558)
(558)
(558)
23.15 (588)
23.16 (588)
23.16 (588)
23.46 (596)
9.64 (245)
9.65 (245)
9.64 (245)
9.65(245)
12.01 (305)
12.02 (305)
11.97 (304)
12.02 (305)
5.05
5.34
5.05
5.34
(128)
(136)
(128)
(136)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
10.17 (258)
10.46 (266)
S10
S11
23
24
24
24
HNFC364
HNFC364J, JW
HNFC364R
HNFC364S, SW
29.90
29.96
29.90
29.96
(760)
(761)
(760)
(761)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.07 (789)
31.42(798)
14.62(371)
14.62(371)
14.61(371)
14.62(371)
16.98
16.95
16.99
16.95
6.36
6.63
6.36
6.63
(162)
(168)
(162)
(168)
12.33
12.58
12.33
12.58
S12
S13
46
47
47
47
With
Rain Shed
C
Box
D
With
Handle
E
Box
F
Catalogue
Number
Box
A
HFC362J, JW, NJW

HFC362N
HFC362NR
HFC362R
HFC362S, SW, NSW
16.27
16.26
16.26
16.26
16.27
(413)
(413)
(413)
(413)
(413)
19.31 (490)
17.46 (444)
19.31 (490)
17.77 (457)
17.77 (457)
9.17
9.15
9.16
9.16
9.17
(233)
(232)
(233)
(233)
(233)
11.47
11.53
11.53
11.53
11.47
(291)
(293)
(293)
(293)
(291)
5.33
5.05
5.05
5.05
5.33
HFC363
HFC363J, JW, NJW
HFC363N
HFC363NR
HFC363R
HFC363S, SW, NSW
21.95
21.96
21.95
21.95
21.95
21.96
(558)
(558)
(558)
(558)
(558)
(558)
23.15
23.16
23.15
23.16
(588)
(588)
(588)
23.46 (596)
23.46 (596)
9.64
9.65
9.64
9.64
9.64
9.65
(245)
(245)
(245)
(245)
(245)
(245)
12.01 (305)
12.02 (305)
12.01 (305)
11.97 (304)
11.97 (304)
12.02 (305)
HFC364
HFC364J, JW, NJW
HFC364N
HFC364NR
HFC364R
HFC364S, SW, NSW
29.90
29.96
29.90
29.90
29.90
29.96
(760)
(761)
(760)
(760)
(760)
(761)
31.07
31.07
31.07
31.07
(789)
(789)
(789)
31.42 (798)
31.42 (798)
14.62
14.62
14.62
14.61
14.61
14.62
(371)
(371)
(371)
(371)
(371)
(371)
16.98
16.95
16.98
16.99
16.99
16.95
HFC365
HFC365J, JW, NJW
HFC365N
HFC365NR
HFC365R
HFC365S, SW, NSW
56.00 (1422)
56.14 (1426)
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1424)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57
56.57
56.57
56.57
(1437)
(1437)
(1437)
57.19 (1453)
57.19 (1453)
24.65
24.82
24.65
24.65
24.65
24.82
(626)
(630)
(626)
(626)
(626)
(630)
HFC366
HFC366J, JW, NJW
HFC366N
HFC366NR
HFC366R
HFC366NS
56.00 (1422)
56.14 (1426)
56.00 (1422)
56.07 (1424)
56.07 (1424)
56.14 (1426)
56.57
56.57
56.57
56.57
(1437)
(1437)
(1437)
57.19 (1453)
57.19 (1453)
24.64
24.82
24.65
24.65
24.65
24.82
HFC367
HFC367NJ
HFC367N
HFC367NR
HFC367R
HFC367NS
66.67
66.67
66.67
66.67
66.67
66.67
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
67.16
67.16
67.16
67.16
(1706)
(1706)
(1706)
(1706)
67.74 (1712)
67.74 (1712)
HFC368, NS, NS
HFC368N
HFC368NR
HFC368R
66.67
66.67
66.67
66.67
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
(1693)
67.16 (1706)
67.16 (1706)
HNFC265
HNFC265J
HNFC265R
HNFC265S
44.00 (1118)
44.14 (1121)
44.07 (1119)
44.14 (1121)
HNFC266
HNFC266J
HNFC266R
HNFC266S
(588)
(789)
(1437)
(1437)
(431)
(431)
(431)
(431)
(313)
(320)
(313)
(320)
K
1-25
SAFETY
SWITCHES
With
Handle
G
With
Door
B

Dimensions
SAFETY
SWITCHES

Width - Inches (mm)
Box
F
With
Handle
G
Knockout
Diagrama
Shipping
Weight
(lbs.)
26.21
26.44
26.95
26.44
(626)
(672)
(685)
(672)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
14.68
14.64
14.68
14.64
(373)
(372)
(373)
(372)
S14
S15
114
114
118
118
Box
A
HNFC365
HNFC365J, JW
HNFC365R
HNFC365S, SW
44.00 (1118)
44.14 (1121)
44.07 (1119)
44.14 (1121)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
45.19 (1148)
24.65
24.82
24.65
24.82
HNFC366
HNFC366J, S
HNFC366R
44.00 (1118)
44.14 (1121)
44.07 (1119)
44.57 (1132)
44.57 (1132)
45.19 (1148)
24.65 (626)
24.82 (630)
24.65 (626)
26.21 (626)
26.44 (672)
26.95 (685)
9.23 (234)
9.19 (233)
9.23 (234)
14.68 (373)
14.64 (372)
14.68 (373)
S14
S15
116
115
120
HNFC367, J
HNFC367R
HNFC367S
HNFC368, J
HNFC368R
54.67
54.67
54.67
54.67
54.67
55.16
55.16
55.16
55.16
55.70 (1515)
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
38.40
39.96
40.25
39.96
39.96
40.25
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
9.24
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
14.68
302
304
302
305
307
LFC11N
LFC211N
LFC211NR
LNFC222R
7.97 (202)
7.97 (202)
8.07 (205)
8.07 (205)
8.16 (207)
8.16 (207)
5.50 (140)
5.50 (140)
5.16 (131)
5.16 (131)
S2
S1
S3
S5
36j
35j
35j
35j
(1401)
(1401)
(1401)
(1401)
8.13 (207)
8.13 (207)
Type 1 or 3R
30A GD Type VBII, LFC & LNFC
Box
D
Depth - Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number
(1389)
(1389)
(1389)
(1389)
(1389)
With
Rain Shed
C
With
Handle
E
With
Door
B
(626)
(630)
(626)
(630)
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
(975)
5.94
5.94
5.94
5.94
(151)
(151)
(151)
(151)
D
E
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(373)
(137)
(137)
(137)
(137)
Type 4/4X or 12
30-200A HD Type VBII
E
B
or
C
Type 4/4X or 12
B
or
C
B
or
C
K
1-26
5.38
5.38
5.38
5.38
B
or
C
Type 1 or 3R
(235)
(235)
(235)
(235)
(235)
3.00 (76)
3.00 (76)
3.13 (80)
3.13 (80)
Type 1 or 3R
60-200A GD, 30-200A HD Type VBII
E
B
or
C
(1015)
(1022)
(1015)
(1015)
(1022)

Knockout Diagrams
Type 1 & 3R Enclosures
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Removable
plate covering
HA Type
Hub opening
(Max. 1.25 Conduit)
S1
Embossed .25 in.
mounting holes
(4 places)
S2
4 K.O.'s for
Conduit 0.5-0.75 in.
7 K.O.'s for Conduit 0.5-0.75-1 in.
S3
2 K.O.'s for
Embossed .25 in.

mounting holes
(3 places)
Embossed .25 in.

mounting holes
(3 places)
S6
2 K.O.'s for
2 0.25 dia. K.O's

Removable plate covering
HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
8 K.O.'s for Conduit

0.50, 0.75, 1 in.

0.75, 1 in.
S5
2 K.O.'s for
2 K.O.'s for
10 K.O.'s For Conduit

0.50, 0.75, 1 in.
Removable
plate covering
HA Type
Hub opening
(Max. 1.25 Conduit)
S4
Embossed .25 in.

mounting holes
(3 places)
Embossed .25 in.

mounting holes
(4 places)

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)

0.75, 1 in.
S7
S8
S9

0.75, 1 in.
0.50, 0.75, 1 in.
1 0.25 dia. K.O.
2 0.25 dia. K.O's

0.75, 1 in.
0.50, 0.75, 1 in.
1 0.25 dia. K.O.

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S12
S10
S11
1 0.25 dia. K.O.
2 0.25 dia. K.O.

0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50 in.
1, 1.25, 1.50, 2 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O.

1, 1.25, 1.50, 2 in.
0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O.
1 0.25 dia. K.O.
1 0.88 dia. K.O.

1.25, 1.50, 2.00, 2.50 in.
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.
1-27

Knockout Diagrams
Type 1 & 3R Enclosures
SAFETY
SWITCHES

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S14
S15
S13
1, 0.25, dia. K.O

2.00, 2.50, 3.00, 3.50 in.

1.25, 1.50, 2.00, 2.50 in.
1 0.88 dia K.O.
4 0.50, 0.75 dia. K.O.'s
2 0.50, 0.75 dia. K.O.'s

HS Type Hub opening
(Max. 2.5 Conduit)
S16
S17
2 0.25 dia. K.O.

1 0.25 dia. K.O.

0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O.
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.
1-28
Siemens / Speedfax
Previous folio: 1-18

2.00, 2.50, 3.00, 3.50 in.

0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25 in.
1 0.88 dia. K.O.
Special Application Safety Switches Dimension Drawings

4-Pole & 6-Pole
Dimensions
4 &6-Pole Safety Switch Dimensions

Enclosure - Inches (mm)
Catalogue Number
A B C D E F
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Mounting - Inches (mm)
Figure 1, 4-Pole Fusible and Non-fusible, Type 1

24.50 (622)
29.12 (740)
24.88 (632)
33.53 (852)
27.62 (702)
36.44 (926)
36.00 (914)
49.48 (1257)
HNF461
HF461
HNF462
HF462
HNF463
HF463
HNF464
HF464
9.53 (242)
9.53 (242)
11.50 (292)
11.50 (292)
12.18 (309)
12.18 (309)
19.12 (486)
19.12 (486)
6.09 (155)
6.09 (155)
6.09 (155)
6.09 (155)
6.09 (155)
6.09 (155)
6.42 (163)
6.42 (163)
19.00 (483)
23.50 (597)
19.00 (483)
27.50 (699)
19.36 (492)
28.11 (714)
30.88 (784)
45.50 (1130)
6.75 (171)
6.75 (171)
9.38 (238)
9.38 (238)
8.00 (203)
8.00 (203)
15.00 (381)
15.00 (381)
0.268 (7)
0.268 (7)
0.268 (7)
0.268 (7)
0.268 (7)
0.268 (7)
0.44 (11)
0.44 (11)
Figure 2, 4 &6-Pole Fusible Type 12/3R and 4X

HF461J, HF661J,
HF661S
HF462J, HF662J,
HF662S
HF463J, HF663J,
HF663S
HF464J, HF664J,
HF664S
29.50 (622)
9.53 (242)
6.48 (165)
31.65 (804)
5.47 (139)
0.27 (7)
33.53 (852)
11.50 (292)
6.48 (165)
35.69 (907)
8.00 (203)
0.27 (7)
36.44 (926)
12.18 (309)
6.48 (165)
38.67 (982)
8.47 (215)
0.27 (7)
49.48 (1257)
19.12 (486)
6.78 (172)
51.64 (1312)
13.44 (341)
0.33 (8)
Figure 2, 4 &6-Pole Non-fusible Type 12/3R and 4X

HNF461J, HNF661J,
HNF661S
HNF462J, HNF662J,
HNF662S
HNF463J, HNF663J,
HNF663S
HNF464J, HNF664J,
HNF664S
24.50 (622)
9.53 (242)
6.48 (165)
26.65 (667)
5.47 (139)
0.27 (7)
24.88 (632)
11.50 (292)
6.48 (165)
27.03 (687)
8.00 (203)
0.27 (7)
27.54 (700)
12.18 (309)
6.48 (165)
29.77 (756)
8.47 (215)
0.27 (7)
36.00 (914)
19.12 (486)
6.78 (172)
38.16 (969)
13.44 (341)
0.33 (8)
Figure 1: Type 1
Figure 2 : Type 12/3R and 4X
1-29
Safety Switches
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Cross References for SE and ID switches

System
Ampere
Rating
Indoor Type 1
Catalogue Number
VBII Cross Reference
General Duty
240 Volt Fusible
2-Pole, 2-Fuse, Service Entrance and Solid Neutral

30
60
100
200
SE221
SE222
SE223
SE224
GFC221N
GFC222N
GFC223N
GFC224N
3-Pole, 3-Fuse, Service Entrance and Solid Neutral

30
60
100
200
SE321
SE322
SE323
SE324
GFC321N
GFC322N
GFC323N
GFC324N
Indoor Type 1
System
Ampere
Rating
SE Switch
Type 12 Industrial
Type 4/4X Stainless
VBII Cross
Reference
Catalogue Number
VBII Cross
Reference
ID225
ID226
HFC225N
HFC226N
12ID221
12ID222
12ID223
12ID224
12ID225
12ID226
HFC221NJ
HFC222NJ
HFC223NJ
HFC224NJ
HFC325NJ
HFC326NJ
ID321
ID322
ID323
ID324
ID425
ID426
HFC321Na
HFC322Na
HFC323Na
HFC324Na
HFC325Na
HFC326Na
12ID321
12ID322
12ID323
12ID324
12ID425
12ID426
HFC321NJab
HFC322NJab
HFC323NJab
HFC324NJab
HFC325NJab
HFC326NJab
Catalogue Number
ID Switch
Catalogue Number VBII Cross Reference
Fusible Heavy Duty

2-Pole, 2-Fuse and Solid Neutral
30
60
100
200
400
600
240 Volt / 250 Volt DC

+
+
+
+
+
+
HNC612
HNC623
HNC623
HNC64
HNC656
HNC656
4ID221
4ID222
4ID223
4ID224
3-Pole, 3-Fuse
30
60
100
200
400
600
HFC221NS
HFC222NS
HFC223NS
HFC224NS
+
+
+
+
HNC612
HNC623
HNC623
HNC64
240 Volt / 250 Volt DC
Indoor Type 1
Ampere Catalogue
System Rating
Number
4ID321
4ID322
4ID323
4ID324
HFC321NS
HFC322NS
HFC323NS
HFC324NS
+
+
+
+
HNC612ab
HNC623ab
HNC623ab
HNC64ab
Type 12 Industrial
Type 4/4X Stainless
Type 12 with Receptacle
Type 4/4X with Receptacle
VBII Cross
Reference
Catalogue
Number
VBII Cross
Reference
Catalogue
Number
VBII Cross
Reference
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
HFC361
HFC362
HFC363
HFC364
HFC365
HFC366
12ID361
12ID362
12ID363
12ID364
12ID365
12ID366
HFC361JW
HFC362JW
HFC363JW
HFC364JW
HFC365JW
HFC366JW
4ID361
4ID362
4ID363
4ID364
HFC361SW
HFC362SW
HFC363SW
HFC364SW
12ID361W
12ID362W
12ID363W
12ID361NF
12ID362NF
12ID363NF
12ID364NF
12ID365NF
12ID366NF
HNFC361JW
HNFC362JW
HNFC363JW
HNFC364JW
HNFC365JW
HNFC366Jb
4ID361NF
4ID362NF
4ID363NF
4ID364NF
HNFC361SW
HNFC362SW
HNFC363SW
HNFC364SW
12ID361NFW
12ID362NFW
12ID363NFW
VBII Cross
Reference
VBII Cross
Reference
Fusible Heavy Duty

3-Pole, 3-Fuse
30
60
100
200
400
600
ID361
ID362
ID363
ID364
ID365
ID366

HF361JCHW
HF362JCHW
HF363JCHW
4ID361W
4ID362W
HF361SCHW
HF362SCHW
Non-Fusible Heavy Duty

3-Pole, 3-Fuse
30
60
100
200
400
600
ID361NF
ID362NF
ID363NF
ID364NF
ID365NF
ID366NF
S
olid neutral factory installed.
1-30

HNFC361
HNFC362
HNFC363
HNFC364
HNFC365
HNFC366
N
o viewing window.
HNF361JCHW
HNF362JCHW
HNF363JCHW
4ID361NFW
4ID362NFW
HNF361SCHW
HNF362SCHW
Industrial Duty Safety Switches

Replacement parts for ID switches
Neutral Kits
Selection
Auxiliary Contacts
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Aux. Contact Kit for ID Switchesa

1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
30
60
100
200
400
600
N60
N60
N100
N200
N400ID
N600ID
30
60
100
200
400
600
MSSAK116
MSSAK116
MSSAK116
MSSAK126
MSSAK216
MSSAK216
MSSAK216
MSSAK226
Fuse Puller
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Neutral Kit for

ID Switches
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Fuse Conversion Kits
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Fuse Puller
Kits for
ID switches
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Conversion Kits for HRCI-R and HRCI-T

HRCI-R 240V
HRCI-R 600V
HRCI-T 240V
HRCI-T 600V
30
60
100
200
400
600
FP2
FP2
FP3
FP4
30
60
100
200
400
600
RFAK21b
RFAK22
RFAK3
RFAK4
RFAK61
RFAK62
RFAK3
RFAK4
TFAK32
TFAK42
TFAK52
TFAK62
TFAK35
TFAK45
TFAK55
TFAK65
Lug Size Data ID switches
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Lugs per pole
Wire range Al/Cu
Wire range Al/Cu
30
60
100
200
1
1
1
1
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
400
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
600
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
(1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
Line, Load
#14 AWG - #2 AWG

#14 AWG - #2 AWG
#6 AWG - 2/0 AWG
#6 AWG - 300 Kcmil
Neutral
#14
#14
#14
#14
AWG
AWG
AWG
AWG
#2 AWG
#2 AWG
2/0 AWG
300 Kcmil
uxiliary contacts for ID safety switches are of a positive action design

A
and meet CSA standards & section 38 of the Canadian Electrical Code.
1-31
Special Application Safety Switches Dimension Drawings

Double Throw
Selection
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Description
Double throw switches are intended to transfer loads

from one power source to another. All 2 & 3-pole
double throw switches are CSA certified and both
horsepower and load break rated. Switches are rated
for use on systems up to 10,000A when protected
with Class H fuses or 200,000A when protected with
Class R or Class T fusesb. They can also be used to
connect a single source of power to either of two
loads. In this application it is necessary to field modify
fusible switches so that the fuses are on the load side
of the switching mechanism.
A cover interlock is provided on all ampere ratings. The

operating handle may be padlocked in the off position.
Fuse Capabilities of Fusible DT Switches
Amp
Rating
Fuse Type
H
30 & 60A, 240V
Std
Yes (kit)
No
No
30 & 60A, 600V
Std
Yes (kit)
No
Yesc
100 & 200A
Std
Yes (kit)
Yes (kit)
Yesc
Double Throw Switches

System
Type 1 Indoor
Number
of Poles
Voltage
Amps
Catalogue Number
Heavy Duty Fusible (30-200A) with Class H fuse spacings Less Neutralb
240
Volt AC
or
250
Volt DC
600
Volt AC,
250
Volt DC
System
Voltage
Number
of Poles
Amps
30
60
100
200
DTFC321
DTFC322
DTFC323
DTFC324
30
60
100
200
DTFC361
DTFC362
DTFC363
DTFC364
Type 1 Indoor
Type 3R Outdoor a
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Hub
Typea
Heavy Duty Non-Fusible Less Neutralb
240
Volt AC
or
250
Volt DC
600
Volt AC,
or
250
Volt DC
a
b
30
60
100
200
400
DTNFC221
DTNFC222
DTNFC323
DTNFC224
DTNFC225
DTNFC225R
30
60
100
200
400
600
DTNFC321
DTNFC322
DTNFC323
DTNFC324
DTNFC325
DTNFC326
DTNFC323R
DTNFC324R
30
60
100
200
400
600
DTNFC361
DTNFC362
DTNFC363
DTNFC364
DTNFC365
DTNFC366
DTNFC361R
DTNFC362R
DTNFC363R
DTNFC364R
DTNFC365R
DTNFC366R
H
ub catalogue number available p.1-33
A
ll Heavy Duty double throw switches with a catalogue
number starting with DT are rated 200,000 AIC max.
when protected by Class R, J or T fuses. Fuse ampere
rating must not exceed switch ampere rating.
1-32
M
ove load base.
* Consult Siemens representative, 400A and larger
Switches do not have hub provisions.
ECHS
*
ECHS
Safety Switches
Double Throw
Selection
Accessories, Lug Data and Horsepower Ratings

Accessories 2 and 3-Pole Switches Type DT Onlya
30
60 & 100A
200A
400 & 600A
Neutral Kits
HNC612
HNC263
HNC264
HNC678
Equipment Ground Kit
30-200A
(2) #14-4 AWG
400 & 600A (4) #14-2/0
HG61234
HG656
Auxiliary Contacts (HD Only)

(two required per switch)b
30-200A
30-200A
400-600A
400-600A
HA161234
HA261234
HA165678
HA265678

(two required per switch)
30A, 240V Kit

30A, 600V Kit and 60A, 240V Kit
60A, 600V Kit
100A Kit
200A Kit
HR21
HR612
HR62
HR63
HR64

(two required per pole)
100A,
100A,
200A,
200A,
HT23
HT63
HT24
HT64
Type 3R Hubs (20-200A)
For
For
For
For
For
For
240V
600V
240V
600V
with (1) NO & (1) NC contact

Kit
Kit
Kit
Kit
3/4 Conduit
1 Conduit
1 1/4 Conduit
1 1/2 Conduit
2 Conduit
2 1/2 Conduit
30-200A 2 & 3-Pole Switches

Switch
Ampere
Rating
Wire Range (Cu/Al)

DT VBII Design
Line, Load and Neutral
0 30
(1) #146
060
(1) #142
100
(1) #141/0 AWG
200
(1) #6250 kcmil
400-600A 2 & 3-Pole Switches

Switch
Ampere
Rating
Wire Range (Cu/Al)

DT VBII Design
Line, Load and Neutral
400

600
(1) 1/0 AWG750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG250 kcmil
(2) 1/0 AWG500 kcmil
ECHS075
ECHS100
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Fused
Replacement Parts 2 and 3-Pole Switches Only a
3-Phase AC
Ampere 1-Phase AC
250V
Rating 240V 240V 480V 600V DC
0 30
0 60
100
200
400
600
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Catalogue
Number
Description
Wire Ranges (Line, Load

and Neutral) per CEC
Requirements
03
10
15
15

071/2
15
30
60
125
125
015
030
060
125
125

05
10
15
15

10
20
40
60
125
020
030
05
050
060 10
075 100 20
125
150
40
250
350
50
020
05
050 10
075 20
150
40
125
50

50
Catalogue
Description
Number
Type 1, 3R Replacement Handle
Replacement Handle
30-200A
400-600A
HHD61234
HHD656
Non-Fused
0
30
0
60

100

200
400-600
F
or DT VBII Type switches only.
O
ne aux. required for normal and one required for
emergency switch line base.
1-33
Safety Switches

Dimensions
VBII Design Double Throw Dimensions

Enclosure dimensions - Inches (mm)
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Catalogue Number
6.09 (155)
19.00 (483)
6.75 (171)
0.268 (7)
Figure 1 (30-600A Type 1 & 3R)

24.50 (622)
DTNFC221, DTNFC321, DTNFC361, DTNFC361R

DTFC321, DTFC321R, DTFC361
29.12 (740)
9.53 (242)
6.09 (155)
23.50 (597)
6.75 (171)
0.268 (7)
DTNFC222, DTNFC322, DTNFC362, DTNFC362R
24.88 (632)
11.50 (292)
6.09 (155)
19.00 (483)
9.38 (238)
0.268 (7)
DTFC322, DTFC362
33.45 (852)
11.50 (292)
6.09 (155)
27.50 (699)
9.38 (238)
0.268 (7)
DTNFC223, DTNFC323, DTNFC323R, DTNFC363, DTNFC363R
27.62 (702)
12.18 (309)
6.09 (155)
19.36 (492)
8.00 (203)
0.268 (7)
DTFC323, DTFC363
36.44 (926)
12.18 (309)
6.09 (155)
28.11 (714)
8.00 (203)
0.268 (7)
DTNFC224, DTNFC224R, DTNFC324, DTNFC324R, DTNFC364, DTNFC364R
36.00 (914)
19.12 (486)
6.42 (163)
31.00 (787)
15.00 (381)
0.44 (11)
DTFC324, DTFC364
49.44 (1256)
19.12 (486)
6.42 (163)
44.50 (1130)
15.00 (381)
0.44 (11)
DTNFC225, DTNFC225R, DTNFC325, DTNFC365, DTNFC365R
57.71 (1466)
28.22 (717)
9.44 (240)
49.75 (1264)
16.00 (406)
0.56 (14)
DTNFC326, DTNFC366, DTNFC366R
57.71 (1466)
28.22 (717)
9.44 (240)
49.75 (1264)
16.00 (406)
0.56 (14)
CL
(6) F dia. mounting holes (30-200A)

CL
Figure 1
Type 1 & 3Ra
Drip hood not shown but provided on Type 3R enclosures.
1-34

C
9.53 (242)
Enclosed Switches
Rotary Disconnect Switches in Non-Metallic Enclosures d
Description
16125A non-fusible switches are
available in fiberglass reinforced
polycarbonate enclosures which
are UL approved as Type 12 & 4X and
for either indoor or outdoor use.
All are horsepower and load break
rated. All are panel mounted and are
either supplied with factory installed
aux. contacts or will accept contact
kits. All are compact in size while providing ample wiring space for copper
line & load conductors.

b 16125A, Non-Fusible
b 600VAC max. rated (except catalogue no. HNF3100CX is rated
480VAC max.)
b Available in both Type 12 and 4X
non-metallic enclosures
b Both screw and hinged cover
designs available
b Listed and marked suitable for use
as motor disconnect per NEC
Section 430-109
b Screw cover switches are UL listed
under File No. E47705 and are CSA
certified under File No. 249236
b IEC 60947-3 rated and CE marked
(enclosures are IP65 rated)
b Hinged door switches are ULlisted
for multiple line and load conductors
per phase in 30100A ratings. They
are UL & cUL listed under File No.
E191706
Catalogue Number
Ampere

Rating
3 Pole, 3 Wire
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Siemens Rotary Disconnect switches

are ideally suited for use as in sight
disconnects for motor loads and other
electrical equipment which is remotely
located from its branch circuit protective
device. All are supplied in non-metallic
enclosures which are UL & cUL or
CSA approved for a wide range of both
indoor and outdoor environments. All
meet UL508 requirements.
Siemens Enclosed Rotary

Disconnect Switches
Application
Selection
3 Pole, 3 Wire with (1) NO

& (1) NC Aux. Contactgh
b HP rated
b Rotary handles are available in
black, red, and yellow and in pistol
grip designs
b 1663A screw cover switches have
factory installed ground bars. All
hinge cover switches accept
ground lug kits
b Screw cover switches are
provided with knockouts
b Padlockable in OFFposition
with up to (3) padlocks
Horsepower Ratings
Shipping
240V AC
Weight (lbs.) 1 Phase
3 Phase
480V AC
3 Phase
600V AC
3 Phase
Non-Fusible, Type 1, 4X & 12Ka with Screw Cover and Black Rotary Handle 600V AC Max.d
16
25
30
30
30
63
100
125
3LD2064-0TB51-0US2
3LD2164-0TB51-0US2
3LD2264-0TB51-0US2

3LD2565-0TB51-0US2
3LD2766-0TB51-0US2
3LD2866-0TB51-0US2
3LD2064-1GP51-0US2
3LD2164-1GP51-0US2
3LD2264-1GP51-0US2

3LD2264-1TS51-0US2f

3LD2264-2TW51-0US2g
3LD2565-1GP51-0US2
3LD2766-1GP51-0US2

3LD2866-1GP51-0US2
1
112 3 712 10
1 3 712 10 15
1 3 712 15 20
1 3 712 15 20
1 3 712 15 20
3 10 15 40 50
6 30 60 75
6 40 75 100
Non-Fusible, Type 1, 4X & 12Ka with Screw Cover and Red and Yellow Rotary Handle 600V AC Max.d
16
25
30
30
30
63
100
125
3LD2064-0TB53-0US2
3LD2164-0TB53-0US2
3LD2264-0TB53-0US2

3LD2565-0TB53-0US2
3LD2766-0TB53-0US2
3LD2866-0TB53-0US2
3LD2064-1GP53-0US2

3LD2164-1GP53-0US2

3LD2264-1GP53-0US2

3LD2264-1TS53-0US2f

3LD2264-2TW53-0US2g
3LD2565-1GP53-0US2

3LD2766-1GP53-0US2

3LD2866-1GP53-0US2
1 112 3 712 10
1 3 712 10 15
1 3 712 15 20
1 3 712 15 20
1 3 712 15 20
3 10 15 40 50
6 30 60 75
6 40 75 100
Non-Fusible, Type 4X c with Hinged Door and Black Pistol Grip Rotary Handle 480V AC Max. bd
30
60
100
a Approved
HNF3030CX

HNF3060CX

HNF3100CX

for both indoor and outdoor use. No cover

interlock provided.
b 30 and 60A switches are also rated 600V AC.
c Also rated as Type 12 and UL approved for both indoor
and outdoor use. Defeatable cover interlock provided.
d Screw
4 3 712 15 20
4 10 15 40 50
5 15 25 50
cover enclosures are constructed from Makrolon

9425. Hinged cover enclosures are constructed from
fiberglass reinforced polycarbonate.
e Switch is supplied with (2) NOand no NC aux. contacts.
f Switch
is supplied with (4) NOand no NC aux. contacts.

Ground bar is not provided or available.
contacts break about 3 Ms before and make about
3 Ms after main switch contacts.
h 6P, 25A, switch with 1 NO & 1 NC aux. contacts and a
black operating handle is also available. Order catalogue
number 3LD2165-4VD51.
g Aux.
1-35
Enclosed Switches
Rotary Disconnect Switches
1
SAFETY
SWITCHES
Catalogue
Number
Amprere
Rating
Fig.
No.
3LD20643LD21643LD22643LD25653LD27663LD2866-
16
25
30
63
100
125
HNF3030CX
HNF3060CX
HNF3100CX
30
60
100
3LD2 Type Switches c
5.52 (140)d
5.52 (140)d
5.52 (140)d
6.93 (176)e
11.90 (302)
11.90 (302)
3.94 (100)
3.94 (100)
3.94 (100)
5.75 (146)
8.35 (212)
8.35 (212)
3.19 (81)
3.19 (81)
3.19 (81)
4.10 (104)
5.36 (136)
5.36 (136)
4.57 (116)
4.57 (116)
4.57 (116)
5.87 (149)
7.13 (181)
7.13 (181)
7.87 (200)
11.77 (299)
11.77 (299)
7.87 (200)
7.87 (200)
7.87 (200)
5.20 (132)
5.20 (132)
5.20 (132)
7.29 (185)
7.29 (185)
7.29 (185)
Note: 3LD2 Type switches only have top and bottom end KOs as follows:
16-30A - 1/2 & 3/4, 63A - 3/4 & 1, 100 & 25A - 1 & 1 1/4
Figure 1
Selection
Wire ranges 60/75C Cu Only
Enclosed Disconnect Switch Dimensions
16 Amps
2530 Amps
63 Amps
100125 Amps
(1) #18-10 AWG

(1) #14-10 AWG
(1) #14-6 AWG
(1) #12-1 AWG
HNF Type Switches

30 Amps

(1) #14-#10 AWG Solid

(1) #14-#4 AWG Stranded
Up to (4) #12 AWG Solid
Up to (3) #12 AWG Stranded
with (1) #10 AWG Stranded

60 & 100 Amps

(1) #14-#10 AWG Solid

(1) #14-#1 AWG Stranded
(2) #6 AWG Stranded
Figure 2
D
C
UL and cUL Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

Short Circuit Withstand Rating and Fuse Class
With Line Side Fusing
Ampere 5 kA at
Rating 600V Max
10 kA at
18 kA at
600V Max 480V Max
With Load Side Fusing a

5 kA at
480V Max
18 kA at
480V Max
3LD2 Type Switchesh

16

RK5

(50A Max)
RK5
25 & 30

(80A Max)
RK5

(175A Max)
63

100 &

125
RK5

(200A Max)
HNF Type Switches

Ferraz
Shawmut

A50P or lower
H, K & RK5
H, K & RK5
30
let-through

(100A Max)
(30A Max)

semiconductor

fuses

(60A Max)
J, T & CC

(100A Max) Ferraz
H, K & RK5

60

Shawmut
(150A Max)

A50P or lower

H,
K & RK5
f

let-through

(60A Max)

semiconductor
f
100
fuses

(100A Max)
a For
use as supplemental protection on the load side of the branch circuit over current
protective device.
b Ground lug kit has two lugs for #14-4 Cu/Al wire.
c Factory installed ground lugs supplied as follows: 16-30A #14-10 Cu, 63A #14-8 Cu.
Ground lug not provided and is not available on catalogue numbers 3LD2264-2TW510US2 and 3LD2264-2TW53-0US2.
d 6.38 inches(162mm) high including mounting feet.
e 7.85 inches(199mm) high including mounting feet.
f 60 & 100A HNF switches are rated 10kA at 480V max. with line side Class H, K & RK5
150A max. fuses.
g Wire range (1) #14-2 AWG 60/75 C Cu only.
h 16-63A 3LD switches are also rated 5kA at 600VAC max when protected by a 3RV type
MSP of the same or lesser ampere rating.
1-36
.5
IEC Fuse and Withstand Ratings

Ampere Rating
gG Fuse Size
Short Circuit Rating
3LD2 Screw Cover Switches

16
20A
5k Arms
25
25A
10k Arms
32
50A
10k Arms
63
63A
15k Arms
100
100A
20k Arms
125
125A
20k Arms
HNF Hinged Cover Switches

30
63A
10k Arms
60
100A
10k Arms
100
100A
10k Arms
Accessories
Switch
Ampere Catalogue
Rating
Number
3LD2 Type Switches
Description
1630A
3LD9220-2C
Neutral Kit
63A
3LD9250-2CA
Neutral Kit
100125A
3LD9280-2C
Neutral Kit
HNF Type Switches

30100A
GSGK60
Ground Lug Kit b
30A
LBRA1
Auxiliary Contact Kit (1 NO-1 NC)
60100A
LBRA2
Auxiliary Contact Kit (1 NO-1 NC)
30100A
HF63CX g
Neutral Kit
Disconnect Switches
Compact Non-Fusible Rotary and Toggle
Selection
Features
1
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
b 16250 Ampere, to 100 hp, 480V & 600V

b Rotary and Toggle actuation models
b LBRType switches are padlockable in
the OFF position and are cUL & UL listed
under File No. E191706 as manual motor
controllers per UL Standard UL508
b 3LD2 Type switches are padlockable in
the OFF position and are CSA certified
under file No. 203576 and are UL listed
under file No. E47705
b Base, DIN-rail and door mounting
b Multiple conductor, distribution terminal
type rating LBR & LBT Type (40A -100A
only)
Type LBR Rotary Switches
Type LBT Toggle Switches
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings
b IEC 947-1 rated, CE marked

b Listed and marked suitable as motor
disconnect per NEC Section 430-109
Switch Rating
& Type
Max. Line Side Fuse Rating
5kA with Line Side Class H, K, or

RK5 Fuses
Application
25 & 32A 3LD2 80A Max. at 600V AC Max.
Siemens Load Break Switches are listed

as manual motor controllers and are
suitable as motor disconnects. They are
load break rated and act as enclosure
discon-nects when short circuit protection
is provided upstream of the switch. If
upstream over current protection is not
provided, use a Siemens fusible Type VBII,
CFS or MCS Disconnect Switch.
63A 3LD2
Base/DIN Rail Mounted Switches

(Rotary or Toggle Type) Order
individual components as follows:

Toggle Order the LBT switch required
and a toggle switch cover plate if
needed.
Rotary, Base Mounted with Door
Mounted Handle Order LBR
switch + door mounted handle + shaft +
any accessories.
Rotary, Base Mounted with Direct
Mounted Handle Order LBR
switch + direct mounted handle.
Door Mounted Switches (Rotary

Type Only) Order either complete
3LD2 assemblies or individual LBR

components as follows:
Complete Assemblies include switch,
handle, and shaft. Certain 25 and 32A
assemblies are also available with facto-ry
installed neutral blocks and/or aux.
contacts. These accessories can also
be ordered as field installed kits.
Individual Components are ordered as
follows:
25A LBR3025D switch + LBRH3 or 4
handle.
40100A LBR switch + LBRH3 or 4
handle + LBRD1.
Notes: (LBR Type switches only)
1. Aux contacts are available as field
installed kits on 25A units only.
2. Lugs on 25A units face to the rear and
lugs on 40100A units face toward the
front.
a Includes
auxiliary contacts (1 NO and 1 NC).

are IP65 rated and are also UL Listed for Type 1,
4X and 12 applications.
b Handles
10kA with Line Side Class H, K, or

RK5 Fusesd
3LD2254-0TK51
Ordering Information
175A Max. at 600V AC Max.
25A LBR
40A, 4P
LBR & LBT
40 & 60A, 3P
LBR & LBT
80 & 100A
LBR & LBT
18kA with Line Side Class J, T, or

CC Fuses
40100A, 3P
LBR & LBT
Note: 3LD2 switches are also rated 5kA at 600V

AC Max. when protected by a 3RV motor starter
with a FLA rating equal to or less than the switch
ampere rating.
Door Mounted Complete Assemblies

Operator, Shaft, & Switch) 600V AC Max.b
Shaft Mounted
4 Hole Mounted

Catalogue Numberc

Catalogue Numberc
AC Horsepower Ratings
Number Ampere
of Poles Rating
3LD2003-1TP53a
3LD2154-0TK
3LD2154-1TP
3LD2154-1TL
3LD2154-2EP
3LD2103-0TK
3
3LD2103-1TP

3a

3LD2103-1TL

3+N
3LD2103-2EP

3 + Na
3LD2254-0TK
3LD2254-1TL
3LD2555-0TK

3LD2203-0TK
3

3LD2203-1TL

3+N
3LD2504-0TK

3
3LD2704-0TK

3
3LD2804-0TK

3
120V 240V 480V 600V

1 1 3 3 3
16 12 112 3
712 10
25
3 71/2 10 15
32
3 10 20 20
10 15 40 50
30 60 75
40 75 100
63
100
125
c Add
51 for a black handle or 53 for a red &yellow handle

to the end of the catalogue number.
3LD2 switches are rated 10kA when protected by
200A Max. Class RK5 fuses.
d 100-250A
Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue
1-37
Disconnect Switches
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Selection
3LD Type Base Mounted Complete Assemblies

(Operator, Shaft, & Switch) 600V AC Max.b
Handle mountingb
Shaft
4 Hole
4 Hole
(center hole)
(no defeat)
(with defeat)
120V 240V
480V 600V
Number Ampere
Catalogue
Catalogue
Catalogue
of Poles Rating 1
1 3 3
3
Number
Number
Number
3LD2013-0TK5
3LD2017-0TK1 3
16
1
3
7
10
3LD2017-1TL1 3 + N
3LD2144-0TK5 3LD2113-0TK5
3
25
2
3 7
10
15
3LD2144-1TL5 3LD2113-1TL5
3+N
3LD2244-0TK5 3LD2213-0TK5
3LD2217-0TK1 3
32
2
3 10
20
20
3LD2244-1TL53 3LD2213-1TL53 3LD2217-1TL1 3 + N
3LD2545-0TK5 3LD2514-0TK5
3LD2517-0TK1 3
63
3 10 15
40
50
3LD2517-1TL1 3 + N
3LD2714-0TK5
3
100
30
60
75
Shaft length allows
3LD2814-0TK5
3 surface to the
125
of40
Note:
a maximum depth
from switch mounting
outside of
the cover
15.2575
on 25 100
&
of 15.75 on 63-125A
32A switches and
switches. 23.6 max
3LD2318-0TK1
3 for 160 & 250 switches.
160
40
75
75
3LD2318-1TK1
3+N
3LD2418-0TK1
3
250
50 100
75
3LD2418-1TK1
3+N
3LD2217-0TK13
Accessories for Front Mounted 3LD2 Switches

Catalogue
Number
Description
3LD9200-5Bc
1 NO, 1 NC Aux. Contact
3LD9200-5BFc
1 NO, 1 NC Aux. with Gold Plated Contacts
3LD9220-2B
Neutral/Ground Terminal
3LD9250-2BA
3LD9280-2B
3LD9220-0B
4th Pole (leading ON, lagging OFF)
3LD9250-0BA
3LD9280-0B
3LD9224-1Ba
Black Handle (4 hole mtg.)
3LD9284-1Ba
Black Handle (4 hole mtg.)
3LD9224-3Ba
Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg.)
3LD9284-3Ba
Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg.)
3LD9224-1Da
Black Handle (shaft mtg.)d
3LD9284-1Da
Black Handle (shaft mtg.)d
3LD9224-3Da
Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)d
3LD9284-3Da
Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)d
a
3LD9221-2A
Terminal Cover 1P (Pack of 4)
3LD9221-0Aa
a
3LD9251-0A
Switches
Used With
25-125A
25-125A
25 & 32A
63A
100 & 125A
25 & 32A
63A
100 & 125A
25 & 32A
63-125A
25 & 32A
63-125A
25 & 32A
63-125A
25 & 32A
63-125A
3LD9220-2C
25 & 32A
25 & 32A
63A
Accessories for Base Mounted 3LD2 Switches

3LD9200-5Cc
3LD9200-5CFc
1 NO, 1 NC Aux. Contact

1 NO, 1 NC Aux. with Gold Plated Contacts
25-250A
25-250A
3LD9220-2C
3LD9250-2CA
3LD9280-2C
3LD9240-2C
Neutral/Ground
Neutral/Ground
Neutral/Ground
Neutral/Ground
25 & 32A
63A
100 & 125A
160 & 250A
3LD9220-0C
3LD9250-0CA
3LD9280-0C
3LD9240-0C
4th
4th
4th
4th
3LD9224-1Ba
3LD9284-1Ba
3LD9224-3Ba
3LD9284-3Ba
Black Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat)

Black Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat)
Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat)
Red/Yellow Handle (4 hole mtg. no defeat)
25 & 32A
63-125A
25 & 32A
63-125A
3LD9224-1Da
3LD9284-1Da
3LD9224-3Da
3LD9284-3Da
Black Handle (shaft mtg.)

Black Handle (shaft mtg.)
Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)
Red/Yellow Handle (shaft mtg.)
25 & 32A
63-125A
25 & 32A
63-125A

25 & 32A
25 & 32A
63A
3LD9221-2Aa
3LD9221-0Aa
3LD9251-0Aa
a Handles
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
(leading
(leading
(leading
(leading
ON,
ON,
ON,
ON,
and line side terminal covers are supplied as

standard with 3LD2 switches.
suffix 1 for a black or 3 for a red & yellow handle to the
catalogue number (except 3LD2244-1TL53 & 3LD22131TL53). Handles are IP65 rated and are also listed by UL for
Type 1, 4X and 12 applications.
b Add
1-38
lagging
lagging
lagging
lagging
OFF)
OFF)
OFF)
OFF)
c Aux.
25 & 32A
63A
100 & 125A
160 & 250A
contacts break about 30 Ms before and make about 3

Ms after main switch contacts.
Ratings
10A
at 120V AC

6A
at 240V AC

1.4A
at 480V AC
3LD9251-0A
d Can
be used as replacement handles on enclosed 3LD2

switches.
mounted switches with direct mount handles
are also available (3LD2330-0TK1 _b rated 160A and
3LD2430-0TK1_b rated 250).
e Base
Disconnect Switches
Selection
Individual Components
Rotary and Toggle Switches

Catalogue Switch No. of
Number Type Poles
LBR3025 Rotary 3
LBR3025Df Rotary 3
LBR3040g Rotary 3
LBR3060g Rotary 3
LBR3080g Rotary 3
LBR3100g Rotary 3
LBR4040 Rotary 4
LBT3040 Toggle 3
LBT3060 Toggle 3
LBT3080 Toggle 3
LBT3100 Toggle 3
LBT4040 Toggle 4
Ampere
Rating
25
25
40
60
80
100
40
40
60
80
100
40
Max
AC 115V 240V
480V 600V
Volt 1 1 3 3 3
480 34 2 5 10
480 34 2 5 10
600 2
3 712 20 25
480 2
5 10 25
600 3 10 20 40
50
480 5 15 25 50
480 2
3 712 20
600 2
3 712 20 25
480 2
5 10 25
600 3 10 20 40
50
480 5 15 25 50
480 2
3 712 20
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Standard Duty Rotary

Switch Door Handles
Heavy Duty Rotary

Switch Door Handle
LBR Type Handles

Catalogue
Number
Colour
Cover
Interlock
Supplied
Padlockable
ON/OFF
O/I, ON/OFF
O/I, ON/OFF
Black
Black
Red/Yel
No
Yesa
Yesa
No
Yes
Yes
Door
Door
O/I, ON/OFF
O/I, ON/OFF
Black
Red/Yel
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
1
1
1
Direct Mount
Direct Mount
Direct Mount
Direct Mount
O/I
O/I
O/I
O/I
Black
Black
Black
Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1, 3R, 12
1, 3R, 12
Door
Door
O/I, ON/OFF
O/I, ON/OFF
Black
Red/Yel
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Used on
Rotary Switches
NEMA
Type
Mounting
Marking
LBRH2b
LBRH3b
LBRH4b
All
All
All
1
1, 3R, 12, 4X
1, 3R, 12, 4X
Door
Door
Door
LBRH9b
LBRH10b
All (Pistol Grip Type)

All (Pistol Grip Type)
1, 3R, 12, 4X
1, 3R, 12, 4X
LBRH5
LBRH6
LBRH7
LBRH8
25 Amps
3-Pole, 40-60 Amps
3-Pole, 80-100 Amps
4-Pole, 40-60 Amps
All
All
Standard Duty
Heavy Duty
CFSH10B12
CFSH10R12
LBR Type Rotary Shafts

Catalogue Number
Length - In. (mm)
For Standard Duty Handles

LBRS040
LBRS050
LBRS055
LBRS080
LBRS120
LBRS180
LBRS305
1.57 (40)
1.97 (50)
2.17 (55
3.15 (80)
4.72 (120)
7.09 (180)
12.00 (305)
Rotary Shafts
For Heavy Duty Handles

CFSS5200H
CFSS5400H
Used on
Toggle Switches
LBT3040, LBT3060
LBT3080, LBT3100
LBT4040
25 Amp, 4th Pole

Catalogue Number
LBRP25
LBRP25D
LBR3080,
cd
LBR3100 LBRA2
a No
Contact Arrangement
1 NO & 1 NC
1 NO & 1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
with common point
1 NO/1 NC
with common point
cover interlock defeat mechanism provided. To eliminate cover interlock, order additional catalogue number
LBRDC1.
b LBRH2 is IP54 rated. All others are IP65.
c Ratings
15.1A resistive at 250V AC max.
.5A at 125V DC
.25A at 250V DC
.5 HP at 250V AC max.
Catalogue Number
LBTCP1
LBTCP2
LBTCP3
LBR Type Rotary Switch Door Mounting

Kit (For use with LBRH3 & LBRH4 only)
Auxiliary Switch Kits

Used on
Catalogue
Rotary Switch
Number
LBR3025
LBRA25 cd
LBR3025D
LBRA25D cd
LBR3040,
cd
LBR3060 LBRA1
Toggle Switch Cover

Plates
LBR Type Toggle Switch Cover Plate
7.9 (200)
15.7 (400)
Used on Catalogue No
LBR3025
LBR3025D
Rotary Switch Direct

Mount Handles
Used on
Rotary Switch
Catalogue Number
40-100 Amps
LBRD1
LBR/LBT Neutral Kit e

Used with
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
All
HF63CX
d Auxiliary
f Only
e Lug
switch contacts break about 30 Ms before and

make about 3 Ms after main switch contacts.
wire ranges:
HF63CX (1) #14-2 AWG 60/75C Cu only
g For
door mountable and for use with LBRH3 &

4 handles only.
door mounting of 40100A LBR switches use
door mounting kit LBRD1 & LBRH3 or 4 handle.
1-39
Disconnect Switches
Dimensions
LBR3025
LBR 40-100 Amps & 3LD2 16-250A
Dimension J Minimum Deptha - Inches (mm)
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Dimension Drawings and Wire Ranges
Switch
Dimension J
LBR 40-100A
3.35 (85)
3LD2 25 & 32A Front Shaft Mounted

3LD2 63 Front Shaft Mounted
3LD2 16-32A Front 4-hole Mounted
3LD2 63A Front 4-hole Mounted
3LD2 100 & 125A Front 4-hole Mounted
3.07 (78)
3.35 (85)
2.13 (54)
2.48 (63)
2.56 (65)
3LD2 25 & 32A Base w/shaft Mtg. Handle

3LD2 63A Base w/shaft Mtg. Handle
3LD2 16-32A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle
3LD2 63A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle
3LD2 100-250A Base w/4-hole Mtg. Handle
6.46 (164)
6.77 (172)
5.59 (142)
5.99 (152)
6.07 (154)
C
A
E
F
0.16 in.
(4 mm)
Wire Ranges 60/75C Cu only

25 Amps LBR

(1) #14 - #10 AWG Solid

(1) #14 - #8 AWG Stranded
(1) #14 - #10 AWG Solid

UP to (4) #12 AWG Solid
with (1) #10 AWG Stranded

40 & 60 Amps

LBR & LBT

80 & 100 Amps
LBR & LBT

(1) #14 - #10 AWG Solid

(2) #6 AWG Stranded
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
16A, 3LD20
25A, 3LD21
32A, 3LD22
63A, 3LD25
100, 125A, 3LD2
160, 250A, 3LD2
Shaft Mounted
3LD2 Handle Cutout
0.31 in.
(8 mm)
Drilling
Pattern
.125
(3.2)
LBT Toggle 40-100 Amps

3.00 in.
(76 mm)
Minimum Depth
.95
(24.1)
.877
(22.5)
0.16 in.
(4 mm)
#18-10 AWG
#14-8 AWG
#14-8 AWG
#14-6 AWG
#12-1 AWG
#1-400 MCM
H
0.31 in.
(8 mm)
Catalogue No.
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary Front
Rotary Front
Rotary Front
Rotary Front
Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
LBR3040
LBR3060
LBR3080
LBR3100
LBR4040
3LD20
3LD21 & 2
3LD25
3LD27 & 8
2.00
2.00
2.09
2.09
2.42
1.89
1.81
2.36
2.40
(51)
(51)
(53)
(53)
(61)
(48)
(46)
(60)
(61)
2.72
2.72
3.32
3.32
2.72
1.97
2.17
2.52
3.27
(69)
(69)
(84)
(84)
(69)
(50)
(55)
(64)
(83)
2.72
2.72
2.92
2.92
2.72
1.97
1.97
2.32
2.40
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
3LD20
3LD21 & 2
3LD25
3LD27 & 8
3LD23 & 4
1.89
1.81
2.36
2.80
4.41
(48)
(46)
(60)
(71)
(112)
1.97
2.17
2.52
3.27
5.83
(50)
(55)
(64)
(83)
(148)
2.29 (58)
2.29 (58)
2.68 (68)
2.76 (70)
4.10 (104)
LBT3040
LBT3060
LBT3080
LBT3100
LBT4040
2.00
2.00
2.09
2.09
2.42
(51)
(51)
(53)
(53)
(61)
2.72
2.72
3.32
3.32
2.72
(69)
(69)
(84)
(84)
(69)
2.75
2.75
2.90
2.90
2.75
1.78
1.78
1.97
1.97
2.28
a Depth
from outside of cover to back of switch.
1-40
Type
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle
Switch Switch
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
b Handle
D
(69)
(69)
(74)
(74)
(69)
(50)
(50)
(59)
(61)
(70)
(70)
(74)
(74)
(70)
front plate dimensions:

3LD 16-32A2.64 inches square
3LD 63-1253.55 inches square
1.78
1.78
1.97
1.97
2.28

E
(45)
(45)
(50)
(50)
(58)
2.16
2.16
2.29
2.29
2.16

F
(55)
(55)
(58)
(58)
(55)

(45)
(45)
(50)
(50)
(58)
2.16
2.16
2.29
2.29
2.16
1.67
1.67
1.69
1.69
1.67

G
(42)
(42)
(42)
(42)
(42)

(55)
(55)
(58)
(58)
(55)
1.67
1.67
1.69
1.69
1.67
1.50
1.50
1.66
1.66
1.50

H
(38)
(38)
(42)
(42)
(38)

(42)
(42)
(42)
(42)
(42)
1.50
1.50
1.66
1.66
1.50
1.22
1.22
1.66
1.66
1.22
(31)
(31)
(42)
(42)
(31)
(38)
(38)
(42)
(42)
(38)
1.22
1.22
1.66
1.66
1.22
(31)
(31)
(42)
(42)
(31)
Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle Features and Ordering Information
b Short circuit rating of 10,000 AIC with
class H fuse, and of 200,000 AIC with
class R or J fuses.
b Flange mounted handles rated as Type
1, 3R & 12 or 4X are padlockable in
the off position with up to (3) padlocks
with 5/16 hasps

b Meets UL98 requirements and suitable
for both main and branch circuit
applications

b A complete line of aux contacts are
available
VBFS361, VBLK1 & VBH1
VBFS363F
1. Determine the ratings required (amps,
volts, HP, Fusible, NF), the mounting
needed (Panel or Flange), and select
the appropriate switch.
b Load break and horsepower rated

b Defeatable cover interlock standard
with all handles

b Meets NFPA79 requirements
b Seismic qualified complies with the
2010 California Building Code (CBC)
and with the International Building
Code (IBC) Compliance Level
SDS = 1.85 g
VBNFS365, VBLK4 & VBH2
2. For panel mounted switches with a

rigid operating shaft (30-600A), order
panel mounted switch, flange mounted operating handle &rigid linkage kit
based on depth required.
3. For panel mounted switches with a
Max-Flex operator, order panel mounted switch, Max-Flex Handle &Adapter
Kit and drive cable.
4. Select accessories if required.
1-41
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
b 30-600A, 600VAC and DC ratings

b 240 & 600V AC switches are CSA
certified under file number 154852 and
UL recognized under file E121152, Vol.
3.

b Visible blade quick make and break
switching action
b Panel and Flange mounted assemblies
facilitate installation

b Panel mounted switches are variable
depth
Features
Disconnect Switches
Type VBII (30-600A) with Flange Mounted Operating Handle
Selection
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Switchesfor Standard 600V Max AC or DC Applications

Horsepower Rating, Switches and 3-Phased
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Max. AC
Voltage
Rating
Max.
Standard
Max.
Standard
Max.
600
Volts DC
(max)d
71/2
15
5
15
25
50
100
150
15
30
60
125
250
400
71/2
15
30
60
125
200
20
50
75
150
350
500
a
b
15 c
30 c
50 c
50
g
g
10
20
40
60
125
200
20
50
75
125
250
400
30
60
100
150
300
500
15 c
30 c
50 c
50
g
g
3
71/2
71/2
15
5
15
50
100
15
30
60
125
71/2
15
30
60
20
50
75
150
a
a
15 c
30 c
50 c
50
10
20
40
60
20
50
75
125
30
60
100
150
15 c
30 c
50 c
50
240 Volts AC
Catalogue Number
Standard
480 Volts AC
600 Volts AC
Fusible Panel Mounted Variable Depth Switches - 3-Polee

30
60
30
60
100
200
400
600
240
240
600
600
600
600
600
600
VBFS321
VBFS322
VBFS361
VBFS362
VBFS363
VBFS364
VBFS365
VBFS366
3
71/2
Non-fusible Panel Mounted Variable Depth Switches - 3-Polee

30
60
100
200
400
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
VBNFS361
VBNFS362
VBNFS363
VBNFS364
VBNFS365
VBNFS366
Fusible Flange Mounted Switches - 3-Polef

30
60
30
60
100
200
240
240
600
600
600
600
VBFS321F
VBFS322F
VBFS361F
VBFS362F
VBFS363F
VBFS364F
Non-fusible Flange Mounted Switches 3-Polef

30
60
100
200
600
600
600
600
VBNFS361F
VBNFS362F
VBNFS363F
VBNFS364F
Note: F
usible switches include fuse provisions for Class H Fuses. The load base can be moved to pre-drilled holes for Class J Fuses on all 600V switches. If Class R
Fuses are required, add a Class R Fuse Clip Kit.
Cable Kit
For use with 30-200A panel mounted switches

andMax-Flex handle andadapter kit.
Catalogue
Number
Description
FHOEC036
36" long drive cable
FHOEC048
48" long drive cable
Max-FlexTM Handle and Adapter Kit
(Type 1, 12, 3R & 4X) Use with 30-200A panel mounted switches and cable kit.
Catalogue
Number
Description
VBHM1
30-200A Max-Flex Adapter Kit
VBNFS361, VBHM1 & FHOEC036
Rated 5 HP at 250V DC.

Rated 10 HP at 250V DC.
c 600V DC & 600V DC horsepower rating shown requires
(2) poles to be connected in series.
d Std. - applies when non-time delay fuses are used.
Max. - applies when time delay fuses are used.
a
b
1-42
Includes line base, load base, operating mechanism

and line and load lugs. Order operating handle and
linkage kits from tables on pages 1-42 or 1-40.
f Includes line base, load base, operating mechanism
line and load lugs plastic operating handle and
required linkage.
e
Rated 250V DC max and 50HP at 250V DC.
Disconnect Switches

Rigid Linkage Kits
For use with Panel Mounted Switches. Plastic handle is included with Flange Mounted Switches as standard.
For use with Panel Mounted Switches. Not

required for Flange Mounted Switches.
Plastic Handles
VBH1
VBH14X
30-200A Type 1, 3R & 12

30-200A Type 4X
Metal Handles
VBH112
VBH14
VBH2
VBH2R
VBH24X
30-200A Type 1, 3R & 12

30-200A Type 4X
400A Type 1 & 12
400 & 600A Type 1, 3R & 12
400 & 600A Type 4X
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Catalogue Number Operating Handle Description
Flange Mounted Operating Handles
Selection & Accessories
Enclosure Depth - Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number
Switch
Amprere
Rating
Min.
Max.
VBLK1
VBLK2
30-200
30-200
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
19.0 (483)
VBLK3
VBLK4
400 & 600

400 & 600
9.00 (229)
9.00 (229)
8.75 (222)
19.0 (483)
HR612
HNC612
HT63
Neutral Kits
These kits prevent the installation of

Class H and K fuses (one kit required per
switch).
Standard Neutral Kits can be field

installed in 30-100A switches.
100-600A fusible switches are field

convertible to accept Class T fuses.
400-600A switches are field convertible
to accept Class T fuses by moving the
load base to a pre-drilled T fuse position.
Catalogue
Number Description
HR21
30A, 240V Kit (HD only)
HR612
30A, 600V Kit/60A, 240V Kit
Catalogue
Number Description
HR62
60A, 600V Kit
HT23
100A, 240V Kit
HR63
100A Kit
HT63
100A, 600V Kit
HR64
200A Kit
HT24
200A, 240V Kit
HR656
400A/600A Kit
HT64
200A, 600V Kit
Internal Door Latch Kits

For use with enclosures with door
mounted latching bar. Required when a
flange mounted switch is mounted in a
Hoffmann or Rittal enclosure provided
with an AB cutout.
Catalogue
Number Description

DKR2

2 point (for use with

enclosures less than 40" high)

DKR3

3 point (for use with

enclosures 40" or larger
in height)
Dimensions (min. & max.) from enclosure mounting pan

to outside surface of enclosure handle mounting flange.
Neutral Kits
Switch
Kit Catalog
Ampere Rating
Number
30A 600V, 60A 240V HNC612
60A, 600V &100A HNC623
200% Neutral Kits
Class J Fuse Provisions

All 30-600A, 600V fusible switches are
field convertible to accept Class J fuses
by moving the load base to a pre-drilled
J fuse position.
Window Kits (Type 1, 12, 3R and 4x)

Allows viewing of visible blades andof
indicating fuses through 200A.
CSA certified 200% Neutrals are available on 60 & 100A switches. They are
typically used with non-linear transformers or where increased neutral ampacity/
lug capacity is required.
200% Neutral Kits

Switch
Kit
Catalogue Wire Range Line &
Ampere
Number
Load Lugs (Cu/Al)
Rating
60 & 100A HNC263 (2) #14-1/0 AWG
Catalogue
Number Description
VBWK1
30A Window Kit
VBWK2
60 &100A Window Kit
VBWK3
200-600A Window Kit
7.12 for 200A switches.

One kit per pole required.
1-43
Disconnect Switches
Accessories
Auxiliary Contacts
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
The auxiliary contacts are available in 1 normally open and 1 normally closed
or 2 normally open and 2 normally closed configurations. Siemens offers a
PLC Auxiliary Switch (30-200A) that has very low resistance for low voltage
and current typical in PLC circuits. All auxiliary contacts make after and break
before main switch contacts.
HA161234

Kit Ampere Rating
Kit Horsepower Rating
Switch
Ampere
Aux. Switch
125V AC 250V AC 28V DC 125V AC 250V AC 28V DC
Max. Max. Max.
Max. Max. Max.
Rating Catalogue Number
30-200
HA161234
10
10
1/2
3/4
400-600
HA165678
10
10
1/2
3/4

30-200
HA261234
10
10
1/2
3/4
400-600
HA265678
10
10
1/2
3/4
Low Current PLC Type with 1 NO & 1 NC Gold Plated Contacts
HA261234
30-200
HA361234
10
10
1/2
3/4
400-600
HA365678
10
10
1/2
3/4
Fuse Puller Kits

Fuse Puller Kits are field installable in 30-100A Type VBII Heavy Duty
Switches (one kit required per 3-pole switch).
Switch
Ampere
Fuse Puller Kit
Rating
Catalogue Number
030 HP61
060 HP62
100 HP63
Copper Lug Kits

All switches are CSA approved to accept field installed copper lug kits.
HP61
Switch
Copper Lug
Ampere Catalogue
Rating Number Description
3060 HLC612
(9) Lugs/Kit #14-4 AWG Cu
100 HLC63
(9) Lugs/Kit #14-1/0 AWG Cu
200 HLC64
(9) Lugs/Kit #6 AWG-300 Kcmil Cu
400600A HLC65678 (1) Lugs/Kit #1/0 AWG-600 Kcmil Cu

Equipment Ground Lug Kits are available for all switches.
Switch
Ampere
Catalogue Number of
Rating
Number
Terminals
30200 HG61234
2
Wire Range
#14-4 AWG
400 & 600 HG656
#6 AWG-250 Kcmil
NEW
HLC612
Internal Shield Kits (for fusible switches)
Kits provide a skirt that encloses the VBII switch and also a clear plastic
inner door to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Test probe holes
are provided and fuses can be replaced without removal of kit.
Switch
Ampere Rating
Shield Kit
Catalogue Number
30A HSK61
60-100A HSK623
200A HSK64
1-44
Disconnect Switches
Lug Wire Ranges & Dimensions
Lugs
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
30 & 60A switches are suitable for use with 60 or 75C wire. 100600A
switches are suitable for use with 75C rated wire. All switches are supplied
with factory installed line and load lugs.
Wire Ranges
(Line, Load and Standard Neutral)
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Lug Wire Range
30
#14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)
60
100
#14-2 AWG (Cu/Al)

#14-1/0 AWG (Cu/Al)
200
#6 AWG-300 Kcmil (Cu/Al)
400


600


Approximate Dimensions
Mounting bracket shown with handle installed is supplied
with Flange Mounted Switches only. All Panel Mounted
Switches have a L shaped mounting pan with a line base,
load base (if fusible) and mechanism installed.
Catalogue
Number

A
Ca
D (min)
D (max)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7.47 (189)
8.50 (216)
7.47 (189)
8.50 (216)
8.50 (216)
12.33 (313)
16.50 (419)
16.50 (419)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
7.12 (181)
8.63 (219)
8.63 (219)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7.47 (189)
8.50 (216)
8.50 (216)
12.33 (313)
16.50 (419)
16.50 (419)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
6.94 (176)
7.12 (181)
8.63 (219)
8.63 (219)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
19 (483)
14.08 (358)
15.83 (402)
14.08 (358)
15.83 (402)
15.83 (402)
18.20 (462)
7.47 (189)
8.85 (225)
7.47 (189)
8.85 (225)
8.85 (225)
12.68 (322)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.57 (192)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Fusible, Panel Mounted

VBFS321
VBFS322
VBFS361
VBFS362
VBFS363
VBFS364
VBFS365
VBFS366
11.88 (302)
13.12 (333)
11.88 (302)
13.12 (333)
13.12 (333)
17 (432)
26.25 (667)
26.25 (667)
B A
Non-fusible, Panel Mounted

VBNFS361
VBNFS362
VBNFS363
VBNFS364
VBNFS365
VBNFS366
9.79 (249)
9.79 (249)
9.79 (249)
10.77 (234)
13 (330)
13 (330)
Fusible, Flange Mounted

VBFS321F
VBFS322F
VBFS361F
VBFS362F
VBFS363F
VBFS364F
11.88 (302)
13.12 (333)
11.88 (302)
13.12 (333)
13.12 (333)
17 (432)
Non-fusible, Flange Mounted

VBNFS361F
VBNFS362F
VBNFS363F
VBNFS364F
9.79 (249)
9.79 (249)
9.79 (249)
10.77 (274)
11.78 (299)
11.78 (299)
11.78 (299)
11.97 (304)
7.47 (189)
8.85 (225)
8.85 (225)
12.68 (322)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.27 (185)
7.57 (192)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
a Dimension

C for panel mounted switches indicates the minimum width from the left
hand edge of the switch mounting pan to the right hand inside surface of the enclosure.
1-45
Disconnect Switches
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Type MCS (30-200A) Switches, Fuse and No Fuse Kits

Features
Selection
b 30, 60, 100 and 200 Ampere Switches

b CSA Certified under file #84625 and
UL Recognized under file #E121152
b Simple Mounting with an integral
switch and over center mechanism

b Horsepower & load break rated
b Compact Size
b Visible Blade Contacts
b Rugged Construction with a short
circuit current rating of 10,000 amps
with Class H or 200,000 amps at 600V
maximum AC, when fused with Class
R or Class J fuses
b Available with three operator handle

options, allowing flexible placement
of switch

b Field Installable Auxiliary Contacts
b Flexible Fuse Class Configurations
b Flange mounted handles meet NFPA79
requirements
Type MCS Disconnect Switch with

Max-Flex handle operator

fixed-depth, flange-mounted handle

rotary handle
1. Select the basic switch size you need
(30, 60, 100 or 200 ampere).
2. Check the switch selected against the
maximum horsepower rating required
for our application. L or R suffix on
switch catalogue numbers denotes left

or right-handed mechanism drive.
3. Choose either fuse or no fuse kit from
chart below. Information
4. Check Minimum Dimensions on page
1-47 for installation space requirements.

5. Select from the list of handle operators,
the type which best suits your
application. Handle operators can be
selected from the next page.
Basic Switches

Maximum Horsepower Rating, 3 Phased
Catalogue Catalogue
240 Volts AC
480 Volts AC
600 Volts AC
250

Switch
Maximum
Number
Number
Time
Time
Time Volts

Ampere Voltage Right
Left
Standard Delay
Standard Delay
Standard Delay
DC

Rating
Rating
Hand Hand Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse (max)d
130 600 MCS603R MCS603L 13
171/2
160 600 MCS606R MCS606L 171/2 15
171/2
15
115
15
130 15 150 10
120
15
100
600
MCS610R MCS610L 15 30 25 160 30 175 20
200
600
MCS620R MCS620L 25 60 50 125 60 150

40
Fuse and No Fuse Kits (Includes load base plus line and load fuse clips)a
Basic
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Switch
Catalogue
Number
130
MCS603R
or
MCS603L
160
MCS606R
or
MCS606L
100
MCS610R
or
MCS610L
200
MCS620R
or
MCS620L
a For
No Fuse Kits
Kit
Description
No Fuse
30A, 250V
30A, 600V
60A, 250V
60A, 600V
No Fuse
60A, 250V
60A, 600V
100A, 250V
100A, 600V
No Fuse
100A, 250V
100A, 600V
200A, 250V
200A, 600V
No Fuse
200A, 250V
200A, 600V
Standard
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number

TMK606
TMK606
TMK610
TMK610C
TMK620
TMK620C
copper only connectors, order as follows:

Fusibleorder standard switch, standard fuse kit and copper only no fuse kit.
1-46
Cu Onlyb
For Class H
For Class J
For Class R
Catalogue
Number a
FCK203
FCK206
FCK206
FCK606
FCK206
FCK606
OFCK661
OFCK661
FCK610
FCK610
OFCK620
OFCK620
FCK620
FCK620
Catalogue
Numbera
FCJK603
FCJK606
FCJK606
OFCK661
OFCK661
FCK610
FCK610
OFCK620
OFCK620
FCK620
FCK620
Catalogue
Number a
FCRK203
FCRK206
FCRK206
FCRK606
FCRK206
FCRK606
Non-Fusibleorder standard switch and copper only no

fuse kit.
b Includes both line and load lugs.
c For
Lug
Wire
Size
#14 to
#4 AWG
Cu/AI
#14 to
#4 AWG
Cu/AI
c
c
c
c
#14 to
#2/0 AWG
Cu/AI
#6 to
300 kcmil
Cu/AI
c
c
Class R fuses order Class H kit from this table and the
Class R conversion kit from the next page.
ratings for time delay fuses and for 250V DC also
apply to Non-fusible switches.
d HP
Disconnect Switches
Type MCS (30-200A)
Accessories
Fuse Clip Rating

100A, 600V
200A, 600V
2 NO/2 NC
Catalogue Number
MCSAKR236
MCSAKL236
MCSAKR236
MCSAKL236
MCSAK216
MCSAK216
MCSAK226
MCSAK226
Catalogue Number
SSRK33
SSRK34
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Contact Arrangement
1 NO/1 NC
Catalogue Number
MCSAKR136
MCSAKL136
MCSAKR136
MCSAKL136
MCSAK116
MCSAK116
MCSAK126
MCSAK126
Switch
Catalogue Number
MCS603R
MCS603L
MCS606R
MCS606L
MCS610R
MCS610L
MCS620R
MCS620L
Class R Fuse Conversion Kits
Fuse Ejector Kits

Switch
Catalogue Number
MCS610
MCS620
Fuse Ejector Kit

Catalogue Number
FE100
FE200
Handle Operators
Fixed Depth, Flange Mounted, Types 1, 3, 3R, 12 af

Complete Handle Mechanism
Switch
MCS603R
FDFS06R
MCS603L
FDFS06L
MCS606R
FDFS06R
MCS606L
FDFS06L
MCS610R
FDFS06R
MCS610L
FDFS06L
MCS620R
FDFS20R
MCS620L
FDFS20L
Handle Only
Catalogue Number
FDH10
FDH10
FDH10
FDH10
FDH10
FDH10
FDH20
FDH20
Switch Operator Only

Catalogue Number
FDS06R
FDS06L
FDS06R
FDS06L
FDS06R
FDS06L
FDS20R
FDS20L
Variable Depth, Flange Mounted Max-Flex, Types 1, 3, 3R, 12 b

Complete Handle Mechanism
Switch
MCS603R
FHOS06036R
MCS603L
FHOS06036L
MCS606R
FHOS06036R
MCS606L
FHOS06036L
MCS610R
FHOS06036R
MCS610L
FHOS06036L
MCS620R
FHOS20036R
MCS620L
FHOS20036L
Handle Only
Catalogue Number
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
FHOHS
Switch Operator Only

Catalogue Number
FHOS06R
FHOS06L
FHOS06R
FHOS06L
FHOS06R
FHOS06L
FHOS20R
FHOS20L
Cable Only c
Catalogue Number
FHOEC036
FHOEC036
FHOEC036
FHOEC036
FHOEC036
FHOEC036
FHOJC036
FHOJC036
Variable Depth Rotary, Through-The-Door-Mounted, Types 1, 12 de

Variable Depth
MCS603R
MCS606R
MCS610R
MCS620R
CRHOS06VD
CRHOS06VD
CRHOS06VD
CRHOS20VD
CRHOH
CRHOH
CRHOH
RHOH
Shaft Only Variable Depth

RHOSVD
RHOSVD
RHOSVD
RHOSVD
RHOS06
RHOS06
RHOS06
RHOS20
MCS Disconnect Switch Panel Space Requirements

Panel Space Requirements
Minimum Dimensions - Inches (mm)

Switch
Catalogue
Number
Size
a For
Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only

Catalogue Number
100A - FDH104
200A - FDH204
b For Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only
Catalogue Number FHOHS4
Fuse
Class
"A"
"B"
"C"
MCS603
30A/240V
30A/600V
30A/240V
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
5.52 (140)
5.52 (140)
5.52 (140)
8.11 (206)
10.11 (257)
8.48 (215)
H, K, R
H, K, R
J
MCS606
60A/240V
60A/600V
60A/240V
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
5.52 (140)
5.52 (140)
5.52 (140)
7.86 (200)
10.38 (264)
8.35 (212)
H, K, R
H, K, R
J
MCS610
100A/240V
100A/600V
100A/240V
7.38 (188)
7.38 (188)
7.38 (188)
7.59 (193)
7.59 (193)
7.59 (193)
11.85 (301)
13.85 (352)
10.6 (269)
H, K, R
H, K, R
J
MCS620
200A/240V
200A/600V
200A/240V
9.17 (233)
9.17 (233)
9.17 (233)
9.00 (229)
9.00 (229)
9.00 (229)
14.7 (273)
17.2 (437)
13.32 (338)
H, K, R
H, K, R
J
c Standard
cable length is 36 inches (914 mm). Alternate

lengths are available as follows:
Amps
Cat. No.
Length
48" (1219mm) 30100

60" (1524mm) 30100
48" (1219mm) 200
60" (1524mm) 200
FHOEC048
FHOEC060
FHOJC048
FHOJC060
A D
imension is measured
from each cross bail pin.
B Dimension is measured
from line side barrier to
load side barrier.
C Dimension is measured
from line side terminal
of switch to load side
terminal of fuse load
base.
d For
Type 4 and 4X applications, order handle only

Catalogue Number RHOH4
Type 3 and 3R applications, order handle only
Catalogue Number RHOH
f Min. enclosure depth from mounting pan to handle mounting surfaces: 30-100A: 6.44" (164mm)

200A: 10.93" (278mm)
e For
1-47
Disconnect Switches
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Features
b Compact size
b 30400A ratings
b 100KA with Class CC fuses or up to
b CSA Certified under file #222227 and
200KA with Class J fuses
UL Listed under file #E121152 & E68312
b Load break and horsepower rated
b IEC 60 947-3 Certified & CE marked
b Door mounted rotary handles with
defeatable cover interlock
b Meets CSA requirements for both main
and branch circuit applications
Switch
CFS363JN with (2) CFSAUX1NO
1. Select the panel mounted switch
required based on Ampere, HP and
AIC requirements. Switches with a
right hand mechanism are standard.
30-100A switches with a left hand
mechanism are available.
2. Select handle based on environmental
rating required.
3. Select operating shaft (200 or 400mm
in length). For enclosure depths of 9.0
or less from panel mounting surface to
inside of door use 200mm long shafts.
For deeper enclosures use 400mm
long shafts. 30A 65kA switches can be
used in 10 deep enclosures (panel to
inside of door) with 200mm shaft and
CFSH5N handles.
Note: Be sure to check shaft and handle
compatibility with the switch selected
by using the information provided in the
selection tables.
1-48
b Quick make and break operation

b All handles are padlockable with up to
(3) padlocks with 5/16" hasps in the
OFF position
Shaft
Handle
CFSS10200HN
CFSH10BL12N
4. Line & load lugs are provided as

standard on 30100A switches.
Terminal kits are available for
200800A switches if needed.
5. Auxiliary contacts are available if
needed as follows:
A. 30A switch CFS361C5 and nonfusible 30A switch CNFS361 will
accept up to (4) aux contacts.
B. 30A switch CFS361J5 will accept
up to (2) aux contacts without an
aux contact holder. If more than (2)
aux contacts are required order aux
contacts PLUS aux contact holder kit
CFSAUXH1. All other switches will
accept up to (4) aux contacts.
b Catalogue number CFS361C5,

CFS361J5 & CNFS361 can be DIN-rail
mounted and can be either front or side
operated with standard rotary handles
b Handles are available in Type 1, 3R,
4/4X & 12 ratings
b NFPA 79 field installed kits are available
Lugs/Accessories
CFSL200
6. If non-fusible switch is required

order a shorting bar for 60-600A
switches or catalogue number
CNFS361 for 30A.
7. 30100A switches are designed to
prevent inadvertent contact with live
parts and shields are not required.
200800A switches are supplied as
standard with line shields and terminal
shroud kits are available for the load
side.
Disconnect Switches
Switch and Handle Selection
Fusible Switches, 3-Pole 600V AC Max, 250V DC Max
Catalogue
Number
Fuse Provisions
Provided
240V
3 AC
480V
3 AC
250V
DC
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
600V
3 AC
AC
Short
Circuit
Rating
Max Horsepower Ratings
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Standardwith Right Hand Mounted Mechanism

30
CFS361C5
CFS361J5
CFS361JN
CNFS361h
Class CC
Class J
Class J
None
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
15
15
15
15
20
20
20
20
5c
5c
5c
5c
100kA
100kA
200kA
100kA
60a
CFS362JN1
CFS362JN
Class J
15
15
30
30
50
50
10c
10c
100kA
200kA
100a
CFS363JN
Class J
30
60
75
20c
200kA
200
CFS364JN
Class J
60
125
150
40
200kA
400
CFS365J
CFS365JN
Class J
125
125
250
250
350
350
50d
50d
200kA
200kA
600b
CFS366Jij
Class J
200
400
500
200kA
800b
CFS367Lij
Class J
200
400
500
200kA
20
50
75
5c
10c
20c
200kA
b
b
CFS361J5
Optionalwith Left Hand Mounted Mechanism

30a
60a
100a
l
l
l
Class J
7.5
15
30
15
30
60
Operating Shafts for 30400A switchese

Catalogue
Shaft Length
Number
In. (mm)
CFSS5200N
7.9 (200)
CFSS5400N
15.7 (400)
CFSS5200HN
7.9 (200)
CFSS5400HN
15.7 (400)
CFSS10200HN
7.9 (200)
CFSS10400HN
15.7 (400)
CFSS5400N
Switch & Handle Compatibility
5mm x 5mm for use with CFS361C5, CFS361J5 &
CNFS361 switches & with CFSH5 handles only
5mm x 5mm for use with all CFSH10 handles & with
CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361 switches only
10mm x 10mm for use with all CFSH10 handles & with
all 30400A switches except CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
Rotary Operating HandlesDoor Mounted (for use with

65kA CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361 switches only)f

Catalogue

Number
Colour
Type
CFSH5B12N Blue & Black
1, 3R & 12
CFSH5R12N Yellow & Red
CFSH5B4N
CFSH5R4N

Blue & Black

Yellow & Red
Operating Shaft Compatibility

CFSS5200N or CFSS5400N
CFSH5B12N
1, 3R, 12 & 4/4X
Rotary Operating HandlesDoor Mounted (for use with

CFSS5200HN, CFSS5400HN, CFSS10200HN & CFSS10400HN)
Catalogue

Number Colour
Description
Type 1, 3R & 12g

CFSH10B12N
Blue & Black

CFSH10BL12N
Blue & Black
CFSH10RL12N
Yellow & Red
Heavy duty pistol grip

(2.75(70mm) long for use with 30A switches & CFS362JN1)
Heavy duty pistol grip (4.92(125mm) long for 30400A switches)
Type 1, 3R, 4/4X & 12g

CFSH10B4N
Blue & Black

CFSH10BL4N
Blue & Black
CFSH10RL4N
Yellow & Red
a Line
Heavy duty pistol grip

(2.75(70mm) long for use with 30A switches & CFS362JN1)
Heavy duty pistol grip (4.92 (125mm) long for 30400A switches)
and load lugs included.

and load lugs are not included.
Order from table on next page if required.
c DC HP rating shown requires (2) poles to be connected
in series.
b Line
d DC
HP rating shown requires (3) poles to be connected

in series.
numbers CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
accept 5mm x 5mm operating shafts. All other 30400A
switches accept 10mm x 10mm operating shafts.
e Catalogue
f Compact
pistol grip design (2.75 long) with defeatable

cover interlock. Cover can be opened when handle is
padlocked in the OFF position.
g Defeatable cover interlock provided. Cover cannot be
opened when handle is padlocked in the OFF position.
h Catalogue number CNFS361 is a non-fusible switch.
i 4-Pole 600 & 800A switches, CFS466J & CFS467L are
also available.
CFS366J and CFS367L are rated 250 & 600V DC when (2)
poles are connected in series.
CNFS361 is rated 65kA when protected by Class J or CC
30A max. fuses.
Contact sales office for ordering information
1-49
Disconnect Switches
Selection and Accessories
600 & 800A Rotary Operating HandlesDoor Mounted 8.27" (210 mm) long
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Catalogue Number
Colour
CSA Type
CFSH12BL12
CFSH12RL12
CFSH12BL4
CFSH12RL4
Blue & Black

Yellow & Red
Blue & Black
Yellow & Red
1,
1,
1,
1,
3R & 12
3R & 12
3R, 12 & 4/4X
3R, 12 & 4/4X
600 & 800A Operating Shafts (Cross section 12X12 mm)

Catalogue
Number
Shaft Length
In. (mm)
Enclosure Depth
(switch mounting surface to door OD)
CFSS12200H
CFSS12400H
12.59 (320)
15.75 (400)
10.43 16.68 inches (265-424 mm)

10.43 19.84 inches (265-504 mm)
CFSL200 & 400
Type CFS Fusible Switch Accessories

Catalogue
Number
Description
Terminalsa

CFSL200
200A Lug Kit (6 lugs per kit) (1)#63/0
CFSL400N
400A Lug Kit (6 lugs per kit) (1)#2600kcmil (for CFS365JN only)
CFSL400
CFS365J & 600800A Lug Kit (6 lugs per kit) (2)#2600kcmil
Shorting Bars (no fuse kits)

CFSSB60
CFSSB100
100A Shorting Bar Kit (3 links per kit)
CFSSB200
CFSSB400
CFSSB680
CFSAUX1NC
600 & 800A Shorting Bar Kit (1 link per kit)
Auxiliary Contacts (NEMA ratings AC A600 DC N600)

CFSAUXH1b
Aux Contact Holder (CFS361J5, CFS361C5 & CNFS361)
CFSAUXH2
Aux contact holder required for CFS365J
CFSAUX1NO
Aux Contact 1 NO (30800A Sws)
CFSAUX1NC
Aux Contact 1 NC (30800A Sws)
CFS11AUX
1NO, 1NC Aux Contact Kit for use with CFSNFPA2N & 3N (side mount)
CFS22AUX
2NO, 2NC Aux Contact Kit for use with CFSNFPA2N & 3N (side mount)
Terminal Shrouds (line or load)

CFSTS200Nf
200A Shroud Kit (Line or load 3-Pole kit)
CFSTS400Nf
400A Shroud Kit (Line or load 3-Pole kit)
CFSTS680f
600/800A 3-Pole Shroud Kit
CFSTS6804f
600/800A 4-Pole Shroud Kit
30A Compact Switch Kits

CFSPLK
Shaft Padlocking Kit for 30A Compact Switch when door is openc
CFSH5CDM
Direct Mount Handle Kit for CFS361C5
CFSH5JDM
Direct Mount Handle Kit for CFS361J5
CFS5B100 400
NFPA 79 Kits
Kits provide an operating shaft suitable for use with all heavy duty handles
(not for use with CFSH5 handles). Kits also provide an internal operating
handle & an internal OFFpadlocking provision.

CFSNFPA1d For use with CFS361C5, CFS361J5 & CNFS361
CFSNFPA2Ne For use with CFS361JN, CFS361CN, CFS362JN & CFS363JN
CFSNFPA2 For use with CFS365J only (requires previous handle design)
CFSNFPA3N For use with CFS364JN & CFS365JN
Note: CFSNFPA2N & CFSNFPA3N cannot be used in combination with CFSAUX1NO or CFSAUX1NC auxiliary contacts.
a
b
upplied as standard on 30100A switches.

S
CFS361C5 and CNFS361 will accept (4) aux contacts
without an aux contact holder. CFS361J5 will accept (2)
aux contacts without an aux contact holder.
1-50
c
d
e
f
upplied as standard on all but 30A compact switches.

S
12.6 inch (320 mm) long operating shaft included.
11.3 inch (288 mm) long operating shaft included.
Line side terminal shrouds supplied with switch.
efeatable cover interlock provided. Cover cannot

D
be opened when the handle is padlocked in the OFF
position.
Disconnect Switches
Dimensions and Technical Characteristics

CSA & UL Technical Characteristics and Panel Space Requirements
Amps
30
Fuse
Class
CC
AC Short
Circuit Rating
100kA
Electrical
Endurance
6000
Mechanical
Endurance
10000
Panel Space Requirements Inches (mm)

Height
4.56 (116)
Width
3.78 (96)
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Catalogue
Number
CFS361C5
Deptha
6.00 (152)
CFS361J5
30
100kA
6000
10000
4.56 (116)
4.15 (96)
6.00 (152)
CFS361JN
30
200kA
6000
10000
5.35 (136)
5.89 (150)
6.00 (152)
7.00 (178)
CFS361JL
30
200kA
6000
10000
5.88 (149)
6.75 (171)
CNFS361
30
None
100kA
6000
10000
4.56 (116)
3.78 (96)
6.00 (152)
CFS362JN1
60
100kA
6000
10000
5.35 (136)
5.89 (150)
6.00 (152)
CFS362JN
60
200kA
6000
10000
7.32 (186)
5.89 (150)
6.00 (152)
CFS362JL
60
200kA
6000
10000
5.88 (149)
6.75 (171)
7.00 (178)
CFS363JN
100
200kA
6000
10000
7.32 (186)
5.89 (150)
6.00 (152)
CFS363JL
100
200kA
6000
10000
7.19 (183)
8.25 (210)
7.00 (178)
CFS364JN
200
200kA
6000
8000
11.46 (291)
7.72 (196)
6.00 (152)
CFS365J
400
200kA
1000
6000
14.94 (363)
11.94 (303)
8.00 (203)
CFS365JN
400
200kA
1000
6000
15.35 (390)
10.19 (259)
8.00 (203)
CFS366J
600
200kA
1000
5000
11.81 (300)
14.33 (364)
11 (280)
CFS466J
600
200kA
1000
5000
11.81 (300)
18.03 (458)
11 (280)
CFS367L
800
200kA
500
3500
11.81 (300)
14.33 (364)
11 (280)
CFS467L
800
200kA
500
3500
11.81 (300)
18.03 (458)
11 (280)
Wire Ranges Line & Load Lugs

Switch
Ampere
Rating
Mechanical
Wire Range
of Lug (75C)
30
#1410 Cu
60
#103 Cu
100
#121 Cu
200
#63/0 Cu/Al
400 CFS365J
(2) #2-600 kcmil Cu/Al
400
(1)#2600 kcmil Cu/Al
600
800
inimum dimension from mounting surface to inside

M
of cover. Dimensions shown can be decreased if aux
contacts are not required.
CNFS361 is rated 100kA when protected by 30A max.

Class J or CC fuses.
1-51
Disconnect Switches
Type HCP Switchboard Units, Accessories
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
Features
Selection
b Group mounts with other 30A through

600A switches, and 100 through 1200
amp frame breakers
b Allows 800A and 1200A switches in
standard 38" wide distribution sections
in either main or branch configurations
1
b 16 4" mounting height is the smallest
1200A design in the industry, allowing
up to 4 units in one vertical section
b Field reversible horizontal mounting
design for left or right hand cabling

b Handle can be padlocked in the OFF
position with up to three padlocks with
5/16" hasps. A cover padlocking
provision is also supplied
b CSA certified under file #24563 and UL

Listed under file #E6849 Vol 1, Sect. 8
b 400-1200A ratings
b Visible contacts
b Field installable shunt trip and auxiliary
switch accessory kits

b Installs in existing Siemens
switchboards
b Suitable for use on systems with up to
200,000A available fault current,
RMS symmetrical when equipped with
Class J or Class L fuses
3-Pole, Horizontal Mount a

Horsepower Rating
Maximum Maximum
480V
Ampere
AC Voltage Fuse Dimensions (inches*) 240V
Rating
Ratingb
Class H
W
D
Std Max Std Max
Catalogue
Number
600V
250V
Std Max DC
HCP367HJ400
1400
600
16.25 17.22 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
1600
600
16.25 17.22 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP367HJ600
HCP327HT
HCP367H
800
1800
240
16.25
17.22
7.38 100 250 50
600
16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328HT
1200
240
16.25
17.22
7.38 100 250 50
HCP368H
1200
600
16.25 17.22 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
3-Pole, Vertical Mount

HCP367VJ400
1400
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 150 125 100 250 125 350 40
1600
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 175 200 150 400 200 400 40
HCP367VJ600s
HCP327VT
HCP367V
800
1800
240
17.00
16.25
7.38 100 250 50
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
HCP328VT
1200
240
17.00
16.25
7.38 100 250 50
HCP368V
1200
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 100 250 200 500 250 500 50
Accessories
T Fuse Adapter Kits (one per pole)
Terminal Connectors (one lug per kit)

Ampere Rating
400600A
400600A
400800A
400800A
800-1200A
800-1200A
Catalogue
Number
TFAK72
TFAK75
TFAK82
Catalogue Number Connector Wire Range

TA2K500
(2) #1 AWG500 kcmil (Cu or AI)
TC2K500
(2) #1 AWG500 kcmil (Cu only)
TA3K500
TC3K350
TA4H500
TA3H750
(3) 250750 kcmil (Cu or AI)
HCP Replacement Handle Kit

(For use on all HCP switches)
SW Ampere Rating
4001200A

Contact
Ampere Rating
15A
15A
Maximum Voltage
AC
DC
480
125
480
125
Shunt Trip Kit
DC
Catalogue
Number
HCPST120
HCPST240s
HCPST277
HCPST480s
*For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by

25.4.
1-52
Contacts
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
Switch
Ampere Rating
4001200A
A01HCPL4s
A01HCPR4
Catalogue Number
F6162DCAN
Compression Lug Adapter Kit

The use of this kit provides for the
mounting of up to four lugs per phase.
Each kit accepts lugs with (2) 3/8" diameter mounting holes on 1" centers. One
kit per pole line or load is required. Lugs
are not provided.
Ampere Rating
4001200A
s Built to order. Allow 68 weeks for delivery.

a For horizontal mounting only in either 38" wide min
switchboards or S5/F2 power panelboards.
Catalogue Number
HCPHK
Catalogue
Number
Switchboard Connection Strap Kit a
Control Voltage
AC
120
240
277
480
Switch
Mounting
Left Pole
Right Pole
Description
1800A, 300V AC
1800A, 600V AC
1200A, 300V AC
b Both
max.
Catalog Number
HCPCLP
240 and 600V AC switches are also rated 250V DC
Disconnect Switches
Type HCP Switchboard Units
Dimensions
1
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
1-53
Notes
DISCONNECT
SWITCHES
1-54
POWER PRODUCT
Meter Centres
Contents
2-2

2-3
2-4
2-5
2
METER
CENTRES
General Specifications
Overview - Features & Benefits
Selection Procedure
Service Entrance Module
Fusible Switch
Standard Tap Boxes
Feed Through Tap Boxes
Direct Tap
Meter Centre Stack, Socket Module and Main Bus Connector Kit 2-6
Basic Meter Stack
Complete Meter Stack Module
Meter Socket Module
Main Bus Connector Kit
Sub-service Circuit Breakers and Corner Elbow Modules 2-7
Accessories
2-8
Configuration Data
With switch
With standard tap box or transition box
With feed through tap box
Dimensions
Meter stack
Meter socket modules
Knock Out Data
Tap Boxes
Meter Stack
Meter Centre Layout Example
2-9

2-11

2-13

2-14
Modular Meter Centres
METER
CENTRES
Siemens offers the most versatile

selection of metering equipment
available. The Siemens metering line
offers an economical approach to virtually
any metering requirement, whether it be
for residential, commercial or industrial
applications at 240V.
Entry Plates
Main cable tap boxes can be

provided with punched or unpunched
aluminum or fiber entry plates.
Branch Circuit Breakers
Compact, high performance type plugin or bolt-on circuit breakers can be

selected to address site requirements.
Interrupting ratings up to 100kA combine
thermal and magnetic trip elements
and feature: isolated pole construction
with common trip bar for multiple pole
devices; silver alloy contacts and high
pressure straight-in load connectors.
Meeting All Your Service Needs
Offering the maximum in versatility to

meet all your needs, Siemens metering
centres are designed for single phase
three wire 120/240V AC or three phase
four wire 120/208V AC applications with
sub-service modules of 100A, 125A
and 200A. Siemens meter centres are
designed to meet CSA requirements
C22.2 No.229 for "cold metering" and are
CSA certified under file #13069. In cold
metering, the sub service breakers are
connected on the line side of the meter
sockets, protecting the meter and all
electrical equipment fed. All individual
metering stacks are manufactured to
tight specifications and can be selected
in pre-assembled units, to minimize
on-site labour or as a separate plug-in
module for a customized installation
when required. The modular construction
offers real post installation flexibility
permitting on-site changes to be made
with minimum down time.
Direct Tap Feature
When using Siemens' direct tap Main

Lug Feed Kit for services at 600A, no
tap box is required, therefore saving
considerable installation room.
This custom designed Main Lug Feed
Kit allows connection of main incoming
cables directly to the Meter Stack main
bus and eliminates the need for a sub
service tap box. If more working space
is required to facilitate the connection, a
Transition Box can be used.
Meter Stack Design
All Siemens meter stacks are of

uniform design with flexibility in mind.
A combination of slide-in metering
modules from 100 to 200A fit in any
meter stack.
Mounting Rails
Easy to use, the mounting rails simplify

installation of the modular meter centre.
They enable the metering stacks to
be rapidly pre-installed on the wall,
automatically aligning the sections for
permanent mechanical installation and
electrical joining of the main bus.
2-2
Selection
Meter Stack Enclosure
Meter stack enclosures, barriers and end

plates are manufactured of galvanized
steel. Front covers are fabricated of
phosphatized steel finished with ASA
61 light grey paint. Meter socket front
covers are embossed and fitted with
a label to allow suite identification on
the enclosure adjacent to its respective
service breaker.
Bus Bar
The main horizontal bus consists of tin

plated high conductivity aluminum for
maximum performance and economy.
The main cross bus is installed at the
bottom of the metering stacks and is
rated at 600 or 1200A while the vertical
bussing is rated at 800A per section.
Flexibility
Siemens service entrance equipment

can be top or bottom fed, depending on
site requirements, for single connection
or feed through applications.
Each meter stack has a convenient side
wireway for branch wiring which can
exit at the top or at the bottom. A userfriendly combination of knockouts is
factory installed at the top to minimize
installation time.
Slide-in Modular Design
Each individual slide-in module design

allows for fast installation and provide
flexibility for future needs. If the branch
requirement changes, the module can
be interchanged without changing the
complete stack. By simply removing
two screws from the front cover, the
slide-in module can be removed for easy
replacement.
Series rating are also available for

approved combinations up to 100kA.
Meter Socket Jaws
Meter socket jaws consist of tin

plated copper with steel spring
reinforced clips for reliable contact
pressure. Positive alignment of jaws and
stabs is assured by bus straps which are
bolted in place.

Overview - Features & Benefits
Single stack, with 800A rated bus,

accepts up to four 200A or six 125A
slide-in modules with 4 and 5 jaws. For
more flexibility, a combination of both
can be installed within the same stack
Standard one size meter stack
Embossed hook
for mounting rail
system
Selection
METER
CENTRES
Accepts plug-in
or bolt-on sub
service circuit
breakers
Easy to mount
standard safety
switch
Sealing screw
factory installed
Slide-in meter
socket modules
Blank Filler Plates
Lay in ground
lug factory
installed at the
bottom of each
stack. No kit
required for
multi stack
grounding
Transition Box can

be used for 600A to
allow more working
space
Direct tap connection for

600A with Main Lug Feed
Kit allowing the connection
directly from the switch
Main Bus Connection Kit

600A or 1200A allowing the
connection of meter stacks.
2-3

Selection Procedure
Selection
METER
CENTRES
1. Select one service entrance safety switch, reference p.2/5.

2. Select required Tap Box or Main Lug Feed Kit with or without a Transition Box.
3. Select type and quantity of slide-in Meter Socket Modules.
4. Select Main Bus Connector Kits to join each stack.
5. Select quantity of Blank Filler Plates as per left over empty space.
Examples - Typical 600A Main Service 120/240V 1 3W c/w 16 x 100A and 1 x 200 sub-service breakers
Option 1
c/w Tap Box & Bolt-on Breakers
Option 2
c/w Transition Box & Plug-in Breakers
QTY
Catalogue Number
Description
QTY
Catalogue Number
Description
ID226 or HFC226N
Safety switch 600A 2p 240V
ID226 or HFC226N
Safety switch 600A 2p 240V
MLTB1-600
Standard Tap Box 600A
MTB-600
Transition Box 600A
MMS4-125
Meter socket module 125A 4 jaws
MLFK1
Main lug kit
MMS4-200QJ

QJ
MMS4-125
MMC14-6125
Complete stack
MMS4-200
MMC1
Basic stack
MMC14-6125
Complete stack
MBSS1-600
Main bus connector kit
MMC1
Basic stack
MBHP-2
Blank filler plates
MBSS1-600
Main bus connector kit
16
BQ2B100
100A Bolt-on breaker
MBHP-2
Blank filler plates
QJ22B200
200A Bolt-on breaker
16
Q2100
100A Plug-in breaker
MTRK-64
Wall mounting rail
EQ9685
200A Plug-in breaker
MTRK-64
Wall mounting rail
Reference Chart: Number of Blank Filler Plate Kits Required

Refer to this chart to calculate how many Blank Filler Plate Kits are needed in a meter stack after the quantity of Meter Socket Module is determined.
Catalogue Number
Description
Height in modules
(1 module = 87/8'' = 125 mm)
Qty of kits #MBHP-2

(2 plates/kit)
MMC1 & MMC3
Basic meter stack
6 modules
MMS4-125
1 module
MMS5-125
1 module
MMS4-200
1.5 modules
MMS5-200
1.5 modules
MMS4-200QJ
Meter socket module 200A 4 jaws QJ
1.5 modules
MMS5-200QJ
Meter socket module 200A 5 jaws QJ
1.5 modules
MMS7-100
1.5 modules
MMS7-200
3 modules
2-4
Safety Switch, Tap Box and Main Lug Feed Kit
Selection
Service Entrance Modulea

System
Cable lug size per phase suitable for Al. and Cu.
Weight lbs.(kg)
400
ID225
40
(1016)
181/2
600
ID226
Line, Load: (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
Neutral: (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
(470)
121/16 (306)
78 (35.4)
48
(1219)
211/2
(546)
121/16 (306)
92 (41.7)
800
HFC227N
Line, Load: (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil

Neutral: (2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil
673/16 (1706)
3915/16 (1015)
91/4
(235)
365 (65.6)
1200
HFC228N

673/16 (1706)
3915/16 (1015)
91/4
(235)
385 (174.6)
400
ID425
600
ID426
Line, Load: (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
Neutral: (1) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or
(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
40
(1016)
181/2
(470)
121/16 (306)
92 (41.7)
48
(1219)
211/2
(546)
121/16 (306)
108 (49)
800
HFC367N

673/16 (1706)
3915/16 (1015)
91/4
(235)
375 (170.1)
1200
HFC368N

673/16 (1706)
3915/16 (1015)
91/4
(235)
395 (179.1)
Standard Tap Boxesb - connectors included

System
120/240
1 3W
120/208
3 4W
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Cable lug size per phase suitable for Al. and Cu cables
400/600
MLTB1-600
800/1200
MLTB1-1200c
(3) #2 AWG - 600 Kcmil or

(4) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil
400/600
MLTB3-600
800/1200
MLTB3-1200c
be
Feed Through Tap Boxes

120/240
1 3W
120/208
3 4W
(3) #2 AWG - 600 Kcmil or

(4) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil
Weight lbs.(kg)d
253/4 (655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
40 (18.2)
253/4 (655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
45 (20.5)
253/4 (655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
40 (18.2)
253/4 (655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
45 (20.5)
253/4 (655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
45 (20.5)
461/4 (1175)
24
(610)
71/4
(184)
60 (27.3)
253/4
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
45 (20.5)
24
(610)
71/4
(184)
60 (27.3)
- Use with even number of meter stacks only
400/600
MLTB1-600FT
800/1200
MLTB1-1200FT
400/600
MLTB3-600FT
800/1200
MLTB3-1200FTf
(4) 250 Kcmil - 750 Kcmil or

(8) 3/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
(4) 250 Kcmil - 750 Kcmil or
(8) 3/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
(655)
461/4 (1175)
Main Lug Feed Kit - For direct tap (no tap box) from safety switch to metering stack
System
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Cable lug size per phase suitable for Al. and Cu cables
Use with Meter

Module Type
Weight - lbs.(kg)
120/240
1 3W
400/600
MLFK1
(2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(4) 1/0 AWG - 250 Kcmil
MMC1
MMC14-6125
21/2
(1.1)
120/208
3 4W
400/600
MLFK3
(2) 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil or

(4) 1/0 AWG - 250Kcmil
MMC3
MM35-6125
(1.3)
Transition Box - Allows more working space to connect on Main Lug Feed Kit
System
120/240
1 3W
120/208
3 4W
a Fusible
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
400/600
MTB-600
switch can be mounted directly next to

metering stack with a Standard Tap Box or with a Main
Lug Feed Kit (with or without Transition Box).
b Tap Box mounts directly next to the Meter Stack and is
required to accommodate incoming main service cable,
unless Main Lug Feed Kit is used. Suitable for left and
right side entry.

H
Weight lbs.(kg)
253/4
(655)
201/2
(521)
71/4
(184)
30
(13.7)
c Can
be used with even and odd number of metering

stacks. In addition, for odd number of stack connections,
adaptor kit #MTBK12 must be used.
d Weight is based on 3 4W system (Heaviest pcs).
e Feed through tap boxes are required when the main
incoming cables enter and exit at the same end of line up.
f Module
comes factory assembled for left hand side

entry. For right hand side entry, bus bars and insulated
supports must be moved at the other hole set, marked
with an "R", before wall installation.
2-5
METER
CENTRES
120/208
3 4W
Catalogue
Number
120/240
1 3W
Ampere
Rating
Revised
10/01/2014
Meter Centre Stack, Meter Socket Module and Main Bus Connectors
Selection
METER
CENTRES
Basic Meter Stack (cold metering) - Meter socket modules and blank plates must be ordered seperately
Max. Sub-service Meter Socket
for each amperagea
100A
125A
200A
MMC1
120/208
13W
MMC3
120/208
33W
MMC3 (QJ)
Main
Service
Voltage
Subservice
Voltage
Catalogue
Number
120/240
34W
120/240
34W
120/208
13W
120/208
34W
Height MOD
Weight lbs.(kg)
67 (30.4)
78
(1981)
14
(356)
71/4
(184)
6
7 (31.8)
Complete Meter Stack (cold metering)ab - Meter socket modules included

Main
Service
Voltage
Subservice
Voltage
Catalogue
Number
Number of Jaws
Sub-service Meter
Socket included
120/240
13W
120/240
13W
MMC14-6125
6 x MMS4-125
120/208
34W
120/208
34W
MMC35-6125
6 x MMS5-125

H
78
(1981)
14
(356)
71/4
(184)
Height MOD
Weight lbs.(kg)
109 (49.6)
6
112 (50.9)
Meter Socket Modulea

Subservice
Voltage
Meter
Socket
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Number of Jaws
Provision Breaker
type
Phase Connection
120/240
13W
125A
MMS4-125
BQ, BQH, HBQ,

Q, QP, QPH, HQP
120/240
13W
MMS4-200
EQ96XX
200A
MMS4-200QJ
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2H, HQJ2
120/208
34W
125A
MMS5-125
MMS5-200
120/208
34W
200A
120/208
34W
100A
120/208
34W
200A
MMS7-100
in. (mm)
MOD
Weight lbs.(kg)
AB
87/8
(225)
7 (3.2)
AB
135/16
(338)
1.5
11 (5)
87/8
(225)
7 (3.2)
135/16
(338)
1.5
11 (5)
135/16
(338)
1.5
10 (4.6)
265/8
(676)
16 (7.3)
AB
AB
EQ96XX
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2H, HQJ2
MMS5-200QJ
MMS7-200
BQ, BQH, HBQ,

Q, QP, QPH, HQP
BQ, BQH, HBQ,

Q, QP, QPH, HQP
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2H, HQJ2
ABC
Main Bus Connector Kit - Allows the connection of two meter stacks
Subservice
Voltage
Max.
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
120/240
13W
600A
MBSS1-600
1200A
MBSS1-1200
120/208
34W
600A
MBSS3-600
1200A
MBSS3-1200
Use with Meter Module Type
b
2-6
Weight lbs.(kg)
MMC1
MMC14-6125
3 (1.3)
MMC3
MM35-6125
4 (1.82)
Provision only, breakers not included

Complete meter stacks are factory balanced for
ease of installation
c Meter socket modules with 5 and 7 jaws can be assembled
in the same meter stack as long as the system is balanced.
a
7 (3.18)
10 (4.55)
MMS5-125 and MMS5-200 have AB phase connections by

default. Phasing connections can be changed on the field
to AC or BC to balance the load on the system.
Height
Revised
10/01/2014
Sub-service Circuit Breakers and Corner Elbow Modules
Selection
Sub-service Circuit Breakers - Maximum interruption rating (KAIC) for 240V AC

Catalogue Number
Ampere
Rating
Poles
KAIC = 10kA
KAIC = 42kA
KAIC = 65kA
Plug-in
Bolt-on
Plug-in
KAIC = 22kA
Bolt-on
Bolt-on only
Plug-in
Bolt-on
2
3
Q260
Q360
BQ2B060
BQ3B060
Q260H
Q360H
BQ2B060H
BQ3B060H
QJ22B060H
QJ23B060H
Q260HH
Q360HH
HB2B060
HB3B060
70A
2
3
Q270
Q370
BQ2B070
BQ3B070
Q270H
Q370H
BQ2B070H
BQ3B070H
QJ22B070H
QJ23B070H
Q270HH
Q370HH
HB2B070
HB3B070
80A
2
3
Q280
Q380
BQ2B080
BQ3B080
Q280H
Q380H
BQ2B080H
BQ3B080H
QJ22B080H
QJ23B080H
Q280HH
Q380HH
HB2B080
HB3B080
90A
2
3
Q290
Q390
BQ2B090
BQ3B090
Q290H
Q390H
BQ2B090H
BQ3B090H
QJ22B090H
QJ23B090H
Q290HH
Q390HH
HB2B090
HB3B090
100A
2
3
Q2100
Q3100
BQ2B100
BQ3B100
Q2100H or EQ9675
Q3100H
BQ2B100H
BQ3B100H
QJ22B100H
QJ23B100H
Q2100HH
Q3100HH
HB2B100
HB3B100 or HQJ23B100
110A
2
3
Q2110
Q3110
BQ2B110
QJ23B110
Q2110H
Q3110H
BQ2B110H
QJH23B110
QJ22B110H
QJ23B110H
Q2110HH
Q3110HH
HB2B110
HQJ23B110
125A
2
3
Q2125
N/A
BQ2B110
QJ23B125
Q2125H or EQ9677
N/A
BQ2B125H
QJH23B125
QJ22B125H
QJ23B125H
Q2125HH
N/A
HB2B125
HQJ23B125
150A
2
3
EQ9683
N/A
QJ22B150
QJ23B150
EQ9683
N/A
QJH22B150
QJH23B150
QJ22B150H
QJ23B150H
N/A
N/A
HQJ23B150
175A
2
3
N/A
QJ22B175
QJ23B175
EQ9684
N/A
QJH22B175
QJH23B175
QJ22B175H
QJ23B175H
N/A
N/A
HQJ23B175
200A
2
3
EQ9685
N/A
QJ22B200
QJ23B200
EQ9685
N/A
QJH22B200
QJH23B200
QJ22B200H
QJ23B200H
N/A
N/A
HQJ23B200
60A
METER
CENTRES
Note: Low amperage circuit breakers (15-50A) available with installation of connector kit #MSMK-50
Corner Elbow Modules - Permit continuation from stack to stack around corners
System
Voltage
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue Number
Inside
Weight lbs.(kg)
16 (406)
12 (304)
71/4 (184)
Inside Elbow Modules

120/240
13W
120/208
34W
600
MEL1-IN-6
1200
MEL1-IN-12
600
MEL3-IN-6
1200
MEL3-IN-12
45 (20)
50 (23)
Outside Elbow Modules

120/240
13W
120/208
34W
600
MEL1-OUT-6
1200
MEL1-OUT-12
600
MEL3-OUT-6
1200
MEL3-OUT-12
Outside
45 (20)
16 (406)
12 (304)
71/4 (184)
50 (23)
Note: To connect a Tap Box to an Elbow, order MTBELK6 or MTBELK12. Connection from feed-through tap box 1200A to an
elbow is not possible.
2-7

Accessories
Catalogue Number
Description
Content
MBHP-2
Blank meter socket filler plate required to cover empty space,

each steel plate has a dimension of 4.3 x 14.1 in.
2 half plates (1 MOD = 1 x MBHP-2)
MLTB-L2750
Alternative lug kit for 600A standard tap boxes
4 lugs 1/0 AWG - 750 Kcmil Al/Cu
MTBK12
Connection adaptor kit for tap box MLTB1-1200 or MLTB3-1200

when used for output with an odd number of meter stacks
4 connector spacers and hardware
MTRK-64
Wall mounting rail of 64 in., meter stack is supplied with

embossed hooks for this mounting rail system
1 wall mounting track 64"
MTBELK6
Bus bar kit to connect a 600A standard or feed-through tap box

via a 600A corner elbow
4 Bus Bars and hardware
MTBELK12
Bus bar kit to connect a 1200A standard tap box via a 1200A
corner elbow
8 Bus bars and hardware
MSSR
Meter sealing ring
1 meter ring
MUJP-5
Jumper bar 200A max, 5 jaws, to jump a metering position when

the meter has temporarily been removed
2 jumper bars
MUJP-7
Jumper bar 200A max, 7 jaws, to jump a metering position when

the meter has temporarily been removed
3 jumper bars
SEALSC1
Sealing screw kit
25 sealing screws
SFLK-200
Subfeed lug kit 200A max.
4 lugs 6/0 AWG - 300 Kcmil Al/Cu
2
METER
CENTRES
Selection
Replacement cover for Meter Socket Modules

Catalogue Number
Description
MC4-125
125A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate Q & BQ breakers
MC4-200
200A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate Q & BQ breakers
MC4-200QJ
200A 4 & 5-jaw front cover plate QJ breaker
MC7-100
100A 7-jaw front cover plate Q & BQ breakers
MC7-200
200A 7-jaw front cover plate QJ breaker
Content
1 cover plate
1 sealing ring
1 sealing screw
Tap Box Modification Kits

Catalogue Number
Description
MLTB-AP
Al. plate punched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-AU
Al. plate unpunched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-AUFT
Al. plate unpunched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
MLTB-FP
Fiber plate punched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-FPFT
Fiber plate punched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
MLTB-FU
Fiber plate unpunched for standard tap boxes and MLTB 600FT
MLTB-FUFT
Fiber plate unpunched for Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A
Content
1 tap box tub end
Note: Multi-stack grounding is accomplished by running a bare wire through the factory installed lay-in lugs in the bottom of each stack. No grounding kit is required
except when an elbow module is used.
2-8

Configuration Data
Selection
Configurations with switch

With Switch
With Transition Box and Switch
2
METER
CENTRES
MLTB1-600
MLTB3-600
MLTB1-1200
MLTB3-1200
MTB-600
MLTB1-600
MLTB3-600
MLTB1-1200
MLTB3-1200
MTB-600
Configurations with Standard Tap Box or Transition Box

Standard Tap Box connections
MLTB1-600
MLTB3-600
MLTB1-1200
MLTB3-1200
Tap Box / Boite de raccordement

Cat. no MLTB1-1200 240V max. - 1 ph - 3 Bus Bar / barre omnibus 1200A max.
L H Mou n tin g
MLTB1-600
MLTB3-600
MLTB1-1200
MLTB3-1200
MTB-600
LH Mou ntin g
RH Mou ntin g
Tap Box
Meter Center
Meter Center
Spacer
Spacer
3/4
3/4
Tightening Torque / Couple de serrage

Mounting Screw
Vis de montage
Tap Box / Boite de raccordement

Cat. no MLTB3-1200 240V max. - 3 ph - 4 Bus Bar / barre omnibus 1200A max.
RH Mo u ntin g
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
C onnectors
C onnecteurs
25-30 in/lb
80-95 in/lb
120-140 in/lb
220-250 in/lb
MMC1
MLTB1-1200 To Connect Meter Center
If this tap box is used for output and install with odd number of MMC1, use
connection adaptor kit MTBK12
Made in Canada
Fabrication Canadienne
LL13069
Tap Box
Wire
#6 @ #4
#2 @ #1
1/0 @ 2/0
3/0 @ 4/0
250 @ 300MCM
400 @ 500MCM
600 @ 750MCM
Ground Wire Connectors
50-70 in/lb
80-100 in/lb
in/l
130-150 in/lb
in/l
180-200 in/lb
200-250 in/lb
300-350 in/lb
350-400 in/lb
in/l
#6 @ 250MCM CU /AL
Part No 296-0079-003 Rev.:03
Tap Box
Meter Center
Meter Center
Spacer
Sp acer / Cale
3/4
3/4
Tightening Torque / Couple de serrage

Mounting Screw
Vis de montage
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
Connectors
Connecteurs
25-30 in/lb-po/livres
Tap Box
Wire / Fils
#6 @ #4
#2 @ #1
1/0 @ 2/0
3/0 @ 4/0
250 @ 300MCM
400 @ 500MCM
600 @ 750MCM
MLTB3-1200 To Connect Meter Center / Pour connecter le centre de compteurs MMC3

If this tap box is used for output and install with odd number of MMC3, use
connection adaptor kit MTBK12
Ground Wire Connectors
Si cette boite de raccordement est utilis comme boite de sortie avec un nombre
Connecteurs de mise la masse
impair de MMC3, utilisez le ncessaire de branchement MTBK12
Made in Canada
Fabrication Canadienne
LL13069
#6 @ 250MCM CU/AL
Part No 296-0079-004 Rev.:03
2-9
Data.08

Configuration Data
Selection
Configurations with feed through Tap Box 600A
METER
CENTRES
MLTB1-600FT
MLTB3-600FT
46 1/4
(1175)
253/4
(655)
MLTB1-600 FT
MLTB3-600 FT
201/2
(521)
24.0
(610)
Configurations with feed through Tap Box 1200A
MLTB1-1200FT
MLTB3-1200FT
46 1/4
(1175)
MLTB1-1200 FT
MLTB3-1200 FT
24.0
(610)
Note: For Feed-Through Tap Box 1200A, standard assembly is for left hand mounting. For right hand mounting, bus bar and insulated

support must be moved at the other hole set (marked with an "R") before wall installation.
2-10

Dimensions
Selection
Meter Stack Mounting Dimensions - Inches (mm)

MMC1
MMC3
2
METER
CENTRES
Side View
Back View
2-11

Dimensions
Selection
Meter Modules Dimensions - Inches (mm)

Meter Socket Modules:
MMS4-125
MMS5-125
METER
CENTRES
Meter Socket Module:

MMS7-100
Stack: MMC3
Meter Socket Modules:

MMS4-200
MMS5-200
MMS4-200QJ
MMS5-200QJ
2-12
Meter Socket Module:

MMS7-200

Knock Out Data
Selection
Tub end for Tap Boxes - Inches (mm)
11/4 - 11/2 - 2
3 - 3 1/2
Ref.
K.O. Trade Size
2
METER
CENTRES
Top tub end for Meter Stack - Inches (mm)
11/4 - 2 - 21/2 - 3
1 - 11/4 - 2 - 21/2
1 - 11/4 - 11/2 - 2
3/4 - 1
K.O. Trade Size
Ref.
2-13

Layout Example
Reference
Meter Centre layout example - Reference only

System: 120/240V 1Ph 3W, 10 KA
Dimension of each stack:

Height: 78" (1981mm)
Width: 14" (356mm)
METER
CENTRES
r Center Layout
Depth: 7 1/4" (184mm)
Vented Cover
Height of the modules: ( 24 Modules)

Construction Purpose
125A Module: 8 7/8" (225.5mm)
20/240V 1Ph 3W, 10 KA Overall
Width: 76 1/2" (1945mm)
Vented Cover
Vented Cover
Vented Cover
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
5 1/8"
130mm
n of each stack :
8" (1981mm)
" (356mm)
1/4" (184mm)
the modules :
dule: 8 7/8" (225.5mm) ( 24 Modules)
53 1/4"
1353mm
idth : 76 1/2" (1945mm)

78"
1981mm
25 3/4"
655mm
Direct Tap
with Transition Box
20 1/2"
521mm
2-14
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Module 125A
100A
Main Cross Bus

compartment
Main Cross Bus

compartment
Main Cross Bus

compartment
Main Cross Bus

compartment
Vented Cover
Vented Cover
Vented Cover
Vented Cover
14"
356mm
14"
356mm
14"
356mm
14"
356mm
14 1/2"
368mm
5 1/8"
130mm
POWER PRODUCT
Dry Type Transformers
Contents
Catalogue Coding System
3-3
General Purpose Transformers

Copper Winding
Aluminum Winding

3-4
3-5
Auto Transformers
3-6
Drive Isolation
3-7
Harmonics Mitigation
Zig-Zag Transformer (double output)
3-11
Dry Type
Transformers
3-8
3-9
3-10
Non-Linear Load
K-Rated Transformers

Type K Isolated Transformers

Super-Isolated Transformers (Computer Application)
600 Volt Class - Single and Three Phase
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Features
Single Phase Transformer Ampere Ratings
b Standard units are designed in

accordance with CSA standards.
Ventilated
b Designed for indoor installation;
enclosures suitable for outdoor
locations available as an option.
b Core and coils are designed with hightemperature materials rated for 220C;
standard units feature 150C winding
temperature rise.

b Precision wound
b Optional low temperature rise of 115 C
or 80 C winding temperature rise for
increased efficiency and additional
overload capability.

b Rugged sheet steel enclosure with
removable panels for access to the
internal wiring area.

b Neoprene noise dampening pads
isolate the core and coil from the
enclosure.
b Optional drip shields and wall brackets
available.

b High quality, electrical grade core steel.
3-2
General
Line Voltage (Volts)
KVA
120
240
480
600
2400
4160
25.0
12.5
6.25
5.00
1.25
0.72
5
7.5
10
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
150
200
250
333
41.7
62.5
83.3
125
208
313
417
625
833
1250
1667
2083
2775
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
104
156
208
313
417
625
833
1042
1388
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
52.1
78.1
104
156
208
313
417
521
694
8.33
12.5
16.7
25.0
41.7
62.5
83.3
125
167
250
333
417
555
2.08
31.3
4.17
6.25
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
83.3
104
139
1.20
1.80
2.40
3.61
6.01
9.01
12.0
18.0
24.0
36.1
48.1
60.1
80.0
Three Phase Transformer Ampere Ratings

Line Voltage (Volts)
KVA
208
240
480
600
2400
4160
16.7
14.4
7.22
5.77
1.44
0.83
10
15
30
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
450
500
600
750
1000
1500
2000
27.8
41.6
83.3
125
139
208
312
416
625
833
1249
1388
1665
2082
2776
4164
5551
24.1
36.1
72.2
108
120
180
271
361
541
722
1083
1203
1443
1804
2406
3608
4811
12.0
18.0
36.1
54.1
60.1
90.2
135
180
271
361
541
601
722
902
1203
1804
2406
9.62
14.4
28.9
43.3
48.1
72.2
108
144
217
289
433
481
577
722
962
1443
1925
2.41
3.61
7.22
10.8
12.0
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.1
72.2
108
120
144
180
241
361
481
1.39
2.08
4.16
6.25
6.94
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.2
41.6
62.5
69.4
83.3
104
139
208
278

Catalogue Coding System
Selection
CATALOGUE CODE
T = DRY TYPE
E = EPOXY
D = DRIVE
A = AUTO
KVA RATING
TEMPERATURE RISE
5 = 150 C
1 = 115 C
8 = 80 C
ELECTRO SHIELD
1 = 1x SHEILD
2 = 2x SHIELD
3 = 3x SHIELD
X = NONE
E = C802
BLANK = Non-C802
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
A = 240 V.
B = 208 V.
C = 380 V.
D = 416 V.
F = 480 V.
G = 600 V.
S = special voltage
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
1 = 1 PHASE
3 = 3 PHASE
C = COPPER
A = ALUMINUM
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
1 = 120/240 V.
2 = 240Y/139 V.
3 = 208Y/120 V.
4 = 380Y/220 V.
5 = 416Y/240 V.
6 = 480Y/277 V.
7 = 600Y/347V.
0 = special voltage
K FACTOR
K =4
L =9
M = 13
N = 20
P = 30
Q = 40
R = 50
X = NONE
V = NEMA 1 C/W DRIP COVER

D = NEMA 1 C/W DRIP SHIELD
S = NEMA 1 C/W SPRINKLER HOODS
R = NEMA 3R
W = NEMA 4
X = NEMA 4X
O = OPEN TYPE (CORE AND COILS ONLY)
E = CSA C802-2 HIGH EFFICIENCY REGULATIONS
This field can be blank (empty)

when it is blank it means that the
transformer is "Non-C802"
i.e. BLANK = Non-C802
3-3

Copper Winding
Selection
150C Rise - Primary 600 V or 480 V

Dimensionsc
B
A
Catalogue Number
KVA
Mountinga
Weight
Figure
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
lbs
kg
Noise
level (dB)
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
23
23
29
29
37
37
46
54
54
61
559
559
711
711
940
940
1168
1168
1372
1549
17
17
20
20
22
22
26
31
31
39
432
432
508
508
559
559
660
660
787
991
12
12
14
14
18
18
21
23
23
28
305
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
584
711
150
185
277
330
497
579
818
1049
1239
1916
75
69
137
152
218
279
364
494
577
871
50
50
50
50
55
55
60
65
65
60
4.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
21
27
28
28
37
37
46
46
58
58
58
60
80
508
660
686
737
940
940
1168
1168
1473
1473
1473
1524
2032
20
23
29
29
35
35
38
38
50
50
50
60
73
508
584
737
762
889
889
965
965
1270
1270
1270
1524
1854
12
13
14
14
18
18
21
21
26
26
26
33
45
279
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
660
660
660
838
1143
167
273
370
513
711
843
1287
1564
2374
2585
3049
3489
4334
79
120
155
176
323
384
585
711
1079
1175
1386
1586
1970
45
45
45
50
50
50
55
55
60
60
62
64
64
Taps b
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Single Phase, Secondary 120 / 240 V

T1*10015C5VXXE
T1*10025C5VXXE
T1*10037C5VXXE
T1*10050C5VXXE
T1*10075C5VXXE
T1*10100C5VXXE
T1*10150C5VXXE
T1*10200C5VXXE
T1*10250C5VXXE
T1*10333C5VXXE
15.
25.
37.5.
50
75
100
150
200
250
333
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Three Phase, Seconday 208 Y / 120 V

T3*30015C5VXXE
T3*30030C5VXXE
T3*30045C5VXXE
T3*30075C5VXXE
T3*30112C5VXXE
T3*30150C5VXXE
T3*30225C5VXXE
T3*30300C5VXXE
T3*30450C5VXXE
T3*30500C5VXXE
T3*30600C5VXXE
T3*30750C5VXXE
T3*31000C5VXXE
15.
30.
45.
75.
112.5
150
225
300
450
500
600
750
1000
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Features:
Options and Accessories:
b 3 - 333 KVA single phase

6 - 1,000 KVA three phase

b Copper winding
(standard 3 coil delta-wye three phase)

b High quality grain-oriented steel
laminations
b Insulation class 220C
b Compact and easy-to-install enclosure
b Quiet operation and adequate ventilation
b Manufactured to ISO 9001:2008
standard upon request

b Epoxy Vacuum Impregnated (EVI)
b Electrostatic shield
b Special paint (other than ASA 61 grey)
b 115C and 80C temperature rise
b Type 2, 3R, 4 and sprinklerproof enclosures
b Operating frequencies other than 60 Hertz
b Special voltage (for domestic or
export applications)
b Low loss and low noise special designs
b Anti-vibration pads
b Temperature probes
b Busbar to your specifications
Technical Data
Figure 1
Figure 2
* Primary Voltage F = 480V, G = 600V. See page 3-3 for Catalogue Code Detail.
aW
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
Single phase: 3
-10 KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN
15-333 KVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
Three phase: 6-10 KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN
15-1,000 KVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x
FCBN
b Taps:
3-4
c Dimensions are not applicable to: NEMA Type 2, 3R

and sprinklerproof enclosures.
All weights and dimensions are approximate and subject
to change without notice.
Figure 3

Aluminum Winding
Selection
Features:
b 15 - 333 KVA single phase

30 - 600 KVA three phase
b Aluminum winding (standard 3 coil delta-wye
three phase)

b High quality grain-oriented steel
laminations
b Compact and easy-to-install
enclosure
b Quiet operation and adequate
ventilation
b Economical alternative
b Electrostatic shield
b Type 2, 3R, 4 and sprinklerproof
enclosures
b Operating frequencies other than 60 Hertz
b Low loss and low noise special designs
b Anti-vibration pads
b Temperature probes
b Busbar to your specifications
Technical Data
Figure 1
Catalogue Number
KVA
Mountinga
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Figure 2
150C Rise - Primary 600 V or 480 V

Taps b
Figure
in.
mm
Dimensionsc
B
in.
mm
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
23
29
29
29
37
46
46
54
584
737
737
737
940
1168
1168
1372
17
20
20
20
22
26
26
31
Weight
in.
C
mm
lbs
kg
Noise
level (dB)
12
14
14
14
18
21
21
23
305
356
356
356
457
533
584
584
134
198
255
290
429
565
779
904
68
96
121
150
214
278
369
471
50
50
50
50
55
55
60
65
147
251
345
466
634
825
1168
1364
78
113
152
219
305
361
534
662
45
45
45
50
50
50
55
55
Single Phase, Secondary 120 / 240 V

T1*10015A5VXXE
T1*10025A5VXXE
T1*10037A5VXXE
T1*10050A5VXXE
T1*10075A5VXXE
T1*10100A5VXXE
T1*10150A5VXXE
T1*10200A5VXXE
T1*10250A5VXXE
T1*10333A5VXXE
15.
25.
37.5.
50.
75.
100.
150
200
250
333
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
432
508
508
508
559
660
787
787
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SIEMENS SALES OFFICE
Three Phase, Secondary 208 Y / 120 V

T3*30015A5VXXE
T3*30030A5VXXE
T3*30045A5VXXE
T3*30075A5VXXE
T3*30112A5VXXE
T3*30150A5VXXE
T3*30225A5VXXE
T3*30300A5VXXE
T3*30450A5VXXE
T3*30500A5VXXE
T3*30600A5VXXE
T3*30750A5VXXE
T3*31000A5VXXE
15.
30.
45.
75.
112.5.
150.
225
300
450
500
600
750
1000
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
21
27
28
30
37
37
46
46
508
660
686
737
940
1168
1168
1168
20
23
29
30
35
35
44
44
508
584
737
762
889
965
1118
1118
12
13
14
14
18
18
23
23
279
305
356
356
457
533
584
584
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SIEMENS SALES OFFICE
* Primary Voltage F = 480V, G = 600V. See page 3-3 for Catalogue Code Detail.
aW
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
Single phase: 15-333 KVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
Three phase: 3
0-300 KVA - 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN

Dimensions
are not applicable to: NEMA Type 2, 3R, 4
b Taps:
c

3-5
Auto Transformers
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Selection
Features:
b 600 V - 480 V 10 to 1,000 KVA

600 V - 240 V 10 to 1,000 KVA
600 V - 380 V 10 to 1,000 KVA

b Copper winding
b 3 coil, three phase
b High quality steel laminations
b Compact enclosure
b Silent operation

b Operating frequencies other than
60 Hertz

b Type 2 available upon request, 3R and
sprinklerproof enclosures
Technical Data
Figure 1
Figure 2
Three Phase: 150C Rise
in.
mm
Dimensionsb
B
in.
mm
18
18
18
20
26
26
26
27
37
37
37
46
46
457
457
457
508
660
660
660
686
940
940
940
1168
1168
18
18
18
20
23
23
23
29
35
35
35
38
38
457
457
457
508
584
584
584
736
889
889
889
965
965
10
10
10
11
12
12
12
14
18
18
18
21
21
254
254
254
279
305
305
305
356
457
457
457
533
533
112
112
112
168
253
271
286
396
584
711
740
919
1009
51
51
51
76
115
123
130
180
265
323
336
417
458
18
18
20
26
26
27
29
37
37
46
46
46
58
457
457
508
660
660
686
737
940
940
1168
1168
1168
1473
18
18
20
23
23
29
30
35
35
38
38
38
50
457
457
508
584
584
737
762
889
889
965
965
965
1270
10
10
11
12
12
14
14
18
18
21
21
21
26
254
254
279
305
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
533
600
110
115
161
174
280
374
513
683
711
1156
1211
1289
1978
50
52
73
79
127
170
233
310
323
525
550
585
898
18
18
26
26
27
29
37
37
46
46
46
58
58
457
457
660
660
636
737
940
940
1168
1168
1168
1473
1473
18
18
23
23
29
30
35
35
38
38
44
50
50
457
457
584
584
737
762
889
889
965
965
1118
1270
1270
10
10
12
12
14
14
18
18
21
21
23
26
26
254
254
305
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
584
660
660
115
134
260
280
385
513
694
846
1244
1566
1630
2203
2377
52
61
118
127
175
233
315
384
555
711
740
1000
1079
A
Catalogue Number
KVA
Figure
Mountinga
Weight
C
in.
mm
lbs
kg
Primary 600 Y / 347 V, Secondary 480 Y / 277 V

A3G60010C5VXXE
A3G60015C5VXXE
A3G60030C5VXXE
A3G60045C5VXXE
A3G60075C5VXXE
A3G60112C5VXXE
A3G60150C5VXXE
A3G60225C5VXXE
A3G60300C5VXXE
A3G60450C5VXXE
A3G60500C5VXXE
A3G60600C5VXXE
A3G60750C5VXXE
10.
15.
30.
45.
75.
112.5.
150.
225
300
450
500
600
750
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F

A3G40010C5VXXE
A3G40015C5VXXE
A3G40030C5VXXE
A3G40045C5VXXE
A3G40075C5VXXE
A3G40112C5VXXE
A3G40150C5VXXE
A3G40225C5VXXE
A3G40300C5VXXE
A3G40450C5VXXE
A3G40500C5VXXE
A3G40600C5VXXE
A3G40750C5VXXE
10.
15.
30.
45.
75.
112.5.
150.
225
300
450
500
600
750
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F

A3G20010C5VXXE
A3G20015C5VXXE
A3G20030C5VXXE
A3G20045C5VXXE
A3G20075C5VXXE
A3G20112C5VXXE
A3G20150C5VXXE
A3G20225C5VXXE
A3G20300C5VXXE
A3G20450C5VXXE
A3G20500C5VXXE
A3G20600C5VXXE
A3G20750C5VXXE
aW
10.
15.
30.
45.
75.
112.5.
150.
225
300
450
500
600
750
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
Front access. Type 1 enclosure
b Dimensions are not applicable to: NEMA Type 2, 3R, 4
3-6
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F

Please contact your local Siemens sales office for

Pricing Information.
Transformers for Variable Speed Drives

Drive Isolation
Features:
Selection
b Copper winding
b High quality grain-oriented steel laminations
b Quiet operation
b Epoxy vacuum impregnated (EVI)
b Primary voltages available:

Delta 600, 575, 480, 460, 240, 230 Volts
b Secondary voltages available:
Wye or delta 575, 480, 460, 240, 230 Volts
b The three phase transformers are three coil type
with delta-wye or delta-delta connections
Primary 600 V, 150C Temperature Rise
Mountinga
D3*0020C5VXX
D3*0027C5VXX
D3*0034C5VXX
D3*0040C5VXX
D3*0051C5VXX
D3*0063C5VXX
D3*0075C5VXX
D3*0093C5VXX
D3*0118C5VXX
D3*0145C5VXX
D3*0175C5VXX
D3*0220C5VXX
D3*0275C5VXX
D3*0330C5VXX
D3*0440C5VXX
D3*0550C5VXX
D3*0660C5VXX
D3*0750C5VXX
D3*1000C5VXX
20.
27.
34.
40.
51
63
75
93
118
145
175
220
275
330
440
550
660
750
1000
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Taps bc
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Figure
in.
mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
30
37
37
37
46
46
46
58
58
60
60
80
660
660
686
686
686
737
737
940
940
940
1168
1168
1168
1168
1473
1473
1524
1524
2032
23
23
23
29
29
29
29
30
35
35
35
38
44
44
50
50
60
60
73
584
584
737
737
737
762
762
889
889
889
965
965
965
965
1270
1270
1524
1524
1854
Weight
C
in.
mm
lbs
kg
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
18
18
18
21
23
23
26
26
33
33
45
305
305
356
356
356
356
356
457
457
457
533
533
533
533
660
660
838
838
1143
229
264
290
341
399
482
506
577
812
850
1006
1215
1521
1811
2374
2796
3241
3489
4334
104
120
132
155
181
219
230
262
369
386
457
552
691
823
1079
1271
1473
1586
1970
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
KVA
A
Catalogue Number
Dimensionsd
B
in.
mm
Technical Data
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
* Please refer to Page 3-3 for Catalogue Code Detail.

aW
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
600 V primary only:
7
.5 KVA
1-5% FCAN, 1-5% FCBN
11-1,000 KVA 2-2 1/2% FCAN, 2 1/2% FCBN
b Taps:
c Taps
other than 600 V primary, contact your local

Siemens sales office.
d Dimensions

* Please contact your local Siemens sales office for
Pricing Information.
3-7
K-Rated Transformers
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Single and Three Phase
The VKSC and VKTC transformers are

manufactured for applications where nonlinear
(nonsinusoidal) loads are predominant. The
transformer construction minimizes losses
associated with harmonic currents, and
the impregnation process ensures a quiet
operation.
Examples of harmonic content with K factor:
K4 Factor
100% 60 Hertz
16% of fundamental for 3rd
10% of fundamental for 5th
5.5% of fundamental for 9th...up to 25th
K13 Factor
100% 60 Hertz
11% of fundamental for 9th...up to 25th
Selection
Applications:
b Nonlinear loads
b Installations with isolated ground
b Industrial programmable controllers (PLC)
b Protected receptacles for hospitals
b Protected receptacles (orange)
Technical Data
Features and Options:
b Copper winding
b Insulation class 220C,
b 80C, 115C or 150C temperature rise
available
b High-quality grain-oriented steel
laminations

nclosure
b Compact and easy-to-install e
b Quiet operation
b Proper ventilation
b Neutral sized for twice the rated current
b Voltage of 600 to 208 Y / 120 V, 60 Hertz,
delta-wye, for three phase
transformers (3coils)
b Voltage of 600 to 120 / 240 V, 60 Hertz, for
single phase transformers (2coils)

b Optional electrostatic shield
b Special voltages available upon request
Figure 1
Figure 2
Primary 600 V, 150C Rise, K13

KVA
Mountinga
Taps b
Figure
in.
mm
Dimensionscde
B
in.
mm
in.
Weight
C
mm
lbs
kg
Single-phase
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
150
200
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
22
28
28
37
37
46
46
54
559
711
711
940
940
1168
1168
1372
17
20
20
22
22
26
26
31
432
508
508
559
559
660
660
787
12
14
14
18
18
21
21
23
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
584
185
277
330
497
579
818
1049
1239
84
126
150
226
263
372
477
563
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
27
27
28
28
30
37
37
46
46
660
660
737
737
940
940
1168
1168
1473
23
23
29
29
30
35
35
44
44
584
584
762
762
889
889
965
965
1270
13
13
14
14
14
18
18
23
23
305
305
356
356
457
457
533
533
660
273
370
484
513
711
924
1287
1628
2374
104
132
196
181
262
369
457
691
823
Three-phase
15
30
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
For Catalogue and Pricing Information, please contact your local Siemens sales office.
a W
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
Single phase: 3-7.5 KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN (4.5%)
10-333 KVA - 2 FCAN, 2 FCBN (2.5%)
Three phase: 6- KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN (4.5%)

10-300 KVA - 2 FCAN, 2 FCBN (2.5%)
c Factor K4 dimensions and weights may be lower than
the data shown in the table.
b Taps:
3-8
or dimensions and weights of transformer factor

F
higher than K13, consult your local Siemens
sales office.
e Dimensions are not applicable to: NEMA Type 2, 3R, 4
d
All weights and dimensions are approximate and subject to

change without notice.
Type K Isolated Transformers

Selection
Applications:
All TIK-U and TISK-U Series VA

PROTECTION isolated transformers meet
the most stringent industrial standards on
account of their optimal design, superior
quality and easy installation.
The TIK-U AND TISK-U transformers are
manufactured for applications where
non-linear (non-sinusoidal) loads are
predominant, and are constructed to
minimize losses associated with
harmonic currents. The impregnation
process ensures a quiet operation.
K4 Factor
100% 60 Hertz
5.5% of fundamental for 9th...up to 25th
K13 Factor
100% 60 Hertz
11% of fundamental for 9th...up to 25th
b Nonlinear loads
b Industrial programmable controllers
(PLC)
b Protected receptables (orange)
Technical Data
Features and Options:
b Copper winding
b 80C, 115C or 150C temperature rise
available
b High-quality grain-oriented steel
laminations
nclosure
b Compact and easy-to-install e
b Adequate ventilation
b Neutral sized for twice the rated
current
b 480 V / 60 Hz input voltage and
208 Y / 120 V output for three phase
transformers
b Delta-Wye winding configurations
(3coils)
b Electrostatic shield optional
b Surge suppressor optional
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Figure 1
Figure 2

KVA
Mountinga
Taps b
Figure
in.
mm
Dimensionscde
B
in.
mm
in.
Weight
mm
lbs
kg
Single Phase
7.5
10
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
150
200
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
28
31
31
37
37
43
43
51
51
66
711
787
787
940
940
1092
1092
1295
1295
1676
16
18
18
23
23
28
28
35
35
42
406
457
457
584
584
711
711
889
889
1067
13
14
14
18
18
21
21
24
24
31
330
356
356
457
457
533
533
610
610
787
128
202
202
294
380
522
641
933
983
1732
58
92
92
134
173
237
291
424
447
787
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
28
31
37
37
37
43
43
51
51
66
711
787
940
940
940
1092
1092
1295
1295
1676
22
25
32
32
32
39
39
48
48
56
559
635
813
813
813
991
991
1219
1219
1422
13
14
18
18
18
21
21
24
24
31
330
356
457
457
457
533
533
610
610
787
192
303
441
472
588
783
961
1400
1475
2598
87
138
200
215
267
356
437
636
670
1181
Three Phase
10
15
30
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
a W
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
480 primary:
6 x 2.5%, 4 FCBN, 2 FCAN
Other primary voltage: 4 x 2.5%, 2 FCBN, 2 FCAN
Factor K4 dimensions and weights may be lower than
For dimensions and weights of transformer factor
higher than K13, consult your local Siemens sales
office.
bTaps:
c
d
imensions are not applicable to: NEMA Type 2, 3R, 4

D

3-9
Super-Isolated Transformers (Computer Application)

Selection
The VSSC and VSTC transformers have

a hybrid design using an isolated transformer with hybrid filter (filter and surge
suppressor (TVSS)).
3
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Technical Data
Features:
Applications:
b 3-333 KVA single phase

6-1,000 KVA three phase
b Copper winding
(standard 3 coil delta-wye three phase)

b High quality grain-oriented steel laminations

b Compact and easy-to-install
enclosure

b Quiet operation and adequate
ventilation
b Manufactured to ISO or 9001:2008
standards upon request
b Nonlinear loads
b Industrial programmable controllers
(PLC)

b Protected receptables (orange)
b Installations where noise and
transients are a critical problem

Figure 1
Figure 2

KVA
Mountinga
Taps b
Figure
in.
mm
Dimensionscde
B
in.
mm
Weight
C
in.
mm
lbs
kg
Single Phase
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
150
200
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
23
29
29
37
37
46
54
54
711
711
711
940
940
1168
1168
1372
17
20
20
22
22
26
31
31
508
508
508
559
559
660
660
787
12
14
14
18
18
21
23
23
356
356
356
457
457
533
533
584
177
265
312
479
565
820
1089
1215
89
137
152
218
279
365
494
577
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
27
27
28
28
30
37
37
46
46
660
686
737
737
940
1168
1168
1168
1168
23
23
29
29
30
35
35
44
44
584
737
762
762
889
965
965
1118
1118
13
13
14
14
14
18
18
23
23
305
356
356
356
457
533
533
584
584
229
291
388
399
578
813
1008
1523
1814
104
132
176
181
262
369
457
691
823
Three Phase
15
30
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
a W
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
Single-phase: 3
-10 KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN
15-333 KVA - 2 FCAN, 2 FCBN
Three-phase: 6-10 KVA - 1 x FCAN, 1 x FCBN
10-300 KVA - 2 FCAN, 2 FCBN
b Taps:
3-10
c Factor
K4 dimensions and weights may be lower than

d For dimensions and weights of transformer factor
higher than K13, consult Sales.
e Dimensions

and sprinklerproof enclosures and approved type
1 enclosure in the technical data table.

Zig-Zag Transformers
Double Output
Selection
Applications:
b Three phase four wire electrical
system with single phase nonlinear
load such as lighting ballasts,
computers, printers etc.
Technical Data
The (0 / -30), series double output

transformers are specifically designed
to reduce third harmonic (and 9th, 15th,
21st...) voltage distortion at the load and
to cancel third (and 9th, 15th, 21st...),
5th, 7th, 17th, 19th... harmonic currents
in supply.
These transformers are high-quality three
phase transformers equipped with an
electrostatic shield.
Unlike K-rated transformers, which are
designed to survive in installations having
harmonics, this series transformers
reduce harmonic currents in supply.
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Figure 1
Figure 2
Primary 600 V, 150C Rise

KVAb
Mountinga
Figure
A
in.
mm
Dimensions
B
in.
mm
Weight
C
in.
mm
lbs
kg
VZTC (0 / -30) Series

15
30
45
75
112.5
150
225
300
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL SIEMENS
SALES OFFICE.
a W
= Wall mount
F = Floor mount
nominal KVA per secondary
b 50%
Note: Taps
Three-phase: 15-300 KVA - 2 X FCAN, 2 X FCBN
(2.5%)
3-11
Mitigator Harmonic Mitigation Transformers

Technical Specifications
Energy Savings :
Transformers must be certified and bear the CSA C802.2
Harmonic Treatment :
3rd, 9th, 15th... on the secondary and 5th, 7th, 17th, 19th... with 30 phase shift on the primary common bus
Load Compatibility :
K-20 load profile, crest factor of 5
Load Imbalance :
Reduction of fundamental current imbalance from secondary to primary of transformer
Windings :
Copper
Secondary Windings :
Wound to mitigate zero sequence surrent flux. These zero-sequence currents shall not be coupled into the primary windings of the transformer.
Phase Shift :
Windings configured to provide primary-to-secondary phase shift of -30 or 0 (as specified on drawings)
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Mitigator, Series single output
Zero Sequence Data :
Less than 0.95% ZS impedance, less than 0.3% ZS reactance
Voltage Distortion :
Non linear load test bench certified
Certified Performance :
Non linear load test bench certified
Nameplate Impedance :
2.5 4.0% (up to 75 kVA), 5.0% max (112.5-300 kVA)
Insulation Class :
Class 220
Operating Temperature Rise :
130 C
Efficiency :
As per CSA C802.2 program at 35% loading
Electrostatic Shield :
Single shield
Impregnation Method :
Epoxy vacuum impregnation
Construction Standards :
Applicable NEMA, CSA, and ANSI/IEEE standards
Certification / Labeling :
CSA C22.2 No 47, CSA C802.2
Neutral Rating :
200% of rated secondary phase current
Frequency :
60 Hz
Taps :
4 x 2.5% full capacity taps (2-FCBN + 2-FCAN)
Type :
Three-phase, common core, dry-type, convection air cooled
Sound Level :
Per CSA C9, NEMA ST-20
Enclosure :
Type 2, ASA #61 grey
Options
1. Dual Output :
0/-30 and -15/-45 mitigates 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th, 15th, 17th, 19th... on the secondary and 11th,13th...with 15
phase shift on the primary common bus
2. Field Adjustable Phase shift* :
+15, -15, 0 supplementary phase shift
3. Operating Temperature Rise :
80 C, 115 C
4. Enclosure :
Open-type, Type 3R, sprinkler-proof
5. Thermocouples :
Type K, one per leg in the secondary winding
6. Thermal Sensors :
NO and NF contact set at 200 C, one per leg in the secondary winding
7. SPD :
80 000 Amps per mode surge current capacity, UL 1449 approved, EMI / RFI filtering
8. Custom Colour :
Specify
Standard Product :
Substitution :
3-12
Product must be standard item in manufacturers published catalogue. Non linear test bench certified. Custom
design and / or packaging to meet this specification are not acceptable.
Alternate must be approved by the engineer 10 days prior to bid closing, subject to meeting all aspects
of this specification
MITIGATOR
HARMONIC MITIGATION TRANSFORMERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATONS
Harmonic Mitigation Transformers

Copper DZ(0) Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 2, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, Load profile K20, ESS, 130 C
kVA
Mounting
Taps %
Taps
H
inch
mm
inch
Dimensions
mm
inch
Noise
Weight
D
mm
lbs.
Weight
kg.
Height
686
Wiidth
Depth305
15
W/F
27
23
584
12
277
126
%
po
mm
po
mm
po
mm
lb
kg
30
W/F
28
711
29
737
14
356
1039
195
15
W/F
4 x 2.5
27
686
23
584
12
305
277
126
45
W/F
28
711
29
737
14
356
453
206
30
W/F
4 x 2.5
28
711
29
737
14
356
1039
195
75
F
37
940
35
889
18
457
664
302
4 x42.5
45
W/F
x 2.5
28
711
29
737
14
356
453
206
112.5
F
46
1168
38
965
21
533
1005
457
75
F
4 x 2.5
37
940
35
889
18
457
664
302
150
F
46
1168
38
965
21
533
1170
532
112.5
F
4 x 2.5
46
1168
38
965
21
533
1005
457
225
F
46
1168
44
1118
23
584
1635
743
150
F
4 x 2.5
46
1168
38
965
21
533
1170
532
300
F
46
1168
44
1118
23
584
1940
882
225
F
4 x 2.5
46
1168
44
1118
23
584
1635
743
300 DZ(0) FSerie VZ3C,
4 xThree-phase,
2.5
46Type 3R,
1168
44 V, Secondary
1118
23
584 profile
1940
882
Copper
Primary 600
208/120V,
Load
K20, ESS,
130 C
(1) W = Wall mount F = Floor mount
Dimensions
(2) Taps :
THREE-PHASE
:
15
300
kVA
2
x
FCAN,
2
x
FCBN
kVA
Mounting
Taps %
H
W
(3) All weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice.
inch
15
W/F
30
W/F
mm
inch
Weight
mm
inch
mm
lbs.
kg.
level
Noise
dB.
level
45
dB
45
45
45
45
50
45
50
50
50
50
55
50
55
55
55
Noise
level
dB.
45
W/F
Copper
DZ(0)
Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 3R, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, Load prole K20,
75
F
ESS, 130 C
4 x 2.5
Consult your local Siemens sales office
112.5
kVA
150
Mounting
F
225
300
15
30
45
75
112.5
150
225
300
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
Taps
Dimensions
Height
%
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
po
Wiidth
mm
po
Depth
mm
po
mm
Consult our Customer Sevice
Noise
level
Weight
lb
kg
dB

(2) Taps :
THREE-PHASE :
15 - 300 kVA
2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
(3) All weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice.
a W
= Wall mount
b Taps:
F = Floor mount
Three-phase: 15 - 300 kVA 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN

weights and dimensions are subject to change
without notice.
c All
3-13
DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
kVA
Mounting
Copper DZ(0) Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 2, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, Load prole K20,
ESS, 130 C
Dimensions
MITIGATOR
HARMONIC MITIGATION TRANSFORMERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATONS
Harmonic Mitigation Transformers

DRY TYPE
TRANSFORMERS
Copper FAPST-Z(-15/0/+15) Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 2, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, load profile K20, ESS, 130 C
Copper FAPST-Z(-15/0/+15) Serie VZ3C, Three-phase,

Type 2, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, load
Dimensions
Noise
Weight
pro
le
K20,
ESS,
130
C
kVA
Mounting
Taps %
H
W
D
level
kVA
Mounting
15
W/F
30
W/F
45
15
W/F
W/F
Taps
inch
28
mm
inch
711
29
Height
mm
Dimensions
737
Width
inch
14
mm
lbs.
356
328
Depth
Weight
kg.
149
dB.
Noise
level
45
28
29
737
14
356
442
201
45
%
po 711 mm
po
mm
po
mm
lb
kg
dB
28
711
29
737
14
356
508
231
45
4 x 2.5
28
711
29
737
14
356
328
149
45
75
F
35 29
889737
1814
457
766
348
50
30
W/F
4 x 2.5 37 28 940 711
356
442
201
45
4 x 2.5
112.5
F
46
1168
38
965
21
533
1032
469
50
45
W/F
4 x 2.5
28
711
29
737
14
356
508
231
45
150
FF
38 35
965889
2118
533
1239
563
50
75
4 x 2.5 46 37 1168 940
457
766
348
50
225
FF
1118965
2321
584
1784
811
55
112.5
4 x 2.5 46 46 11681168 44 38
533
1032
469
50
300
FF
1118965
2321
584
2171
987
55
150
4 x 2.5 46 46 11681168 44 38
533
1239
563
50
225
F
4 x 2.5
46
1168
44
1118
23
584
1784
811
55
Copper FAPST-Z(-15/0/+15) Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 3R, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V, load profile K20, ESS, 130 C
300
F
4 x 2.5
46
1168
44
1118
23
584
2171
987
55
Dimensions
(2)kVA
Taps :
Mounting
Taps %
H
W
THREE-PHASE :
15 - 300 kVA
2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
inch
mm
(3) All weights and dimensions are subject to changeinch
without notice. mm
15
W/F
30
W/F
Weight
D
inch
mm
lbs.
kg.
Noise
level
dB.
Copper
FAPST-Z(-15/0/+15)
Serie VZ3C, Three-phase, Type 3R, Primary 600 V, Secondary 208/120V,
45
W/F
load
pro
le
K20,
ESS,
130
C
75
F
112.5
kVA
F
Mounting
150
225
300
15
30
45
75
112.5
150
225
300
W/F
W/F
W/F
F
F
F
F
F
Consult your local Siemens sales office
4 x 2.5
Taps
Dimensions
Height
%
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
po
Width
mm
po

(2) Taps :
THREE-PHASE :
15 - 300 kVA
2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN
(3) All weights and dimensions
are subject to change without notice.
a W = Wall mount
F = Floor mount
b Taps:
Three-phase: 15 - 300 kVA 2 x FCAN, 2 x FCBN

weights and dimensions are subject to change
without notice.
c All
3-14
Depth
mm
po
mm
Noise
level
Weight
lb
kg
dB
POWER PRODUCT
Loadcentres
Contents
4
LOADCENTRES
Application and Description

4-2
Product Offering and Specification Guide
4-3
4-4
Product Features and Customer Benefits
4-5
EQL & SEQ Single phase Loadcentres
4-6
EQL Loadcentres with main lug only
SEQ Service Entrance Loadcentres
4-6
EQL Loadcentre Type 3R
4-7
SEQ Service Entrance Loadcentres Type 3R
4-7
SEQ Dual Listed/cULus Loadcentres

4-8
EQ4 Three phase Loadcentres 4-9
SPA panel, Mini panels and Enclosed Breaker 4-10
EQG Generator Panels
EQG 3 Pole
4-11
EQG 2 Pole
4-11
Plug in Branch Breakers Type Q
Full Module (1" per pole)
4-12
Half Module (1/2" per pole): Twin and Quad Type
4-12
Ground Fault Interrupters 4-13
Arc Fault Interrupters 4-13
Surge Arrester Breakers 4-13
Replacement Main Breakers 4-13
Bolt-On Branch Breakers Typ BQ
Full Module (1" per pole)
4-14
Blue Line Breakers 4-14
Accessories 4-15
Surge Protection
Power Service Entrance Surge Protection
4-16
Telephone Service Entrance Surge Protection
4-17
Coaxial Service Entrance Surge Protection
4-17
Knockout Data for Loadcentres
4-18 4-19
Line Diagrams/Dimension Drawings for Breakers 4-20
Lug Data 4-20
Loadcentres
Applications and Descriptions

No. Applications
LOADCENTRES
Description
Products
Miscellaneous Applications
Standard Main Lugs Only P
anel
EQL Loadcentre-Indoor & Outdoor Type
Single Family
SEQ Loadcentre Indoor & Outdoor Type
uplex Units, Small Apartment Building,

D
Small Professional and Commercial Building
(Two to Six Units Maximum)
a) SEQ Service Entrance Equipment Indoor & Outdoor Type

b) EQL Main Lugs Loadcentre Indoor & Outdoor Type
ffice Building/Condo/Apartment Building

O
(3 Application)

a) Switchboards
b) Busways
c) Modular Metering
d) EQ4 Loadcentres Main Lug only or Main Breaker
mall Industrial/Commercial Building

S
(3 Application)
a) Switchboards
b) Busways
c) 3 Modular Metering
d) EQ4 Load Centres Main Lug
Only or Main Circuit Breaker
5

A loadcentre is a metal enclosed distribution

panel containing circuit breakers which distribute,
protect and control lighting and power circuits
in residential and light commercial applications,
including single-family homes, townhouses,
apartment buildings, and small office buildings.
All Siemens Loadcentres can be classified into
two types: main lug or main circuit breaker. Each
Siemens Loadcentre consists of three basic
components: the enclosure, the interior, and
the trim. The enclosure is used to contain the
circuit breakers which mount on the interior. The
trim seals the enclosure, offering protection to
personnel from the environment.
A complete line of breakers and accessories which
give Siemens Loadcentres flexibility. For example,
Ground Fault Interrupters protect personnel, an
important consideration with the stress placed
on personnel protection by the CEC. Handle ties,
handle blocking devices, padlocking devices and
filler plates are also available. Neutral lug kits in a
variety of wire range sizes.
4-2
Speeds Your Installation

With Every Turn!
Included into all Loadcentres and Q Breakers
Loadcentres
Product Offering and Specificaton Guide
Application
Individual circuit breakers are thermal

magnetic, quick-make quick-break, trip
free, plug-in construction. All two and
three pole breakers are common trip. All
circuit breakers are CSA listed under file
#14374.
*Series rating labels on all loadcentres.
Loadcentre enclosures and trims are

formed of cold rolled, code gauge steel.
All devices are finished with ANSI 61
grey paint (electro deposition painting
process).
4-3
LOADCENTRES
Specification Guide Loadcentres
The combination flush/surface trim is flat

and plumb in appearance. The Siemens
Type 3R Loadcentre features industry
exclusive gasketed door for improved
weatherproof protection. The enclosures
and interiors provide 41/4 (108 mm) side
wiring gutters for branch circuits. Main
bus bars are formed of cold rolled, one
piece tin plated (acid bath tin, zincate
process) aluminum. Copper bus is also
available. Main lugs, neutral assemblies,
and ground bars are suitable for copper
or aluminum conductors and comply with
the requirements of CSA. The extended
capacity fully distributed neutrals give
a neutral termination at every breaker
position, and is mounted, along with bus
bars, on a base part made of engineered
resin. CSA listed for 60/75C wiring
applications; ratings are as follows:
loadcentre main terminals 60/75C cu/al
wire; branch breaker terminals60/75C
cu/al wire. All loadcentres are CSA listed
under file #13069.
Main lug loadcentre,

b 1 Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 to 200A,
2/4 - 40/80 circuits
b 3 Phase 4W 120/208V, 100 to 225A,
12 - 42 circuits
b Outdoor Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W,
120/240V, 100 to 200A, 8/16 40/80 circuits
Main Breaker loadcentre,
b 1 Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 to 200A,
12/24 - 60/120 circuits
b 3 Phase 4W 120/208V, 100 to 200A,
24 - 42 circuits
b Out door Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 100 to 200A,
16/32 - 40/80 circuits
b Dual certified loadcentre 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 100 to 200A, 38 circuits
Generator panel
b Generator Panel 3 Pole 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 30 to 100A,
6/12- 34/68 circuits
b Generator Panel 2 Pole 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 30 to 100A,
8/16 - 36/72 circuits
SPA panel
b Type 3R, 1Phase 3 W 120/240V, 125A,
4/8 circuits
Mini panel/ Enclosed breaker,
b Indoor, 1Phase 3 W 120/240V, 60 &
125A, 2 circuits
b Outdoor Type 3R, 1 Phase 3 W
120/240V, 60 & 125A, 3 &
2/4 - 4/8 circuits
Description
Circuit breaker
Plug- in
Interrupting rating of 10kA
b Full module
1 Pole 15-70 Amp
2 Pole 15-200 Amp
3 Pole 15-100 Amp
b Half module
Twin: two single-pole, 15-15 to
40-15 Amp
Quad: two single-pole and one 2-pole
inner breaker, 15-15 to 15-40 Amp
Bolt- on
Interrupting rating of 10kA & 22kA
b Full module
1 Pole 15-70 Amp
2 Pole 15-125 Amp
3 Pole 15-100 Amp
Ground fault circuit intrrupter
b 1 and 2 Pole, 15- 60A, 5 and
30mA sensitivity
Arc fault circuit intrrupter
Interrupting rating of 10kA & 22kA
b 1 Pole, 15 and 20 Amp
Surge arrester breakers
b Two single pole breakers and one
surge arrester, 15 and 20 Amp
Surge protection device (SPD)
b Power service entrance surge protection
b Telephone service entrance
surge protection
b Coaxial service entrance
surge protection
Loadcentres
Product Features and Customer Benefits
Made in Canada, for Canada:

Faster delivery and better service.
Buying Canadian supports
Canadian manufacturing
Straight in wiring design:

Helps reduce the need to bend
cables and wires
LOADCENTRES
Combination slot/Robertson
neutral and ground screws:
Allowing for installation flexibility,
enabling simple, one-tool installa tion and speed wiring
Both aluminum and copper bus

bars: Meets any specification and
job site requirement
Extended capacity fully

distributed neutrals: Easily
accessible, reduces installation
time and simplifies wiring
Gasketed hinge
door with outdoor
loadcentre: Provides
easy installation and
improved weatherproof
protection
Indoor loadcentres (type 1) can

be mounted for either top or bottom feed: Meeting job site requirements and reducing cable waste
Suitable for up to 22 kA short

circuit current rating: Provides
increased high fault current
protection
Combination flush/surface trim

in three colours: Meets any
application need
Patented INSTA-WIRE neutrals

and ground bars: Allows for
faster installation as screws
are backed out, ready for wire
insertion
Factory installed ground bars:

Reduces installation time and
cost, no need to order additional
ground bar kits
A flexible extruded plastic base

pan: Makes breaker installation
and removal quick and easy
Concentric knockouts:
Makes wiring easy
Features and Benefits

Siemens provides the broadest product portfolio related to single and multifamily
applications. Flexibility, innovation and quality are the hallmarks of Siemens products for
single and multi-family applications providing the customer with unmatched value. One
example is our quick-make quick-break circuit breakers which give homeowners peace of
mind and fast acting circuit protection. Our whole house surge protection solutions, arc fault
and ground fault circuit interrupters provide additional protection against the risks of
electrocution, fire hazard and property damage. With the comprehensive selection of
options and accessories, Siemens loadcentres and breakers are the smart choice for the
conscientious customer.
4-4
Loadcentres

SEQ
24
100
SM
Panel Type

EQL = 1-Phase main lug

SEQ = 1-Phase main breaker
EQ4 = 3-Phase, main lug and main breaker
EQG = Generator panel
*Note: For EQG 2 Pole Generator panel, the NSN (none switched neutral)
is added to the part number. Ex: EQG860NSND
Number of Circuits
Maximum number of circuits
Main Ampere Rating

Ex: 100 = 100 Amp
*Note: It comes with the type of main breaker for EQ4 3-Phase
Ex: BQ100 = 100 Amp
Main breaker mounting position for SEQ loadcentres only
LOADCENTRES
Blank = Standard top mounted

SM = Side mounted
Door
Blank = Without door
D = With door
* For SEQ loadcentres only. The doors for EQL,EQ4, EQG and SEQ Type 3R loadcentres are factory installed.
Type of Bus Bar

Blank = Aluminum
C = Copper
Enclosure Type
Blank= Type 1
R= Type 3R
Colour
Blank = Grey
W = White
B = Beige
*Only available for EQL and SEQ loadcentres.
EQL white/beige and SEQ white/beige are only available with door.
EQ442225
EQG860NSND
EQL12125D
SEQ24100SMCR
SEQ32200
he Catalogue numbering system applies only to EQL,

T
EQL Type 3R, SEQ, SEQ Type 3R, EQ4 and EQG loadcentres.
4-5
Loadcentres
EQL & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres
Selection
Selection and Ordering Data

EQL Loadcentres with main lugs only 1 phase 3 wire 240 V ACmax.
Skid
Qty.
Main
Amps

H
Lug
Data
Mounting
Trim
Door Kit
Catalogue
Number
Factory
Mod.
2/4
EQL260S
330
60
7
(178)
5
(127)
23/4
(70)
surface
N/A
N/A
4/8
EQL4100
90
100
125/8
(322)
65/8
(168)
31/2
(90)
comb.
N/A
N/A
8/16
EQL8100D*
72
100
147/8
(378)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK8-A
N/A
12/24
EQL12125Db
45
125
167/8
(429)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK12-A
16/32
EQL16125Db
45
125
187/8
(479)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK16-A
Catalogue
Number
24/48
EQL24125Db
36
125
241/8
(613)
131/32
(331)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK24-A
LOADCENTRES
Number
of
Circuits
32/64
EQL32200D
27
200
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKL32-2A
40/80
EQL40200D
27
200
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKL40-2A
EQL24125D
Note: EQL8100D through EQL40200D are stocked complete with doors
*Neutral bar only on one side of panel.
Service Entrance Loadcentres with Factory installed main breaker 1 phase 3 wire 240 V ACmax.
SEQ40200
12/24
SEQ12060SM
54
60
175/8
(448)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
6-2/0
comb.
DK1216SM-1
16/32
SEQ16060SMb
36
60
195/8
(498)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
6-2/0
comb.
DK1216SM-1
24/48
SEQ24060SMb
36
60
241/8
(613)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
6-2/0
comb.
DK24SM-1
12/24
16/32
SEQ12100SM
SEQ16100SM
54
36
100
171/2
(444)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK1216SM-1
24/48
24/48
24/48
SEQ24100SMb
SEQ24100SMKn
SEQ24125SMb
36
241/8
(613)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK24SM-1
24/48
SEQ24150b
SEQ24200
27
150
200
27
(686)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKS24-2A
32/64
SEQ32100SM
SEQ32125SM
27
100
125
271/8
(689)
131/8
(333)
33/4
(95)
4-2/0
comb.
DK32SM-1
32/64
SEQ32150
SEQ32200
27
150
200
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKS32-2A
40/80
SEQ40100
SEQ40125
27
100
125
36
(914)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKS40-1A
40/80
SEQ40150
SEQ40200b
27
150
200
36
(914)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
DKS40-2A
60/120
SEQ60200
18
200
46
(1168)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
6-250
MCM
comb.
N/A
N/A
Certified for use with any combination of full

or half module plug-in circuit breakers.
Certiied for mounting vertical, horizontal or
inverted and for use with CU/AL conductors
including compact stranded. All neutral bar
connectors are No. 14 - No.4.
4-6
125
Standard SEQ24100SMK with additional knockouts to bottom plate
Note: Comb= Combination Flush/Surface mounted

100
Typical circuit rating (ie. 24/48) indicates the circuit

capacity of the loadcentre is 24 full module (1)
breaker of 48 half-module (1/2) breakers.
a
Factory modification, see next page.
For copper bus add suffix C to existing

part number. 4 weeks delivery required.
Loadcentres
EQL & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres
Factory Modificationsa
Type
Description
Catalogue Number
Example
EQL
White door and trim

Beige door and trim
add suffix...W
add suffix...B
EQL24125DW
EQL24125DB
SEQ
Grey door installed

White door and trim
Beige door and trim
add suffix...D
add suffix...DW
add suffix...DB
SEQ24125SMD
SEQ24125SMDW
SEQ24125SMDB
add suffix...W
add suffix...B
DK24SM-1W
DK24SM-1B
Door Kit
White Door kit

Beige Door kit
Delivery
2 weeks
Note: All door kits are available in Grey, White and Beige colours.
SEQ24125SM
EQL
Copper Bus
add suffix...C
EQL24125DC
4 weeks
Weatherproof Loadcentre Main Lug Only, 1 phase 3 wire 120/240V AC max.

Skid
Qty.
Main
Amps
8/16
EQL8100DCR*
42
12/24
EQL24125DCR
EQL12125DCR
35
Lug
Data
Mounting
Trim
Factory
Mod.
14-2/0
surface
only
N/A
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
N/A
100
177/8
(455)
133/4
(349)
5 (127)
125
197/8
(505)
133/4
(349)
133/4
(349)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
5 (127)
16/32
EQL16125DCR
35
125
217/8
(556)
24/48
EQL24125DCR
28
125
247/8
(632)
133/4
(349)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
275/8
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
32/64
40/80
EQL32200DCR
EQL40200DCR
21
21
200
200
(701)
335/8
(853)
Hubs
(sold seperately)
Conduit
size (')
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
Catalogue
Number
ECHS075
ECHS100
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
* Neutral bar only on one side of panel.

SEQ Type 3R Weatherproof Loadcentre with Factory installed main breaker 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC max.
SEQ24100SMCR
Number
of
Circuits
Catalogue
Number
Skid
Qty.
Main
Amps
16/32
SEQ16100SMCR
35
24/48
SEQ24100SMCR
24/48
Lug
Data
Mounting
Trim
Factory
Mod.
100
215/8
(549)
139/16
(345)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
28
100
245/8
(625)
139/16
(345)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
SEQ24125SMCR
28
125
245/8
(625)
139/16
(345)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
24/48
SEQ24200CR
21
200
271/2
(699)
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
32/64
SEQ32100SMCR
21
100
285/8
(726)
139/16
(345)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
32/64
SEQ32125SMCR
21
125
285/8
(726)
139/16
(345)
5 (127)
6-2/0
surface
only
N/A
32/64
SEQ32150CR
21
150
331/2
(851)
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
32/64
SEQ32200CR
21
200
331/2
(851)
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
40/80
SEQ40150CR
21
150
361/2
(927)
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
40/80
SEQ40200CR
21
200
361/2
(927)
15
(381)
5 (127)
6-250
MCM
surface
only
N/A
Hubs
(sold seperately)
Conduit
size (')
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
Catalogue
Number
ECHS075
ECHS100
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
Note: Both SEQ and EQL weatherproof panels are stocked complete with gasketed hinged door for improved weatherproof
protection. All SEQ and EQL Type 3R panels come standard with copper bus.
4-7
LOADCENTRES
Catalogue
Number
Number
of
Circuits
Loadcentres
EQL & SEQ Single Phase Main Lug & Main Breaker Loadcentres (continued)
Dual Listed/cULus Loadcentres 120/240V 1 phase 3 Wire
Number of
Circuits
38
Skid
Qty.
Main
Amps
SEQ38100U
SEQ38125U
27
27
100
125
SEQ38150U
SEQ38200U
27
27
150
200
Catalogue Number

H
36
(362)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
Lug Data
Mounting
Trim
6-250MCM
comb.
Door Kit
Catalogue
Number
DKS38-1A
DKS38-2A
Branch breakers: Only 1 full module breakers that are both UL & CSA certified are allowed to be installed in this loadcentre; 1/2 twin
and quad branch breakers must not be used as per NEC 384-14(a) and NEC-384-15. Consult Siemens Sales Rep. for
details.

Application benefit: Allows modular home builders who have businesses in both US & Canada to carry only one line of inventory.
LOADCENTRES
SEQ38200U
4-8
Loadcentres
EQ Three Phase Loadcentres

EQ Three Phase Loadcentresa
With main lugs only 3 phase 4 wire 240V ACmax. 10 KA
Catalogue Number
Number of Circuits
Main
Amps
12
EQ412100
100
28
(711)
18
EQ418100
100
28
(711)
24
EQ424225
225
34
(864)
30
EQ430225
225
34
(864)
42
EQ442225
225
40
(1016)
EQ424BQ100
Lug Data
Mounting Trim
Factory
Mod.
comb.
comb.
14-2/0
143/8
(365)
43/8
(111)
6-300 MCM
EQ424BQ100
100(BQ)
34
(864)
42
EQ442QJ100
100(QJ)
46
(1168)
42
EQ442QJ125
125(QJ)
46
(1168)
42
EQ442QJ150
150(QJ)
46
(1168)
42
EQ442QJ200
200(QJ)
46
(1168)
4-2/0
143/8
(365)
43/8
(111)
6-300 MCM
Note : Certified for use with either plug-in (Type Q) or bolt-on (Type BQ) branch breakers. Number of circuits can be doubled
by use of plug-in (Type QT) twin breakers. Certified for mounting vertical, horizontal or inverted and for use with CU/AL
conductor including compact stranded.

All neutral bar connectors are No. 14 - No. 4.
a
All Three Phase EQ loadcentres are stocked complete with doors.
Note: For copper bus add suffix C to existing part number. 4 weeks delivery required
Factory Modificationsa
Type
Description
Catalogue Number
Example
Delivery
EQ4
Copper Bus
add suffix...C
EQ430225C
4 Weeks
Lug Kits For EQ Loadcentres

Catalogue Number
Loadcentre Amps Rating
SFK100
100
Sub-feed Kit
14-2/0 (Per Phase)
SFK225
225
Sub-feed Kit
1/0-250 MCM (Per Phase)
TFK100
100
Through-feed Kit
14-2/0 (Per Phase)
TFK225
225
Through-feed Kit
6-300 MCM (Per Phase)
SFK225
TFK100
Description
4-9
LOADCENTRES
24
Service Entrance Loadcentres with factory installed main breaker 3 phase 4 wire 240 V ACmax. 10 KA.
Loadcentres
SPA panel and Mini Panel/Enclosed Breaker
Selection

SPA panel package, 3R enclosure 120/240V 1 Phase 3 Wire
Number of
Circuits
W0408ML1125
4/8
2-POLE GFCI
Package
Catalogue Number
Main
Amps.
GFCI
Included
W0408ML1125-20
QF220
W0408ML1125-30
QF230
125
W0408ML1125-40
QF240
W0408ML1125-50
QF250
W0408ML1125-60
QF260
Enclosure Dimensions - Inches (mm)

H
Catalogue
Number
41/4
(108)
Cover
3/4
1
11/4
11/2
2
21/2
ECHS000
ECHS075
ECHS100
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
121/4
(312)
6
(153)
Hubs (sold seperately)

Conduit
Size (")
Each package also includes a 4-point ground bar and French instructions.
Circuit Breaker Enclosures for Service Entrance and Commercial Use
LOADCENTRES
EEMAC 1 Enclosure (Indoor) 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
EQS260
Breaker
Range
Catalogue
Number
Main
Amps.
Number
of Poles
15-60A
EQS260*a
60
15-125A
EQS2125*a
125
Lug Data
1,2
73/4
(197)
5
(127)
23/4
14-4
(70)
1,2
13
(330)
65/8
(168)
33/8
14-2/0
(86)
*Does not accept quad type breaker.

EEMAC 3R Weatherproof Enclosure, 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
Full Module
Circuits
WEQ60-4
Catalogue Number
Main
Amps.
WEQ60-4ac
60
2/4
W0204ML1060ac
60
4/8
W0408ML1125c
125
Key Features:
Outdoor EEMAC 3R enclosure
Accepts plug-in Q type breakers
One piece bus bar construction
Combination trim flush/surface
Remark:
a
b
c
4-10
The panels will not accommodate a 2 pole ground fault

breaker (GFCI) or breaker with shunt trip.
Hubs sold seperately
Not to be used as service entrance.

H
101/4
91/2
55/8
(260)
(241)
(143)
41/4
(204)
(127)
(108)
Weight
lbs.
Hubb
Type
HR
HA
HS
121/4
41/4
(312)
(153)
(108)
Catalogue
Number
Conduit
size (')
Catalogue
Number
Conduit
size (')
ECHA075
3/4
ECHS075
3/4
Hubs
ECHA100
ECHS100
ECHA125
1 1/4
ECHS125
1 1/4
ECHR075
3/4
ECHS150
1 1/2
ECHR100
ECHS200
ECHR125
1 1/4
ECHS250
2.5
ECHR150
1 1/2
Loadcentres
Generator panel

Generator Panel, 3 Pole 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.
Suitable for use with a generator having a bonded neutral conductor.
Number of
Circuits
Catalogue
Number
Skid
Qty.
Main Amps
Lug Data
Mounting
Trim
63
30
60
80
100
167/8
(429)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
14-6
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
10/20
EQG1030D
EQG1060D
EQG1080D
EQG10100D
45
30
60
80
100
187/8
(479)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
14-6
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
18/36
EQG1830D
EQG1860D
EQG1880D
EQG18100D
36
30
60
80
100
241/8
(613)
131/32
(331)
33/4
(95)
14-6
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
26/52
EQG2630D
EQG2660D
EQG2680D
EQG26100D
27
30
60
80
100
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
14-6
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
34/68
EQG3430D
EQG3460D
EQG3480D
EQG34100D
27
30
60
80
100
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
14-6
6-2/0
6-2/0
8-2/0
Comb.
EQG630D
Generator Panel, 2 Pole 1 phase 3 wire 240V AC Max.

Suitable for use with a generator having an unbonded neutral conductor.
EQG860NSND
63
30
60
80
100
167/8
(429)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
14-8
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
12/24
EQG1230NSND
EQG1260NSND
EQG1280NSND
EQG12100NSND
45
30
60
80
100
187/8
(479)
12
(305)
33/4
(95)
14-8
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
20/40
EQG2030NSND
EQG2060NSND
EQG2080NSND
EQG20100NSND
36
30
60
80
100
241/8
(613)
131/32
(331)
33/4
(95)
14-8
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
28/56
EQG2830NSND
EQG2860NSND
EQG2880NSND
EQG28100NSND
27
30
60
80
100
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
14-8
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
36/72
EQG3630NSND
EQG3660NSND
EQG3680NSND
EQG36100NSND
27
30
60
80
100
33
(838)
141/4
(362)
4
(102)
14-8
6-2/0
6-2/0
6-2/0
Comb.
8/16
EQG830NSND
EQG860NSND
EQG880NSND
EQG8100NSND
Note: The EQG panels are stocked complete with doors

Key Features:
Ensures reliable and continuous operation, allows customers to permanently connect critical loads to back up
generators in cases of main power failures
Factory ready for use in both switched and non-switched neutral applications
Additional number of generator circuits for more flexibility
4-11
LOADCENTRES
EQG630D
EQG660D
EQG680D
EQG6100D
6/12
Circuit Breakers
Type Q Plug-In Breakers
Selection

Full Module (1 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Standard Package
Q115c
Q120c
Q125
Q130
Q140
Q150
Q160
Q170
48
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
Q215
Q220
Q225
Q230
Q240
Q250
Q260
24
70
80
90
100
125
Q270
Q280
Q290
Q2100
Q2125
150
200
QN2150Rd
QN2200Rd
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
Q315
Q320
Q325
Q330
Q340
Q350
Q360
Q370
90
100
Q390
Q3100
Single Pole
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
Two Pole Common Trip
LOADCENTRES
Q115
Q215
Three Pole Common Trip
Q315
Half Module (1/2 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C.
Q1515NC
Poles
Amps
Catalogue Numbera
Standard Package
QT
Dual
(Twin)
15-15
15-20
15-30
15-40
20-15
20-20
30-15
30-20
30-30
40-15
Q1515NC
Q1520NC
Q1530NC
Q1540NC
Q2015NC
Q2020NC
Q3015NC
Q3020NC
Q3030NC
Q4015NC
48
Quad Type (1/2 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C. Common Trip - centre poles only.
Q21515CTNC
a
Typical catalogue number (ie. Q1515NC) represents two

single-pole 15A circuit breakers - total width 1.
4-12
Poles
Ampere
Rating
QT
Quad
15-15
15-20
15-25
15-30
15-40
Typical
Catalogue Numberb
Q21515CTNC
Q21520CTNC
Q21525CTNC
24
Q21530CTNC
Q21540CTNC
catalogue number (ie. Q21520CTNC) represents

two single-pole, outer poles (two 15A 1-pole circuit
breakers) and one 2-pole inner breaker with common
trip (one 20A 2-pole circuit breaker) - total width 2.
Standard Package
T
ypical CSA Listed for frequent switching applications
(SWD). 120V AC Fluorescent Lighting.
R
equires 4 panel circuits, 2 adjacent and 2 opposite.
Two twist outs should be only removed.
Loadcentres
Ground-Fault, Arc-Fault, Surge Arrester and Main Replacement Breakers
Selection

Ground Fault Interrupters Full Module (1 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C. 5mA Sensitivity
Poles
QF240
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Standard Package
15
20
30
QF115
QF120
QF130
30
15
20
30
40
50
60
QF215
QF220
QF230
QF240
QF250
QF260
10
QE Equipment Protection Full Module (1 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C. 30mA Sensitivity
QE115
QE120
QE130
15
20
30
40
50
60
QE215
QE220
QE230
QE240
QE250
QE260
LOADCENTRES
15
20
30
Arc Fault Circuit Interupters (1 pole)Full Module 10,000 A.I.C. & 22,000 A.I.C.
QE220
15
20
Q115AF
Q120AF
20
15
20
Q115AFH
Q120AFH
Surge Arrester Breakers c/w 2-1 pole (1/2 per pole) 10,000 A.I.C.a
2
15
20
QSA1515SPD
QSA2020SPD
Replacement Main Breakers for SEQ Loadcentres 22,000 A.I.C.
Q115AF
Poles
Catalogue Numbera
Standard Package
60A
100A
125A
150A
200A
Q260H
EQ9675
EQ9677
EQ9683
EQ9685
6
1
a Typical
catalogue number (ie. QSA1515SPD) represents

two single-pole, outer poles (two 15A 1 pole circuit
breakers) and one surge arrester inner - total width 2.
4-13
Loadcentres
Type BQ Bolt-ona and Blue line Circuit Breakers
Selection

Full Module BQ Breakers (1" per pole) 10,000 A.I.C & 22,000 A.I.C.
Ampere
Rating
10,000 A.I.C.
Catalogue Number
22,000 A.I.C.
Catalogue Number
Std. Pkg.
BQ1B015
BQ1B020
BQ1B025
BQ1B030
BQ1B040
BQ1B050
BQ1B060
BQ1B070
BQ1B015H
BQ1B020H
BQ1B025H
BQ1B030H
BQ1B040H
BQ1B050H
BQ1B060H
BQ1B070H
12
BQ2B015
BQ2B020
BQ2B025
BQ2B030
BQ2B040
BQ2B050
BQ2B060
BQ2B070
BQ2B090
BQ2B100
BQ2B125
BQ2B015H
BQ2B020H
BQ2B025H
BQ2B030H
BQ2B040H
BQ2B050H
BQ2B060H
BQ2B070H
BQ2B090H
BQ2B100H
BQ3B015
BQ3B020
BQ3B030
BQ3B040
BQ3B050
BQ3B060
BQ3B070
BQ3B090
BQ3B100
BQ3B015H
BQ3B020H
BQ3B030H
BQ3B040H
BQ3B050H
BQ3B060H
BQ3B070H
BQ3B090H
BQ3B100H
Single Pole
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
BQ1B015
Two Pole Common Trip
LOADCENTRES
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
90
100
125
Three Pole Common Trip

BQ2B015
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
90
100
BQ3B015
Type Blue line circuit breakers
BL1-015
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Standard Package
15
20
30
40
50
BL1-015
BL1-020
BL1-030
BL1-040
BL1-050
20
15
20
30
40
BL2-015
BL2-020
BL2-030
BL2-040
10
Description
Catalogue Number
Standard Package
Tie Handle
BLTH1
6 - 1 Pole Fillers
BLF6
Note: These breakers are used as replacement in old ITE Loadcentres
a Order
line side screw kits separately: 8217-6 (6 pcs.)

8217-12 (12 pcs.) 8217-100 (100 pcs.) 8217-200 (200 pcs.)
4-14
20
Loadcentres
Accessories
Selection

Catalogue
Number
Description
Std.
Pkg.
Tie Handle
QT Dual Tie Handle-Floating
Q 2-Pole Tie Handle
QT Dual Tie Handle - Bar Type
25
50
5
ECQL1
ECQLD3
Handle Blocking Device (1,2 or 3 Pole)

Padlocking Device (1,2 or 3 Pole) for full
module breakers
10
ECPLD1
ECPLD2
Padlocking Device (1 Pole) for Twin type breakers

Padlocking Device (2 Pole) for Quad type breakers
Add-A-Lock (all EQ Loadcentres)
No. 4-2/0 CU/AL

No. 1-300 MCM CU/AL
No. 1-400 MCM CU/AL
No. 2-300 MCM CU/AL
Three 1-Pole Fillers

Sliding Latch
Insulated Ground Bar Kit
Contractor Truck Kit
DK8-A
DK12-A
DK16-A
DK24-A
DKL32-2A
DKL40-2A
For EQL manufactured after Jan. 92
DK24SM-1
DK32SM-1
DK24SM
DK32SM
DK1216SM-1
For SEQ manufactured after July 00
DKS24-2A
DKS32-2A
DKS40-1A
DKS40-2A
For SEQ manufactured after Jan. 92
TRIMSCK1
CIRNOLA32
CIRNOLA40
DIRLBLK-EQLSEQ
DIRLBLK-SM
Screws for trims

Circuit labels up to 32 circuits for SEQ 125A
Circuit labels up to 40 circuits
Directory labels EQL, SEQ
Directory labels SEQ side mounted NMMB
ECQTH2
ECQTH3
QTH4
Blocking Device
ECQTH2
ECQTH3
QTH4
Lock
ECQFL2
Neutral Lug Kits
Lug Kita
ECQL1
ECLK2225
ECQLD3
Miscellaneous
QF3
SL3
IG21
Truck-Kit
Door Kitsb
ECQFL2
LK2
SL3
a These
LK3
Truck Kit
lug kits simply plug on to the bus of any SEQ

or EQL Loadcentre as sub-feed or through-feed lugs to
take advantage of CEC Rule 14-100 (c).
IG21
All
door kits are available in Grey, White, Beige colours.
4-15
LOADCENTRES
LK2
LK3
LK4
Loadcentres Surge Protection

Selection
SPD4home
cUL Listed
Rated for single phase panels up to 400 amps
Installation Flexibility
LED Indicators
Audible Alarm
Ground Integrity Monitoring (GIM) circuit
10 year product warranty*
* Contact Siemens at 1-888-333-3545 for warranty terms and conditions.
LOADCENTRES
Siemens SPD4home stops power surges from entering your

home when installed at the main incoming service loadcentre
connected via a 20A breaker. An additional power quality feature we include within this unit is Ground Integrity Monitoring
circuit, which monitors the health of the electrical systems
neutral to ground bond.
Surge Type
SPD
To Protected Loads
Catalogue Number
SPD4HOME
AC Surge Protection
Inominal (In) Rating
SPD Type Rating
Thermal Fusing
Single Current Rating per Phase
Line Voltage
UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR
MCOV
Response Time
5kA
Type 2
Yes
40kA
120/240 1 Phase 50/60 Hz
700V
150V
<1 nanosecond
NEMA 4X Enclosure
Standard
UL/cUL Listings
Product Warranty
1449 SPD
10 years
4-16
SPD4home
BREAKER
Use closest breaker to SPD

Locate SPD close to intended
breaker
Keep leads short as possible
Avoid sharp bends
Rotate SPD4home such

that LED indicator is
most visible
Outdoor installation requires

appropriate weather sealing at
nipple (sealing conduit, etc.)
Loadcentres Surge Protection
Selection
SPD4tel & SPD4telkit

cUL listed
Hardwired Telephone/Modem/Fax/DSL protection
Exceptionally fast response time
Low insertion loss
Available with or without enclosure
5 Year product warranty*
SPD4tel is a 2-pair hardwired telephone service entrance

surge protector designed to stop surges from entering your
home via your incoming telephone service. The SPD4tel is
designed for indoor applications or can be mounted inside
another weatherproof enclosure for outdoor mounting applications when housed within the SPD4telkit.
SPD4telkit
Surge Type
Catalogue Number
Telco
Telco
SPD4TEL
SPD4TELKIT
Yes
200 Amps
<270V
Yes
<1 nanosecond
Yes
497A
Yes
LOADCENTRES
AC Surge Protection
Catastrophic Surge Circuit
Spike Capacity
Let Through Voltage
Overcurrent Protection
Response Time
Environmentally Sealed
UL/cUL Listings
Meets Telcordia (formallly Bellcore) GR-974-CORE
Requirements for Telecommunications Line
Protectors
Product Warranty
When combined with the SPD4home and SPD4coax, all primary surge entry points into the home are protected providing comprehensive whole house protection.
SPD4tel
5 years

SPD4coax
cUL listed
Rated for CATV, DSS, TV, VCR, and Cable Modem
Easy to install
Standard Female to Female F connector
Low insertion loss
Automatic recovery
5 Year product warranty*
SPD4coax
SPD4coax is a coaxial service entrance surge protector designed to stop surges from entering your home
via your incoming coax TV service. SPD4coax includes
a section of coaxial cable with female to female splice
for line side application.
When combined with the SPD4home and SPD4tel, all
primary surge entry points into the home are protected
providing comprehensive whole house protection.
AC Surge Protection
Frequency Range
Spike Capacity
Impedance
Return Loss
Insertion Loss
DC thru 1.5 GHz

Yes
5000 Amps, 8/20 Sec
75 Ohms
Yes
30dB @ 1 GHz
<0.1dB
UL/cUL Listings
497B
Meets IEEE C62.41.1 Requirements

Product Warranty
Yes
5 Years
Surge Type
Catalogue Number
Coaxial
SPD4COAX
4-17
Loadcentres
LOADCENTRES
Knockout Data
4-18
Selection
Loadcentres
Knockout Data
Selection
Service Entrance Loadcentres with Plug-in Breakers
4
LOADCENTRES
Service Entrace Loadcentres (Type 3R) Bottom Only
SEQ 16- 24- 32 SM
SEQ 24- 32- 40
EQ Loadcentres with Plug-in or Bolt-on Breakers
4-19
Loadcentres
Line Diagrams/Dimension Drawings for Circuit Breakers/Lug Data
1-Pole
2-Pole
Selection
3-Pole
3"
2.38"
2.90"
Type QT Half Module Breaker
LOADCENTRES
Type Q Full Module Breaker
Type QF, QE, QAF, QAFH
Lug Data
Circuit Breaker Type
Circuit Breaker
Ampere Rating
Cables
Per Connector
Connector
Wire Range
1530
1
1
#14#8 AWG Cu
#12#8 AWG Al
4050
1
1
#8#6 AWG Cu
#8#4 AWG Al
6070
1
1
#6#2/0 AWG Cu
#6#2/0 AWG Al
80-125
1
1
#8-#2/0 AWG Cu
#8-#2/0 AWG Al
150200
#1300kcmil Cu-Al
1530
1
1
#14#8 AWG Cu
#12#8 AWG Al
40
#8 AWG CU-Al
1530
1
1
#14#10 AWG Cu
#12#8 AWG Al
4060
1
1
#8#6 AWG Cu
#8#4 AWG Al
1520
1
1
#14#12 AWG Cu
#12#10 AWG Al
LOAD SIDE
QNR
QT
QF, QE
QAF, QAFH
4-20
Type QNR
POWER PRODUCT
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Contents
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Introduction
5-2
5-3
Reference Guides
5-5
Panelboard Mounting Circuit Breakers
BL

5-13
GFCI, AFCI

5-15
BQ 125A Frame, Switching Neutral, DIN Rail

5-16
BQD, BQD6

5-18
QJ 225A Frame
5-19
CQD 100A Frame

5-20
Sentron Thermal Mag and Electronic Circuit Breakers
ED 125A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-21
FD 250A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-24
JD/SJD 400A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-27
LD/SLD 600A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-31
LMD 800A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-35
MD/SMD 800A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-38
ND/SND 1200A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-42
PD/SPD 1600A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-46
RD 2000A Frame and Internal Accessories

5-49
MagneticTrip OnlyETI Motor Circuit Protector

5-50
Adjustable Instantaneous MagneticTrip Settings
5-53
Molded Case SwitchCircuit Disconnect

5-56
Sensitrip III Digital Solid State Sentron Series

5-57
WL Power Circut Breakers - Insulated Case

5-59
Electronic and Communications Accessories
5-63
Pressure and Compression Connectors

5-64
Breaker Modifications
5-67
Internal Accessories - Feature Combinations

5-68
External Accessories
5-69
General Technical
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
5-75
Series Rated Combination Guide

5-83
Unusual Operating Conditions

5-93
Typical Specifications

5-95
Superseded Circuit Breakers

5-96
VLThermal Mag and Electronic Circut Breakers
VL Reference Guide
5-99
NGG 125A Frame and Accessories

5-101
EG 125A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-103
VLTrip Unit Overview
5-105
DG 150A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-107
FG 250A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-111
JG 400A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-115
LG 600A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-119
MG 800A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-123

5-127
NG 150A Frame and Internal Accesories
PG 150A Frame and Internal Accesories

5-131
5-134
Molded Case Switch
Motor Circuit Protectors
5-135

5-136
600 Volt DC Circuit Breakers
External Accesories
5-137
Accessory Locations
5-152
Technical Data
5-153
5-155

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
OEM Circuit Breakers

Siemens introduces the modular and
flexible design of Siemens VL molded
case circuit breakers (MCCB) for OEM
applications. This family of MCCBs
allow the OEM customer the flexibility
of last minute changes, with a minimum
level of stock due to product modularity.
The VL family of MCCBs also offer
the widest range of field installable
accessories in the industry, including
lay contact for alarms such as Ground
Fault Warning and a latching alarm relay
contact for trip indication.
Interruption Ratings (UL/CSA)

N
H
L
35kA @ 480Vac Voltage

65kA @ 480Vac
100kA @ 480Vac
Ratings 30-1600A
Voltage 600Vac

690Vac (IEC)
Standards UL, CSA, NOM, IEC, CE Marked
Ordering
In the FD through RD frames, you may
order molded case circuit breakers three
basic ways:
1. As separately ordered frames, trip
units and lugs
2. As frame, trip unit and lugs ordered
as one catalogue number and
shipped unassembled or assembled
3. As frame and trip unit shipped
assembled and with the trip unit
made non-removable, in compliance
with UL 489 requirements that to
be reverse fed the circuit breaker
must not have an interchangeable
trip unit.
5-2
These two options are described in the

following:
Components Ordered Separately
To get the components for a 3 pole,
400 Amp standard interrupting circuit
breaker, you would order the frame
(JD63F400), the trip unit (JD63T400)
and six lugs (TA2J6500). This option is
normally useful only if you stock and
use large volumes of product and wish
to reduce your inventory cost. You may
stock, for example, a smaller number of
frames (JD63F400) and a variety of trip
units (JD63T300, JD63T350, etc.) and
assemble breakers as you need them.
Introduction
Connecting Breakers for DC
Application
Most Siemens thermal magnetic trip
MCCBs are applicable on direct current
(dc) systems. Generally, for 250 V dc
systems a two pole breaker is used,
with one pole on each leg of the supply
circuit. For three pole breakers applied
on 500 V dc systems, it is important
to connect the power supply zig-zag
through the breaker as shown in the
figure below. This assures that the
Voltage between phases on the breaker
terminals is uniformly distributed.
Frame, Trip Unit and Lugs Ordered

Together
If you order the catalogue number
JD63B400, you will receive a frame,
a trip unit and 6 lugs in separate
packages. By suffixing this number with
L (e.g. JD63B400L), you will receive
frame, trip unit and lugs assembled
in one container. Pursuant to UL 489,
a product ordered thus will have the
markings LINE and LOAD, and
may not be reverse fed (with power
flowing from the OFF end of the
breaker toward the ON end).
Non-Interchangeable Trip Breakers
If you place an X after the frame size
designator (e.g. JXD63B400), you will
receive a frame and trip unit assembled,
with the trip unit made non-removable.
If you suffix an L to this catalogue
number (e.g. JXD63B400L), you will
receive the breaker, non-removable trip
unit and lugs assembled. Unless you
anticipate a specific need to change the
breakers ampere rating in the future,
this is the preferred ordering method,
as the products are assembled to
Siemens specifications in our factories.
These breakers are suitable for use
reverse fed according to UL 489, since
the trip unit is not removable.
The smaller frames (QJ, ED and below)
do not have removable trip units,
and consequently are shipped only
as assembled products. To add lugs,
see the ordering instructions on each
productscatalogue page.
500V DC Wiring Configuration

Reference
If used on 250A frame and above means non-interchangeable trip

breaker with factory assembled frame and trip. Solid state trip and
current limiting (S or C in first character) are non-interchangeable
only, and the X is omitted.
X D
Trip Unit Type

Omitted Thermal-Magnetic
S Sensitrip Electronic Trip
Sentron Series Type/Interrupting Range
Omitted Standard Rating
H High IC Rating
HH Extra High IC Rating
C Highest IC Rating and Current Limiting
Frame Identifier
E Type ED
F Type FD
J Type JD
L Type LD
LM Type LMD
M
N
P
R
Type MD
Type ND
Type PD
Type RD
Maximum Voltage
2 240 Vac
4 480 Vac
6 600 Vac
Number of Poles
1
2
3
9 used to indicate the max. functions for an electronic trip circuit breaker (always 3 poles)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(Specific Application Type)

B Standard 40C Breaker
M Calibrated for 50C Application
F Frame Only
T 40C Trip Unit Only
W 50C Trip Unit Only
S Molded Case Switch
L Low Instantaneous Range ETI Breaker
A Standard Range ETIBreaker
H High Instantaneous Range ETI Breaker
Maximum Continuous Current Rating
ED Frame 015, 020, 025, 030, 035, 040, 045, 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125
FD Frame 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
JD Frame 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
LD Frame 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
LMD Frame 500, 600, 700, 800
MD Frame 500, 600, 700, 800
ND Frame 900, 100 (1000A), 120 (1200A)
PD Frame 120 (1200A), 140 (1400A), 160 (1600A)
RD Frame 160 (1600A), 180 (1800A), 200 (2000A)
TD Frame 2000, 2500, 3200
Suffix
L where applicable indicates a breaker shipped with line/loads lugs installed
A used with a switch to show automatic self protection
Y 400 Hertz
H 100% rated
NOTE:
Position omitted if not used.
Applicable Standards
UL489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
UL486A Wire Connectors and
Solderless Lugs for use with copper wire
UL486B Wire Connectors and
Solderless Lugs for use with

aluminum wire
UL943 Ground Fault Interrupters (for
personnel protectors)
UL1087 Molded Case Switches
UL50 Cabinets and Boxes
Note:
(A) Molded case circuit breakers are designed and tested
in accordance to applicable portions of UL489 and
CSAC22.2 No 5 and meet application requirements of
the National Electric Code. Unless marked otherwise,
circuit breakers are 80% duty rated.
(B) Molded case circuit breakers are to be connected with

60 or 75C wire for circuit breakers having a rated
ampacity of 125 amperes or less. Circuit breakers
having a rated ampacity greater than 125 amperes
shall only be cabled with 75C cable unless otherwise
indicated on the circuit breaker label. Exceptions to this
rule are outlined in the article 110-14 C(1)(2) of the 2002
National Electric Code and Canadian Electrical Code.
UL869 Service Equipment

NEMA AB-1 Molded Case Circuit
Breakers and Molded Case Switches
CSAC22.2 No. 5, C22.2 No. 14
5-3
VL Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Interrupting Class
N Normal
H High
L Very High
C Trip Unit Only
Frame Family
D Type DG
F Type FG
J Type JG
L Type LG
M Type MG
N Type NG
P Type PG
Breaker Type
G Global interchangeable
J 240V rated JG frame,
(UL, IEC,CE, CSA, NOM, CCC) Non-interchangeable only
T Trip Unit Only
Y 100% rated, Non-interchangeable
X Global Non-interchangeable
W 100% rated, Non-interchangeable
K Global, Non-interchangeable

(LG-frame)
(LG-frame)
V Thermal Magnetic, standard 40C
M Motor Circuit Protector

ambient, 600VAC 25kA, UL/CSA
(LG frame)
R Molded Case Switch (LG-frame)

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Number of Poles
1, 2, 3
Trip Unit
F Frame only, without trip unit
B Thermal Magnetic, standard 40 C ambient
A Electronic w/ LCD, LSI or 3P (neutral protected)
L Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Low
G Electronic w/ LCD, LSIG, 3P/4W (selectable residual or
instantaneous range return type ground fault protection)
J Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Low
K Electronic with LCD, LSI and GF alarm only, 3P/4W
instantaneous range (LG-frame) (selectable residual or return type ground fault alarm)
M Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Standard
R Electronic LI or 3P (neutral protected)

instantaneous range
T Electronic LSI or 3P (neutral protected)
Y Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - Standard
V Electronic, LSIG or 3P/4W, residual ground fault protection
instantaneous range (LG-frame)
W Electronic, LIG or 3P/4W, residual ground fault protection
H Magnetic Only, Motor Circuit Protector - High
instantaneous range
Continuous Current Rating
For DG use 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150
For FG use 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
For JG use 250, 300, 350, 400
For LG use 400, 500, 600
For MG use 600, 700, 800
For NG use 800, 900, 100 (1000A), 120 (1200A)
For PG use 120 (1200A), 140 (1400A), 160 (1600A)
Terminations
B Load End Standard (cu/al) Lugs
L Line & Load Standard (cu/al) Lugs
X No Lugs (use only if accessory suffixes are to follow)
LCD = Liquid Crystal Display

LS = Long Delay & Short Delay trip functions
LSI = Long Delay, Short Delay, & Instantaneous trip functions
LSIG = Long Delay, Short Delay, Instantaneous, & Ground Fault trip functions
GF = Ground Fault
3P = 3-pole
4W = 4-wire
Selected
5-4
Frames
Selection/Application

Reference Guide
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers

Page
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
Panelboard Breakers
QT
BL
4-11
1, 2
15-40
4-11
5-13
1, 2, 3
1,2,3
10-200bc 15-125b
BLH
HBL
5-13
1,2,3
15-125b
5-13
1,2,3
15-125b
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
10,000
10,000
3.12
1.00
2.00
2.38
u
u
u
240
10,000
10,000
2.90
2.90
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.38
u
u
u
240
10,000
10,000
3.56
3.75
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.37
u
u
u
240
22,000
22,000
3.56
3.75
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.37
u
u
u
240
65,000
65,000
3.75
3.75
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.37
u
u
u
BL, BLH, HBL
BQD, BQD6
BQD,
BQD6a
5-16
1,2,3
15-100d
277
NGB
NEB
HEB
5-101
1,2,3
15-125
347
5-103
1,2,3
15-125
347
5-103
1,2,3
15-125
347
480/277
600/347
600/347
600/347
65,000
65,000
14,000
10,000a
14,000
10,000a
14,000
4.50
4.50
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.69
u
u
u
u
100,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
5.00
5.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
2.71
u
u
u
u
85,000
35,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
5.50
5.50
1.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
u
u
u
u
u
u
100,000
65,000
25,000
42,000
42,000
5.50
5.50
1.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
u
u
u
u
u
u
NGB
NEB/HEB
For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

a BQD6
CSA certified 10,000A @ 600Y/347V 1570A only.

Single pole breakers available in ratings 1570A only, 125A available as a 2-pole only.
125A, 150A and 200A available as a 2-pole only, 90A
and 100A available as a 2 and 3 pole only.
d BQD6 breaker available in ratings 15-70A only, BQD available up to 100A
b
c80A,
5-5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Loadcentre
Breakers
1 Pole
2 Pole
3 Pole
120V
AC
240V
Ratings
277V
CSA/UL Interrupting
347V
Rating - Symmetrical
480/277V
RMS Amperes
480V
600/347V
600V
125/250 V DC Interrupting 2-Pole
DC
Rating
3-Pole
15-50A
15-40A
Height
50-125A
Dimensions
1-Pole
in Inches
Width
2-Pole
3-Pole
Depth
Thermal and Fixed magnetic Trip
Overcurrent
Devices
Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Accessories & Shunt Trip
Modifications Auxilary Switch
Alarm Switch
Type 1 - Indoor
Individual
Enclosures
Type 3R - Outdoor
Volts (60 Hertz)

Reference Guide
General Purpose Breakers

BQ
BQH
HBQ
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
HQJ2
CQD
NGG
5-16
5-16
5-16
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-20
6-21
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1-Pole
1570
1570
1570
15100
15100
2-Pole
15125
15125
15125
15100
60225
15125
15100
60225
15100
15100
60225
3-Pole
100225
15100
15-125
277
347
480/277
600/347
Page
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
1-Pole
Volts (60 Hertz)
Ratings
5
c
240
65,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
480/277V
14,000
25,000
600/347V
10,000b
18,000
Volts 2-Pole
250
250
Interrupting Rating DC Amperes
14,000
14,000
1550A
3.75
3.75
4.00
4.50
55125A
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
60225A
7.00
7.00
7.00
7.00
1-Pole
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2-Pole
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
3-Pole
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.50
3.00
3.00
2.37
2.37
2.37
2.34
2.34
2.53
2.53
2.87
2.90
Thermal and Fixed Magnetic Trip
Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Mechanical Interlock
Fungus Proofing (ref. page 5-67)
Type 1 Indoor Surface
Type 1 Indoor, Flush
Type 3R Outdoor-Rainproof
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
3-pole breakers only (factory installed only).

Type CQD6CSA only.
Enclosed breakers are factory assembled.
5-6
240
65,000
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Application Data section.
240
22,000
BQ, BQH, HBQ
240
22,000
Depth
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
240
240
10,000
Width
Individual
Enclosures c
240
10,000
Dimensions in
inches
Accessories &
Modifications
120/240
120V
Height
Overcurrent
Devices
120/240 120/240
240V
CSA/UL Interrupting Rating

Symmetrical RMS Amperes
DC
2-Pole
3-Pole
AC
CQD
NGG

Reference Guide

ED4
ED6
5-21
5-21
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
15125 15125
277
347
480
65,000
22,000
18,000
480
FD6A,
HFD6,
CED6
FXD6A
HFXD6
5-22
5-24
5-25
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
15125 70250 70
250
600
600
600
HHFD6,
HHFXD6
5-25
2, 3
70250
CFD6
5-25
2, 3
70250
600
600
65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 200,000
165,000
30,000
25,000 142,000 1200,000 35,000 165,000 100,000 200,000

18,000
1100,000 22,000 125,000 125,000 100,000

200,000 65,000 100,000 200,000
65,000
17,000
33,000 150,000 100,000

35,000
200,000 35,000 165,000 100,000
19,000
18,000 133,000 150,000
18,000
20,000 142,000 165,000
15,000
10,000 121,000 133,000
30,000 30,000 30,000

30,000 30,000
30,000
18,000
50,000
18,000 25,000
50,000
6.34
6.34
9.26
9.50
9.50
11.00
14.12
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.50
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
30,000
6.34
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
600
HED4
5-22
1, 2, 3
15125
277
ED2
Page
5-21
Poles
1, 2, 3
Amperes, Continuous
15100
Volts 50/60HZ
1-Pole 120
2-Pole
240
3-Pole
120V 10,000
240V 10,000
277V
AC
CSA / UL
347V
480V
Ratings
600V
Interrupting Rating
Symmetrical RMS
Icu
220/240V
Amperes
Ics
IEC 947-2
Icu
380/415V
50/60HZ
Ics
Icu
500V
Ics
2-Pole, 250V DC Interrupting Ratings

5,000
DC

Height
6.34
1-Pole 1.00
Dimensions in
Width
2-Pole 2.00
inches
3-Pole 3.00
Depth
4.00
Thermal and Adjustable Magnetic Trip
Overcurrent
Devices
Adjustable Magnetic Trip Only
Motor Circuit Protector

Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Accessories &
Modifications
Rear Connection Studs
Electric Motor Operator
Plug-In Mounting Assembly
Individual
Type 5, 12 Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolants
e
Enclosures
Type 12K Semi-Dusttight

a 1-pole only.
b 40100A: 25,000 AIR at 277V AC.
c For DC UPS system application.
d Single pole ED6 (1530A) 30kA, (35100A) 18 kA. CSA Only.
e Enclosed breakers are factory assembled.
5-7

Reference Guide

JD6-A,
HJD6-A,
JXD2-A JXD6-A HJXD6-A
5-27
5-27
5-28
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
200-400 200-400 200-400
Page
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
Volts 50/60HZ
AC
Ratings
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Overcurrent
Devices
Accessories &
Modifications
Individual
b
Enclosures
HLD6,
HLXD6
5-32
2, 3
250-600
HHLD6,
HHLXD6
5-32
2, 3
250-600
CLD6
5-32
2, 3
450-600
600
600
600
600
600
600
65,000
30,000
11.00
65,000
35,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
20,000
30,000
15,000
30,000
25,000
11.00
100,000
065,000
035,000
100,000
050,000
065,000
033,000
042,000
021,000
030,000
035,000
11.00
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
11.00
200,000
150,000
100,000
30,000
50,000
17.86
65,000
35,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
20,000
30,000
15,000
30,000
25,000
11.00
100,000
165,000
135,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
142,000
121,000
130,000
135,000
11.00
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
11.00
200,000
150,000
100,000
130,000
150,000
17.86
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
7.50
1
14.00
CSA / UL
Interrupting Rating
Symmetrical RMS
Amperes
220/240V
2-Pole 250V DC Interrupting Ratings

Height
Width
Depth
Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
2-Pole
3-Pole
For DC UPS application.

Enclosed breakers are factory assembled.
5-8
LD6,
LXD6
5-31
2, 3
450-600
600

a
CJD6
5-28
2, 3
200-400
600
500V
Dimensions in
inches
2-Pole
3-Pole
240V
480V
600V
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
HHJD6-A,
HHJXD6-A
5-28
2, 3
200-400
240
IEC 947-2
380/415V
50/60HZ
DC

Reference Guide

Page
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
Volts 50/60 HZ
HMD6,
HMXD6
5-39
2, 3
500-800
CMD6
5-39
3
400-800
ND6,
NXD6
5-42
2, 3
800-1200
HND6,
HNXD6
5-43
2, 3
800-1200
CND6
5-43
3
800-1200
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
65,000
50,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
20,000
30,000
15,000
30,000
25,000
16.00
100,000
165,000
125,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
142,000
121,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
65,000
50,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
20,000
30,000
15,000
30,000
25,000
16.00
100,000
165,000
150,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
142,000
121,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
65,000
50,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
20,000
30,000
15,000
30,000
25,000
16.00
100,000
165,000
150,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
142,000
121,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
9.00
9.00
6.19
6.19
200,000
100,000
165,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
9.00
6.19
7.50
7.50
9.00
9.00
4.59
4.59
6.19
6.19
200,000
100,000
165,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
133,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
9.00
6.19

a For
DC UPS application.
breakers are factory assembled.
b Enclosed
5-9
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

LMD6,
HLMD6,
MD6,
LMXD6 HLMXD6
MXD6
5-35
5-36
5-38
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
500-800 500-800
500-800
2-Pole
3-Pole
240V
CSA / UL
480V
AC
600V
Interrupting Rating
Ratings
Icu
220/240V
Symmetrical RMS
Ics
Amperes
IEC 947-2
Icu
380/415V
50/60HZ
Ics
Icu
500V
Ics
DC
Height
2-Pole
Dimensions in
Width
inches
3-Pole
Depth
Overcurrent
Devices
Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Accessories &
Modifications
Individual
b
Enclosures

Reference Guide

Page
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
Volts 50/60 HZ
3-Pole
240V
CSA / UL
480V
600V
AC
Interrupting Rating
Ratings
Icu
220/240V
Symmetrical RMS
Ics
Amperes
IEC 947-2
Icu
380/415V
50/60HZ
Ics
Icu
500V
Ics
DC
Circuit breakers require Connect-all Height
Dimensions in
mounting block. Dimensions shown Width
inches
are for circuit breaker only.
Depth
Overcurrent
Devices
Molded Case Switch
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Accessories &
Modifications
Mounting Block (required)
Individual
Enclosures
RD6 ,
RXD6
5-49
3
1600-2000
11,600
65,000
50,000
25,000
65,000
33,000
40,000
10,000
30,000
18,000
30,000
25,000
16.00
19.00
16.19
HRD6,
HRXD6
5-49
3
1600-2000
111,600
100,000
165,000
150,000
100,000
150,000
165,000
117,000
142,000
121,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
19.00
16.19
DC UPS application.
Connect-all mounting assembly. Dimensions shown are for circuit breaker only.
Requires
5-10
CPD6
5-46
3
1200-1600
111,600
200,000
100,000
165,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
125,000
165,000
117,000
130,000
150,000
16.00
19.00
16.19

For

HPD6,
PD6 ,
HPXD6
PXD6
5-46
5-46
3
3
1200-1600
1200-1600
11,600
111,600
65,000
100,000
50,000
165,000
25,000
150,000
65,000
100,000
33,000
150,000
40,000
165,000
10,000
117,000
30,000
142,000
18,000
121,000
30,000
130,000
25,000
150,000
16.00
16.00
19.00
19.00
16.19
16.19

Reference Guide
Electronic Trip Breakers
Solid State Trip Cicuit Breakers

SJD6
Page
Ratings
AC
Poles
Amperes, Continuous
Volts 50/60 HZ
Interrupting Rating
Symmetrical RMS CSA / UL
Amperes
5-29
3
200-400
3-Pole 600
240V
65,000
480V
35,000
600V 25,000
11.00
3-Pole 17.50
14.00
SHJD6
SCJD6
SLD6
SHLD6
SCLD6
SMD6
SHMD6
SCMD6
5-29
3
200-400
600
100,000
165,000
135,000
11.00
17.50
14.00
5-29
3
200-400
600
200,000
150,000
100,000
17.86
17.50
14.00
5-33
3
300-600
600
65,000
35,000
25,000
11.0
17.50
14.00
5-33
3
300-600
600
100,000
165,000
135,000
11.00
17.50
14.00
5-33
3
300-600
600
200,000
150,000
100,000
17.86
17.50
14.00
5-40
3
600-800
600
65,000
50,000
25,000
10.00
19.00
16.19
5-40
3
600-800
600
100,000
165,000
150,000
16.00
19.00
16.19
5-40
3
600-800
600
200,000
100,000
165,000
16.00
19.00
16.19
Overcurrent
Devices
Solid State Trip
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Accessories &
Modifications
Individual
Enclosuresa

Enclosed
5-11
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Height
Width
Depth
Dimensions in
inches

Reference Guide
Electronic Trip Breakers
Solid State Trip Circuit Breakers

SND6
SHND6
SCND6
SPD6
SHPD6
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-47
5-47
Page
Poles
8001200
8001200
8001200
12001600
12001600
3-Pole
600
600
600
600
600
240V
65,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
480V
50,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
600V
25,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
50,000
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Height
16.00
16.00
16.00
16.00
16.00
Width
9.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
Depth
Amperes, Continuous
Volts 50/60HZ
CSA / UL
AC
Ratings
Interrupting Rating
Symmetrical RMS
Amperes
380/415V
EC 947-2
50/60HZ
690V
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Dimensions Inches
Overcurrent
Devices
Accessories &
Modifications

Individual
Enclosuresb
6.19
6.19
6.19
6.19
6.19
Solid State Trip
Undervoltage Trip
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Stored Energy Mechanism
Drawout Construction

a Requires
b Enclosed
5-12
connect-all mounting block assembly. Dimensions shown are for circuit breaker.

Type BLLow Tab Bolt-on (10,000A IR)
Non-Interchangeable Trip
1-Poleb
2-Polee
2-Polee
3-Polef
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
120/240V AC
120/240V AC
Common Trip
240V AC
Common Trip
240V AC
Common Trip
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
B115
B120
B125
B130
B135
B140
B145
B150
B155
B160
B170
B215
B220
B225
B230
B235
B240
B245
B250
B255
B260
B270
B280
B290
B2100
B2110
B2125
B215R
B220R
B225R
B230R
B235R
B240R
B245R
B250R
B260R
B270R
B280R
B290R
B2100R
B315
B320
B325
B330
B335
B340
B345
B350
B355
B360
B370
B380
B390
B3100
Type BLH Low Tab Bolt-on (22,000A IR)

3-Pole
120/240V AC
Common Trip
240V AC
Common Trip
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
B115H
B120H
B125H
B130H
B135H
B140H
B145H
B150H
B155H
B160H
B170H
B215H
B220H
B225H
B230H
B235H
B240H
B245H
B250H
B255H
B260H
B270H
B280H
B290H
B2100H
B2110H
B2125H
B315H
B320H
B325H
B330H
B335H
B340H
B345H
B350H
B355H
B360H
B370H
B380H
B390H
B3100H
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2-Pole
120/240V AC
1-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Type HBL Low Tab Bolt-on (65,000A IR)

15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
B115HH
B120HH
B125HH
B130HH
B135HH
B140HH
B145HH
B150HH
B155HH
B160HH
B170HH
B215HH
B220HH
B225HH
B230HH
B235HH
B240HH
B245HH
B250HH
B255HH
B260HH
B270HH
B280HH
B290HH
B2100HH
B2100HH
B2125HH
B315HH
B320HH
B325HH
B330HH
B335HH
B340HH
B345HH
B350HH
B355HH
B360HH
B370HH
B380HH
B390HH
B3100HH
Types BL/BLH/HBL
Internal Accessories (Factory installed only; require one additional pole width)
Auxiliary Switches
Control Voltage
Shunt Trip
1A and 1B contacts
AC
DC
Suffix
Suffix
120V
...00S01
...01
24V
...00S07
...01
Built to order. Allow 34 weeks for delivery.

Certified / UL Listed for frequent switching
applications (SWD). 120V AC fluorescent lighting.
Shipped 12 per sleeve.
CSA
CSA
Certified / UL Listed for 3 phase 240V grounded B

at 10,000 KA IR.
rated.
e Shipped 6 per sleeve.
f Shipped 5 per sleeve.
HACR
Modifications - page 5-67

External Accessories - page 5-69
5-13

Selection
Ordering Instructions
All BL circuit breakers are supplied with load side connectors.
All standard circuit breakers are calibrated for 40 C maximum ambient application.
Shipping Weights - BL, BLH, HBL
Shipping
Number of
Number Per
Weight (lbs.)
Poles
Carton/Master Master
1 (15-70A)
2 (1550A)
2 (5570A)
2 (80125A)
3 (15100A)
12/48
6/24
6/24
6/24
4/16
15.3
15.3
19.4
24.9
20.1
Pressure Wire Connectors (Load side terminal factory installed only)

Type
Circuit Breaker
Ampere Rating
1520
2535
4050
BL, BLH, HBL
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
5570
80100
110125
Cables Per Lug
Wire Range
#14 - #10 AWG Cu
#12 - #10 AWG Al
#14 - #6 AWG Cu
#12 - #6 AWG Al
#8 - #6 AWG Cu
#8 - #4 AWG Al
#8 - #4 AWG Cu
#8 - #2 AWG Al
#4 - #1/0 AWG Cu
#2 - #1/0 AWG Al
#2 - #1/0 AWG Cu
#1/0 - #2/0 AWG Al
BL/BLH/HBL
Breaker
Type
Dimensions (inches)
Amperes
BL, BLH
1550
BL, BLH
60125
HBL 15125
For inches / millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.
5-14
D1
D2
3916
334
334
238
238
238
3
3
3
Accessories page 5-69
Special Application Panelboard Mounting Breakers
Selection
Wiring Diagrams
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI)
Provides Class A (5mA) ground fault protection. Intended for personal protection.
De-energizes the circuit for all ungrounded conductors of the circuit.
1-Pole (1" Wide)
Interrupting Ratings (kA)

(RMS Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC
Breaker Type
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
120
120/240
BLF
15
20
25
30
BF115
BF120
BF125
BF130
10
10
10
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
BF215
BF220
BF230
BF240
BF250
BF260
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
20
30
BF115H
BF120H
BF130H
22
22
22
15
20
30
40
50
60
BF215H
BF220H
BF230H
BF240H
BF250H
BF260H
22
22
22
22
22
22
1-Pole
Bolt-On
BLF
2-Pole
Bolt-On
BLHF
1-Pole
Bolt-On
BLHF
2-Pole
Bolt-On
2-Pole (2" Wide)
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (30mA)

BLE
1-Pole
Bolt-On
BLE
2-Pole
Bolt-On
BLEH
1-Pole
Bolt-On
BLEH
2-Pole
Bolt-On
15
20
30
BE115
BE120
BE130
10
10
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
BE215
BE220
BE230
BE240
BE250
BE260
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
30
BE120H
BE130H
22
22
15
20
30
40
50
60
BE215H
BE220H
BE230H
BE240H
BE250H
BE260H
22
22
22
22
22
22
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Provides protection of equipment from damaging line-to-ground faults currents.

De-energizes the circuit for all ungrounded conductors of the circuit.
1-Pole Equipment
Protection
2-Pole Equipment
Protection
B115AF
BG215
Branch-Feeder Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI)
AFCIs detect arcing faults (an unintentional arcing condition in a circuit) that standard circuit
breakers are unable to detect. The device is intended to mitigate the effects of arcing faults
by functioning to de-energize the circuit when an arc-fault is detected. Branch-feeder AFCI
detects line-to-ground and line-to-neutral arcs.
BAF
15
20
B115AF
B120AF
10
10
BAFH
15
20
B115AFH
B120AFH
22
22
1-Pole
1-Pole
Switching Neutrals
15
BG
2 Wire
Common Trip
20
30
BG215
BG220
BG230
10
10
10
BG
15
20
30
BG315
BG320
BG330
10
10
10
3 Wire
Common Trip

rated.
HACR
5-15

BQ 125A Frame
Selection

All BQ circuit breakers are supplied with load side lugs. All standard circuit breakers are calibrated for 40C maximum
ambient application.
BQ 125A Frame BQ (10,000A IR)

Non-Interchangeable Trip
1-Pole
2-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
120/240V AC
120/240V AC
Common Trip
240V AC
Common Tripe
240V AC
Common Trip
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
BQ1B015
BQ1B020
BQ1B025
BQ1B030
BQ1B035
BQ1B040
BQ1B045
BQ1B050
BQ1B055
BQ1B060
BQ1B070
BQ2B015
BQ2B020
BQ2B025
BQ2B030
BQ2B035
BQ2B040
BQ2B045
BQ2B050
BQ2B060
BQ2B070
BQ2B080
BQ2B090
BQ2B100
BQ2B110
BQ2B125
BQ2H015
BQ2H020
BQ2H030
BQ2H040
BQ2H050
BQ2H060
BQ2H070
BQ2H090
BQ2H100
BQ3B015
BQ3B020
BQ3B025
BQ3B030
BQ3B035
BQ3B040
BQ3B045
BQ3B050
BQ3B060
BQ3B070
BQ3B080
BQ3B090
BQ3H100
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BQH (22,000A IR)

1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
120/240V AC
120/240V AC
Common Trip
240V AC
Common Trip
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
BQ1B015H
BQ1B020H
BQ1B025H
BQ1B030H
BQ1B035H
BQ1B040H
BQ1B045H
BQ1B050H
BQ1B055H
BQ1B060H
BQ1B070H
BQ2B015H
BQ2B020H
BQ2B025H
BQ2B030H
BQ2B035H
BQ2B040H
BQ2B045H
BQ2B050H
BQ2B060H
BQ2B070H
BQ2B080H
BQ2B090H
BQ2B100H
BQ2B110H
BQ2B125H
BQ3B015H
BQ3B020H
BQ3B025H
BQ3B030H
BQ3B035H
BQ3B040H
BQ3B045H
BQ3B050H
BQ3B060H
BQ3B070H
BQ3B080H
BQ3B090H
BQ3B100H
HB1B015
HB1B020
HB1B025
HB1B030
HB1B035
HB1B040
HB1B045
HB1B050
HB1B060
HB1B070
HB2B015
HB2B020
HB2B025
HB2B030
HB2B035
HB2B040
HB2B045
HB2B050
HB2B060
HB2B070
HB2B080
HB2B090
HB2B100
HB2B110
HB2B125
HB3B015
HB3B020
HB3B025
HB3B030
HB3B035
HB3B040
HB3B045
HB3B050
HB3B060
HB3B070
HB3B080
HB3B090
HB3B100
HBQ (65,000A IR)

15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
BQ/BQH/HBQ Internal Accessories (Factory installed only)

Auxiliary Switches
Control Voltage
Shunt Trip
1A and 1B
AC
DC
Suffix
Suffix
120V
...00S01
...A01
24V
...00S07

CSA
Certified / UL Listed for frequent switching

applications (SWD). 120V AC fluorescent lighting.
HCAR rated.
5-16
eUL Listed for use on 3 phase grounded B systems 10,000 for this application.
Accessories pages 5-69

Modifications page 5-67

DIN Rail Mounted Circuit Breakers
Selection
Type BQXD BQ Breaker with DIN Rail Mounting - UL Listed only

Continuous

Current
Rating
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
1-Pole
2-Pole
Interrupting Ratings (KA)

(RMS Symmetrical Amperes)
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
BQ1B015QLD
BQ1B020QLD
BQ1B025QLD
BQ1B030QLD
BQ1B035QLD
BQ1B040QLD
BQ1B045QLD
BQ1B050QLD
BQ1B060QLD
BQ2B015QLD
BQ2B020QLD
BQ2B025QLD
BQ2B030QLD
BQ2B035QLD
BQ2B040QLD
BQ2B045QLD
BQ2B050QLD
BQ2B060QLD
Volts AC
120/240
68.00
68.00
68.00
68.00
10
2-Pole DIN Rail mtd
(UL listed only)
68.00
68.00
68.00
68.00
Finger Safe Terminal Shield

Protects against accidental contact with lugs1 per lug. Fits line and load end.
Catalogue Number
Qty
BQFS2
BQFS1K
1000
Shipping Weights
Number of
Poles
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
Master
6/72
6/66
6/66
3/36
3/33
3/33
3/33
2/22
23
23
23
24
23
24
23
23
6/66
3/33
2/22
23
24
24
1 (1550A)
1 (5570A)
1 (1570A, 22 and 65K A IR)
2 (1550A)
2 (60125A)
2 (15100A, 22 and 65K A IR)
2 (15100A, 240V)
3 (15100A)
BQ
BQH and HBQ

1
2
3
Type
Catalogue Number
EB3100S
3R
WB31006.00
Amperes
D1
D2
BQ, BQH
BQ, BQH
HBQ
BQXD
1550
55125
15125
1560
334
4
4
412
238
238
238
238
3
3
3
3
Lugs-For Use with BQ, BQH, HBQ

Circuit
Breaker
Amp. Rtg.
Enclosures
Dimensions (inches)
Breaker
Type
Cables
Per
Lug
Lug
Wire Range
AWG
1540
1
1
#14#6 Cu
#12#6 Al
TC1Q1
13.90
50100
1
1
#8#1 Cu
#6#1/0 Al
TA1Q1
12.20
1520
1
1
#14#10 Cu
#14#10 Al
2535
1
1
#14#6 Cu
#14#6 Al
4050
1
1
#8#6 Cu
#8#4 Al
5570
1
1
#8#4 Cu
#8#2 Al
80100
1
1
#4#1/0 Cu
#2#1/0 Al
110125
1
1
#2#1/0 Cu
#1/0#2/0 Cu
Catalogue
Number
Line Side
Load Side
For inches / millimeters conversion,

multiply inches by 25.4.
Terminals
are CSA Certified / UL Listed for 60/75C

conductors.
Connector
has steel construction.
Surface
mounted indoor. If flush mounting is required,

replace suffix S in catalogue number with suffix F.
Discount Schedule B.
Does not include circuit
breaker. Order circuit breaker

separately.
included in enclosure.
Enclosure will not accept circuit breakers with shunt trips
or auxiliary switches installed.
Neutral
Connectors are
Supplied with
Circuit Breaker
Package
BQXD
ends.
of 6 connectors.
uses TA1Q1 or TC1Q1 lugs on both line and load
5-17
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Number Per
Carton/Master
BQD 100A Frame Panelboard Mounting Circuit Breakers
Selection
BQD
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
277V AC125V DC
480Y/277V AC
125/250V DC
480Y/277V AC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
BQD115
BQD120
BQD125
BQD130
BQD135
BQD140
BQD145
BQD150
BQD160
BQD170
BQD180
BQD190
BQD1100
BQD215e
BQD220e
BQD225e
BQD230e
BQD235e
BQD240e
BQD245e
BQD250e
BQD260
BQD270
BQD280
BQD290
BQD2100
BQD315e
BQD320e
BQD325e
BQD330e
BQD335e
BQD340e
BQD345e
BQD350e
BQD360
BQD370
BQD380
BQD390
BQD3100
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
BQD, BQD6
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BQD6
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
347V AC
600/347V AC
600/347V AC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
BQD6115
BQD6120
BQD6125
BQD6130
BQD6135
BQD6140
BQD6145
BQD6150
BQD6160
BQD6170
BQD6215
BQD6220
BQD6225
BQD6230
BQD6235
BQD6240
BQD6245
BQD6250
BQD6260
BQD6270
BQD6315
BQD6320
BQD6325
BQD6330
BQD6335
BQD6340
BQD6345
BQD6350
BQD6360
BQD6370
BQD, BQD6
Shipping Weights
Interrupting Ratings
Number
of Poles
BQD
(CSA & UL)
BQD6
(CSA)
Volts AC
240
277
480/277
347
600/347
125
250
1
2
3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
1
2
3
65
65
65
10
10
10
14
14
1
2
3
1/12/48
1/6/24
1/4/16
1.6
1.2
2.0
1540
#14 - #6 AWG Cu or
#12 - #6 AWG Al
45100
#8 - #1 AWG Cu or
#6 - #1/0 AWG Al
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Combination

Catalogue Number
BQDA1BA
BQD Internal Accessories

Control Voltage
Shunt Trip
Shunt Trip and Auxiliary Switch Combinations
V AC
V DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
120
240
277
480
600
12
24
48
125
BQDST120
BQDST240
BQDST277
BQDST480
BQDST600
BQDST12
BQDST24
BQDST48
BQDST125
BQDST120AAS
BQDST240AAS
BQDST277AAS
BQDST480AAS
BQDST600AAS
BQDST12DAS
BQDST24DAS
BQDST48DAS
BQDST125DAS
AC
240
DC
125
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number
BQDA1
42.00BQDBA
240
125
BQDA2
83.00

multiply inches by 25.4.
5-18
Shipping
Weight (lbs.) (ea.)
BQD Load End Only
Volts DC
120
Maximum Voltage
Number per
Carton
Lugs For 60/70C Wire
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA)

Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles

SWD rated for switching 277V AC fluorescent lighting.
HID rated at 277V AC.
Not
suitable for 3 phase delta 480V and 600V

applications.
rated.
eHID rated at 480Y/277V AC.
HACR

QJ 225A Frame
Selection/Dimensions
Type QJ2
2-Pole
Load side TA1Q300 lugs are mounted and

included when circuit breaker is ordered.
For line and load lugs (TA1Q300) installed at no
additional charge, add suffix L to catalogue
number.
3-Pole
240V AC
240V AC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
QJ22B060374.00
QJ22B070377.00
QJ22B080377.00
QJ22B090377.00
QJ22B100 377.00
QJ22B110 377.00
QJ22B125377.00
QJ22B150377.00
QJ22B175 377.00
QJ22B200377.00
QJ22B225377.00
QJ23B060
QJ23B070
QJ23B080
QJ23B090
QJ23B100
QJ23B110
QJ23B125
QJ23B150
QJ23B175
QJ23B200
QJ23B225
QJH22B060
QJH22B070
QJH22B080
QJH22B090
QJH22B100
QJH22B110
QJH22B125
QJH22B150
QJH22B175
QJH22B200
QJH22B225
QJH23B060
QJH23B070
QJH23B080
QJH23B090
QJH23B100
QJH23B110
QJH23B125
QJH23B150
QJH23B175
QJH23B200
QJH23B225
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
989.00
Type QJH2
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
1384.00
Type QJ2H
QJ22B060H
QJ23B060H
QJ22B070H
QJ23B070H
QJ22B080H
QJ23B080H
QJ22B090H
QJ23B090H
QJ22B100H QJ23B100H
QJ22B110H
QJ23B110H
QJ22B125H1122.00 QJ23B125H
QJ22B150H1122.00 QJ23B150H
QJ22B175H
QJ23B175H
QJ22B200H1122.00 QJ23B200H
QJ22B225H1122.00 QJ23B225H
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
1756.00
Shipping Weights
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H, HQJ2H
Number of
Poles
Number per
Carton
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
2
3
10
10
30
41
Lugs For 75C Wire

Catalogue
Number
Lug
Body
Lug
Wire Range
TA1Q300
Al
(1) #6300 kcmil Cu

(1) #4300 kcmil Al
TC1Q250
Cu
(1) #6250 kcmil Cu
UL 489 Interrupting Ratings

Breaker
Type
AIR @ 240V AC
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2H
HQJ2H
010,000
022,000
042,000
65,000
HQJ23B100H
HQJ23B110H
HQJ23B125H
HQJ23B150H
HQJ23B175H
HQJ23B200H
HQJ23B225H
998.00
1998.00
998.00
1998.00
998.00
1998.00
998.00
QJ2
3
2-pole
2.5 D
3
Type HQJ2d
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
50C Calibration - See page 5-67.

400HZ. - See page 5-67.
4.5 3-pole
Internal Accessories (Factory installed only) 3-pole only .

Add suffix to catalogue number.
Control Voltage
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switches
Shunt Trip and
1A and 1B
1A and 1B Auxiliary Switch
2A and 2B
AC
DC
Suffix
Suffix
Suffix
Suffix
120/240
00S01
A01
A02
01S01
24
00S07
A01
A02
01S07
25
00S11
A01
A02
01S11
See
Note: A page 5-64.

Note: QJ Breakers are UL Listed for reverse feed
applications.
HACR rated.
accessories are not available on 2-pole QJ

breakers.
Internal
d HQJ2
is 65kAIC @ 240VAC and 100kAIC @ 208VAC.
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
5-19

CQD 100A Frame
Selection
Shipping Weights
Type CQD (Cable In - Cable Out) DIN Rail Mount

Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
277V AC
125V DC
480Y/277V AC
125/250V DC
Number of
Poles
Number per
Carton
Shipping
Weight lbs. (kg)
480Y/277V AC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
1
2
3
1
1
1
0.5 (0)
1.0 (0)
1.5 (1)
15
20
25
30
CQD115
CQD120
CQD125 114.00
CQD130
CQD215
CQD220
CQD225
CQD230
CQD315
CQD320
CQD325
CQD330
35
40
45
50
60
CQD135
CQD140
CQD145
CQD150
CQD160
CQD235
CQD240
CQD245
CQD250 272.00
CQD260 272.00
CQD335485.00
CQD340485.00
CQD345
CQD350485.00
CQD360485.00
70
80
90
100
CQD170
CQD180
CQD190
CQD1100
CQD270
CQD280
CQD290
CQD2100
CQD370657.00
CQD380657.00
CQD390657.00
CQD3100657.00

Amps
Wire Size
1540
#14#6 AWG Cu
#12#6 AWG Al
45100
#8#1 AWG Cu
#6#1/0 AWG Al
Type CQD6 (Cable In - Cable Out) CSA Certified (not UL)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
1-Pole
2-Pole
347V AC
125V DC
600Y/347V AC
125/250V DC
3-Pole
600Y/347V AC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
160
CQD6120
CQD6125
CQD6130
CQD6135
CQD6140
CQD6145
CQD6150
CQD6160
114.00
114.00
114.00
114.00
CQD6215
CQD6220
CQD6225
CQD6230
CQD6235
CQD6240
CQD6245
CQD6250
CQD6260
170
CQD6170
229.00
CQD6270 542.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
272.00
CQD6315
CQD6320
CQD6325
CQD6330
CQD6335
CQD6340
CQD6345
CQD6350
CQD6360
CQD, CQD6
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
485.00
RMS Symmetrical Amperes (KA)
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
CQD, CQD6
Volts DC
120
240
480/277
600/347
125
250
CQD
(UL)
1
2
3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
CQD6
(CSA)
1
2
3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
Shunt Trip
Control Voltage
Auxiliary Switch
V AC
V DC
CQD, CQD6, NGG

Catalogue Number
120
240
277
480
600
CQDST120569.00
CQDST240
CQDST2770
CQDST48000
CQDST600
012
024
048
125
CQDST12
CQDST24
CQDST48
CQDST125569.00
Maximum
Voltage
AC
240
240
DC
Number
of
Contacts
125
125
1A1B
2A2B
Shunt Trip Voltage

AC
CQD, CQD6, NGG

Catalogue Number
DC
120
CQDST120AAS
240
CQDST240AAS
277
CQDST277AAS
480
CQDST480AAS
CQD, CQD6, NGG

Catalogue Number
600
CQDST600AAS
CQDA1
CQDA2483.00
012
CQDST12DAS
024
CQDST24DAS
048
CQDST48DAS
125
CQDST125DAS
Alarm Switch
Maximum
Voltage
Shunt Trip and Auxiliary

Switch Combinations
AC
DC
CQD, CQD6, NGG

Catalogue Number
240
125
CQDBA242.00
Alarm and Auxillary Switch

Combinations
For Breaker
Catalogue Number
CQD, CQD6, NGG
CQDA1BA

SWD
rated.
HID
rated.
HACR rated.
5-20

ED 125A Frame Sentron Series
Selection
All ED Frame Sentron circuit breakers are supplied with load side lugs. If line side lugs are required, add L suffix to catalogue number.
Consult Siemens sales office for any additional charge.
50C Calibration, 400HZ - see page 5-67. All ED frame circuit breakers may be reverse connected.
Type ED2
Blue Label
1-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40 C
2-Pole
120V AC
3-Pole
125V DC 240V AC
Catalogue
Number
Number of
Poles
125V DC
250V DC 240V AC
Catalogue
Number
015
020
25
030
35
040
45
050
060
ED21B015
ED21B020
ED21B025
ED21B030
ED21B035
ED21B040
ED21B045
ED21B050
ED21B060
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.00
ED22B020
ED22B025
ED22B030
ED22B035
ED22B040
ED22B045
ED22B050
ED22B060
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
257.00
ED23B015 383.00
ED23B020 383.00
ED23B025383.00
ED23B030 383.00
ED23B035 383.00
ED23B040 383.00
ED23B045 383.00
ED23B050 383.00
ED23B060 383.00
070
80
90
100
ED21B070
ED21B080
ED21B090
ED21B100
206.00
206.00
206.00
206.00
ED22B070
ED22B080
ED22B090
ED22B100
421.00
421.00
421.00
421.00
ED23B070 548.0
ED23B080 548.0
ED23B090 548.0
ED23B100 548.00
Type ED4
Blue Label
125V DC
1
2
3
Catalogue
Number
250V DC 480V AC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
2
3
Ampere
Rating
No. of
Poles
Line/Load
SA1E025
#14#10
Cu
#12#10
Al
All 30100A
1, 2, 3
Line Side
LN1E100
#101/0
Cu/Al
ED2, 4,
CED6
3060A
Load Side
LD1E060
#10#4
Cu/Al
ED2, 4,
CED6
70100A
Load Side
LD1E100
ED2, 4, 6,
HED4
30100A
2, 3
Load Side
LN1E100
2, 3
Line/Load
TA1E6125
#33/0
Cu
#12/0
Al
Line/Load
TC1ED6150
#101/0
Cu
CCE125
2/0
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
466.00
ED43B015 611.00
ED43B020 611.00
ED43B025 611.00
ED43B030 611.00
ED43B035 611.00
ED43B040 611.00
ED43B045 611.00
ED43B050 611.00
ED43B060 611.00
070
080
090
100
ED41B070
ED41B080
ED41B090
ED41B100
258.00
258.00
258.00
258.00
ED42B070
ED42B080
ED42B090
ED42B100
613.00
613.00
613.00
613.00
ED43B070 719.00
ED43B080 719.00
ED43B090 719.00
ED43B100 719.00
All 110,
125A
110
125
ED43B110 1425.
ED43B125
Copper Body Lugs
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40 C
1-Pole
2-Pole
347V AC
600V AC
Catalogue
Number
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
ED61B015
ED61B020
ED61B025
ED61B030
ED61B035
ED61B040
ED61B045
ED61B050
ED61B060
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
312.00
ED62B020
ED62B025
ED62B030
ED62B035
ED62B040
ED62B045
ED62B050
070
080
090
100
ED61B070
ED61B080
ED61B090
ED61B100
429.00
429.00
429.00
429.00
110
125
Note: ED frame circuit breakers qualified to UL 489

Supplement SB Naval See page 5-67 for
additional information
600V AC
Catalogue
Number
All 30125A
only
1, 2, 3
#6#1/0
Cu/Al
#101/0
Cu/Al
Compression Lugs
3-Pole
250V DC
Wire
Range
1, 2, 3
ED42B020
ED42B025
ED42B030
ED42B035
ED42B040
ED42B045
ED42B050
ED42B060
Blue Label
Catalogue
Number
All 1525A
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
138.00
Type ED6
20
30
Aluminum Body Lugs
ED41B015
ED41B020
ED41B025
ED41B030
ED41B035
ED41B040
ED41B045
ED41B050
ED41B060
ED42B110
ED42B125
5
5
Lugs
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
38
25
38
CED6
3-Pole
480V AC
30
10
10
500V DC
All ED, CED
Catalogue
Number
691.00
691.00
691.00
691.00
ED63B015
ED63B020
ED63B025
ED63B030
ED63B035
ED63B040
ED63B045
ED63B050
ED63B060
696
ED63B070
ED63B080
ED63B090
ED63B100
=0
ED63B110
ED63B125
16
CSA
Certified only (Not UL)

CED types and all 110125 ampere ED frames.
Note: A, page 5-64.
SWD rated.
HACR rated.
For
See

5-21
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40 C
2-Pole
120V AC
277V AC
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
1-Pole
Number per
Carton
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
Catalogue
Number
Shipping Weights

ED 125A Frame Sentron Series
Type HED4
480V AC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
HED41B015a
HED41B020a
HED41B025
HED41B030
HED41B035
HED41B040
HED41B045
HED41B050
HED41B060
HED42B015
HED42B020
HED42B025
HED42B030
HED42B035
HED42B040
HED42B045
HED42B050
HED42B060
HED43B015
HED43B020
HED43B025
HED43B030
HED43B035
HED43B040
HED43B045
HED43B050
HED43B060
HED41B070
HED41B080
HED41B090
HED41B100
HED42B070
HED42B080
HED42B090
HED42B100
HED43B070
HED43B080
HED43B090
HED43B100
110
125
HED42B110
HED42B125
HED43B110
HED43B125
W1
W3
W2
1-POLE
2-POLE
3-POLE
FIGURE 2 - CED (3-Pole shown)
Red Label
2-Pole
600V AC, 250V DC
3-Pole
600V AC, 500V DC b
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
D1
Fuseless Current Limiting

Type CED6
Continuous
Current
Rating
@ 40 C
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
D1
70
80
90
100
Catalogue Number
CED62B020
CED62B030
CED62B040
CED62B050
CED62B060
CED62B070
CED62B080
CED62B090
CED62B100
CED62B125
Catalogue Number
CED63B015
CED63B020
CED63B030
CED63B040
CED63B050
CED63B060
CED63B070
CED63B080
CED63B090
CED63B100
CED63B110
CED63B125
W2, W3
Dimensions (in inches)

Breaker Type
W1
W2
W3
D1
Figure 1
ED2, ED4, ED6,
HED4, ED6 ETI
6.35
3.92
4.56
Figure 2
CED6, CED6 ETI
9.58
3.92
4.56
Breaker
Type
ED2 (1-P)
ED2 (2, 3-P)
ED4 (1-P)
ED4 (2, 3-P)
ED6 (1P)
ED6 (2, 3-P)
HED4 (1-P)
(1530A)
HED4 (1-P)
(35100A)
HED4 (2, 3-P)
CED6 (2, 3-P)
SWD
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 / UL 489 AIR (File #E10848)

Volts AC
120
240
277
347
480
600
010
010
065
22
065
018
30
065
025
018
Volts DC
125
250
05
05 (2-P)
30
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
100
65
30
100
100
200
25
042
200
30
rated.
When
wired as shown on page 5-2, this circuit breaker

is CSA Certified / UL listed and rated for use on 500V DC
ungrounded UPS systems.
5-22
Catalogue Number
250V DC
480V AC
125V DC
277V AC
FIGURE1 - ED, HED, HHED
3-Pole
2-Pole
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
Black Label
1-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40 C
Selection
100
500
18 (3-P)
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240
380/415
500
lcu
lcs
lcu
lcs
lcu
65
17
35
9
18
lcs
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
50 (3-P)
HED4
Single
ED6-ETI,
type circuit breakers meet the CSA / UL criteria for

current limiting at 240V AC.
CED6-ETI, see page 5-50 for ordering
information.
HACR
Pole 15-30A 30KA @ 347V non-ul.

35-100A 18KA @ 347V non-ul.
rated.

Accessories
Accessories for:
ED 125A Frame
Combinations

Available only when ordered together.
Only one module can be added to a
breaker. Additional accessories, which
always attach to the left pole, cannot be
added to the combination later. Adds 1
inch pole space.
Control
Voltage
1 Shunt Trip
1 Shunt Trip and
1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Auxiliary Switch and 1 Alarm Switch
1 Shunt Trip
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Alarm Switch
1 Shunt Trip and 2

Auxiliary Switches
AC
DC
024
048
120
208
240
277
480
S17ED60
S18ED60
S01ED60
S03ED60
S15ED60
S04ED60
S01ED62A
S02ED62A
S03ED62A
S15ED64A
S04ED64A
S01ED62AB
S02ED62AB
S03ED62AB
S15ED64AB
S04ED64AB
S01ED62B
S02ED62B
S03ED62B
S15ED64B
S04ED64B
S01ED62AA
S02ED62AA
S03ED62AA
012
024
048
125
250
S16ED60
S07ED60
S09ED60
S11ED60
S13ED60
S16ED62A
S07ED62A
S09ED62A
S11ED62A
S13ED62A
S07ED62AB
S09ED62AB
S11ED62AB
S13ED62AB
S07ED62B
S09ED62B
S11ED62B
S13ED62B
S07ED62AA
S09ED62AA
S11ED62AA
S13ED62AA
1 Undervoltage
Trip and
1 Alarm Switch
1 Undervoltage
Trip and 2
Auxiliary Switches
Undervoltage Trip Combinations

Control
Voltage
1 Undervoltage
Trip
1 Undervoltage
Trip and
1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip
and 1 Auxiliary
Switch and
1 Alarm Switch
AC
DC
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
120
208
240
277
480
600
U01ED60
U02ED60
U03ED60
U16ED60
U06ED60
U08ED60
U01ED62A
U02ED62A
U03ED62A
U16ED64A
U06ED64A
U01ED62AB
U02ED62AB
U03ED62AB
U16ED64AB
U06ED64AB
U01ED62B
U02ED62B
U03ED62B
U16ED64B
U06ED64B
U01ED62AA
U02ED62AA
U03ED62AA
024
048
125
250
U13ED60
U14ED60
U10ED60
U12ED60
U13ED62A
U14ED62A
U10ED62A
U12ED62A
U13ED62AB
U14ED62AB
U10ED62AB
U13ED62B
U14ED62B
U10ED62B
U13ED62AA
U14ED62AA
U10ED62AA
U12ED62AA
Auxiliary and Alarm Switch Combinations

Maximum
Voltage
1 Auxiliary
Switch*
1 Alarm Switch
Alarm Switch and 2 Auxiliary

1 Auxiliary Switch Switches
1 Alarm Switch and

2 Auxiliary Switches
AC
DC Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
240
250
A01ED62
B00ED62
A01ED62B
A02ED62
A02ED62B
480
A01ED64
B00ED64
A01ED64B
12
A01EDLV*
306.00
Gold Plated Contactsfor PLCuse
Alarm Switch Only

Maximum
Voltage
1 Alarm Switch
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
240 250
B00ED62
480
B00ED64
Ground Fault Sensing Relay Kit Equipment Protection Only

For Use With
Breaker Frame
ED2, ED4, ED6,

HED4, CED6
Number of
Poles
Description
1, 2, 3
Catalogue Number
30mA
5mA
Basic Kit
GF01ED60
GF01ED65
Basic Kit with Normally

Open Bell Alarm
GF01ED60B0
GF01ED65B0
Basic Kit with Normally

Closed Bell Alarm
GF01ED60BC
GF01ED65BC
5-23
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A field addable kit containing 30mA or

5 mA ground fault accessory module,
current transformer with 24 inch leads,
and current transformer mounting
equipment. Current transformer to
mount in gutter of lighting panel or any
control panel. Accessory module
operates from separate 120V control
power source.
Both 30MA and 5MA devices are
equipment protection devices only. Do
not use for personnel protection.
Shunt Trip Combinations
Equipment
Ground Sensing
Selection

FD 250A Frame Sentron Series
Selection
Type FXD6-A
Blue Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Without Lugs)

2-Pole
Catalogue
Number
FXD62B070
FXD62B080
FXD62B090
FXD62B100
FXD62B110
FXD62B125
FXD62B150
FXD62B175
FXD62B200
FXD62B225
FXD62B250
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
3-Pole
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
1610.00
2738.00
Type FD6-A
Catalogue
Number
FXD63B0702036
FXD63B0802036.
FXD63B0902036.
FXD63B1002036.
FXD63B1102036.
FXD63B1252036.
FXD63B1502036.00
FXD63B175236.00
FXD63B200203
FXD63B225
.00
FXD63B250194.00
Blue Label
Interchangeable Trip
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Unassembled with Lugs
Catalogue
Number
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC

70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
FD62B0701695.20
FD62B0801695.20
FD62B0901695.20
FD62B1001695.20
FD62B1101695.20
FD62B1251695.20
FD62B1501695.20
FD62B1751695.20
FD62B2001695.20
FD62B2251695.20
FD62B2502824.20
FD62T070 839.00
FD62T080 839.00
FD62T090 839.00
FD62T100 839.00
FD62T110 839.00
FD62T125 839.00
FD62T150 839.00
FD62T175 839.00
FD62T200 839.00
FD62T225 839.00
FD62T2501968.00
FD62F250 777.00

70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
FD63B070
FD63B080
FD63B090
FD63B100
FD63B110
FD63B125
FD63B150
FD63B175
FD63B200
FD63B225
FD63B250
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
2159.80
3320.80
FD63T070 1035.00
FD63T080 1035.00
FD63T090 1035.00
FD63T100 1035.00
FD63T110 1035.00
FD63T125 1035.00
FD63T150 1035.00
FD63T175 1035.00
FD63T200 1035.00
FD63T225 1035.00
FD63T250 2196.00
FD63F2501006.00
Complete Breaker Unassembled with
Lugs
Prices of FD6, HFD6, and HHFD6
breakers includes frame, trip
and both line and load lugs
(TA1FD350A). When ordered by
these catalogue numbers, the
customer will receive the frame, trip,
and lugs separately packaged. For
applications requiring different lugs,
order individual items as needed.
Complete Breaker Assembled
without Lugs
Prices of FXD6, HFXD6, HHFXD6,
and CFD6 includes frame with noninterchangeable trip unit installed
only. Order required lugs separately.
For line and load lugs (TA1FD350A)
installed, add suffix L to catalogue
number (add 2 times list price of
lugs for each pole).
50C Applications see page 5-67.
400 Hz Applications see page 5-67.
Lugs For 75C Wire

Catalogue
Number
Wire
Range
#6350 kcmil Cu
#4350 kcmil Al
TC1FD350
#6350 kcmil Cu
Compression Lug
CCF250
350 kcmil Cu/Al
TA1FD350A
Breaker
Type
FXD6-A, FD6-A
HFXD6 , HFD6
HHFD6 , HHFXD6
CFD6

CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848)
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
Volts DC
240
480
600
250
500
65
100
200
200
35
65
100
200
22
25
25
100
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
50 (2-P)
18 (3-P)
25 (3-P)
50 (3-P)
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240 380/415
lcu lcs lcu lcs
65 33
35
9
100 50
65 33
200 100 100 50
500
lcu
20
42
65
lcs
10
21
33
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range
Type
FXD6-A circuit breakers are UL Listed for reverse

fed applications.
170-90
100-110
125-150
175-200
Nominal Instantaneous Values

Lowg
2
3
4
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
900
1060
1210
1370
5
770
990
1200
1520
6
810
1060
1300
1780
7
850
1140
1400
1930
High
900
1200
1500
2000
225-250
1100
1900
2100
2300
2500
Breaker Ampere
Rating
1300
1500
1700
Note: FD frame qualified to UL489 supplement SB NAVAL.

See page 5-67 for additional information.
5-24
2-pole
units are 3-pole width.

ungrounded UPS systems only.
d See Note: A, page 5-64.
e HFD6 and HHFD6 type circuit breakers meet the
UL criteria for current limiting at 240 and 480V AC.
f HACR rated.
g +/- 20% Tolerance.
When


FD 250A Frame Sentron Series
Type HFD6 , Type HFXD6
Black Label
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
D1
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
2-Pole 600V AC, 250V DC (3 Pole Width)
HFD63F250 3366.00
FD63T070 1035
FD63T080 1035
FD63T090 1035
FD63T100
1035
FD63T110
1035
FD63T125 1035
FD63T150 103
FD63T175
103
FD63T200 103
FD63T225 1035
FD63T2502196.00
3-Pole 600V AC, Extra High Interrupting

HHFD63B070
HHFD63B080
HHFD63B090
HHFD63B100
HHFD63B110
HHFD63B125
HHFD63B150
HHFD63B175
HHFD63B200
HHFD63B225
HHFD63B250
Figure 1
Figure 2

Breaker
Type
Figure 1
FXD6-A, FD6-A,
HFD6, HFXD6,
HHFD6, FD6-ETI
Figure 2
CFD6,
CFD6-ETI
D1
(to
handle)
4.50
09.50
5.25
4.50
14.25
5.25
Shipping Weights
Type HHFD , HHFXD6

070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
HHFD63F2504093.00
Type CFD6
FD63T070 1035.0
FD63T080 1035.0
FD63T090 1035.0
FD63T100 1035.0
FD63T110 1035.0
FD63T125 1035.0
FD63T150 1035.0
FD63T175 1035.0
FD63T200 1035.0
FD63T225 1035.0
FD63T250 2196.00
Red Label
Number of
Number per
Shipping
Poles
Carton
Weight (lbs.)
FD6-A, HFD6, HHFD6, FXD6-A
Assembled Circuit Breaker (less connectors)
2
1
08.6
3
1
10
FD6-A, HFD6, HHFD6 Frame Only
2
1
07.5
3
1
08.7
FD6 Trip Unit Only
2
1
01.1
3
1
01.3
CFD6 Assembled Circuit Breaker (less terminals)
2
1
31
3
1
34
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
600V AC/500V DC
Catalogue
Number
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
When

For
non-interchangeable trip 3-pole HFD6 type circuit

breaker, change prefix identifier from HFD6 to HFXD6.
Price equals frame and trip prices combined, e.g. price
of HFXD63B250 equals price of HFD63F250 plus price of
FD63T250. Order lugs separately.
CFD63B070
CFD63B08000
CFD63B09075.00
CFD63B10075.00
CFD63B11075.00
CFD63B125
CFD63B150
CFD63B1750
CFD63B2000
CFD63B2250
CFD63B250
Type
HFXD6, HHFXD6, CFD6 are UL Listed for reverse

feed applications.
HFXD6, HFD6, HHFD6, HHFXD6 meet the CSA
Certified / UL criteria for Current Limiting at 240 VAC
and 480V AC.
FXD6, ETI, CFD6, ETI See page 5-50 for
ordering information.
HACR rated.
Type
5-25
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HFD63B070 4519.80
HFD63B080 4519.80
HFD63B090 4519.80
HFD63B100 4519.80
HFD63B110 4519.80
HFD63B125 4519.80
HFD63B150 4519.80
HFD63B175 4519.80
HFD63B200 4519.80
HFD63B225 4519.80
HFD63B250 5680.80
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
HFD62F250 2798.00
FD62T070 839.00
FD62T080 839.00
FD62T090 839.00
FD62T100 839.00
FD62T110 839.00
FD62T125 839.00
FD62T150 839.00
FD62T175 839.00
FD62T200 839.00
FD62T225 839.00
FD62T2501968.00
HFD62B0703716.20
HFD62B0803716.20
HFD62B0903716.20
HFD62B1003716.20
HFD62B1103716.20
HFD62B1253716.20
HFD62B1503716.20
HFD62B1753716.20
HFD62B2003716.20
HFD62B2253716.20
HFD62B2504845.20
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250

Internal Accessories
Accessories:
FD 250A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
AC
DC
24
120
240
277
480
600
12
24
48
125
250
1 Shunt Trip
Catalogue Number
S17FD60
S01FD60
S03FD60
S15FD60
S04FD60
S06FD60
S16FD60
S07FD60
S09FD60
S11FD60
S13FD60
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Control Voltage
1 Undervoltage Trip
1 Undervoltage Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
120
208
240
277
480
600
24
48
125
250
U01FD60
U02FD60
U03FD60
U16FD60
U06FD60
U08FD60
U13FD60
U14FD60
U10FD60
U12FD60
W01FD64
W02FD64
W03FD64
W16FD64
W06FD64
W08FD64
W13FD64
W14FD64
W10FD64
W12FD64
Auxiliary Switch Combinations

Voltage
AC
DC
1 Auxiliary Switch
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
240
A01FD62
A02FD62
480
A01FD64
A02FD64
12
A01FDLV
Gold Plated Contacts - for PLC use
Alarm Switch Combinations

Maximum
Voltage
AC
DC
480
250
a Auxiliary switch application is for 480V AC maximum.

Note: Old F-frame accessories cannot be used in new
Sentron line. Likewise, new FD-frame accessories
cannot be used on old F-frame circuit breakers.
5-26
1 Alarm Switch
Catalogue Number
B00FD64
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
Catalogue Number
C01FD64

JD 400A Frame Sentron Series
Selection
Type JXD2-A
Blue Label
240V AC, 2-pole 250V DC only
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker without Lugs)

2-Pole (3 Pole Width)
Catalogue
Number
JXD22B2002277.00
JXD22B2252277.00
JXD22B2502277.00
JXD22B3002277.00
JXD22B3502277.00
JXD22B4002277.00
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
200
225
250
300
350
400
3-Pole
Catalogue
Number
JXD23B200 2767.00
JXD23B225 2767.00
JXD23B250 2767.00
JXD23B300 2767.00
JXD23B350 2767.00
JXD23B400 2767.00
Type JXD6-A
Blue
600V AC, 2-pole 250V DC, 3-pole 500V DC
200
225
250
300
350
400
JXD62B2002847.00
JXD62B2252847.00
JXD62B2502847.00
JXD62B3002847.00
JXD62B3502847.00
JXD62B4002847.00
Label
JXD63B2003366.00
JXD63B2253366.00
JXD63B2503366.00
JXD63B3003366.00
JXD63B3503366.00
JXD63B4003366.00
Type JD6-A
Blue Label
Complete Breaker
Catalogue
Number
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
200
225
250
300
350
400
JD62B200
JD62B225
JD62B250
JD62B300
JD62B350
JD62B400

200
225
250
300
350
400
2958.00
2958.00
2958.00
2958.00
2958.00
2958.00
JD62F400 1184.00
JD62T200 1662.00
JD62T225 1662.00
JD62T2501662.00
JD62T3001662.00
JD62T3501662.00
JD62T400 1662.00
JD63B200
JD63B225
JD63B250
JD63B300
JD63B350
JD63B400
3534.00
3534.00
3534.00
3534.00
3534.00
3534.00
JD63F400 1515.00
JD63T200
JD63T225
JD63T250
JD63T300
JD63T350
JD63T400
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
Breaker
Type
JXD2-2
JXD6-2, JD6-A
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
HHJD6-A, HHJXD6
CJD6

CSA 22.2 No.5-02 / UL 489 AIR (File E10848)
Volts AC
Volts DC
(50/60Hz)
240
480
600
250
500
065
30 (2-P)
065
035
025
30 (2-P) 25 (3-P)
100
065
035
30 (2-P) 35 (3-P)
200
100
050
200
150
100
50 (2-P) 50 (3-P)
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240 380/415 500
lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu
065 033 040 20 30

100 050 065 33 42
200 100 100 50 65
Lugs For 75C Wire c

Cables
Catalogue per
Wire
Number Lug Range
TA2J6500
1, 2
#3/0-500 kcmil Cu

2
#4/0-500 kcmil Al
TA1L6750
1
500-750 kcmil Al

1
500-600 kcmil Cu
TC1J6600
1
#3/0-600 kcmil Cu
TC2J6500
1, 2
#3/0-500 kcmil Cu
Compression Lug
CCL600
1
500 kcmil Cu/Al
lcs
15
21
33

Breaker Ampere
Rating

Lowf
2
3
4
Highf
200-300
350-400
1250
2000
1960
3140
2140
3430
2320
3710
2500
4000
1430
2290
1610
2570
Type
JXD2 and JXD6 circuit breakers are UL Listed for

reverse feed applications.
When

See Note: A, page 5-64.
HHJD6 type circuit breakers meet the CSA / UL criteria
for current limiting at 240 and 480V AC.
1790
2860
HACR
rated.
f+/- 20% Tolerance.
Note: JD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B NAVAL.

5-27
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Complete Breaker Unassembled

with Lugs
Prices of JD6, HJD6, and HHJD6
breakers include frame, trip and
both line and load lugs (TA2J6500).
When ordered by these catalogue
numbers, the customer will receive
the frame, trip, and lugs separately
packaged. For applications
requiring different lugs, order
individual items as needed.
without Lugs
Prices of JXD6, HJXD6, HHJXD6,
and CJD6 include frame with noninterchangeable trip unit installed
For line and load lugs (TA2J6500)
100% Rated
Types JXD6 and HJXD6 breakers
are available with 100% ratings. To
order add suffix H to catalogue
number, and 10% to list price.
100% rated JD breakers require
the use of 90C Cu cable and lugs
TC1J6600 or TC2J6500.
400Hz Applications see page 5-67.
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C

JD 400A Frame Sentron Series
Type HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
Selection
Black Label
Complete Breaker
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
D1
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C

1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.00

200
225
250
300
350
400
HJD63B200 5845.00
HJD63B225 5845.00
HJD63B250 5845.00
HJD63B300 5845.00
HJD63B350 5845.00
HJD63B400 5845.00
HJD63F400 3826.00
JD63T200
JD63T225
JD63T250
JD63T300
JD63T350
JD63T400
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
200
225
250
300
350
400
HHJD63B2007011.00
HHJD63B2257011.00
HHJD63B2507011.00
HHJD63B3007011.00
HHJD63B3507011.00
HHJD63B4007011.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
Black Label
2-Pole 600V AC(3 Pole Width)
HHJD62B2005832.00
HHJD62B2255832.00
HHJD62B2505832.00
HHJD62B3005832.00
HHJD62B3505832.00
HHJD62B4005832.00
HHJD62F4004058.00
HHJD63F4004992.00
JD62T200
JD62T225
JD62T250
JD62T300
JD62T350
JD62T400
1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.0
1662.00
JD63T200
JD63T225
JD63T250
JD63T300
JD63T350
JD63T400
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
1851.00
Type CJD6
Red Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breakers Without Lugs)

Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
200
225
250
300
350
400
2-Pole
3-Pole
600V AC/250V DC
600V AC/500V DC
Catalogue
Number
For 2-pole application

use outside poles of
3-pole circuit breaker

see Application Data section.
2-pole units available in 3-pole construction.
When wired as shown on page 5-2, this circuit breaker
For
CJD63B2007303.
CJD63B2257303.
CJD63B2507303.
CJD63B3007303.
CJD63B3507303.
CJD63B4007303.00
non-interchangeable 3-pole HJD6 or HHJD6 type

circuit breaker change the prefix identifier to HJXD6
or HHJXD6. Order lugs separately.
5-28
Type HHJD6, HHJXD6-A

200
225
250
300
350
400
Figure 1
HJD62F4003077.00
JD62T200
JD62T225
JD62T250
JD62T300
JD62T350
JD62T400
HJD62B2004851.00
HJD62B2254851.00
HJD62B2504851.00
HJD62B3004851.00
HJD62B3504851.00
HJD62B4004851.00
200
225
250
300
350
400
Figure 2

L
To
Handle
D1
Figure 1
JXD2-A, JXD6-A, JD6-A
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A, HHJD6, 7.5 11
HJD6, HJXD6, HHJXD6,
JXD6-ETI
5.44
Figure 2
CJD6, CJD6-ETI
5.44
Breaker
Type
7.5 17.86
Shipping Weights
Number of
Number per
Shipping
Poles
Carton
Weight (lbs.)
JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HHJD6
Assembled Breaker (less terminals)
2
1
17.5
3
1
19.5
JD6, HJD6, HHJD6 Frame Only
2
1
14
3
1
15.5
JD6 Trip Unit Only
2
1
03.5
3
1
04
CJD6 Complete Assembled Breaker
(less terminals)
2
1
29.5
3
1
31.5
JXD6-ETI,
CJD6-ETI see page 5-50 for ordering information.

HJXD6, HHJXD6 Circuit Breakers are CSA Certified /
UL listed for reverse fed applications.
CE applies to non-interchangeable type HJXD only.
HACR rated.
Type
SJD 400A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Current Limiting
Type SJD6-A
Type SCJD6-A
Type SHJD6-A
Blue Label
Red Label
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
Catalogue
Number
SJD69200
SJD69300
SJD69400
SJD69200G
SJD69300G
SJD69400G
SJD69200NT
SJD69300NT
SJD69400NT
SJD69200NGT
SJD69300NGT
SJD69400NGT
Max
Current
Rating
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
Catalogue
Number
SHJD69200
SHJD69300
SHJD69400
SHJD69200G
SHJD69300G
SHJD69400G
SHJD69200NT
SHJD69300NT
SHJD69400NT
SHJD69200NGT
SHJD69300NGT
SHJD69400NGT
Max
Current
Rating
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
Catalogue
Number
SCJD69200
SCJD69300
SCJD69400
SCJD69200G
SCJD69300G
SCJD69400G
SCJD69200NT
SCJD69300NT
SCJD69400NT
SCJD69200NGT
SCJD69300NGT
SCJD69400NGT
SJD 400A Frame 100% Rated b

Type SJD6-A
Type SHJD6-A
Blue Label
Shipping Weights
Breaker
Type
Number per
Carton
Shipping
Weight (lbs)
SJD6-A
SHJD6-A
SCJD6-A
1
1
1
20
20
33
Max
Current
Rating
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
Neutral Transformers
Trip Unit Adjustable Functions

Short

Suffix
Cont Long Instan-
Short Short Time Ground
Ground
Letter Trip
Current Time taneous Time Time l2t Fault Fault
Code
Type
Setting Delay
Setting Pick Up Delay
Pick Up Pick Up Delay
None LI
LIG
u`
NT
LSI
NGT
LSIG
Ampere

Rating
Catalogue Number
200
300
400
N02SJD
N03SJD
N04SJD

u
u

Breaker
Type
SJD6-A
SHJD6-A
SCJD6-A
Note: G suffix in catalogue number denotes circuit

breaker for 3 phase, 3 wire systems.
For 3 phase, 4 wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral)
transformer as separate and additional item.
RMS Symmetrical kA UL 489 (File E10848)

240V AC
480V AC
065
100
200
035
025
065
035
150 100
600V AC
For additional information, see Note: A, page 5-64.

Refer to the NEC for proper application of 100%
rated devices.
5-29
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Catalogue
Number
SHJD69200H
SHJD69300H
SHJD69400H
SHJD69200GH
SHJD69300GH
SHJD69400GH
SHJD69200NTH
SHJD69300NTH
SHJD69400NTH
SHJD69200NGTH
SHJD69300NGTH
SHJD69400NGTH
SJD6 and SCJD6 are acceptable for

reverse connection application.
SHJD6 are not acceptable for
Max
Current
Rating
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
200
300
400
Pricing information for all Digital

Sentron Series SJD frames is for
complete breaker only price
required lugs as separate items
lugs are suitable for 75 C wire.

No of

Cables
Catalogue per
Wire
Number
Connector Range

2
#3/0-500 kcmil Cu
TA2J6500 2
#4/0-500 kcmil Al
TA1L6750 1
500750 kcmil Al

1
500600 kcmil Cu
TC1J6600 1
#3/0-600 kcmil Cu
TC2J6500 2
#3/0-500 kcmil Cu
TA2J630 2
#4#3/0-Cu/Al
Compression Lug
CCL600
(1 pc.)
#1/0-500 kcmil Cu/Al
3-Pole, 600V AC
Catalogue
Number
SJD69200H
SJD69300H
SJD69400H
SJD69200GH
SJD69300GH
SJD69400GH
SJD69200NTH
SJD69300NTH
SJD69400NTH
SJD69200NGTH
SJD69300NGTH
SJD69400NGTH
Lugs for 75 C Wire a
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Selection

Accessories for:
JD 400A Frame
LD 600A Frame
LMD 800A Frame
SJD 400A Frame
SLD 600A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
024
048
120
240
277
480
Catalogue Number
S17JLD6
S18JLD6
S01JLD6
S03JLD6
S15JLD6
S04JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
S01JLD62A
S03JLD62A
S15JLD64A
802.00
802.00
802.00
-
012
024
048
125
250
S16JLD6
S07JLD6
S09JLD6
S11JLD6
S13JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S16JLD62A
S07JLD62A
S09JLD62A
S11JLD62A
S13JLD62A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00

Control
Voltage
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sensitrip Ammeter
1 Undervoltage Trip

1 Auxiliary Switch
Catalogue Number

AC
DC
120
208
240
480
U01JLD6 569.00
U02JLD6569.00
U03JLD6 569.00
U06JLD6 569.00
Catalogue Number
U01JLD62A802.00
U02JLD62A802.00
U03JLD62A802.00
U06JLD64A802.00
Catalogue Number
U01JLD62AA1035.00
U02JLD62AA1035.0
U03JLD62AA1035.0
U06JLD64AA1035.0-
024
048
125
250
U13JLD6 569.00
U14JLD6569.00
U10JLD6569.00
U12JLD6569.00
U13JLD62A802.00
U14JLD62A802.00
U10JLD62A802.00
U12JLD62A802.00
U13JLD62AA1035.00
U14JLD62AA1035.0
U10JLD62AA1035.0
U12JLD62AA1035.00

The Ammeter Display Units plug into
the Sensitrip Trip Unit and displays
the phrase current flowing in the
SADU breaker. They are powered by
the breakers CTs with replaceable
battery back-up for maintaining trip
and max logs.
The SADU reads currents, current
imbalance, current demand, and trip
status.
Ammeter Mounting Kit

The Ammeter may also be panel or
door mounted using the SADURMK18
remote mounting kit.
Maximum Voltage
1 Form C
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
480
250
A01JLD64
242.00
A02JLD64
12
A01JLDLV
306.00
A02JlDLV
Catalogue Number
483.00

Maximum
Voltage
1 Alarm Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
AC
DC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
480
250
B01JLD64 242.00
A01JLD64B
1 Alarm Switch and

Catalogue
Number
483.00
Plug-in Ammeter Display Units

Breaker Type
SJD, SLD
Note: Accessory modules can only be added to right

side pole of solid state SJD and SLD frame circuit
breakers. All accessories on this page are useable
on superseded JD2, JJ6, JL6, HJ6, SJL, LJ6, LL6,
HL6 and SLL circuit breakers.
No accessories can be added if mechanical interlock
is used.
5-30
2 Form C
Description
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
A02JLD64B683.00

LD 600A Frame Sentron Series
Type LXD6-A
Selection
Blue Label

3-Pole
600V AC
250V DC 600V AC
500V DC
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number
LXD62B4504376.00
LXD63B4505456.00
LXD62B5004376.00
LXD63B5005456.00
LXD62B6004376.00
LXD63B6005456.00
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
450
500
600
Type LD6-A
Blue Label
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Unassembled w/Lugs
Catalogue
Number
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number

250
300
350
400
450
500
600
LD62B2504488.00
LD62B3004488.00
LD62B3504488.00
LD62B4004488.00
LD62B4504488.00
LD62B5004488.00
LD62B6004488.00
1662.00
1662.00
1662.00
1662.00
1662.00
1662.00
1662.00
LD63B2505624.00
LD63B3005624.00
LD63B3505624.00
LD63B4005624.00
LD63B4505624.00
LD63B5005624.00
LD63B6005624.00
Breaker
Type

CSA / UL 489 AIR (File E10848)
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
Volts DC
240
480
600
250
500 c
LXD6, LD6
HLD6, HLXD6
HHLD6, HHLXD6
CLD6
065
100
200
200
035
065
100
150
025
035
050
100
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240 380/415
(lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs)
25 (3-P) 065 033 040 20
35 (3-P) 100 050 065 33
200 100 100 50

50 (3-P)
Shipping Weights
500
(lcu)
30
42
65
(lcs)
15
21
33

Breaker Ampere
Rating
250-300
350-450
500-600

Lowe
2
3
4
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3800
4290
5
1960
3140
4710
6
2140
3430
5140
7
2320
3710
5570
Highe
2500
4000
6000
Number of
Number per
Shipping
Poles
Carton
Weight (lbs.)
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HHLD6
2
1
17.5
3
1
19.5
LD6, HLD6, HHLD6 Frame Only
2
1
14
3
1
15.5
LD6, HHLD6 Trip Unit Only
2
1
03.5
3
1
04
CLD6 Complete Assembled Breaker
(less terminals)
2
3
1
1
29.5
31.5
Lugs For 75C Wire c
Type
LXD6A circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed

for reverse
fed applications.
When

wired as shown on page 5-2, this circuit breaker is
UL listed and rated for use on 500V DC ungrounded UPS
systems only.
HACRrated.
e +/- 20% Tolerance
Note: LD frame qualified to UL489 supplement SB NAVAL.


Cables
Catalogue per
Wire
Number Lug Range
TA2J6500
1, 2
#3/0 500 kcmil Cu

2
#4/0 500 kcmil Al
TC2J6500
2
#3/0-500 kcmil Cu
TA1L6750
1
500-750 kcmil Al

1
500-600 kcmil Cu
TC1J6600
1
#3/0-600 kcmil Cu
Compression Lug
CCL600
1
500 kcmil Cu/Al
5-31
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LD63F600
JD63T250 1851.00
JD63T300 1851.00
JD63T350 1851.00
JD63T400 1851.00
LD63T450 1851.00
LD63T500 1851.00
LD63T600 1851.00

with Lugs
Prices of LD6, HLD6, and HHLD6
breakers include frame, trip, and
both line and load lugs (TA2J6500).
When ordered by these catalogue
numbers, the customer will receive
the frame, trip and lugs separately
packaged. For applications requiring
different lugs, order individual items
as needed.
without Lugs
Prices of LXD6, HLXD6, HHLXD6,
and CLD6 include frame with noninterchangeable trip unit installed
For line and load lugs (TA2J6500)
100% Rated (3-pole only)
Types, LXD6 and HLXD6 breakers
are available with 100% ratings. To
order add suffix H to catalogue
number, and 10% to list price. 100%
rated LD breakers require the use of
90C Cu cable and lugs TC1J6600 or
TC2J6500.
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
LD62F600
JD62T250
JD62T300
JD62T350
JD62T400
LD62T450
LD62T500
LD62T600

LD 600A Frame Sentron Series
Type HLD6-A, HLXD6
Selection
Black Label
Complete Breaker
Unassembled w/Lugs
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
D1
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
3-Pole 600V AC, 500V

250
300
350
400
450
500
600
5868.00
5868.00
5868.00
5868.00
5868.00
5868.00
5868.00
HLD62F600
JD62T2501662.0
JD62T300 1662.0
JD62T350 1662.0
JD62T400 1662.0
LD62T450 1662.0
LD62T500 1662.0
LD62T600 1662.00
HLD63F600
Type HHLD6, HHLXD6
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1851.0
1851.
1851.0
1851.0
0
0
Black Label
2-Pole 600V AC (3 Pole Width)
HHLD62B250
HHLD62B3007318.00
HHLD62B3507318.00
HHLD62B4007318.00
HHLD62B4507318.00
HHLD62B5007318.00
HHLD62B6007318.00
JD63T250
JD63T300
JD63T350
JD63T400
LD63T450
LD63T500
LD63T600
HHLD62F600
JD62T250 1662.0
JD62T3001662.0
JD62T350 1662.0
JD62T400 1662.0
HHLD62T4501662.
HHLD62T5001662
HHLD62T600662.00
DC
HLD63B250
HLD63B300
HLD63B350
HLD63B400
HLD63B450
HLD63B500
HLD63B600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
HLD62B250
HLD62B300
HLD62B350
HLD62B400
HLD62B450
HLD62B500
HLD62B600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
Figure 2
Figure 1

Breaker
Type
Figure 1
LXD6-A, LD6-A
HLD6-A
HHLD6, HHLXD6,
LXD6ETI
Figure 2
CLD6,
CLD6-ETI
To
Handle
W
D1
7.5
11
5.44
7.5
17.86
5.44
3-Pole 600V AC
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
HHLD63B2508864.00
HHLD63B3008864.00
HHLD63B3508864.00
HHLD63B4008864.00
HHLD63B4508864.00
HHLD63B5008864.00
HHLD63B6008864.00
HHLD63F600
JD63T250 1851.0
JD63T300 1851.0
JD63T350 1851.0
JD63T400 1851.0
HHLD63T450
HHLD63T500
HHLD63T6001851.00
Type CLD6f
Red Label

Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker)
2-Pole
3-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
600V AC/250V DC
600V AC/500V DC
450
500
600
For 2-pole application


see Application Data section
When

5-32
Catalogue
Number
For
CLD63B450 11666
CLD63B500 11666
CLD63B6001666.00
complete assembled 3 pole HLD6 or HHLD6 type

circuit breaker change the prefix identifier HLD6 or
HHLD6 to HLXD6 or HHLXD6. Price is sum of frame and
trip units prices, e.g. price of HLXD63B400 is the price
of HLD63F600 plus the price of LD63T600. Order the
terminal connectors separately.
Type HLXD6, HHLXD6 Circuit Breakers are CSA Certified /

UL Listed for reverse feed applications.
LXD6-ETI, CLD6-ETI see page 5-50 for ordering information.
CE Applies to non-interchangable type HLXD only.
HACR rated.
SLD 600A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Selection
Current Limiting
Type SLD6-A
Type SHLD6-A
Type SCLD6-A
Blue Label
Black Label
Red Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
Catalogue
Number
SLD69300
SLD69400
SLD69500
SLD69600
SLD69300G
SLD69400G
SLD69500G
SLD69600G
SLD69300NT
SLD69400NT
SLD69500NT
SLD69600NT
SLD69300NGT
SLD69400NGT
SLD69500NGT
SLD69600NGT
Max
Current
Rating
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
Catalogue
Number
SHLD69300
SHLD69400
SHLD69500
SHLD69600
SHLD69300G
SHLD69400G
SHLD69500G
SHLD69600G
SHLD69300NT
SHLD69400NT
SHLD69500NT
SHLD69600NT
SHLD69300NGT
SHLD69400NGT
SHLD69500NGT
SHLD69600NGT
Max
Current
Rating
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
300
400
500
600
Catalogue
Number
SCLD69300
SCLD69400
SCLD69500
SCLD69600
SCLD69300G
SCLD69400G
SCLD69500G
SCLD69600G
SCLD69300NT
SCLD69400NT
SCLD69500NT
SCLD69600NT
SCLD69300NGT
SCLD69400NGT
SCLD69500NGT
SCLD69600NGT
SJD6, SLD6
LIG
NT
LSI
NGT
LSIG
SJD6, SHJD6, SLD6, SHLD6
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
None LI
Short

Suffix
Cont Long Instan-
Ground
Letter Trip
Code
Type
Setting Delay
u
u

Breaker
Type
SLD6-A
SHLD6-A
SCLD6-A
Pricing information for all Digital
Sentron Series SLD frames is for
complete breaker only price
required lugs as separate items
lugs are suitable for 75 C wire.
240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
065
100
200
035
025
065
035
150 100
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue Number
300
400
500
600
N03SJD
N04SJD
N05SLD
N06SLD
SCJD6, SCLD6
Dimensions (Inches)
Breaker
Type
SLD6 and SCLD6 are suitable for

SHLD6 are not suitable for reverse
connection application.

breaker for 3 phase, 3 wire circuits.
D1
SJD6(A), SHJD6(A)
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A)
SLD6, SHLD6
7.5
11
5.44
SCJD6
SCLD6
7.5
17.86
5.44
For ordering information and terminal connectors, neutral

transformers, see page 5-33.
100% Rated Not available in SLD6 Frame.
5-33

Accessories for:
JD 400A Frame
LD 600A Frame
LMD 800A Frame
SJD 400A Frame
SLD 600A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
024
048
120
240
277
480
Catalogue Number
S17JLD6
S18JLD6
S01JLD6
S03JLD6
S15JLD6
S04JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
S01JLD62A
S03JLD62A
S15JLD64A
--802.00
802.00
802.00
-
012
024
048
125
250
S16JLD6
S07JLD6
S09JLD6
S11JLD6
S13JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S16JLD62A
S07JLD62A
S09JLD62A
S11JLD62A
S13JLD62A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00

Control
Voltage
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sensitrip Ammeter

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
U01JLD6
U02JLD6
U03JLD6
U16JLD6
U06JLD6
U08JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U01JLD62A 802.00
U02JLD62A802.00
U03JLD62A802.00
U16JLD64A802.00
U06JLD64A802.00
--
Catalogue Number
U01JLD62AA1035.00
U02JLD62AA1035.00
U03JLD62AA1035.00
U16JLD62AA1035.00
U06JLD64AA1035.00
--
024
048
125
250
U13JLD6
U14JLD6
U10JLD6
U12JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U13JLD62A802.00
U14JLD62A802.00
U10JLD62A 802.00
U12JLD62A802.00
U13JLD62AA1035.00
U14JLD62AA1035.00
U10JLD62AA1035.00
U12JLD62AA1035.00

and max logs.
status.

Maximum Voltage
1 Form C
2 Form C
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
480
250
A01JLD64
A02JLD64
12
A01JLDLV
A02JLDLV

Maximum
Voltage
1 Alarm Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
A01JLD64B
A02JLD64B
AC
DC
Catalogue
Number
480
250
B01JLD64
242.00
1 Alarm Switch and


Breaker Type
SJD, SLD

is used.
5-34
483.00
Descripton
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00

LMD 800A Frame Sentron Series
Type LMXD6
Selection
Blue Label

3-Pole
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number
LMXD63B500
LMXD62B600 5582.00 LMXD63B600 7067
LMXD62B700 5582.00 LMXD63B700 7067
LMXD62B800 5582.00 LMXD63B8007067.00
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
500
600
700
800
Blue Label
Type LMD6
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Unassembled w/Lugs
Catalogue
Number
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number

500
600
700
800
LMD62B5005928.00
LMD62B6005928.00
LMD62B7005928.00
LMD62B8005928.00
LMD62T5002671.0
LMD62T6002671.0
LMD62T7002671.0
LMD62T8002671.00
LMD63B5007589.00
LMD63B6007589.00
LMD63B7007589.00
LMD63B8007589.00
LMD63F8003716.00
LMD63T5003351.0
LMD63T6003351.0
LMD63T7003351.0
LMD63T8003351.00

without Lugs
Prices of LMXD6 and HLMXD6
include frame with noninterchangeable trip unit installed
For line and load lugs (TA3K500)
Shipping Weights
5
4710
4700
6
5140
6400
7
5570
7300
Highf
6000
8000
Number of
Poles
Number per
Carton
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
LMD6, HLMD6, LMXD6, HLMXD6

Complete Breaker (less terminals)
2
3
1
1
53
61.5
LMD6, HLMD6 Frame Only

2
3
1
1
42.25
46
LMD6, HLMD6 Trip Unit Only

2
3
1
1
4.5
6.5
Lugsd for 75C Wire

Cables
Catalogue per
Wire
Number Lug
Range
TA2K500
1, 2
#1-500 kcmil Cu / Al
TA3K500
1-3
#1/0-500 kcmil Cu / Al
TA2N750
1, 2
500-750 kcmil Cu / Al
LMXD6
circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for

reverse connected applications.
Use 6 lugs for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole.
When

is CSA Certified / UL listed and rated for use on 500UDC
HACRrated.
f +/- 20% Tolerance

5-35
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Ampere Rating
500-600
700-800

Lowf
2
3
4
3000
3430
3860
4290
3200
3500
3700
4200

with Lugs
Prices of LMD6 and HLMD6 breakers
include frame, trip, and both line
and load lugs (TA3K500). These
catalogue numbers include the
frame, trip and lugs separately
packaged. For applications requiring
different lugs, order individual items
as needed.
500
600
700
800
LMD62F8002909.00

LMD 800A Frame Sentron Series
Type HLMXD6
Black Label

2-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
500
600
700
800
600V AC/
250V DC
3-Pole
For 2-Pole application use

outside poles of 3-Pole
circuit breaker.
600V AC/
500V DC
Catalogue
Number
HLMXD63B500 8553.0
HLMXD63B600 8553.0
HLMXD63B700 85
HLMXD63B8008553.00
Type HLMD6
Black Label
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
D1
D
Complete Breaker
Unassembled
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number

500
600
700
800
L
HLMD62F800
LMD62T5002671.0
LMD62T600
LMD62T700
LMD62T8002671.00
HLMD63F800
LMD63T500 3351.0
LMD63T600 3351.0
LMD63T700 335
LMD63T800 3351.00
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HLMD62B5007066.00
HLMD62B6007066.00
HLMD62B7007066.00
HLMD62B8007066.00

500
600
700
800
HLMD63B5009077.00
HLMD63B6009077.00
HLMD63B7009077.00
HLMD63B8009077.00
Breaker
Type
LMD6, LMXD6
HLMD6, HLMXD6
UL 489A IR
Volts AC
Volts DC
240
480
600
250
500
65
50
25
30 (2-P) 25 (3-P)
100
065
050
30 (2-P) 50 (3-P)

HLMXD6
circuit breakers are UL Listed for reverse

connection applications.

LMXD6-ETI, see page 5-50 for catalogue information.
5-36
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60HZ)
220/240 380/415
(lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs)
065 033 040 20
100 050 065 33
When
500
(lcu) (lcs)
30 15
42 21

UL listed and rated for use on 500VDC ungrounded UPS
systems only.
HACR rated.

Breaker
Type
LMD6,
LMXD6,
HLMD6,
HLMXD6
LMXD6-ETI
D1
7.5
16
4.5
5.93

Accessories for:
JD 400A Frame
LD 600A Frame
LMD 800A Frame
SJD 400A Frame
SLD 600A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
024
048
120
240
277
480
S17JLD6
S18JLD6
S01JLD6
S03JLD6
S15JLD6
S04JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00S01JLD62A
569.00S03JLD62A
569.00S15JLD64A
569.00
Catalogue Number
--802.00
802.00
802.00
--
012
024
048
125
250
S16JLD6
S07JLD6
S09JLD6
S11JLD6
S13JLD6
569.00S16JLD62A
569.00S07JLD62A
569.00S09JLD62A
569.00S11JLD62A
569.00S13JLD62A
802.00

Control
Voltage
Sensitrip Ammeter

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip

Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
U01JLD6
U02JLD6
U03JLD6
U16JLD6
U06JLD6
U08JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U01JLD62A
U02JLD62A
U03JLD62A
U16JLD64A
U06JLD64A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
--
U01JLD62AA1035.00
U02JLD62AA1035.00
U03JLD62AA1035.00
U16JLD62AA1035.00
U06JLD64AA1035.00
--
024
048
125
250
U13JLD6
U14JLD6
U10JLD6
U12JLD6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U13JLD62A
U14JLD62A
U10JLD62A
U12JLD62A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
U13JLD62AA1035.00
U14JLD62AA1035.00
U10JLD62AA1035.00
U12JLD62AA1035.00

and max logs.
status.

Maximum Voltage
1 Form C*
2 Form C
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
480
250
A01JLD64
A02JLD64483.00
12
A01JLDLV
A02JLDLV

Maximum
Voltage
1 Alarm Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

Catalogue
Number
AC
DC
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
480
250
B01JLD64 242.00
A01JLD64B 483.00
A02JLD64B

Breaker Type
SJD, SLD
Description
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00

is used.
5-37
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DC
AC
120
208
240
277
480
600

MD 800A Frame Sentron Series
Type MXD6
Selection
Blue Label

2-Pole
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
3-Pole
Catalogue
Number
600
700
800
Catalogue
Number
MXD62B6005582.00
MXD62B7005582.00
MXD62B8005582.00
MXD63B600 7067.00
MXD63B700 7067.00
MXD63B800 7067.00
Type MD6
Blue Label
Continuous
Current Setting
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Catalogue
Number

500
600
700
800
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
500
600
700
800
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
MD62B5005928.00
MD62B6005928.00
MD62B7005928.00
MD62B8005928.00
Frame Only
MD62F8002909.00
MD62T5002671.0
MD62T6002671.0
MD62T700 26
MD62T8002671.00
MD63F800 3716.00
MD63T5003351.00
MD63T6003351.00
MD63T7003351.00
MD63T8003351.00
MD63B500 7589.00
MD63B600 7589.00
MD63B700 7589.00
MD63B800 7589.00
Lugs
Catalogue
Number
Cables
Per Lug
Lugs
Per Kit
Wire
Range
TA2K500
TA3K500
TC2K500
TC3K350
1-2
1-3
1-2
1-3
1
1
1
1
#1-500 kcmil Cu/Al

1/0-500 kcmil Cu/Al
#1-500 kcmil Cu
#1-350 kcmil Cu
64.00
87.00
107.00
135.00
with Lugs
Pricing information for MD6 and
HMD6 breakers includes frame,
trip, and both line and load lugs
(TA3K500). When ordered by these
catalogue numbers, the customer
will receive the frame, trip and
lugs separately packaged. For
applications requiring different lugs,
order individual items as needed.
without Lugs
Prices of MXD6, HMXD6 and
CMD6 include frame with noninterchangeable trip units installed
For line and load lugs (TA3K500)
100% Ratedf
Types MXD6, HMXD6 and CMD6
breakers are available with 100%
ratings. To order add suffix H
to catalogue number, and 10% to
list price. 100% rated MD breakers
require the use of 90C Cu cable and
lugs 2TA4P8500 or 2TA2N8750 for
2-pole; 3TA4P8500 or 3TA2N8750 for
3-pole.
Kits
2TA2N8750
3TA2N8750
2TA3N8750
3TA3N8750
2TA4N8500
3TA4N8500
2TA4P8500
3TA4P8500
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
327.00
459.00
600-750 kcmil Cu/Al
517.00
744.00
500-750 kcmil Cu/Al
526.00
762.00
250-500 kcmil Cu/Al
522.00
754.00
250-500 kcmil Cu/Al

Ampere
Rating
500600
700800

Lowh
2
3
4
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
Shipping Weights
Number of
Number per
Poles
Carton
MD6, HMD6, HMXD6, CMD6
(less lugs)
2
1
3
1
5-38
53
61.5
MD6, HMD6 Frame Only

5
4710
6280
6
5140
6850
7
5570
7420
Highh
6000
8000
2
3
1
1
42.25
46
MD6, HMD6 Trip Unit Only

2
3
MXD6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL Listed for

reverse connection applications.
2-pole units available in 3-pole width only.
Use 6 connectors for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole.
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
1
1
4.5
6.5
80%
rated breakers with the CE mark will also be marked

in the 100% rated version.
HACRrated.
h +/-
20% Tolerance.
Note: MD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B NAVAL.


MD 800A Frame Sentron Series
Type HMXD6
Black Label

2-Pole 600V AC
250V DC
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
600
700
800
3-Pole 600V AC
500V DC
Catalogue
Number
For 2-pole application use outside

poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
HMXD63B600
HMXD63B700
HMXD63B800
8555.00
8555.00
8555.00
Type HMD6
Black Label
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Catalogue
Number

500
600
700
800
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
HMD62F8004047.00
MD62T500 2671.0
MD62T600 2671.0
MD62T700 2671.0
MD62T800 2671.00
HMD63F8005204.00
MD63T500 3351.0
MD63T600 3351.
MD63T700 3351.0
MD63T800 3351.00
HMD62B5007066.00
HMD62B6007066.00
HMD62B7007066.00
HMD62B8007066.00
Type CMD6
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HMD63B5009077.00
HMD63B6009077.00
HMD63B7009077.00
HMD63B8009077.00
500
600
700
800
Red Label

Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Lug
2-Pole
3-Pole
600V AC/250V DC
600V AC/500V DC
Catalogue
Number
500
600
700
800
For 2-pole application use

outside poles of 3-pole
circuit breaker
When wire lug shield NDTS is used.
CMD63B500
CMD63B600
CMD63B700
CMD63B800
12599.00
12599.00
12599.00
12599.00
Breaker
Type
MD6, MXD6
HMD6, HMXD6
CMD6
UL 489 AIRFile E10848

Volts AC
Volts DC
240
065
480
050
600
25
250
30 (2-P)
(lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs

500
25 (3-P) 065 033 040 20 30 15
100
200
065
100
50
65
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
50 (3-P) 100 050 065 33

50 (3-P) 200 100 100 50


W
(To
Handle)
D1
MD6, MXD6, HMD6,

HMXD6, CMD6,
MXD6-ETI, CMD6-ETI
16
8.25
with lug shields
24
8.25
Breaker
Type
IEC 947-2 AIR

Volts AC (50/60HZ)
220/240 380/415 500
42
65
Note: NDTS lug shields are required when oversized lugs

are used. The kits include the NDTS shield.
21
33
When
wired as shown on page 5-2, this circuit breaker is CSA Certified / UL listed and
rated for use on 500V DC ungrounded UPS systems only.
HACRrated.
HMXD6
2-pole
circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL listed for reverse connection applications.
units available in 3-pole width only.
CMD6-ETI see page 5-50 for catalogue information.
MXD6-ETI,
5-39
SMD 800A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Type SMD6
Type SHMD6
Blue Label
Catalogue
Number
SMD69600A
SMD69700A
SMD69800A
SMD69600AG
SMD69700AG
SMD69800AG
SMD69600ANT
SMD69700ANT
SMD69800ANT
SMD69600ANGT
SMD69700ANGT
SMD69800ANGT
Ordering
Type SCMD6-A
Pricing information for all Digital Sentron

Series MD and ND frames is for complete
breaker only. Price requires lugs or lug
kits as separate items. Lugs are suitable
for 75C wire or as noted. Connector
wire ranges and cavities are established
in conjunction with Table 6.1.4.2.1 of UL
489 standards. Choose actual connector
for circuit breakers based on customer
requirements.
Recommended Terminal Connectors
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Red Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
Selection
Current Limiting
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
Catalogue
Number
SHMD69600A
SHMD69700A
SHMD69800A
SHMD69600AG
SHMD69700AG
SHMD69800AG
SHMD69600ANT
SHMD69700ANT
SHMD69800ANT
SHMD69600ANGT
SHMD69700ANGT
SHMD69800ANGT
Max
Current
Rating
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
Catalogue
Number
SCMD69600A
SCMD69700A
SCMD69800A
SCMD69600AG
SCMD69700AG
SCMD69800AG
SCMD69600ANT
SCMD69700ANT
SCMD69800ANT
SCMD69600ANGT
SCMD69700ANGT
SCMD69800ANGT
Information
Breaker
Frame
Ampere
Rating
Connector or
Connector Kit
MD
MD
ND
ND
500600
700800
800
9001200 (kit)
TA2K500
TA3K500
TA3K500
3TA4N8500
ypes SMD6, SHMD6, SND6, SHND6 are

T
acceptable for reverse connection applications.
Shipping Weights
SMD 800A Frame 100% Rated
Type SMD6
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type SCMD6-A
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
Catalogue
Number
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
SHMD69600AH
SHMD69700AH
SHMD69800AH
SHMD69600AGH
SHMD69700AGH
SHMD69800AGH
SHMD69600ANTH
SHMD69700ANTH
SHMD69800ANTH
SHMD69600ANGTH
SHMD69700ANGTH
SHMD69800ANGTH
Breaker
Type
Number per Shipping

Carton
Weight (lbs)
All types
61.5
Lugs for 75C Wire b
Red Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
SMD69600AH
SMD69700AH
SMD69800AH
SMD69600AGH
SMD69700AGH
SMD69800AGH
SMD69600ANTH
SMD69700ANTH
SMD69800ANTH
SMD69600ANGTH
SMD69700ANGTH
SMD69800ANGTH
Current Limiting
Type SHMD6
Blue Label
Catalogue
Number
Max
Current
Rating
Catalogue
Number
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
600
700
800
SCMD69600AH
SCMD69700AH
SCMD69800AH
SCMD69600AGH
SCMD69700AGH
SCMD69800AGH
SCMD69600ANTH
SCMD69700ANTH
SCMD69800ANTH
SCMD69600ANGTH
SCMD69700ANGTH
SCMD69800ANGTH

Cables
Catalogue
per
Wire
Number
Lug
Range
2
#1-500 kcmil Cu/Al
TA2K500
TA3K500
3
#1-500 kcmil Cu/Al
TC2K500
2
#1-500 kcmil Cu
TC3K350
3
#1-350 kcmil Cu
Kits (3 lugs/kit)
4
250500 kcmil Cu/Al
3TA4N8500
3TA4P8500
4
250500 kcmil Cu/Al
3TA2N8750 2
500750 kcmil Cu/Al
3TA3N8750
3
500750 kcmil Cu/Al
Each kit contains the following:
3TA4P85003 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier
3TA3N87503 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier
3TA2N87503 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier
Suffix
Cont
Long
Instan- Short
Short
Ground Ground

Letter
Trip Current
Time taneous
Time Time Fault Fault
Code
Type
Setting
Delay
Setting
Pick Up
Delay
Pick Up Delay
A
LI
AG
LIG
ANT
LSI
ANGT
LSIG
Ampere

Rating
Catalogue Number
N06SMDA
N07SMDA
N08SMDA
0600
0700
0800
u
u

Breaker
Type
SMD6
SHMD6
SCMD6
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits.
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral)
5-40

240V AC
480V AC
065
100
200
050 25
065 50
100 65
a Use
600V AC
2-3TA4P8500 for 3-pole. These kits are rated for

90C wire. 90C Cu cable must be used, and sized per
75C ampacity.
b For additional information, see Note: A, page 5-64.
c SMD6, SHMD6 and SCMD6 circuit breakers are UL
Listed for reverse connection applications.

Accessories for:
MD/SMD 800A Frame
ND/SND 1200A Frame
PD/SPD 1600A Frame
RD 2000A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
Catalogue Number
S01MN6
S02MN6
S03MN6
S15MN6
S04MN6
S06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
S01MN64A
S02MN64A
S03MN64A
S15MN64A
S04MN64A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
-
012
024
048
125
250
S16MN6
S07MN6
S09MN6
S11MN6
S13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S16MN64A
S07MN64A
S11MN64A
S13MN64A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00

Control
Voltage
AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
U01MN6
U02MN6
U03MN6
U15MN6
U04MN6
U06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
U01MN64A802.00
U02MN64A802.00
U03MN64A802.00
U15MN64A802.00
U04MN64A802.00
Catalogue Number
U01MN64AA 1035.00
U02MN64AA 1035.00
U03MN64AA 1035.00
U15MN64AA 1035.00
U04MN64AA 1035.00
024
048
125
250
U07MN6
U09MN6
U11MN6
U13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U07MN64A802.00
U09MN64A802.00
U11MN64A 802.00
U13MN64A802.00
U07MN64AA 1035.00
U09MN64AA 1035.00
U11MN64AA 035.00
U13MN64AA 1035.00

Maximum Voltage
1 Form C
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
2 Form C
480
250
A01MN64
242.00
A02MN64
12
A01MNDLV
306.00
A02MNDLV
Catalogue Number
483.00

Maximum
Voltage

and max logs.
status.
1 Alarm Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

Catalogue Number
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
480
250
B00MN64
A01MN64B
242.00
483.00
A02MN64B
483.00

Breaker Type
SMD, SND, SPD
Description
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00

5-41
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sensitrip Ammeter
Catalogue Number

Accessory modules can mount in either

left hand or right hand poles of all circuit
breakers, including solid state. Exception:
when mechanical interlock is used
accessories cannot be mounted in left pole.

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip

ND 1200A Frame Sentron Series
Type NXD6
Selection
Blue Label

2-Pole 600V AC
250V DC
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
3-Pole 600V AC
500V DC
Catalogue
Number
0900
1000
1200
Catalogue
Number
NXD62B9009388.00
NXD62B1009388.00
NXD62B1209388.00
NXD63B900
NXD63B100
NXD63B120
Type ND6
Blue Label
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
ND62F1204851.00
MD62T800 2671.00
ND62T900 4538.00
ND62T100 4538.00
ND62T120 4538.00

0800
0900
1000
1200
ND62B800 8574.00
ND62B90010441.00
ND62B10010441.00
ND62B12010441.00
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

0800
0900
1000
1200
ND63B80010961.00
ND63B90013299.00
ND63B10013299.00
ND63B12013299.00
ND63F1206086.00
MD63T8003351.00
ND63T9005689.00
ND63T1005689.00
ND63T1205689.00
Breaker
Type

CSA / UL 489 A IR
Volts AC
Volts DC
240
480
600
250
500 c
ND6, NXD6
HND6, HNXD6
CND6
65
100
200
50
65
100
25
50
65
30 (2-P)
30 (2-P)
25 (3-P)
50 (3-P)
50 (3-P)
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60HZ)
220/240
380/415
500
(lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs) (lcu) (lcs)
65
33
40 20
100
50
65 33

Breaker Ampere
Rating
800
900-1200
NXD6

Lowj
2
3
4
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
circuit breakers are UL listed for reverse

connection applications.
is CSA Certified / UL listed and rated for use on 500VDC
Use 6 connectors for 3-pole, use 4 connectors for 2-pole.
Use 2 3TA4P8500 kits for 3-pole, or 2 2TA4P8500
kits for 2-pole. Rated for 90C cable. Use for 100%
rated breakers.
5-42
5
6280
7860
6
6850
8575
7
7420
9290
Highj
08000
10000
2 3TA4N8500 for 3-pole or 2 2TA4N8500 for

2-pole. Rated for 75C cable.
Note: A, page 5-64.
80% rated breakers with the CE mark will also be marked
in the 100% rated version.
HACR rated.
j +/- 20% Tolerance.
Note: ND frame qualified to UL489 supplement B NAVAL.
with Lugs
Prices of ND6 and HND6 breakers
include frame, trip, and both line
and load lugs (3TA4N8500). These
catalogue numbers are the frame,
trip and lugs separately packaged.
For applications requiring different
lugs, order individual items as
needed.
without Lugs
Prices of NXD6, HNXD6, and
CND6 include frame with noninterchangeable trip units installed
only. Order required terminal
connectors separately.
For line and load lugs (3TA4N8500)
lug kit).
100% Ratedh
Types NXD6, HNXD6 and CND6
breakers are available with 100%
ratings. To order, suffix H to
catalogue number, and add 10% to
list price. 100% rated ND breakers
require 90C Cu cable and lug kit
3TA4P8500 or 3TA3N8750.
Lugs
Catalogue Cables Wire
Number
per Lug Range
TA2K500
2
TA3K500
3
TC2K500
2
#1-500 kcmil Cu
TC3K350
3
#1-350 kcmil Cu
Kits (2 Kits required per breaker)
2TA4P8500 d
4
3TA4P8500 d
2TA4N8500 f
4
3TA4N8500 f
2TA2N8750
2
3TA2N8750
2TA3N8750
3
3TA3N8750
Use
See


ND 1200A Frame Sentron Series
Type HNXD6
Black Label

2-Pole 600V AC
250V DC
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
3-Pole 600V AC
500V DC
Catalogue
Number
0900
1000
1200
For 2-pole application use outside

poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
HNXD63B900
HNXD63B100
HNXD63B120
13229.00
13229.00
13229.00
Type HND6
Black Label
Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
Complete Breaker
Catalogue
Number
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number

0800
0900
1000
1200
For 2-pole application use outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker
HND63B80012414.00
HND63B90014752.00
HND63B10014752.00
HND63B12014752.00
MD63T8003351.00
ND63T900 5689.00
ND63T100 5689.00
ND63T120 5689.00
HND63F1207539.00
Type CND6a
Red Label
Lugs
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker)

Continuous
Current Rating
@ 40C
2-Pole
0900
1000
1200
For 2-pole application,

3-Pole
Catalogue
Number
CND63B900
18322.0
CND63B100
18322.0
CND63B12018322.00
Shipping Weights
HNXD6
and CND6 circuit breakers are CSA Certified / UL

When lugs shield NDTS is used.

Note: NDTS lug shields are required when oversized lugs
(TA4P8500 or TA4N8500) are used. The kits include
the NDTS shield.
Number of
Number per
Shipping
Poles
Carton
Weight (lbs.)
ND6, HND6, NXD6, HNXD6, CND6
2
1
53
3
1
61.5
ND6, HND6 Frame Only
2
1
42.25
3
1
46
ND6, HND6 Trip Unit Only
2
1
04.5
3
1
06.5

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
0800
0900
1000
1200
Breaker
Type
D1
ND6, NXD6, HND6,

HNXD6, CND6
16
8.25
with NDTS
lug shield
29
8.25
When

UL listed and rated for use on 500V DC ungrounded UPS
systems only.
HACRrated.
5-43
SND 1200A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Seriesb
Selection
Current Limiting
Type SND6
Blue Label
Red Label
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Catalogue
Number
SND69800A
SND69100A
SND69120A
SND69800AG
SND69100AG
SND69120AG
SND69800ANT
SND69100ANT
SND69120ANT
SND69800ANGT
SND69100ANGT
SND69120ANGT
Type SCND6-A
Type SHND6
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
Catalogue
Number
SHND69800A
SHND69100A
SHND69120A
SHND69800AG
SHND69100AG
SHND69120AG
SHND69800ANT
SHND69100ANT
SHND69120ANT
SHND69800ANGT
SHND69100ANGT
SHND69120ANGT
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
SND 1200A Frame 100% Rated a

Type SND6
Type SHND6
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Blue Label
Catalogue
Number
SND69800AH
SND69100AH
SND69120AH
SND69800AGH
SND69100AGH
SND69120AGH
SND69800ANTH
SND69100ANTH
SND69120ANTH
SND69800ANGTH
SND69100ANGTH
SND69120ANGTH
Type SCND6-A
Red Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
Current Limiting
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
Catalogue
Number
SCND69800A
SCND69100A
SCND69120A
SCND69800AG
SCND69100AG
SCND69120AG
SCND69800ANT
SCND69100ANT
SCND69120ANT
SCND69800ANGT
SCND69100ANGT
SCND69120ANGT
Catalogue
Number
SHND69800AH
SHND69100AH
SHND69120AH
SHND69800AGH
SHND69100AGH
SHND69120AGH
SHND69800ANTH
SHND69100ANTH
SHND69120ANTH
SHND69800ANGTH
SHND69100ANGTH
SHND69120ANGTH
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
Catalogue
Number
SCND69800AH
SCND69100AH
SCND69120AH
SCND69800AGH
SCND69100AGH
SCND69120AGH
SCND69800ANTH
SCND69100ANTH
SCND69120ANTH
SCND69800ANGTH
SCND69100ANGTH
SCND69120ANGTH
Max
Current
Rating
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6, SND6, SHND6,

SCND6
Short

Suffix
Cont Long Instan-
Ground
Letter Trip
Code
Type
Setting Delay
A
LI
AG
LIG
ANT
LSI
ANGT LSIG
u
u
When wire connector shield NDTS is used.
Dimensions (in Inches)
Ampere

Rating
Catalogue Number
Breaker
Type

0800
1000
1200
N08SMDA
N10SNDA
N12SNDA

For ordering information and terminal connectors,
see page 5-64.
breaker for 3-phase, 3-wire circuits.
For 3-phase, 4-wire, order correct 4th wire (neutral)
5-44
a Use
2-3TA4P8500 for 3-pole. These kits are rated for

90C wire. 90C Cu only cable must be used, and sized
per 75C ampacity.
b SND6, SHND6 and SCND6 circuit breakers are UL
D1
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6

SND6, SHND6, SCND6
16
8.25
With NDTS shields
24
8.25

Accessories for:
MD/SMD 800A Frame

ND/SND 1200A Frame
PD/SPD 1600A Frame
RD 2000A Frame
Selection

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
Catalogue Number
S01MN6
S02MN6
S03MN6
S15MN6
S04MN6
S06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
S01MN64A 802.00
S02MN64A 802.00
S03MN64A 802.00
S15MN64A 802.00
S04MN64A802.00
-
012
024
048
125
250
S16MN6
S07MN6
S09MN6
S11MN6
S13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S16MN64A 802.00
S07MN64A 802.00
S11MN64A 802.00
S13MN64A802.00

Control
Voltage
AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
U01MN6
U02MN6
U03MN6
U15MN6
U04MN6
U06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
Catalogue Number
U01MN64A 802.00
U02MN64A802.00
U03MN64A802.00
U15MN64A802.00
U04MN64A802.00
--
Catalogue Number
U01MN64AA
U02MN64AA
U03MN64AA
U15MN64AA
U04MN64AA
1035
1035
1035
1035
1035
--
024
048
125
250
U07MN6
U09MN6
U11MN6
U13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U07MN64A802.00
U09MN64A802.00
U11MN64A 802.00
U13MN64A802.00
U07MN64AA
U09MN64AA
U11MN64AA
U13MN64AA0
1035
10
1035

Maximum Voltage
1 Form C
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
2 Form C
480
250
A01MN64
242.00
A02MN64
12
A01MNDLV
306.00
A02MNDLV
Catalogue Number
483.00

Maximum
Voltage

the Sensitrip Trip Unit and displays the
phase current flowing in the breaker.
They are powered by the breakers
CTs with replaceable battery back-up
for maintaining trip and max logs.
status.
1 Alarm Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Alarm Switch and

Catalogue Number
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
480
250
B00MN64
A01MN64B
242.00
483.00
A02MN64B
483.00

Breaker Type
SMD, SND, SPD
Description
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00

5-45
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sensitrip Ammeter
Catalogue Number



1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip

PD 1600A Frame Sentron Series
Type PXD6 Non-Interchangeable Trip

b
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC

Continuous
Current
Rating @ 40C
1200
1400
1600
Selection
Blue Label

(Frame/Trip Unit Only)
Mounting Assembly
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
PXD63B120
PXD63B140
PXD63B160
MB9301
-orMBR9302

with Lugs
Prices of PD6, HPD6, RD6, and HRD6
type breakers include frame, trip,
mounting base (MB9301), and both
line and load lugs (PD Frame
TA5P600, RDFrame TC5R600). When
ordered by these catalogue numbers,
the customer will receive the frame,
trip, mounting assembly and lugs
separately packaged. For applications
requiring different mounting base or
lugs, order individual items as needed.
without Lugs
Prices of PXD6, HPXD6, RXD6, HRXD6
and CPD6 type breakers include frame
with non-interchangeable trip unit
installed only. Order required
mounting base and lugs separately.
100% Rated (3-Pole only)
Types PXD6, HPXD6 breakers are
available with 100% ratings. To order
add suffix H to catalogue number,
and 10% to list price. 100% PD
breakers require 90 C cable sized
at 75 C ampacity and TC5R600 lugs.
RD 2000A Frames not available with
100% ratings.
400HZ Applications see page 5-67.
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue
Number
TA5P600
Type PD6 Interchangeable Trip e

3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
Continuous
Current
Rating @
40C
1200
1400
1600
Complete Breaker
Unassembled
Catalogue
Number
PD63B120
PD63B140
PD63B160
Blue Label
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
PD63F160
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
PD63T120
PD63T140
PD63T160
Mounting
Assembly
Catalogue
Number
MB9301
-orMBR9302
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue
Number
TA5P600
Type HPXD6 b Non-Interchangeable Trip e

Blue Label
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/Trip Unit Only)

Catalogue Number
HPXD63B120
HPXD63B140
HPXD63B160
Continuous Current
Rating @ 40C
1200
1400
1600
Type HPD6 Interchangeable Trip e

3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
Continuous
Current
Rating @
40C
1200
1400
1600
Complete Breaker
Unassembled
Catalogue
Number
HPD63B120
HPD63B140
HPD63B160
Black Label
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
HPD63F160
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
PD63T120
PD63T140
PD63T160
Mounting
Assembly
Catalogue
Number
MB9301
-orMBR9302

a
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
Continuous Current
Rating @ 40C
1200
Lugs (6 required per breaker)d

Catalogue
Number
TA5P600
TC5R600
TA4P750
TA6R600
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue
Number
TA5P600
No of
Cables per
Connector
1-5
1-5
1-4
1-6
Wire Range
300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
300-600 kcmil Cu only
500-750 kcmil Cu/Al
300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
Type CPD6 Non-Interchangeable Trip e

Red Label
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/Trip Unit Only)

Catalogue Number
CPD63B120
UL 489 A IR
RMS Symmetrical KA

Breaker
Type
Volts AC
Volts DC a
240 480 600 250 500

65
50
25
30 (2P)
25 (3P)
1400
CPD63B140
HPD6, HPXD6
100
65
50
30 (2P)
50 (3P)
1600
CPD63B160
CPD6
200
100
65
30 (2P)
50 (3P)
PD6, PXD6
Mounting Bases for PD & RD

6.19
6.00
6.19
6.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
MB9301
MB9301
MB9301
Use two outside poles of a 3-pole circuit breaker for 250V

When
5-46
MB9301
PXD6, HPXD6 and CPD6 type circuit breakers are

ULListed for reverse feed applications.
additional information See Note: A, page 5-64.

HACRrated.

For
MBR9302
MBR9302
25.50
16.00
18.73
16.00
25.50
18.73
MBR9302
16.00
2.00
16.00
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
MB9301
MBR9302
Note: PD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B NAVAL.

SPD 1600A Frame Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Pricing information for all Digital Sentron Series PD frame unit is for breaker
only. Price required mounting block assembly and necessary terminal connectors
as separate items.
SPD6 and SHPD6 are acceptable for reverse connection applications.
Type SPD6
Type SHPD6
Blue Label
Black Label
3-Pole, 600V AC
3-Pole, 600V AC
Catalogue
Number
Max
Current
Rating
SPD69140
SPD69160
1400
1600
SPD69140G
SPD69160G
Catalogue
Number
Max
Current
Rating
18390.00
18390.00
SHPD69140
SHPD69160
1400
1600
18968.00
18968.00
1400
1600
19977.00
19977.00
SHPD69140G
SHPD69160G
1400
1600
20752.00
20752.00
SPD69140NT
SPD69160NT
1400
1600
18693.00
18693.00
SHPD69140NT
SHPD69160NT
1400
1600
19649.00
19649.00
SPD69140NGT
SPD69160NGT
1400
1600
22156.00
22156.00
SHPD69140NGT
SHPD69160NGT
1400
1600
22991.00
22991.00
None
LI
Long
Time
Delay
Instantaneous
Setting
Short
Time
Pick Up
Short
Time
Delay
TA5P600
TC5R600
TA6R600
15 pcs.
15 pcs.
15 pcs.
Wire
Range
300600 kcmil Cu/Al
300600 kcmil Cu Only
300600 kcmil Cu/Al
Short
Time
l2t
Pick Up
Ground
Fault
Pick Up
Ground
Fault
Delay
LIG
NT
LSI
NGT
LSIG
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
1400
1600
N14SPD
N16SPD
378.00
378.00
Mounting Block (Required)b

Catalogue
Number
MB9301
MBR9302
1098.00
1098.00
RMS Symmetrical kA CSA / UL 489
Breaker
Type
SPD6
SHPD6
All PD, RD Frames:
240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
065
100
050
065
025
050
6.19
6.00
2.00
6.19
6.00
2.00
2.00
MBR9302
MB9301 (shown)
MBR9302

For
additional information, see Note: A, page 5-64.
25.50
16.00
18.73
16.00
25.50
16.00
18.73
16.00
2.00
MB9301
MBR9302
MBR9301
MB9301
he PD frame circuit breaker requires the use of a

T
connect-all mounting assembly to allow for placing into
service.
breaker for 3 phase, 3 wire circuits.
b
MB9301
MBR9302
MBR9302

5-47
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Trip
Type
Cont
Current
Setting
No. of
Catalogue Cables per
Number
Connector
Suffix
Letter
Code
Lugs

Accessories for:
MD/SMD 800A Frame
ND/SND 1200A Frame
PD/SPD 1600A Frame
RD 2000A Frame

Control Voltage
1 Shunt Trip and

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Shunt Trip
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
120
208
240
277
480
600
S01MN6
S02MN6
S03MN6
S15MN6
S04MN6
S06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S01MN64A
S02MN64A
S03MN64A
S15MN64A
S04MN64A
Catalogue Number
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
--
012
024
048
125
250
S16MN6
S07MN6
S09MN6
S11MN6
S13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
S16MN64A
S07MN64A
S11MN64A
S13MN64A
802.00
802.00
802.00
802.00
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Control
Voltage

Sensitrip Ammeter

1 Auxiliary Switch
1 Undervoltage Trip
Catalogue Number

AC
DC
120
208
240
277
480
600
U01MN6
U02MN6
U03MN6
U15MN6
U04MN6
U06MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
569
Catalogue Number
U01MN64A802.00
U02MN64A802.00
U03MN64A802.00
U15MN64A802.00
U04MN64A802.00
.00
--
Catalogue Number
U01MN64AA1035.00
U02MN64AA1035.00
U03MN64AA1035.00
U15MN64AA1035.00
U04MN64AA1035.00
--
024
048
125
250
U07MN6
U09MN6
U11MN6
U13MN6
569.00
569.00
569.00
569.00
U07MN64A802.00
U09MN64A802.00
U11MN64A802.00
U13MN64A802.00
U07MN64AA1035.00
U09MN64AA1035.00
U11MN64AA1035.00
U13MN64AA1035.00

Maximum Voltage
1 Form C*
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
2 Form C
480
250
A01MN64
242.00 A02MN64
12
A01MNDLV
306.00A02MNDLV
Catalogue Number
483.00

Maximum
Voltage

the Sensitrip Trip Unit and displays the
phrase current flowing in the breaker.
They are powered by the breakers
CTs with replaceable battery back-up
for maintaining trip and max logs.
status.
1 Alarm Switch
AC
DC
Catalogue Number
480
250
B00MN64
242.00
1 Alarm Switch and

Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
A01MN64B
A02MN64B

Breaker Type
SMD, SND, SPD

5-48
1 Alarm Switch and

1 Auxiliary Switch
Description
Catalogue Number
Display Unit
SADU
Remote Mounting Kit
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00

RD 2000A Frame Sentron Series
Type RXD6
Selection
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
Blue Label
Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker Only Without Lugs)

(Frame/Trip Unit Only)
Catalogue Number
RXD63B160
RXD63B180
RXD63B200
Continuous
Current
Rating @ 40C
1600
1800
2000
Mounting Assembly
Catalogue Number
MB9301
-orMBR9302
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue Number
TC5R600
Type RD6 d
3-Pole 600V AC, 250-500V DC
Blue Label
Interchangeable Trip (Unassembled Circuit Breaker with Lugs)

Continuous
Current
Rating @
40C
1600
1800
2000
Complete Breaker
Unassembled
Catalogue
Number
RD63B160
RD63B180
RD63B200
Type HRXD6
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
RD63T160
RD63T180
RD63T200
RD63F200
Mounting
Assembly
Catalogue
Number
MB9301
-orMBR9302
TC5R600
Frame Only
Catalogue
Number
Trip Unit Only

Catalogue
Number
RD63T160
RD63T180
RD63T200
HRD63F200
Mounting
Assembly
Catalogue
Number
MB9301
-orMBR9302
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue
Number
TC5R600
RMS Symmetrical KA
Breaker
Type
Volts AC
RD6, RXD6
Number of
Number per
Shipping
Carton
Weight (lbs.)
Poles
PXD6, HPXD6, RXD6, HRXD6, CPD6
Assembled Breakers
3 1 61.5
PD6, HPD6, RD6, HRD6
Frame Only
3 1 55.0
PD6, RD6
Trip Unit Only
3 1 06.5
Mounting Assembly
MB9301 1
53.0
MBR9302 1
50.9

Catalogue
Number
TA5P600
TC5R600
TA6R600
UL 489 A IR
HRD6, HRXD6
Front
Rear
Lugs (6 required per breaker)e

Connection Points
MB9301
MBR9302
Volts DC a
240 480 600 250 500

65
50
25
30 (2P)
25 (3P)
100
65
50
30 (2P)
50 (3P)
No of
Cables per
Connector
1-5
1-5
1-6
Wire Range
300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
300-600 kcmil Cu only
300-600 kcmil Cu/Al
Instantaneous Adjustment Trip Range (PD / RD Frames)

Breaker Ampere
Rating
1200-2000
a Use

+25% +20%
Tolerance
Tolerance
Low 2 3 4 5 6 7 High
5000
5715 6430 7145 7860 8575 9790 10,000
two outside poles of a 3-pole circuit breaker for

250V DC applications.
b When wired as shown on page 5-2, this circuit breaker
c RXD6
and HRXD6 type circuit breakers are

CSA Certified / UL Listed for reverse feed applications.
d HACR rated.
e For
additional information See Note: A, page 5-64.

Note: RD frame qualified to UL489 supplement B NAVAL.
For required mounting base (MB9301 or MBR9302) see
page 5-49.
5-49
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Black Label
Complete Breaker
Unassembled
Catalogue
Number
HRD63B160
HRD63B180
HRD63B200
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue Number
HRXD63B160
HRXD63B180
HRXD63B200
Type HRD6 d
Mounting Block
Shipping Weights
Complete Breaker Assembled (Frame/

Trip Unit Only)
Continuous Current
Rating @ 40C
1600
1800
2000
Continuous
Current
Rating @
40C
1600
1800
2000
Lugs (6 required)
Catalogue
Number
Magnetic Trip Only ETI Motor Circuit Protector

Instantaneous Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
2-Pole
Catalogue
Number
3-Pole
Ampere
Rating
ED6-A
001
002
003
005
010
025
030
040
050
100
125
002.6
007
010
016
030
055
080
115
180
315
500
Maximum
00009
00022
00035
00054
00100
00180
00270
00375
00600
01000
01250
CED6-A
SHIPPING:
001
002
003
005
010
025
030
040
050
100
125
002.6
007
010
016
030
055
080
115
180
315
500
00009
00022
00035
00054
00100
00180
00270
00375
00600
01000
01250
FXD6
SHIPPING:
150
150
150
250
0400
0800
1100
1100
00800
01500
02500
02500
FXD63L1503084.00
FXD63A1503084.00
FXD63H1503084.00
FXD63A2503084.00
CFD6
SHIPPING:
150
150
150
250
SHIPPING:
0400
0800
1100
1100
00800
01500
02500
02500
12 lbs. each
9 lbs. each
CFD63L1505960.00
CFD63A1505960.00
CFD63H1505960.00
CFD63A2505960.00
12 lbs. each
600V AC
250V DC
Complete Circuit Breaker Without Lugs
Breaker
Type
600V AC
250V DC
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Selection
600V AC
250V DC
600V AC
250V DC
Minimum
ED63A001
ED63A002
ED63A003
ED63A005
ED63A010
ED63A025
ED63A030
ED63A040
ED63A050
ED63A100
ED63A125
737.00
737.00
737.00
737.00
737.00
737.00
737.00
737.00
886.00
941.00
1786.0
3.8 lbs. each

CED63A001 2514.0
CED63A002 2514.0
CED63A003 2514.0
CED63A005 2514.0
CED63A0102514.00
CED63A0252514.00
CED63A0302514.00
CED63A0402514.00
CED63A0503005.00
CED63A1003226.00
CED63A125 4837.00
6 lbs. each
JXD6(A)
400
400
SHIPPING:
1250
2000
02500
04000
JXD62H400
16 lbs. each
JXD63L4003226.00
JXD63H4003226.00
20 lbs. each
CJD6
400
400
SHIPPING:
1250
2000
02500
04000
CJD62L400
CJD62H400
29.5 lbs. each
CJD63L4006923.00
CJD63H4006923.00
31.5 lbs. each
LXD6(A)
600
600
SHIPPING:
2000
3000
04000
06000
LXD62L600
16 lbs. each
LXD63L600
LXD63H600
CLD6
600
600
SHIPPING:
2000
3000
04000
06000
CLD62L600
CLD62H600
LMXD6
800
800
SHIPPING:
800
800
800
SHIPPING:
800
800
800
SHIPPING:
2800
3200
06000
08000
3000
4000
5000
06000
08000
10000
3000
4000
5000
06000
08000
10000
600V AC
250V DC
600V AC
250V DC
600V AC
250V DC
600V AC
250V DC
600V AC
250V DC
MXD6
600V AC
250V DC
CMD6
600V AC
250V DC
20 lbs. each
CLD63L600
CLD63H600
31.5 lbs. each
available in 3-pole width only.
5-50
b When
applied on DC Circuits Trip levels will increase

approximately +15 to 20%.
c Tolerance -20%/+30% for lowest setting. All other set-
1108200
11082.0
LMXD63L800
LMXD63A800
35 lbs. each
MXD63L800 6671
MXD63A800 6671
MXD63H800 6671.0
33 lbs. each
CMD63L800126.00
CMD63A80025.
CMD63H800 12536.0
80 lbs. each
Important Information
ETI interrupting ratings are determined through combination tests with properly sized
overload relays and contactors.
Connectors included when ordering by circuit breaker catalogue number for
ED6 and CED6 ETIs. Order ETI circuit breaker and lugs (2 per pole) separately for the
FXD6, CFD6, MXD6, CMD6, JXD6, CJD6, LXD6 and CLD6 ETIs.
a 2-pole
4710
40.00
6671
6671
Lug Information page 5-64

Application data page 5-51
tings are -20%/+20%.
2-pole application use outside poles of 3-pole circuit
breaker.
d For

Motor Circuits
General
Protection of Motor Circuits

Molded case circuit breakers are used
in motor circuits as a disconnecting
means and for short-circuit protection.
They should be used in conjunction with
motor-running, over-current-protection
devices, and should permit the motor
to start without nuisance tripping from
motor-inrush current. The circuit breaker
should have a continuous-current rating
of not less than 115% of the motor
full-load current.
The recommended motor circuit
protectors (Siemens ETI instantaneous
only circuit breakers) listed have
continuous-current ratings of at least

115% of motor full-load currents. The
trip-setting positions are approximately
11 times motor full-load currents. The
suggested trip settings may have to
be adjusted upward to no higher than
1300% of full-load current for non-design
E type motors, and no greater than
1700% of full load current for design B
& E energy efficient motors, to allow for
motor start-up due to inrush currents.
Breaker Mounted Immediately Ahead
of Motor Starter
Siemens ETI motor circuit protectors are
recommended for use in combination
motor starters to provide selective shortcircuit protection for the motor branch
Application
circuit. The adjustable instantaneous-trip
feature of the Siemens ETI motor circuit
protector provides for a trip setting
slightly above the peak motor-inrush
current. With this setting, no delay is
introduced in opening the circuit when
a fault occurs. This circuit breaker has
no time-delay trip element. Therefore it
must be used in conjunction with, and
immediately ahead of, the motor-running
overcurrent protective device.
Important: The information below does
not apply to all motor applications: it
is recommended that the user refer to
the National Electrical Code (NEC) for
specific needs.
Table 1 (When Breaker is Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter)

3 Phase Induction Type Motors (Siemens ETI motor circuit protectors for branch circuit use with alternating-current combination, full voltage motor starters).
Motor Full
Catalogue
Load Amperes Number
38.46 55.37
55.38 70.75
70.76 84.60
ED63A125
84.61 96.14 CED63A125
96.15 113.60
30.76 35.37
35.38 39.99
44.51 49.23 FXD63L150
53.84 58.45 CFD63L150
58.46 63.06
63.07 74.50
61.53 69.22
69.23 76.91
84.61 92.29 FXD63A150
100.00 108.00 CFD63A150
108.00 115.00
115.00 136.00
85.00 100.00
100.00 115.00
131.00 146.00 FXD63A250
162.00 177.00 CFD63A250
177.00 192.00
192.00 227.00
95.00 110.00
110.00 124.00
138.00 151.00 JXD63L400
165.00 178.00 CJD63L400
178.00 192.00
192.00 227.00
154.00 176.00
176.00 198.00
220.00 242.00 JXD63H400
264.00 285.00 CJD63H400
285.00 308.00
308.00 326.00
155.00 176.00
176.00 198.00
220.00 242.00 LXD63L600
264.00 285.00 CLD63L600
285.00 308.00
308.00 326.00
ETI Trip Setting

Adjustment
Amperes
Low
500
2
720
3
920
4
1100
High
1250
Low
400
2
460
4
580
6
700
7
760
High
820
Low
800
2
900
4
1100
6
1300
7
1400
High
1500
Low
1100
2
1300
4
1700
6
2100
7
2300
High
2500
Low
1250
2
1430
4
1790
6
2140
7
2320
High
2500
Low
2000
2
2290
4
2860
6
3430
7
3710
High
4000
Low
2000
2
2290
4
2860
6
3430
7
3710
High
4000
Motor Full
Catalogue
Load Amperes Number
231.00 264.00
264.00 292.00
330.00 362.00
LXD63H600
395.00 428.00
CLD63H600
428.99 462.00
462.00 490.00
215.00 238.00
238.00 261.00
261.00 284.00
308.00 369.00 LMXD63L800
369.00 423.00
423.00 462.00
462.00 490.00
246.00 269.00
269.00 284.00
284.00 323.00
362.00 492.00 LMXD63A800
492.00 562.00
562.00 616.00
616.00 660.00
231.00 264.00
264.00 292.00
292.00 330.00
362.00 395.00
MXD63L800
428.00 462.00
CMD63L800
462.00 490.00
308.00 352.00
352.00 442.00
442.00 447.00
483.00 527.00 MXD63A800
571.00 616.00 CMD63A800
616.00 660.00
385.00 440.00
495.00 550.00 MXD63H800
605.00 660.00 CMD63H800
660.00 695.00
ETI Trip Setting

Adjustment Amperes
Low
3000
2
3430
4
4290
6
5140
7
5570
High
6000
Low
2800
2
3100
3
3400
5
4000
6
4800
7
5500
High
6000
Low
3200
2
3500
3
3700
5
4700
6
6400
7
7300
High
8000
Low
3000
2
3430
3
3800
5
4710
7
5570
High
6000
Low
4000
2
4570
3
5740
5
6280
7
7240
High
8000
Low
5000
3
6430
5
7860
6
8575
Note: L
owest instantaneous settings have a -20%/+30% tolerance and all
other settings have a -20%/+20% tolerance.
5-51
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ETI Trip Setting

Adjustment
Amperes
Low
2.6
2
4.5
3
6
4
7.5
High
9
Low
7
2
11
3
15
4
19
High
22
Low
10
2
17
3
23
4
30
High
35
Low
16
2
26
3
36
4
46
High
54
Low
30
2
50
3
70
4
85
High
100
Low
55
2
90
3
125
4
155
High
180
Low
80
2
135
3
185
4
235
High
270
Low
115
2
185
3
255
4
325
High
375
Low
180
2
300
3
410
4
520
High
600
Low
315
2
540
3
740
4
890
High
1000
Motor
Full Load
Catalogue
Amperes
Number
.20
.33
.34
.45
.46
.56 ED63A001
.57
.68 CED63A001
.69
.81
.53
.83
.84 1.14
1.15 1.45 ED63A002
1.46 1.68 CED63A002
1.69 2.00
.76 1.29
1.30 1.75
1.76 2.29 ED63A003
2.30 2.68 CED63A003
2.69 3.18
1.23 1.99
2.00 2.75
2.76 3.52 ED63A005
3.53 4.14 CED63A005
4.15 4.90
2.30 3.83
3.84 5.37
5.38 6.52 ED63A010
6.53 7.68 CED63A010
7.69 9.10
4.23 6.91
6.92 9.61
9.62 11.91 ED63A025
11.92 13.83 CED63A025
13.84 16.40
6.15 10.37
10.38 14.22
14.23 18.06 ED63A030
18.07 20.75 CED63A030
20.76 24.50
8.84 14.22
14.23 19.60
19.61 24.99 ED63A040
25.00 28.83 CED63A040
28.84 34.00
13.84 23.06
23.07 31.52
31.53 39.99 ED63A050
40.00 46.14 CED63A050
46.15 54.50
24.23 41.52
41.53 56.91
56.92 68.45 ED63A100
68.46 76.91 CED63A100
76.92 90.90

Motor Circuits
Breaker Mounted at a Distance From

Motor Starter
ET thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
conform to the National Electrical Code
(2002) table 430-52 requirements
for motor branch and feeder circuit
protection when properly applied
in conjunction with motor-running
overcurrent protective devices. The
recommended circuit-breaker ratings

in Table 2 provide adequate time delay
for starting the majority of three-phase
induction motors.
To determine the ampere ratings of the
ET breaker to protect a motor feeder,
add the rating of the ET breaker used to
protect the largest motor branch circuit
in the group to the full-load currents of
Application
the remaining motors in the group.
Interrupt Ratings
For normal commercial purposes,
available fault current can conveniently
be obtained in the Interrupting Selector
Tables.
Table 2 (When Breaker is Mounted at a Distance From Motor Starter)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3 Phase Induction Type Motors (EQ and ET circuit breakers (thermal-magnetic trip) for branch breaker use with alternating-current combination motor starters).

200 and 208V Motors
230V Motors
460V Motors
575V Motors
Motor 240V Circuit Breaker Data a
240V Circuit Breaker Data a
Horse power Breaker Catalogue
Ampere Breaker Catalogue
Ampere Breaker
Catalogue
Ampere Breaker
Catalogue Ampere
Rating Type
Number
Rating Type
Number
Rating Type
Number
Rating Type
Number
Rating
00012

BQ3B015
015
BQ3B015
015
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
3
BQ3B015
015
BQ3B015
015
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
000 4

BQ3B015
015
BQ3B015
015
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
001
BQ b
ED4
ED6
BQ b
1
BQ3B015
015
BQ3B015
015
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
001 2
002
BQ3B020
020
BQ3B015
015
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
003
BQ3B030
030
BQ3B020
020
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
005
BQ3B040
040
BQ3B030
030
ED43B015
015
ED63B015
015
BQ3B060
060
BQ3B050
050
ED43B030
030
ED63B020
020
00712
BQ3B070
070 BQ b
BQ3B070
070
ED4
ED43B030
030 ED6 ED63B030
030
010 BQ b
015
BQ3B100
100
BQ3B090
090
ED43B040
040
ED63B035
035
020

BQ3B100
100
ED43B050
050
ED63B050
050
025
FXD63B125 125
FXD63B125
125
FXD63B090 090
FXD63B060
060
030
FXD63B150 150
FXD63B150
150
FXD63B100 100
FXD63B070
070
FXD6
040 FXD6 FXD63B175 175 FXD6 FXD63B175
175 FXD6 FXD63B125 125
FXD63B090
090
050
FXD63B200 200
FXD63B200
200
FXD63B150 150
FDX63B100
100

FXD63B225 225
060 JXD2 JXD23B300 300
FXD6, FD6 FXD63B150 150 FXD6 FXD63B100
100
075 JXD2 JXD23B400 400 JXD2 JXD23B350
350
FXD6, FD6 FXD63B200 200
FXD6, FD6 FXD63B125 125
FD63B250
250
100 JXD2 JXD23B400 400 JXD2 JXD23B400
FD6 c
FXD6, FD6 FD63B175
175
400
JD63B250
250

JD6 c
c
c
125 LD6 or LD63B600
FXD6, FD6 FXD63B200 200
600 LD6 or LD63B500 or 500 JD6 c
JD63B300
300
200

LMD6
LMD63B600 LMD6
LMD63B500

OR JD6 c JD63B200
150 LD6 c or LD63B600 or

LD63B600
or

FXD6
or
FXD63B225
225
c
600
LMD6
600 JD6
JD63B300
300
c
JD63B225
225

LMD6
LMD63B600 LMD63B600
JD6
200
LMD6
LMD63B800 800 LMD6
LMD63B800 800 JD6 c
JD63B350
350 JD6 c
JD63B300
300
JD63B400
400 JD6 c
JD63B400
400
250

JD6 c
c
or
LD63B600 or 600

300
LD6
c
JD6
JD63B400
400

LMD6
LMD63B600
c
or
LD63B500 or 500
350

LD6

LMD6
LMD63B700 700

LMD6
LMD63B500
c
or
LD63B600 or 600
400

LMD6
LMD63B800 800 LD6

LMD6
LMD63B600
500

LMD6
LMD63B800
800
The
selection of breakers for this table is in accordance

with Article 430, 2002 National Electric Code. The Canadian
electrical code should also be referred to for rating
information. Recommended circuit breakers are for full
voltage starting, special consideration is necessary for
reduced voltage starting.
5-52
For
panelboard applications, substitute the BL breaker for the

BQ, ED2 circuit breakers may also be used.
For
non-interchangeable trip applications, substitute the FXD6

for the FD6, the JXD6 for the JD6, or the LXD6 for
the LD6.
Adjustable Instantaneous Magnetic Trip Settings

Breaker
Type
ED6
CED6
FXD6-A
HHFD6
CFD6
Note:
Tolerances for instantaneous trip points meet UL 489 (7.3).
Nominal AC instantaneous trip points are given in the tables.
770
770
770
990
990
1200
640
1200
1900
1520
1520
1900
1900
770
770
770
990
990
1200
1200
1520
1520
1900
1900
770
770
770
990
990
1200
1200
1520
1520
1900
1900
770
770
770
990
990
1200
1200
1520
1520
1900
1900
770
770
770
990
990
1200
640
1200
1900
1520
1520
1900
1900
810
810
810
1060
1060
1300
700
1300
2100
1780
1780
2100
2100
810
810
810
1060
1060
1300
1300
1780
1780
2100
2100
810
810
810
1060
1060
1300
1300
1780
1780
2100
2100
810
810
810
1060
1060
1300
1300
1780
1780
2100
2100
810
810
810
1060
1060
1300
700
1300
2100
1780
1780
2100
2100
850
850
850
1140
1140
1400
760
1400
2300
1930
1930
2300
2300
850
850
850
1140
1140
1400
1400
1930
1930
2300
2300
850
850
850
1140
1140
1400
1400
1930
1930
2300
2300
850
850
850
1140
1140
1400
1400
1930
1930
2300
2300
850
850
850
1140
1140
1400
760
1400
2300
1930
1930
2300
2300
High
9
22
35
54
100
180
270
375
600
1000
1250
9
22
35
54
100
180
270
375
600
1000
1250
900
900
900
1200
1200
1500
820
1500
2500
2000
2000
2500
2500
900
900
900
1200
1200
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
900
900
900
1200
1200
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
900
900
900
1200
1200
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
900
900
900
1200
1200
1500
820
1500
2500
2000
2000
2500
2500
ETI Motor Circuit Protector

Catalogue Number
3-Pole
ED63A001
ED63A002
ED63A003
ED63A005
ED63A010
ED63A025
ED63A030
ED63A040
ED63A050
ED63A100
ED63A125
CED63A001
CED63A002
CED63A003
CED63A005
CED63A010
CED63A025
CED63A030
CED63A040
CED63A050
CED63A100
CED63A125
FXD63L150
FXD63A150
FXD63H150
FXD63A250
CFD63L150
CFD63A150
CFD63H150
CFD63A250
For DC instantaneous trip points, add 15% to nominal values.

Instantaneous trip adjustment is made through the breaker
cover on all frame breakers. To change instantaneous trip point
Thermal Magnetic
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
3-Pole
FXD62B070
FXD63B070
FXD62B080
FXD63B080
FXD62B090
FXD63B090
FXD62B100
FXD63B100
FXD62B110
FXD63B110
FXD62B125
FXD63B125
FXD62B150
FXD63B150
FXD62B175
FXD63B175
FXD62B200
FXD63B200
FXD62B225
FXD63B225
FXD62B250
FXD63B250
FD62B070
FD63B070
FD62B080
FD63B080
FD62B090
FD63B090
FD62B100
FD63B100
FD62B110
FD63B110
FD62B125
FD63B125
FD62B150
FD63B150
FD62B175
FD63B175
FD62B200
FD63B200
FD62B225
FD63B225
FD62B250
FD63B250
HFD62B070
HFD63B070
HFD62B080
HFD63B080
HFD62B090
HFD63B090
HFD62B100
HFD63B100
HFD62B110
HFD63B110
HFD62B125
HFD63B125
HFD62B150
HFD63B150
HFD62B175
HFD63B175
HFD62B200
HFD63B200
HFD62B225
HFD63B225
HFD62B250
HFD63B250
HHFD63B070
HHFD63B080
HHFD63B090
HHFD63B100
HHFD63B110
HHFD63B125
HHFD63B150
HHFD63B175
HHFD63B200
HHFD63B225
HHFD63B250
CFD62B070
CFD63B070
CFD62B080
CFD63B080
CFD62B090
CFD63B090
CFD62B100
CFD63B100
CFD62B110
CFD63B110
CFD62B125
CFD63B125
CFD62B150
CFD63B150
CFD62B175
CFD63B175
CFD62B200
CFD63B200
CFD62B225
CFD63B225
CFD62B250
CFD63B250
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HFD6
Nominal
AC Adjustable Trip Range
Low
2
3
4
2.6
4.5
6
7.5
7
11
15
19
10
17
23
30
16
26
36
46
30
50
70
85
55
90
125
155
80
135
185
235
115
185
255
325
180
300
410
520
315
540
740
890
500
720
920
1100
2.6
4.5
6
7.5
7
11
15
19
10
17
23
30
16
26
36
46
30
50
70
85
55
90
125
155
80
135
185
235
115
185
255
325
180
300
410
520
315
540
740
890
500
720
920
1100
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
400
460
520
580
800
900
1000
1100
1100
1300
1500
1700
900
1060
1210
1370
900
1060
1210
1370
1100
1300
1500
1700
1100
1300
1500
1700
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
800
900
1000
1100
900
1060
1210
1370
900
1060
1210
1370
1100
1300
1500
1700
1100
1300
1500
1700
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
800
900
1000
1100
900
1060
1210
1370
900
1060
1210
1370
1100
1300
1500
1700
1100
1300
1500
1700
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
800
900
1000
1100
900
1060
1210
1370
900
1060
1210
1370
1100
1300
1500
1700
1100
1300
1500
1700
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
600
640
690
730
700
770
840
920
700
770
840
920
800
900
1000
1100
400
460
520
580
800
900
1000
1100
1100
1300
1500
1700
900
1060
1210
1370
900
1060
1210
1370
1100
1300
1500
1700
1100
1300
1500
1700
FD6-A
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
1
2
3
5
10
25
30
40
50
100
125
1
2
3
5
10
25
30
40
50
100
125
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
150
150
175
200
225
250
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
150
150
175
200
225
250
Application
on circuit breaker, depress indicating knob, then rotate to

desired position.
5-53

Breaker
Type
JXD2(A)
JXD6(A)
JD6(A)
HJD6(A)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HHJD6
CJD6
LXD6(A)
LD6(A)
HLD6(A)
HHLD6
CLD6
LMXD6
LMD6
5-54
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
200
225
250
300
350
400
200
225
250
300
350
400
200
225
250
300
350
400
400
200
225
250
300
350
400
200
225
250
300
350
400
200
225
250
300
350
400
400
450
500
600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
600
500
600
700
800
800
500
600
700
800
Nominal
Low
2
3
4
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
1250
1450
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3800
4290
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3800
4290
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
1250
1430
1610
1790
1250
1430
1610
1790
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3860
4290
2000
2290
2570
2860
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
3200
3500
3700
4200
2800
3100
3400
3700
3200
3500
3700
4200
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
3200
3500
3700
4200
3200
3500
3700
4200
5
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
3140
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
3140
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
1960
3140
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
3140
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
3140
1960
1960
1960
1960
3140
3140
1960
3140
4710
4710
1960
1960
3140
3140
3140
4710
3140
4710
1960
1960
3140
3140
3140
4710
4710
1960
1960
3140
3140
3140
4710
4710
1960
1960
3140
3140
3140
4710
3140
4710
4710
4710
4700
4000
4700
4710
4710
4700
4700
6
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
3430
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
3430
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
2140
3430
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
3430
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
3430
2140
2140
2140
2140
3430
3430
2140
3430
5140
5140
2140
2140
3430
3430
3430
5140
3430
5140
2140
2140
3430
3430
3430
5140
5140
2140
2140
3430
3430
3430
5140
5140
2140
2140
3430
3430
3430
5140
3430
5140
5140
5140
6400
4800
6400
5140
5140
6400
6400
7
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
3710
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
3710
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
2320
3710
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
3710
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
3710
2320
2320
2320
2320
3710
3710
2320
3710
5570
5570
2320
2320
3710
3710
3710
5570
3710
5570
2320
2320
3710
3710
3710
5570
5570
2320
2320
3710
3710
3710
5570
5570
2320
2320
3710
3710
3710
5570
3710
5570
5570
5570
7300
5500
7300
5570
5570
7300
7300
Application
High
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
2500
4000
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
2500
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
4000
6000
6000
2500
2500
4000
4000
4000
6000
4000
6000
2500
2500
4000
4000
4000
6000
6000
2500
2500
4000
4000
4000
6000
6000
2500
2500
4000
4000
4000
6000
4000
6000
6000
6000
8000
6000
8000
6000
6000
8000
8000

Catalogue Number
3-Pole
JXD63L400
JXD63H400
CJD63H400
CJD63L400
LXD63L600
LXD63H600
CLD63L600
CLD63H600
LMXD63L800
LMXD63A800
Thermal Magnetic
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
3-Pole
JXD22B200
JXD23B200
JXD22B225
JXD23B225
JXD22B250
JXD23B250
JXD22B300
JXD23B300
JXD22B350
JXD23B350
JXD22B400
JXD23B400
JXD62B200
JXD63B200
JXD62B225
JXD63B225
JXD62B250
JXD63B250
JXD62B300
JXD62B300
JXD62B350
JXD23B350
JXD62B400
JXD23B400
JD62B200
JD63B200
JD62B225
JD63B225
JD62B250
JD63B250
JD62B300
JD63B300
JD62B350
JD63B350
JD62B400
JD63B400
HJD62B200
HJD63B200
HJD62B225
HJD63B225
HJD62B250
HJD63H250
HJD62B300
HJD63B300
HJD62B350
HJD63B350
HJD62H400
HJD63B400
HHJD62B200 HHJD63B200
CJD63B200
CJD63B225
CJD63B250
CJD63B300
CJD63B350
CHD63B400
LXD62B450
LXD63B450
LXD62B500
LXD63B500
LXD62B600
LXD63B600
LD62B250
LD63B250
LD62B300
LD63B300
LD62B350
LD63B350
LD62B400
LD63B400
LD62B450
LD63B450
LD62B500
LD63B500
LD62B600
LD63B600
HLD62B250
HLD63B250
HLD62B300
HLD63B300
HLD62B350
HLD63B350
HLD62B400
HLD63B400
HLD62B450
HLD63B450
HLD62B500
HLD63B500
HLD62B600
HLD63B600
HHLD62B250 HHLD63B250
CLD63B250
CLD63B300
CLD63B359
CLD63B400
CLD63B450
CLD63B500
CLD63B600
LMXD63B500
LMXD62B600 LMXD63B600
LMD62B500
LMD63B500
LMD62B600
LMD63B600
LMD62B700
LMD63B700
LMD62B800
LMD63B800

Breaker
Type
HLMXD6
HLMD6
MD6
MXD6
HMD6
HMXD6
NXD6
HND6
HNXD6
CND6
PD6
PXD6
HPD6
HPXD6
CPD6
RD6
RXD6
HRD6
6
5140
5140
6400
6400
5140
5140
6400
6400
5140
5140
6850
5140
6850
8575
5140
5140
6850
5140
6850
8575
5140
5140
6850
6850
5140
5140
6850
6850
5140
5140
5140
6850
5140
6850
8575
6850
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
6850
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
6850
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
8575
7
5570
5570
7300
7300
5570
5570
7300
7300
5570
5570
7420
5570
7420
9290
5570
5570
7420
5570
7420
9290
5570
5570
7420
7420
5570
5570
7420
7420
5570
5570
5570
7420
5570
7420
9290
7420
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
7420
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
7420
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
9290
High
6000
6000
8000
8000
6000
6000
8000
8000
6000
6000
8000
6000
8000
10000
6000
6000
8000
6000
8000
10000
6000
6000
8000
8000
6000
6000
8000
8000
6000
6000
6000
8000
6000
8000
10000
8000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
8000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
8000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
Thermal Magnetic
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
3-Pole
HLMXD63B500
HLMXD63B600
HLMXD63B700
HLMXD63B800
HLMD62B500
HLMD63B500
HLMD62B600
HLMD63B600
HLMD62B700
HLMD63B700
HLMD62B800
HLMD63B800
MD62B500
MD63B500
MD62B600
MD63B600
MD62B700
MD63B700
MD62B800
MD63B800
MXD62B500
MXD63B500
MXD62B600
MXD63B600
MXD62B700
MXD63B700
MXD62B800
MXD63B800
HMD62B500
HMD63B500
HMD62B500
HMD63B600
HMD62B700
HMD63B700
HMD62B800
HMD63B800
HMXD63B500
HMXD63B600
HMXD63B700
HMXD63B800
CMD63B400
CMD63B500
CMD63B600
CMD63B700
CMD63B800
ND62B800
ND63B800
ND62B900
ND63B900
ND62B100
ND63B100
ND62B120
ND63B120
NXD62B900
NXD63B900
NXD62B100
NXD63B100
NXD62B120
NXD63B120
HND62B800
HND63B800
HND62B900
HND63B900
HND62B100
HND63B100
HND62B120
HND63B120
HNXD63B900
HNXD63B100
HNXD63B120
CND63B800
CND63B900
CND63B100
CND63B120
PD63B120
PD63B140
PD63B160
PXD63B120
PXD63B140
PXD63B160
HPD63B120
HPD63B140
HPD63B160
HPXD63B120
HPXD63B140
HPXD63B160
CPD63B120
CPD63B140
CPD63B160
RD63B180
RD63B200
RXD63B180
RXD63B200
HRD63B180
HRD63B200
5-55
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ND6
5
4710
4710
4700
4700
4710
4710
4700
4700
4710
4710
6280
4710
6280
7860
4710
4710
6280
4710
6280
7860
4710
4710
6280
6280
4710
4710
6280
6280
4710
4710
4710
6280
4710
6280
7860
6280
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
6280
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
6280
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
7860
Application
Catalogue Number
3-Pole
MXD63L800
MXD63A800
MXD63H800
MXD63L800
MXD63A800
MXD63H800
CMD63L800
CMD63A800
CMD63H800
CMD6
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
500
600
700
800
500
600
700
800
500
600
700
800
800
800
500
600
700
800
800
800
500
600
700
800
500
600
700
800
400
500
600
700
800
800
800
800
900
1000
1200
900
1000
1200
800
900
1000
1200
900
1000
1200
800
900
1000
1200
1200
1400
1600
1200
1400
1600
1200
1400
1600
1200
1400
1600
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
1800
2000
1800
2000
Nominal
Low
2
3
4
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
3200
3500
3700
4200
3200
3500
3700
4200
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
3200
3500
3700
4200
3200
3500
3700
4200
3000
3430
3860
4290
3000
3430
3860
4290
4000
4570
5140
5710
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
3000
3430
3860
4280
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
3000
3430
3860
4280
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
4000
4570
5140
5710
3000
3430
3860
4280
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
4000
4570
5140
5710
3000
3430
3860
4280
3000
3430
3860
4280
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
3000
3430
3860
4280
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
4000
4570
5140
5710
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145
5000
5715
6430
7145

Molded Case Switch Circuit Disconnect
Selection
Maximum 2-Pole
3-Pole
Self-Protective
Frame
Instantaneous
Amp Rating
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Override20%c
BQ3S060
BQ3S100
11000
11000
1125

ED22S100A
ED23S100A
ED42S100A ED43S100A
ED42S125A ED43S125A
ED62S100A ED63S100A

ED63S125A
CED62S100A CED63S100A
CED62S125A CED63S125A
11000
11000
11000
11000
11000
11000
11000
1225
QJ22S225A QJ23S225A
12000
1250

FXD62S250A
HFXD62S250A
a

FXD63S250A
HFXD63S250A

CFD63S250A
13200
13200
13200
1400

JXD22S400A

a

JXD23S400A

JXD63S400A

HJXD63S400A

CJD63S400A
16000
16000
16000
16000
1600

LXD63S600A
HLXD63S600A
CLD63S600A
16000
16000
16000
1800

LMXD63S800A
MXD63S800A
CMD63S800A
18000
18000
18000
1200

NXD63S120A
CND63S120A
10000
10000
1600
PXD63S160Ae 10000
2000
RXD63S200Ae 10000
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1100

For
BQ2S060
BQ2S100
2-pole application use outside poles of 3-pole circuit

breaker.
For additional lugs see page 5-64.
5-56
case switches up to R frame contain a self

protecting instantaneous element, which may open
circuit above their override set point.
e Requires mounting block MB9301 or MBR9302.
Order by catalogue number. Switches
include frame and self protective trip
unit only. Order lugs separately from
page 5-64.
Molded
Lugs pages 5-64

Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Technical
Functions available in Sentron Sensitrip circuit breakers.

The Sentron Sensitrip III circuit
breaker is a true RMS current sensing
device. Digital microprocessor
Cont
Long
InstanShort
Trip
Current Time
taneous Time
circuitry within the electronic trip unit Catalogue Number
(Description + Suffix) Type
Setting Delay Setting
Pick Up
provides more precise control over
Basic
Unit
+
(A)
LI
the circuit breaker functions. This

Basic Unit + (A)G
LIG
control allows circuit coordination

Basic Unit + (A)NT
LSI
flexibility not available with thermal

magnetic circuit breakers.
Basic Unit + (A)NGT
LSIG
Short
Time
Delay
Short
Time
l2t
Pick Up
Ground
Fault
Pick Up
Ground
Fault
Delay
Letter A is used for MD and ND Solid State frame types only.
Typical Trip Unit Labeling and Adjustment Positions for the Sentron Sensitrip Circuit Breaker.
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6, SND6, SHND6, SCND6, SPD6, SHPD6
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6, SCD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
l = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating.

l = Current Rating a function of continuous ampere adjustment setting expressed in % of l .
l = Ground Fault Pickup a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of l .
n
5-57
Digital Solid State Sentron Sensitrip III Series
Technical
A. Adjustable Continuous
Amps Rating Switch
D. Adjustable Short Time

Pick-Up Switch (Optional)
ll Sensitrip III solid

A
state molded case
circuit breakers have an
adjustable ampere rating
switch. Adjustments made
to this switch change the
continuous current rating of
the breaker from 20% to
100% of its maximum trip
unit rating depending on
the circuit breaker frame.
ensitrip III circuit breakers

S
with an adjustable short
time pick-up switch allow for
selection of short time
pick-up in a range from 1.5
to 10 times the setting of the
maximum current rating.
E. Adjustable Short Time
Delay Switch (Optional)

S
with an adjustable short time
pick-up switch also contain
a switch for adjustment in
time delay. The adjustable
short time delay switch
allows for either of two
modes of short time delays.
One range of settings
enables the breaker to be
set for fixed time delays and
the other range of settings
enables the breaker to be set
for short time delays based
on l2t curves.
B. Adjustable Long Time

Delay Switch
ll Sensitrip III circuit
A
breakers have an
adjustable long time
delay switch to allow for
selection of long time
delays of fixed time
intervals at six times the
setting of the adjustable
continuous amps rating
switch.
C. Adjustable Instantaneous
Pick-Up Switch
ensitrip III circuit

S
breakers with an
adjustable instantaneous
trip switch allow selection
of a tripping point from
related to the adjusted
circuit breaker Rating (l ).
r
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
djustable Ground Fault Pick-Up

A
Switch
S
containing the optional equipment
ground fault protection cover the
ground fault pick-up range of 20% to
70% of the circuit breaker frame
rating. The ground fault pick-up
settings also allow for one of three
time delays based on 12t curves.
For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, an
external neutral transformer is
required with an ampere rating
equal to the trip unit ampere rating.
ln = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating.

lr = Current Rating a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of ln.
lg = Ground Fault Pick-up a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of ln.
Examples of Adjustment Settings

Catalogue Number SMD69800A
In = 800
In = 800 amperes
Results
Continuous
Current Setting
Long Time
Delay Setting
Instantaneous
Setting
30
240 amperes
lr = 30% of 800
12
12 seconds trip
at 6 x 240 amps = 1440.
8
1920 amperes
8 x lr = 8 x 240
Catalogue Number SMD69800ANGT

ln
lr
Setting
Long
Time
Delay
Short Time
Pick-Up
Off
800 amperes
Results
070
560
20
20 sec.
Short Time
Pick-Up
On
Short Time
Delay
10 lr
5600A
8 lr
4480A
.5
.5 secs
.28
.28 sec @ 4480A
40
320A
.2
.2 sec
Instantaneous
Setting
ln
= 800 amperes.
Instantaneous
lr
= 560 amperes (70% of 800).
Short
Delay
Short
=2
0 seconds at 3360 amps (6 x l ).
Breaker will trip in 20 seconds with 3360
amperes.
set at 10 x l = 10 x 560 = 5600 amperes.

r
Time Pick-Up On Set at 8 = 8 x 560 = 4480

amperes.
Short
Time Delay = .5 seconds. (Definite Time)

Note: & are mutually exclusive.
Time Pick-Up Off Instantaneous can be used.
5-58
l2T
Set
Ground
Fault
Pick-Up
Ground
Fault
Delay
l2t
switch on .28 seconds @ 6 x 560 = 3360 amperes.

(Inverse time)
Ground
Fault Pick-Up set at 40 = 40% of l = 320

amperes. (Definite Time)
Ground
Fault Delay set at .2 seconds. Breaker will trip in

200 milliseconds with a 400 ampere ground fault.
WLPower Circuit Breakers

3-pole, up to 5000A
General
Breaker Description
Minimal Space Requirements
The WL design is extremely compact

without sacrificing performance and does
not use energy-wasting heat sinks.
Non-Automatic Switch
A special version of the circuit breaker is
used as a non-automatic switch.
The non-automatic switch is constructed
without a trip unit and has no protective
function. A possible application is for use
as a tie in systems with parallel feeds.
Main Bus Connectors
Breakers are equipped with standard
vertical main bus connections. Horizontal
bus connections are available as an
option in Frame Size 1 and 2 up to
2000A.
Communication Capability
MODBUS or PROFIBUS communications transmit the acquired and metered
data, such as current values, breaker
status, trip log, etc. to a central
monitoring computer. When the optional
metering function is installed, the WL
acquires data useful for power
management and can contribute to a
significant savings in energy costs. A
new, internal circuit breaker bus enables
the expansion of breaker functionality
through the integration of many
secondary functions which were
previously separate, including:
b Control of analog displays
b Options for testing the
communication setup
b Display of breaker status and reason
for trip

b Input modules for reading other
external signals and transmitting
these signalsvia PROFIBUS or
MODBUS communication

b A selection of output modules to
provide contact closures based on
events or measured-value setpoints.
It is not only possible to monitor the
breaker remotely, it is also possible
to open and close the breaker as well
as setting parameters remotely
b Manual operating mechanism with

mechanical and electrically
interlocked closing
b Motorized operating mechanism with
mechanical and electrically interlocked
closing. Operating mechanisms with
electrically interlocked closing are
suitable for synchronizing tasks
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary switches can be added according to the type of installation. They are
easily mounted via front, top mounted
terminal blocks.
Modularity
Common guide frames for the draw-out
version make them completely interchangeable between the UL 489 and
ANSI / UL 1066 rated circuit breakers.
Components, such as auxiliary releases,
motorized operating mechanisms, trip
units, current sensors, auxiliary
signal switches, automatic reset devices
or interlocks can be used to modify or
retrofit any circuit breaker to meet
changing requirements. The main contacts can be replaced to extend the life
of the circuit breaker and feature integrated contact wear indicators.
Electronic Trip Unit Modularity
Modularity is the outstanding feature of
the new WL Circuit Breakers. The trip
units themselves can be retrofitted with
special LCDs, ground fault modules,
rating plugs and communication
modules.100% Rated Circuit Breaker WL
circuit breakers are designed for
continuous operation at 100% of their
current rating without the need for
external heat sinks.
Conditions of Application
WL Circuit Breakers are designed to
meet standard Industrial and Commercial
application requirements.
Operating Mechanisms
Circuit breakers can be optionally
delivered with different operating
mechanisms, including:
mechanical closing (standard)
5-59
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Standards
b WL ANSI / UL 1066 Circuit Breakers
will satisfy: C37.13, C37.16, C37.17,
C37.50, NEMA SG3
b WL UL 489 Circuit Breakers will
satisfy: UL 489

b WL Circuit Breakers are suitable for
use in UL 1558 LV Switchgear and UL
891 LV Switchboards
Conditions of Application
WL Circuit Breakers are designed to
meet standard Industrial and Commercial
application requirements.
Uniform Dimensions
WL Circuit Breaker dimensions differ
only in the device width, which varies by
frame size. With the exception of the
200kA ANSI Frame Size II which has an
additional 5 in depth to accommodate
integral fuses and the UL489 Frame Size
I which measures only 15 in height to
allow six-high stacking in switchboards.
Trip Units
The electronic, micro processor-based
trip unit is auxiliary voltage-independent
for all protective functions and enables
adaptation to the different protection
requirements of distribution systems,
motors, transformers and generators.
The ever-increasing use of plant and

energy management systems has
intensified the demand for circuit
breakers supporting multiple open
protocols to monitor and control the flow
of energy in the power system. The
extensive and modular WL family of
circuit breakers and accessories provides
this for applications from 200A to 5000A.
Applications
WL breakers can be applied as main, tie,
feeder or distribution breakers in
low-voltage electrical power systems.
Versions
b Frame ratings: 800A to5000A
b 3 physical frame sizes
b Rated nominal operating voltage up
to 600VAC

b Seven interrupting classes from 50kA
to 200kA at 480V
b Circuit breaker or non-automatic switch
b WL Circuit Breakers are delivered as
complete assembled breakers or
individual frames, guide frames, and
accessories
Installation Types
Fixed-mounted or Draw-out version.
WL Power Circuit Breakers
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Communication Information
5-60
General

Electronic Trip Units
General
Trip Unit Functions

Basic Protective Functions
ETU748
ETU776
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection

Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Neutral conductor protection
Ground fault protection
S
I
N
G
ETU745
Long-time overcurrent protection
Additional Functions
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Selectable neutral protection

Defeatable short-time protection
Defeatable instantaneous protection
Selectable thermal memory
Zone selective interlocking
Selectable I2t or fixed short-time delay
Adjustable instantaneous pick-up
Selectable I2t or I4t long-time delay
Adjustable short-time delay and pick-up
Selectable and adjustable neutral protection
Dual protective setting capability
Dynamic arc-flash sentry
Extended instantaneous protection
Parameterization and Displays

Parameterization by rotary switches (10 steps)
Parameterization by communication (absolute values)
Parameterization by menu/keypad (absolute values)
Remote parameterization of the basic functions
Remote parameterization of the additional functions
Alphanumeric LCD
Graphical LCD
l
l
Metering Function
Metering function
Metering function Plus
Communication
CubicleBUS
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP
Communication via the MODBUS
Communication via the Ethernet (BDA)
l Standard
Not available
Optional
5-61
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3-Pole, up to 5000A
Rating Plug
It is no longer necessary to replace the
current transformer to change the rated
current of the breaker. Instead, you
simply replace the rating plug which is
easily accessible on the front of the trip
unit. The circuit breaker is set to the new
rated current quickly and is already
correctly labeled.
Long Time Overcurrent Protection
with Switchable I2t/I4t Characteristics
The long time overcurrent
protection in the ETU745, ETU755 and
ETU776 trip units can be switched
between an I2t and I4t characteristic to
improve coordination between upstream
circuit breakers and fuses.
Front Panel
The front panel is designed so that it can
be accessed through a cutout in the
door, which means that all controls and
displays are accessible even when the
cubicle door is closed. The front panels
of all Frame Size II and Frame Size III
circuit breakers are identical, and allow
for two different through-door access
designs: Trip unit and front panel controls
or front panel controls only. The degree
of protection of the front panel is IP 20.
Environmental Protection
The plastics used are halogen-free and
recyclable.
Safety and Reliability
In order to help protect the electrical
distribution system and circuit breaker
against unauthorized breaker operations,
a wide range of locking devices can be
General
installed or retrofit, including:

b Lockable drawout version to protect
against unauthorized removal
(standard)
b High degree of protection through
Plexiglas cover
b Mechanical reclosing lockout after
long-time, short-time or instantaneous
trip (optional)
b Devices with trip unit ETU745 or
higher are equipped with temperature
sensors on the BSS and
COM15/COM16 (standard)
b Lock provision for locking the breaker
in the OPEN position

b Lockable covers for the CLOSE button
b Lockable racking handle prevents
moving the breaker

b Lockable charging handle prevents
charging the springs
Standard Version Features
WL Circuit Breakers have the following
standard equipment:
b Mechanical CLOSE and mechanical
OPEN push buttons
mechanical closing

b Contact position indicator
b Front panel ready-to-close indicator
b Spring charge indicator
b Rear vertical main contacts

b Main contact replacement flag
b Auxiliary plug system with bare wire
pressure screw terminals. Delivery
includes all auxiliary plugs necessary
for both factory installed and future
field installed accessories

b Mechanical trip indicator of the
overcurrent release system
b Automatic reset after trip
b The front panel cannot be removed if
the circuit breaker closed
b Laminated main contact fingers as part
of the breaker contact strip on
the drawout circuit breaker

b Breaker position display in the
operators panel
b Captive crank handle for racking out
the breaker
b Guide frame with guide rails for easy
handling of draw-out version

b Breaker cannot be moved in the
CLOSED state

b Rated current coding between the
guide frame and the breaker
b Suitable for reverse feed applications
b The breaker is always equipped with
the required number of secondary
disconnect blocks
Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry (DAS) employs

the unique dual protective setting
capability of the 776 trip unit, coupled
with the ability to easily toggle to a
lower arc flash parameter set. A normal
operation
parameter set can be optimized for
selective trip coordination, while the
second set is optimized for lower arc
flash energy levels. The dynamic action
comes from the ability to switch from
the normal operation set to the arc flash
limiting set based on the presence of
personnel as they approach the flash
protection boundary. A wide variety of
switching methods may be used based
on the needs of a particular facility. The
capabilities range from fully automatic
switching using appropriate occupancy
sensors to manual switching via a
key operation.
Extended Instantaneous Protection
Extended Instantaneous protection (EIP),
another unique feature of the WL trip
unit, allows the system designer to
achieve full selective trip coordination up
to the short-time rating of the frame
while also allowing application of the
breaker up to the interrupting rating of
the frame. The typical power circuit
breaker with an LS trip unit, or when the

instantaneous function is switched off on
an LSI trip unit, can only be applied up
to its short-time rating,
commonly 85kA or less. For application
on systems with levels of available
fault current above the short-time
rating, the typical LS power circuit
breaker cannot be applied or must
employ an instantaneous override. This
instantaneous
override is set at as much as 20% below
the short-time rating and can seriously
compromise selective trip coordination
with downstream breakers.
The WL, equipped with EIP, overcomes
these limitations by providing full
withstand capability, and full coordination,
with a minus 0% short-time band
tolerance up to 85kA on frame Size II
and 100kA on Size III. Above fault currents of 20% higher than the full shorttime rating, the WL breaker is self-protecting, and the EIP function will trip the
breaker instantly to protect the frame and
the system from these extremely high
currents, as high as 150kA on frame Size
III. One added benefit is that arc flash
energy is greatly reduced in this high
current region due to the instantaneous
trip response that EIP provides.
Exclusive Features
Generator/Utility
Protection Sets
24/7/365 power availability is critical
for some systems. On-site generation
capability is growing more and more
common in many systems. All of the
WL digital electronic trip units allow
the system designer to precisely tailor
trip settings for the most demanding
requirements. However, the 776 trip unit
allows one set
of trip settings for a fully loaded utility
feed and with a simple contact closure,
the trip unit toggles to a second trip set
tailored to provide optimal generator protection. The wide range of settings
allows the WL to provide protection for
a minimal generator capacity for only
essential loads, through full backup for an
entire facility. This dual utility/generator
protection capability in a single circuit
breaker allows the system designer
unparalleled, cost effective, flexibility.
Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry
A unique feature of the WL trip unit
allows the system designer to achieve
lower levels of arc flash energy and
delayed tripping for selective trip
coordination purposes.
5-62

Electronic and Communications Accessories
Selection
Electronic & Display Devices

SADU Ammeter Display Unit
Trip Unit Test Set

Type
Catalogue Number
Portable
TS31
Spare TS-31 Test Set Interconnecting Cable
TS31CABLE
12372.00
168.00
The TS-31 test set is used to test the operation of the fault protection functions of the
circuit breakers trip unit, including long-time, short-time, instaneous, and ground fault
by means of secondary current injections.
Sensitrip Ammeter Display Unit
Breaker Type
Catalogue Number
SJD, SLD, SMD,
SADU
SND, SPD
SADURMK18
1588.00
306.00
Direct plug-in or Panel Mounting*

Trip Unit Powered & Battery back-up
2 x 16 LCD Alphanumeric Display*
Ammeter Diplay Functions
Plug-in Mounting
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
RMS Phase Currents

Average Current*
Current Demand*
Ground Current
Current Unbalance (%)*
Breaker Status
Normal
Impending Trip*
Time Stamped Trip Log (last 5)
Time & Date*

Trip Cause: LT, ST, GF, SC
Max Log (with date & time)
Max Phase Current*

Max Average Current*
Max Ground Current*
Max Unbalance Current*
Max Current Demand*
* Unique Features
The Sensitrip Ammeter Display Unit (SADU) provides real-time metering for all
Sentron-Sensitrip III Molded Case Circuit Breakers. The unit plugs directly onto
the front of the trip unit and provides displays for individual phase currents flowing
through the breaker. Additional features include Average, Demand, Ground and
Unbalance Current displays, along with impending Trip Status. Current Metering Logs,
and a unique diagnostic Trip Log that records the date, time and type of fault for the
previous five breaker trips. The device is UL and CSA certified.
The optional panel mount accessory (SADURMK18) allows easy device mounting
external from the circuit breaker, in panelboard and switchboard spaces or gutters,
with the flexibility of interior panel exterior panel, or wall mounting capability.
The 2 x 16 alphanumeric LCDdisplay provides easy viewing of data, such as viewing
all three phase currents simultaneously.
5-63
Lug information
Mechanical Lug
For Use
With Type(s)
Circuit Breaker
Ampere Rating
Selection
Cables Per
Lug
Lug Wire Range
Catalogue
Number
1540
1
1
#14#6 AWG Cu
#12#6 AWG Al
TC1Q1 (Pkg. of 6)
13.90
50100
1
1
#8#1 AWG Cu
#6#1/0 AWG Al
TA1Q1 (Pkg. of 6)
12.20
Line Side
BQ, BQH,
Load Side
BQHF,
BQE,
1520
1
1
#14#10 AWG Cu
#12#10 AWG Al
BQF,
BL, BLH,
2535
1
1
#14#6 AWG Cu
#12#6 AWG Al
HBL,
HBQ
4050
1
1
#8#6 AWG Cu
#8#4 AWG Al
Switching
Neutrals
5570
1
1
#8#4 AWG Cu
#8#2 AWG Al
BG
BLG
80100
1
1
#4#1/0 AWG Cu
#2#1/0 AWG Al
110125
1
1
#2#1/0 AWG Cu
#1/0#2/0 AWG Al
Lugs are integral to

Circuit Breaker
Line Side (CQD, CQD6) & Load Side
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BQD, CQD
BQD6, CQD6
NGG
1540
#14#6 AWG Cu
#12#6 AWG Al
Integral
45100
#8#1 AWG Cu
#6#1/0 AWG Al
Integral
1540
#14#6 AWG Cu
#12#6 AWG Al
TC1Q1 (pkg. of 6)

13.90
50100
#8#1 AWG Cu
#6#1/0 AWG Al
TA1Q1 (pkg. of 6)
12.20
110125
#6#1/0 AWG Cu
#4#2/0 AWG Al
3TA1GG20 (pkg. of 3)
12.00
15125
NUT KEEPER PLATE
TNKG3 (Pkg. of 3)
16.00
Note:
(A) M
olded case circuit breakers having a rated ampacity
of 125 amperes or less are to be connected with 60 or
75C wire. Circuit breakers having a rated ampacity
greater than 125 amperes shall only be cabled with
75C cable unless otherwise indicated on the circuit
breaker label. Exceptions to this rule are outlined in
the 2002 National Electrical Code and table 6.1.4.2.1
per CSA C22.2 No5.02 standard.
(B) Connector wire ranges and cavities are established in
conjunction with Table 6.1.4.2.1 of UL 489 standards.
5-64
Lug
is steel.
in package of six.
on load side only.
One nut keeper plate is required with each lug on the
NGG breaker.
Sold
Use
Lug Information
Aluminum Body Lugs for Copper or Aluminum Wire

For Use
With Type(s)
QJ2, QJH2
QJ2H, HQJ2H
Circuit Breaker
Ampere Rating
Cables Per
Lug
Lug Wire Range
Selection
Catalogue
Number
60225
#6 AWG300 kcmil (Cu)

#4 AWG300 kcmil (Al)
1525
#14#10 AWG (Cu)

#12#10 AWG (Al)
SA1E025
30100
#10#1/0 (Cu or Al)
LN1E100
110125
#3-3/0 (Cu)
#1-2/0 (Al)
TA1E6125
3060
#104 (Cu or Al)
LD1E060
(Load Side)
3.60
70100
#4#1/0 (Cu or Al)
LD1E100
(Load Side)
3.50
FXD6-A, FD6-A,
HFD6,
CFD6
HHFD6
70250

#4 AWG350 kcmil (Al)
TA1FD350A

19.80
SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A)
SCJD6
65-200
12
#4 AWG310 kcmil (Cu or Al)
TA2J630
19.80

JXD2(A), JXD6(A),
JD6(A), SJD6(A),
HJD6(A),
HHJXD6, HHJD6,
SHJD6(A), CJD6,
SCJD6
200400
12
3/0500 kcmil (Cu)

4/0500 kcmil (Al)
TA2J6500
28.00
LXD6(A), LD6(A),
SLD6(A), HLD6(A),
HHLXD6, HHLD6,
SHLD6(A), CLD6,
SCLD6
250600
12
3/0500 kcmil (Cu)

4/0500 kcmil (Al)
TA2J6500
28.00
500600
12
#1500 kcmil (Cu or Al)
TA2K500
64.00
13
1/0500 kcmil (Cu or Al)
TA3K500
87.00
250500 kcmil (Cu or Al)
2TA4P8500
3TA4P8500
522.00
754.00
2TA4N8500
3TA4N8500
526.00
762.00
All 2, 3 pole
ED2, ED4, ED6,
ED6 ETI,
HED4,
CED6
All 1 pole
ED, HED
12.00
3.50
3.50
10.90
ND6,
NXD6, SND6,
HND6, HNXD6,
SHND6, CND6,
SCND6
8001200
PD6, HPD6,
CPD6
PXD6,
HPXD6,
SPD6,
SHPD6
12001600
15
TA5P600
286.00
PD6, PXD6,
HPD6, HPXD6,
SPD6, SHPD6,
RD6, RXD6,
HRD6, HRXD6
12002000
16
TA6R600
302.00
14
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LMD6, LMXD6,
HLMD6,
HLMXD6, MD6,
MXD6, SMD6,
HMD6, HMXD6,
SHMD6, CMD6,
SCMD6
TA1Q300 (pkg of 3)
Use TA2K500 or TA3K500 only.

b Contains 2 connectors plus 1 NDTS
c Contains
end barrier.
3 connectors plus 1 NDTS end barrier.
5-65
Lug information
Optional Mechanical Lugs
Selection
For Use
With Type
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2H, HQJ2H
ED, HED 2&3 pole
HFD6, HHFD6,
CFD6, F(X)D6-A
J(X)D2(A), J(X)D6(A),
HJD6(A), HHJD6,
SHJD6(A), L(X)D6(A),
HHLD6, SCD6,
HLD6(A), SHLD6(A),
CJD6, CLD6, SCJD6,
SCLD6
Circuit Breaker
Ampere Rating
Cables Per
Lug
Lug
Material
Lug Wire Range
Qty per
Cat. #
Catalogue
Number
60225
Cu
TC1Q250
28.50
23 pole 30-125
Cu
#10#1/0 (Cu)
TC1ED6150
30.00
70250
Cu
TC1FD350
31.00
200600
1
12
Cu
3/0600 kcmil (Cu)

3/0500 kcmil (Cu)
1
1
TC1J6600
TC2J6500 0
69.00
250600
1
1
Al
500750 kcmil (Al)

500600 kcmil (Cu)
TA1L6750
SMD6, M(X)D6,
HM(X)D6, HMD6,
CMD6, SCMD6, SND6,
N(X)D6, HN(X)D6,
SHND6, CND6, SCND6
500600
12
13
Cu
Cu
12
Al
8001200
13
Al
R(X)D6, HR(X)D6
P(X)D6, HP(X)D6,
CPD6, SPD6, SHPD6
16002000
15
Cu

500750 kcmil (Cu)
500750 kcmil (Al)
500750 kcmil (Cu)
500750 kcmil (Al)
300600 kcmil (Cu)
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
TC2K500
TC3K350
2TA2N8750
3TA2N8750
2TA3N8750
3TA3N8750
TC5R600
107.00
135.00
327.00
459.00
517.00
744.00
381.00
12001600
14
Al
600750 kcmil (Cu/Al)
TA4P750

216.00
700800

68.00
Compression Lugs
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Ampere
For Circuit Breaker Types
Rating
Lugs (contains indicated number of lugs and necessary hardware per kit)
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, CED4
15125
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
125225
F(X)D6-A, HF(X)D6, HHF(X)D6, CFD6
125250
JXD2-A, J(X)D6-A, HJ(X)D6-A, HHJ(X)D6-A, CJD6, SJD6-A, SHJD6-A,
200600
SCJD6, L(X)D6-A, HL(X)D6-A, CLD6, SLD6-A, SHLD6-A, SCLD6
Kits (contain lugs and hardware for complete line or load end of 2 or 3 pole breaker)
M(X)D6, HM(X)D6, CMD6, SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6
500800
N(X)D6, HN(X)D6, CND6, SND6, SHND6, SCND6
9001200
Poles
Lugs
Per Kit
Lug Wire
Size
Catalogue
Number
1, 2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
1
1
1
#2/0 AWG Cu/AL

350 kcmil Cu/AL
350 kcmil
CCE125
CCQ225
CCF250
24.00
45.50
45.50
2, 3
500 kcmil
CCL600
134.00
2
3
2
3
6
9
8
12
500 kcmil
CCM800K2
CCM800K3
CCN1200K2
CCN1200K3
649.00
945.00
851.00
1246.00
Distribution Lugs

For Circuit Breaker Types
Ampere
Rating
Poles
Lugs
Per kit
Wires
Per Lug
Lug Wire Size
Catalogue Number
NGG
15-125
1,2,3
1
6
#6-#4 AL
TA6GG04

#14-#4 Cu

NEG, HEG
15-125
1,2,3
3
3
#14-#2 AWG Cu
3TA3EG02

NEG, HEG
15-125
1,2,3
3
6
#14-#6 AWG Cu

3TA6EG06
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6, CED6

15-125 1,2,3 1
6

#14-#4 AWG Cu
#6-#4 AWG Al
TA6ED06
F(X)D6-A, HF(X)D6, HHF(X)D6, CFD6

70-250 2,3 1
6

#14-#4 AWG Cu
#6-#4 AWG Al
TA6FD04
#14-2/0 AWG Cu
#6-2/0 AWG Al
TA6JD20
JXD2-A, J(X)D6-A, HJ(X)D6-A, HHJ(X)D6-A, CJD6-A,

200-600 2,3
1
6
SJD6, SHJD6-A, SCJD6, L(X)D6-A, HL(X)D6-A, CLD6-A,
SLD6-A, SHLD6-A, SCLD6
a Used
for 100% rated JD/LD frame circuit breakers.
5-66
Special purpose wire connectors, not for general use.

Modifications
Modifications
50C Ambient Calibration Not UL listed and not available for solid state, 100% rated breakers or
400HZ calibrated breakers.
or BL Type Circuit Breakers
F
Add suffix M to catalogue number (Example: B120M)
For BQ, QJ2, and ED Frame Circuit Breakers
Replace B in catalogue number with M (Example: BQ3M060, QJ23M200, ED63M060)
For FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, and RD Frame Circuit Breakers
Non-Interchangeable Trip (3pole only)
Replace B in catalogue number with M (Example: FXD63M225, JXD63M400)
Interchangeable Trip (trip unit only, 3pole only)
Replace T in catalogue number with W (Example: FD63W200, JD63W400)
400 HZ Calibration
ULListed (5KA IR)
For BQ, BL, and QJ Type Circuit Breakers (200A max.)
Add suffix Y to catalogue number
Not ULListed
For all other Circuit Breakers Add suffix Y to catalogue number
Fungus Proofing In accordance with MIL-T-152.
ll BQD, CQD, NGG, ED, FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, and RD, Frame Circuit Breakers are
A
inherently fungus resistant and do not require special treatment.
Fungus proofing in accordance with MIL-T-152
For BL, and BQ Type Circuit Breakers
Order must be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.
or all other Circuit Breaker Types
F
Order must be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.
Breakers tested to UL 489 Supplement SB are qualified for use

on non combat and auxiliary naval vessels.
Siemens molded case breakers from the ED frame through the
2000 Amp SB frame can be labeled Naval in compliance with
Supplement SB.
Supplement SB testing comprises two sets of vibration tests.
The first is to find mechanical resonances in the product and
to subject the breaker to extreme testing at each resonant
frequency. The second is a swept frequency test, in which the
frequency of excitation is changed in intervals of 1Hz, and held
at each frequency for five minutes. The excitation frequencies
run from 4 to 33Hz, and the test is conducted in each of the
three orthogonal axes of the breaker.
During these tests, the breaker must not trip from the closed
position, nor may the contacts touch from the open position.
Calibration and insulation resistance are also verified during the
test.
For detailed information, refer to UL 489, Supplement SB.
Ordering Informationa
For NAVAL label, order must be placed directly with the
factory by Siemens Sales Office.
Types
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
CED6
FD6, FXD6, HFD6, HFXD6
CFD6
JXD2, JD6, JXD6, LXD6, LD6,
HJD6, HJXD6, HLD6, HLXD6
HHJD6, HHJXD6, HHLD6, HHLXD6
CJD6, CLD6
MD6, MXD6, HMD6, HMXD6, CMD6,
ND6, NXD6, HND6, HNXD6, CND6
PD6, PXD6, HPD6, HPXD6, CPD6,
RD6, RXD6, HRD6, HRXD6
UL File
E10848, Vol 4, Sec 11
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 13
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 17
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 18
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 8
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 20
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 14
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 15
E10848,Vol 4, Sec 19
Consult sales office for pricing.
5-67
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Certificate of Compliance
Certificate of compliance testing must be performed on the actual device being shipped. The
certificate cannot be provided after initial shipment. Order for devices with COC requirement must
be placed directly with the factory by the sales office.
UL 489 Supplement SB Naval Use Breakers
Selection/ General
A variety of internal and external

accessories, as well as modifications,
are available to adapt Siemens circuit
breakers to special installation
requirements. UL listed internal
accessories for 100 through 2000A
circuit breakers are field-addable.
Internal accessories fine tune an
electrical distribution system,
allowing control of the circuit breakers to
meet special application requirements.
For example, emergency situations may
dictate tripping critically placed circuit
breakers quickly. Shunt trips accomplish
this conveniently and efficiently.
Or, when voltage drops are a concern,
undervoltage trips automatically open
the circuit breaker at a predetermined
voltage level.
A wide range of external operating and
mounting accessories is also available.
For example, face, shallow, and back
mounting plates are ideal for tailoring BQ
circuit breakers to OEM applications.
A complete line of operating handles
and handle-blocking devices meet
switchboard, enclosure and safety
needs. Plug-in mounting assemblies,
which simplify switchboard mounting
of circuit breakers and permit breaker
removal without disconnecting bus or
cable connections, are available.

Selection/ General
Feature Combinations
The available feature combinations are shown in the chart below. For applications requiring combinations of features not listed in
this chart, consult the sales office for availability.
Avail. On
ST/
Modules/ Breaker
ST/ ST/
AUX/
UVT/
Breaker Poles
ST AUX ALSW ALSW UVT AUX
Breakers
UVT/
UVT/ ST/
ALSW ALSW
AUX/
ALSW
AUX
Elect.
Bell
Ground Grd fault
ALSW Alarm fault
w/Bell
QP, BQ, BL
1, 2, 3
1, 2
BQD, CQD, NGG
2, 3
1/1
1, 2
1/1
QJ
1/1
All ED, EF
1, 2, 3
1/1
1/1
1/1/1
1/1, 1/2
1/1
1/1/1
1, 2
1/1, 2/1
All FD, FF
2, 3
1, 2
1/1
All JD, LD, LMD
2,3
1/1, 1/2
1, 2
1, 2
1/1, 1/2
1, 2
1, 2
2,3
1/1
1/1, 1/2
1, 2
1/1, 2/1
1, 2
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6,

SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
All MD, ND, PD, RD
Including Electronic
trip
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Shunt Trip (ST)

One or all critical circuit breakers may
be tripped from a distant control point
by use of a shunt trip device. A shunt
trip operates through an auxiliary switch
contact; when the breaker opens, current
is not maintained on the shunt trip coil.
Undervoltage Trip (UVT)

When voltage drops to a value below 35%
of the nominal coil rating, the undervoltage
trip device automatically opens the
breaker. The operation is instantaneous,
and the circuit breaker cannot be reclosed
until the voltage returns to 85% of line

voltage. The undervoltage trip, which is
continuously energized, must be energized
before the circuit breaker can be closed.
Auxiliary Switch (AUX)

For applications requiring remote on or
off indication (or electrical interlocking),
auxiliary switches are available. Each
switch comprises an A (open when
circuit breaker is open) and a B (closed
when circuit breaker is open) contact with
a common connection. (Form C)
For ED Frames
Factory
assembled only
mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory
module can be installed in the right pocket.
If
5-68
For FD Frames
If
mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory

module can be installed.
If mechanical interlock is installed, no accessory
module can be installed in the left pocket.
Alarm Switch (ALSW)

The alarm switch contact is closed
when the circuit breaker is opened
automatically by an overload, short circuit,
shunt trip or undervoltage trip. The alarm
switch contact is open when the circuit
breaker is reset.
For JD and LD Frames

Selection
Handle Ties
Provide simultaneous switching of 2 adjacent handles. Do not provide common trip.

For Use With
Breaker Frame(s)
Catalogue
Number
Standard
Package
Wt Lb/
Std Pkg
BQ, BQH, HBQ, B6, BLH, HBL (2 Pole)
QTH3
50
1/4
BQXD,
BQ, BQH, HBQ, BL, BLH, HBL
ECQLD3
10
1/4
One pole BL, BLF, BE, BAF
ECPLD1
1/4
Two-pole BL, BLF and BE
ECPLD2
1/4
All QJ
HL9419
10
1/4
All BQD, CQD
BQDPLD
1/8
All ED
ED2HPL
1/4
All FD
FD6PL1
1/4
All JD, LD, LMD
JD6HPL
1/4
All MD, ND, PD, RD
MN6PLD
1/4
QF3-UL
1/4
Padlocking Devices
For locking breaker in OFF position.
Filler Plates
BQ, BQH, HBQ, BL, BLH, HBL
FD Padlocking
Device
FD6PLI
Padlocking
Device
ECQLD3
Handle Blocking Devices
ECQTH3
For holding breaker in ON or OFF position. Not a lockout/tagout device.

ECQL1
25
1/4
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H, HQJ2H
QJHS1
25
All BQD, CQD, NGG
BQDHBD
1/4
All ED
E2HBL
1/4
All FD
FD6HB1
1/2
All JD, LD, LMD
JD6HBL
1/2
All MD, ND, PD, RD
MN6BL
1/2
10
1/4
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BL, BLH, HBL, BQXD,

BQ, BQH, HBQ
Filler Plate
QF3-UL
Handle Extensions
For replacement. One extension shipped with breaker.
All MD, ND, PD, RD
EX11
Replacement Terminal Cover

NGG
RTCG3
FD Handle
Blocking Device
FD6HB1
Handle
Blocking Device
ECQL1
Handle
Extension
EX11
Sold
only in standard package quantities.
5-69

Selection
Mounting Clips
For Use With
Breaker Frame(s)
Number of
Poles
Catalogue
Number
Standard
Package
Wt Lb
Std Pkg
BQ, BQH
MB120
20
1/4
10
10
10
1/2
1
1
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
MB120
Face Mounting Plates

BQ, BQH, BQXD
1
2
3
FP9508
FP9555
FP9556
CQD, CQD6
1
2
3
CQDFMB1
CQDFMB2
CQDFMB3
BQ-GFCI
FP9558
10
NGG
1
2
3
FMPG1
FMPG2
FMPG3
1
1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
SMB6
30
2
3
4
BR2
BR3
BR4
10
10
10
1/4
1/4
1/4
E2BMB
1/4
1/2
Face Mounting Plates

FP9558 FP9508 FP9555 FP9556
Shallow Mounting Brackets

BQ, BQH
16
1/4
Back Mounting Plates
BQ, BQH, BQXD
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
SMB6 (6 shown)
Mounting Screw Kits

CQD, CQD6
CQDSMK
All ED (CED6 requires 2 kits)
MSE6
MSE6100
1
100
1/4
1
NNG
MSKG2
1/4
All QJ
MSQJ
All FD (CFD6 requires 2 kits)
MSF6
MSF650
1
50
1/4
1
All JD, LD
MSJ6
1/4
All LMD
MSLMD
1/4
All MD, ND,
MSMN
1/4
All PD, RD
MSPR6
Back Mounting
Plate BR2
1/4
Mounting Screw Kit

MSE6
MI Mechanical Interlocks
For Use With
Breaker Type(s)
Panel
Mounted
Plug-in
Mounted
Standard
Package
Wt Lb
Std Pkg
BQ
ECQML12
10
1/4
All QJ
CSO
All FD
MI5444
Complete with
two breakers
MI5444
All JD, LD
MI5413
All LMD
MI5406
All MD
MI5404
All ND
MI5404
All PD, RD
MI5405
MI5405
STD
STDMIF32
Note: CSO = Consult Sales Office

K
it consists of 4 screws and washers.
C
onsists of 1 screw and washers (order 100).
C
onsists of 1 screw and washers (order 50).
With mechanical interlock in place, no accessory can be
installed into circuit breaker right pole.
5-70
QML12
of the mechanical interlock will prevent

accessory installation in the left pole.
only in standard package quantities. Multiply List
Price Each times package quantity for full price.
MI5444
Addition
Each
Sold
Mechanical
package contains 5 strips of 6 each. Each strip can

be broken at perforations for 1, 2 or 3-pole use.
interlock is not designed for use within
Siemens panelboards.

Selection
Rotary Door Mounted Operating Handles
Types 1, 3, 3R , 12, 4 4X
For Use
With
Breaker
Frames
EG
EDa
FD
JD, LD
LMD
Complete Mechanism
Catalogue Number
Standard
Variable
Depth
Depth
RHVE64X
RHVE124X
CRHOESD
CRHOEVD
CRHOFSD
CRHOFVD
CRHOJSD
CRHOJVD
CRHOLMSD
CRHOLMVD
MD, ND
PD, RD
RHONSD
RHONVD
Breaker
Handle Only Operator
Catalogue
Number
CRHOHc
RHOH
Catalogue
Number
RHOEBO
RHOFBO
RHOJBO
RHOLMBO
RHONBOd
Shaft Only
Length
(inches)
2
12
16
Catalogue
Number
RHOSSD
RHOSVD
RHOSXD
3
12
24
RHONSSD
RHONSVD
RHONSXD
CRHOH
RHOH
For 3 or 3R, order shaft and breaker operator as shown, and handle RHOH. For 4 & 4X, order handle RHOH4.
Rotary Door Mounted Operating Handles

Types 1 & 12
For Use With
Breaker Frames
CQD, NGG
ED
FD
JD, LD, LMD
Standard Depth
Catalogue Number
D11CEU1
D11CFU1
Variable Depth
Catalogue Number
RHOCQVD
D11CEU2
D11CFU2
D11CJU2
Handle and Shaft

Catalogue Number
RHOH62
Breaker Operator
Catalogue Number
CQDOP
D11CEU2
Through Door Mounted Operating Handles

Types 1 & 12
Variable Depth
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
CQD, NGG
FMHOS
QJ
OH9498
VH9499
195.00
ED
E2RH1
E2RHV9
197.00
FD
F6RH1
F6RHV9
197.00
Rotary Door Mounted

Operating Handles
Standard
Depth
F6RH1
Door Latch Kits

Type
Catalogue Number
Right Hand
Catalogue Number
Left Hand
2 point latch
DKR2
DKL2
302.00
3 point latch
DKR3
DKL3
337.00
Variable Depth
a For
use on 3-pole ED frame only.

the requirements of NFPA 79, section 5.3.3.1
for locking external operator disconnecting devices.
b Meets

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Standard Depth
For Use With
Breaker Frames
c For
3 or 3R, order shaft and breaker operator as shown,

and handle RHOH. For 4 & 4X, order handle RHOH4.
d For extended shaft support order catalogue number
RHONSB2.
Consult
F6RHV9
Siemens Sales Office for NFPA-79 Compliance.
5-71

Selection
Max-Flex, Flange Mounted Variable Depth Operators c

Frames
NGG
ED
FD
JD, LD,
SJD, SLD
LMD
MD, ND,
PD, RD,
SMD, SND,
SPD
NEMA
Type
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
1, 3 (R),
12
4 (x)
Complete Kit
Catalogue
Number
Handle Only
Catalogue
Number
MFKG3R3
MFHM3R
MFKG4X3
MFHM4X
FHOE036 a
FHOH
FHOH4
FHOF036
FHOH
FHOH4
FHOJ036
FHOH
FHOH4
FHOLM036
FHOH
FHOH4
FHON048
FHOHN
FHOHN4
Cable
Breaker Operator
36" Cable
MFMG
MFCF036
FHOEBOa
FHOEC036
FHOFBO
FHOFC036
FHOJBO
FHOJC036
FHOLMBO
FHOJC036
FHONBO
FHONC048b
Handle
Breaker Operator
Max Flex
Max-Flex handles are available with solid black handles instead of the customary red for on flange handle. These are
preferred for use in IECmarkets, where red handles have specific meaning. Order components separately, appending the
letter i to the catalogue number (e.g. FHOHI).
Alternate Length Cable Only
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ED
FD
JD/LD/LMD
MD/ND/PD/RD

Inches Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
048
060
072
084
096
120
144
FHOEC048
FHOEC060
FHOEC072
FHOEC084
FHOEC096
FHOEC120
FHOEC144
FHOFC048
FHOFC060
FHOFC072
FHOFC084
FHOFC096
FHOFC120
FHOFC144
FHOJC048 FHONC048
FHOJC060 FHONC060
FHOJC072 FHONC072
FHOJC084 FHONC084
FHOJC096 FHONC096
FHOJC120 FHONC120
FHOJC144 FHONC144
Handle Auxiliary Switch

For use with Max-Flex and Rotary Door operators (FHOH and RHOH). 1 NO and 1 NC contact (Form C).

For Use With
ED, FD, JD, LD, LMD, ND, PD, RD, SD, Max Flex HAS1
Catalogue Number
Fixed Depth Flange Mounting

Frames
Left Hand Mount

Minimum
Enclosure NEMA
Depth
Type
Catalogue Number
Right Hand Mount

Catalogue Number
1, 3R, 12
FDFBEL FDFBER
4, 4X
FDFBEL4 FDFBER4
1, 3R, 12 FDFBFL FDFBFR
ED
6.44

FD
6.44

4, 4X
FDFBFL4 FDFBFR4
Max-Flex handles are available with solid black handles instead of the customary Red for On flange handle. These
are preferred for use in IECmarkets, where red handles have specific meaning. Order components separately, appending
the letter i to the catalogue number (e.g. FHOHI).
aFor
1- or 2-pole breaker order FHOED036 complete kit

or FHOEDBO breaker operator only.
5-72
b48
inch cable is standard length for M through R frame

Max-Flex operators.
FDFBFR
cMeets
requirements of NFPA 79, section 5.3.3.1 for

locking external operator disconnecting devices

Telemand
Motor Operator
Breaker Frame
AC
Voltage
Hinged to
Open Down
List
Price $
ED except CED
120
MOE6120
3018.00
240
MOE6240
Selection
ED motor operator opens downward.
Breaker
Frame
DC
Voltage
Hinged to
Open Right
AC
Voltage
Hinged to
Open Right
FD
24
48
125
MOF6024DC
MOF6048DC
MOF6125DC
120
240
3
MOF6120
MOF6240
296.00
3083.00
3465.00
JD, LD
24
48
125
MOJ6024DC
MOJ6048DC
MOJ6125DC
120
240
MOJ6120
MOJ6240
3989.00
3989.00
LMD
24
48
125
MOLMD6024DC
MOLMD6048DC
MOLMD6125DC
120
240
MOLMD6120
MOLMD6240
3989.00
3989.00
MD, ND,
PD, RD
120
240
MOMN6120
MOMN6240
4505.00
4505.00
To order FD through RD motor operators with Left side hinges,

add L to catalogue number (e.g. MOF6120L).
FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, RD Frames
Dimensions
Frame
4.31
4.31
13.84
F
8.84
FD
9.50
4.55
1.60
6.84
9.70
7.58
JD, LD, LMD
11.00
7.50
0.79
8.34
9.85
7.74
MD, ND, PD, RD
16.00
9.00
9.83
13.13
10.13
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7.04
ED
Operating Currents
On
Catalogue
Number
In-Rush
(Amps)
MOE6120
MOE6240
10.25
5.2
MOF6120/L
MOF6240/L
Off
Running
(Amps)
Time
(msec)
In-Rush
(Amps)
Running
(Amps)
Time
(msec)
Reset
(Amps)
2.3
1.1
550
500
10.0
5.0
2.3
1.0
400
330
2.3
1.1
10.0
4.7
5.5
2.5
200
200
10.0
4.7
5.5
2.5
175
185
5.5
2.5
MOLMD6120/L
15.2
6.0
210
15.2
6.0
185
6.0
MOJ6120/L
MOJ6240/L
15.2
5.0
6.0
2.5
210
217
15.2
5.0
6.0
2.5
185
185
6.0
2.5
MOMN6120/L
MOMN6240/L
22.7
12.6
13.9
4.6
240
260
22.7
12.6
13.9
4.6
210
230
13.9
12.6
Front View
Bottom View
5-73

Plug-In Mounting Assemblies, Including Base and Tulip Assemblies
98.00
PC2638
158.00
PC2658
98.00
158.00
PC4753
237.00
PC4753
237.00
PC4754
309.00
PC4754
309.00
PC4753
237.00
PC4753
237.00
PC4754
309.00
PC4754
309.00
PC5777
318.00
PC5777
318.00
PC5778
527.00
PC5778
527.00
Kit CJD, SCJD
PCCJD
570.00
PCCJD
570.00
All LD
except CLD
PC5660
596.00
PC5660
596.00
PC5661
835.00
PC5661
835.00
Kit CLD, SCLD
PCCLD
PCCLD
769.00
PC5662
1098.00
PC5662 1098.00
PC5663
1341.00
PC5663
769.00
PC5664 1516.00
PC5666
1341.00
PC5664c 1516.00
1748.00
PC5666
1748.00
PL2616
PL2617
PL4762
PL4763
PL5796
PL5797
PL5696
PL5797
PL9698
PL9699
2 Pole
3 Pole
For
Frame
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
ED
TCE2
TCE3
184.00
FD
TCF2
TCF3
275.00
JD
TCJ2
TCJ3
309.00
LD
TCL2
TCL3
366.00
MD
TCM2
TCM3
408.00
ND
TCN2
TCN3
428.00
RS4755
RS4756
Rear-Connecting Studs
Ampere
Rating
Description
Extension
Behind
Breaker
(inches)
Line Side
Load Side
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Circuit Breaker
With Rear-Connecting Studs
All ED
100
100
100
100
Line Side (Short)

Load Side (Short)
Line Side (Long)
Load Side (Long)
2.38
2.38
4.88
4.88
RS2643

RS2641

40.50
RS2644
47.50 47.50
RS2642
All FD
250
250
Short
Long
3.12
7.06
RS4756
RS4755
RS4756
RS4755
All JD
400
400
Short
Long
5.85
11.20
RS5774
RS5773
RS5774161.00
RS5773161.00
All LD
600
600
Short
Long
5.85
11.20
RS5784
RS5783
RS5784192.00
RS5783181.00
CJD, SCJD
CLD, SCLD
Add required shield kit.
LM(X)D6,
HLM(X)D6
800
Short
Long
5.85
11.20
RS5788
RS5787
RS5788280.00
RS5787
297.00
All MD,
ND
1200
1200
Short
Long
5.50
8.00
RS5786
RS5785
RS5786
RS5785

Furnished at no extra charge when ordered with plugin mounting assembly.
Each piece catalogue number consists of (1) mounting
block assembly and required tulip assemblies (2) for
2-pole, (3) for 3-pole
5-74
Tulip
Assemblies
Switchboard
Mounting
Plate
Tulip Assemblies Separately
For Use
With
Breaker
Frames
PC2637
PC2657
98.00
158.00
2
3
PC2658
All ND
PC2638
All JD
except CJD
All MD
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
98.00
158.00
CFD
PC2637
PC2657
For
58.00
91.00
CLRSJL345.50
231.00
291.00
vertical bus mounting for horizontal, substitute

PC5665 for PC5664 and PC5667 for PC5666.
Price includes one current stud, insulating tube, stud
nuts and terminal shields, when required.
All FD
except CFD
2
3
CED
Catalogue
Number
All ED
except CED
Catalogue
Number
Base
Steel Switchboard
Mounting Plate
Catalogue Number
Poles
Load Side
For Use With

Breaker Frames
Line Side
For
proper electrical clearance, studs must alternate

between short and long stud lengths on circuit breaker
poles (e.g. SLSLSL or LSLSLS).

Enclosures
General
Type 3R
Type 1
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Types 5, 12
Type 1 A general indoor, sheetsteel enclosure for use in normal

atmospheres.
Types 12 A special-industry, sheetsteel enclosure for use in atmospheres

containing particles of lint, dust, dirt,
sawdust and other foreign matter.
Type 3R An outdoor, sheet-steel

enclosure providing protection against
driving rain, sleet or snow. Listed as
service entrance equipment.
5-75

Enclosed Breaker Nomenclature
Sample Part Numbers:
General
3R
QJ
60
II
III
IV
VI+
VII
VIII+
IX+
X+
12
JXD
B*
200
II
III
IV
VI+
VII
VIII+
IX+
X+
1S
SHJD
400
NGTH
II
III
IV
VI+
VII
VIII+
IX+
X+
Basemodel Start with E

Placeholder Position Options
May be replaced by 1S, 1F, 12, 3R or 4X
II
May be replaced by BQ, BQH, HBQ

May be replaced by QJ, QJH, QH
May be replaced by ED, HED, HHED, CED
May be replaced by FD, FXD HFXD, HFD, HHFD, HHFXD, CFD
May be replaced by JD, JXD, HJD, HJXD, HHJD, HHJXD. CJD
III
May be replaced by FD, FXD JD, JXD, SJD, SHJD, SCJD

May be replaced by LD, LXD, HLD, HLXD. HHLD, HHLCD, CLD, SLD, SHLD, SCLD
May be replaced by MD, MXD, HMD, HMXD, CMD, SMD, SHMD, SCMD
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
May be replaced by ND, NXD, HND, HNXD, CND, SND, SHND, SCND
IV
May be replaced by 2, 4, 6
May be replaced by 2, 3, 9
VI
May be replaced by B, M, S, L, A, H, * If option not present omitted
May be replaced by :
VII
QJ
060,070,080, 090,100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
ED
015, 020, 025, 030, 040, 045, 050, 060, 070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125
FD
070, 080, 090, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
JD
Frame
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
LD
300, 400, 450, 500, 600
MD
600, 700, 800
ND
900, 1000, 1200
VIII
May be replaced by A, AG, ANT, ANGT, AH, AGH, ANTH, G, GH, NT, NTH, NGT, NGTH, if option+ not present position omitted
IX+
A: Consist of breaker internal accessories and Neutral Sensor, + If option not present position omitted
N: Suitable for service entrance,+ If option not present position omitted
The enclosed breakers are factory assembled. Each enclosed breakers assembly
includes the selected type of enclosures, circuit breakers, standard lugs, and optional
Neutral* assembly and accessories.
*except BQ, QJ and ED enclosures.
5-76

Enclosures Type 1
Dimensions
Figure 1
Figure 3
Figure 2
Type 1
Fig.
No.
BQ, BQH, HBQ
Weight
Lb./Ship.
Package
6 Plcs.
2 Plcs.
15/16
15/16
51/4
7/8, 11/8, 13/8,

13/4,2
133/64
11/8, 13/8, 13/4,

2, 21/2, 3
32
1718
71/8
43/4
141/6
E2N1S
E2N1F
8
8
162
1712
7
81/2
51/16
1345/64
332
1/2
ED4, ED6, HED4,

HED6, CED6
125
CED6N1S
CED6N1F
14
14
211532
2214
719/32
81/2
57/64
181/4
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A,

FD6-A, HFD6, HFXD6,
HHFD6, CFD6
250
F6N1S
F6N1F
33
381332
1115/32
51/16
33
JXD2(A), JD6(A),
JXD6(A), HJD6(A),
HJXD6(A), HHJD6,
HHJXD6, SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A), SXD6H
400
120
401364
J6N1
K.O. Dimensions
Dimensions (inches)
36
23
1045/64
LD6(A), LXD6(A),
HLD6(A), HLXD6(A),
HHLD6, HHLXD6,
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A),
SCJD6, SCLD6, LXD6H
600
LD6N1
(L6N1)
101
46
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,

HMD6, HMXD6,
SHMD6, ND6, NXD6,
SND6, HND6, HNXD6,
SHND6, CMD6,
SCMD6, CND6, SCND6
1200
MND61
132
60
42
2227/64
10
557/8
181/4
25/64

Surface
mounted, indoor. If flush mounting is required, replace

suffix S in catalogue number with suffix F. Also, if outdoor
model required, use prefix W
instead of E.
Does not include circuit breaker. Order circuit
breaker separately.
Neutral not included. Order as separate item from table on
next page.
Neutral included in enclosure.
Surface mounted, indoor. If outdoor model is required, use

prefix W instead of E. Not available in flush (F) model.
Use for 110-125 ampere ED4, ED6, HED4 or HED6
circuit breakers.
Will not accept breaker with shunt trip.
Will not accept 2-pole GFCI or breaker with shunt trip.
i Items cannot be ordered seperately. See configuration.
Built to order. Consult sales office

for factory lead time and prices.
5-77
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Cataloguei
Number
EB3100S
100
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4,

HED6
2
Maximun
Current
Rating
Breaker Type
Number
of
Poles

Enclosures Type 1
Dimensions
Fig.
No.
Breaker
Type
Number
of
Poles
Maximun
Current
Rating
Cataloguec
Number
Weight
Lb./Ship.
Package
QJ2,
QJH2,
QH2-H,
QJ, QJH
23
225
EB3225S
EB3225F
15
27
101/8
27
281/8
101/8
111/4
51/4
213/16
213/8
23/8
20
51/16
Dimensions (inches)
M
N
23/4
P
41/2
Neutrals
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Figure 4
Enclosure Neutral
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number
Neutral Cable Capacity

and Wire Range
List
Price $
E2N1(S)(F)

W53045
CED6N1(S)(F)
(1 pc.) #142 Cu/Al

Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #148 Cu/Al
246.

(1 pc.) #6350 kcmil
F6N1(S)(F)
N250 (NFD)

Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #142/0 Cu/Al
(1 pc.) #1/0750 kcmil Cu/Al or

(2 pcs.) #1/0300 kcmil Cu/Al
J6N1
W60992 (NJD)
Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #6250 kcmil Cu/Al

259.
259.

(2 pcs.) #1/0600 kcmil
LD6N1
W60993 (NLD)

393.

W63623 (NMND)
MND61
802.
(8 pcs.) 250 kcmil500 kcmil Cu/Al


Does
not include circuit breaker. Order circuit

breaker separately.

Neutral
c Items cannot be ordered seperately. See configuration.
5-78
Built to order. Consult sales office

for factory lead time and prices.

Enclosures Type 3R
Dimensions
Figure 2
Figure 1
Figure 3
Type 3R
Fig.
No.
Breaker Type
Number
of
Poles
Maximun
Current
Rating
50
100
Cataloguee
Number
Weight
Lb./Ship.
Package
1718
738
4516
1418
412
118
311/16
Dimensions (inches)
BQ, BQH, HBQ
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6

CED6
100
125
E2N3R
CED6N3R
12
16
17916
222164
714
514
123964
1738
514
FXD6, FD6, FXD6-A, FD6-A,

HFD6, HFXD6,
HHFD6, CFD6
250
F6N3R
45
3818
14116
734
33932
1316
1312
1316
JXD2(A), JD6(A), JXD6(A),

HJD6(A),
HJXD6(A), HHJD6, HHJXD6,
SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A), SXD6H
400
J6N3R
126
406364
2412
118
2458
1116
3534
23
LD6(A), LXD6(A), LXD6H,

HLD6(A), HLXD6(A), HHLD6,
CLD6, SCJD6(A), SLD6(A),
SHLD6(A)
600
LD6N3R
127
456364
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,

HMD6, HMXD6, SHMD6,
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6,
HNXD6, SHND6, CMD6,
SCMD6, CND6, SCND6
1200
MND63
210
61964
Neutral
Does
not include circuit breaker.

Order circuit breaker separately.
Neutral not included. Order as separate item from table
on next page.
2634
112332
4034
1814
218
571732
not accept breaker with shunt trip.
Items cannot be ordered seperately. See configuration.
Will
5-79
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WB3100

Enclosures Type 3R
Dimensions
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Figure 4
Fig.
No.
Breaker
Type
Number
of
Poles
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2-H, QJ,
QJH
2
3
Figure 5
Maximun
Current
Rating
Cataloguee
Number
225
WB2225
WB3225
Weight
Lb./Ship.
Package
17
Figure 6
Dimensions (inches)
27
5
55/8
7
103/8
11/16
D
21/4
E
2
F
27/8
Neutrals
Enclosure Neutral
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number

and Wire Range
List
Price $
E2N3R

W53045
CED6N3R
(1 pc.) #142 Cu/Al

Grd. Lug (1 pc.) #148 Cu/Al
246.

(1 pc.) #6350 kcmil
F6N3R N250
259.

JD6N3R W60992 (2 pcs.) #1/0300 kcmil Cu/Al
259.

(2 pcs.) #1/0600 kcmil
LD6N3R W60993
393.

802.

MND63
W63623
Hubs see page 5-82

Does not include circuit breaker. Order circuit
breaker separately.
Neutral not included. Order as separate item from table on next page.
5-80
Neutral included in enclosure.

Use
CED enclosure for all ED-frame 110-125 ampere units.
Items cannot be ordered seperately. See configuration.
G
20
41/8
3
51/8
5/8
L
23/4
41/2

Enclosures Type 12
Number
of
Poles
Maximun
Current
Rating
Weight
Lb./Ship.
Package
12
1858
CED6N12
16
2258
250
F6N12
40
381932
400
J6N12
Fig.
No.
Breaker Type
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6
100
E2N12
CED6
125

HFD6, CFD6
JXD2(A), JD6(A), JXD6(A),
HJD6(A), HJXD6(A),
HHJD6, HHJXD6, SJD6(A),
SHJD6(A)
1
Cataloguee
Number
Dimensions (inches)
MD6, MXD6, SMD6,

HMD6, HMXD6, SHMD6,
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6,
HNXD6, SHND6, CMD6,
SCMD6, CND6, SCND6
1200
811/32
7116
142964
81/8
220
MND612
34
6116
3738
10
1/2
5/8
13
22/32
41
60
253564
1178
45
(L6N12)
18
36
253564
LD6N12
22
104
600
40
23
LD6(A), LXD6(A), HLD6(A),

HLXD6(A), HHLD6, HHLXD6,
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A), CJD6,
CLD6, SCJD6(A), SCLD6(A)
5/8
Dimensions
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 1
Neutrals
Enclosure Neutral
Catalogue
Catalogue
Number
Number

and Wire Range
E2N12

W53045
CED6N12
(1 pc.) #142 Cu/Al

(1 pc.) #142 Cu/Al
246.

F6N12 N250

(1 pc.) #6350 kcmil

259.

J6N12 W60992


(2 pc.) #1/0300 kcmil Cu/Al
259.

L6N12 W60993

(2 pcs.) #1/0600 kcmil

393.

W63623
MND612

802.

oes not include circuit breaker.
D
Order circuit breaker separately.
Neutral not included. Order as separate item.
List
Price $
Figure 4
eutral included in enclosure.

N
Use CED enclosure for all ED-frame 110125
ampere units.
e Items cannot be ordered seperately. See configuration.
5-81

Knockouts & Wire Bending Space

Types 1, 12
Breaker Type
Maximum Cable Sizes

Recommended (Cu/Al)
for Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X,
12 & 12K Enclosures
Top
Bottom
Side
Back
Bottom
Side
Back
34, 1, 114
112, 2, 212, 3
212
78, 118, 138, 134, 2
78, 1 , 1 , 1 , 2
78, 118, 138, 134, 2, 212
(CFD6 only 300 kcmil)
118, 138, 134, 2, 212, 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
JXD2(A), JXD6(A), JD6(A),

HJD6(A), HJXD6(A), HHJD6,
HHJXD6, SJD6(A), SHJD6(A)
112, 2, 212, 3, 312, 4
(2) 500 kcmil
LXD6(A), LD6(A), HLXD6(A),

HLD6(A), HHLD6, HHLXD6,
SLD6(A), SHLD6(A)
112, 2, 212, 3, 312, 4
(2) 500 kcmil
(3) 600 kcmil or

(4) 500 kcmil
QJ
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
18
CED6
HFD6, CFD6
MD6, SMD6, HMD6, ND6,

SND6, HND6
Number of Knockouts Per Panel (type 12 have no KOs)

Maximum
Hub Size
(inches)
Type 3R
BQ, BQH, HBQ

70100A
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Conduit Range
Per Knockout Outside
Dimensions (inches)
Type 3R
38
34
Hubs (Type 3R)

Conduit
Breaker
Size Catalogue
Type
(inches) Number
QP, QPH, HQP, 3/4 ECHR075
BQ, BQH, HBQ,
1
ECHR100
ED2, ED4, ED6,
1/4
ECHR125
HED4, HED6,
11/2
ECHR150
CED6 2
ECHR200
11/4
QPP, QPPH, HQPP, 11/2
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
2
21/2
ECHS125
ECHS150
ECHS200
ECHS250
FXD6-A, FD6-A, HFD6, HFXD6,

CFD6, JXD2(A), JD6(A),
JXD6(A), HJD6(A), HJXD6(A),
LD6(A), LXD6(A), HLD6(A),
HLXD6(A)
ECHV250
ECHV300
ECHV350
ECHV400
21/2
3
31/2
4

1/8" high enclosure provides sufficient wire bending
17
The use of cables larger than those listed below may
space for all available CB lugs.

Sufficient wire bending space is provided for all
available mechanical type CB lugs.
5-82
violate NEC & CSAwire bending space requirements.

The use of compression type connectors will violate
NEC and CSA wire bending space requirements.
Note: Enclosures for 250A max breakers

have a hub provision on the rainshed.
Enclosures for larger breakers (J, L, M
& N frame) have blank top rainsheds.
Drill or punch hole in the field to
accommodate hub size desired.

General
Introduction
The short circuit protection devices of most common electrical distribution systems have interrupting ratings higher than the
respective available fault current. These are known as Fully Rated Systems. Fully rated protection devices are essential for main
or upstream but not essential for branch or downstream devices if the main and branch devices have been tested and approved as
series rated. In instances of a short circuit in a series rated combination, on the load side of the downstream device, the fully rated
upstream device will assist in clearing the fault.
Short circuit devices with higher interrupting ratings are generally more costly than lower rated devices. Installing Series Rated
systems can be economical without compromising system reliability or safety.
Definition of a Series Rated System
Seriers rated systems (Fig.1) have at least two tested and certified seriers connection devices. In the event of a short circuit, on the
load side of the lower interrupting rated downstream device, both devices will operate simultaneously to clear the fault.
Figure 1
Available Fault Current at 600V
CFD6
Main Breaker
(65K AMPS)
(48K AMPS)
5
Definition of a Fully Rated System
Fully rated systems (Fig.2) have protection devices tested to withstand the fault current available at their respective applied location.
Figure 2
CFD6
Main Breaker
(65K AMPS)
(48K AMPS)
CFD6
Feeder Breaker
(65K AMPS)
Standards Guiding Series Rated Combinations

Canadaian standards governing testing of SERIES RATED combinations are: CSA C22.2 No. 29-M1989, C22.2 No. 5-M1989,
C22.2 No. 31-M89. The Canadian Electrical Code rules are covered under section 14-012, Ratings of Protective and Control
Equipment and 14-014, Series rated combinations.
Labeling of equipment containing Series Rated protective devices
A Series Rated system requires appropriate caution labeling indicating that approved series tested devices are the only acceptable
replacement.
5-83
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BQD6
Feeder Breaker
(10K AMPS)

General
Reading the Series Rated combination tables

Identify the application voltage.
Identify the available short circuit current at the point where the breaker is to be applied.
Identify the ampere rating and number of poles for both the upstream and downstream breakers.
Example:
The application voltage is 208V, 3phase, the available short circuit current is 19,000 Amps. The Main breaker is 200A rated and the
Branch breaker is 3 Pole, 100A rated.
From the tables select the voltage greater than and closest to the application voltage. ( 240 )
From the IC column select the current rating greater than and closest to the application short circuit current.
From the Main Breaker column select the type based on the required ampere rating and number of poles.
( QJH2, 200A, 3P ) The Maximum current tested for this type of breaker is 225A.
From the Branch Breaker column select the type based on the required ampere rating and number of poles. In
some cases more than one option may be available. ( QP, BQ, BL )
Main Breaker / Disjoncteur
Ams (Poles)
Type
QP, BQ, BL
22
Max Voltage
(AC/CA)
Type
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Branch Breaker / Disjoncteur de branchement
principal
IC/CI KA
QJH2
60 - 225 (2 & 3)
# PolesA
11
5 - 70
120/240
21
5 - 125
240
36
0 - 100
240
QPF, BQF BLF, QE, BE, BLE1

QT
mps
1, 2
15 - 301
20
15, 20, 401
20/240
This information is of a general nature and is intended for reference purposes only. Although every effort to ensure correctness of
the material, Siemens Canada Limited cannot assume any responsibility for actions taken on the basis of the content herein.
Diagram for the above example:
Figure 3
QJH2
Main Breaker
(10K AMPS)
QP, BQ, BL
Feeder Breaker
5-84

General
Max
Branch Breaker
Main Breaker
Voltage
IC/CI KA
Type
Ams (Poles)
Type
QP, BQ, BL
22
QPH, BQH, BLH
15-70 (1), 15-125 (2),

15-100 (3)
QE, BLE, QPF, BLF

QE, BLE, QPF, BQF, BLF
QT
QPPH
125 - 225 (2)
120
120/240
120/240
QPH, BQH, BLH
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
LXD6-A
450 - 600 (2 & 3)
120
120/240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
60 - 100
240
15 - 70
120/240
120/240
15 - 125
15 - 100
240
15 - 60
120/240
2, 3
60 - 225
240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
QPF, BQF, BLF, QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QEH, BLEH,

QE, BLE, BE
QEH, BLEH, QE, QPHF, BLHF, BLE, QPF, BLF
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
1, 2
15 - 40
120
125 - 200
120/240
15 - 70
120
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
ED2
1, 2, 3
15 - 100
120/240
QT
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QPF, BQF, BLF, QE, QEH,

BLEH, BE, BLE
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
240
15 - 100
2, 3
60 - 225
240
QPPH
125 - 225
120/240
15 - 70
120/240
QPH, BQH, BLH
15 - 125
120/240
240
QPH, BQH, BLH

QJ2H, QJH2
65
15 - 30
15, 20, 40
QPH, BQH, BLH

QJ2H, QJH2
15 - 100
2, 3
60 - 225
240
15 - 70
120/240
120/240
15 - 125
15 - 100
240
2, 3
60 - 225
240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
2, 3
60 - 225
240
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LD6-A
1
1, 2
QJ2H, QJH2
65
240
240
240
70 - 250 (2 & 3)
200 - 400 (2 & 3)
15 - 125
60 - 100
65
2
3
QPF, BQF, BLF, BE, QFHF, BQHF, BLHF, QEH,

BLEH, QE, BLE
QJ2H, QJ2, QJH2
JXD2-A, JD6-A, JXD6A
120/240
120/240
QP, BQ, BL, QPH, BQH, BLH

FD6-A, FXD6-A
15 - 70
15 - 100
65
120/240
15 - 100
QPPH, QPP
ED4, ED6
125 - 200
15, 20, 40
QT
65
2
1, 2
QT
15 - 100 (1), 15 - 125

(2 & 3)
120
120/240
15 - 60
125 - 225 (2)
15 - 30
15, 20, 40
HQPP
2
1, 2
QE, BLE, BE, QPF, BLF
QJH2
65
120/240
120/240
QE, BLE, BE, QPF, BLF
HQP, HBQ, HBL
15 - 60
15 - 30
QP, BQ, BL
65
240
QT
15-70 (1), 15-125 (2),

15-100 (3)
15-100
QE, BLE, BE, QPF, BQF, BLF
60 - 225 (2 & 3)
60 - 225 (2 & 3)
120/240
120/240
QPF, BQF BLF, QE, BE, BLE
QJ2H
15 -125
15 -70
QP, BQ, BL
42
120/240
15 -125
QT
QJH2
(AC/CA)
15 -70
QPP
22
Amps
QP, BQ, BL
22
# Poles
5-85

Main Breaker
General
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
65
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A,
HLD6-A, HLXD6-A,
HMD6, HMXD6, HND6,
HNXD6, HPD6,
HPXD6, HRD6, HRXD6
SJD6-A, SLD6-A,
SMD6, SND6, SPD6
65
100
MD6, MXD6, ND6,

NXD6, PD6, PXD6,
RD6, RXD6
HED4
Ams (Poles)
200 - 2000 (2 &3)
200 - 1600 (2 &3)
500 - 2000 (2 & 3)

15 - 100 (1)
Type
QPH
QPH, BQH, BLH
QPH, BQH, BLH

ED2, ED4
QP, BQ, BL, QPH, BQH, BLH, HQP, HBQ, HBL
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
100
100
HED4, HED6
HED4
15 - 125 (2 & 3)
15 - 100 (1)
QEH, BLEH, QE, BE, QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QPF,

BLF, BQF, BLE
QEH, BLEH, QPHF, BLHF,QPF, BLF, QE, BLE
HQPPH
125 - 225 (2)
Amps
(AC/CA)
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 - 70
120/240
120/240
15 - 125
15 - 100
240
15 - 70
120/240
120/240
15 - 125
15 - 100
240
15 - 100
120
15 - 70
120
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 -30
120
15 - 60
120/240
ED2
1, 2, 3
15 - 100
120/240
ED4
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
QT
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
15 - 100
120
15 - 70
120/240
ED2, ED4
100
# Poles
HQPP, QPPH, QPP

BQF, BLF, BLE
QT
15 - 125
120/240
125 - 225
120/240
15 - 30
120
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
15 - 25
120/240
35 - 70
120/240
15 - 25
120/240
35 - 125
120/240
1
QP, BQ, BL
100
HQJ2H
60 - 225 (2 & 3)
QPH, BQH, BLH, HQP, HBQ, HBL

BQF, BLF, BLE
QEH, BLEH, QPHF, BLHF,QE, BLE, QPF, BLF
100
100
HFD6, HFXD6
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A,
SHJD6-A
70 - 250 (2 & 3)
200 - 400 (2 & 3)
5-86
HLD6-A
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
15 - 100
240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
QT
15 - 50
120/240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 -250
240
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H
2, 3
60 - 225
240
HQPP, QPPH, QPP
125 - 225
120/240
QE, BE, BLE, QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QPF, BQF, BLF,

QEH, BLEH
QPF, BLF, QE, BLE, QPHF, BLHF, QEH, BLEH
ED4
QT
1, 2
15 - 30
120/240
ED4
15 - 100
120/240
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
120/240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
120/240
JD6-A, JXD6-A, JXD2-A, SJD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
120/240
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
ED4
100

Main Breaker
General
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
100
100
100
HLXD6-A
SHLD6-A
HMD6, HMXD6
(AC/CA)
200 - 600
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
ED4
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
450 - 600 (2 & 3)
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
ED4
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
300 - 600 (3)
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
ED4
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
500 - 800 (2 & 3)
240
2, 3
200 -400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
2, 3
500 -800
240
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 800
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 600
240
ND6, NXD6, SND6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 600
240
ND6, NXD6, SND6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
15 -100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 800
240
ND6, NXD6, SND6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
PD6, PXD6, SPD6
2, 3
1200 - 1600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6

ED4
100
100
SHMD6
HND6, HNXD6
500 - 800 (3)
500 - 1200 (2 & 3)
ED4
100
SHND6
500 - 1200 (2 & 3)
ED4
100
100
HPD6, HPXD6, SHPD
HPD6, HPXD6, SHPD
1200 - 1600 (3)
1200 - 1600 (3)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Amps
2, 3
Type
100
HLD6-A
# Poles
LD6-A
Ams (Poles)
5-87

Main Breaker
General
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
# Poles
Amps
(AC/CA)
15 -100
120
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 800
240
ND6, NXD6, SND6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
PD6, PXD6, SPD6
2, 3
1200 - 1600
240
RD6, RXD6
2, 3
1600 - 2000
240
15 - 70
120/240
Ams (Poles)
Type
ED4
100
HRD6, HRXD6
1600 - 2000 (3)
200
CED6
15 - 125 (2 & 3)
QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QPF, BQF, BLF, QEH, QE,

BE, BLEH
QEH, BLEH, QPHF, BLHF, QPF, BLF, QE, BLE
ED4, HED4
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
CJD6
200 - 400 (2 & 3)
200
200
CLD6
CMD6
SCMD6
450 - 600 (2 & 3)
500 - 800 (2 & 3)
500 - 800 (3)
200
CND6
900 - 1200 (2 & 3)
200
CND6
900 - 1200 (2 & 3)
5-88
120/240
120
240
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
15 - 70
120/240
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
240
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
1, 2, 3
15 - 100
120/240
15 - 100
120
ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A, HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
240
QJ2H, QJH2, QJ2
2, 3
60 - 225
240
125 - 225
120/240
QT
1, 2
15 - 40
120/240
2, 3
70 - 250
240
100 - 125
120/240
ED2
100
240
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
240
2, 3
70 - 250
240
JXD2-A, JD6-A, JXD6-A, HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
240
QT
1, 2
15 - 30
120/240
100 - 125
120/240
100
240
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 25
120/240
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A, HJXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
QT
1,2
15 - 30
120/240
2, 3
15 - 125
240
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
MD6, MXD6, HMD6, HMXD6
2, 3
500 - 800
240
2, 3
500 - 800
240
2, 3
15 - 125
240

LD6-A, HLD6-A
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6, HNXD6
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
70 - 250
200 - 400
200 - 600
450 - 600
500 - 800
500 - 1200
240
240
240
240
240
240
200
15 - 60
QT

200
120
15 - 125
QPPH, QPP
200
15 - 30
15 - 100
HED4, ED4
HHJD6, HHJXD6,
HHLD6, HHLXD6
240
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
70 - 250 (2 & 3)
120/240
2, 3
QPHF, BQHF, BLHF, QE, BE, BLE, QPF, BQF, BLF,

QEH, BLEH
QPHF, BLHF, QE, BLE, QPF, BLF, QEH, BLEH
CFD6
15 - 125
15 - 100
200
2
3

General
Main Breaker
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
200
200
65
65
65
SCND6
CPD6
J, R
# Poles
Amps
(AC/CA)
MD6, HMD6, HMXD6, MXD6, SHMD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 800
240
ND6, HND6, SHND6, NXD6, HNXD6, SND6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
2, 3
500 - 800
240
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6, HNXD6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
15-70
120/240
120/240
Ams (Poles)
900 - 1200 (3)
1200 - 1600 (3)
15 - 600 (1, 2, 3)
15 - 1200 (1, 2, 3)
601 - 6000 (1, 2, 3)
Type
QPH, BQH, BLH
QPH, BQH, BLH
QPH, BQH, BLH

QP, BQ, BL
T (300 V)
15-200 (1, 2, 3)
15 - 600 (2, 3)
70 - 600 (2, 3)
100
J, R
200 - 600 (2, 3)
200
T, J
200
J, R
200
15-70
120/240
120/240
15-125
15 - 100
240
1, 2, 3
15 - 125
120/240
240
HQP, HBQ, HBL, QPH, BQH, BLH
15 - 100
15 - 30
120
15 - 60
120/240
QT
1, 2
15 - 50
120/240
1, 2
15 - 125
120/240
15 - 100
120
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
240
ED4, HED4
450 - 600 (2, 3)
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
15 - 100
120/240
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FXD6-A, FD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
300 - 600
240
450 - 1200 (2, 3)
ED4, HED4
SLD6-A
601 - 6000
(2, 3)
15 - 100
120/240
2, 3
15 - 125
240
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
200 - 400
240
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
240
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
240
SLD6-A
300 - 600
240
SMD6
500 - 800
240
SND6
500 - 1200
240
PD6, PXD6, SPD6
1200 - 1600
240
RD6, RXD6
R
240
QPF, BQF, BLF, QE, BE, BLE, QEH, BLEH, BLHF,

QPHF, BQHF,
ED4, HED4
200
15-125
15 - 100
300 - 600
300 - 1200 (3)
120/240
2
3
200 - 1200 (2, 3)
100
120/240
SLD6-A
70 - 1200 (2, 3)
T
15-70
300 - 600 (3)
15 - 1200 (2, 3)
100
240
1600 - 2000
240
125 - 200 (2, 3)
QJH2, QJ2H, QJ2
2, 3
125 - 200
240
125 - 600 (2, 3)
QJH2, QJ2H
2, 3
125 - 225
240
125 - 400 (2, 3)
QJ2
2, 3
125 - 225
240
70 - 600 (2, 3)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
240
70 - 1200 (2, 3)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
240
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
15 - 600 (1, 2, 3)
15-125
15 - 100
100
2
3
5-89

Main Breaker
General
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
200
# Poles
Amps
(AC/CA)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
240
2, 3
500 - 800
240
ND6, NXD6, HND6, HNXD6
2, 3
500 - 1200
240
1, 2, 3
15 - 100
277
15 - 100
277
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
480
ED4
2,3
15-100
1, 2, 3
15,100
277
15 - 100
480
ED4, ED6
2, 3
15 - 125
480
HED4
2, 3
15 - 50
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A, SJD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A,
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
SJD6-A
200 - 400
480
SLD6-A
400 - 600
480
BQD, CQD
1, 2, 3
15 - 100
480
ED4, HED4
15 - 100
277
Ams (Poles)
601 - 6000 (2, 3)
Type
BQD, CQD
30
35
HED6
15 - 125 (2 & 3)
JD6, JXD6
200-400 (2 & 3)
LD6
200-600 (2 & 3)
LXD6
450-600 (2 & 3)
ED4
277
277
BQD, CQD
42
HED4
15 - 125 (2 & 3)
50
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
200-400 (2 & 3)
50
HLD6-A, HLXD6-A
200-600 (2 & 3)
MD6, MXD6
500-800 (2 & 3)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
50
50
50
50
50
ND6, NXD6
SMD6
SND6
SPD6
500-1200 (2 & 3)
500 - 800 (3)
500 - 1200 (3)
1200 - 1600 (3)
1400 - 1600 (3)
50
50
65
PD6, PXD6
RD6, RXD6
HFD6, HFXD6
1200 - 1600 (3)
1800 - 2000 (3)
70 - 250 (2 & 3)
ED4

HED4, ED4
65
5-90
HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
200 - 400 (2 & 3)
277
2, 3
15 - 125
480
15 - 100
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480

General
Main Breaker
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
# Poles
Amps
(AC/CA)
15 - 100
277
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
15 - 100
277
Ams (Poles)
Type
ED4, HED4
65
HLD6-A
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
ED4, HED4
65
65
65
65
HND6, HNXD6
HRD6, HRXD6
HHJXD6, HHJD6,
HHLD6, HHLXD6
CMD6
500 - 800 (2 & 3)
500 - 1200 (2 & 3)
1800 - 2000 (3)
200 - 600 (2 & 3)
500 - 800 (3)
100
SCMD
500 - 800 (3)
100
SCND6
900 - 1200 (3)
100
100
CND6
CPD6
1200 (3)
1200 - 1600 (3)
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
MD6, MXD6, SMD6
2, 3
500 - 800
480
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A
2, 3
450-600
480
15 - 100
277
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, HJD6-A, JXD6-A, HJXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
2, 3
500 - 800
480
HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, JXD6-A, HJD6-A, HJXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
2, 3
500 - 800
480
2, 3
500 - 1200
480
2, 3
70 - 250
480
15 - 100
277
480
ED4
150
CJD6
200 - 400 (2 & 3)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
2, 3
200 - 400
480
15 - 100
277
ED4
150
CLD6
450 - 600 (2 & 3)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
JD6-A, HJD6-A, JXD6-A, HJXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
15 - 100
480
BQD, CQD
200
CED6
15 - 125 (2 & 3)
ED4, HED4
CFD6
70 - 250 (2 & 3)
20 - 30
480
15 - 100
277
2, 3
15 - 125
480
15 - 100
480
2, 3
20 - 30
480
2, 3
15 - 50
480
15 - 100
277
HED4, HED6
2, 3
15 - 125
480
2, 3
70 - 250
480
BQD, CQD
200
2, 3
ED4, ED6
ED4, HED4
60 - 400 (1, 2, 3)
ED4
60 - 100
277
480
50
15 - 400 (2, 3)
ED4
2, 3
15 - 100
100
15 - 400 (1, 2, 3)
ED4
15 - 50
277
100
T, J
70 - 600 (2, 3)
FD6-A, FXD6-A
2, 3
70 - 250
480
100
J, R
70 - 600 (2, 3)
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
100
HMD6, HMXD6
450 - 600 (2 & 3)
100
HLXD6-A
5-91

Main Breaker
General
Max
Branch Breaker
IC/CI KA
Voltage
Type
100
T, J, R
# Poles
Amps
(AC/CA)
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A, HLD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
450 - 600 (2, 3)
LXD6-A,
2, 3
450 - 600
480
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
200 - 400
480
LD6-A, HLD6-A
2, 3
200 - 600
480
LXD6-A, HLXD6-A
2, 3
450 - 600
480
HFD6, HFXD6
2, 3
70 - 250
480
2, 3
500 - 800
480
2, 3
500 - 1200
480
1200 - 1600
480
480
Ams (Poles)
200 - 600 (2, 3)
100
70 - 1200 (2, 3)
100
T, L
601 - 1200 (2, 3)
100
601 - 6000 (2, 3)
Type
PD6, HPD6, HPXD6

R
15 - 100 (1, 2, 3)
BQD, CQD
T, J
15 - 200 (1, 2, 3)
BQD, CQD
ED6, HED6
15 -125 (1, 2, 3)
BQD6,CQD6
ED6, HED6
15 -125 (2, 3)
BQD6,CQD6
200
18
BQD6, CQD6
25
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
15 - 100
20 - 30
480
15 - 100
480
2,3
20 - 30
480
15 - 70
347
2, 3
15 - 70
347/600
15 - 70
347
BQD6, CQD6, ED6, HED6
2, 3
15 - 70
347/600
ED6, HED6
2, 3
15 - 125
347/600
HFD6
2, 3
70 - 250
347/600
70
600
HFD6
70 - 250 (2, 3)
HJD6, HJXD6
200 - 400 (2, 3)
HLD6, HLXD6
450 - 600 (2, 3)
HMD6, HMXD6
500 - 800 (2, 3)
JD6, JXD6
HND6
500 - 1200 (2, 3)
HJD6, HJXD6
HNXD6
900 - 1200 (2, 3)
35
1
2, 3
HFD6
50
65
CFD6
70 - 250 (2, 3)
200 - 400
600
200 - 400
600
LD6, HLD6
200 - 600
600
LXD6, HLXD6
450 - 600
600
15 - 70
347/600
15 - 125
600
BQD6,CQD6
ED6, HED6
2, 3
2, 3
HFD6
CMD6
65
500 - 800 (2, 3)
JD6, JXD6
2, 3
900 - 1200 (2,3)
HJD6, HJXD6
200 - 400
600
1200 - 1600 (2,3)
LD6, HLD6
200 - 600
600
LXD6, HLXD6
450 - 600
600
70
600
200 - 400
600
200 - 400
600
LD6, HLD6
200 - 600
600
LXD6, HLXD6
450 - 600
600
HPD6, HPXD6
CED6
1200 - 1600 (2, 3)
15 - 125 (2, 3)
HJD6, HJXD6
BQD6,CQD6
ED6, HED6
BQD6,CQD6
100
CFD6
70 -250 (2, 3)
ED6, HED6
HFD6
2, 3
15 - 70
347
15 - 70
347/600
15 - 70
347/600
2, 3
15 - 125
600
15 - 70
347
15 - 125
600
70 - 250
600
200 - 400
600
200 - 600
600
450 - 600
600
2, 3
JD6, JXD6
100
J,R,T
200 - 600 (2, 3)
HJD6, HJXD6
LD6, HLD6
LXD6, HLXD6
5-92
600
CPD6
JD6, JXD6
100
600
200 - 400
CND6
HFD6
65
70
2, 3

Reference
Note: The information provided on this and the next page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several
variables can act on a circuit breakers performance at the same time, the data below is based less on controlled testing, than
on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment.
Reference
Ampere
Rating at
40 C (104 F)
0015
0020
0025
0030
0035
0040
0050
0060
0070
0090
0100
0125
0150
0175
0200
0225
0250
0300
0350
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
Ampere Rating at:

25 C
50 C
(77 F)
(122 F)
0017
0013
0022
0018
0028
0023
0033
0028
0039
0030
0044
0037
0055
0046
0066
0056
0077
0065
0099
0084
0110
0094
0137
0114
0165
0136
0192
0159
0220
0182
0247
0205
0275
0235
0330
0276
0385
0325
0440
0372
0550
0468
0660
0564
0770
0658
0880
0754
0990
0828
1100
0900
1320
1090
1540
1304
1760
1500
1980
1690
2200
1880
60 C
(140 F)
0011
0016
0021
0026
0025
0034
0042
0052
0060
0078
0087
0100
0120
0140
0160
0180
0220
0252
0301
0340
0435
0525
0613
0704
0749
0825
1000
1148
1320
1485
1650
Siemens Breaker Frames
ED
QJ
FD
JD
LD
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MD
ND
PD
RD
13,000 (4,000)
Altitude in Feet (Meters)
Table 1 Temperature Derating Data for Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
High Ambient Temperatures

Because thermal-magnetic trip breakers
are temperature sensitive and calibrated
for a specific ambient of 40 C (104 F)
(average enclosure temperature),
a higher ambient will cause the
breaker to trip at lower current than
its nameplate rating, in other words,
causing the breaker to derate (see
Table 1). Similarly, the current carrying
capacity of a circuit conductor is based
upon a certain ambient temperature, a
higher ambient will reduce its current
carrying capacity, causing it to derate.
Thus, with a fluctuating temperature,
a thermal-magnetic breaker will derate
nearly parallel with its connected circuit
conductors and maintain close circuit
protection. If the application temperature
exceeds 40 C (104 F) and is known,
either a breaker specially calibrated for
the higher ambient or one oversized
according to Table 1 may be selected.
In a case such as this, the circuit
conductors should be oversized as well.
Siemens Sensitrip III and Type SB
Encased Systems Breakers are
insensitive to temperature changes.
However, they do include circuitry to
protect the components from abnormally
high temperatures.
Moisture Corrosion
For atmospheres having high moisture
content and / or where fungus growth is
prevalent, a special preventive treatment
may be required.
Where the air is heavily laden with
corrosive elements, breakers made with
special corrosion-resistant finishes
may be required.
Altitude
Reduced air density at altitudes greater
than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the
ability of a molded case circuit breaker
to transfer heat and interrupt faults.
Therefore, circuit breakers applied at
these altitudes should have interrupting,
insulation and continuous currents
derated as indicated in Figure 1.
12,000 (3,675)
11,000 (3,350)
10,000 (3,000)
9,000 (2,750)
8,000 (2,400)
7,000 (2,100)
6,000 (1,800)
1.0
.95
.90
.85
.80
.75
Rating Correction Factor
Figure 1 Altitude Adjustment
5-93

Reference
400 Hz Systems a
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Siemens molded case circuit breakers

can be applied for overcurrent protection
on 400Hz systems, commonly used to
power computer installations, aircraft,
military and other specialty equipment.
Below are basic guidelines.
Circuit Breaker Derating Required
This table lists the maximum continuous
current carrying capacity for Siemens
breakers at 400Hz. Due to the increased
resistance of the copper sections
resulting from the skin effect produced
by eddy currents at these frequencies,
circuit breakers in many cases require
derating. The thermal derating on
these devices is based upon 100%,
three-phase application in open air in
a maximum of 40 C (104 F) with 48
in. (1219 mm) of the specified cable or
bus at the line and load side. Additional
derating of not less than 20% will be
required if the circuit breaker is to be
utilized in an enclosure. Further derating
may be required if the enclosure
ambient temperature exceeds 40 C

(104 F).
Cable and Bus Sizing
The cable and bus sizes to be utilized
at 400Hz are not based on standard
National Electric Codes tables for 60Hz
application. Larger cross sections
are necessary at 400Hz. All bus bars
specified are based upon mounting
the bars in the vertical plane to allow
maximum air flow. All bus bars are
spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in.
(6mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in
the horizontal plane will necessitate
additional drafting. Edgewise orientation
of the bus may change the maximum
ratings indicated. If additional information
is required for other connections of cable
or bus, contact Siemens for information.
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that temperatures be
measured on the line and load terminals
or T-connectors of the center pole. These
are usually the hottest terminals with a

balanced load. A maximum temperature
of 75 C (35 C over a maximum ambient
of 40 C) would verify the particular
application. Temperature profiles taken
on these breakers can be correlated to
ensure that the hottest points within
the breaker are within the required
temperature limits.
Factory Configuration
When required, molded case circuit
breakers may be factory calibrated for
400Hz application. These breakers are
specially labeled for 400Hz usage and
their nameplate current rating will
include the necessary derating factory.
The highest Maximum Continuous
Amperes rating at 400Hz, found in the
table below approximates the highest
specially calibrated 400Hz nameplate
ampere rating available for a given
frame size. Contact Siemens for
ordering information on other breakers
applied in 400Hz systems.
400Hz Breakers
Siemens
Breaker
Type
ED2, ED4,
ED6, HED4,
CED6
FD6, FXD6,
HFD6, HFXD6,
CFD6
JXD2, JD6,
JXD6, HJD6,
HJXD6, HHJD6,
HHJXD6, CJD6
JD6, JXD6,
HJD6, HJXD6
100% Rated
aThe
Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating

At 40C (104F) b
60HZ
400HZ
Enclosed
Open Air
Open Air c
After Derating
015
015
012
020
020
016
025
025
020
030
030
024
035
035
028
040
040
032
045
043
034
050
048
038
060
057
046
070
067
054
080
076
061
090
086
069
100
095
076
110
105
084
125
119
095
070
063
050
080
072
058
090
080
064
100
090
072
110
095
075
125
105
084
150
125
100
175
140
112
200
160
128
225
180
144
250
200
160
200
170
136
225
190
152
250
210
168
300
240
192
350
260
208
400
300
240
200
170
170
225
190
190
250
210
210
300
240
240
350
260
260
400
300
300
information provided on this page is intended for

reference and recommendation only. Because several
variables can act on a circuit breakers performance at
the same time, the data above is based less on
5-94
75 C (167 F)
Copper
Cable per Pole
No of
Wire
Pieces
Size
1
#14
1
#12
1
#10
1
#10
1
#10
1
#8
1
#8
1
#8
1
#6
1
#4
1
#4
1
#3
1
#3
1
#2
1
#1
1
#4
1
#4
1
#3
1
#3
1
#2
1
#1
1
#1/0
1
#2/0
1
#3/0
1
#4/0
1
250 kcmil
1
#3/0
1
#4/0
1
250 kcmil
1
350 kcmil
1
500 kcmil
2
#3/0
2
#3/0
2
#4/0
1
250 kcmil
1
350 kcmil
1
500 kcmil
2
#3/0
Siemens
Breaker
Type
LD6, LXD6,
HLD6, HLXD6,
HHLD6,
HHLXD6,
CLD6
LD6, LXD6,
HLD6, HLXD6,
100% Rated
MD6, MXD6,
HMD6,
HMXD6, CMD6
MD6, MXD6,
HMD6,
HMXD6, CMD6
100% Rated
ND6, NXD6
HND6, HNXD6,
CND6
ND6, NXD6
HND6, HNXD6,
CND6
PD6, PXD6,
HPD6, HPXD6,
CPD6,
100% Rated
PD6, PXD6,
HPD6, HPXD6,
CPD6
RD6, RXD6,
HRD6, HRXD6
80% Rated
Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating

At 40 C (104 F) b
60HZ
400/415HZ
Enclosed
Open Air
Open Air c
After Derating
0250
0210
168
0300
0240
192
0350
0260
208
0400
0300
240
0450
0340
272
0500
0375
300
0600
0420
336
0250
0210
210
0300
0240
240
0350
0260
260
0400
0300
300
0450
0340
340
0500
0375
375
0600
0420
420
0500
0400
320
0600
0430
360
0700
0500
400
0800
0560
448
0500
0400
400
0600
0430
430
0700
0500
500
0800
0560
560
0800
0560
448
0900
0600
480
1000
0650
520
1200
0780
624
0900
0600
600
1000
0650
650
1200
0780
780
1200
0780
624
1400
0850
680
1600
0960
768
1200
0780
780
1400
0850
850
1600
0960
960
1600
0960
768
1800
1080
864
2000
1200
960
controlled testing, than on experience and engineering

judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on
special conditions and treatment.
bAdditional derating may be required if the ambient
temperature is greater than 40C (104F).
cCalculated
75 C (167 F)
Copper
Cable per Pole
No of
Wire
Pieces
Size
1
250 kcmil
1
350 kcmil
1
500 kcmil
2
#3/0
2
#4/0
2
250 kcmil
2
350 kcmil
1
250 kcmil
1
350 kcmil
1
500 kcmil
2
#3/0
2
#4/0
2
250 kcmil
2
350 kcmil
2
250 kcmil
2
350 kcmil
3
250 kcmil
3
300 kcmil
2
250 kcmil
2
350 kcmil
3
250 kcmil
3
300 kcmil
3
300 kcmil
3
350 kcmil
3
400 kcmil
4
350 kcmil
3
350 kcmil
3
400 kcmil
4
350 kcmil
4
400 kcmil
4
500 kcmil
5
500 kcmil
4
400 kcmil
4
500 kcmil
5
500 kcmil
5
500 kcmil
5
500 kcmil
6
500 kcmil
after derating to compensate for the heating

of the copper conductor, caused by the skin effect
generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415HZ.

Typical Specifications
Reference
Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse
time and instantaneous tripping characteristics and shall be Siemens Sentron,
Sensitrip or approved equal.
All circuit breakers shall be CSA Certified and conform to applicable requirements of
NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1.
All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break over center toggle type
mechanism and the handle mechanism shall be trip free to prevent holding contacts
closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall
assume a position between ON and OFF when tripped automatically. Multipole circuit breakers shall be common-trip such that an overload or short circuit
on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Arc extinction is to
be accomplished by magnetic arc chutes. All ratings are to be clearly visible. When
reverse feed is indicated on the drawings, in accordance with CSA, circuit breakers
with sealed trip units shall be supplied.
Solid State Sensing Specifications

As indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker frames 400
Ampere through 3200-Ampere shall have microprocessorbased RMS sensing trip units, with the capability to
measure through to the 21st harmonic. Automatic
operation of all circuit breaker frames 400A and larger
shall be obtained by means of solid state tripping elements
providing inverse time delay and (instantaneous) and/or
(short-time delay) circuit protection. Continuous current
ratings shall be adjustable from 20% to 100% of the trip
unit rating, without the need for a rating plug. Long-time
delay and instantaneous trip shall be adjustable. The
optional short-time trip function shall have adjustable
pick-up settings, three fixed times, and I2t ramp. Circuit
breaker frames 400A and larger, and where indicated on the
drawings, shall be 100% equipment rated.
Thermal Magnetic Specifications
Where indicated on the drawings and in the combination motor starter/motor control
center schedule, furnish instantaneous magnetic trip only circuit breakers for motor
short circuit protection. The magnetic trips shall be adjustable and accessible from the
front of all circuit breakers frames. The continuous current rating shall be between 1
and 800 Amperes as indicated on the drawing.
Main and feeder circuit breakers, as indicated on the

drawings, shall be provided with integral ground fault
protection. Ground fault pick-up shall be adjustable from
20% to 70% of the circuit breakers maximum continuous
current rating. Ground fault time delay shall be adjustable
with three 12t ramps.
Metering Option
When indicated on the drawings, solid state trip breakers
shall be furnished with a plug-in or panel mounted metering
device. This device shall simultaneously display all three
phase currents, as well as average current, ground current,
and phase unbalance. In addition it shall display breaker
status, a max log, and a trip log. The trip log will retain and
display date, time and type of trip (overload, short circuit or
ground fault) for the most recent 5 trip events.
Current Limiting Specifications
The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be as indicated in the specifications, and
shown on the drawing or single line diagram. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers
shall be at least equal to the available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit
breaker and correspond to the CSA Certified integrated short circuit current rating specified.
Where indicated on the drawings, Siemens current limiting

circuit breakers are to be furnished. Current limiting
circuit breakers shall limit the let-through I2t to a value
less than the I2t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any fusible elements when
operating within its current range.
Series Connected Combination Specifications

Where protective devices are applied in series combination,
such that the prospective available fault current exceeds
the interrupting rating (AIR) of the downstream protective
devices, such combinations shall be CSA Certified
combinations. All electrical equipment using these CSA
Certified circuit breaker combinations shall be clearly marked.
Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract
drawings. Gold plated auxiliary switches shall be supplied for PLC connection.
Internal accessories for all breakers shall be CSA Certified for field installation and
modification.
Connection Accessories
Unless otherwise noted, Mechanical lugs shall be provided with all Molded Case
Breakers. Where indicated on the drawings, compression lugs shall be provided on
1200 Ampere frame and below circuit breakers. All compression lugs shall be supplied
by the Circuit Breaker Manufacturer. Where indicated on the drawings, CSA Certified
plug-in or rear connectors shall be supplied.
5-95
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Integral Ground
Fault Option
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all Circuit breakers 2000 Ampere and below
shall have thermal-magnetic trip units, with inverse time-current characteristics.
Automatic operation of these circuit breakers shall be obtained by means of thermalmagnetic tripping devices located in each pole providing inverse time delay and
instantaneous circuit protection. Circuit breakers shall be ambient compensating in
that, as the ambient temperature increases over 40C, the circuit breaker automatically
derates itself so as to better protect its associated conductor. Thermal magnetic
breakers from 250 to 2000A frames shall have thermal interchangeable trip units, with
instantaneous magnetic trip settings that are adjustable and accessible from the front
of all circuit breakers on frame sizes 250 Amperes and above. Where indicated, provide
circuit breakers CSA Certified for application at 100% of their continuous ampere
rating in their intended enclosure.
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Superseded Breakers
Reference
Sentron Series
Note
Superseded
Note
Superseded
CED62B015-CED62B125
CED62S100A
CED63A001-CED63A125
CED63B015-CED63B125
CED63S100A
-
CLE62B015-CLE62B100
CLE62S100
CLE63A001-CLE63A125
CLE63B015-CLE63B100
CLE63S100
HHED62B015-HHED62B125
CE2B015-CE2B100
CE2S100
CE3B015-CEB100
CE3S100
HED62B015-HED62B125
HED63B015-HED63B125
CFD62A150, CFD62L150, CFD62A250

CFD62B070-CFD62B250
CFD62S250A
CFD63A150, CFD63L150, CFD63A250
CFD63B070-CFD63B250
CFD63S250A
CJD62B200-CJD62B400
CJD62H400, CJD62L400
CJD62S400A
CJD63B200-CJD63B400
CJD63H400, CJD63L400
CJD63S400A
CPD63B120-CPD63B160
CP3B120-CP3B160
ED21B015-ED21B100
ED22B015-ED22B100
ED22S100A
ED23B015-ED23B100
ED23S100A
E21B015-E21B100
E22B015-E22B100
E22S100A
E23B015-E23B100
E23S100A
ED41B015-ED41B100
ED42B015-ED42B125
ED42S100A
ED43B015-ED43B125
ED43S100A
E41B015-E41B100
E42B015-E42B100
E42S100
E43B015-E43B100
E43S100
ED61B015-ED61B100
ED62B015-ED62B125
ED62S100A
ED63A001-ED63A125
ED63B015-ED63B125
ED63S100A
CED62B015-CED62B125
CED62B015-CED62B125
E61B015-E61B100
E62B015-E62B100
E62S100A
E63A001-E63A125
E63B015-E63B100
E63S100A
FD62B070-FD62B250
FD63B070-FD63B250
FXD62A150, FXD62L150, FXD62A250

FXD62B070-FXD62B250
FXD62S250A
FXD63A150, FXD63L150, FXD63A250
FXD63B070-FXD63B250
FXD63S250A
HED41B015-HED41B100
HED42B015-HED42B125
HED43B015-HED43B125
CED62B015-CED62B125
CED63B015-CED63B125
HFD62B070-HFD62B250
HFD63B070-HFD63B250
CED62B015-CED62B125
CED63B015-CED63B125
HJD63B200-HJD63B400
HJ63B200-HJ63B400
HJ3B125-HJ3B400
HLD63B250-HLD63B600
HL63B450-HL63B600
HL3B450-HL3B600
HMD63B500-HMD63B800
HN3B500-HN3B800
HND63B100-HND63B120
HK3B100-HK3B120
HPD63B120-HPD63B160
HP3B120-HP3B160
HRD63B160-HRD63B200
HR3B160-HR3B200
5-96
CLJ62B100-CLJ62B400
CLJ62L400, CLJ62H400
CLJ62S400
CLJ63B200-CLJ63B400
CLJ63L400, CLJ63H400
CLJ63S400
CJ2B125-CJ2B250
CJ3B125-CJ3B250
CJ2B300-CJ2B400
CJ2S400
CJ3B300-CJ3B400
CJ3S400
EE1B015-EE1B100
EE2B015-EE2B100
EE2S100
EE3B015-EE3B100
EE3S100
EH1B015-EH1B100
EH2B015-ED2B125
EH2S100
EH3B015-EH3B100
EH3S100
EF1B015-EF1B020
EF2B015-EF2B100
EF2S100
EF3A003, EF3J050, EF3L050-EF3A100, EF3H1
EF3B015-EF3B100
EF3S100
HED62B015-HED62B125
HED63B015-HED63B125
F62B070, F62B250
F63B070-F63B250
FJ62A150, FJ62L150-FJ62A250
FJ62B070-FJ62B250
FJ62S250
FJ63A150, FJ63L150-FJ63A250
FJ63B070-FJ63B250
FJ63S250
FJ2B070-FJ2B225
FJ2S225
FJ3A225
FJ3B070-FJ3B225
FJ3S225
HE41B015-HE41B100
HE42B015-HE42B100
HE43B015-HE43B100
HED61B015-HED61B100
HED62B015-HED62B125
HED63B015-HED63B125
Mechanically and electrically interchangeable.

Electrically interchangeable only, refer to sales office for
further details.
c Electrically interchangeable only if the system
interrupting capacity is less than or equal to:

200 kA at 240V AC
200 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC
CLF62A150, CLF62A250
CLF62B070-CLF62B240
CLF62S250
CLF63A150, CLF63A250
CLF63B070-CLF63B250
CLF63S250
HE61B015-HE61B100
HE62B015-HE62B110 or (HE2B015-HE2B100)
HE63B015-HE63B100 or (HE3B015-HE3B100)
HF62B070-HF62B250
HF63B070-HF63B250
HED62B015-HED62B125
HED63B015-HED63B125
Electrically interchangeable only if the system


200 kA at 240V AC
150 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC
e Refer to local sales office for replacement information.
d
f

Effective 1994 The FD6 and FXD6 types have been

replaced by FD6-A and FXD6-A type thermal / magnetic
circuit breakers mechanically and electrically
interchangeable with the exception that FXD6-A and
FD6-A have 22kA at 600V ACratings versus 18kA at 600V
AC for types FXD6 and FD6.

Superseded Breakers
General
Sentron Series
Note
Superseded
Note
Superseded
JD62B200-JD62B400
JD63B200-JD63B400
JLB200-JL62B400
JL63B200-JL63B400
JL2B070-JL2B400
JL3B0L0-JL3B400
JXD22B200-JXD22B400
JXD22S400A
JXD23B200-JXD23B400
JXD23S400A
JD22B200-JD22B400
JD22S400
JD23B200-JD23B400
JD23S400
JXD62B200-JXD62B400
JXD62H400, JXD62L400
JXD62S400A
JXD63B200-JXD63B400
JXD63H400, JXD63L400
JXD63S400A
JJ62B200-JJ62B400
JL62L400, JL62H400
JJ62S400A
JJ63B200-JJ63B400
JL63A400, JL63H400, JL63L400
JJ63S400A
LD62B250-LD62B500
LD62B250-LD63B600
LL63B250-LL62B600
LL63B250-LL63B600
LXD62B450-LXD62B600
LXD62J600, LXD62L600
LXD62S600A
LXD63B450-LXD63B600
LXD64H600, LXD63L600
LXD63S600A
MD62B500-MD62B800
MD63B500-MD63B800
MXD62A800, MXD62H800, MXD62L800

MXD62S800A
MXD63A800, MXD63H800, MXD63L800
MXD63S800A
ND63B100-ND63B900
NXD63A120A
PD63B120-PD63B160
PXD63S160A
RD63B160-RD63B200
JJ2B250-JJ2B400
JL2L400-JL2H400
JJ3B200-JJ3B400
JL3H400, JL3L400, JL3A225
-
LL2B450-LL2B600
LL3B450-LL3B600
LJ62B450-LJ62B600
LL2H600, LL2U600, LL2X600
LJ62S600
LJ63B450-LJ63B600
LL63H600, LL63L600
LJ63S600A
JD2B250-JD2B400
JD2S400
JD3B250-JD3B400
JD3S400
LL3A450, LL3H600
LL3S600
KM2A800, KM2H800, KM2L800

KM2S800
KM3A600, KM3H800, KM3L800
KM3S800
KP3B100-KP3B900
KP3S120
HP3B120-HP3B160
HP3S160
HR3B160-HR3B200
QJ22B060-QJ22B225
QJ22B060H-QJ22B225H
QJ22S225
QJ23B060-QJ23B225
QJ23B060H-QJ23B225H
QJ2B125-QJ2B225
QJS225
QJ3B125-QJ3B225
-
QJH22B060-QJH22B225
QJH23B060-QJH23B225
QJH23S225
QJ2H125-QJ2B225
QJ3H125-QJ3H225
QJ3S225
RD63B160-RD63B200
RXD63S200A
HR3B160-HR3B200
HR3S200
SHJD69200-SHJD69400
SHJD69200G-SHJD69400G
SHJD69200NGT-SHJD69400NGT
SHJD69200NT-SHJD69400NT
SHJ63B200-SHJ63B400G
SHJ63B200G-SHJ63B400G
SHJ63N200G-SHJ63N400G
SHJ63N200-SHJ63N400
SHLD69300-SHLD69600
SHLD69300G-SHLD69600G
SHLD69300NGT-SHLD69600NG
SHLD69300NT-SHLD69600NT
SHL63B300-SHL63B600
SHL63B300G-SHL63B600G
SHL63N300G-SHL63N600G
SHL63N300-SHL63N600
SHND69100A-SHND69120A
SHND69100AG-SHND69120AG
SHPD69120-SHPD69160
SHPD69120G-SHPD69160G
SHND69100-SHND69800
SHND69100G-SHND69800G

Electrically interchangeable only, refer to sales office for
further details.
SHKF3B100-SHKF3B800
SHKF3B100G-SHKF3B800G
SHPF3B120-SHPF3B160
SHPF3B120G-SHPF3B160G


200 kA at 240V AC

200 kA at 480V AC

100 kA at 600V AC
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
KM2B500-KM2B800
KM3B500-KM3B800


200 kA at 240V AC

150 kA at 480V AC

100 kA at 600V AC
e Refer to local sales office for replacement information.
d
5-97
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Superseded Breakers
General
New Sentron Series
Note
Superseded
Note
Superseded
SHND69100NGT-SHND69800NGT
SHND69100NT-SHND69800NT
SHKF3N100G-SHKF3N800G
SHKF3N100-SHKF3N800
SHK3N100G-SHK3N600G
SHK3N100-SHK3N600
SHPF3B120-SHPF3B160
SHPF3N120-SHPF3N160
SHPF3N120G-SHPF3N160G
SJD69200-SJ369400
SJD69200G-SJD69400G
SJD69200NGT-SJD69400NGT
SJD69200NT-SJD69400NT
SLD69300-SLD69600
SLD69300G-SLD69600G
SLD69300NGT-SLD69600NGT
SLD69300NT-SLD69600NT
SMD69600A-SMD69800A
SMD69600AG-SMD69800AG
SMD69600ANGT-SMD69800ANGT
SMD69600ANT-SMD69800ANT
SND69800A-SND69120A
SND69800AG-SND69120AG
SND69800ANGT-SND69120ANGT
SND69800ANT-SND69120ANT
SPD69120-SPD69160
SPD69120G-SPD69160G
SPD69120NGT-SPD69160NGT
SPD69120NT-SPD69160NT
5-98
SJL63B200-SJL63B400
SJL63B200G-SJL63B400G
SJL63N200G-SJL63N400G
SJL63N200-SJL63N400
SLL63B300-SLL63B600
SLL63B300G-SLL63B600G
SLL63N300G-SLL63N600G
SLL63N300-SLL63N600
SMD69600-SMD69800
SMD69600G-SMD69800G
SMD69600NGT-SMD69800NGT
SMD69600NT-SMD69800NT
SND69100-SND69800
SND69100G-SND69800G
SND69100NGT-SND69800NGT
SND69100NT-SND69800NT
SKMF3B600-SKMF3B800
SKMF3B600G-SKMF3B800G
SKMF3N600G-SKMF3N800G
SKMF3N600-SKMF3N800
SKPF3B100-SKPF3B600
SKPF3B100G-SKPF3B600G
SKPF3N100G-SKPF3N600G
SKPF3N100-SKPF3N600
SHPF3B120-SHPF3B160
SHPF3N120-SHPF3N160G
SHPF3N120G-SHPF3N160G
BQCC1B015-BQC1B030
CC1B015-CC1B030
CC2B015-CC2B030
CC3B015-CC3B030
EF2A003, EF2H050, EF2L050, EF2A100,

EF2H150, EF2L150
EH1B015-EH1B100
EH2B015-EH2B100
EH3B015-EH3B100
HE2A003, HE2H050, HE2L050-HE2A100

HE3A003, HE3H050, HE3L050-HE3A100
HE3B015-HE3B100

Electrically interchangeable only, refer to sales office
for further details.
c Electrically interchangeable only if the system

200 kA at 240V AC
200 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC

SHP3B120-SHP3B800
SHP3B120G-SHP3B800G
SHP3N120-SHP3N800
SHP3N120G-SHP3N800G


200 kA at 240V AC
150 kA at 480V AC
100 kA at 600V AC
e These units are for replacement purposes only. Consult
sales office for availability.
These units are no longer manufactured, and no

replacement is available.
Siemens VL Circuit Breakers

Reference Guide
Page
Breaker Frame Family
Continuous Amps
Poles
Max. Volts AC
Breaker Type
Interrupting Class
Ratings
Interrupting
Rating RMS
Symmetrical
Amperes
AC 50/60Hz
DC
Interrupting
Ratings (UL)
Dimensions
in Inches
MOLDEDCASE
CASE
MOLDED
CIRCUITBREAKERS
BREAKERS
CIRCUIT
Accessories &
Modifications
Enclosures
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
4-Pole
Thermal-Magnetic
Electronic
Electronic with LCD
Interchangeable Trip Unit
Reverse Feed (w/Non-Interchangeable Trip)
Communications Capability*
Molded Case Switch
100% Rated
50C CalibratedA
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release
Mechanical Interlocks
Electric Motor or Stored Energy Operator
Rear Connecting Studs
Plug-In Mounting Assy. w/Trip Interlock
Draw-Out Assembly
Handle Mechanism Options
Fungus Proofing
NEMA 1 Indoor, Surface Mount
NEMA 1 Indoor, Flush Mount
NEMA 3R Outdoor, Rain Proof
NEMA 4, 4X Stainless Steel
NEMA 7, 9 Hazardous Locations
NEMA 12 Dust
Terminal Shields
Distribution Lugs
Ground Sensor (Neutral Transformer)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Specific
Application
Breakers
lCS/lCU
240Vac
480Vac
600Vac
220/240Vac
380/415Vac
690Vac
250Vdc (2-Pole)
500Vdc (3-Pole)
600Vdc (3-Pole)
750Vdc (4-Pole)
5-103
5-107
5-111
5-115
EB/EG
DG
FG
JG
15125A
30150A
40250A
70400A
1, 2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600Y/347V
600V
600V
600V
NEG HEG
NDG HDG LDG NFG HFG LFG NJG HJG LJG
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
85
100
65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
35
65
35
65 100 35
65 100 35
65 100
22
25
18
20
25
18
20
25
25
25
25
85/43 100/50 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150
40/30 70/35
40/40 70/70 100/75 40/40 70/70 100/75 45/45 70/70 100/75
12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 12/6 15/8 15/8

35
42
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
18
18
18
18
18
30
25
35
35
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
5.5H x 1W x 3D
5.5H x 2W x 3D
6.9H x 4.1W x 3.4D
11H x 5.5W x 4.2D
5.5H x 3W x 3D
6.9H x 4.1W x 3.4D
11H x 5.5W x 4.2D
5.5H x 4W x 3D
6.9H x 5.5W x 3.4D
11H x 7.2W x 4.2D
Trip Unit
Information
UL
5-101
GB/GG
15125A
1, 2, 3
600Y/347V
NGG
N
65
25 (480Y/277)
14 (600Y/347)
65/33
25/12.5
14
5.1H x 1W x 2.8D
5.1H x 2W x 2.8D
5.1H x 3W x 2.8D
500Vdc nominal, 600Vdc max. for ungrounded DC UPS systems.

DC Interrupting Ratings are not applicable to electronic circuit breakers.
* - Communications available via a COM 10 module using Profibus protocol.
# - Consult Siemens for these applications.
GG and EG are not VL family breakers and do not share common VL accessories.
A - Consult Siemens for availability.
6-16
5-99
Siemens VL Circuit Breakers

Reference Guide
Page
Breaker Frame Family
Continuous Amps
Poles
Max. Volts AC
Breaker Type
Interrupting Class
Interrupting
Rating RMS
Symmetrical
Amperes
AC 50/60Hz
Ratings
DC
Interrupting
Ratings (UL)
Dimensions
in Inches
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Trip Unit
Information
Specific
Application
Breakers
Accessories &
Modifications
Enclosures
UL
lCS/lCU
240Vac
480Vac
600Vac
220/240Vac
380/415Vac
690Vac
250Vdc (2-Pole)
500Vdc (3-Pole)
600Vdc (3-Pole)
750Vdc (4-Pole)
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
4-Pole
Thermal-Magnetic
Electronic
Electronic with LCD
Interchangeable Trip Unit
Reverse Feed (w/Non-Interchangeable Trip)
Communications Capability
Molded Case Switch
100% Rated
50C CalibratedA
Auxiliary Switch
Alarm Switch
Shunt Trip
Mechanical Interlocks
Electric Motor or Stored Energy Operator
Rear Connecting Studs
Plug-In Mounting Assy. w/Trip Interlock
Draw-Out Assembly
Handle Mechanism Options
Fungus Proofing
NEMA 1 Indoor, Surface Mount
NEMA 1 Indoor, Flush Mount
NEMA 3R Outdoor, Rain Proof
NEMA 4, 4X Stainless Steel
NEMA 7, 9 Hazardous Locations
NEMA 12 Lint, Fine Dust, Oils, Coolant
Terminal Shields
Distribution Lugs
Ground Sensor (Neutral Transformer)
5-119
5-123
5-128
5-131
LG
MG
NG
PG
150600A
200800A
3001200A
4001600A
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3, 4
600V
600V
600V
600V
NLG HLG LLG NMG HMG LMG NNG HNG LNG NPG HPG LPG
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
35
65 100 35
65 100 35
65 100 35
65 100
25
25
25
25
35
50
25
35
65
25
35
65
65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150 65/65 100/75 200/150
45/45 70/70 100/75 50/50 70/70 100/75 50/25 70/35 100/50 50/25 70/35 100/50
12/6 15/8 15/8 20/10 30/15 35/17 20/10 30/15 35/15 20/10 30/15 35/15
30
30
30
22
25
42
22
25
42
22
25
42
25
35
35
35
50
65
35
50
65
35
50
65
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
11H x 5.5W x 4.2D 16H x 7.5W x 4.7D 16H x 9W x 6.2D
11H x 5.5W x 4.2D 16H x 7.5W x 4.7D

16H x 9W x 6.2D
16H x 10W x 4.7D

16H x 12W x 6.2D
Communications available via COMPRO or COMMOD modules using Profibus or Modbus protocol.
500Vdc nominal, 600Vdc max. for ungrounded DC UPS systems.
DC Interrupting Ratings are not applicable to electronic circuit breakers.
# - Consult Siemens for these applications.
A - Consult Siemens for availability.
5-100

NGB/NGG Frame
Selection
NGB (Panelboard Mount) NGG (Cable In - Cable Out)

1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Panelboard
Mount
General Purpose
Breakersd
Panelboard
Mount
General Purpose
Breakersd
Panelboard
Mount
General Purpose
Breakersd
15
20
25
30
NGB1B015Bab
NGB1B020Bab
NGB1B025Bb
NGB1B030Bb
NGG1B015Lab
NGG1B020Lab
NGG1B015Lb
NGG1B030Lb
NGB2B015Bb
NGB2B020Bb
NGB2B025Bb
NGB2B030Bb
NGG2B015Lb
NGG2B020Lb
NGG2B015Lb
NGG2B030Lb
NGB3B015Bb
NGB3B020Bb
NGB3B025Bb
NGB3B030Bb
NGG3B015Lb
NGG3B020Lb
NGG3B015Lb
NGG3B030Lb
35
40
45
50
60
NGB1B035Bb
NGB1B040Bb
NGB1B045Bb
NGB1B050Bb
NGB1B060B
NGG1B035Lb
NGG1B040Lb
NGG1B045Lb
NGG1B050Lb
NGG1B060L
NGB2B035Bb
NGB2B040Bb
NGB2B045Bb
NGB2B050Bb
NGB2B060B
NGG2B035Lb
NGG2B040Lb
NGG2B045Lb
NGG2B050Lb
NGG2B060L
NGB3B035Bb
NGB3B040Bb
NGB3B045Bb
NGB3B050Bb
NGB3B060B
NGG3B035Lb
NGG3B040Lb
NGG3B045Lb
NGG3B050Lb
NGG3B060L
70
80
90
100
NGB1B070B
NGB1B080B
NGB1B090B
NGB1B100B
NGG1B070L
NGG1B080L
NGG1B090L
NGG1B100L
NGB2B070B
NGB2B080B
NGB2B090B
NGB2B100B
NGG2B070L
NGG2B080L
NGG2B090L
NGG2B100L
NGB3B070B
NGB3B080B
NGB3B090B
NGB3B100B
NGG3B070L
NGG3B080L
NGG3B090L
NGG3B100L
110
125
NGB1B110B
NGB1B125B
NGG1B110L
NGG1B125L
NGB2B110B
NGB2B125B
NGG2B110L
NGG2B125L
NGB3B110B
NGB3B125B
NGG3B110L
NGG3B125L
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40C
NGG
2.9
Line and load lugs are included as standard. If only load side lugs are needed, change L suffix to B.
HACR rated.
NGG Suitable for screws or DIN rail mounting.
Shipping Weights
1
2
3
1
1
1
Shipping
Weight lbs. (kg)
5.4
NGB
NGG
0.9 (0.4)
1.9 (0.9)
2.9 (1.2)
.75 (0.34)
1.3 (0.59)
2.0 (0.98)

Ampere Rating
Wire Size
15-30A
NGG
Catalogue Number
NGG
NGG
#14-#6 AWG Cu
#12-#6 AWG Al
Integral with breaker
TC1Q1 (qty.1)
3TC1Q1 (qty.3)
35-125A
#8-1/0 AWG Cu
#8-2/0 AWG Cu
Integral with breaker
3TC1GG20 (qty.3)
15-125A
Nut Keeper plate w/screw

(for crimp\ terminals)
N/A
TNKG3 (qty.3)
Breaker
Type
NGB/NGG
Number
of
Poles
0 1
2, 3
CSA / UL 489 AIR

Volts AC(50/60Hz)
120
240
277
347
65
25
14
0
65
480
25
600/347
0
14
Volts DC
125
250
14
0
14c
IEC 947-2
Volts AC (50/60Hz)
220/240
lcu
lcs
25
12.5
65
12.5
380/415
lcu
25
lcs
12.5
Volts DC
125/250V DC

SWD
rated.
Rated at 15-50A 1 Pole @ 347V; 2&3 pole @ 347V.
DC rating applies to 2-Pole NGG only.
d General Purpose Breakers also carry CE marks.
HID
c 125/250V
5-101
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Number per
Carton
Number of
Poles
Internal Accessories for NGG and NGB 125A Frame

Shunt Trip
Control Voltage
V AC
V DC
CQD, CQD6, NGG, NGB

Catalogue Number
120
240
277
480
600
CQDST120
CQDST240s
CQDST277s
CQDST480s
CQDST600
012
024
048
125
CQDST12
CQDST24
CQDST48
CQDST125
Auxiliary Switch
Maximum
Voltage
AC
Number
of
Contacts
DC
CQD, CQD6,
NGG, NGB
Catalogue Number
240 125 1A1B CQDA1

240 125 2A2B CQDA2
CQD with Accessory Installed
Alarm Switch
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Maximum
Voltage
AC
DC
CQD, CQD6,
NGG, NGB
Catalogue Number
240
125
CQDBA
Shunt Trip and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
Shunt Trip
Voltage
AC
DC
CQD, CQD6,
NGG, NGB
Catalogue Number
24
CQDST24AASs
120
CQDST120AASs
240
CQDST240AASs
277
CQDST277AASs
480
CQDST480AASs
600
CQDST600AASs
12
CQDST12DASs
24
CQDST24DASs
48
CQDST48DASs
125
CQDST125DASs
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations
For Breaker
Catalogue Number
CQD, CQD6, NGG, NGB
CQDA1BAs
Padlocking Devices
For locking breaker in OFF position.
NGG
HPLG
Handle Blocking Devices

NGG, NGB
BQDHBD
Terminal Shields

NGG
TSSG3A
s Built to order. Allow 68 weeks for delivery.
5-102
Selection

EG 125A Frame
Type NEB (Panelboard Mount), NEG (Cable In - Cable Out)

Continuous
Ampere
Rating @
40C
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
General
Purpose
Breakerse
NEB3B015B NEG3B015Lb
4-Pole
Catalogue
Number
General
Purpose
Breakerse
NEG4B015L
NEG4B020L
NEG4B015L
NEG4B030L
15
20
25
30
NEB1B015Ba
NEB1B020Ba
NEB1B025B
NEB1B030B
General
Panelboard
Purpose
Mount
e
Breakers
NEG1B015La b NEB2B015B
NEG1B020La b NEB2B020B
NEG1B015Lb
NEB2B025B
NEG1B030Lb
NEB2B030B
35
40
45
50
60
NEB1B035B
NEB1B040B
NEB1B045B
NEB1B050B
NEB1B060B
NEG1B035Lb
NEG1B040Lb
NEG1B045L
NEG1B050Lb
NEG1B060L
NEB2B035B
NEB2B040B
NEB2B045B
NEB2B050B
NEB2B060B
NEG2B035Lb
NEG2B040Lb
NEG2B045L
NEG2B050Lb
NEG2B060L
NEB3B035B
NEB3B040B
NEB3B045B
NEB3B050B
NEB3B060B
NEG3B035Lb
NEG3B040Lb
NEG3B045L
NEG3B050Lb
NEG3B060L
NEG4B035L
NEG4B040L
NEG4B045L
NEG4B050L
NEG4B060L
70
80
90
100
NEB1B070B
NEB1B080B
NEB1B090B
NEB1B100B
NEG1B070L
NEG1B080L
NEG1B090L
NEG1B100L
NEB2B070B
NEB2B080B
NEB2B090B
NEB2B100B
NEG2B070L
NEG2B080L
NEG2B090L
NEG2B100L
NEB3B070B
NEB3B080B
NEB3B090B
NEB3B100B
NEG3B070L
NEG3B080L
NEG3B090L
NEG3B100L
NEG4B070L
NEG4B080L
NEG4B090L
NEG4B100L
110
125
NEB1B110B
NEB1B125B
NEG1B110L
NEG1B125L
NEB2B110B
NEB2B125B
NEG2B110L
NEG2B125L
NEB3B110B
NEB3B125B
NEG3B110L
NEG3B125L
NEG4B110L
NEG4B125L
Panelboard
Mount
General
Purpose
Breakerse
NEG2B015Lb
NEG2B020Lb
NEG2B015Lb
NEG2B030Lb
Panelboard
Mount
HEG
3.0
Type HEB (Panelboard Mount), HEG (Cable In - Cable Out)
5.5
HEG1B015La b
HEG1B020La b
HEG1B015Lb
HEG1B030Lb
HEB2B015B
HEB2B020B
HEB2B025B
HEB2B030B
HEG2B015Lb
HEG2B020Lb
HEG2B015Lb
HEG2B030Lb
HEB3B015B
HEB3B020B
HEB3B025B
HEB3B030B
HEG3B015Lb
HEG3B020Lb
HEG3B015Lb
HEG3B030Lb
HEG4B015Lb
HEG4B020Lb
HEG4B015Lb
HEG4B030Lb
35
40
45
50
60
HEB1B035B
HEB1B040B
HEB1B045B
HEB1B050B
HEB1B060B
HEG1B035Lb
HEG1B040Lb
HEG1B045Lb
HEG1B050Lb
HEG1B060L
HEB2B035B
HEB2B040B
HEB2B045B
HEB2B050B
HEB2B060B
HEG2B035Lb
HEG2B040Lb
HEG2B045Lb
HEG2B050Lb
HEG2B060L
HEB3B035B
HEB3B040B
HEB3B045B
HEB3B050B
HEB3B060B
HEG3B035Lb
HEG3B040Lb
HEG3B045Lb
HEG3B050Lb
HEG3B060L
HEG4B035Lb
HEG4B040Lb
HEG4B045Lb
HEG4B050Lb
HEG4B060L
70
80
90
100
HEB1B070B
HEB1B080B
HEB1B090B
HEB1B100B
HEG1B070L
HEG1B080L
HEG1B090L
HEG1B100L
HEB2B070B
HEB2B080B
HEB2B090B
HEB2B100B
HEG2B070L
HEG2B080L
HEG2B090L
HEG2B100L
HEB3B070B
HEB3B080B
HEB3B090B
HEB3B100B
HEG3B070L
HEG3B080L
HEG3B090L
HEG3B100L
HEG4B070L
HEG4B080L
HEG4B090L
HEG4B100L
110
125
HEB1B110B
HEB1B125B
HEG1B110L
HEG1B125L
HEB2B110B
HEB2B125B
HEG2B110L
HEG2B125L
HEB3B110B
HEB3B125B
HEG3B110L
HEG3B125L
HEG4B110L
HEG4B125L
HEG Line and load lugs are included as standard. HACR rated. Suitable for screw mounting.
EG 125A Frame Molded

Case Switch (Magnetic Trip Only)
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
3-Pole
EG 125A Frame 3-Pole

Catalogue Number
Ampere
Rating
Wire Size
HEM3M003L
15-100A
HEM3M007L
60-125A
15-125A
#14-3/0 AWG Cu (steel lugs) N/A
3TW1EG30
(qty.3)
15-125A4
#14-1/0 AWG Cu
#14-1/0 AWG Al
N/A
3TA1EG10 (qty.3)
15-125A4
#6-3/0 AWG Cu
#6-3/0 AWG Al
N/A
3TA1EG30 (qty.3)
15-125A
Nut Keeper plate w/screw

(for crimp\ terminals)
N/A
TNKE3(3-Pole)
TNKE4 (4-Pole)
15
HEM3M015L
125
HES3S125L
30
HEM3M030L
160
HES3S160L
50
HEM3M050L
70
HEM3M070L
100
HEM3M100L
125
HEM3M125L
HES4S125L
Catalogue
Number
HES3S100L
4-Pole
Shipping
No. of No. per Weight lbs. (kg)
Poles Carton NEB/
NEG/
HEB
HEG
1
1
1.4 (0.7) 1.1 (0.5)
2
1
2.4 (1.1) 2.0 (0.9)
3
1
3.7 (1.7) 3.1 (1.4)
4
1
N/A
3.9 (1.8)
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
100
125
NEG, HEG
NEB-HEB
NEG-HEG
#14-1/0
3TA1EG10 (qty.3)
N/A
#6-2/0
3TA1EG30 (qty.3)
N/A

UL 489 AIR
IEC 60947-2

Volts AC (50/60Hz)
Number
Volts AC(50/60Hz) Volts DC
220/240
380/415
Volts DC
Breaker
of
Type Poles
240 277 347 480 600/347 125 125/250 lcu lcs lcu lcs 125 125/250
01
085 35 22 35 85 43 35
NEB/NEG

2, 3, 4
085 35 22c 35 85 43 40 20 35
01
0100
65 25 42 100 50 42
HEB/HEG

2, 3, 4
0100 65 25c 42 100 50 70 35 42
a SWD
b HID
rated.
rated 347V.
c Applies
to 3 & 4-pole breakers only.

lugs for NEG and HEG breakers.
d Optional
e General
Purpose Breakers also carry CE marks
5-103
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HEB1B015Ba
HEB1B020Ba
HEB1B025B
HEB1B030B
15
20
25
30
Internal Accessories for NEG and HEG 125A Frame
Shunt Trip
Control Voltage
V AC
V DC
NEG, HEG, NEB, HEB

Catalogue Number
110-240 125
STRER240
380-600
STREV600
24-60
24-60 STREM60D
Description
NEMA Type
1
Rotary Handle Operator with Door Interlock
RHFESDL
Rotary Handle Operator
RHFESDEM
(black handle, breaker mounted)

(black handle, breaker mounted)
(red handle, breaker mounted)
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVE64X
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVE124X
Variable Depth Rotary Operator Kit
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVE244X
AC
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVEEM64X
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVEEM124X
1, 12, 3R, 4X
RHVEEM244X
(black handle, 12 inch shaft)
Number
of
Contacts
DC
NEG, HEG,
NEB, HEB
Catalogue Number
240 125 1A1B ASKE2

240 125 2A2B ASKE3

(red handle, 6 inch shaft)

Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE2
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE3
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE4
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE5
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE6
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE7
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE8
Undervoltage Trip
Flex Operator Kit
1, 12
MFKE9
Control
Voltage
Flex Operator Kit
(Flange Mounted Variable Depth, 120 in. cable)
1, 12
MFKE10
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X2
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X3
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X4
Alarm Switch
Maximum
Voltage
AC
Number
of
Contacts
DC
NEG, HEG,
NEB, HEB
Catalogue Number
240 125 1A1B ASKE1

240 125 2A2B ASKE5

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
RHFESD
Auxiliary Switch
Catalogue Number
Rotary Handle Operator
Maximum
Voltage
Selection
Handle Operators
AC
NEG, HEG,
NEB, HEB
Catalogue Number
DC
24
UVREB24A
60
UVREM60s

120
UVREN120
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X5
240
UVRER240
Flex Operator Kit
480
UVREU480s
4X
MFKE4X6
600
UVREV600s
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X7
24
UVREB24D
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X8
48
UVREC48Ds
Flex Operator Kit
4X
MFKE4X9
125
UVRED125Ds
Flex Operator Kit
250
UVREE250Ds
4X
MFKE4X10
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch

Combinations

For Breaker
NEG, HEG

All operators are for use on 3-pole and 4-pole breakers.
Catalogue Number
ASKE6
Locks and Interlocks

Quantity
per Kit
Accessory Kit
Catalogue Number
Han dle Block in g Device
HBD E
Handle Padlocking Device, 3-pole only

(allows padlocking the handle in the OFF or ON position)
Description
HPLE
Miscellaneous Accessories
Br e a ke r A m p
Ra tin g ( A )
5-104
D e sc r i p t i o n
Catalogue
Nu m b e r
Moun t in g Screw Kit , 1 -pole
MSKE1
Moun t in g Screw Kit , 2 -pole
MSKE2
Moun t in g Screw Kit , 3 or 4 -pole
MSKE4
DIN Rail Adapter, 3 or 4 -pole
DRAE3
RHFESDEM
RHVE64X
Flex Operator Kit
Revised
01/31/12
VL Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Overview
Overview
The interchangeability of the VL circuit

breaker trip units allow for easy conversion from any of 3 types of protection.
They are thermal-magnetic, electronic,
or electronic with a built-in LCD display.
The thermal-magnetic trip unit features
an adjustable magnetic trip setting. The
electronic trip units are microprocessor
based true RMS sensing devices and
are available with a variety of adjustable
trip settings, configurations, and infor-
Selection
mation menus. With precise control
over the circuit beaker functions and
access to system status, diagnostics,
and information, these trip units allow
for unsurpassed flexibility in circuit
coordination.
An example of coordination is the out
of the box Ground Fault function on the
Model 555 trip units. The pick-up and
time delay settings are set at the
factory for each frame and do not

overlap with the settings on the other
frames. Therefore, when VL breakers
are used together in a system the GF
protection is automatically coordinated.
The user also has the ability to program
a custom coordination scheme with
adjustable settings on both the 555 and
586 trip units.
VLTripUnits
TripUnitFunctions
Model525
Thermalmagnetic
ContinuousCurrentSetting(Ir)
LongTimeDelay(tr)
InstantaneousFunction
InstantaneousPickup(Ii)
ShortTimeFunction
ShortTimePick-up(Isd)
GroundFaultPick-up(Ig)
GroundFaultAlarmPick-up
GroundFaultAlarmDelay
Alarm&StatusIndicator
Built-inDisplay(LCD)
Pre-TripAlarma
LastTripInformationa
ZoneSelectivea
Communicationsa
Electronic
LI
Electronic
LIG
Electronic
LSI
Electronic
LSIG
u
u
l
u
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
u
u
l
u
h
h
h
u
u
h
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
u
u
l
u
l
u
u
h
h
h
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
u
u
l
u
l
u
u
u
u
h
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
Electronic
withLCD
LSIG
Electronic
withLCD
LSI+Galarmonly
u
u
u
u
u
u
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
u
u
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
u
u
u
u
u
u
l
l
l
l
l
l
u
u
h
h
u
u
l
l
l
l
l
l
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
GroundFaultDelay(tg)
h
l
u
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Model586
Electronic
withLCD
LSI
ShortTimeDelay(tsd)
Fixed
Model555
u Adjustable setting
l This feature is included
h Feature is not included.
ContinuousAmpsRating(Ir)
This setting is the continuous current
that the breaker will carry without tripping. It can be set up to 100% of the trip
units nominal rating (In).
LongTimeDelay(tr)
Sometimes referred to as the overload
position, this function controls the breakers pause-in-tripping time. It allows
low level, temporary inrush currents
such as those encountered when starting a motor to pass without tripping. The
time delay begins when the current
reaches 6 x Ir.
InstantaneousPick-up(Ii)
This function sets the breaker to trip
instantaneously during high fault conditions. This function may be turned off on
Model 586 trip units.
ShortTimePick-Up(lsd)
This function controls the level of fault
current the breaker will carry for a short
time without tripping, thus allowing
downstream devices to clear short circuits ahead of up-stream protection.
It may be defeated (turned-off) on
Model 586 trip units.
ShortTimeDelay(tsd)
This controls the interval of time the
breaker will remain closed against a fault
(at the Short Time Pick-up current level)
without tripping. The time delay may be
set at fixed points or at short time intervals based on l2t curves. This function is
used with the Short Time Pick-up to
achieve selectivity and better system
coordination.
GroundFaultPick-Up(Ig)
This setting controls the level of ground
fault current that will cause the breaker
to trip. Model 555 Electronic Trip Units
act on the residual current to sense
ground current. The Model 586
Electronic Trip Unit is programmable
and allows the user to select either
the residual current method or direct
detection (via a separate current transformer) to detect ground current.
GroundFaultTimeDelay(tg)
This controls the interval of time the
breaker will remain closed after a ground
fault is detected (at the Ground Fault
Pick-up current level) without tripping.
Siemens
CanadaInc.
Limited
Power Product
Catalogue
2014
Siemens
Industry,
SPEEDFAX
2011 Product
Catalog
Siemens / Speedfax
NO edits rev2
7-105
5-105
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
a Requires a COMPRO20 or COMMOD21 module in a communication system.
Revised
01/31/12
VL Circuit Breakers
General
General Information
Information
Selection
Selection
Thermal-Magnetic trip units, Model 525, combine the inverse time element design for low level overloads, and instantaneous
magnetic action for short circuit protection. The standard unit has preset overload protection and an adjustable instantaneous trip
setting, with 6 set points. Thermal-Magnetic trip units are available throughout the VL family, from 30 to 1600A.
Electronic Trip Units
On the Model 555 Electronic Trip Unit a

flashing LED confirms that the
microprocessor is in operating and

another indicates an overload condition.
For ease-of-use and to insure proper
coordination, the set points for the
continuous current are shown on the
face of these trip units in amps.
On the Model 586, the LCD version, the
current in each phase is continuously
shown on the display. Unlike many
displays, no secondary or auxiliary voltage is required as long as the breaker is

energized and a minimal load current is
present. These trip units can also indicate the last trip status (date, time,
amps) when theyre connected to a PC
via one of our communications modules.
Without being connected via a communication module, the last trip status can be
viewed on Model 586 trip units (no time
stamp).
Typical Trip Unit Labeling and Adjustment Positions

Model 555 Electronic Trip Unit
with LSIG trip functions
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Electronic trip units are available through

the VL family, from 60A (which can be
set as low as 30A) up through 1600A .
They are also available in four trip
configurations (LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG) and
features can include a built-in LCD
display.
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Model 586 Electronic Trip Unit

has an LCD display
5-106
7-106
Siemens Canada
Power Product
Catalogue
2014
Industry,Limited
Inc. SPEEDFAX
2011
Product Catalog
Siemens / Speedfax
Updated by S Spencer 1/17/11
VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Frame, VL Series
Selection
Complete Assembled Breaker
A complete factory assembled DG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped as a complete breaker. Assembled breakers are only available with standard
connectors.
For any other configuration, order the frame, trip unit, and terminals as
separate items.
For DC applications, use thermal magnetic trip unit only.
For reverse feed applications, select non-interchangeable trip breakers only. For
non-interchangeable trip breakers, change the third digit of the catalogue number to X for standard breakers.
For special applications, refer to page 5-155.
Mounting hardware is included with each frame or complete breaker.
For 100% rated breakers with a non-interchangeable trip unit, change the 3rd
character of the catalogue number to Y. Available in electronic and electronic
with LCD only.
HACR rated.
240
65
100
200
480
35
65
100
600
18
20
25
250
30
30
30
500
18
18
18
CU
65
100
200
CS
CU
65
75
150
690
I
CS
40
70
100
CU
40
70
75
CS
12
12
12
6
6
6
Connectors for 75C Wire

Ampere
Construction
Rating
30-150
Steel
Aluminum
30-150
30-150
Copper
Distribution Lugs
30-150

30-150

Compression Lugs
30-150

30-150
Wire
Range
#81/0 Cu
#63/0 Al/Cu
#63/0 Cu
No. of cables
per connector
1
1
1

Number
To Handle
of Poles Width Length Depth
D1
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Breaker
Type
NDGA
HDGA
LDGA
IEC 60947-2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220/240
380/415

UL 489
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
2, 3
4.1 (105) 6.9 (175) 3.4 (81) 4.2(107)
Approx. Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)

Catalogue Number
3TW1DG20b
3TA1DG30
3TC1DG30b
#14#2 Cu (3pcs. Max)

#14#4 Cu
3
6
3TA3DG02b
3TA6DG04b
#142/0 kcmil Al/Cu

#142/0 kcmil Al/Cu
2CLD20c
3CLD20b

Trip Unit
Complete
Poles Frame Thermal-Mag. Electronic Breaker
2, 3 3.7 (1.7)
2.2 (1.0)
2.6 (1.2) 5.9 (2.7)
Standard connector supplied with complete breakers.

Kit consists of 3 terminal connectors.
2 Lugs for 2-pole breakers.
d Required for 100% rated DG breakers. Requires 90C cable sized at 75C ampacity
a
b
c
DG Thermal-Magnetic, Instantaneous
Trip Adjustment Range
Instantaneous
Trip Unit Continuous Overcurrent Setting (I )
Amp Rating (I ) Min.
Max.
50
450
700
60
450
700
70
450
700
80
450
800
90
500
1000
100
500
1000
110
550
1100
125
625
1250
150
800
1600
i
Note: Each breaker has 6 trip settings in this range.
External Accessories page 5-137
5-107
VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
Ii
Type / Tipo CDT3
I n =150A
AMPS
1120
1280
960
1440
800
1600
40? C
TM ~
TRIP UNIT/DISPARADOR 525
Cat. No. - CDT3B150
Model 525Trip Unit
DG 150A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

N-Interrupting Class

Catalogue Number

5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
L-Interrupting Class

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NDG2F150
HDG2F150
LDG2F150
COMPLETE FACTORY ASSEMBLED CIRCUIT BREAKER
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
H-Interrupting Class

Catalogue Number
NDG2B050L
NDG2B060L
NDG2B070L
NDG2B080L
NDG2B090L
NDG2B100L
NDG2B110L
NDG2B125L
NDG2B150L
HDG2B050L
HDG2B060L
HDG2B070L
HDG2B080L
HDG2B090L
HDG2B100L
HDG2B110L
HDG2B125L
HDG2B150L
LDG2B050L
LDG2B060L
LDG2B070L
LDG2B080L
LDG2B090L
LDG2B100L
LDG2B110L
LDG2B125L
LDG2B150L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CDT2B050
CDT2B060
CDT2B070
CDT2B080
CDT2B090
CDT2B100
CDT2B110
CDT2B125
CDT2B150
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number

50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
5-108

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating


Catalogue Number
NDG3F150
HDG3F150
LDG3F150

NDG3B050L
NDG3B060L
NDG3B070L
NDG3B080L
NDG3B090L
NDG3B100L
NDG3B110L
NDG3B125L
NDG3B150L
HDG3B050L
HDG3B060L
HDG3B070L
HDG3B080L
HDG3B090L
HDG3B100L
HDG3B110L
HDG3B125L
HDG3B150L
LDG3B050L
LDG3B060L
LDG3B070L
LDG3B080L
LDG3B090L
LDG3B100L
LDG3B110L
LDG3B125L
LDG3B150L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CDT3B050
CDT3B060
CDT3B070
CDT3B080
CDT3B090
CDT3B100
CDT3B110
CDT3B125
CDT3B150
VL Circuit Breakers
DG 150A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555Trip Units
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit a


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NDG3F150
HDG3F150
LDG3F150

NDG3R060L
NDG3R100L
NDG3R150L
60
100
150
NDG3T060L
NDG3T100L
NDG3T150L
60
100
150
NDG3V060L
NDG3V100L
NDG3V150L
60
100
150
NDG3W060L
NDG3W100L
NDG3W150L
TRIP UNIT ONLY
LDG3R060L
LDG3R100L
LDG3R150L
CDT3R060
CDT3R100
CDT3R150
LDG3T060L
LDG3T100L
LDG3T150L
CDT3T060
CDT3T100
CDT3T150
LDG3V060L
LDG3V100L
LDG3V150L
CDT3V060
CDT3V100
CDT3V150
LDG3W060L
LDG3W100L
LDG3W150L
CDT3W060
CDT3W100
CDT3W150
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
60
100
150
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HDG3R060L

HDG3R100L

HDG3R150L

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HDG3T060L

HDG3T100L

HDG3T150L

ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP
HDG3V060L

HDG3V100L

HDG3V150L

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HDG3W060L

HDG3W100L

HDG3W150L


Catalogue Number
Model 586Trip Unit
DG 150A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit a


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NDG3F150
HDG3F150
LDG3F150
60
100
150
NDG3A060L
NDG3A100L
NDG3A150L
60
100
150
NDG3G060L
NDG3G100L
NDG3G150L
60
100
150
NDG3K060L
NDG3K100L
NDG3K150L

Catalogue Number
LCD ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP

HDG3A060L

HDG3A100L

HDG3A150L

LCD ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP

HDG3G060L

HDG3G100L

HDG3G150L

LCD ELECTRONIC LSI + GF ALARM ONLY

HDG3K060L

HDG3K100L

HDG3K150L

TRIP UNIT ONLY
LDG3A060L
LDG3A100L
LDG3A150L
CDT3A060
CDT3A100
CDT3A150
LDG3G060L
LDG3G100L
LDG3G150L
CDT3G060
CDT3G100
CDT3G150
LDG3K060L
LDG3K100L
LDG3K150L
CDT3K060
CDT3K100
CDT3K150
ue to the location of the magnetic tripping solenoid, the

D
left accessory pocket is not available for accessories.
5-109
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for DG 150A and FG 250A Frames
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Kits

Description
1 Alarm Switch
1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
1A + 1B
Bases AMBL1
2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switch
1A + 1B, 1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left, Rightb
ASKL1
Left, Right
ASKL2
Left, Rightb
ASKL3
Selection
Auxiliary/Alarm Switch Mounting Base Only

Description
Up to 3 Auxiliary Switches
Mounting Pocket
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
Right Pocket Only
Catalogue Number
AMBL1
AMBL2
AMBL3
Auxiliary/Alarm Switch Only
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Common to DG - PG Frames
Description
1 Normally Open Contact (1A)
1 Normally Closed Contact (1B)
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
Shunt Trips

Description
Mounting Pocket
24 VDC
48-60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
110-127 VAC
208-277 VAC
380-600 VAC
Catalogue Number
STRLB24DC
STRLC60DC
STRLD125DC
STRLE250DC
STRLM60
STRLN120
STRLS277
STRLV600

Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
24 VAC
Right Pocket Only
110-127 VAC
220-240 VAC
208 VAC
277 VAC
380-415 VAC
440-480 VAC
Catalogue Number
UVRLA12DC
UVRLB24DC
UVRLC48DC
UVRLG60DC
UVRLD125DC
UVRLE250DC
UVRLL24
UVRLN120
UVRLR240
UVRLP208
UVRLS277
UVRLT415
UVRLU480
A refers to a normally open contact (open when the breaker contacts are open).
B refers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open).
a Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory
combinations.
b These kits include two bases, one for mounting switches in the left pocket and another for mounting in the right.
c Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
5-110
VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Frame, VL Series
A complete factory assembled FG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped as a complete breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
separate items.
HACR rated.

UL 489
480
35
65
100
600
18
20
25
250
30
30
30
500
18
25
30
CU
CS
CU
CS
Shipping Weight, lbs. (kg)

690
I
12
12
12
CU
Trip Unit
Complete
I
6
6
6
CS
2, 3 4.0 (1.8)
2.2 (1.0) 2.6 (1.2) 6.2 (2.8)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
240
65
100
200
IEC 60947-2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220/240
380/415
I
I
I
I
65
65
40
40
100 75
70
70
200 150 100 75
4.1 (105) 6.9 (175) 3.4 (81) 4.2 (107)

Ampere
Construction
Rating
50-250
Steel
Aluminum
50-250
Copper
50-250
Distribution Lugs
Wire
Range
#4350 kcmil Cu
#4350 kcmil Al/Cu
#4350 kcmil Cu

50-250
50-250

Compression Lugs
#142/0 Cu
#14#4 Cu
3
6
3TA3FG20b
3TA6FG04b
#4-350 Al/Cu
3CLF350b
a
b
50-250
No. of cables
per connector
1
1
1
Catalogue Number
3TW1FG350b
3TAW1FG350b
3TCW1FG350b

FG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous Trip
Adjustment Range
Instantaneous
Amp Rating (I ) Min. Max.
i
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
625
800
800
800
1000
1000
1250
1250
Breaker
Type
NFGA
HFGA
LFGA
Number
To Handle
D1
2, 3
Interrupting
Class
N
H
L
1250
1600
1600
1600
2000
2000
2500
2500
5-111
VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
Model 525Trip Unit
FG 250A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NFG2F250
HFG2F250
LFG2F250
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
NFG2B100L
NFG2B110L
NFG2B125L
NFG2B150L
NFG2B175L
NFG2B200L
NFG2B225L
NFG2B250L
HFG2B100L
HFG2B110L
HFG2B125L
HFG2B150L
HFG2B175L
HFG2B200L
HFG2B225L
HFG2B250L
LFG2B100L
LFG2B110L
LFG2B125L
LFG2B150L
LFG2B175L
LFG2B200L
LFG2B225L
LFG2B250L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CFT2B100
CFT2B110
CFT2B125
CFT2B150
CFT2B175
CFT2B200
CFT2B225
CFT2B250
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Catalogue Number
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number

100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
5-112

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating


Catalogue Number
NFG3F250
HFG3F250
LFG3F250

NFG3B100L
NFG3B110L
NFG3B125L
NFG3B150L
NFG3B175L
NFG3B200L
NFG3B225L
NFG3B250L
HFG3B100L
HFG3B110L
HFG3B125L
HFG3B150L
HFG3B175L
HFG3B200L
HFG3B225L
HFG3B250L
LFG3B100L
LFG3B110L
LFG3B125L
LFG3B150L
LFG3B175L
LFG3B200L
LFG3B225L
LFG3B250L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CFT3B100
CFT3B110
CFT3B125
CFT3B150
CFT3B175
CFT3B200
CFT3B225
CFT3B250
VL Circuit Breakers
FG 250A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555Trip Units
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unita


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NFG3F250
HFG3F250
LFG3F250

NFG3R100L
NFG3R150L
NFG3R250L
100
150
250
NFG3T100L
NFG3T150L
NFG3T250L
100
150
250
NFG3V100L
NFG3V150L
NFG3V250L
100
150
250
NFG3W100L
NFG3W150L
NFG3W250L
LFG3R100L
LFG3R150L
LFG3R250L
CFT3R100
CFT3R150
CFT3R250
LFG3T100L
LFG3T150L
LFG3T250L
CFT3T100
CFT3T150
CFT3T250
LFG3V100L
LFG3V150L
LFG3V250L
CFT3V100
CFT3V150
CFT3V250
LFG3W100L
LFG3W150L
LFG3W250L
CFT3W100
CFT3W150
CFT3W250
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
100
150
250
TRIP UNIT ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HFG3R100L

HFG3R150L

HFG3R250L

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HFG3T100L

HFG3T150L

HFG3T250L

HFG3V100L

HFG3V150L

HFG3V250L

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HFG3W100L

HFG3W150L

HFG3W250L

Model 586Trip Unit
FG 250A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unita


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NFG3F250
HFG3F250
LFG3F250
100
150
250
NFG3A100L
NFG3A150L
NFG3A250L
100
150
250
NFG3G100L
NFG3G150L
NFG3G250L
100
150
250
NFG3K100L
NFG3K150L
NFG3K250L

LCD


Catalogue Number

HFG3A100L

LFG3A100L
HFG3A150L

LFG3A150L
HFG3A250L

LFG3A250L
HFG3G100L

LFG3G100L
HFG3G150L

LFG3G150L
HFG3G250L

LFG3G250L
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP + GF ALARM ONLY
HFG3K100L

LFG3K100L
HFG3K150L

LFG3K150L
HFG3K250L

LFG3K250L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CFT3A100
CFT3A150
CFT3A250
CFT3G100
CFT3G150
CFT3G250
CFT3K100
CFT3K150
CFT3K250
ue to the location of the magnetic tripping solenoid, the

D
left accessory pocket is not available for accessories.
5-113
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for DG 150A and FG 250A Frames

Description
1 Alarm Switch
1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
1A + 1B
Bases AMBL1
2 Aux. + 1 Alarm Switches
1A + 1B, 1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left, Rightb
ASKL1
Left, Right
ASKL2
Left, Rightb
ASKL3
Selection

Description
Mounting Pocket
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
Right Pocket Only
Catalogue Number
AMBL1
AMBL2
AMBL3
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
Shunt Trips

Description
Mounting Pocket
24 VDC
48-60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
110-127 VAC
208-277 VAC
380-600 VAC
Catalogue Number
STRLB24DC
STRLC60DC
STRLD125DC
STRLE250DC
STRLM60
STRLN120
STRLS277
STRLV600

Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
24 VAC
Right Pocket Only
110-127 VAC
220-240 VAC
208 VAC
277 VAC
380-415 VAC
440-480 VAC
Catalogue Number
UVRLA12DC
UVRLB24DC
UVRLC48DC
UVRLG60DC
UVRLD125DC
UVRLE250DC
UVRLL24
UVRLN120
UVRLR240
UVRLP208
UVRLS277
UVRLT415
UVRLU480
efer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accesR
sory combinations.
These kits include two bases, one for mounting switches in the left pocket and another for mounting in the right.
c Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
a
b
5-114
VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Frame, VL Series
A complete factory assembled JG breaker includes the frame, trip unit,
and standard line and load connectors, all factory installed and shipped
as a complete breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with
standard connectors.
separate items.
For reverse feed applications, select non-interchangeable trip breakers only.
For non-interchangeable trip breakers, change the third digit of the catalogue
number to X for standard breakers.
For 100% rated breakers with a non-interchangeable trip unit, change the 3
character of the catalogue number to Y.
HACR rated.
rd
2, 3
240
65
100
200
480
35
65
100
600
25
25
25
250
30
30
30
500
25
35
35
CU
CS
CU
CS

690
I
12
15
15
CU
I
6
8
8
CS
Trip Unit
Complete
2, 3 9.3 (4.2)
4.0 (1.8) 4.0 (1.8) 12.6 (5.7)

Ampere
Wire
No. of cables
Construction
Rating
Range
per connector
Catalogue Number
70-400 1/0600 kcmil Cu 1
3TW1JG600b
Steel
Aluminum
70-400
3/0250 kcmil Al/Cu
2
3TA2JG250ab
Aluminum
70-400
250750 kcmil Al
1
3TA1JG750b
Aluminum
70-400
3/0600 kcmil Cu
1
3TA1JG750b
Copper
70-400
3/0750 kcmil Cu
1
TC1JG750
Copper
70-400
3/0250 kcmil Cu
2
TC2JG250
Distribution Lugs

70-400

70-400
Compression Lugs
70-400

70-400

70-400
#144 Cu
#142/0 Cu
12
6
#6350 kcmil
250-600 kcmil
250-750 kcmil
3TA12JG04b
3TA6JG20b
3CLJ350b
3CLJ600b
3CLJ750b
a Standard
construction supplied for each breaker.

consists of 3 terminal connectors.
for 100% rated JG breakers. Requires 90C
cable sized at 75C ampacity.
b Kit
c Required
JG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Max.
i
250
1250
2500
300
1500
3000
350
400
1750
2000
3500
4000
5-115
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Breaker
Type
NJGA
HJGA
LJGA
IEC 60947-2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220/240
380/415
I
I
I
I
65
65
45
45
100 75
70
70
200 150 100 75
5.5 (139) 11 (279) 4.2 (102) 5.4 (138)

UL 489 AIR (File E10848)
Interrupting
Class
N
H
L

Number
To Handle
D1
VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
Model 525Trip Unit
JG 400A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NJG2F400
HJG2F400
LJG2F400
250
300
350
400

Catalogue Number
NJG2B250L
NJG2B300L
NJG2B350L
NJG2B400L
HJG2B250L
HJG2B300L
HJG2B350L
HJG2B400L
LJG2B250L
LJG2B300L
LJG2B350L
LJG2B400L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CJT2B250
CJT2B300
CJT2B350
CJT2B400
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS


Catalogue Number

250
300
350
400
NJG3F400
HJG3F400
NJG3B250L
NJG3B300L
NJG3B350L
NJG3B400L
HJG3B250L
HJG3B300L
HJG3B350L
HJG3B400L

Continuous Catalogue Number
Ampere Rating
COMPLETE BREAKER
250
300
350
400
NJJ2B250
NJJ2B300
NJJ2B350
NJJ2B400
JJ 400A Frame 240V max., 3-pole with

Thermal-Magnetic Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit


Continuous Catalogue Number
Ampere Rating
COMPLETE BREAKER
250
NJJ3B250
300
NJJ3B300
350
NJJ3B350
400
NJJ3B400
Terminal
connectors must be ordered separately.

Breaker Type NJJA.
5-116

Catalogue Number
LJG3F400
JJ 400A Frame 240V max., 2-pole with

Thermal-Magnetic Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating


Catalogue Number
LJG3B250L
LJG3B300L
LJG3B350L
LJG3B400L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CJT3B250
CJT3B300
CJT3B350
CJT3B400
VL Circuit Breakers
JG 400A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555Trip Units
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NJG3F400
HJG3F400
LJG3F400

NJG3R250L
NJG3R400L
250
400
NJG3T250L
NJG3T400L
250
400
NJG3V250L
NJG3V400L
250
400
NJG3W250L
NJG3W400L
LJG3R250L
LJG3R400L
CJT3R250
CJT3R400
LJG3T250L
LJG3T400L
CJT3T250
CJT3T400
LJG3V250L
LJG3V400L
CJT3V250
CJT3V400
LJG3W250L
LJG3W400L
CJT3W250
CJT3W400
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
250
400
TRIP UNIT ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HJG3R250L

HJG3R400L

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HJG3T250L

HJG3T400L

HJG3V250L

HJG3V400L

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HJG3W250L

HJG3W400L

Model 586Trip Unit
JG 400A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NJG3F400
HJG3F400
LJG3F400
250
400
NJG3A250L
NJG3A400L
250
400
NJG3G250L
NJG3G400L
250
400
NJG3K250L
NJG3K400L

LCD


Catalogue Number

HJG3A250L

LJG3A250L
HJG3A400L

LJG3A400L
HJG3G250L

LJG3G250L
HJG3G400L

LJG3G400L
HJG3K250L

LJG3K250L
HJG3K400L

LJG3K400L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CJT3A250
CJT3A400
CJT3G250
CJT3G400
CJT3K250
CJT3K400
5-117
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for JG 400A and LG 600A Frames

Description
1 Alarm Switch
1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
1A + 1B
Bases AMBL1
1A + 1B, 1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left, Rightb
ASKL1
Left, Right
ASKL2
Left, Rightb
ASKL3
Selection

Description
Mounting Pocket
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
Right Pocket Only
Catalogue Number
AMBL1
AMBL2
AMBL3

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
Shunt Trips

Description
Mounting Pocket
24 VDC
48-60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
110-127 VAC
208-277 VAC
380-600 VAC
Catalogue Number
STRLB24DC
STRLC60DC
STRLD125DC
STRLE250DC
STRLM60
STRLN120
STRLS277
STRLV600

Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
24 VAC
Right Pocket Only
110-127 VAC
220-240 VAC
208 VAC
277 VAC
380-415 VAC
440-480 VAC
Catalogue Number
UVRLA12DC
UVRLB24DC
UVRLC48DC
UVRLG60DC
UVRLD125DC
UVRLE250DC
UVRLL24
UVRLN120
UVRLR240
UVRLP208
UVRLS277
UVRLT415
UVRLU480
Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.
Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
a
b
5-118
VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Frame, VL Series
A complete factory assembled LG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
Breakers are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Mounting hardware is included with each breaker.
For 100% rated breakers, change the 3rd character of the catalogue number to
W. Available on 400/500 Amp only.
HACR rated.

UL 489
Interrupting
Class
Breaker
Type
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Number
To Handle
D1
IEC 60947-2
Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

220/240
2, 3
380/415
690
240
480
600
250
500
35
18
30
25
65
65
45
45
12
CU
CS
CU
CS
CU
13.6
(345.5)
CS
5.5 (139) 11 (279) 4.2 (102) 5.4 (138)
Ext.
Shield
NLGB
65
HLGB
100
65
18
30
35
100
75
70
70
15
LLGB
200
100
18
30
35
200
150
100
75
15
Trip Unit
Complete

Ampere
Construction
Rating
150-600
Aluminum
Aluminum
150-600
Copper
150-600
Copper
150-600
Compression Lugs
150-600

150-600

150-600
2, 3 17.4 (7.9)
Wire
Range
#2/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
#2/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
#2/0600 kcmil Cu
#2/0600 kcmil Cu
No. of cables
per connector
2 (load side)
2 (line side)
2 (load side)
2 (line side)
Catalogue Numberb
3TA2LG600LDa
3TA2LG600LNa
3TC2LG600LD
3TC2LG600LN
#6350 kcmil Al/Cu

250-750 kcmil Al/Cu
250-600 kcmil Al/Cu
6CLL350c
3CLL750
6CLL600
3.5 (1.6) 4.2 (1.9) 20.9 (9.5)
Standard construction supplied for each breaker.

c Kit consists of 6 lugs for Line or Load end.
Required for 100% rated LG breakers. Requires 90C cable sized at 75C ampacity.
a
b
LG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Max.
i
400 2000
500 2500
600 2750
4000
5000
5500
Note: Each breaker has 6 trip settings.
5-119
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
Model 525Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Continuous
Ampere Rating
400
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

NLK2B400L
HLK2B400L
LLK2B400L
500
NLK2B500L
HLK2B500L
LLK2B500L
600
NLK2B600L
HLK2B600L
LLK2B600L
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Continuous
Ampere Rating
400
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

NLK3B400L
HLK3B400L
LLK3B400L
500
NLK3B500L
HLK3B500L
LLK3B500L
600
NLK3B600L
HLK3B600L
LLK3B600L
For
100% rated 400A or 500A versions, change the

third character of the catalogue number to Z.
consult Siemens sales office for availability.
Please
5-120
VL Circuit Breakers
LG 600A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit

Continuous
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
400
600
NLK3R400L
NLK3R600L
400
600
NLK3T400L
NLK3T600L
400
600
NLK3V400L
NLK3V600L
400
600
NLK3W400L
NLK3W600L
HLK3R400L
HLK3R600L
LLK3R400L
LLK3R600L
HLK3T400L
HLK3T600L
LLK3T400L
LLK3T600L
ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP

HLK3V400L
HLK3V600L
LLK3V400L
LLK3V600L
ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP

2
HLK3W400L
HLK3W600L
LLK3W400L
4
6
LLK3W600L
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Model 586Trip Unit
LG 600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit

Continuous
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
400
600
NLK3A400L
NLK3A600L
400
600
NLK3G400L
NLK3G600L
400
600
NLK3K400L
NLK3K600L
HLK3A400L
HLK3A600L
LLK3A400L
LLK3A600L
HLK3G400L
HLK3G600L
LLK3G400L
LLK3G600L
ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP + GFG ALARM ONLY

HLK3K400L
HLK3K600L
LLK3K400L
LLK3K600L
5-121
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for JG 400A and LG 600A Frames
Selection

Description
1 Alarm Switch
1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
2 Aux. Switches
1A + 1B
Bases AMBL1
1A + 1B, 1A/Bc
Bases AMBL2 & AMBL3
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left, Rightb
ASKL1
Left, Right
ASKL2
Left, Rightb
ASKL3

Description
Mounting Pocket
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
Right Pocket Only
Catalogue Number
AMBL1
AMBL2
AMBL3
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
Shunt Trips

Description
Mounting Pocket
24 VDC
48-60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
110-127 VAC
208-277 VAC
380-600 VAC
Catalogue Number
STRLB24DC
STRLC60DC
STRLD125DC
STRLE250DC
STRLM60
STRLN120
STRLS277
STRLV600

Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
24 VAC
Right Pocket Only
110-127 VAC
220-240 VAC
208 VAC
277 VAC
380-415 VAC
440-480 VAC
Catalogue Number
UVRLA12DC
UVRLB24DC
UVRLC48DC
UVRLG60DC
UVRLD125DC
UVRLE250DC
UVRLL24
UVRLN120
UVRLR240
UVRLP208
UVRLS277
UVRLT415
UVRLU480
Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.
Includes 1A and 1B contact for alarm purposes, only one of which may be installed at any time.
a
b
5-122
VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Frame, VL Series
A complete factory assembled MG breaker includes the frame, trip unit, and
standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard
connectors.
separate items.
HACR rated.
rd
CU
CS
CU
CS
Hz)
690
I
20
30
35
CU
7.5 (190) 16 (406) 4.7 (119) 5.9 (151)

I
10
15
17
CS
Complete
Trip Unit
Breaker
Poles
Frame
2, 3
31.3 (14.2)
4.0 (1.8)
35.3 (16.0)

Construction
Aluminum
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Ampere
Rating
200-800A
200-800A
200-800A
200-800A
Wire
Range
1/0500 kcmil Al/Cu
500-750 kcmil Al/Cu
1/0500 kcmil Cu
#2600 kcmil Al/Cu
No. of cables
per connector
3
2
3
3
Catalogue Number
3TA3MG500b
3TA2MG750b
TC3MG500e
3TA3MG600bd

c Consists of one terminal.
d Includes extended terminal cover.
e Required for 100% rated MG breakers. Requires 90C cable sized at 75C ampacity.
a
b
MG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Max.
i
600 3000
700 3250
800 3250
6000
6500
6500
5-123
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Breaker
Type
NMG
HMG
LMG
2, 3

UL 489
IEC 60947-2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60
220/240
380/415
I
I
I
240
480
600
250
500
I
65
35
25
22
35
65
65
50
50
100
65
35
25
50
100
75
70
70
200
100
50
42
65
200
150
100
75
Interrupting
Class
N
H
L

Number
To Handle
D1
VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
Model 525Trip Unit
MG 800A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NMG2F800
HMG2F800
LMG2F800
600
700
800

Catalogue Number
NMG2B600L
NMG2B700L
NMG2B800L
HMG2B600L
HMG2B700L
HMG2B800L
LMG2B600L
LMG2B700L
LMG2B800L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CMT2B600
CMT2B700
CMT2B800
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS


Catalogue Number

600
700
800
5-124

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating


Catalogue Number
NMG3F800
HMG3F800
LMG3F800

NMG3B600L
NMG3B700L
NMG3B800L
HMG3B600L
HMG3B700L
HMG3B800L
LMG3B600L
LMG3B700L
LMG3B800L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CMT3B600
CMT3B700
CMT3B800
VL Circuit Breakers
MG 800A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555 Trip Units
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NMG3F800
HMG3F800
LMG3F800

NMG3R600L
NMG3R800L
600
800
NMG3T600L
NMG3T800L
600
800
NMG3V600L
NMG3V800L
600
800
NMG3W600L
NMG3W800L
LMG3R600L
LMG3R800L
CMT3R600
CMT3R800
LMG3T600L
LMG3T800L
CMT3T600
CMT3T800
LMG3V600L
LMG3V800L
CMT3V600
CMT3V800
LMG3W600L
LMG3W800L
CMT3W600
CMT3W800
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
600
800
TRIP UNIT ONLY
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HMG3R600L

HMG3R800L

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HMG3T600L

HMG3T800L

HMG3V600L

HMG3V800L

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HMG3W600L

HMG3W800L

Model 586 Trip Unit
MG 800A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit


Catalogue Number

Continuous
Ampere Rating
NMG3F800

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
HMG3F800

Catalogue Number
LMG3F800
600
800
NMG3A600L
NMG3A800L
600
800
NMG3G600L
NMG3G800L
600
800

LCD
NMG3K600L

NMG3K800L

Catalogue Number

HMG3A600L

LMG3A600L
HMG3A800L

LMG3A800L
HMG3G600L

LMG3G600L
HMG3G800L

LMG3G800L
HMG3K600L

LMG3K600L
HMG3K800L

LMG3K800L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CMT3A600
CMT3A800
CMT3G600
CMT3G800
CMT3K600
CMT3K800
5-125
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A and PG 1600A Frames
Selection

Description
2A + 2B
Bases AMBP2
4 Aux. Switches
2A + 2B
Bases AMBP1
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left Pocket Only
ASKP3
Left, Right
ASKP4
x4

Description
Mounting Pocket
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
Catalogue Number
AMBP1
AMBP2

Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
x4
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Shunt Trips

Description
Mounting Pocket
24 VDC
48-60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
110-127 VAC
208-277 VAC
380-600 VAC
Catalogue Number
STRPB24DC
STRPC60DC
STRPD125DC
STRPE250DC
STRPM60
STRPN120
STRPS277
STRPV600

Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
60 VDC
110-127 VDC
220-250 VDC
110-127 VAC
Right Pocket Only
220-240 VAC
208 VAC
277 VAC
380-415 VAC
440-480 VAC
Catalogue Number
UVRPA12DC
UVRPB24DC
UVRPC48DC
UVRPG60DC
UVRPD125DC
UVRPE250DC
UVRPN120
UVRPR240
UVRPP208
UVRPS277
UVRPT415
UVRPU480
Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be
used for accessory combinations.
a
5-126
VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Frame, VL Series
Complete Assembled Breaker with Lugs
A complete factory assembled NG breaker includes the frame, trip unit,
and standard line and load lugs, all factory installed and shipped as a complete
breaker. Assembled breakers are available only with standard connectors.
separate items.
A Toggle Handle Extension is included with each frame or complete breaker.
HACR rated.
rd
240
65
100
200
CU
CS
CU
CS
CU
9 (229) 16 (406) 6 (152) 8.1 (207)

Complete
Trip Unit
Breaker
Poles
Frame
CS
10
15
17
2, 3
46.3 (21.0)
8.8 (4.0)
55.1 (25.0)

Ampere
Construction
Rating
300-1200A
Aluminum
Aluminum
300-1200A
Copper
300-1200A
Aluminum
300-1200A
Compression Lugs
300-1200A

Wire
Range
1/0500 kcmil Al/Cu
500-750 kcmil Al/Cu
1/0500 kcmil Cu
1/0500 kcmil Al/Cu
No. of cables
per connector
4
3
4
4
Catalogue Number
3TA4NG500cd
3TA3NG750d
3TC4NG500bd
3TA4NG500Hbd
1/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu

12CLN500
Total of 12 connectors (4 per phase Line or Load).

For 100% rated NG breakers. Requires 90C cable sized at 75C ampacity.
Standard connector provided with complete breakers.
d Kit consists of 3 terminal connectors.
a
b
c
NG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Max.
i
800
900
1000
1200
4000
5000
5000
7000
8000
10000
10000
12000
5-127
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Breaker
Type
NNG
HNG
LNG

CSA/UL 489
IEC 60947-2
AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220/240
380/415
690
I
I
I
I
480
600
250
500
I
35
25
22
35
65
35
50
25
20
65
35
25
50
100
50
70
35
30
100
65
42
65
200
100
100
50
35
To Handle
D1
Interrupting
Class
N
H
L
Number
of Poles
W
L
D
2, 3
Volts
VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Selection
AMPS
9000
8000
7000
Ii
I n = 1200A
11000
12000
AMPS
40 C
10000
9000
TM ~
11000
7000
Trip Unit/Disparador 525
Ii
12000
Ii
AMPS
9000
10000
8000
10000
8000
11000
7000
Amps
12000
Amps
Model 525 Trip Unit
NG 1200A Frame 2-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NNG2F120
HNG2F120
LNG2F120
800
900
1000
1200

Catalogue Number
NNG2B800L
NNG2B900L
NNG2B100L
NNG2B120L
HNG2B800L
HNG2B900L
HNG2B100L
HNG2B120L
LNG2B800L
LNG2B900L
LNG2B100L
LNG2B120L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CNT2B800
CNT2B900
CNT2B100
CNT2B120
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number

800
900
1000
1200
5-128

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating


Catalogue Number
NNG3F120
HNG3F120
LNG3F120

NNG3B800L
NNG3B900L
NNG3B100L
NNG3B120L
HNG3B800L
HNG3B900L
HNG3B100L
HNG3B120L
LNG3B800L
LNG3B900L
LNG3B100L
LNG3B120L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CNT3B800
CNT3B900
CNT3B100
CNT3B120
VL Circuit Breakers
NG 1200A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555 Trip Units
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number

NNG3F120
LNG3F120
800
1000
1200
NNG3R800L
NNG3R100L
NNG3R120L
800
1000
1200
NNG3T800L
NNG3T100L
NNG3T120L
800
1000
1200
NNG3V800L
NNG3V100L
NNG3V120L
800
1000
1200
NNG3W800L
NNG3W100L
NNG3W120L
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HNG3R800L

HNG3R100L

HNG3R120L

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HNG3T800L

HNG3T100L

HNG3T120L

HNG3V800L

HNG3V100L

HNG3V120L

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HNG3W800L

HNG3W100L

HNG3W120L

TRIP UNIT ONLY
LNG3R800L
LNG3R100L
LNG3R120L
CNT3R800
CNT3R100
CNT3R120
LNG3T800L
LNG3T100L
LNG3T120L
CNT3T800
CNT3T100
CNT3T120
LNG3V800L
LNG3V100L
LNG3V120L
CNT3V800
CNT3V100
CNT3V120
LNG3W800L
LNG3W100L
LNG3W120L
CNT3W800
CNT3W100
CNT3W120
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Catalogue Number
HNG3F120

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating

Catalogue Number
Model 586 Trip Unit
NG 1200A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NNG3F120
HNG3F120
LNG3F120
800
NNG3A800L
1000 NNG3A100L
1200
NNG3A120L
800
1000
1200
NNG3G800L
NNG3G100L
NNG3G120L
800
1000
1200
NNG3K800L
NNG3K100L
NNG3K120L

HNG3A800L

LNG3A800L

HNG3A100L

LNG3A100L

HNG3A120L

LNG3A120L

HNG3G800L

LNG3G800L

HNG3G100L

LNG3G100L

HNG3G120L

LNG3G120L
LCD ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP + GF ALARM ONLY

HNG3K800L

LNG3K800L

HNG3K100L

LNG3K100L

HNG3K120L

LNG3K120L
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CNT3A800
CNT3A100
CNT3A120
CNT3G800
CNT3G100
CNT3G120
CNT3K800
CNT3K100
CNT3K120
5-129
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A, and PG 1600A Frames
Selection

Description
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number

2A + 2B
Base AMBP2
Left Pocket Only
ASKP3
4 Aux. Switches
2A + 2B
Base AMBP1
Left, Right
ASKP4
x4

Description
Mounting Pocket
Catalogue Number
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
AMBP1
AMBP2

Common to DG-PG Frames
Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
x4
Shunt Trips
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Description
Mounting Pocket
Catalogue Number
24 VDC
STRPB24DC
48-60 VDC
STRPC60DC
110-127 VDC
STRPD125DC
220-250 VDC
STRPE250DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
STRPM60
110-127 VAC
STRPN120
208-277 VAC
STRPS277
380-600 VAC
STRPV600
Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
Catalogue Number
UVRPA12DC
24 VDC
UVRPB24DC
48 VDC
UVRPC48DC
60 VDC
UVRPG60DC
110-127 VDC
UVRPD125DC
220-250 VDC
UVRPE250DC
110-127 VAC
Right Pocket Only
220-240 VAC
UVRPN120
UVRPR240
208 VAC
UVRPP208
277 VAC
UVRPS277
380-415 VAC
UVRPT415
440-480 VAC
UVRPU480
a Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.
Arefers to a normally open contact (open when the breaker contacts are open).
Brefers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open).
5-130
VL Circuit Breakers
PG 1600A Frame, VL Series & Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
A complete factory assembled PGbreaker includes the frame and trip unit only.
The connectors must be ordered as separate items.
PG thermal-magnetic breakers sold as non-interchangeable only.
For any other configuration, order the frame, trip unit, and connectors as
separate items.
Connectors require a Breaker Lug Mounting Assembly or Breaker Mounting
Base and must be ordered as a seperate item.
For DC applications, use Thermal magnetic trip unit only.
For reverse feed applications select non-interchangeable trip breakers only.
Change the third digit of the catalogue number to X for non-interchangeable
trip breakers.
A Toggle Handle Extension is included with each frame or complete breaker.
rd
Breaker
Type
NPG
HPG
LPG
240
65
100
200
2, 3
CSA/UL 489
IEC 60947-2
AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220/240
380/415
690
I
I
I
I
480
600
250
500
I
35
25
22
35
65
35
50
25
20
65
35
25
50
100
50
70
35
30
100
65
42
65
200
100
100
50
35
CU
CS
CU
CS
CU

Construction
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Copper
Ampere
Rating
1200-1600A
1200-1600A
1200-1600A
1200-1600A
1200-1600A
Wire
Range
1/0750 kcmil Al/Cu
300600 kcmil
600750 kcmil
300600 kcmil
300600 kcmil
No. of cables
per phase
6
5
4
6
5
Catalogue Number
3TA6PG750ac
TA5P600bd
TA4P750bd
TA6R600bd
TC5R600bde
Requires Lug Mounting Assembly LMAP1600.

Requires Breaker Mounting Base MBPG1600 Kit or MBPG1601.
Consists of 3 connectors.
d Consists of 1 connector.
e For 100% rated PG breakers. Requires 90C cable sized at 75C ampacity.
a
c

I
CS
10
15
17

Poles Frame
Trip Unit
Complete
Breaker
2, 3
69.0 (31.3)
60.2 (27.3)
8.8 (4.0)
PG Thermal-Magnetic,
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Max.
i
1200 7000
1400 7000
1600 7000
AMPS
9000
Mounting Arrangement
8000
7000
Description
Lug Mounting Assembly
Breaker Mounting Base (Front Connect)
Breaker Mounting Base (Rear Connect)
9 (229) 16 (406) 6 (152) 8.1 (207)
12000
12000
12000
To Handle
D1
Catalogue Number
LMAP1600
MBPG1600
MBPG1601
I n = 1600A
Ii
TM ~
11000
12000
AMPS
40 C
10000
Trip Unit/Disparador 525
9000
Ii
AMPS
9000
10000
8000
11000
7000
12000
Amps
Ii
10000
8000
11000
7000
12000
Amps
Model 525Trip Unit
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Continuous
Ampere Rating

1200
1400
1600
NPX3B120
NPX3B140
NPX3B160
HPX3B120
HPX3B140
HPX3B160
LPX3B120
LPX3B140
LPX3B160
5-131
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Interrupting
Class
N
H
L
Number
of Poles
W
L
D
Volts
VL Circuit Breakers
PG 1600A Electronic 3-Knob & LCD Trip Units
Selection
Model 555Trip Unit
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NPG3F160
HPG3F160
LPG3F160
1200
1600
NPG3R120
NPG3R160
1200
1600
NPG3T120
NPG3T160
1200
1600
NPG3V120
NPG3V160
1200
1600
NPG3W120
NPG3W160
ELECTRONIC LI TRIP
HPG3R120

HPG3R160

ELECTRONIC LSI TRIP
HPG3T120

HPG3T160

HPG3V120

HPG3V160

ELECTRONIC LIG TRIP
HPG3W120

HPG3W160

TRIP UNIT ONLY
LPG3R120
LPG3R160
CPT3R120
CPT3R160
LPG3T120
LPG3T160
CPT3T120
CPT3T160
LPG3V120
LPG3V160
CPT3V120
CPT3V160
LPG3W120
LPG3W160
CPT3W120
CPT3W160
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Catalogue Number
Model 586Trip Unit
PG 1600A Frame 3-Pole Electronic LCD Trip Unit


Catalogue Number


Catalogue Number

Catalogue Number
FRAME ONLY
Continuous
Ampere Rating
NPG3F160
HPG3F160
LPG3F160
1200
1600
NPG3A120
NPG3A160
1200
1600
NPG3G120
NPG3G160
1200
1600
NPG3K120
NPG3K160
5-132

Catalogue Number

HPG3A120

LPG3A120

HPG3A160

LPG3A160

HPG3G120

LPG3G120

HPG3G160

LPG3G160
LCD ELECTRONIC LSIG TRIP + GF ALARM ONLY

HPG3K120

LPG3K120

HPG3K160

LPG3K160
TRIP UNIT ONLY

CPT3A120
CPT3A160
CPT3G120
CPT3G160
CPT3K120
CPT3K160
VL Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories for MG 800A, NG 1200A, and PG 1600A Frames
Selection

Description
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number

2A + 2B
Base AMBP2
Left Pocket Only
ASKP3
4 Aux. Switches
2A + 2B
Base AMBP1
Left, Right
ASKP4
x4

Description
Mounting Pocketa
Catalogue Number
Left, Right
Left Pocket Only
AMBP1
AMBP2

Common to DG-PG Frames
Description
Catalogue Number
ASWPA
ASWPB
x4
Shunt Trips
Description
Mounting Pocket
Catalogue Number
STRPB24DC
48-60 VDC
STRPC60DC
STRPD125DC
220-250 VDC
STRPE250DC
Right Pocket Only
48-60 VAC
STRPM60
110-127 VAC
STRPN120
208-277 VAC
STRPS277
380-600 VAC
STRPV600
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
110-127 VDC
24 VDC
Description
Mounting Pocket
12 VDC
Catalogue Number
UVRPA12DC
24 VDC
UVRPB24DC
48 VDC
UVRPC48DC
60 VDC
UVRPG60DC
110-127 VDC
UVRPD125DC
220-250 VDC
UVRPE250DC
110-127 VAC
Right Pocket Only
220-240 VAC
UVRPN120
UVRPR240
208 VAC
UVRPP208
277 VAC
UVRPS277
380-415 VAC
UVRPT415
440-480 VAC
UVRPU480
a Refer to the Accessory Locations chart for guidelines and limitations about which pockets may be used for accessory combinations.
Arefers to a normally open contact (open when the breaker contacts are open).
Brefers to a normally closed contact (closed when the breaker contacts are open).
5-133

Molded Case Switch
Selection
switch has a fixed instantaneous

self-protecting trip element which
may open the switch under high fault
conditions.
General
Typically a molded case switch is used
when a compact load-break switch is
needed for disconnect purposes. The
VL line of molded case switches from
Siemens is made of the same materials
and components as the VL circuit
breakers but do not provide overcurrent protection. Each molded case
Application Note
Overcurrent protection must be provided by an appropriate overcurrent
protective device located upstream
from the molded case switch. Also, the

short-circuit current rating of the
switch is limited to the interrupting
rating of the upstream protective
device or the ratings in the table below,
whichever is less.
Each type VL molded case switch accepts the same terminals and accessories as the equivalent VL circuit breakers.
All type VL molded case switches are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Mounting hardware and standard line and load terminals are included on ratings through 250A. For 400 1600A ratings,
order the lugs separately.
All ratings are UL listed and CSA certified.
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Molded Case Switch

Maximum
Ampere
Rating / Frame
150A / DG
250A / FG
400A / JG
600A / LG
800A / MG
1200A / NG
1600A / PG
Maximum
Ampere
Rating / Frame
2-Pole
3-Pole
Short-Circuit Current Rating
Catalogue Number
HDS2S150L
HFS2S250L
HJS2S400
HLR2S600
HMS2S800
HNS2S120
Catalogue Number
HDS3S150L
HFS3S250L
HJS3S400
HLR3S600
HMS3S800
HNS3S120
240V
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
480V
65k
65k
65k
65k
65k
65k
600V
20k
20k
25k
18k
35k
35k
Self Protective
Instantaneous
Override
2,500A
3,500A
4,400A
5,500A
6,500A
12,000A
HPS3S160
100k
65k
35k
14,000A
3-Pole
Short-Circuit Current Rating
Catalogue Number
240V
480V
600V
Self Protective
Instantaneous
Override
250A / FG
LFS3S250L
200k
100k
25k
3,500A
400A / JG
600A / LG
800A / MG
1200A / NG
LJS3S400
LLR3S600
LMS3S800
LNS3S120
200k
200k
200k
200k
100k
100k
100k
100k
25k
18k
65k
65k
4,400A
5,500A
6,500A
12,000A
1600A / PG
LPS3S160
200k
100k
65k
14,000A
The
Short-Circuit Current Rating is the maximum available

current of the circuit where the switch is used, when protected by an appropriate overcurrent protective device.
5-134

Selection
General
Protection of Motor Circuits
Molded case circuit breakers are used in motor circuits as a disconnecting means and for short-circuit protection. They should be
used in conjunction with motor-running, over-current protection devices, and should permit the motor to start without nuisance
tripping from motor-inrush current. The circuit breaker should have a continuous current rating of not less than 115% of the motor
full-load current.
The recommended motor circuit protectors listed have continuous-current ratings of at least 115% of motor full-load currents. The
trip setting positions are approximately 11 times motor full-load current. The suggested trip settings may need to be adjusted
upward to no higher than 1300% of full-load current for non-design E type motors, and no greater than 1700% of full-load current
for design E motors, to allow for motor startup due to in-rush current.
Breaker Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter
Siemens motor circuit protectors are recommended for use in combination motor starters to provide selective short-circuit
protection for the motor branch circuit. The adjustable instantaneous trip feature of the Siemens motor circuit protector provides
for a trip setting slightly above the peak motor in-rush current. With this setting, no delay is introduced in opening the circuit when
a fault occurs. This circuit breaker has no time-delay trip element. Therefore it must be used in conjunction with, and immediately
ahead of, the motor-running overcurrent protection device.
Important: The information below does not apply to all motor applications: it is recommended that the user refer to the National
Electrical Code (NEC) for specific needs.
Table 1 (When Breaker is Mounted Immediately Ahead of Motor Starter)

3-Phase Induction Type Motors (Siemens motor circuit protectors for branch circuit use with alternating-current combination, full voltage motor starters)
Trip
Setting (A)
Catalogue Number a
450
540
630
HDM3L150L
720
810
900
58-83
750
69-100
900
81-117
1050
92-133
1200
104-150
1350
115-150b 1500
Motor Full
Load Amperes
96-139
115-167
135-194
154-222
173-250
192-278
Trip
Setting (A)
Catalogue Number a
1250
1500
1750
HJM3L400
2000
2250
2500
154-222
2000
185-267
2400
215-311
2800
246-356
3200
277-400
3600
308-400b 4000
HDM3M150L
96-139
1250
115-150b 1500
HDM3H150L
135-150b 1750
135-150b 2000
135-150b 2250
135-150b 2500
154-222
185-267
215-311
246-356
277-400
308-444
2000
2400
2800
3200
3600
4000
46-67
55-80
65-93
74-107
83-120
92-133
600
720
840
960
1080
1200
212-306
254-367
296-428
338-489
381-550
423-600
2750
3300
3850
4400
4950
5500
77-111
92-133
108-156
123-178
138-200
154-222
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
250-361
292-422
335-483
385-556
442-638
500-722
3250
3800
4350
5000
5740
6500
135-194
1750
162-210
2100
188-220
2450
215-241
2800
242-250b 3150
242-250b 3500
a
HFM3L250L
HFM3M250L
385-556
462-667
538-778
615-889
692-1000
769-1111
HFM3H250L
otor circuit protectors rated 150A and 250A are supplied with line and load lugs
M
installed. If lugs are required on 400A to 1200A motor circuit breakers, order required
lugs separately.
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
HJM3M400
HLM3J600
HLM3Y600
HMM3M800
HNM3M120
hese settings are provided for starting currents greater than 11X but not to exceed
T
17X. Full Load Amps ( FLA ) not to exceed ampere rating of MCP.
5-135
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Motor Full
Load Amperes
35-50
42-60
48-70
55-80
62-90
69-100

600 Volt DC Circuit Breakers
General
Siemens cUL Listed non-interchangeable
trip DC Thermal/magnetic Molded Case
Circuit Breakers shown below are for use
in grounded & ungrounded general DC
circuits and ungrounded battery supply
circuits of UPS systems. These breakers
are rated at 600Vdc closed circuit and
feature rated interruption levels from
42,000 to 65,000 amperes as indicated in
Frame
HDGD
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DG
Type
FG
JG
LG
MG
NG
PGc
HFGD
HJGD
HLGD
HMGD
HNGD
HPGD
the table. This family of circuit breakers

is rated from 50 to 1600 Amperes.
Types HDGD through HPGD circuit
breakers are provided with an adjustable
magnetic over-current function located
on the face of the circuit breaker.
Contact Siemens for specific magnetic
over-current values.
To properly use these cUL Listed circuit
breakers at 600Vdc and the indicated
Catalogue
Number
(3-pole)a
Short-Circuit
Current Rating
600VDCb
50
HDC3B050
42K
60
HDC3B060
42K
70
HDC3B070
42K
80
HDC3B080
42K
90
HDC3B090
42K
100
HDC3B100
42K
110
HDC3B110
42K
125
HDC3B125
42K
150
HDC3B150
42K
100
HFC3B100
42K
150
HFC3B150
42K
250
HFC3B250
42K
250
HJC3B250
65K
300
HJC3B300
65K
350
HJC3B350
65K
400
HJC3B400
65K
400
HLC3B400
65K
600
HLC3B600
65K
600
HMC3B600
65K
700
HMC3B700
65K
800
HMC3B800
65K
800
HNC3B800
65K
900
HNC3B900
65K
1000
HNC3B100
65K
1200
HNC3B120
65K
1200
HPC3B120
65K
1400
HPC3B140
65K
1600
HPC3B160
65K
Continuous
Ampere Rating
erminal connectors must be ordered separately; see page 5-146

T
Standard VL breakers DG - PG feature DC ratings up to 500V for ungrounded UPS
applications. Consult the individual frame section for more information.
c UL only.
a
b
5-136
Selection
interruption level, it is necessary to
connect the terminals of the 3 pole
circuit breaker in a series configuration
as shown in the diagram below.
Types HDGD through HPGD use the
same internal and external accessories
as the standard DG through PG frames
and associated types. Consult the
individual frame section for accessory
information.
LOAD
Revised
01/31/12
External
Accessories
VL
External
Accessories
Selection

Selection

5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1 Base for Plug-In or Draw-Out

2 Interphase Barriers
3 Rear Terminals Flat and Round
4 Bus Extensions
5 Terminal Connectors
6 Plug-In Terminal Blades
7 Extended Terminal Shield
8 Standard Terminal Shield
9 Cover Frame for Door Cutout

10 Stored Energy Operator
11 Rotary Handle Operator
12 Variable Depth Rotary Operator
13 Max Flex Operator
14 Circuit Breaker
15 Shunt Trip or Undervoltage Releases
16 Auxiliary/Alarm Switches
17 Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit (525)

18 Electronic Trip Unit (555)
19 Elec. Trip Unit with LCD (586)
20 Communication Module with ZSI
21 Electronic Trip Unit Tester and
LCB Power Supply
Siemens Industry, Inc. SPEEDFAX 2011 Product Catalog
5-137
7-137
VL External Accessories

For DG to FG Frame
For JG to LG Frame

150 to 250 A
400 A to 600 A

Description
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Through-Door Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Fixed depth and the handle is mounted

directly on the circuit breaker.
Lockable knob (for up to 3 padlocks).

NEMA 1, 12
RHFF

RHFL
Red Handle Version
with red knob, yeloow indicator plate

NEMA 1, 12
RHFFEM

RHFLEM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Variable depth, door mounted handle.
Includes knob with masking frame,
indicator plate, detachable door coupling,
12 shaft, and breaker mounted rotary
operator. Lockable knob (for up to 3
padlocks).

NEMA 1, 12
RHVF12

RHVL12
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
For Direct or Extended Rotary

Handle Operators (RHF and RHV).
Form C, Early Break type2 Aux. Switch Kit
Includes 1 switch with 5 wire
For Door-Mounted Operator
For Through-Door Operator
Includes 2 switches with 5 wire

RHSFA1F
RHSLA1
RHSLA1F

RHSFA2F
RHSLA2
RHSLA2F
Door-Mounted Rotary Operator Mechanism

Breaker mechanism only
RHVFBM
RHVLBM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Only

Standard version NEMA 1, 12

NEMA 3R

NEMA 4X
Red Handle version
RHVM12H

RHVM3RH

RHVM4XH

RHVMEMH
RHVM12H
RHVM3RH
RHVM4XH
RHVMEMH
NFPA-79 Handle Kit

Intermediate handle for NFPA-79 compliance
with door-mounted rotary operator

RHVF79H
RHVM79H
Extension Shaft Only, for Door Mounted Operator

2 inches (50.8mm)
3 inches (76.2mm)
12 inches (304.8 mm)
24 inches (609.6mm) w/ support bracket
During manual operation, Early Break auxiliary switch

contacts open before the breaker opens.
5-138
RHVMS02

RHVMS12
RHVMS16
RHVMS24
RHVMS02

RHVMS12
RHVMS16
RHVMS24

For MG Frame

800 A

Description
Catalogue Number
For NG to PG Frame
1200 to 1600 A
Catalogue Number
Through-Door Rotary Handle Operator Kit

Fixed depth, breaker mounted.
For direct fitting to the circuit breaker.
Lockable with up to 3 padlocks.

NEMA 1, 12
RHFM
Red Handle Version

with red knob, yeloow indicator plate

NEMA 1, 12

Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Operator Kit
Variable depth, door mounted handle.
Includes knob with masking frame,
indicator plate, detachable door coupling,
12 shaft, and breaker mounted rotary
operator. Lockable knob (for up to 3
padlocks).

NEMA 1, 12
RHVM12

RHSPA1
RHSMA2

RHSPA2
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

RHSMA1

For Direct or Extended Rotary

Handle Operators (RHF and RHV).
Early Break type2 Aux. Switch Kit
Includes 1 switch with 5 wire
Includes 2 switches with 5 wire
Door-Mounted Rotary Operator Mechanism

Breaker mechanism only
RHVMBM
RHVPBM
Door-Mounted Rotary Handle Only

Standard version NEMA 1, 12

NEMA 3R

NEMA 4X
Red Handle version
RHVM12H

RHVM3RH

RHVM4XH

RHVMEMH
RHVP12H
RHVP3RH
RHVP4XH
RHVPEMH
NFPA-79 Handle Kit

Intermediate handle for NFPA-79 compliance
with door-mounted rotary operator

RHVM79H
RHVP79H
Extension Shaft Only, for Door Mounted Operator

2 inches (50.8mm)
3 inches (76.2mm)
24 inches (609.6mm) w/ support bracket
RHVMS02

RHVMS12
RHVMS16
RHVMS24

RHVPS03
RHVPS12

RHVPS24
5-139

Description
For DG and FG Frame

150 to 250 A
For JG and LG Frame

400 to 600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Variable Depth Flange Mounted Operator Kit

Adjustable from 8 to 16
Complete kit, includes handle and
variable depth operator.

NEMA 1, 3R, 12
FHVF3R

NEMA 4X
FHVF4X
IEC Black Handle
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
FHVF3RB

NEMA 4X
FHVF4XB
Max-Flex, Variable Depth Flange
Mounted Operator Kit
Complete kit, includes plastic handle, breaker
operator, and cable. NEMA 1, 3R, 12
MFKF3R
For DG and FG operators, the cable is 36,
all others are 48
May be right- or left-hand mounted
FHVL3R
FHVL4X
FHVL3RB
FHVL4XB
MFKL3R
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Handle Only, for Max-Flex Variable Depth

NEMA 1, 3R, 12
Plastic
MFHM3R

MFHM3R
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
Steel - epoxy coated
MFHM3RS

MFHM3RS
NEMA 4, 4X
Steel - chrome plated
MFHM4X

MFHM4X
Solid color (all gray) Plastica
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
MFHM3RB

MFHM3RB
Solid color (black handle) Steel epoxy coateda
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
MFHM3RSB

MFHM3RSB
Breaker Operator Mechanism Only, for Max-Flex
MFMF
MFML
Cable Only, for Max-Flex Variable Depth

36
48
60
72
84
96
120
144
MFCF036
MFCF048
MFCF060
MFCF072
MFCF084
MFCF096
MFCF120
MFCF144
MFCM036
MFCM048
MFCM060
MFCM072
MFCM084
MFCM096
MFCM120
MFCM144

Form C (1NO - 1NC), early breakb
1 Aux. switch
MFSFA1

MFSLA1
2 Aux. switch
MFSFA2

MFSLA2
a
b
Max-Flex handles are available with solid gray or black handles instead of the customary Red for On flange handle.
The black handle is preferred for IEC markets, where red handles have a specific meaning.
During manual operation, Early Break aux. contacts open before the breaker opens.
5-140

Description
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG Frame
1200 A
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Variable Depth Flange Mounted Operator Kit

Adjustable from 8 to 16
Complete kit, includes handle and
variable depth operator.

NEMA 1, 3R, 12

NEMA 4X

IEC Black Handle
NEMA 1, 3R, 12

NEMA 4X
Max-Flex, Variable Depth Flange
Mounted Operator Kit
Complete kit, includes plastic handle, breaker
operator, and cable. NEMA 1, 3R, 12
For DG and FG operators, the cable is 36,
all others are 48
May be right- or left-hand mounted
MFKP3RS
MFKP3RS
MFHM3R
MFHM3RS
MFHM4X

MFHP3RS

MFHP4X

MFHP3RS
MFHP4X
MFHM3RB
MFHM3RSB
MFHP3RSB
MFHP3RSB
Breaker Operator Mechanism Only, for Max-Flex
MFMM
MFMP
MFMP
Cable Only, for Max-Flex Variable Depth

36
48
60
72
84
96
120
144
MFCM036
MFCM048
MFCM060
MFCM072
MFCM084
MFCM096
MFCM120
MFCM144

MFCP048
MFCP060
MFCP072
MFCP084
MFCP096
MFCP120
MFCP144

MFCP048
MFCP060
MFCP072
MFCP084
MFCP096
MFCP120
MFCP144

Form C (1NO - 1NC), early breakb
1 Aux. switch
2 Aux. switch
MFSPA1
MFSPA2
MFSPA1
MFSPA2
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MFKM3R
Handle Only, for Max-Flex Variable Depth

NEMA 1, 3R, 12
Plastic
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
Steel - epoxy coated
NEMA 4, 4X
Steel - chrome plated
Solid color (all gray) Plastica
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
Solid color (black handle) Steel epoxy coateda
NEMA 1, 3R, 12
MFSPA1
MFSPA2
Max-Flex handles are available with solid gray or black handles instead of the customary Red for On flange handle.
The black handle is preferred for IEC markets, where red handles have a specific meaning.
During manual operation, Early Break aux. contacts open before the breaker opens.
5-141

Description

For DG to FG Frame
150 to 250 A

Catalogue Number
Stored Energy and Motor Operators

Lockable with up to 3 padlocks.

AC Voltage DC Voltage

24
42-48
42-48
60
60
110127 110127
220250 220250
Cylinder Locks for Field Installation
Stored Energy Type

SEAFB

SEAFM

SEAFY

SEAFN

SEAFR

CLKF
Plug-In and Draw-Out Bases

For DG Frame

150 A

Description
Catalogue Number
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Plug-in Mounting Base Assembly

Includes base, terminal blade kit, sec. terminal block assembly, base trip
interlock, and mounting hardware.
Rear Connected

3-pole
Front Connected

3-pole
Catalogue Number
PCBDRC3
PCBFRC3
PCBDFC3
PCBFFC3
DCADRC3
DCAFRC3
DCADFC3
DCAFFC3
Hex Wrench for racking draw-out assembly and position indicator
DCHP
DCHP
Position Indicator Switch

Form C switch to indicate breaker engaged/de-engaged
position.a
DCIP
DCIP
Secondary Terminal Block Assy.

Accessory connections for plug-in or draw-out breakers. Pre-wired plug
and block with 8 terminal points.b

PCTF83
PCTF83
Plug-In Spare Breaker Kit

Set of 6 terminal blades, 2 terminal shield, & 1 trip interlock
PCXD3
PCXF3
Draw-out Spare Breaker Kit

Set of 6 terminal blades, & 1 trip interlock
DCXD3
DCXF3
Spare Breaker Trip Interlock

PCXFT
PCXFT
Draw-out Assembly
Includes base, position indicator switch, socket, base trip
interlock, crank handle, connectors, and necessary shields.
Rear Connected
3-pole
Front Connected

3-pole
(Draw-out assembly includes side plates and all hardware)
For FG Frame
250 A
Up to 2 position indicator switches may be mounted per plug-in or draw-out base.

Up to 2 plugs per breaker (16 terminal points) may be mounted on DG, and FG breakers. Up to 3 plugs per breaker (24 terminal points) may be mounted
on JG, LG, MG, NG, and PG breakers.
5-142
For JG to LG Frame
400 to 600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG to PG Frame
1200 to 1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Stored Energy Type

SEALB

SEALM

SEALY

SEALN

SEALR

Stored Energy Type

SEAMB

SEAMM

SEAMY

SEAMN

SEAMR

Motor Operator Type

MTRPB
MTRPM
MTRPY
MTRPN
MTRPR
CLKP
CLKP
CLKP
For JG Frame
400 A
For LG Frame
600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG Frame
1200 A
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
PCBLRC3
PCBMRC3
PCBNRC3
PCBJFC3
PCBLFC3
DCAJRC3
DCALRC3
DCAMRC3
DCANRC3
DCAJFC3
DCALFC3
DCAMFC3
DCANFC3
DCHP
DCHP
DCHP
DCHP
DCIP
DCIP
DCIP
DCIP
PCTL83
PCTL83
PCTM83
PCTN83
PCXJ3
PCXL3
PCXM3
DCXJ3
DCXL3
DCXM3
DCXN3
PCXLT
PCXLT
PCXMT
PCXPT
PCXN3
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PCBJRC3
5-143
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Connections
For DG Frame
150 A
For FG Frame
250 A
Description
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Nut Keeper Plates

For ring/tongue terminal or bus bar connections.
(For metric threads on other than the JG or LG frame,
change TNK to TMK)
1 Nut Keeper Plate
Kit of 3
TNKD
TNKD3
TNKF
TNKF3
Mechanical Lugs
Steel Wrap Around Body (Cu Wire Only)
Cable Size; (cables per phase)
Single Lug
Kit of 3
#8-1/0; 1-hole
TW1DG20
3TW1DG20
#4-350 kcmil; 1-hole

TW1FG350
3TW1FG350
Aluminum Body (Al or Cu Wire)

Single Lug
Kit of 2
#6-3/0; 1-hole
TA1DG30

TAW1FG350
Kit of 3
3TA1DG30
3TAW1FG350
Single Lug
Kit of 2
Kit of 3

Single Lug
Kit of 3
#6-3/0; 1-hole
TC1DG30

TCW1FG350
Kit of 3
3TC1DG30
3TCW1FG350

Single Lug
#14-2/0; 1-cable
2CLD20
3CLD20
#4-350 kcmil; 1-cable
3CLF350

Kit of 2
Kit of 3

Kit of 3
Distribution Lugs (Cu Wire Only)

Single Lug
Kit of 3
Single Lug
Kit of 3
#14-#2; 3-hole
TA3DG02
3TA3DG02
#14-#4; 6-hole
TA6DG04
3TA6DG04
#14-#1; 2-hole and

#14-2/0; 1-hole
TA3FG20
3TA3FG20
#14-#4; 6-hole
TA6FG04
3TA6FG04
Control Wire Terminals

Control Wire Terminal (Single)
Control Wire Terminal (Kit of 3)
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Copper Body (Cu Wire Only)

Single Lug
Kit of 2
Compression Lugs
Kit of 2
Kit of 3
Note: pictures provide graphical

representaions only.
Required for 100% rated breakers. Requires 90C cable

sized at 75C ampacity.
5-144
7-146
Siemens
Power Product
Catalogue
2014
Siemens Canada
Industry,Limited
Inc. SPEEDFAX
2011
Product Catalog
Product Category MCCB
For LG Frame
600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG Frame
1200 A
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
FBCJ3
FBCL3
FBCM3
SSBP
SSBPH
SSBP
SSBPH
RTLJSR
RTLJLR
SRTJR3
RTLJSF
RTLJLF
SRTJF3
RTLLSF
SRTLF3
RTLMSF
SRTMF3
RTLNSF
SRTNF3
TSSL3
TSSL3
TSSM3
TSSP3
TSSP3
TSLL3
TSLL3
TSLM3
TSLP3
TSLP3
IPBM
IPBM
IPBM
IPBP
IPBP
LMAP1600
MBPG1600
MBPG1601
For JG Frame
400 A
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Consult Siemens for availability.
Product Category MCCB
Not for use with standard Al terminals. Use Standard

Shield for rear connection and Extended Shield for bus bar connection.
Kit includes connection for one side of breaker only.

Order quantity 2 if connecting line and load side.
Siemens
Canada Inc.
Limited
Power Product
Catalogue
2014
Siemens
Industry,
SPEEDFAX
2011 Product
Catalog
7-145
5-145
Connections

Description
Nut Keeper Plates
For ring/tongue terminal or bus bar connections.
(For metric threads on other than the JG or LG frame,
change TNK to TMK)
1 Nut Keeper Plate
Kit of 3
For DG Frame
150 A
For FG Frame
250 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
TNKD
TNKD3
TNKF
TNKF3
Mechanical Lugs
Steel Wrap Around Body (Cu Wire Only)
#8-1/0; 1-hole
Single Lug
TW1DG20

TW1FG350
Kit of 3
3TW1DG20

3TW1FG350
Aluminum Body (Al or Cu Wire)
#6-3/0; 1-hole
Single Lug
TA1DG30

TAW1FG350
Kit of 2

Kit of 3
3TA1DG30

3TAW1FG350

MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Single Lug

Kit of 2

Kit of 3


Single Lug

Kit of 3
Copper Body (Cu Wire Only)

#6-3/0; 1-hole
Single Lug
TC1DG30

TCW1FG350
Kit of 2

Kit of 3
3TC1DG30

3TCW1FG350


Single Lug

Compression Lugs
#14-2/0; 1-cable
Kit of 2
2CLD20

Kit of 3
3CLD20

3CLF350
Kit of 2
Kit of 3


Kit of 3
Distribution Lugs (Cu Wire Only)

#14-#2; 3-hole
Single Lug
TA3DG02
Kit of 3
3TA3DG02
#14-#4; 6-hole
Single Lug
TA6DG04
Kit of 3
3TA6DG04
Note: pictures provide graphical

representaions only.
Control Wire Terminals

Control Wire Terminal (Single)
Control Wire Terminal (Kit of 3)
Required
for 100% rated breakers. Requires 90C cable

5-146
#14-#1; 2-hole and

#14-2/0; 1-hole
TA3FG20
3TA3FG20
#14-#4; 6-hole
TA6FG04
3TA6FG04
For JG Frame
400 A

Catalogue Number
TMKJ
TMKJ3
For LG Frame
600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG Frame
1200 A
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
TNKL
TNKL3
TNKM
TNKM3
TNKP
TNKP3
TNKP
TNKP3
metric only

1/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole
TW1JG600

3TW1JG600


1/0-500 kcmil, 3-hole

TA3MG500

3TA3MG500

a
3TA2LG600LD

3TA2LG600LNb

AL: 250-750 kcmil
CU: 3/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole
TA1JG750 (400A max)

3TA1JG750 (400A max)

500 -750 kcmil; 2-hole

TA2MG750

3TA2MG750


2TA4NG500


3TA4NG500
3TA4NG500Hc
3TA6PG750e
500 -750 kcmil; 3-hole

2TA3NG750
3TA3NG750

600-750 kcmil; 4-hole

TA4P750f


300-600 kcmil; 5; 6-hole

TA5P600f
TA6R600f
3TA3MG600d

TC2JG250

TC1JG750



TC3MG500

3TC2LG600LD

3TC4NG500

3TC2LG600LN

300-600 kcmil; 5-hole

TC5R600f


3CLJ350


1/0-500 kcmil; 4-cable

6CLL350 (kit of 6)

12CLN500 (kit of 12)

250-600 kcmil; 1-cable

3CLJ600

3CLJG750


3CLL750

6CLL600 (kit of 6)

#14-#4; 12-hole

TA12JG04

3TA12JG04

#14-2/0; 6-hole

TA6JG20

3TA6JG20

TA2JG250PT

3TA2LG600LNPT
All lug kits include the nut keepers.

a Mounted on Load Side Only.
b Mounted on Line Side Only.
c
d
TA3MG500PT

3TA4NG500PT
Required for 100% rated breakers. Requires 90C cable

Requires extended modified shield.
e
f
Used only with LMAP1600 mounting base.

Used only with MBPG1600 or MBPG1601 mounting
base.
5-147
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TA2JG250

3TA2JG250

AL: 250-750 kcmil
CU: 3/0-600 kcmil; 1-hole
TA1JG750

3TA1JG750

General

Description
Handle Padlocking
Device
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Walking-Beam
Interlock Mechanism
Cable Interlock
System
5-148
For DG Frame
150 A
For FG Frame
250 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Handle Padlocking Device

To padlock breaker toggle in the OFF position. Accepts up
to 3 padlocks with 58 mm shackles.
HPLF
HPLF
Handle Blocking Device

For holding the handle in the ON position. Not a
lockout/tagout device.
HBDF
HBDF
WBMFFM
WBMFFM
CBTF
CBTF
CBCF18
CBCM36
CBCP54
CBCF18
CBCM36
CBCP54
Mounting Screw Kit

Includes the necessary hardware to mount a circuit breaker to the
users prepared surface

Kit with 2 screws (SAE thread)

Kit with 4 screws (SAE thread)
MSKF2
MSKF4
MSKF2
MSKF4
Trip Adjustment Sealing Cover

Includes a trip unit cover to prevent tampering or adjustment
of trip settings. Seal not included.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units
TSCFTM
TSCFTM
Walking-Beam Interlock Mechanism

Provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent
circuit breakers.

Fixed mounted breakers
Note: Both breakers must be of the same frame size.
Cable Interlock Mechanism
Provides mechanical interlocking between 2 circuit-breakers includes operator mechanism for one circuit breaker only.
Combination with the next larger or smaller frame size is possible.
Interlock Cable
Cable only, to connect 2 circuit breakers.

Cable length 18 in. .46m (recommended up to 250A)

Cable length 36 in. .91m (recommended from 400800A)

Cable length 54 in. 1.37m (recommended from 12001600A)

For JG Frame
400 A

Catalogue Number
For LG Frame
600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
Catalogue Number
For NG Frame
1200 A
Catalogue Number
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
HPLL
HPLL
HPLM
HPLP
HPLP
HBDL
HBDL
HBDM
HBDP
HBDP

WBMLFM

WBMLFM

WBMMFM

WBMPFM

WBMPFM

CBCM36
CBCP54

MSKL4
TSCLTM
CBTL

CBCM36
CBCP54

MSKL4
TSCLTM
CBTM

CBCM36
CBCP54

MSKM4
TSCMTM
CBTP

CBCP54

MSKP4
CBTP

CBCP54

MSKP4
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CBTL
5-149
Ground Sensors & Electronic Accessories

Description
For DG Frame
150 A
For FG Frame
250 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Neutral Current Transformer (Ground Sensor, N-pole)

Neutral = 35/60A

Neutral = 100A

Neutral = 150A

Neutral = 250A

Neutral = 400A

Neutral = 600A

Neutral = 800A

Neutral = 1000/1200A

Neutral = 1600A
NGSD060
NGSF100
NGSF150

Communications & Electronics

Power Stick - Hand held, battery operated power supply for

LCD trip units. (Requires two -9V batteries)

For programming and trip testing only.
Spare Flat
Cable
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Power Stick
RS232 Cable

NGSF100
NGSF150
NGSJ250

EPSP18V

EPSP18V
Com20 Profibus Communications Module with ZSI

for electronic trip units (order cable separately)
COMPRO2O
COMPRO020
Com21 Modbus Communications Module with ZSI

for electronic trip units (order cable separately)
COMMOD21
COMMOD21
Cable for COM20/21 and

power supply5ft. (1.5m)
COMKIT13
COMKIT13
Cable for COM20/21, 3.0m (9.8ft).
COMKIT6
COMKIT6
Spare flat cable for Test Kits
COMPCA
COMPCA
Adressing Plug - Assigns a field bus address without a PC 3UF79100AA00

by pluging into Com20/21
3UF79100AA000
Com20 Profibus
& Com21 Modbus
Communications
Module
Door Cutouts & Extensions
Cover Frame for

Door Cutout
Cover Frame for Door Cutout

For fixed or plug-in mounted circuit breakers. (IP30)

2-Pole & 3-Pole
BZLF3
BZLF3
For breakers with stored energy operator. (IP40)
BZLFRHSE
BZLFRHSE
(not for use with rotary handle or stored energy operator)
BZLFBDC
BZLFBDC
Toggle Handle Extension

For spare or replacement. (One is included with each

NG - PG frame.)
Circuit-breaker draw-out mounted and toggle handle operated.

Kit includes cover frame (bezel) and escutcheon as needed. (IP40)
Toggle Handle
Extension
5-150
For JG Frame
400 A

Catalogue Number

NGSJ250
NGSL400

For LG Frame
600 A
For MG Frame
800 A
For NG Frame
1200 A
For PG Frame
1600 A
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number

NGSL400
NGSM600

NGSM600
NGSN800

NGSN800
NGSP120

NGSP120
NGSP160
EPSP18V
EPSP18V
EPSP18V
EPSP18V
COMPRO20
COMPRO20
COMPRO20
COMPRO20
COMPRO20
COMMOD21
COMMOD21
COMMOD21
COMMOD21
COMMOD21
COMKIT4
COMKIT4
COMKIT5
COMKIT5
COMKIT5
COMKIT7
COMKIT7
COMKIT8
COMKIT8
COMKIT8
COMPCA
COMPCA
COMPCA
COMPCA
COMPCA

3UF79100AA000
3UF79100AA000
3UF79100AA000
3UF79100AA000
3UF79100AA000
BZLL3
BZLL3
BZLM3
BZLP3
BZLP3
BZLLRHSE
BZLLRHSE
BZLMRHSE
BZLPRHSE
BZLPRHSE
BZLLBDC
BZLLBDC
BZLMBDC
BZLPBDC
BZLPBDC
THEL
THEL
THEM
THEP
THEP
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
EPSP18V
5-151
VL Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessory Locations
Selection
Locations of Internally Mounted Accessories

Frame Family
Left Pocket
Right Pocket

DG*, FG*, JG, LG
Shunt Trip or UVR or up to 3 Auxiliary Switches

or up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Switch
150 to 600A

Up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Swich


or up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 1 Alarm Switch

MG, NG, PG

800 to 1600A

Up to 2 Auxiliary Switches + 2 Alarm Swiches
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
* Except DG and FG breakers with Electronic Trip Units. Due to the location of the Magnetic Latch, the Left Pocket is not available for accessories.
Accessory Information
b Aux. Switch is an Auxiliary Switch, 1A or 1B contact
b Alarm Switch has 1A or 1B contact
b UVR is an Undervoltage Release
b The standard location for factory mounted Auxiliary and
Alarm Switches is the Left Pocket
Accessory Maximums
DG, FG, JG, LG Maximum Accessories:
b Maximum of six (6) switches total

b DG, FG Maximum of two (2) Alarm Switches, one each in the
Left and Right Pockets. JG, LG Max. of 1 Alarm, Left only
MG, NG, PG Maximum Accessories:
b Maximum of eight (8) switches total

b Maximum of two (2) Alarm Switches, Left Pocket only
5-152
VL Technical Data

DG
FG JG LG MG NG
PG
Max rated continuous current

150 250 400 600 800 1200
1600
Rated operational voltage
NEMA

V AC 600
600
600
600
600
600
600

IEC
V
AC
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage

Main conducting paths
kV
8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Auxiliary circuits
kV
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ambient temperature range
C
-25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75
-25 to +75 -25 to +75 -25 to +75

High ambient derating
(thermal-mag.)
50C
93% 93% 93% 93% 95% 95% 95%

60C
86% 86% 86% 86% 86% 86% 80%

70C
80% 80% 80% 80% 80% 80% 74%
Operating cycles 20,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 5,000 3,000 3,000
Max switching rate (per hour)
120
120
120
60
60
30
30
Power loss (at max. rated current)
Thermal-magnetic W
15 48
32 80
60 175
85 230
170 250
150 220 200 260
Electronic trip unit W
40
60
90
160
250
210
260
IEC
Time constant t = 10 ms
1 current path 2 current paths 3 current paths

in series
in series
Up to 250V DC 440V DC
600V DC

NEMA
Time constant t = 8 ms
2 poles switching 1 current path

250V DC max.
30 30 30 30 42 42 42
3 poles switching 2 current paths in series

500V DC max.
18 25 35 35 65 65 65
Accessories
Auxiliary/ Alarm switch
Current rating (1 or 2 switches)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Current rating (3 or 4 same switch)
A
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Shunt trip
Pick-up voltage
Power consumption (short-time) at:

48 60 V AC

110 127 V AC

208 277 VAC

380 600 V AC

24 V DC

48 60 V DC

110 127 VDC

220 250 V DC

Max. operating time
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
0.7 1.1
VA
158 200 158 200
158 200
158 200
380 480
380 480 380
VA
136 158 136 158
136 158
136 158
302 353
302 353 302
VA
274 350 274 350
274 350
274 350
330 439
330 439 330
VA
158 237 158 237
158 237
158 237
243 384
243 384 243
W
110 110 110 110 360 360 360
W
110 172 110 172
110 172
110 172
512 820
512 820 512
W
220 254 220 254
220 254
220 254
302 353
302 353 302
W
97 110
97 110
97 110
97 110
348 397
348 397 348
ms
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
480
353
439
384
820
353
397
Consult
Siemens for short circuit values.

Review individual frame and type values.
5-153
VL Technical Data
Undervoltage trip
DG FG JG LG MG NG PG
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Drop voltage (percentage)

V
35% 70% 35% 70% 35% 70% 35% 70% 35% 70% 35% 70% 35% 70%
Pick-up voltage (percentage)
V
70% 85% 70% 85% 70% 85% 70% 85% 70% 85% 70% 85% 70% 85%
Power consumption (continuous) at:

110 127 V AC VA
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.1
1.1
1.1

220 250 VAC VA
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.1
2.1
2.1
208 V
AC
VA
1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2
277 V
AC
VA
2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 1.6

380 415 VAC VA
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0

440 480 VAC VA
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.3
2.3
2.3

500 525 VAC VA
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.9
2.9
2.9
Max. opening time
ms
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Motorized operating mechanism
Motor with stored energy mechanism
(synchronizable)
X X X X X

Motor Operator
X
X
Max. switching rate (per hour)
120
120
120
60
60
30
30
Command duration
ms
20 50
20 50
20 50
20 50
20 50
50
50
Closing time
ms
<100 <100 <100 <100 <100 <5,000
<5,000
Charging time
s
<5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
Break time
s
<5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
Power consumption
VA/W
<100 <100 <100 <100 <250 <250 <250
Control voltages 24 VDC

42 48 VAC / DC

60 VAC / DC

110 - 127 VAC/ DC

220 - 250 VAC/ DC
Operating range: 85 110% of rated control voltage
5-154
Technical Data

Note: The information provided on
this and the next page is intended for
reference and recommendation only.
Because several variables can act on
a circuit breakers performance at the
same time, the data below is based less
on controlled testing, than on experience
and engineering judgment. Contact
Siemens for further information on
Table 1 Temperature derating date for thermal-magnetic breakers

Reference Ampere
Rating at
40 C (104 F)
50
60
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
Ampere Rating at:

25 C
(77 F)
55
66
77
99
110
137
165
192
220
247
275
330
385
440
550
660
770
880
50C
(122 F)
46
56
65
84
94
114
136
159
182
205
235
276
325
372
468
564
658
754
60 C
(140 F)
42
52
60
78
87
100
120
140
160
180
220
252
301
340
435
525
613
704
990
828
749
1100
1320
1540
900
1090
1304
825
1000
1148
1600
1760
1500
1320
DG
FG
JG
LG
MG
NG
PG
Siemens Electronic Trip Unit Breakers

are insensitive to temperature changes.
However, they do include circuitry
to protect the components from
abnormally high temperatures.
Altitude
Reduced air density at altitudes greater
than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the
ability of a molded case circuit breaker
to transfer heat and interrupt faults.
Therefore, circuit breakers applied at
these altitudes should have interrupting,
insulation and continuous currents
derated as indicated in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Altitude adjustment
5-155
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
900
1000
1200
1400
Siemens Breaker Frames
High Ambient Temperatures

Because thermal-magnetic trip breakers
are temperature sensitive and calibrated
for a specific ambient of 40 C (104
F) (average enclosure temperature),
a higher ambient will cause the
breaker to trip at lower current than
its nameplate rating, in other words,
causing the breaker to derate (see
Table 1). Similarly, the current carrying
capacity of a circuit conductor is based
upon a certain ambient temperature, a
higher ambient will reduce its current
carrying capacity, causing it to derate.
Thus, with a fluctuating temperature,
a thermal-magnetic breaker will derate
nearly parallel with its connected
circuit conductors and maintain close
circuit protection. If the application
temperature exceeds 40 C (104 F)
and is known, either a breaker specially
calibrated for the higher ambient or one
oversized according to Table 1 may be
selected. In a case such as this, the
circuit conductors should be oversized
as well.
Reference
Technical Data
Reference
Unusual Operating Conditions 400 Hz Systems

Cable and Bus Sizing
The cable and bus sizes to be utilized
at 400Hz are not based on standard
National Electric Codes tables for 60Hz
application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400Hz. All bus bars
specified are based upon mounting
the bars in the vertical plane to allow
maximum air flow. All bus bars are
spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in. (6
mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in
the horizontal plane will necessitate
additional drafting. Edgewise orientation
of the bus may change the maximum
ratings indicated. If additional
information is required for other
connections of cable or bus, contact
Siemens for information.
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that temperatures
be measured on the line and load
terminals or T-connectors of the
center pole. These are usually the
hottest terminals with a balanced
load. A maximum temperature of
75C (35C over a maximum ambient
of 40C) would verify the particular
application. Temperature profiles taken
on these breakers can be correlated to
ensure that the hottest points within
the breaker are within the required
temperature limits.
Interrupting Rating
Circuit breakers used in 400 Hz
systems are limited to a 5000 A
interrupting rating. If higher ratings are
required, consult Siemens.
MOLDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit Breaker Derating Required

This table lists the maximum
continuous current carrying capacity
for Siemens breakers at 400Hz. Due to
the increased resistance of the copper
sections resulting from the skin effect
produced by eddy currents at these
frequencies, circuit breakers in many
cases require derating. The thermal
derating on these devices is based
upon 100%, three phase application in
open air in a maximum of 40C (104 F)
with 48 in. (1219 mm) of the specified
cable or bus at the line and load side.
Additional derating of not less than
20% will be required if the circuit
breaker is to be utilized in an enclosure.
Further derating may be required if
the enclosure ambient temperature
exceeds 40C(104 F).
Maximum continuous ampere rating

at 40C (104F)
60HZ
Breaker
type
DG
FG
JG
JG
100%
Rated
LG
The
Open air
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
250
300
350
400
250
300
350
400
400
500
600
400HZ
Open air
48
57
63
72
80
90
95
105
125
90
95
105
125
140
160
180
200
210
240
260
300
210
240
260
300
300
375
420
Enclosed after No of
derating
pieces
38
1
46
1
50
1
58
1
64
1
72
1
75
1
84
1
100
1
72
1
75
1
84
1
100
1
112
1
128
1
144
1
160
1
168
1
192
1
208
1
240
2
210
1
240
1
260
1
300
2
240
2
300
2
336
2
information provided on this page is intended for

reference and recommendation only. Because several
variables can act on a circuit breakers performance at
the same time, the data above is based less on controlled testing, than on experience and engineering
5-156
Maximum continuous ampere rating

at 40C (104F)
75C (167F)
Copper
cable per pole
Wire size
#8
#6
#4
#4
#3
#3
#2
#1
#1/0
#3
#2
#1
#1/0
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
250 kcmil
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
500 kcmil
#2/0
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
500 kcmil
#3/0
#3/0
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
Breaker
type
LG
MG
MG
100%
Rated
NG
NG
100%
Rated
PG
PG
100%
Rated
60HZ
400HZ
Open air
Open air
400
500
600
600
700
800
600
700
800
800
900
1000
1200
900
1000
1200
1200
1400
1600
1200
300
375
420
430
500
560
430
500
560
560
600
650
780
600
650
780
780
850
960
780
240
300
336
360
400
448
430
500
560
448
480
520
624
600
650
780
624
680
768
780
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
4
4
4
5
4
#3/0
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
350 kcmil
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
350 kcmil
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
300 kcmil
350 kcmil
400 kcmil
350 kcmil
350 kcmil
400 kcmil
350 kcmil
400 kcmil
500 kcmil
500 kcmil
400 kcmil
1400
850
850
500 kcmil
1600
960
960
500 kcmil
judgment.Contact Siemens for further information on

derating may be required if the ambient
temperature is greater than 40C (104F).
Additional
75C (167F)
Copper
cable per pole
Calculated
Enclosed after No of
derating
pieces
Wire size
after derating to compensate for the heating

of the copper conductor, caused by the skin effect
generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415HZ.
POWER PRODUCT
Panelboards
Contents
6
PANELBOARDS
Features, Reference Guide & General Specifications

6-2 6-7
Factory Assembled Panelboard Coding System 6-8
Type P1
Specifications
6-9 6-10
Unassembled panelboard
6-11 6-12
Main Lug and Main Breaker
6-13
Branch and Subfeed Breakers
6-14 6-16
Modifications and Additions
6-17 6-18
S1/S2 Replacement parts
6-19
Enclosure Dimensions
6-20
Type P2
Specifications
6-21
Enclosure Selection / Dimensions
6-22
Unassembled panelboard
6-23 6-24
Main Breaker and Subfeed Breakers
6-25
Branch Breakers
6-26
6-27 6-30
6-31
Type P3
Specifications
6-32
Enclosure Selection / Dimensions
6-33
Alternate Main, Branch and Subfeed Breakers
6-34 6-35
6-36 6-38
6-39
Type S5
Specifications
6-40
Main Lug and Main Breaker Selection
6-41
Branch Breakers
6-41
6-42
Modifications, Additions, Replacements for Circuit Breakers
6-43
Type F2
Specifications and Fuse Types
6-44
Main Lug and Main Fusible
6-44
6-46
Modifications, Additions, Replacements for Fusible Switches
6-47
Panel Skirt/System Types, AC & DC Voltages 6-48
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Introduction
General
This generation of panelboards from Siemens offers the

high level of engineering and innovation youve come to
expect from the leader in power distribution technology.
The P Series line of panelboards, complimented by the S5
power panels and F2 switchboards, offers a stepped approach
to power distribution.
Additional strength has been added to an already rugged and
durable panelboard family. Engineered specifically to provide
maximum flexibility, the new designs simplify wiring and
reduce material requirements making them easier to install
and less costly than competitive products. At the heart of
these product lines is the extensive research and technology
found among Siemens circuit protection devices both
fusible switches and molded case circuit breakers.
The line is anchored by the innovative P1. Featuring the industrys
most flexible designs, the P1 virtually eliminates common
errors, such as feed direction, and main lug versus main
breaker. Increasing distribution is simplified by the ability
to add feed-thru lugs. Because of its unique design, the P1
meets the majority of lighting panel needs with only six
standard sizes.
Subsequent steps in the P Series offer increased capacity and

more design options:
b The highly flexible P2 provides options to fit the most
demanding specifications.
b Sized more like a lighting panel, the P3 packs the power of
a distribution panel in a space-saving design.
b The powerful S5 is a distribution panel that allows circuit
breakers as branch and main devices.
b The F2 anchors the high end of the series. With larger
fusible and circuit breaker branch and main devices, the
venerable F2 delivers maximum power and flexibility to
larger distribution systems.
Features Overview
P Series lighting panel features include Fas-Latch trim, which
is popular among installers; the jacking screw system, that
permits adjustments even after wiring has been installed; our
exclusive split neutral, and more. Many panelboards have the
capability of mixing and matching breakers of different sizes
and ratings or changing from main lug to main breaker, or
adding subfeed breakers without changing the box size.
Key Panelboard Features

Lighting and Appliance Applications
PANELBOARDS
Power Panelboard Applications
P1
P2
P3
S5
F2
Convertible from Top Feed to Bottom Feed

or Vice Versa
Change from Main Lug to Main Breaker or

add Subfeed without changing enclosure size
Up To 250 Amps
Up To 250 Amps
Short-Circuit Rating Label Giving Performance Level
Space-Saving, Horizontally Mounted MainBreaker
Standard Aluminum Ground Assembly
Blank End-Walls
Standard
Bolted Current-Carrying Parts
Split Neutral
Connection Accessible from Front
Screw-Type Mechanical Lugs
Time-Reducing Wing Nuts to Secure Interior

Without Tools
Main and Branch Devices Connected With

Case-Hardened Hardware
Flush Lock, Concealed Door Hinges/Trim Screws
Symmetrical Interior Mounting Studs

To Eliminate Upside-Down Mounting of Box
Interior Height Adjustment for Flush Applications

Mix and Match Fusible Switch Circuit Breaker Capability
Shallow Depth
12.75"
5.75"
5.75"
7.75"
12.75"
Accepts a Wide Range of Fuse Types
Accepts Vacu-Break Fusible Switch
Accepts a Wide Range of Circuit Breakers
Optional Compression Lugs

Standard
KOs available on P1 and P2 5.75" Deep x 20" Wide
boxes and P3 - 7.75" deep x 24" wide boxes.
6-2
Panelboards
Service Entrance Equipment
When a panelboard is used as service entrance equipment, it
must be located as close as practicable to the point of entrance
of building supply conductors. Panelboards must be identified
as "Service Entrance" at the time of order entry in order to be
supplied with the appropriate CSA certification and labelling.
Panels must include a connector for bonding and grounding
neutral conductor. Please consult CSA, CEC and local
inspection authorities for specification and installation guidelines.
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating
The term Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating refers
to the application of series connected circuit breakers in a
combination that allows some breakers to have lower individual
interrupting ratings than the available fault current. This is
permitted as long as the series combination has been tested
and certified by CSA. "Series Rated" must be identified at the
time of order entry.
Standards
CSA: C22.2 No.29. Certified under files # 93833
UL: 67 and 50. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
under Panelboards File #E2269, and #E4016.
Fig. G-1
Subfeed Lugs or Double Lug

Fig. G-2
Feed-thru lugs are mounted at the opposite end of the main

bus from the main lugs or main breaker and are used to
connect two or more panelboards to the incoming feeder. The
feeder cables are brought into Panelboard 1 and connected
to the main lugs or main breaker. Cables interconnecting
the two panelboards are connected to the feed-thru lugs in
Panelboard1 and are carried over the main lugs in Panelboard 2.
This arrangement could be reversed with the main lugs located
at the top and the feed-thru lugs at the bottom of the panel.
Subfeed lugs are mounted directly beside the main incoming
lugs and are used to connect two or more panelboards to
the incoming feeder. The feeder cables are brought into
Panelboard 1 and connected to the main lugs. Another set of
cables that are the same size are connected to the subfeed
lugs of Panelboard 1 and are carried over the main lugs of
Panelboard 2.
6
PANELBOARDS
Wire Connectors
Standard wire connectors in Siemens panels are suitable for
copper or aluminum cables rated 60/75 degree. Copper main
lugs are a price-added option for most panel types and some
Circuit Breakers (check with Siemens sales for availability). It
should be noted that most copper lugs will only accept copper
cables. Some applications, 100% rated devices in particular,
require that the cable and connectors be rated 90 degree but
are sized to the 75 degree tables.
General
Lug Data
Feed-Thru Lugs
Standard ground connectors are also suitable for copper or

aluminum wire. Ground connector assemblies (EGK, IGK) have
(7) 1/0 max. and (15) #6 max. connections. The 1/0 holes are
capable of connecting up (3) #10 max. wires. Copper ground
assemblies (ECGK, ICGK) are rated for copper wire only and
have the same wiring capacity as the Al/Cu connectors.
Standard neutrals, like standard main lugs, are also rated for
copper or aluminum wire. The neutral cross bar material
follows the selection bus. Copper neutral lugs are rated for
copper cable only and available as a price added option.
6-3
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
General
Bussing Sequence
All breakers have bolted connections.
The panel design provides bracing up to
200,000A IR CSA short circuit rating.
Interiors are designed to accommodate

top or bottom feed.
Circuit Breaker Lighting

Panel Type P1
Circuit Breaker Lighting or

Distribution Panel Types P2/P3
Case-hardened, high performance,

thread rolling screws are used on
branch bus.
Circuit Breaker Distribution

Panel Type S5
Fusible Switch Distribution

Panel Type F2
PANELBOARDS
Panelboard Ratings
Description
P1
P2
P3
S5
F2
Max. Voltage
600V AC Max.
250V DC Max
600V AC Max.
250V DC Max.
600V AC Max.
250V DC Max.
600V AC Max.
250V DC Max.
600V AC Max.
250V DC Max.
System
1-Phase,
1-Phase,
3-Phase,
3-Phase,
1-Phase,
1-Phase,
3-Phase,
3-Phase,
1-Phase,
1-Phase,
3-Phase,
3-Phase,
1-Phase, 3-wire
3-Phase, 4-wire
3-Phase, 3-wire
1-Phase, 3-wire
3-Phase, 4-wire
3-Phase, 3-wire
2-wire
3-wire
3-wire
4-wire
2-wire
3-wire
3-wire
4-wire
2-wire
3-wire
4-wire
3-wire
Mains
Main Lugs
Main Breaker
Main Switch
125A-400A
100A-400A
125A-600A
100A-600A
400A-800A
400A-600A
400A-1200A
400A-1200A
800A-1200A
200A-600A
Circuits
18, 30, 42
18, 30, 42, 54, 66

78, 90, 102, 114
18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90
Branch Ratings
15-100Aa
15-400A
15-400A
15-1200A MCCB
30A-600A Fusible
Branch
Disconnect
Devices
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD,

BQD6, BLE, BLEH,
BLF, BLHF, BAF, BAFH
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD,

BQD6, QJ2d, HQJ2d,
QJ2Hd, HQJ2Hd, ED2,
ED4, ED6, HED4,
BLE, BLEH, BLF,
BLHF, BAF, BAFH,
BGL, NGB
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD,

BQD6, QJ2d, HQJ2d,
QJ2Hd, HQJ2Hd, ED2,
ED4, HED4, ED6, BLHF,
BAF, BAFH, NGB, NEB,
HEB
All 15-1200A MCCBs and

30-200A VB switches
30-600A VK/VB switches
Subfeed
Circuit
Breakersab
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4,

QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, FD6,
HFD6, FXD6
FD6, HFD6,
FXD6, HFXD6
JD6, HJD6, JXD6, FD6,

HFD6, FXD6, HFXD6
Enclosure
Heights
- inches (mm)
32, 38, 44 @250 A

(813, 965, 1118)
56, 62, 68 @400 A
(1422, 1575, 1727)
26, 32, 38, 44, 50, 56,

62, 68, 74
(660-1880)
56, 62, 68, 74, 80

(1422-2032)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
Standard
Trims
Fas-Latch 1 Piece
Surface or Flush
Fas-Latch 1 Piece
Surface or Flush
Fas-Latch 1 Piece
Surface or Flush
a P1
can have 1 subfeed breaker. P2 can have up to (2) FD

subfeed breakers.
b JD and FD breakers are mounted vertical. Limitations
apply.
6-4
c Trim
ring provided for flush applications.

maximum of (4) QJ breakers may be mounted in a
P2 Panel and are single mounted.
e A maximum of (4) QJ breakers may be mounted in a
P3 panel and are twin mounted.
d A
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
General
Typical Panelboard Modifications

Description
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards

Power and Distribution Panelboards
P1 P2 P3 S5
F2
Box
Type 3R/12
Type 4/4X
Drip Proof Hood
Gasketed Trim
Wider Box
Deeper Box
Front
Hinged Front
Door-in-Door Front
Nameplate
Door with Padlock
Interior
Aluminum Equipment Ground Bar
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Copper Equipment Ground Bar

Insulated Equipment Ground

Subfeed Lugs

Feed-Thru Lugs

Compression Lugs

Copper Lugs

Check Plant For
Check Plant For
200% Neutral

Availability Availability

Tin plated Aluminum
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Tin plated Copper

Silver plated Copper
Tin Std./
Tin Std./
Tin Std./
Silver Std./
Silver Std./
Copper Plating - Tin or Silver

Silver Optional
Silver Optional
Silver Optional
Tin Optional
Tin Optional
Circuit Breaker Shunt Trips
R, J and T Fuse Clips
Available as an option.
6
PANELBOARDS
6-5
Panelboards
Options
Standard Trim (FAS-Latch)
PANELBOARDS
Trim
Also available:
b Screw to Box Trim
b Piano Hinge Trim
b Trim with Padlock
Door in Door Front
Hinged Front
6-6
Panelboards
Special Enclosures
Options
Type 4/4X Enclosure
PANELBOARDS
Type 3R and 3R/12 Enclosure
Panel Family Portrait
Panelboard Family for Lighting and Appliance and Distribution Panel Applications
6-7
Panelboards
Factory Assembled
Selection
Panelboard Coding System

Type of Panel
P1, P2, P3, S5, F2
Voltage and System*
C = 208Y/120 3 4 W Wye AC - All

E = 480Y/277 3 4 W Wye AC - All
D = 240 3 3 W Delta AC - All
A = 120/240 1 3 W Grounded Neutral AC (2) - All
L = 600/347 3 4 W Wye AC - All
N = 125V DC 2-Pole Branches Only - All
O = 125/250V DC 2-Pole Branches Only - All
P = 125/250V DC 2 & 3-Pole Branches - All
*For any voltage system not listed, check with sales for availability.
Circuits or

Enclosure Height
P1 18, 30, 42 S5, F2 60, 75, 90
P2 18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90, 102 , 114
P3 18, 30, 42, 54, 66, 78, 90
Main Lug (ML), Main Breaker
(See Main Breaker Table coding below)
Amperage
100400A = P1
400 800A = P3
100600A = P2 400 1200A = S5, F2
Bus Plating
Letter
Tin-Plated A
Tin-Plated C
Silver-Plated E
PANELBOARDS
Bus Material
Aluminum
Copper
Copper
Bus
Code P1 P2 P3 S5
F2
C n/a n/a
E
optional optional optional
Indicates default for this bus type.

Feed Location
T = Top
B = Bottom
Mounting
S = Surface
F = Flush. Flush trims extend 3/4" beyond each side of the base box dimensions on P1, P2 and P3 and
extend 1 beyond each side of the base box dimensions on.
Main Breaker Coding

(Breaker Type) Code
(BAF) BA, (BAFH) BF, (BQD) BQ, (BQD6) B6, (BL) BL, (BLEH) BE, (BLH) BH, (BLR) BR, (HBL) HB, (BGL-SWI) B1, (BLE-GFCI) BG,
(BLF-GFCI) BC, (CED6) CE, (ED2) ED, (ED4) E4, (ED6) E6, (HED4) H4, (BLHF-GFCI) B4, (NGB) NB, (QJ2) QJ, (QJ2H) Q2, (QJH2)
QH, (Q3) HQJ2H, (CFD6) CF, (FD6) FD, (FXD6) FX, (HFD6) HF, (HFXD6) H2, (HHFD6) H1, (HHFXD6) H3, (CJD6) CJ, (HHJD6) H4,
(HHJXD6) H9, (HJD6) H6, (HJXD6) H5, (HJXD6H) H7, (JD6) J6, (JXD2) JD, (JXD2H) J2, (JXD6) JX, (JXD6H) JH, (SJD6H) SH, (SJD6)
SJ, (SHJD6) SX, (SHJD6H) SY, (SCJD6) SC, (CLD6) CL, (HLD6) HL, (LD6) L6, (LXD6) LX, (SLD6) SL, (SHLD6) S2, CM, (CMD6H)
CH, (HMD6) HM, (HMXD6) HR, (HMXD6H) HS, (MD6) MD, (MXD6) MX, (MXD6H) MH, SCMD6 (SO), SCMD6H (SQ), SMD6 (SM),
SMD6H (AX), SHMD6 (S5), SHMD6H (S6)(CND6) CN, (CND6H) C6, (HND6) HN, (HNXD6) HT, (HNXD6H) HX, (ND6) ND, (NXD6)
NX, (NXD6H) NT, SCND6 (SR), SCND6H (ST), SND6 (SN), SHND6 (AD), SND6H (AY)
6-8
Panelboards
Type P1 Panelboards
Reference
Features and Benefits

The standard Siemens P1 panelboard has some unique features that make it easier to design for an engineer, easier to
reconfigure in the field for a contractor, and easier to upgrade and maintain for the owner. What makes it different is its split
neutral design and its open ended bus. In the Siemens panel, instead of the common single neutral bus on one end, there is
a neutral bus on both sides that is cross-bussed. This makes branch wiring simpler and cleaner the lead lengths for line and
neutral can now be made the same, creating more room and a neater installation. It also allows access to both ends of the bus
as a standard feature this provides the flexibility to make changes in the field, even if it wasnt part of the original configuration.
MAIN BREAKER or SUB-FEED BREAKER
MAIN LUGS or FEED-THROUGH LUGS
6
PANELBOARDS
INTEGRAL BUS MOUNTED SPD
The following can be done to a standard P1 panelboard in the field with no modifications:
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Change from top fed to bottom fed

Add feed-through lugs
Add an Integral bus-mounted SPD
Add a sub feed breaker up to 250 amps
Change from Main Lugs to Main Breaker
Change from Main Breaker to Main Lugs
Panel may have up to two ground assemblies. Options are standard aluminum, copper, insulated or isolated aluminum or
copper. Mounting provisions in opposing corners of the box are standard. Any of these options may be added after
installation.
6-9
Panelboards
Type P1 Panelboards
Voltage - 600Y/347V AC Max.

250V DC Max.
Amperage - 400 amp Max. Mains

100 amp Max. Branch
Short Circuit Rating 100,000 A @ 240Vac*
Branch breaker symmetrical
interrupting capacity based on CSA's
test procedures
Feed thru and subfeed lugs may result
in lower interrupting ratings if not
protected by a main device. Consult
sales office.
PANELBOARDS
Panelboards
Certified by CSA under file #165172
Listed by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., under Panelboards File #E2269
for interiors and #E4016 for boxes
and fronts.
Service
1-phase 2-wire - 120 Vac, 240 Vac,
24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 125 Vdc
1-phase 3-wire - 120/240 Vac,
125/250 Vdc
3-phase 3-wire - 600Y/347 Vac. and
480Y/277 (when derived from 3-phase
4-wire system), 240 Vac, 120 Vac,
125/250 Vdc
3-phase 4-wire - 208Y/120 Vac,
240/120 Vac, 480Y/277 Vac,
600Y/347 Vac.
Enclosure
Type 1 enclosure 20 wide x 5.75 deep.
b End walls are blank as standard.
End walls with knockouts are available.
Panelboard Trims and Doors
Standard panelboards are furnished
with trim featuring concealed fasteners
and hinges with a flush door lock.
All are factory-assembled for ease of
installation. Trims are fabricated from
code gauge steel and finished ANSI-61
grey paint. See page 6-6 for optional
fronts.
General
Side Gutter Wiring Space - Inches (mm)
Main Breaker Panel Connectors

Ampere
Rating
Connector Wire Range
100
(1) #14 - 1/0 AWG Al/Cu
125
(1) #4 - 1/0 AWG Al/Cu
225
(1) #4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al/Cu
(1) #4/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Al or

(1) #6/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu
(1) #4/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or

(2) #3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu
250

400

Connector ranges indicated do not

apply to all main breaker types. Refer
to molded case circuit breaker standard
pressure wire connector chart (Section
5) for the connector range of a specific
frame.
125
250

400

(2) 1/0 AWG - 250 kcmil Al/Cu or

Main Breaker Wire Bending Space Inches (mm)

Neutral
Location
Side Gutter
Main Breaker
BL, BLH, HBL,
BQD, BQD6
NGB
ED2, ED4, ED6,
HED4
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2-H
FD6, FXD6,
HFD6
JXD6b, HJD6b
20"
w/box
24"
w/box
(optional)
20"
w/box
8.500
(216)
10.500
(267)
11.500
(292)
8.000
(203)
6.125
(156)
6.500
(165)
5.250
(133)
15.000
(381)
10.000
(254)
8.125
(206)
8.500
(216)
7.250
(184)
15.000
(381)
11.500
(292)
11.500
(292)
11.500
(292)
11.500
(292)
26.750
(680)
Main Lug End Gutter Dimensions Inches (mm)

Amp End Neutral
Rating Gutter Location
125
10.500 (267)
250
10.500 (267)
11.500 (292)
11.500 (292)
400c
25.500 (648)
26.750 (680)
* IR rating will depend on the type of main breaker applied or if main breaker
is Series Rated with an up stream protective device (circuit breaker or fuse).
400 amp main breaker panels have wire bending space

available for 600 kcmil.
b 400A main breaker is vertical mounted.
6-10
Panel
Width 24"
(Optional)
6.375 (162)
7.375 (187)
5.500 (140)
7.500 (191)
6.125 (156)
8.125 (206)
Dd
6.500 (165)
8.500 (216)
5.250 (133)
7.250 (184)
Branch Breaker Side Gutters
Main Lug Connectors (phase)
Main Breakers
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6, ED2, NGB,
ED4, ED6, HED4, QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H,
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, JXD6, JD6, HJXD6,
HJD6. (All main breakers except 400
amp frame are mounted horizontal.)
a P1

Reference
Panel
Letter
Width 20"
c Feed-thru
lug and neutral wire bending space is 15.000"

(381mm) and 16.250" (413mm) respectively on 400A panel.
d P1 panel limited to (1) subfeed 250 amperes max.
Weight Approximate
Total panelboard weight when filled with
a normal quantity of breakers and
accessories is:
b About 3 lbs. (1kg) per inch (54g per mm)
of box height
Gauge Steel Boxes
Width - in (mm) Height - in (mm) Gauge Steel
20 (508)
All
#14
Gauge Steel Trims - Surface, Flush

20 (508)
All
#14
Series Connected Short Circuit Ratings

The term Series Connected Short
Circuit Rating refers to the application
of series connected circuit breakers in a
combination that allows some breakers
to have lower individual interrupting
ratings than the available fault current.
This is permitted as long as the series
combination has been tested and
certified by CSA. Series ratings must be
specified on order at time of entry.
See Circuit Breaker Section of this book
for combinations available.
Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P1
Reference
Interior Numbering System
Type P1 Unassembled Panels are completely convertible from main lug to main breaker and vice-versa. Additionally, feed-thru lugs or
a subfeed circuit breaker up to 250 amperes can be added without increasing the box height.
1 8
M C
2 5 0
1. P1 Interior
2. Voltage and System
A = 120/240V, 1-Phase 3-Wire
C = 208Y/120V, 3-Phase 4-Wire
L = 600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire

3, 4. Circuit 18, 30, 42
5, 6. Mains ML = Main Lug

MC = Convertible Mains

Select Main Lug Kit or Breaker Mounting Kit on page 6-13 and 6-14

Select Main Breaker Kit on page 6-13 and 6-14
7, 8, 9. Amperage 400A max
10. Main Bus Material

A = Aluminum
C = Copper
6
PANELBOARDS
Note: Standard bussing in P1 panels is tin plated for aluminum and copper.

Standard bus is temperature rated to the maximum amperage in the panel.
Branch Breakers
Panel Type
Voltage (Max.)
Breaker Type

P1

240
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6
600/347
BQD, BQD6
Power Product Catalogue Page

See section 5
6-11
Panelboards
Selection
Interior, Box and Trim selection

400A Max. 20" Wide x 5.75" Deep
1. Determine voltage, system, amperage,
bussing material and type of main entry
to select the appropriate Interior from the
table below.
2. Select the type of box and trim needed and
select the appropriate height based on the
number of circuits.
3. Select main lug kit or main breaker kit.

Note: Main/Subfeed breaker mounting kits
may be ordered with or without breaker,
see pages 6-13 and 6-14 for selection.
4. List required branch circuit breakers:
Type BL, BQD or BQD6 breakers.
5. Select accessories on page 6-15.
Type P1 Unassembled Panelboards

Interiors Only Less Branch Breakers
Amperes
Max. No.
Rating Mains of Circuits
Boxes
Trims
Height - Inches (mm) Type 1
Type
3R/12a
Surface
P1A18ML250A
P1A30ML250A
P1A42ML250A
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
P1A18MC400A
P1A30MC400A
P1A42MC400A
P1A18ML400A
P1A30ML400A
P1A42ML400A
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
Cu
P1A18MC250C
P1A30MC250C
P1A42MC250C
P1A18ML250C
P1A30ML250C
P1A42ML250C
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
Cu
P1A18MC400C
P1A30MC400C
P1A42MC400C
P1A18ML400C
P1A30ML400C
P1A42ML400C
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
250
18
30
42
Al
P1C18MC250A
P1C30MC250A
P1C42MC250A
P1C18ML250A
P1C30ML250A
P1C42ML250A
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
400
18
30
42
Al
P1C18MC400A
P1C30MC400A
P1C42MC400A
P1C18ML400A
P1C30ML400A
P1C42ML400A
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
250
18
30
42
Cu
P1C18MC250C
P1C30MC250C
P1C42MC250C
P1C18ML250C
P1C30ML250C
P1C42ML250C
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
400
18
30
42
Cu
P1C18MC400C
P1C30MC400C
P1C42MC400C
P1C18ML400C
P1C30ML400C
P1C42ML400C
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
250
18
30
42
Al
P1L18MC250A
P1L30MC250A
P1L42MC250A
P1L18ML250A
P1L30ML250A
P1L42ML250A
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
400
18
30
42
Al
P1L18MC400A
P1L30MC400A
P1L42MC400A
P1L18ML400A
P1L30ML400A
P1L42ML400A
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
250
18
30
42
Cu
P1L18MC250C
P1L30MC250C
P1L42MC250C
P1L18ML250C
P1L30ML250C
P1L42ML250C
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
B32
B38
B44
WP32
WP38
WP44
S32B
S38B
S44B
F32B
F38B
F44B
400
18
30
42
Cu
P1L18MC400C
P1L30MC400C
P1L42MC400C
P1L18ML400C
P1L30ML400C
P1L42ML400C
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
B56
B62
B68
WP56
WP62
WP68
S56B
S62B
S68B
F56B
F62B
F68B
Main Bus
Material
Convertible Main
Main Lug
250
18
30
42
Al
P1A18MC250A
P1A30MC250A
P1A42MC250A
400
18
30
42
Al
250
18
30
42
400
18
30
42
PANELBOARDS
1-Phase, 3-Wire
120/240V
3-Phase, 4-Wire
208Y/120V
3-Phase, 4-Wire
600Y/347V
Hinged door included with type 3R/12 enclosures.

trims extend 3/4" beyond each side of the base
box dimensions.
b Flush
6-12
Flushb
Panelboards
Selection
Main Entry Kit Selection
Main Breaker Mounting Kits with Breakers

Max. Interrupting Rating (kA)
Catalogue
Number
Description
240V
480V
600V
MBKBL12100
Kit with 2-Pole BL 100A Breaker
10
MBKBL33100
Kit with 3-Pole BL 100A Breaker
10
MBKQJ12225
Kit with 2-Pole QJ2 225A Breaker
10
MBKQJ33150
10
MBKQJ33200
10
MBKQJ33225
10
MBKED33100
Kit with 3-Pole ED6 100A Breaker
65
25
18
MBKED33125
Kit with 3-Pole ED6 125A Breaker
65
25
18
MBKFD33200
Kit with 3-Pole FXD6 200A Breaker
65
35
22
MBKFD33225
65
35
22
MBKFD33250
65
35
22
MBKHF33250
Kit with 3-Pole HFD6 250A Breaker
100
65
25
MBKJD33400a
Kit with 3-Pole JXD6 400A Breaker
65
35
25
MBKFD33250
(Breaker included)
Breaker Mounting Kits without Breaker Main or Subfeed (250A max.)

Amp Rating
100
Breaker Typesb
BL, BLH, HBL
125
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
225
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
JD6, JXD6, HJD6
3 Phase
MBKBL3
1 Phase
MBKED1
3 Phase
MBKED3
1 Phase
MBKQJ1
3 Phase
MBKQJ3
1 Phase
MBKFD1
3 Phase
MBKFD3
1 Phase
MBKJD1
3 Phase
MBKJD3
MBKFD3
(Breaker not included)
PANELBOARDS
400a
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
Catalogue Number
MBKBL1
250
Service
1 Phase
Lug Kits Main and/or Feed-Thru

Amp Rating
Material Wire Range

Al
250
Catalogue Number
MLKA1
3 Phase
MLKA3
1 Phase
MLKC1
Cu
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu
3 Phase
MLKC3
Al
(2) 1/0 - 250 kcmil Al/Cu or

1 Phase
4MLKA1
3 Phase
4MLKA3
Cu
(1) 1/0 AWG - 600 kcmil Cu or

(2) 1/0 AWG - 4/0 AWG Cu
1 Phase
4MLKC1
3 Phase
4MLKC3
400
a 400
Service
1 Phase
amp kits is for main only - not allowed as

subfeed breaker.
b Main
breaker selection p. 6-14.
6-13
Panelboards
Circuit Breaker / Lighting and Distribution
Selection
Type P1 Panelboards
Main Breaker Selection
Ampere Rating
Breaker Type
Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)

240 Vac
480/277 Vac
600Y/347 Vac
Catalogue
Number
Available Trip Values
70
BQD6
65
10
B6
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
100
BL
BLH
HBL
BQD
ED2
10
22
65
65
10
14
BL
BH
HB
BQ
E2
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
125
NGB
ED4
ED6
HED4
100
65
65
100
25
18
25
42
14
18
NB
E4
E6
H4
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
225
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
FD6
FXD6
HFD6
10
22
42
65
65
100
35
35
65
22
22
25
QJ
QH
Q2
FD
FX
HF
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
250
FD6
FXD6
HFD6
65
65
100
35
35
65
22
22
25
FD
FX
HF
250
250
250
400
JD6
JXD6
HJD6
65
65
100
35
35
65
25
25
35
J6
JX
H6
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Subfeed Breakersab
PANELBOARDS
Breaker Type
Number
of Poles

240V
480Y/277V
600Y/347V
QJ2
2, 3
10
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
QJH2
2, 3
22
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
QJ2H
2, 3
42
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
ED2
2, 3
10
15c, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
ED4
2, 3
65
18
15c, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
ED6
2, 3
65
25
18
15c, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60c, 70c, 80c, 90c, 100c, 110c, 125c
HED4
2, 3
100
42
15c, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
FXD6
2, 3
65
35
22
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
FD6
2, 3
65
35
22
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
HFD6
2, 3
100
65
25
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
Note:

For detailed circuit breaker information please

consult section 5. For "Series Rating" tested
combinations, please consult the Siemens Series
Rated Combination Guide p. 5-84.
6-14
a Please
consult CSA, CEC and local inspection authorities for specification and installation guidelines.
increase in box height, space is already built into
P1 panel.
b No
c Amperage
available in 3 pole breaker only.
Panelboards
Circuit Breaker/Lighting and Distribution
Selection
Branch Breakers Selection Guide for P1

1. Select branch breaker type based on
interrupting rating required.
2. Select required amperage.
3. Select number of poles.

4. Select branch breaker catalogue
numbers on page 6-16.
5. Select ground bar and filler to cover

any unused positions.
(See replacement parts & accessories
on page 6-17.)

Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles

120V
120/240V
240V
277V
480/277V
347V
600/347V
BL
1
2
3
10
10
10
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLH
1
2
3
22
22
22
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
HBL
1
2
3
65
65
65
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLR
10
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLF
1
2
10
10
15, 20, 25, 30

15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
BLHF
1
2
22
22
15, 20, 25, 30

15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
BLE
1
2
10
10
15, 20, 30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
BLEH
1
2
22
22
15, 20, 30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
BAF
10
15, 20
BAFH
22
15, 20
BQD
1
2
3
65
65
65
14
14
14
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BQD6
1
2
3
65
65
65
10
10
10
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
BLE, BLEH
PANELBOARDS
BQD, BQD6
BL, BLH, HBL
BAF, BAFH
6-15
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Selection
Branch Breakers Selection for P1

BL Branch Breakers 10,000A IRa
Ampere
Rating
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
AFCI Branch Feeder
Catalogue Number
1-Pole
120/240V
2-Pole
120/240V
2-Pole
240V
3-Pole
240V
B115
B120
B125
B130
B135
B140
B145
B150
B155
B160
B170
B215
B220
B225
B230
B235
B240
B245
B250
B260
B270
B280
B290
B2100
B215R
B220R
B225R
B230R
B235R
B240R
B245R
B250R
B260R
B270R
B280R
B290R
B2100R
B315
B320
B325
B330
B335
B340
B345
B350
B360
B370
B380
B390
B3100
BLH Branch Breakers 22,000A IRa
PANELBOARDS
Ampere
Rating
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
1-Pole
120/240V
2-Pole
120/240V
3-Pole
240V
B115H
B120H
B125H
B130H
B135H
B140H
B145H
B150H
B155H
B160H
B170H
B215H
B220H
B225H
B230H
B235H
B240H
B245H
B250H
B255H
B260H
B270H
B280H
B290H
B2100H
B315H
B320H
B325H
B330H
B335H
B340H
B345H
B350H
B355H
B360H
B370H
B380H
B390H
B3100H
Catalogue Number
1-Pole
120/240V
2-Pole
120/240V
3-Pole
240V
B115HH
B120HH
B125HH
B130HH
B135HH
B140HH
B145HH
B150HH
B155HH
B160HH
B170HH
B215HH
B220HH
B225HH
B230HH
B235HH
B240HH
B245HH
B250HH
B255HH
B260HH
B270HH
B280HH
B290HH
B2100HH
B315HH
B320HH
B325HH
B330HH
B335HH
B340HH
B345HH
B350HH
B355HH
B360HH
B370HH
B380HH
B390HH
B3100HH
BQD6 Branch Breakers 10,000A IR max. @ 600/347 Vac

Ampere
Rating
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
n Built to order.
6-16
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
BAF - 10,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
BA115AF
BA120AF
BAFH - 22,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
BA115AFH
BA120AFH
GFCI Personnel Protection (5mA)

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
BLF - 10,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
25
30
BF115
BF120
BF125n
BF130
BLF - 10,000 IR
2-pole
15
20
30
40
50
60
BF215
BF220
BF230
BF240n
BF250n
BF260n
BLHF - 22,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
25
30
BF115H
BF120H
BF125Hn
BF130H
BLHF - 22,000 IR
2-pole
15
20
30
40
50
60
BF215H
BF220H
BF230H
BF240Hn
BF250Hn
BF260Hn
Catalogue Number
HBL Branch Breakers 65,000A IRa

Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Catalogue Number
1-Pole
347V
2-Pole
600Y/347V
3-Pole
600Y/347V
BQD6115
BQD6120
BQD6125
BQD6130
BQD6135
BQD6140
BQD6145
BQD6150
BQD6160
BQD6170
BQD6215
BQD6220
BQD6225
BQD6230
BQD6235
BQD6240
BQD6245
BQD6250
BQD6260
BQD6270
BQD6315
BQD6320
BQD6325
BQD6330
BQD6335
BQD6340
BQD6345
BQD6350
BQD6360
BQD6370
a To
GFCI Equipment Protection (30mA)

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
BLE - 10,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
30
BE115
BE120
BE130
BLE - 10,000 IR
2-pole
15
20
30
40
50
60
BE215
BE220
BE230
BE240
BE250
BE260n
BLEH - 22,000 IR
1-pole
15
20
30
BE115H
BE120H
BE130H
BLEH - 22,000 IR
2-pole
15
20
30
40
50
60
BE215H
BE220H
BE230H
BE240H
BE250H
BE260Hn
BQD Branch Breakers 65,000A IR max. @ 240 Vacb

Ampere
Rating
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
add shunt trip to BL breakers, see page 6-18

Accessories.
Catalogue Number
1-Pole
120/240V
2-Pole
120/240V
3-Pole
240V
BQD115
BQD120
BQD125
BQD130
BQD135
BQD140
BQD145
BQD150
BQD160
BQD170
BQD180
BQD190
BQD1100
BQD215
BQD220
BQD225
BQD230
BQD235
BQD240
BQD245
BQD250
BQD260
BQD270
BQD280
BQD290
BQD2100
BQD315
BQD320
BQD325
BQD330
BQD335
BQD340
BQD345
BQD350
BQD360
BQD370
BQD380
BQD390
BQD3100
b To
add shunt trip to BQD breakers, see page 6-18

Accessories.
Panelboards
Selection
Type P1 Panelboards
Copper Neutral Lug Kits - 250A

Number
of Circuits Description
Catalogue
Number
18
30
42
CNLK18
CNLK30
CNLK42
2 Branch Neutral Strips, 1 Main Neutral Lug, Hardware
200% Copper Neutral Lug Kits - 250A

18
30
42
2NLK18
2NLK30
2NLK42
2 Branch Neutral Strips, 2 Main Neutral Lug, Hardware
CNLK42
200% Copper Neutral Lug Kits - 400A

18
30
42
42NLK18
42NLK30
42NLK42
2 Branch Neutral Strips, 1 Main 600 kcmil Neutral Lug, Hardware
250A Branch Neutral Connections

No. of circuits
Branch Neutral
Lugs - Wire Size range
18 circuits
30 circuits
(1) #6 - 350 MCM Al/Cu
42 circuits
No. of connections per neutral bar

Al Neutral bar Std
Cu Neutral bar
(2) #4 - #14 AWG

(8) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(9) #4 - #14 AWG

(8) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(2) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(16) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(23) #4 - #14 AWG

(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
2NLK42
400A Branch Neutral Connections
18 circuits
30 circuits
(1) #2 - 600 MCM Al/Cu
42 circuits
No. of connections per neutral bar

Al Neutral bar Std
Cu Neutral bar
(2) #4 - #14 AWG

(8) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(9) #4 - #14 AWG

(8) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(2) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(16) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
(23) #4 - #14 AWG

(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
Type P1 Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories

Catalogue Number
Description
12-1110-01
1 Directory card for 1-42 circuits
11-1824-01
1 Plastic directory card holder
MCHK
1 Metallic directory card holder
10FLHX2
200 BL/BQD breaker line side screws
10FLHX5
500 BL/BQD breaker line side screws
FPLK2
2 Spare Fas-latch trim locks with 2 keys
BK1
1 Bonding kit for P1 panels
EGK
1 Aluminum non-insulated ground bar
ECGK
1 Copper non-insulated ground bar
EWK1
1 End Wall with knockouts (20" W x 5.75" D)
IGK
1 Insulated Al ground bar
ICGK
1 Insulated Cu ground bar
IMK1
1 Interior adjusting kit
JCK24
24 Trim screws and 24 trim clips
NBK03
1 Number Strip 1-42 circuits
QF3-UL
1 Filler Plate
SDKN
1 Dripshield kit (20" W x 5.75" D)
TPS9IKITP1
1 P1 mounting bracket for SPD TPS3 09
PANELBOARDS
Branch Neutral
Lugs - Wire Size range
No. of circuits
NBK03
Type P1 Spare Part Kit

Catalogue
Number
MHKP1
Content
b
b
b
b
b
b
8 trim screws
8 trim clips
1 bonding kit
1 interior adjusting kit
2 Al non-insulated ground bar
2 Cu non-insulated ground bar
b 2 Insulated AI ground bar

b
b
b
b
b

1 numbering strip label
1 directory card
1 plastic directory pouch
1 panelboard instruction book
6-17
Panelboards
Type P1 Panelboard Factory Assembled / Modifications and Additions
Enclosure Modifications
Type 1 with gasket

Type 1 with dripshield
Type 3R - Waterproof and silicone free
Type 3R/12 - Dustproof
Type 4/4X - Standard type 304 Stainless Steel
Type 4/4X - Type 316 Stainless
Wider enclosure - 24 wide
Painted boxes
Custom colours

S
ee page 6-47
Panel Modifications
TPS3 01
- Bus connected
- Internally mounted (30A breaker required
to feed SPD)
- Externally mounted in a 15 high aux.
enclosure (30A breaker required to
feed SPD)
ype P1 Panelboards are factory labeled

T
SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE
ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT when identified
as "Service Entrance" at the time of order
entry. For regulations governing this feature,
please consult CEC, CSA or local electrical
authorities.
Bus Material
Represented by A, C or E in the
11th digit of the catalogue number
Standard bussing is tin plated Al, alternate bus
bar material can be selected:
b Tin plated copper
b Silver plated copper - optionnal
TPS3 09
to feed SPD)
- Externally mounted (20A breaker required
to feed SPD)
b
TPS3 12
to feed SPD)
Feed-Thru Lugs
Cannot be used in conjonction with SPD or subfeed breakers
Ampere
Rating
250
Type
Connector Wire Range
Al Mechanical
Cu Mechanical
Compression
Al Mechanical
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kcmil Al/Cu or

(1) #3/0 AWG - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
400
Service Entrance Label
Branch and Main Breaker

and Accessories
b Handle blocks
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bar

Copper Non-Insulated Ground Bar
Al Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
Cu Insulated Equipment Ground Bar
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6 as branch only. BL,

BLH, HBL, ED4, ED6, HED4, uses 1 unit space
for shunt trip as a branch device. All others
may be used on mains or subfeeds.
b Pilot lights
b Toggle switches
b Push buttons
(Devices mounted into a 10" minimum
box extension)
Panel Skirts
b
b
b
b
see section 6
b
Ground Bars are shipped with the panel

interior factory mounted.
Shunt Trip on Main or Branch
Mounted devices
Compression Lugs
Style
Amp
Rating
Breaker
Type
Compression Connector
Wire Range
Box Height
Addition
N/A
None
400
N/A
(1) 250 - 600 kcmil or

(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kcmil
None
125
ED4, ED6, HED4
(1) #12 - 1/0 AWG Al/Cu
Box must go to 24" wide
250
FXD6, HFD6
Box must go to 24" wide
125
MLO
Main
Breaker
250
Note: Standard compression lugs used for P1 are range taking lugs and may require a particular crimping
tool to accommodate the range. Consult factory for information.
See section 5
b Handle locks
6-18
Surge Protective Devices
b
Hinged trim
Piano hinged trim
Trim with padlock
Door-in-door trim
Screw to the box trim
Trim with gasketed door
Stainless steel trim
PANELBOARDS
Panel Modifications (cont.)

Grounding of Panelboards
Description
Selection
Panelboards
Panelboard Replacement, Modification, and Additions
Selection
S1/S2 PanelsAll the P1 panel kits for 250 amp and below
panels will work for 250 amp maximum S1/S2 panels.
400/600 Amp S1/S2

Lug Kits Main or Feed-Thru
Ampere
Rating
Material Wire Range
Service
Catalogue
Number
125A / 250A
Al/Cu
(2) 1/0250 kcmil
1-Phase
MLKA1
125A / 250A
Al/Cu
(2) 1/0250 kcmil
3-Phase
MLKA3
(2) #4250 kcmil or

400A / 600A Al/Cu
1-Phase SMLKA1

(1) 3/0500 kcmil
(2) #4250 kcmil or
400A / 600A Al/Cu
3-Phase SMLKA3

(1) 3/0500 kcmil
Breaker Mounting Kits

Ampere
Rating Breaker Types
Service
Catalogue
Number
125A
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6, HHED6
1-Phase
SMBKED1
225A
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HED6, HHED6
3-Phase
SMBKED3
225A
QJ2, HQJ2, HQJ2H a 1-Phase

SMBKQJ1
225A
QJ2, HQJ2, HQJ2H a 3-Phase

SMBKQJ3
250A
FXD6, FD6, HFXD6, HFD6
1-Phase
SMBKFD1
250A
FXD6, FD6, HFXD6, HFD6
3-Phase
SMBKFD3
400A
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HJXD6
1-Phase
SMBKJD1
400A
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HJXD6
3-Phase
SMBKJD3
600A
LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6
1-Phase
SMBKLD1
600A
LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6
3-Phase
SMBKLD3
Neutral Kits
Catalogue
Number
30/42 circuit 200% neutral kit
2NLK2
400/600A max.
42 circuit 200% neutral kit
2NLK1
PANELBOARDS
250A max.
Ampere
Rating Description
a QJ
mounting kit is for subfeed breakers only, not main breaker.

The kit contains mountings for (2)breakers.
6-19
Panelboards
Type P1
Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
P1 250A: 18, 30, 42 ccts
Type 3R and 3R/12 Box
PANELBOARDS
P1 400A: 18, 30, 42 ccts
P1 250A: 18, 30, 42 ccts

P1 400A: 18, 30, 42 ccts
a Dimensions
are interior of the box. Add 5/8" [16mm] to width for absolute
dimension. Add 1/8"[3mm] to height for absolute dimension.
Dimensions shown in inches and millimeters [ ].
6-20
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards
Features
Flexibility is the hallmark of the P2 panel.
This panel offers a wide array of factoryassembled options to meet almost
all lighting panel applications. With
this design, the ability to mix breaker
frames in unit space up to 250 amps
will also meet many distribution panel
requirements in a much smaller package.
Bussing options for the P2 are aluminum
and copper. Standard bussing in the P2
panel is tin-plated. Silver-plated copper is
also offered as an option. Bus mounted
contactors, as mains or sub mains, and
subfeed lugs (up to 400 amp) are just a
few of the options of this unique panel.
P2 is set up around 18, 30, 42, 54, 66,
78, 90, 102.114 circuit configurations. It
will also allow the user to configure the
panel to the smallest possible size. The
P2 panel starts with 9" of unit space (18
circuits of 1" pole breakers). Breakers
mounted in unit space can be mixed and
matched to meet customer requirements.
All 1" pole breakers (BL, BQD, ED frames)
are mounted in 3" or 6" pole increments.
Breaker frames, above 125 amps, are
mounted in 6" single breaker mountings.
Short circuit rating

200,000 A IR Maximum /
100,000 A @ 600 Vac
symmetrical or equal to the lowest rated
device installed unless a series rating
is indicated. Panels with subfeed or
feed-thru lugs without a main device,
circuit breaker or fusible unit, are limited
to 22 KAIC or the lowest rated device
installed unless a series combination
rating for a main or remote main is
indicated. Note that the main device
may be mounted remote from the panel.
Panelboards
Listed by Underwriters' Laboratories
Inc., under "Panelboards" File #E2269 for
the interiors and #E4016 for boxes
and fronts.
Bussing The P2 panel has more
options to meet market requirements.
The standard bussing is tin-plated
aluminum for amperage up to 400A and
is tin-plated copper for 600A. The rating
is per the requirements of CSA 22.2
No.29 the standard for panelboards.
The copper bus option for this panel is
tin-plated or silver flash.
Enclosure Standard Type 1 enclosure
is 20" wide x 5.75" deep. Box Height
is determined by main device and unit
space. See charts for box height.
Panelboards Fronts and Doors
and hinges with flush door lock. All
are factory assembled for ease of
code gauge steel and finished ANSI-61
grey paint. See page 6-6 for optional
fronts.
Main Breakers
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, BQD6, ED2, ED4,
ED6, HED4, CED6, NGB, QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2-H, FXD6, FD6, HFD6, CFD6, JXD6,
JD6, HJD6, SHJD6, CJD6, SCJD6,
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, SLD6, SHLD6, CLD6,
SCLD6.
Reference
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
Panel Width 20" (508)

5.750 (146)
5.125 (130)
4.000 (102)
5.000 (127)
4.625 (117)

A
B
C
D
E
BL, BLH, HBL BL, BLH, HBL

BLF, BLFH
BLF, BLFH
BQD, BQD6
BQD, BQD6
ED2, ED4, ED6 ED2, ED4, ED6
HED4
HED4
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, HQJ2H
(Single Mounted)
NGB
NGB
A
B
C
Panel Width
20 in. (508 mm)
Weight Approximate
Total panelboard weight when filled
with a normal quantity of breakers and
accessories is:
b About 3 lbs. (1kg) per inch
(54g) per mm of box height
Gauge Steel Boxes
Width - in (mm)
Height - in (mm)
Gauge
Steel
20 (508)
26-74 (660-1880)
#14
Gauge Steel Trims - Surface, Flush

20 (508)
26-74 (660-1880)
#14
Series Connected Short Circuit Ratings

The term Series Connected Short
certified by CSA. Series ratings must be
specified on order at time of entry.
See Circuit Breaker Section of this book
for combinations available.
6-21
PANELBOARDS
Another unique feature of the P2 panel is

that blank unit space can be added to
allow for future expansions or
modifications. Any expansions or
modifications must be in 3" increments.
BL, BQD, and ED frame breakers have 3"
or 6" pole kits, and can be mixed in unit
space by these increments. Breakers of
the same frame can cross from one
mounting to another if contiguous. QJ
frame breakers are mounted in 6"
increments for two- and three pole, single
mounted units. Changes in the unit space
length for BL, BQD, or ED frame breakers
require an addition deadfront, center strip
kit. Check with sales or the factory for
additional unit space kits.
Amperage 600 amp max.
Branch Breaker
As an example of a minimum panel, (6)

20 amp 1-pole BL breakers (3" of unit
space) and a 3-pole 225 amp QJ breaker
(6" of unit space) equaling 9" of unit
space can be configured in a P2 panel
without any extra provisions or space
required. FD 250 amp and JD 400 amp
breakers are mounted as subfeed
breakers outside of unit space.
General
Voltage 600V AC max.

250V DC max.
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards
P2 Box Size Requirements
Base Box Size Requirements for P2 Panels with Standard Line Lugs are for 1" module (BL, BQD, ED, NGB) branch breakers and provisions. Unit Spaces range from 9" to 57" (in 6" increments). Boxes range from 26" to 74" high (in 6" increments).
Inclusion of optional modifications may require size increases that must be added to these base values to calculate the final
box size for the panel (see pages 6-29, 6-30). For service entrance application, breaker is vertically mounted only.
- A dimension
26 (660)
32 (813)
P2 Panels, with standard Line lugs unit space (starting with 9 and adding 6 increments)
Main Lugs
Main Breakers
125A
225A
225A
250A
250A
125A Horiz. 125A
Horiz.
Horiz.
Vert.
Horiz.
Vert.
400A BL, BQD,
Vert.
CED
QJ
QJ
FD
FD
125A 250A 600A NGB, ED
ED
9
15
9
15
9
9
9
250A
CFD
400A
JD
400A
CJD
600A
LD
600A
CLD
38 (965)
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
74 (1880)
21
27
33
39
45
51
57
9
15
21
27
33
9
15
21
27
33
9
15
21
9
15
21
27
9
15
21
Box Height Inches (mm)

B dimension
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
21
27
33
39
45
51
57
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
15
21
27
33
39
45
51
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
9
15
21
27
33
39
45
9
15
21
27
33
39
Main breaker wire

bending space diagram
Main Breaker Wire Bending Space - Inches (mm)

Panel Amps
Side Gutter
Neutral Location
Db
BL
5.75 (146)
8.00 (203)
BQD
5.13 (130)
8.00 (203)
NGB
4.63 (118)
8.00 (203)
ED (horiz.)
4.00 (102)
8.00 (203)
ED (vert.)
6.56 (167)
11.13 (283)
QJ (horiz.)
5.00 (127)
7.00 (178)
QJ (vert.)
10.06 (256)
16.69 (423)
FD (horiz.)
5.00 (127)
7.00 (178)
FD (vert.)
13.25 (337)
22.72 (577)
400
JD
15.38 (391)
25.00 (635)
600
LD
15.38 (391)
23.00 (584)
100
125
PANELBOARDS
Breaker Frames
225
250
Box depth = 5.75 in. (146 mm)

Box width 20 in. (508 mm) for 100-600A
Main lug wire

bending space diagram
Main Lug Connectors

Side
Gutter
Neutral
Location
Cb
Db
Panel Amps
Std Connectors
for Al interior
Std Connectors
for Cu interior
125
(1) #6 - 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
6.62 (168)
8.19 (208)
250
(1) #6 - 350 kcmil Al/Cu
11.75
(298)
10.72
(273)
400
(1) #2 AWG - 600 kcmil Al/Cu or

(1) 1/0 AWG - 250 kcmil Al/Cu
(1) 1/0 AWG - 600 kcmil Cu or

(2) 1/0 - 4/0 AWG Cu
14.00
(356)
13.09
(333)
600
14.00
(356)
11.00
(279)

Box width 20 in. (508 mm) for 100-600A
Vertical main breaker application for ED, QJ and FD adds

6" (152mm) of box height.
6-22
b Refer
to wire bending space diagrams.
Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P2 Main Lug Only
Reference
Interior Numbering System
Type P2 unassembled panelboards are

available as main lug only and come with
provisions for the branch breaker type
selected.
4 2
M L
2 5 0
A - BL
1. P2 Interior (I2)
2. Voltage and System
A = 120/240V, 1-Phase 3-Wire
C = 208Y/120V, 3-Phase 4-Wire
L = 600Y/347V, 3-Phase 4-Wire

3, 4. Circuit 30, 42, 66, 78, 90
5, 6. Mains ML = Main Lug

7, 8, 9. Amperage 600A max
10. Main Bus Material

A = Aluminum
C = Copper
11. Branch connector (provision) Type - BL, BQD, NGB, ED
Panel Type
Voltage (Max.)
Breaker Type

P2

240
600/347
BQD, BQD6
PANELBOARDS
Branch Breakers
Power Product Catalogue Page
See section 5
6-23
Panelboards
Distributor Stock - Type P2 Main Lug Only
Selection
Interior, Box and Trim Selection
600A Max. 20" Wide x 5.75" Deep

1. Determine voltage, system, amperage
and type of branch breaker
connectors to select the appropriate
Interior from the table below.
2. Select the type of box and trim

needed.
3. List required branch circuit breakers:

Type BL, BQD, NGB or ED breakers.
Type P2 Unassembled Panelboards

Interiors Only - Less Branch Breakers
Amperes
Rating
Mains
Max. No.
of Circuits
Provision
Type
Boxes
Main Lug + provisions
Height Inches (mm)
Trim
Type 1
Type 3R/12a
Surface
1-Phase, 3-Wire
120/240V
250
66
78
BL/BQD
I2A66ML250A-BL
I2A78ML250A-BL
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
B56
B62
WP56
WP62
S56B
S62B
F56B
F62B
400
42
66
BL/BQD
I2A42ML400A-BL
I2A66ML400A-BL
50 (1270)
62 (1575)
B50
B62
WP50
WP62
S50B
S62B
F50B
F62B
250
42
66
78
BL/BQD
I2C42ML250A-BL
I2C66ML250A-BL
I2C78ML250A-BL
44 (1118)
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
B44
B56
B62
WP44
WP56
WP62
S44B
S56B
S62B
F44B
F56B
F62B
400
42
66
78
90
BL/BQD
I2C42ML400A-BL
I2C66ML400A-BL
I2C78ML400A-BL
I2C90ML400A-BL
50
62
68
74
(1270)
(1575)
(1727)
(1880)
B50
B62
B68
B74
WP50
WP62
WP68
WP74
S50B
S62B
S68B
S74B
F50B
F62B
F68B
F74B
600
66
BL/BQD
I2C66ML600A-BL
62 (1575)
B62
WP62
S62B
F62B
30
ED
I2L30ML250A-ED
38 (965)
B38
WP38
S38B
F38B
42
ED
NGB
I2L42ML250A-ED
I2L42ML250A-NGB
44 (1118)
44 (1118)
B44
B44
WP44
WP44
S44B
S44B
F44B
F44B
66
BQD6
ED
NGB
I2L66ML250A-BQD
I2L66ML250A-ED
I2L66ML250A-NGB
56 (1422)
56 (1422)
56 (1422)
B56
B56
B56
WP56
WP56
WP56
S56B
S56B
S56B
F56B
F56B
F56B
78
BQD6
ED
I2L78ML250A-BQD
I2L78ML250A-ED
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
B62
B62
WP62
WP62
S62B
S62B
F62B
F62B
42
BQD6
ED
NGB
I2L42ML400A-BQD
I2L42ML400A-ED
I2L42ML400A-NGB
50 (1270)
50 (1270)
50 (1270)
B50
B50
B50
WP50
WP50
WP50
S50B
S50B
S50B
F50B
F50B
F50B
66
BQD6
ED
NGB
I2L66ML400A-BQD
I2L66ML400A-ED
I2L66ML400A-NGB
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
B62
B62
B62
WP62
WP62
WP62
S62B
S62B
S62B
F62B
F62B
F62B
78
BQD6
ED
I2L78ML400A-BQD
I2L78ML400A-ED
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
B68
B68
WP68
WP68
S68B
S68B
F68B
F68B
90
BQD6
ED
I2L90ML400A-BQD
I2L90ML400A-ED
74 (1880)
74 (1880)
B74
B74
WP74
WP74
S74B
S74B
F74B
F74B
66
BQD6
ED
NGB
I2L66ML600A-BQD
I2L66ML600A-ED
I2L66ML600A-NGB
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
B62
B62
B62
WP62
WP62
WP62
S62B
S62B
S62B
F62B
F62B
F62B
3-Phase, 4-Wire
208Y/120V
PANELBOARDS
3-Phase, 4-Wire
250
400
600
Flushb
600Y/347V
Hinged door included with type 3R/12 enclosures.

trims extend 3/4" beyond each side of the base
box dimensions.
b Flush
6-24
Panelboards
Selection
Type P2 Panelboards
Main Breaker Selection a
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type

240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
Ref.
Catalogue
Number
BQD6
65
10
B6
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
100
BL
BLH
HBL
BQD
ED2
10
22
65
65
10
14
BL
BH
HB
BQ
E2
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
125
NGB
ED4
ED6
HED4
CED6b
100
65
65
100
200
25
18
25
42
200
18
100
NB
E4
E6
H4
CE
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2H
10
22
42
QJ
QH
Q2
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FD6
FXD6
HFD6
HFXD6
CFD6b
65
65
100
100
200
35
35
65
65
200
22
22
25
25
100
FD
FX
HF
H2
CF
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
250
FD6
FXD6
HFD6
HFXD6
CFD6b
65
65
100
100
200
35
35
65
65
200
22
22
25
25
100
FD
FX
HF
H2
CF
250
250
250
250
250
400
JXD6b
JD6b
HJD6b
SJD6b
SHJD6b
CJD6b
SCJD6b
65
65
100
65
100
200
200
35
35
65
35
65
150
150
25
35
35
25
35
100
100
JX
J6
H6
SJ
SX
CJ
SC
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 300, 400
600
LXD6b
LD6b
HLD6b
SLD6b
SHLD6b
CLD6b
SCLD6
65
65
100
65
100
200
200
35
35
65
35
65
150
150
25
25
35
25
35
100
100
LX
L6
HL
SL
S2
CL
S1
450, 500, 600

250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
225
70
PANELBOARDS
Subfeed Breakers (available in 2-pole or 3-pole)

Breaker
Type
FD6 c, FXD6
HFD6 c, HFXD6
Mounting Position When

Used as Subfeed Breaker
Vertical
Twin
Twin
a Interchangeable trip main breakers are mounted at

the top of the panel only.
b Vertically mounted.

c Twin
mounted subfeed breakers are mounted at the
bottom of panelboard only and adds 24" to the panel
height.
Ampere
Ratings
For Load
70250
70250
Maximum Interrupting
(kA) Symmetrical
240 Vac
480 Vac
65
35
100
65
Rating
600 Vac
22
25
Note: For detailed circuit breaker information, consult

section 5.
6-25
Panelboards
Selection
Type P2 Panelboards
Max.
Amp
Rating
70
PANELBOARDS
100
125
225

Breaker Number
Type
of Poles 120V AC 120/240V AC 240V AC
277V AC 480/277V AC
347V AC 600Y/347V AC
1
BQD6 2
3
1
BL
2
3
1
BLH
2
3
1
HBL
2
3
BLR
2
1
BLF
2
1
BLHF
2
1
BLE
2
1
BLEH
2
BAF
1
BAFH 1
1
BQD
2
3
1
ED2
2
3
1
NGB
2
3
1
ED4
2
3
1
ED6
2
3
1
HED4 2
3
2
c
CED6
3
2
QJ2
3
2
QJH2
3
2
QJ2H
3
HQJ2H 3
14
25
22
25
25a
10
14
18b
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
15, 20, 25, 30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
15, 20,30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
15, 20,30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
15, 20
15, 20
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
65
10
22
65
10
22
10
22
10
22
65
10
100
65
100
65
10
22
65
10
22
10
22
65
10
22
65
10
65
65
10
10
100
100
65
65
65
65
100
100
200
200
10
10
22
22
42
42
100
14
14
25
25
18
18
25
25
42
42
200
200
10
10
14
14
18
18
100
100
Neutral Connections
Amps
Main Neutral Lugs - Wire Size range
Branch Neutral connections
Material
Wire Size range per neutral rack
125A
(1) #6 - 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
Standard MB
Al
(18) #14 - #6 AWG Al/Cu and

(3) 1/0 - #6 AWG Al/Cu
250A
(1) #6 - 350 MCM AWG Al/Cu
Standard MLO
Al
(36) #14 - #4 Al/Cu and

(6) 3/0 - #6 Al/Cu
400A
(1) #2 - 600 MCM Al/Cu and

(1) #6 - 350 MCM Al/Cu
Optional
Al / Cu
(18) #6 - #14 AWG Al/Cu and

(3) 1/0 - #14 AWG Al/Cu
600A
(2) #2 - 600 MCM Al/CU and

(1) #6 - 350 MCM Al/Cu
a 1-Pole
HED4 15-30A rated 65kA

35-100A rated 25kA
1-Pole ED6 15-30A rated 30kA @ 347V
35-100A rated 18kA @ 347V
c CED6 breaker can be used in 400A panel with copper bussing only.
Panel enclosure required is 24" (610mm) wide.
b
6-26
NOTE: QJ Breakers are single mounted in unit space and take 6" of unit space. Limited to

(4) per panel max. BL, HBL, BLH and BQD breakers are mounted in common

mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments. ED2, ED4, ED6 and HED4 breakers are

mounted in common mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments.
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Kit and Accessories
Selection
Branch Breaker Connector Kits

Kit Number
Description
BBKB32
BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKB32AT
BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Al/Tin
BBKB32CS
BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
BBKCED32
CED branch breacker kit Cu/Tin
BBKCED32CS
CED branch breacker kit Cu/Silver
BBKED32
ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKED32AT
ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Al/Tin
BBKED32CS
ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
BBKNB32
NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKNB32AT
NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Al/Tin
BBKNB32CS
NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
BBKQ1
QJ 6-pole branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKQ1AT
QJ 6-pole branch breaker kit Al/Tin
BBKQ1CS
QJ 6-pole branch breaker kit Cu/Silver
Contents
Kit contains top barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B connector, hardware
Kit contains connector kit for P2 400A, 24" wide only

Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barrier, (3) A/C connectors,
(1) B connector, hardware
Kit contains all connectors and cover plates necessary to mount both 2
and 3-pole breakers
Type P2 Spare Part Kit

2 Fas-latch trim locks with 2 keys
BL, BQD, ED deadfront kit for 1" (include 7 different length centre strips)
1 Filler plate 3"
1 End walls with knockouts (20"W x 5.75"D)
1 Number Strip 1-42
1 Number Strip 43-84
1 Numbering Button Kit 1@42
1 Filler Plate 1"
1 P2 250A Max. Bonding Kit
1 Dripshield 20W x 5.75D
Catalogue
Number
MHKP2
Description
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
8 trim screws
8 trim clips
1 bonding kit 600A max.
1 int. adjusting kit
2 Al non-insulated ground bar
2 Cu non-insulated ground bar
1 Directory card 1-42 ccts
1 Directory card 43-84 ccts
1 numbering button kit 1-42 ccts
1 numbering button kit 43-84 ccts
1 Panelboard instruction book
2 plastic directory pouch
6-27
PANELBOARDS
Description
12-1110-01
11-1824-01
MCHK
FPLK2
DFK1
DFFP3
EGK
ECGK
EWK1
IGK
ICGK
IMK1
JCK24
NBK03
NBK04
NBK05
NBK3
NBK4
NBK5
QF3-UL
P2BK1
P2BK2
P2BK3
SDKN
Catalogue Number
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Factory Assembled/Modifications and Additions
Description
Type 1 with gasket

Type 1 with dripshield
Type 3R - Waterproof and silicone free
Type 3R/12 - Dustproof
Type 4/4X - Standard type 304 Stainless Steel
Type 4/4X - Type 316 Stainless Steel
Wider enclosure - 24 wide
Hinged trim
Piano hinged trim
Trim with padlock
Door-in-door trim
Mounted devices
b Pilot lights
b Toggle switches
b Push buttons
(Devices mounted into a 10" minimum
box extension).
Painted boxes
Custom colours
Subfeed (Double) Lugs For Main

Lug Panelboards Only
Ampere
Rating
Type
125
Al Mechanical
250
Al Mechanical
400
Al Mechanical
Note: Ref. p.6-29 for box size additions (inches)

for optional features
Feed-Thru Lugs Cannot be used

in conjonction with SPD or Subfeed
Breakers (200% Neutral not available)
Amp
Rating
125
Al Mechanical
250
Branch and Main Breaker Accessories

See section 5.
b Handle blocks
b Handle locks
b Aux. Contactsa
b UVRa
6
PANELBOARDS
Cu Mechanical
Compression
Al Mechanical
400
Bus Material
b Tin plated copper
b Silver plated copper - optional
Cu Mechanical
Compression

Type P2 Panelboards are factory labeled
as "Service Entrance" at the time of order
entry. For regulations governing this
feature, please consult CEC, CSA or local
electrical authorities.
Type
Al Mechanical
Panel Skirts See page 6-47
Panel Modifications
Cu Mechanical
Compression
Al Mechanical
Cu Mechanical
600
Compression
Connector
Wire Range
(1) #6 AWG 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
(1) #6 AWG 350 kcmil Cu
(1) #6 AWG 350 kcmil Al/Cu
(1) #2 AWG 600 kcmil Al/Cu and
(1) 1/0 AWG 250 kcmil Al/Cu
(1) 1/0 AWG 600 kcmil or
(2) 1/0 AWG 4/0 AWG
(1) 250 kcmil 600 kcmil Cu or
(2) 400 kcmil 600 kcmil Al or
(2) 400 kcmil 500 kcmil Cu
Note: Ref. p.6-29 for box size additions (inches)

for optional features
a Accessories
on 1" pole breakers

(BL, BQD, ED) will take unit space.
6-28
Connector
Wire Range
(2) #14 AWG 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
Selection
Contactor
b Asco 920 through 225 amps installed in
an 24 auxiliary box
b Siemens LEN through 200A - installed in

auxiliary box:

LEN 30A-60A = Min. 5D x 20W x 10H

LEN 100A = Min. 5D x 20W x 18H

LEN 200A = Min. 7D x 20W x 24H
Increase Capacity Neutral up to 200%

(N/A on Feed Thru Lugs & Subfeed Lugs)
Main Bus Amps
125
250
400
600
See page 6-29 for unit space adders and

compatibility with other options.
G
round Bars are shipped with the panel
b
b
b

b Cu Insulated Equipment Ground Bar

BL, BLH, HBL, NGB, ED4, HED4, HED6, uses
1 unit space for shunt trip. All others may be
used on mains or subfeeds.
Surge Protective Device
see section 9
b TPS3 01
- Bus connected
to feed SPD)
- Externally mounted in a 15" high aux.
enclosure (30A breaker required to feed SPD)
b TPS3 09
to feed SPD)
to feed SPD)
b TPS3 12
to feed SPD)
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Standard Modifications and Additions
Selection
Box Size Additions for Optional Features - Inches (mm)

Main Lugs Main Breakers

125A
250A
400A 600A 125A
125A
125A 225A
225A 225A
250A
250A 400A 400A 600A 600A
Options
Horiz.
Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Vert. JD CJD LD CLD
BL, BQD,

ED, NGB CED
ED
QJ
QJ
FD
FD
CFD
*Min. Box Size

200% Neutral
(lug type)
Std. Lugs
(100% Neut. PNL)
CU Lugs (100%
Neut. PNL)
Comp Lugs
(100% Neut. PNL)
Feed-thru
Standard Lugs
Feed-thru Cu Lugs

Feed-thru
Comp Lugs
Subfeed Standard
Lugs
(1) FD Subfeed
(Horizontal Mtg.)
(2) FD Subfeed
(Vertical Mtg.)

SPD

26
32
38
38
26
32
32
32
38
38
44
50
50
62
56
62
(660) (813) (965) (965) (660) (813) (813) (813) (965) (965) (1118) (1270) (1270) (1575) (1422) (1575)
0
0
6 (all) 6 (all)
0 0 0
N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(152) (152)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6
(152)
6
(152)
6
(152)
6
(152)
6
(152)
0

N/A
N/A

6
6
0 N/A
N/A 0
N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(152) (152)
6
6
6
N/A
N/A 0
N/A 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0
(152)
(152) (152)
6
12
12
6
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
12
N/A
N/A
(152) (305) (305) (152) (152) (152)

(152)

(152) (152)
(305) (305)
(305) (305)
6
12

6
6
6 6 12
12

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
(152) (305) (152)

(152) (152) (152)
(305) (305)
12
12
6
6
12
12
12
12
N/A N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A

(152)

(152)

(305) (305)
(305) (305)
(305) (305)
6
6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

(152) (152)
12
12
12
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(305) (305) (305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305) (305)
24
24
24
24 24 24 24
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A N/A
(610) (610) (610)
(610) (610) (610) (610)
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
(305) (305) (305) (305)
(305)
(305)
(305) (305)
(305)
(305)
(305) (305)
(305) (305)
(305) (305)
NOTE: N/A = OPTION NOT AVAILABLE

*Min. Box Size, corresponding to 9" of Unit Space.
Style
MLO
Main
Breaker
Compression Connector
Wire Range
Amp Rating
Breaker Type
125
250
N/A
N/A
400
N/A
600
N/A
100
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, CED6
(1) 2/0 AWG Al/Cu
250
FXD6, HFD6, CFD6
(1) 350 kcmil Al/Cu
400
600
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6

LD6, LXD6, HLD6, CLD6, SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
(1) 500 kcmil Al/Cu

(1) 500 kcmil Al/Cu
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
#6 AWG - 350 kcmil Al/Cu

250 - 600 kcmil Cu
400 - 600 kcmil Al or
400 - 500 kcmil Cu
PANELBOARDS
Compression Lugs
Box Height Addition - Inches (mm)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
Box must go to 24" wide on CED6 breaker only
Add 6" to box height for N
Box must go to 24" wide for all breakers
Requires an additional 6.0" box height
9 (229)
6 (152)
NOTE: Standard compression lugs used for P2 are range taking lugs and may require a particular crimping tool to accommodate the range. Consult factory for information.
Alternate Lugs
Amp
Rating
Breaker Type
MLO
400
N/A
Main
Breaker
400
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
Style
Not
Alternate Connector
Wire Range
(1) 250 - 750 kcmil Al/Cu or
Box Height Addition - Inches (mm)

6 (152)
6 (152)
availabe for feed thru lug.
6-29
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboard Kits and Accessories

Standard Enclosures
Catalogue Number
Box
Height Inches (mm)
Type 1 Standard
Box
Surface Trim
Flush Trima
Type 3R/12b
26 (660)
B26
S26B
F26B
WP26
32 (813)
B32
S32B
F32B
WP32
38 (965)
B38
S38B
F38B
WP38
44 (1118)
B44
S44B
F44B
WP44
50 (1270)
B50
S50B
F50B
WP50
56 (1422)
B56
S56B
F56B
WP56
62 (1575)
B62
S62B
F62B
WP62
68 (1727)
B68
S68B
F68B
WP68
74 (1880)
B74
S74B
F74B
WP74
PANELBOARDS
Options For Type 1 Trims

Hinged trim Replace B suffix with H
Door-in-door Replace B suffix with D
Screw to box Replace "B" suffix with "C"
Trim with padlock Add "PL" suffix
Metal card holder Add "M" suffix on all trims
Option For 24" Wide Enclosures
24 wide with equal gutter on both sides - Add 24 as prefix
a Flush
trim extend 3/4" on each side of the base box.
6-30
b Hinged
door included in type 3R/12 enclosures.
Selection
Panelboards
Type P2 Panelboards
Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
6
PANELBOARDS
Type 3R and 3R/12 Box
a Dimensions
are interior of the box. Add 5/8"[16mm] to width

for absolute dimension. Add 1/8"[3mm] to height for absolute
dimension.
Dimensions shown in inches and millimeters [ ].
6-31
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards
Features
Another innovation from Siemens is

the P3 panel. It is a smaller, footprint
distribution panel to fit a number of
applications. This panel offers factoryassembled options, and has the ability
to mix breaker frames in unit space
up to 250 amps. Bussing options for
the P3 are aluminum and copper. All
bussing in the P3 panel is tin-plated as a
standard. Silver-plated copper is offered
as an option.
PANELBOARDS
The P3 panel configurations, defined by

the unit space, allow for a given
amperage and box height. The P3 panel
starts with a 56" high box. Breaker
unit space can be mixed and matched
to meet customer requirements. All
1" pole breakers (BL, BQD, NGB, ED,
NEB, HEB frames) are mounted in 3" or
6" pole increments. Breakers frames,
above 125 amps, are mounted in 6
single or twin breaker mountings. As
an example, FD 250 amp and JD 400
amp breakers are mounted as subfeed
breakers outside of unit space.
Like other distribution panels, the P3
panel can have blank space added into
the panel to allow for future expansions
or modifications. Any expansions or
modifications must be in 3" increments.
BL, BQD, NGB, ED, NEB and HEB
frame breakers have 3" or 6-pole kits
and can be mixed in unit space by
these increments. Breakers of the same
frame can cross from one mounting
to another if contiguous. QJ frame
breakers are mounted in 6 increments
for two and three pole, single and twin
mounted units. Changes in the unit
space length for BL, BQD, NGB, ED,
NEB or HEB frame breakers require
an addition deadfront centre strip kit.
Check with sales or the factory for
additional unit space kits.
6-32
General
Voltage 600V AC max.

250V DC max.
Amperage Main Lug - 800 amp max.

Main Breaker - 600 amp max.
Short circuit rating
200,000 A @ 480 Vac
100,000 A @ 600 Vac IR Maximum
symmetrical or equal to the lowest rated
device installed unless a series rating
is indicated. Panels with subfeed or
feed-thru lugs without a main device,
circuit breaker or fusible unit, are limited
to 22 KAIC or the lowest rated device
installed unless a series combination
rating for a remote main is indicated.
Note that the main device may be
mounted remote from the panel.
Panelboards
Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
under Panelboards File #E2269 for the
interiors and #E4016 for boxes
and fronts.
Enclosure Standard Type 1 enclosure
is 24" wide x 7.75" deep x Box Height
is determined by main device and unit
space. See charts for box height.
Panelboards Fronts and Doors
and hinges with a flush door lock.
All are factory assembled for ease of
code gauge steel and finished ANSI-61.
See page 6-6 for optional trims.
Branch Breaker
Reference
Letter
Panel Width 24 (610)
A
B
C
D a
E
F
G
a Single
7.750 (197)
7.125 (181)
6.000 (152)
7.000 (178)
5.000 (127)
6.625 (168)
5.750 (144)
branch mounting construction.
Branch Breaker Wire Bending Diagram

A
B
C
D/E
BL, BLH, HBL
BL, BLH, HBL
BLF, BLFH
BLF, BLFH
BQD, BQD6
BQD, BQD6
A
B
ED2, ED4, ED6 ED2, ED4, ED6

HED4
HED4
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2-H, HQJ2H QJ2-H, HQJ2H
C
D/E
NGB
NGB
NEB, HEB
NEB, HEB
Panel Width
24 in. (610 mm)
Weight Approximate
Total panelboard weight when filled
with normal quantity of breakers and
accessories is:
b About 5 lbs. (1kg) per inch of
box height
Gauge Steel of Boxes and Fronts,
Surface & Flush
Gauge Steel
Width
Height
Box
Front
24 (610)
56-80 (1422-2032)
#14
#14
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards
Panel Unit Space to Box Height Requirements

P3 Panels With Standard Line Lugs. Unit Space (starting with 9 and adding 6 increments) - A dimension
Main Lugs
Main Breakers
Box Height - Inches (mm)

B dimension
400A
600A
800A
400A
JD
600A
LD
56
62
68
74
80
21
27
33
39
45
21
27
33
39
45
21
27
33
39
45
9
15
21
27
33
9
15
21
27
33
(1425)
(1575)
(1727)
(1880)
(2032)
Main Lug Wire Bending - Inches (mm)
Main Breaker Wire Bending - Inches (mm)
Panel Amps
Standard Connectors
400
(1) #2 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu and

(1) 1/0 - 250 kcmil Al/cu
16.00 (406)
17.88 (454)
600
(2) #2 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
16.00 (406)
17.88 (454)
800
(2) #2 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
16.00 (406)
17.88 (454)
400A Neutral Connections

No. of circuits
Neutral Lug Wire Size range
42 circuits
66 circuits
(1) #2 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
78 circuits
90 circuits
15.63 (397)
29.38 (746)
LD
14.75 (375)
29.38 (746)
No. of connections
per neutral bar
(23) #4 - #14 AWG

(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
No. of circuits
Neutral Lug Wire Size range
42 circuits
(16) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
54 circuits
66 circuits
No. of connections
per neutral bar
(2) #2 - 600 kcmil Al/Cu
78 circuits
90 circuits
(23) #4 - #14 AWG

(22) 1/0 - #14 AWG
Main Breaker Wire Bending Diagram
Main Lug Wire Bending Diagram
600A - 800A Neutral Connections
(16) #4 - #14 AWG

(15) 1/0 - #14 AWG
54 circuits
Panel Amps
JD
PANELBOARDS

Box width = 24 in. (610 mm)

Box width = 24 in. (610 mm)
6-33
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards
Selection
Alternate Main Breakers

600V
Ref.
Catalogue
Number
240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
25
25
35
35
25
35
JX
J6
H6
H5
SJ
S2
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
200,
200,
200,
200,
200,
200,
225,
225,
225,
225,
300,
300,
250,
250,
250,
250,
400
400
25
25
35
35
25
35
LX
L6
HL
HO
SL
S6
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
STD
STD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
450,
250,
250,
250,
300,
300,
500,
300,
300,
300,
400,
400,
600
350,
350,
350,
500,
500,
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
240V
480V
400
JXD6a
JD6a
HJXD6a
HJD6a
SJD6a
SHJD6a
65
65
100
100
65
100
35
35
65
65
35
65
600
LXD6a
LD6a
HLXD6a
HLD6a
SLD6a
SHLD6a
65
65
100
100
65
100
35
35
65
65
35
65
Available Configurationsb
Subfeed Breakers (available in 2-pole or 3-pole)

Mounting Position When Used
as Subfeed Breaker
Vertical
240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
FD6c, FXD6
Twin
70250
65
35
18
HFD6c, HFXD6
Twin
70250
100
65
25
JD6 , JXD6
Single
200400
65
35
25
HJD6d, HJXD6
Single
200400
100
65
35
400
400
400
400
400, 450, 500, 600

400, 450, 500, 600
400, 450, 500, 600
600
600
Wire Range
Max.
Number of
Connections
Ampere
Ratings
For Load
#14-#1/0
44
125
#4 - 350 kcmil
250
(1)#4 - 600 kcmil or

1
(2)#6 - 250 kcmil
400
PANELBOARDS
350,
350,
350,
350,
Neutral Connectors
Maximum Interrupting Rating
(kA) Symmetrical
Ampere
Ratings
For Load
Breaker
Type
300,
300,
300,
300,
Vertically mounted
= Standard configuration. ADD = Additional cost.
b STD
6-34
c Twin
mounted subfeed breakers are mounted at

bottom of panelboard only and adds 24 to the
panel height.
d Subfeed
breaker is mounted at bottom of panelboard

only. 400 amp subfeed breaker adds 30 to the panel
height.
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards
Provisions for Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)
Amps
277V AC
480V AC
600V AC
250V DC
70
BQD6
15-70
65
65
10
14
BL
1560
70
80100
10
10
10
BLH
1560
70
80100
22
22
22
HBL
1555
60100
65
65
BLE (GFCI)
1530
4060
10
10
BLEH (GFCI)
1530
1560
22
22
BLF (GFCI)
1530
4060
10
10
BLHF (GFCI)
1530
4060
22
22
BAF
1520
10
BAFH
1520
22
BQD
1560
70100
65
65
14
14
14
14
ED2
1560
70100
100
100
42
42
42
42
30
30
NGB
1560
70100
110125
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
25
25
25
25
25
25
14a
14a
14a
NEB
1560
70100
110125
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
35
35
35
35
35
35
22
22
22
35
35
35
HEB
1560
70100
110125
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
25
25
25
42
42
42
ED4
1560
70100
110125
65
65
65
22
18
18
30
ED6
1560
70100
110125
100
65
65
25
25
18
18
30
HED4
1560
70100
110125
100
65
65
QJ2
60-225
10
QJH2
60-225
42
QJ2H
60-225
22
100
125
225
120V AC
120/240V AC 240V AC

Kit Number
BBKB32
Description
BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKEB32
NEB/HEB branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKED32
ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
BBKNB32
NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit Cu/Tin
Note: QJ Breakers are twin mounted in unit space and

take 6 of unit space. Limited to (4) per panel

max. BL, HLB, BLH and BDQ are mounted in

common mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments.

ED2, ED4, ED6 and HED4, breakers are mounted in
common mountings in 3" or (6) pole increments.
Contents
Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1)
B connector, hardware
Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barrier, (3) A/C connectors, (1)
B connector, hardware
2-pole only (or) two outer poles of 3-pole breaker.
6-35
PANELBOARDS
Bolt-On Breaker Type
Max. Amp Rating
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboard Factory Assembled/Modifications and Additions

Description
Type
Type
Type
Type
1 with gasket
1 with dripshield
3R/12 - Dustproof
4/4X - Standard type 304 Stainless Steel
Hinged trim
Door-in-door trim
Painted boxes
Custom colours
Panel Skirts See page 6-47
Panel Modifications
Type P3 Panelboards are factory labeled
as Service Entrance at the time of order
entry. For regulations governing this feature,
please consult CEC, CSA or local electrical
authorities.
PANELBOARDS
P3 service entrance panels are available

in type 1 enclosure only (indoor
application) and come standard with
plated copper.
Bus Material
b Tin plated copper
b Silver plated copper - optional
Branch Breaker Accessories

See section 5.
b Handle blocks
b Handle locks
b Aux. Contacts1
b UVRa

Subfeed (Double) Lugs For Main Lug Panelboards Only
Ampere
Rating
Connector
Cu/Al Wire Range
225/250
(2) #6 - 600 AWG - 350 kcmil
400
(2) 250 kcmil

(1) 600 kcmil
Feed-Thru Lugs Cannot be used

in conjonction with SPD or subfeed
breakers. See page 6-35 for unit space
adders and compatibility with other
options
Ampere
Rating
225/250
400
600
800
Connector
Cu/Al Wire Range
(2) #6 - 600 AWG - 350 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
(1) 600 kcmil
(2) 250 - 500 kcmil
(2) 600 kcmil
G
round Bars are shipped with the panel
b
b
b
b

Cu Insulated Equipment Ground Bar

BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, ED4, HED4, ED6, HED6,
QJ2, QJ2H, QJH2 as branch only. BL, BLH,
HBL, NGB, ED2, ED4, HED4, ED6, HED6 uses
1 unit space for shunt trip. All others may be
used on mains or subfeeds.

b

See section 9
PS3 01
T
- Bus connected
-Internally mounted (30A breaker required
to feed SPD)
-Externally mounted in a 15 high aux.
enclosure (30A breaker required to
feed SPD)
b T
PS3 09
to feed SPD)
to feed SPD)
b TPS3 12 (Sold separately)
to feed SPD)
a Accessories
unit space.
6-36
on 1" pole breakers (BL, BQD, ED) will take
Selection
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboard Standard Modifications
Selection
Option Combinations
Amps
Incoming
Main Lug Only

400bc
Main Breaker (JD)
Main Lug Only
Subfeed
Lugs
800
bc
Main Lug Only
FDa
Subfeed
JDa
Subfeed
FDb
Subfeed
200%
Neutral
Min. Box Size

Inches (mm)
56
56
56
56
62
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1575)
None Std.
56
62
68
68
74
(1422)
(1575)
(1727)
(1727)
(1880)
56
56
56
56
62
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1575)
56
62
68
68
74
(1422)
(1575)
(1727)
(1727)
(1880)
56
56
56
56
62
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1422)
(1575)
600bc
Main Breaker (LD)
Feed-thru
Lugs
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
21 (533)
15 (381)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9
9
9
9
9
(229)
(229)
(229)
(229)
(229)
21 (533)
15 (381)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9
9
9
9
9
(229)
(229)
(229)
(229)
(229)
21 (533)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9 (229)
9 (229)
Available as an option
6
PANELBOARDS
a Subfed
lugs are currently not offered as standard with

main circuit breakers.
b Subfed lugs on panels above 400A are not standard.
c 200% neutral cannot be provided along with a 400A
subfeed breaker because the breaker blocks the 4th
lug site.
6-37
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboard Standard Modifications
Selection
Compression Lugs
Style
MLO
Main
Breaker
Amp Rating
Breaker Type
Compression Connectors
Box Height Addition
400
N/A
(1) 250 - 500 kcmil or

(2)# 1/0 AWG - 250 kcmil
600
N/A
(2)#3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil
800
N/A
(2) 400-750 kcmil Cu only
400
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
(2)#1/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al
600
LD6, LXD6, HLD6, SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
NOTE: Standard compression lugs are range taking lugs and may require a particular crimping tool to accommodate the range. Consult
factory for information.
Alternate Lugs
Style
MLO
Main
Breaker
Box Height
Addition Inches (mm)
Amp
Rating
Breaker
Type
Standard AL
Connectors
400
N/A
(1) 250 - 750 kcmil or

6 (152)
800
N/A
(3) 500 kcmil
6 (152)
400
JD6, JXD6, HJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
6 (152)
PANELBOARDS

Kit Number
Description
Contents
BBKB32
BL/BQD 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit
BBKNB32
NGB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit
BBKEB32
NEB/HEB 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit
BBKED32
ED 6-pole 3" branch breaker kit
Kit contains breaker support, inter-phase barriers, (3) A/C connectors, (1) B
connector, hardware
BBKQ2
Branch breaker kit for 2 and 3-pole

QJ twin mount
Kit contains all connectors and cover plates necessary to mount both 2 and
3-pole breakers

Catalogue Number
Description
12-1110-01
11-1824-01
MCHK
FPLK2
DFK1
DFFP3
DFFP6
EBF1
EGK
ECGK
EWK2
IGK
ICGK
IMK1
JCK24
NBK03
NBK04
NBK05
NBK3
NBK4
NBK5
QF3-UL
P3BK1
DSK724

2 Spare Fas-latch trim locks with 2 keys
BL, BQD, ED deadfront kit for 1" (include 7 different length centre strips)
1 Filler plate 3"
1 Filler plate 6
HEB/NEB Filler plate
1 End wall with knockouts (24W x 7.75D)
1 Number Strip 1-42
1 Numbering Button Kit Snap-in type 1 @ 42
1 Filler Plate 1
P3 Bonding kit
1 Dripshield 24W x 7.75D
6-38
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Type P3 Panelboards
Dimensions
Type 1 Box
Box is symmetrical
Type 3R and 3R/12 Boxb
PANELBOARDS
a Dimensions
are interior of the box. Add 5/8" [16mm] to width for

absolute dimension. Add 1/8" [3mm] to height for absolute
dimension. Dimensions shown in inches and millimeters [ ].
b Type
3R and 3R/12 enclosures are not available for service

entrance rated equipment
6-39
Panelboards
Power and Disribution
Selection
Type S5 (SPP6)
Main Lug Connectors
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC Maximum

1200 Ampere Mains
1200 Ampere Maximum Branch
UL & CSA Short Circuit Rating
200,000A IR Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Branch Breaker Symmetrical

Interrupting Capacity
Based on Underwriters Test
Procedure
(1)#3/0 AWG-500MCM
400
(2)#3/0 AWG-250MCM
600
(2)#3/0 AWG-500MCM
800
(3)#3/0 AWG-500MCM
1200
(4)#3/0 AWG-500MCM
End Gutters
Meets 1996 NEC wire bending

requirement, section 373-6.
CSA - C22.2 No. 0.12
PANELBOARDS
Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al
400
Ampere
Rating
Main Lug
(inches)
Main Breaker
(inches)
400/600
15.967
13.0
800/1200
15.967
13.0
Panelboards
for interiors and #E4016 for boxes and
fronts. Meet Federal Specification
W-C375B/Gen. & CSA File #LR93833.
Boxes
38 wide, 12.75 deep (Type 1)
38 wide, 14.25 deep (Type 3R/12)
Service
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC, Maximum.
1 Phase, 3 Wire; 3 Phase, 3 Wire; or
or 3 Phase, 4 Wire.
Panelboard Specifications
Panelboard Fronts and Doors

with 4 piece trim with ventilation.
Fronts are fabricated from code gauge
steel and
finished ASA61.
Maximum Unit
Panel
Space
Ampere
(MLO)
Integrated Equipment Short

Circuit Ratings
The term Integrated Equipment Short
certified by UL & CSA.
Series ratings must be specified on
order at time of entry.
Box
Height
400A
30
60
120/240Volts
120/208 Volts
600 Volts
347/600 Volts
600A
800A
1200A
45
60
60
75
90
90
1 Phase, 3 Wire
3 Phase, 4 Wire
3 Phase, 3 Wire
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Main Breakers
All 400A and 1200A frame main breakers are mounted horizontally.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
M
6-40
BL
BLH, HBL, BQD6, NGB
ED4, ED6
HED4
QJ2, QJH2
QJ2H
FXD6, FD6
HFD6
JXD6, JD6
HJD6
BL
BLH, HBL,
ED4, ED6
HED4
QJ2, QJH2
QJ2H
FXD6, FD6,
HFD6
JXD6, JD6
HJD6
Panel Width
(inches)
Reference Letter
38 (S5)
14.0
10.0
8.75
8.25
7.925
7.615
11.769
13.425
8.956
JXD6, JD6, LXD6, LD6, SLD6

HJD6, SJD6, HLD6
13.0
CJD6, CLD6
12.0
13.0
CED6
CED6
CFD6
MD6, ND6, CMD6, CND6, HMD6, HND6

SMD6, SND6
LMD6, HLMD6
duty applications where the

d the ratings of heavy duty
00V AC.
600
te the exclusive
I-T-E
blow-apart
Power
and
Disribution
the CSA requirements
for
Main Breaker Selection
t-limiting circuit breakers can
Breaker
e less than the I2Ampere
t of one-half
cycle
Rating
Type
JXD6
tive current without any fusible
JD6
HJD6
their current-limiting
400 range.CJD6
800
Panelboards
on (Table 2)
, 90, 100
, 90, 100
, 90, 100, 110, 125
0
0
0
0
0, 600
240V 1200
65
65
100
200
65
65
65
100
200
65
65
100
200
65
Gutters65
100
A
200
65
25
LXD6
LD6
HLD6
CLD6
SLD6
LX
L6
HL
CL
SL
65
65
100
200
65
35
35
65
150
35
25
25
35
100
25
MD6
HMD6
CMD6
SMD6
M6
HM
CM
SM
65
100
200
65
50
65
100
50
25
50
65
25
N6
HN600V
CN 25
SN 20
35
65
50
25
100
65
Available Trip Values 50
200
100
65400
200, 225,
250, 300, 350,
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
65
50
25
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
A
A
A
te with blank cover plate. Provision includes all necessary

eaker, and includes housing frame cover plate with breaker
HND6
480V
CND6
35
35
SND6
65
150
35
35
35
65
150
35
50
65
Rating (KA) 100
50
240V
480V50 600V
65
10
100
50
10
10
22
BL
15,20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
3.75" (95)
40, 50, 60 A
22
BLF (GFCI)
15, 20, 30,
BLE (GFCI)
15,
20, 30
3.75" (95)
A
65
BLH
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLH (GFCI)
15, 20, 30,
40, (95)
50, 60
3.75" (95)
3.75"
B
10
15,
20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
BQD65
70
3.75"
ED2 3.75" (95)
15, 20, 30,
40, (95)
50, 60, 70, B
80, 90, 100 65
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
ED4 3.75" (95)
15,
20, 30,
40,
50,
60,
3.75" (95)
B
100
15,
20, 30, 40, 50, 60
ED6 3.75" (95)
3.75"
100
70, 80, 90,
100,(95)
110, 125 B
15, 20, 30,
40, 50,
60,70, F
80, 90, 100 200
3.75"
(95)
CED6
110, 125
3.75"
(95)125,
F 175, 200, 225
QJ2
60, 70, 80,
90, 100,
150,
QJH2
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
5" 90,
(127)
C 175, 200, 225
10
QJ2-H 5" (127)
60, 70, 80,
100, 125, 150,
FXD6 5" (127)
70, 80, 90,
125, 150, C
175, 200, 225, 22
250
5" 100,
(127)
HFD6
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
5" 100,
(127)
CFD6 5" (127)
70, 80, 90,
125, 150, C
175, 200, 225, 42
250
JXD2
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
5" (127)
5"250,
(127)
D
65
JXD6, JD6
200, 225,
300, 350, 400
HJD6 5" (127)
200, 225,
250,
300, 350, 400
5"
(127)
D
100
CJD6
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
5"
(127)
G
200
SJD6
200, 300,
400
SHJD6
200, 300, 400
SCJD6 8.75" (222)

200, 300,
400 (222) H
8.75"
65
LXD6, LD6
450, 500,
600 (222) H
8.75"
(222)
8.75"
HLD6
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
CLD6 8.75" (222)
450, 500,
600 (222) H
8.75"
100
SLD6
300, 400, 500, 600
300,
8.75"
(222) I
200
SHLD6
400,
500, 600
SCLD6
500, 600
300, 400,8.75"
(222) H
65
LMD6
500, 600, 700, 800
HLMD6
500, 600, 700, 800
H
65
MD6
500, 600, 700, 800
H
100
HMD6
500, 600,
700,
800
8.75(222) I
CMD6
500, 600, 700, 800
200
SMD6
600, 700, 800
H
65
SHMD6
600, 700, 800
SCMD6
500, 600, 800
8.75 (222) L
65
ND6
800, 900, 1000, 1200
HND6
800, 900,
1000, (222)
1200
8.75
L
100
CND6
800, 900, 1000, 1200
SND6
800, 1000, 1200
J
65
SHND6
800, 900, 1000, 1200
SCND6
800, 900, 1000, 1200
J
100
10 (254) J 70, 80, 90, 100,
NGB
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60,
110, 125
200
NEB
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80, 90, 100,
110, 125
K
65
HEB
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
NDG
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,J125, 150
65
LDG
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150
J
100
NFG
100, 110,10
125, 150,
175, 200, 225
(254)
LFG
100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200,
J 225
200
NJG
250, 300, 350, 400
K
65
75 (95) of unit space

n three pole breakers require 6 (152) of unit space.
35
100
25
25
25
35
100
25
25
50
65
25
25
50
65
25
Mounting Height Inches (mm)

Twin
Single
Gutterf
3.75" (95)
3.75" (95)
10
3.75" (95)
3.75"
(95)
3.75" (95)
18
3.75" (95) 3.75" (95)

3.75" (95)
18
42
18
18
200
5" (127)
100
100
5" (127)
3.75" (95) 3.75" (95)
3.75" (95) 3.75" (95)
3.75" (95) 3.75" (95)
3.75" (95) 3.75" (95)
3.75" (95)
F
5" (127)
5"
(127)
5"
(127)
5" (127)
5" (127)
5"
(127)
5"
(127)
5" (127)
5"
(127)
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
F
C
C
C
D
D
G
E
E
E
I
H
8.75" (222) 8.75" (222)

8.75" (222) 8.75" (222)
8.75" (222) 8.75" (222)
8.75" (222)
8.75" (222)
8.75" (222) H
8.75" (222) I
35
65
200
35
65
150
35
35
65
150
35
50
65
8.75" (222)
25
8.75" (222)
8.75"
35(222)
8.75" (222)
100
8.75"
(222)
8.75"
25(222)
8.75 (222)
8.75
25(222)
1035
(254)
10 (254)
10100
(254)
10 (254)
25
8.75" (222)
8.75" (222)
25
10 (254)
10 (254)
50
H
H
I
H
H
I
M
M
J
J
J
K
H
I
J
J
10 (254)
J
35
1025
(254)
K
8.75" (222) H
65
8.75"
(222)
I
35
3.75"
150(95) 100
3.75" (95)
35
25
3.75" (95)
5"50
(127)
25
5" (127)
65
35
5" (127)
5"150
(127)
100
6.25"
35 (159) 6.25"25(159)
200, 300, 400

450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
500,
500,
500,
600,
600,
600,
600,
700,
700,
700,
700,
800
800
800
Selection
800
800,
800,
900,
900,
900, 1000, 1200

900, 1000, 1200
1000, 1200
1000, 1200
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

200, 300, 400
450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
900, 1000, 1200
900, 1000, 1200
Max IC Rating (KA)

240V
480V 600V
10
10
10
22
22
65
10
10
65
18
100
18
18
100
42
18
200
200
100
100
10
22
42
65
35
100
65
200
200
65
65
35
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
35
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
35
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
35
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
50
25
100
65
50
65
35
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
35
25
100
65
50
200
100
65
65
50
25
100
65
35
200
150
100
65
35
25
100
65
50
200
100
65
100
85
35
22
100
65
25
65
35
18
200
100
25
65
35
18
200
100
25
65
35
25
Branch Breaker Gutter Dimensions

For 38W Distribution Section
14.0 (356)
10.0 (254)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
8.75 (222)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
8.75 (222)
8.25 (210)
7.925 (201)
7.615 (193)
11.769 (299)
G
H
5.00 (127)
8.75 (222)
13.425 (341)
8.75 (222)
8.956 (227)
13.0 (330)
12.0 (305)
13.0 (330)
10.00 (254)
10.00 (254)
8.75 (222)
Space includes housing frame plate with blank cover plate. Provision
includes all necessary mounting hardware, less circuit breaker, and

includes housing frame cover plate with breaker handle opening.
1 to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75 (95) of unit space

Accessories such as shunt trips on three pole breakers require 6.25 (159)
of unit space.
Ground fault is not available on branch Sensitrip breakers.

e Also 10KA at 600Y/347 Volts.
f Refer to Table 5 for layout dimensions.

Ground
Also
fault is not available on branch Sensitrip breakers.

10KA at 600Y/347 Volts.
6-41
PANELBOARDS
5, 200, 225, 250

5, 200, 225, 250
5, 200, 225, 250
65
, 175, 200, 225

, 175, 200, 225
, 175, 200, 225
3.75" (95)
Breaker
Available Trip Value
Type 3.75" (95)Ampere

Ratings
3.75" (95)
SJ
ND6
Rating (KA)
a
Branch Circuit
Breaker Selection
, 90, 100
, 90, 100
SJD6
LXD6
LD6
600
HLD6
CLD6
SLD6
MD6
Mounting
Height
HMD6
800
Inches (mm) CMD6
SMD6
Twin
Single
ND6
HND6
1200
3.75" (95)
CND6
SND6
SJD6
Panelboards
Type S5
When required, special constructions

or additions to standard panelboards
may be specified for all factoryassembled Power and Distribution
Panelboards. Below and on the next
page are listed many of those available
for Type S5 panelboards. In no case do
these apply to Narrow (Column) Width
Lighting Panelboards or Unassembled
Panelboards.
1. Miscellaneous
NEMA TYPE
Type1
Type 2 (Drip-proof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type 3R
Type 12
2. Painted Finish
Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Gray)
12 oz. aerosol can,
Catalog Number TUP61
3. Miscellaneous Accessories
PANELBOARDS
Nameplate laminated, engraved

Tamper-Resistant Screws
4. Devices Mounted on Gutter Cover

Includes Device, Mounting
Wired or Unwired
Toggle Switch SPST or 3-way;
15A
Pilot Light General Purpose,
Neon or Incandescent
Pushbutton
Lugs
5. Feed-Thru
(One Set Per Panel)
Ampere
Rating
400
600
800
1200
Selection
6. MLO Compression Lugs
Available as main lugs and neutral lug.
Deduct
From
Available
Unit
Ampere Aluminum
Copper
Space
Rating (Specify Size ) (Specify Size) (inches)
400
600
800
1200
Consult
Sales
Office
7. Grounding of Panelboards c
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bus
Including Ground Lug
Insulated Equipment Ground Bus
8. Remote Control Switches de
30
60
75
100
150
200
225
Siemens CLH
Electrically
Held
2-Pole
Unit space 20
3-Pole
Unit space 20
9. Increased Capacity Neutral

Ampere Rating
Phase
Neutral
400
400
600
800
600
800
1200
1200
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD6,QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, NGB

ED4, ED6, HED4, CED6
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, CFD6
JXD6, JD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, LXD6, LD6,
HLD6, CLD6, SLD6
MD6, HMD6, CMD6, SMD6, ND6, HND6,

5
CND6, SND6

5
5
11. Ground Fault Sensing
5
Consult
Sales
Office
ASCO 920
600V AC Mechanically
Ampere Held
Rating
2-Pole 3-Pole
Padlocking Device Padlocks in

OFF position. Available for:
Unit
Space
(inches)
None
None
None
None
Relay Kit k Equipment

Protection (30 ma)
For Use with Number of

Breaker Types Poles
ED4, ED6,
HED4
1, 2, 3
Description
Basic kit
Basic kit with
bell alarm
12. Main Bus

Standard main bus and ground bus are
tin plated aluminum. For copper main
bus, neutral bus and ground bus change
prefix A to C on catalog number and
contact your sales office for pricing.
13. Copper Lugs
For Main Lug Only Panels
Standard main lugs and neutral lugs are
tin plated aluminum, UL & CSA listed
for use with aluminum/copper cables.
For copper lugs in the mains and neutral
for use with copper cables only, contact
sales.
14. Shunt Trip on Main and Branches
Descriptionfghij
BL, BQD6, NGB (branch only)
10. Circuit Breaker Accessories

Unit Space
(Additional inches)
3-Pole
2-Pole
MLO
Consult
Sales
10
Consult 10
Sales
17.5
17.5
Breaker Type

Blocks handle in either the ON or
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD6, QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, NGB
JXD6, JD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, LXD6, LD6,
HLD6, CLD6, SLD6
QJ2, QJ2H, QJH2, ED2, ED4, HED4

(branch only)
All others through 600A
800A and 1200A
15. Sentron TPS (TVSS Modules)

160 KA
240 KA
Options
Surge Counter
Remote Indicator
MD6, HMD6, CMD6, SMD6, ND6, HND6,

CND6, SND6

For
use on main lug, main breaker or main switch

panels without subfeed breakers.
For increase in panelboard height Consult local
sales office.
c Ground bar not installed in box.
d For short circuit ratings with remote control switches,
consult sales office.
6-42
Available
in 90 high enclosure only. Unit space is

42 1/2 with Test and Monitor Panel; 45 without Test
and Monitor Panel.
Not available on Sensitrip III.
For required unit space consult local sales office.
Price does not include control power transformer.
600 Volt 712 high units.

Mounting height increases to 6.25 when shunt trip
is required.
j Shunt Trip on 100A frame breakers increases mounting
height to 6.25 for twin mounting.
k Not CSA approved.
Price
Panelboards
Modifications and Additions Replacements for Circuit Breakers
Selection
Replacement Connecting Strap Guide

The following table may be used to obtain the proper connector kit by
measuring the exterior dimensions of the panel. Every attempt has been
made to make this table complete and accurate. The table is based on panels produced by ITE, Bulldog and Siemens from 1958 to present. Should any
questions arise please contact your Siemens sales office for replacements.
Panelboard
Blank Plates
For use with Series 6 CDP Panelboards, S5, F2,
FCI and FCII Switchboards.
Height
SPP/FPP/CDP/VB
6
1.25
6FPB01
2.50
6FPB02
3.75
6FPB03
5.00
6FPB05
Tub
Width
Depth
9
30 - 36 - 42
Panel
Type
OLD CDP
Replacement
Max Amps
400
Note
MCCB only.
9.75
OLD CDP
600
MCCB only.
10.00
6FPB10
15.00
6FPB15
32 - 38
38
13.75
CDP/VB6
1200A
600A
MCCB series 6 connectors

VB style units only (*)
12.75
SPP/FPP6
1200A
600A

VK or VB style (*)
* If switch unit width is 17 it is a vacubreak. If switch unit width is 23 or 28 it is a VK switch.
Connecting Strap For Use With SPP/FPP, S5, F2
Connecting Strap Kits and FrontFiller Plates

For use with NDP-CDP-7, S3
Breakers
Catalogue
Number
Breakers
Height
Inches (mm)
Series 6
Number
BQD6 (S3 only)
7 BQD6-2
BQ, BQH, HB
3.75 (95)
6EQ6
BL, BLH, HBL,
7 BL-2
3.75 (95)
6BL2C
QJ2, QJH2, 2 Pole
7 QJ2-1
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4
3.75 (95)
6E62
7 QJ3-1
CED6
3.75 (95)
6CLE2
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H
5 (127).
6QJ2
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
5 (127)
6F62
CFD6
5 (127)
6CLF1C
QJ2, QJH2 3 Pole

Single unit, Panel Mount
QJ2, QJH2 3 Pole
Double unit, Panel Mount
EC4, ED2, ED4, ED6,
HED4, HED6
Filler 1 Pole
QF3-UL
JXD2, JXD6, JD2, JD6, HJD6
8.75 (222)
6JJ62
7 QJ3-2
7 E6-2
6CLJ1C
8.75 (222)
6LL61C
CLD6
8.75 (222)
6CLL1C
SCLD6
8.75 (222)
6SCL61C
MD6, HMD6, CMD6,

SCMD6, SHMD6
10 (254)
6M61C
ND6, HND6, CND6

SND6, SHND6, SCND
10(254)
6N61C
PANELBOARDS
8.75 (222)
CJD6, SCJD6
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, SLD6, SHLD6,
Connecting Strap Kits For Use With Circuit Breakers in S5

Breaker Type
Hieght
Inches (mm)
Mounting
Catalogue
Number
SNBD
NGB
3.75 (95)
NEB, HEB
3.75 (95)
SEBD
5 (127)
SDGD
NDG, HDG, LDG

NFG, HFG, LFG
5 (127)
SFGD
NJG, HJG, LJG
6.25 (159)
SJG2D
NJG, HJG, LJG
6.25 (159)
SJG1D
These are aluminum connectors. If copper required is

please add suffix C.
3.75 (95) plate accommodates six 1-pole breakers.
10 (254) plate accommodates eighteen 1-pole breakers.
These connectors are available in copper only.

Can be used as fillers or in place of circuit breakers, VK
or VB Switches.
6-43
Panelboards
Fusible/Power and Distribution
Selection
Type F2
Ampere
Rating
Panelboards
fo
interiors and #E4016 for boxes and
fronts & CSA File #LR93833.
Ampere
Rating
Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al
400
(1) - 750 MCM OR

(2) - 250 MCM (Cu or Al)
600
(2) - 750 MCM OR

(4) - 250 MCM (Cu or Al)
600
800
(3)#3/0 AWG500 mcm
800
(3)#3/0 AWG500 mcm
1200
(4)#3/0 AWG500 mcm
1200
(4)#3/0 AWG500 mcm
400
Wire and Cable Range
30
60
100
(1)#14#2 AWG (Cu or Al)

(1)#14#2 AWG (Cu or Al)
(1)#14#1/0 AWG (Cu or Al)
200
(1)#6 AWG350 kcmil (Cu or Al)

(1) - 750 MCM OR
(2) - 250 MCM (Cu or Al)
600
(1)#3/0 AWG500 mcm

(2)#3/0 AWG250 mcm
(2)#3/0 AWG500 mcm
Gutters
Switch
Ampere
Rating
400
Boxes
38 wide, 12.75 deep, Type 1
End Gutters
(Minimum
inches)
Side Gutters
(Minimum
inches)
400
12
7.9
600
12
7.9
800
12
7.9
1200
12
7.9
Ampere
Rating
(2) - 750 MCM OR

(4) - 250 MCM (Cu or Al)
Maximum VB HP Ratings
Panelboard Fronts and Doors

Standard panelboards are furnished with
4 piece trim. Fronts are fabricated from
code gauge steel and finished ASA61.
Connectors
Suitable for Cu or Al
Branch Switch Connectors
Service
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC, Maximum.
1 Phase, 3 Wire; 3 Phase, 3 Wire; or 3
Phase, 4 Wire.
PANELBOARDS
Main Lug Panels
Main Switch Panel Connectors
600 Volts AC, 250 Volts DC Maximum

600 Ampere Main Switch,
1200 Ampere Main Lugs Only
UL & CSA Short Circuit Rating
200,000A IR Maximum
Meets 1996 NEC wire bending
requirement, section 373-6.
CSA - C22.2 No. 0.12
Amp
Rating
30
60
100
200
400
Fuses
The Proper Fuse Type for the Application
is Selected Using the Following
Parameters:
b Voltage Requirements
b Conductor Ampacity
b Horsepower Requirements
b Maximum Available RMS
Fault Current
b UL & CSA Fuse Class
240
7.5
15
30
50
3 Phase
Single Phase
DC
Volts
Volts
Volts
240
3
10
15
250
5
10
20
40
50
480
15
30
50
600
20
50
50
Maximum VK HP Ratings
Amp
Rating
30
60
100
200
240
7.5
1.5
30.0
60.0
3 Phase
Single Phase
DC
Volts
Volts
Volts
240
3
10
15
15
250
5
10
20
40
480
15
30
50
125
600
20
50
75
150
UL & CSA Fuse Classes

Class
H (code)
K
Interrupting
Ratings
I2t, Ip
Circuits
1-600A
250 and 600V

or less AC
10,000A
Less than
10,000A available
1-600A
250 and 600V

or less AC
50,000A
Feeder circuits
I2t-Low
Ip-Low
I2t-Slightly > J
Ip-Slightly > J
I2t- > RK-1
Ip- > RK-1
I2t-Low
Ip-Low
I2t-Low
Ip-Low
Feeder circuits
(motor load small %)
Amperes
Volts
1-600A
600V or less
To 200,000A
RK1
1/10-600A
600V or less
250V or less
To 200,000A
RK5
1/10-600A
600V or less
250V or less
To 200,000A
1-600A
300 and 600V

or less AC
To 200,000A
601-5000A
600V or less
To 200,000A
Lug
is single barrel construction, rated for 2-250 kcmil

or 1-500 kcmil cables.
6-44
Fuse
clips do not prohibit the use of Class H type fuse

in switch.
Feeder circuits
Motor starting
currents a factor
Non-motor loads
Feeder circuits
motor loads
Panelboards
Power and Distribution
Selection
Type F2
Maximum Unit
Panel
Space
Ampere
(MLO)
400A
600A
800A
1200A
30
45
60
60
Box
Height
60
75
90
90
120/240Volts
1 Phase, 3 Wire
120/208 Volts
3 Phase, 4 Wire
600 Volts
3 Phase, 3 Wire
347/600 Volts
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Branch Switches 600V Maximum

Rating
Ampere
30/30A (VK)
60/60A (VK)
100/100A (VK)
200A (VB)
200/200A (VK)
400A (VB)
600A (VB)
Maximum
Voltage
600V
Fusing
(1)
J, C
J, C
J, C
J, Code, R
J
J, Code, R,T
J, Code, R,T
Mounting Height
F2
38 W
6.25(159)
6.25(159)
7.5(190)
10(254)
10(254)
15(381)
15(381)
Fuse Clip provisions per unit

Class T
Rating
Ampere
Rating
Ampere
30
60
100
200
400
600
30
60
100
200
400
600
Class R
PANELBOARDS
Single or twin units as listed and are valid for class

C or J fuses. If class R or T fuse provisions are
required add per table above.
Not applicable to VB style units 400A and 600A.
Use of auxiliary switch kit will require the use of a 7.5

(190) high unit for 30 and 60 Amp. switches.
Refer to Siemens for single phase and DC horsepower
requirements.
Ratings are based on UL test procedure. CSA will not

recognize ratings above 100Hp.
6-45
Panelboards

Type F2
When required, special constructions or
additions to standard panelboards may
be specified for all factory-assembled
Power and Distribution Panelboards.
Below and on the next page are listed
many of those available, for Type F2
panelboards. In no case do these apply
to Narrow (Column) Width Lighting
Panelboards.
1. Miscellaneous
NEMA TYPE
Type 1
Type 2 (Drip-proof)
Type 3R
Type 12
2. Painted Finish
Description
Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Gray)
12 oz. aerosol can,
Catalog Number TUP-61
Nameplate laminated, engraved
Tamper-Proof Screws
PANELBOARDS
4. Devices Mounted on Gutter Cover

Includes Device, Mounting
Wired or Unwired
Description
Toggle Switch SPST or 3-way; 15A
Pilot Light General Purpose, Neon or
Incandescent
use on main lug, main breaker or main switch

panels without subfeed breakers.

For increase in panelboard height Consult local
sales office.
c Ground bar is not installed in box.
6-46
30
60
75
100
150e
200e
225
Unit space 20
Siemens CLH
Electrically
Held g
2-Pole
3-Pole
Unit space 20
7. Increased Capacity Neutral

Phase
Neutral
Unit
Space
(inches)
400
400
600
800
600
800
1200
1200
None
None
None
None
Ampere Rating
Ampere
Rating
400
600
800
1200
6. Remote Control Switchesd

600V AC
ASCO 920
600V AC Mechanically
ef
Ampere Held
Rating
2-Pole 3-Pole
10. Feed-Through Lugs

(One Set Per Panel)
8. Main Bus
Standard main bus and ground bus is
tin plated aluminum. For copper main
bus, neutral bus and ground bus change
prefix A to C on catalog number and
contact your sales office for pricing.
Unit Space
(Additional inches)
3-Pole
2-Pole
MLO
Consult
Sales
Office
Consult 10
Sales 17.5
Office
10
17.5
11. MLO Compression Lugs

Available as main lugs and neutral lug.
Deduct
From
Available
Unit
Ampere Aluminum
Copper
Space
Rating (Specify Size ) (Specify Size) (inches)
400
600
800
1200
5
5
5
5
12. VK Switch Accessories

Item
Cat. No.
Fuse Pullers (2) 30/60 mp
FP2
100 amp
FP3
200 amp
FP4
13. Sentron TPS (SPD Modules)

100 KA
200 KA
150 KA
250 KA
300 KA
Options
Surge Counter
Remote Indicator
9. Copper Lugs
For Main Lug Only Panels
Standard main lugs and neutral lugs are
tin plated aluminum, UL & CSA listed for
use with aluminum/copper cables. For
copper Lugs in the mains and neutral
for use with copper cables only, contact
sales.
Pushbutton
For
Selection
5. Grounding of Panelboardsc
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground
Bus Including Ground Lug
Insulated Equipment Ground Bus
d For
required unit space consult local sales office.

Price includes increased enclosure height if required.
listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
When 2 wire control is required. Relay and Terminal
Block (9 of unit space required).
e Devices
For
short circuit ratings with remote control switches

consult sales office.
Panelboard short circuit rating is limited to 5,000 RMS
symmetrical.
Panelboards
Modifications, Additions Replacements for Fusible Switches
Selection
Replacement Units
Amperes
Rating
250 Voltsh
Code Fuses
Cat. No.
600 Voltsh
Code Fuses
Cat. No.
600 Volts
J Fuses
Cat. No.
600 Voltsh
R Fuses
Cat. No.
600 Voltsh
T Fuses
Cat. No.
600 Volts
C Fuses
Cat. No.
VK23611CP
VK23622CP
VK33633CP
N/A
Height
in (mm)
VK Switch For Use With FPP6 Panelboards

30/30
60/60
100/100
200/200
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
VK23611JP
VK23622JP
VK33633JP
VK73644JP
VK23611RP
VK23622RP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
VK33633TP
VK73644TP
N/A
N/A
N/A
V7F3604CP
V7H3605CP
V7H3606CP
V7E3611JP
V7E3622JP
V7E3633JP
V7F3604JP
V7H3605JP
V7H3606JP
N/A
N/A
N/A
V7F3604RP
V7H3605RP
V7H3606RP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
V7H3605TP
V7H3606TP
6.25 (159)
6.25 (159)
7.5 (90)
10 (254)
VB Switch For Use With VB6 Panelboards

30/30
60/60
100/100
200
400
600
N/A
N/A
N/A
V7F3204CP
V7H3205CP
V7H3206CP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7.5(190)
7.5(190)
7.5(190)
10(254)
15(381)
15(381)
Connecting Strap Kits

Rating
Amperes
VB Switch
VB6
Cat. No.
VK Switch
Series 6
Cat. No.
30/30
60/60
100/100
VB6-71
VK6-57
VK6-57
VK6-58
100
200/200
200
400-600
VB6-71
N/A
VB6-71
VB6-150
N/A
VK6-72
VK6-71
N/A
Tub
Width
Depth
9
Panel
Type
OLD CDP
Replacement
Max Amps
400
Note
MCCB only.
9.75
OLD CDP
600
MCCB only.
32 - 38
13.75
CDP/VB6
1200A
600A

VB style units only (*)
38
12.75
SPP/FPP6
1200A
600A

VK or VB style (*)
30 - 36 - 42
Platesf
Blank
Panelboard
Height
SPP/FPP/CDP/VB
6
1.25
6FPB01
2.50
6FPB02
3.75
6FPB03
5.00
6FPB05
10.00
6FPB10
15.00
6FPB15
For Series 6 Main Devices above 200A, add suffix MS to

Catalog Number when ordering.
When 2-Pole units are required, use 3-Pole.
Series 6 (VB6, CDP6) replacement units and connector kits
also accommodates FCI and FCII distributions interiors.
Units installed after October 1991 will be FPP6 type.
Refer to Siemens for units equipped with auxiliary switches.
PANELBOARDS
For use with Series 6 CDP Panelboards, S5, F2,

FCI and FCII Switchboards.
Price is for two brackets to be included with filler plates.

To be used in tubs with 30-200A, VB units or fillers in
125/8 deep tub.
g Can be used as fillers or in place of circuit breakers, VK or
VB Switches.
h Special order
6-47
Revised
08/31/2014
Panelboards
Panel Skirts/System Types, AC & DC Voltages

Conduit Enclosing Shield (Panel Skirts)
AC Voltages
Sheet metal to cover conduits above or below a standard

panelboard box.
1 phase, 2 wire
b 120V 1 phase, 2 wire
Skirt Length
Width
8, 9, 11, 12
14, 17, 18, 23,
26, 27, 28, 29,
32, 33, 34, 35,
37, 38, 39, 40,
8, 9, 11, 12
14, 17, 18, 23,
26, 27, 28, 29,
32, 33, 34, 35,
37, 38, 39, 40,
25
30, 31,
36
41, 42, 43, 44
25
30, 31,
36
41, 42, 43, 44
Depth
20.00
5.75
20.00
5.75
20.00
5.75
20.00
24.00
24.00
5.75
7.75
7.75
24.00
7.75
24.00
7.75
1 phase, 3 wire
b 120/240V 1 phase, 3 wire
1 phase, 2 wire, Wye

Panel Skirts Standard Length
1 phase, 2 wire, Delta

4 Sides Screw Front
C
8, 9, 10,11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44

Busing
PANELBOARDS

b 208Y/120V 3 phase, 4 wire
A
B
N

Single-phase
Three-phase

b 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire
b 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire,
grounded B
grounded B
grounded B
A
B
N
C
A
B
C
A
B
N

DC voltage
1 phase, 2 wire
b 125Vdc, 2 wire
(Up to 125Vdc,
MLO option only.)
6-48
+125Vdc
7POWER PRODUCT
Low Voltage Motor Starters
Contents
7-1
Selection
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

General
7-4
Non - Combination
7-5
Circuit Breaker Combination
7-6
Fusible Switch Combination and Non-Fusible Starter
7-7
Full Voltage Reversing
General
7-8
Non - Combination
7-9
7-10
7-11
Two Speed Starters
General
7-12
Two Speed Two Windings, Constant or Variable Torque
Non - Combination
7-13
7-14
7-15
Two Speed Single Winding, Constant or Variable Torque
Non - Combination
7-16
7-17
7-18
Overload Relay Chart 7-19
Factory Modifications
Selection
7-20
SIRIUS Pre - Assembled Starter Packages
7-25
Dimensions
7-27
7
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
Siemens SIRIUS IEC Starters
The SIRIUS IEC Starter is the new generation

of IEC HP rated magnetic starters, designed to
meet and exceed todays market requirements
for HP rated starters.
The new SIRIUS Starters take advantage of
the reliability of the SIRIUS line of contactors
and overload relays in addition to the new line
of SIGNUM 3SB3 22mm pilot devices as the
standard control device.
As evident in the design and size, all efforts
were put in place to offer a new line of starters
that exceeds the performance of the previous
generation.
1NO auxiliary contact for starters up to 10HP at 600V.
The SIRIUS IEC Starters line also offers more price

flexibility in the very competitive starters market.
SIRIUS Starters Features:

b
b
b
b
b

b

b
CSA approved
100HP, 600V max
Standard 2NO+2NC auxiliary contacts
Ambient 60C on contactors
Fast and simple 3-prong overload contactor
connection: no coil extension required
Standard primary and secondary fusing on
control transformers
Standard Metal 22mm SIGNUM Control Devices
SIRIUS HP Rated Magnetic Starters

Selection
Catalogue Number Selection Guide

Starter Series
Disconnect Type
Starter Type
V
SIRIUS IEC
HP rated Starter
1
Non-combination
A
FVNR
2
Circuit breaker
combination
B
FVR
Enclosure Type
Contactor
Ref. Number
Coil Voltage
page 7-3-7-18
3
Non-fusible
type
4
Fusible
combination
B
CSA type 1
EEMAC type 1
general purpose
N
2S1W
constant or variable
torque
C
CSA type 5
EEMAC type 12
dust tight
industrial use
R
2S1W
constant
horsepower
D
CSA type 4
EEMAC type 4
watertight
U
2S2W
constant
horsepower
F
CSA type 4x
EEMAC type 4x
watertight
corrosion resistant
W
2S2W
constant or variable
torque
page 7-19
15
3RT1015
16
3RT1016
17
3RT1017
25
3RT1025
26
3RT1026
33
3RT1033
34
3RT1034
35
3RT1035
36
3RT1036
44
3RT1044
45
3RT1045
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
46
3RT1046
7-2
Overload Relay
Setting Range
C
24V/60Hz
24V/50Hz
K
120V/60 Hz
110V/50Hz
M
208V/60Hz
P
240V/60Hz
220V/50Hz
V
460V/60Hz
380V/50Hz
T
600V/60Hz
Z
Others
Specify
OA to 4M
Standard
Class 10
bimetal
overload relay
RB
Optional
Class 20
electronic
overload relay
00
Provision for
field mounting
of overload relay
A.C. Magnetic Starters

Selection
Catalogue Number Selection Guide

Pilot Devices
Power Line
Voltage
Control Circuit
page 7-20
0
Separate control
circuit, unfused
1
120V/1Ph/60Hz
N
Separate
control circuit,
fused
max 250V
3
230V/3PH/60Hz
4
460V/3Ph/60Hz
5
575V/3Ph/60Hz
7
230V/1Ph/60Hz
8
208V/3Ph/60Hz
with
4 wires
(+Neutral)
9
Other
Specify
Operators
Operators Type
page 7-21
6
600V Max.
Distributor Stock
2
208V/3PH/60Hz
Additional
Auxiliary
Contacts
P
One control fuse
for 120V 1 ph.
R
Standard control
transformer c/w
2 prim. & 1 sec.
120V fuse
U
Extra 50VA
capacity
Control
Transformer
W
Extra 100VA
capacity
Control
Transformer
Legend Plate(s)
pages 7-21-7-22
Functions
page 7-22
Colour
Choice
page 7-23
0
None
0
none
0
none
0
none
0
none
0
none
E
4 N.O.
1 or 2
1 push button
extended
head red
A
EMERGENCY
STOP
1 or 2
Full Voltage
120V c/w
legend
plate(s)
1 to 5
1 indicator
for
1 function
C to F
Colour
choice for
1 indicator
6 to 8
and
A to E
2 indicators
for
2 functions
1 to 6
Colour
choice for
2 indicators
F
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
J
3 N.O. + 1 N.C.
K
2 N.C.
L
2 N.O.
M
2 N.O. + 2 N.C.
9
Other Specify
B
STOP
3 or 4
1 twist lock
mushroom red
C
START STOP
5 or 6
2 push buttons
1-red, 1-green
D
ON OFF
7 or 8
3 push buttons
1-red, 2-black
E to J
3 legend plates
for 3 push button
A or B
2 pos. selector switch
K to T
1 legend plate for
2 pos. selector
switch
C or D
spring return
E or F
key operated
G or H
L or M
key operated
N or P
spring return key
operated
T or U
and 2 push buttons
START
STOP
for hand operation
X
3 legend plates
for 3 pos. selector
switch and
START STOP
push button
9
Other Specify
5 or 6
Full Voltage
120V LED c/w
legend
plate(s)
7 or 8
Full Voltage
24V LED c/w
legend
plate(s)
F to R
3 indicators
for
3 functions
9
Other
Specify
each function
per colour
K to P
Colour
choice for
3 indicators
9
Other
Specify each
colour per
function
A
Full Voltage
120V w/o
legend
plate(s)
B
Full Voltage
24V w/o
legend
plate(s)
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
J or K
spring return
1 to 8
1 legend plate for
3 pos. selector
switch
3 or 4
Full Voltage
24V c/w
legend
plate(s)
9
Other
Specify
Indicators
Indicator
Type
C
Full Voltage
120V LED
w/o legend
plate(s)
D
Full Voltage
24V LED w/o
legend
plate(s)
9
Other
Specify
9
Other Specify
7-3

Selection
General
Description
Siemens full voltage non-reversing type starters are designed
for full voltage across-theline starting of single or 3-phase
squirrel cage motors. They also can be used as the
primary control of wound rotor motors.
Combined with short circuit protection, FVNR starters are also
offered as combination starters.
b F
usible disconnect type complete with Form II, Class C fuse
clips, or as an option, Form I, Class J fuse clips.
b C
ircuit breaker type or as Non-Fusible Controller.
FVNR starters are available up to 100HP, 600V AC, EEMAC
type 1 or 12 sheet metal enclosed. They are an assembly of
the proven 3RT contactors and the exclusive 3RU
bimetal overload relays.
IV
L1 T1
L
O/L
L2 T2
1 PHASE
DISCONNECTED
DEVICE
T1
L3 T3
MOTOR HP
N
IV
L1 T1
L1
3 PHASE
DISCONNECTED
DEVICE
L2
L3
H1
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
X1
95
O/L
96
STOP
O/L
Single
Phase
T1
L2 T2
T2
L3 T3
T3
MOTOR HP
Three
Phase
H2
T1
X2
X1
START
A1
X2
M
A2
FVNR Typical Wiring Diagram
V1AB15K .. .. . .. ... Z..
Catalogue Number:
HP Rated Starter
Disconnect Type
Starter Type
Enclosure Type
Contactor Ref.
Coil Voltage
Overload Relay P. 14-19
Power Line Volt. and Control Circuit P. 14-20

Additional Aux. Contacts P. 14-21
Pilot Devices Operators P. 14-22
Pilot Devices Indicators P. 14-23
Other options P. 14-24
(fuse clips, control & timing relays, metering & protective devices, etc)
7-4

Non-Combination
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
Ordering Information Required
b 1 NO auxiliary contact on all 20A enclosed, 10 HP at
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
elect basic type nr. from table below.
b Add suffix for overload relay setting range from page 7-19
b Add suffix for factory modification from page 7-20 to 7-24
600V starters
b 2 NO + 2NC auxiliary contacts on all other sizes

b C
lass 10 bimetal overload relays including:
- Manual or Automatic reset
- Phase Loss Protection
- Separate Trip and Alarm contact
b A
ll enclosures are designed to accept a standard
other voltages and frequencies

are available upon request
sized control transformer
b A
ll enclosures have provisions for up to 4 pilot devices
The type numbers in the selection table specify a 120V 60 Hz coil. If a different coil voltage is required, change the K (7 digit)
as per Coil Suffix Table above.
Non-Combination
CSA MAXIMUM HP RATING
Enclosed
Amps
20
35
45
105
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

General Purpose Enclosure
NO
NC
Catalogue Number
V1AB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V1AB16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V1AB17K..
10
15
25
V1AB25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V1AB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V1AB33K..
10
10
25
30
34
V1AB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V1AB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V1AB36K..
60
44
V1AB44K..
15
20
25
50
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V1AB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V1AB46K..
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Type 12 Industrial Use
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V1AC15K..
V0
V1AC16K..
V1AC17K..
V1AC25K..
V1
V1AC26K..
V1AC33K..
V1
V1
V2
V2
V1AC34K..
V1AC35K..
V1AC36K..
V1AC44K..
V1AC45K..
V1AC46K..
S
S
H2
H2
7-5
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
90
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
Enclosure Sheet Metal
55
1 phase
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per contactor
Replacement Parts
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features

b
b
b
b
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
elect basic type nr. from table below
b A
dd suffix for overload relay setting range from page 7-19
b A
dd suffix for factory modification from page 7-20 to 7-24
600V starters
2
NO + 2NC auxiliary contacts on all other sizes
C
A
A

Circuit Breaker Combinationa
Enclosed
Amps
20
35
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
55
90
105
1 phase
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
V2AB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V2AB16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V2AB17K..
10
15
25
V2AB25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V2AB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V2AB33K..
10
10
25
30
34
V2AB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V2AB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V2AB36K..
60
44
V2AB44K..
15
20
25
50
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V2AB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V2AB46K..
a Factory
will automatically select the circuit breaker based on

standard or given motor full-load current and the following:
- Continuous-current rating of a minimum 115% of motor
full-load current.
- Trip-setting position is 11 times motor full load current.
7-6
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V2AC15K..
V2
V2AC16K..
H2
V2AC17K..
V2AC25K..
V2
V2AC26K..
H2
V2AC33K..
V2
V2
V4
V4
V2AC34K..
V2AC35K..
V2AC36K..
V2AC44K..
V2AC45K..
V2AC46K..
H2
H2
H5
H5
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features

b
b
b
b
600V starters
2
NO + 2NC auxiliary contacts on all other sizes
C
A
A
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

Fusible Switch Combinations and Non-Fusible Starters
Enclosed
Amps
20
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
NONE
30
1/3
71/2
1/2
71/2
71/2
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

NC
Catalogue Number
15
V3AB15K..
V4AB15K..
NONE
30
16
V3AB16K..
V4AB16K..
10
NONE
30
17
V3AB17K..
V4AB17K..
V3AC17K..
V4AC17K..
10
15
NONE
30
60
25
V3AB25K..
V4AB25K..
V4AB25K..
V3AC25K..
V4AC25K..
V4AC25K..
71/2
15
20
NONE
30
60
26
V3AB26K..
V4AB26K..
V4AB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
NONE
30
60
33
V3AB33K..
V4AB33K..
V4AB33K..
10
10
25
30
NONE
30
60
34
V3AB34K..
V4AB34K..
V4AB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
NONE
30
60
35
V3AB35K..
V4AB35K..
V4AB35K..
50
NONE
30
60
100
V3AB36K..
V4AB36K..
V4AB36K..
V4AB36K..
44
V3AB44K..
V4AB44K..
V4AB44K..
V4AB44K..
V3AB45K..
V4AB45K..
V4AB45K..
V4AB45K..
10
15
15
40
36
15
20
25
50
60
NONE
30
60
100
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
NONE
60
100
200
45
NONE
200
46
105
10
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
55
90
Contactor
reference
number
30
30
75
100
V3AB46K..
V4AB46K..
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V3AC15K..
V4AC15K..
V2
V2
V3AC16K..
V4AC16K..
V3AC26K..
V4AC26K..
V4AC26K..
H2
H2
V3AC33K..
V4AC33K..
V4AC33K..
V2
V3AC34K..
V4AC34K..
V4AC34K..
H2
V3AC35K..
V4AC35K..
V4AC35K..
V2
V4
V4
V3AC36K..
V4AC36K..
V4AC36K..
V4AC36K..
V3AC44K..
V4AC44K..
V4AC44K..
V4AC44K..
V3AC45K..
V4AC45K..
V4AC45K..
V4AC45K..
H2
H5
H5
V3AC46K..
V4AC46K..
a Starters
are suitable for HRC IIC Fuses. Refer to page

7-23 for HRC IJ Fuse Clips.
7-7
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
3 phase
Aux,
Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
35
1 phase
FUSEa
CLIPS
Type
IIC
Amps

Selection
General
Description
Siemens full voltage reversing type starters are designed for
full voltage across-the-line starting and reversing of single or
3-phase squirrel cage motors. They also can be used as the
primary control of wound rotor motors.
Combined with short circuit protection, FVR starters are also
offered as combination starters:
b F
usible disconnect type complete with Form II, Class
C fuse clips, or as an option, Form I, Class J fuse clips.
b C
ircuit breaker type or as Non-Fusible Controller.
FVR - starters are available up to 100HP, 600V AC in EEMAC
type 1 or 12 sheet metal enclosures.
FVR - starters are an assembly of the 3RA Reversing Contactor
including electrical and mechanical interlock and a 3RU
bimetallic overload relay.
L1
L1
L3
O/L
T1
T1
L2
T2
T2
L3
T3
T3
3P
DISCONNECT
DEVICE
L2
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
H1
H2
X1
X2
MOTOR
HP:
T1
95
O/L
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
96
STOP
REVERSE
X1
FORWARD
X2
R
F
A1
A2
X1
X2
F
R
FVR Typical Wiring Diagram
A1
A2
V1 B B 15K .. .. . ..
Catalogue No.:
HP Rated Starter
Disconnect Type
Starter Type
Enclosure Type
Contactor Ref.
Coil Voltage

7-8
...

Non-Combination
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
echanical and electrical interlock
b 2 NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts per contactor.
b
b
b
For the electrical interlock, a N.C. contact is provided

separately.
C
A
A
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

Non-Combination
Enclosed
Amps
20
35
45
105
575V
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
V1BB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V1BB16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V1BB17K..
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V1BC15K..
V1
V1BC16K..
V1BC17K..
10
15
25
V1BB25K..
V1
V1BC25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V1BB26K..
V1
V1BC26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V1BB33K..
V2
V1BC33K..
H2
10
10
25
30
34
V1BB34K..
V2
V1BC34K..
H2
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V1BB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V1BB36K..
15
20
25
50
60
44
V1BB44K..
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V1BB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V1BB46K..
V2
V3
V3
V1BC35K..
V1BC36K..
V1BC44K..
V1BC45K..
V1BC46K..
H2
H3
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
90
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
55
1 phase
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
H3
7-9

Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
b
b
b
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

separately.
C
A
A

Enclosed
Amps
20
35
55
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
90
105
7-10
1 phase
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
230V
460V
575V
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
115V
230V
200V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
V2BB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V2BB16K..
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
V2BC15K..
V3
V2BC16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V2BB17K..
V2BC17K..
10
15
25
V2BB25K..
V2BC25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V2BB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V2BB33K..
10
10
25
30
34
V2BB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V2BB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V2AB36K..
15
20
25
50
60
44
V2BB44K..
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V2BB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V2AB46K..
Encl.
Fig.
V3
V2BC26K..
H3
H3
V2BC33K..
V3
V3
V4
V4
V2BC34K..
V2BC35K..
V2AC36K..
V2BC44K..
V2BC45K..
V2AC46K..
H3
H3
H5
H5
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
b
b
b

separately.
C
lass 10 bimetallic overload relays including:
A
A
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

Enclosed
Amps
20
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
NONE
30
1/3
71/2
1/2
71/2
71/2
Catalogue Number
15
V3BB15K..
V4BB15K..
NONE
30
16
V3BB16K..
V4BB16K..
10
NONE
30
17
V3BB17K..
V4BB17K..
V3BC17K..
V4BC17K..
10
15
NONE
30
60
25
V3BB25K..
V4BB25K..
V4BB25K..
V3BC25K..
V4BC25K..
V4BC25K..
71/2
15
20
NONE
30
60
26
V3BB26K..
V4BB26K..
V4BB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
NONE
30
60
33
V3BB33K..
V4BB33K..
V4BB33K..
10
10
25
30
NONE
30
60
34
V3BB34K..
V4BB34K..
V4BB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
NONE
30
60
35
V3BB35K..
V4BB35K..
V4BB35K..
36
V3BB36K..
V4BB36K..
V4BB36K..
V4BB36K..
44
V3BB44K..
V4BB44K..
V4BB44K..
V4BB44K..
V3BB45K..
V4BB45K..
V4BB45K..
V4BB45K..
10
15
15
40
50
15
20
25
50
60
NONE
30
60
100
75
NONE
60
100
200
45
NONE
200
46
15
25
30
60
105
10
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

NC
NONE
30
60
100
71/2
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
55
90
Contactor
reference
number
30
30
75
100
V3BB46K..
V4BB46K..
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V3BC15K..
V4BC15K..
V3
V3
V3BC16K..
V4BC16K..
V3BC26K..
V4BC26K..
V4BC26K..
H3
H3
V3BC33K..
V4BC33K..
V4BC33K..
V3
V3BC34K..
V4BC34K..
V4BC34K..
H3
V3BC35K..
V4BC35K..
V4BC35K..
V3
V4
V4
V3BC36K..
V4BC36K..
V4BC36K..
V4BC36K..
V3BC44K..
V4BC44K..
V4BC44K..
V4BC44K..
V3BC45K..
V4BC45K..
V4BC45K..
V4BC45K..
H3
H5
H5
V3BC46K..
V4BC46K..
a Starters

7-11
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
3 phase
Aux,
Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
35
1 phase
FUSEa
CLIPS
Type
IIC
Amps

Two Speed Starters
General
Selection and Ordering

Starter ratings are based on the
maximum HP at the highest speed.
Electrical interlocking is furnished on
all multi-speed starters to preclude
connecting more than one speed
winding at the same time. Both
mechanical and electrical interlocking is
provided wherever there is a possibility
of short circuiting of the line.
Standard wiring permits starting
the motor on any speed. To change
a running motor to a higher speed,
operator presses the desired speed
button. To change to a lower speed,
operator must press stop button
before selecting the lower speed;
allowing time for the motor to slow
down, this reduces shock on driven
machinery and surges on the power
system.
When control at various speeds is by
means of two-wire control devices, such
as limit, pressure or float switches,
deceleration relays should be used,
unless both the motor manufacturer and
the machine manufacturer have been
consulted.
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
Description
Full-voltage ac magnetic two speed
controllers are designed to control
reconnectable squirrel-cage induction
motors for operation at two different
constant speeds depending on the
construction of the motor. These
controllers are available in combination
and non-combination types.
The speed of an induction motor is a
function of the supply frequency and the
number of poles of the motor winding.
To obtain different speeds with a
fixed supply frequency, the number of
magnetic poles of the motor must be
changed.
Characteristics at any speed are similar
to those of a single-speed motor. There
are two basic methods of providing
multiple-pole combinations:
Separate-Winding Motors have a
separate winding for each speed. This
motor construction is slightly more
expensive, but the controller is relatively
simple, and a wide variety of speeds can
be selected. Separate winding motors
with delta connected motor windings
require one corner to be opened on
each unused winding.
Selection
Consequent-Pole Motors have a single

winding for two speeds. Extra winding
taps are brought out for reconnection for
different number of stator poles. While
the motor costs less, the controller is
more complicated, and speed range is
limited to a 2-to-1 ratio.
Torque Characteristics
Multi-speed motors are divided into
three application groups:
Constant Torque - HP output varies
directly with speed, while torque remains
constant. A constant-torque motor rated
100 HP at 1200 rpm delivers 50 HP at 600
rpm. This type is applicable to conveyors,
mills, dough mixers, reciprocating pumps,
and other similar loads.
Variable Torque - HP varies as a square
of speed, while torque varies directly
with speed. A variable-torque motor
rated 100 HP at 1200 rpm delivers
25 HP at 600 rpm. This type is applicable
to systems having fan or centrifugal
pump characteristics.
Constant Horsepower - Motor delivers
rated HP at all full-load speeds, while
torque varies inversely to speed. This
type is applicable to cutting tools, lathes,
spindles, etc.
V 1 WB 1 5 K . . .
Catalogue No.:
. .. ...
HP Rated Starter
Disconnect Type
W 2 speed-2 windings
constant or variable torque
Enclosure Type
U 2 speed-2 windings
constant horsepower
Contactor Ref.
N 2 speed-1 winding
constant or variable torque
R 2 speed-1 winding
constant horsepower
Coil Voltage

7-12
Two Speed Two Windings
Non-Combination, Constant or Variable Torque
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b F or auxiliary contacts provided, see Selection Table

b
b
b
below. 1 NC auxiliary contact of each contactor is

used for the electrical interlock.
C
A
A
ll enclosures have provisions for up to
4 pilot devices
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
dd suffix for both overload relay setting range from page 7-19
b A

The type numbers in the selection table below specify 120V 60 Hz coils. If a different coil voltage is required, change the K
(7 digit) as per Coil Suffix Table above.
Non-Combination
Enclosed
Amps
20
35
45
105
575V
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
V1WB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V1WB16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V1WB17K..
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V1WC15K..
V2
V1WC16K..
V1WC17K..
10
15
25
V1WB25K..
V1
V1WC25K..
H2
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V1WB26K..
V1
V1WC26K..
H2
71/2
10
20
25
33
V1WB33K..
V2
V1WC33K..
H2
10
10
25
30
34
V1WB34K..
V2
V1WC34K..
H2
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V1WB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V1WB36K..
15
20
25
50
60
44
V1WB44K..
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V1WB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V1WB46K..
L1
L1
L2
L3
T11
L2
T2
T12
L3
T3
L1
L2
T2
T2
L3
T3
T3
H2
X2
V1WC45K..
V1WC46K..
H3
H3
MOTOR
HP:
T1
H1
V3
V1WC44K..
H2
T13
O/L-L
T1
X1
V3
V1WC35K..
V1WC36K..
O/L-H
T1
3P
DISCONNECT
DEVICE
V2
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
90
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
55
1 phase
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
95
O/L-H
96
95
O/L-L
96
STOP
LOW
HIGH
X1
X2
L
H
A1
A2
X1
X2
H
L
2S2W Typical Wiring Diagram
A1
A2
7-13
Circuit Breaker Combination, Constant or Variable Torque
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b S
b A
b A
b
b

C
A
A
4 pilot devices
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T

Enclosed
Amps
20
35
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
55
90
105
1 phase
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
15
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
V2WB15K..
1/3
71/2
16
V2WB16K..
1/2
71/2
10
17
V2WB17K..
10
15
25
V2WB25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V2WB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V2WB33K..
10
10
25
30
34
V2WB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
35
V2WB35K..
10
15
15
40
50
36
V2WB36K..
60
44
V2WB44K..
15
20
25
50
71/2
15
25
30
60
75
45
V2WB45K..
10
30
30
75
100
46
V2WB46K..
a Factory

full-load current.
7-14
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V2WC15K..
V3
V2WC16K..
H3
V2WC17K..
V2WC25K..
V3
V2WC26K..
H3
V2WC33K..
V3
V3
V4
V4
V2WC34K..
V2WC35K..
V2WC36K..
V2WC44K..
V2WC45K..
V2WC46K..
H3
H3
H5
H5
Fusible Switch Combination and Non-Fusible Starters, Constant or Variable Torque Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features

b
b
b

C
A
A
4 pilot devices
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

Enclosed
Amps
20
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
1/4
3/4
11/2
NONE
30
1/3
71/2
1/2
71/2
71/2
Catalogue Number
15
V3WB15K..
V4WB15K..
NONE
30
16
V3WB16K..
V4WB16K..
10
NONE
30
17
V3WB17K..
V4WB17K..
V3WC17K..
V4WC17K..
10
15
NONE
30
60
25
V3WB25K..
V4WB25K..
V4WB25K..
V3WC25K..
V4WC25K..
V4WC25K..
71/2
15
20
NONE
30
60
26
V3WB26K..
V4WB26K..
V4WB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
NONE
30
60
33
V3WB33K..
V4WB33K..
V4WB33K..
10
10
25
30
NONE
30
60
34
V3WB34K..
V4WB34K..
V4WB34K..
71/2
10
15
30
40
NONE
30
60
35
V3WB35K..
V4WB35K..
V4WB35K..
36
V3WB36K..
V4WB36K..
V4WB36K..
V4WB36K..
44
V3WB44K..
V4WB44K..
V4WB44K..
V4WB44K..
V3WB45K..
V4WB45K..
V4WB45K..
V4WB45K..
10
15
15
40
50
15
20
25
50
60
NONE
30
60
100
75
NONE
60
100
200
45
NONE
200
46
15
25
30
60
105
10
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

NC
NONE
30
60
100
71/2
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
55
90
Contactor
reference
number
30
30
75
100
V3WB46K..
V4WB46K..
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V3WC15K..
V4WC15K..
V3
V3
V3WC16K..
V4WC16K..
V3WC26K..
V4WC26K..
V4WC26K..
H3
H3
V3WC33K..
V4WC33K..
V4WC33K..
V3
V3WC34K..
V4WC34K..
V4WC34K..
H3
V3WC35K..
V4WC35K..
V4WC35K..
V3
V4
V4
V3WC36K..
V4WC36K..
V4WC36K..
V4WC36K..
V3WC44K..
V4WC44K..
V4WC44K..
V4WC44K..
V3WC45K..
V4WC45K..
V4WC45K..
V4WC45K..
H3
H5
H5
V3WC46K..
V4WC46K..
a Starters

7-15
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
3 phase
Aux,
Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
35
1 phase
FUSEa
CLIPS
Type
IIC
Amps
Non-Combination, Constant or Variable Torque
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
b
b
b

separately.
C
A
A
4 pilot devices
b S
b A
b A
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T

Non-Combination
Enclosed
Amps
20
35
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
45
55
90
105
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
200V
230V
460V
11/2
Aux, Contacts supplied as

standard per
contactor
575V
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
15
V1NB15K..
71/2
16
V1NB16K..
71/2
10
17
V1NB17K..
Encl.
Fig.
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V1NC15K..
V2
V1NC16K..
H2
V1NC17K..
10
15
25
V1NB25K..
V2
V1NC25K..
H2
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V1NB26K..
V2
V1NC26K..
H2
71/2
10
20
25
33
V1NB33K..
V3
V1NC33K..
H2
10
10
25
30
34
V1NB34K..
V3
V1NC34K..
H2
10
15
30
40
35
V1NB35K..
15
15
40
50
36
V1NB36K..
20
25
50
60
44
V1NB44K..
25
30
60
75
45
V1NB45K..
30
30
75
100
46
V1NB46K..
L1
L1
3P
DISCONNECT
DEVICE
L2
L3
T2
L3
T3
L
V3
V4
V4
O/L-H
T1
L2
L1
T6
T4
T5
MOTOR
HP:
O/L-L
T1
T1
L2
T2
T2
L3
T3
T3
L1
H1
H2
X1
X2
95
O/L-H
96
95
O/L-L
96
STOP
LOW
HIGH
X1
X2
L
H
A1
A2
H
Y
A1
A2
X1
2S1W Typical Wiring Diagram
X2
Y
L
A1
2S1W ( Constant or Variable Torque) Typical Wiring Diagram
7-16
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

A2
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
V1NC35K..
V1NC36K..
V1NC44K..
V1NC45K..
V1NC46K..
H2
H3
H3
Two Speed Single Winding
Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
b
b
b

separately.
C
A
A
4 pilot devices
b S
b A
b A
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T

Enclosed
Amps
20
35
90
105
230V
460V
575V
11/2
CSA / EEMAC Type 1

NO
NC
Catalogue Number
15
V2NB15K..
71/2
16
V2NB16K..
71/2
10
17
V2NB17K..
10
15
25
V2NB25K..
71/2
71/2
15
20
26
V2NB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
33
V2NB33K..
10
10
25
30
34
V2NB34K..
10
15
30
40
35
V2NB35K..
15
15
40
50
36
V2NB36K..
20
25
50
60
44
V2NB44K..
25
30
60
75
45
V2NB45K..
30
30
75
100
46
V2NB46K..
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V2NC15K..
V3
V2NC16K..
H3
V2NC17K..
V2NC25K..
V3
V2NC26K..
H3
V2NC33K..
V3
V3
V4
V4
V2NC34K..
V2NC35K..
V2NC36K..
V2NC44K..
V2NC45K..
V2NC46K..
H3
H3
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
55
200V
45
Contactor
reference
number
3 phase
Aux, Contacts
supplied as
standard per
contactor
H5
H5
a Factory

full-load current.
7-17
Fusible Switch Combination and Non-Fusible Starters, Constant or Variable Torque Selection
Coil Voltage Codes
Standard Features
b M
b
b
b

separately.
C
A
A
ll enclosures have provisions for up to 4 pilot
devices
ACV 60 Hz
ACV 50 Hz
Coil
Suffix
24
120
208
240
460
600
20
110
220
380
C
K
M
P
V
T
b S
b A
b A

Enclosed
Amps
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
20
35
45
3 phase
Contactor
reference
number
200V
230V
460V
575V
11/2
NONE
30
71/2
71/2
71/2

CSA / EEMAC Type 1
Encl.
Fig.
CSA Type 5 / EEMAC

NC
Catalogue Number
15
V3NB15K..
V4NB15K..
NONE
30
16
V3NB16K..
V4NB16K..
10
NONE
30
17
V3NB17K..
V4NB17K..
V3NC17K..
V4NC17K..
10
15
NONE
30
60
25
V3NB25K..
V4NB25K..
V4NB25K..
V3NC25K..
V4NC25K..
V4NC25K..
71/2
15
20
NONE
30
60
26
V3NB26K..
V4NB26K..
V4NB26K..
71/2
10
20
25
NONE
30
60
33
V3NB33K..
V4NB33K..
V4NB33K..
10
10
25
30
NONE
30
60
34
V3NB34K..
V4NB34K..
V4NB34K..
10
15
30
40
NONE
30
60
35
V3NB35K..
V4NB35K..
V4NB35K..
15
15
40
50
NONE
30
60
100
36
V3NB36K..
V4NB36K..
V4NB36K..
V4NB36K..
20
25
50
60
NONE
30
60
100
44
V3NB44K..
V4NB44K..
V4NB44K..
V4NB44K..
25
30
60
75
NONE
60
100
200
45
V3NB45K..
V4NB45K..
V4NB45K..
V4NB45K..
NONE
200
46
105
30
30
75
100
a Starters

7-18
Aux, Contacts supplied as standard per

contactor
NO
55
90
FUSEa
CLIPS
Type
IIC
Amps
V3NB46K..
V4NB46K..
Catalogue Number
Encl.
Fig.
V3NC15K..
V4NC15K..
V3
V3
V3NC16K..
V4NC16K..
V3NC26K..
V4NC26K..
V4NC26K..
H3
H3
V3NC33K..
V4NC33K..
V4NC33K..
V3
V3NC34K..
V4NC34K..
V4NC34K..
H3
V3NC35K..
V4NC35K..
V4NC35K..
V3
V4
V4
V3NC36K..
V4NC36K..
V4NC36K..
V4NC36K..
V3NC44K..
V4NC44K..
V4NC44K..
V4NC44K..
V3NC45K..
V4NC45K..
V4NC45K..
V4NC45K..
V3NC46K..
V4NC46K..
H3
H5
H5
Overload Relay Selection Charts

Selection
The overload relay calibration is based on a motor service factor (S.F.) of 1.15.
If the service factor is 1.0, multiply motor F.L.C. by 0.9 before making selection.
Append to Catalogue Number V4AB15K _ _
Contactor Reference in Type No. (5. and 6. digit)

Adjustment
Range
Amps
0.11 - 0.16
0.14 - 0.2
0.18 - 0.25
15 / 16 / 17
25 / 26
Overload
Type
Overload
Suffix
3RU1116
0A
0B
0C
33 / 34 / 35 / 36
Overload
Type
Overload
Suffix
3RU1126
1C
1D
1E
Overload
Type
Overload
Suffix
3RU1136
1H
0.22 - 0.32
0.28 - 0.4
0.35 - 0.5
0D
0E
0F
0.45 - 0.63
0.55 - 0.8
0.7 - 1.0
0G
0H
0J
0.9 - 1.25
1.1 - 1.6
1.4 - 2
0K
1A
1B
1.8 - 2.5
2.2 - 3.2
2.8 - 4
1C
1D
1E
3.5 - 5
4.5 - 6.3
5.5 - 8
1F
1G
1H
1F
1G
1H
7 - 10
9 - 12
9 - 12.5
1J
1K
1J
1K
1J
1K
11 - 16
14 - 20
17 - 22
4A
4B
4C
4A
4B
18 - 25
20 - 25
22 - 32
4D
4D
4E
44 / 45 / 46
Overload
Type
Overload
Suffix
3RU1146
4D
4E
4F
4H
40 - 50
45 - 63
57 - 75
4H
4J
4K
70 - 90
80 - 100
Other Options
4L
4M
Suffix
Provision only for field amounting

of overload relay
00
Substitute bimetal overload relay

with solid state type 3RB2, Class 20
RB
7-19
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
4F
4G
28 - 40
36 - 45
36 - 50
Power Line Voltage and Control Circuit Options
Selection
Append to Catalogue Number i.e.: V4AB15K1E_ _
Power Line Voltage

Selection
120V
200V
230V
460V
575V
600V Max.
Other
Single Phase, 60HZ (L1, N)
Single Phase, 60Hz (L1, L2)
Three Phases, 60Hz (L1, L2, L3, N), 4-wire (Neutral)
Three Phases, 600V Max, 60Hz(L1, L2, L3)
Specify voltage, frequency, No. of phase & neutral if required
Three Phases, 60Hz (L1, L2, L3)

Suffix
Note: Power line voltage is an important data to be known in order to provide a starter properly connected for single phase or three phase load.
Control Circuit Selection

Append to Catalogue Number i.e.: V4AB15K1E_ _
Power Line Voltage

Selection
Contactor Reference No.
Separate Control Circuit, Unfused
Separate Control Circuit, Fused, 1 fuse max. 250V
1 Control Fuse, max. 250V
2 Control Fuses, max. 600V
Control Circuit Transformer:

Standard Standard Standard Standard
for Starter Type
FVNR
FVR
2S2W
2SW
Prim./Sec. Voltage
208/120
230/120
460/120
575/120
R
R
R
R
Control Circuit Transformer:

Extra Capacity
May require larger enclosure
Consult Siemens
additional 50VA
100VA
U
W
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
Suffix
Special transformer voltages Specify
7-20
Selection
Additional Auxiliary Contacts

Append to Catalogue Number ie: V4AB15K1E5R_
The max. allowable number of auxiliary
contacts per contactor is 4 except for
contactor 15/16/17 which can accept 5
Suffix
Std. auxiliary contacts as per starter selection table
Addition of:
2 N.O.
2 N.C.
F
K
E
J
M
Option Available for

contactors type:
15 / 16 / 17
4 N.O.
3 N.O. + 1 N.C.
2 N.O. + 2 N.C.
Other contactors will come

equiped as standard with
2NO+2NC
Pilot Devices Operators

Legend Plates are supplied as standard with Operators
Append to Catalogue Number i.e.: V4AB30K1E5R0_ _
First
Suffixa
EEMAC
Enclosure Type
English Legend
Second Suffix
French Legend
1/12
4
1 (2)
1/12
4
EMERGENCY STOP
STOP
A
B
ARRET DURGENCE
ARRET
ARRET DURGENCE
3 (4)
1/12
4
EMERGENCY STOP
1 N.C.
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
5 (6)
1/12
4
START STOP
ON OFF
C
D
MARCHE ARRET
EN HORS
7 (8)
1/12
4
FORWARD REVERSE STOP

HIGH LOW STOP
UP DOWN STOP
FAST SLOW STOP
OPEN CLOSE STOP
E
F
G
H
J
AVANT ARRIERE ARRET

HAUTE BASSE ARRET
EN HAUT EN BAS ARRET
VITE LENTEMENT ARRET
OUVRIR FERMER ARRET
Operator Description
None
Pushbutton
1 pushbutton
momentary
extended head red

1 N.C.
twist lock
maintained
mushroom red
2 pushbuttons
momentary
1 - red
1 - green
3 pushbuttons
momentary
1 - red
1 N.C. E
2 - black each 1 N.O.
7
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
a When
ordering French legend plates use the first suffix in brackets.
7-21
Power Line Voltage and Control Circuit Options
Selection
Pilot Devices Operators (continued)

Legend Plates are supplied as standard with Operators
Append to Catalogue Number i.e.: V4AB30K1E5R0_ _
Operator Description
First
Suffixa
EEMAC
Enclosure Type
A (B)
1/12
4
C (D)
1/12
4
E (F)
1/12
4
G (H)
1/12
4
J (K)
1/12
4
L (M)
1/12
4
N (P)
1/12
4
English Legend
Second Suffix
French Legend
STOP START
OFF ON
HAND AUTO
FOR REV
HIGH LOW
UP DOWN
FAST SLOW
OPEN CLOSE
LOCAL REMOTE
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
T
ARRET MARCHE
HORS EN
MAN AUTO
AVANT ARRIERE
HAUTE BASSE
HAUT BAS
VITE LENT
OUVRIR FERMER
LOCAL A DIST.
HAND OFF AUTO

FOR OFF REV
HIGH OFF LOW
UP OFF DOWN
FAST OFF SLOW
OPEN OFF CLOSE
LOCAL OFF REMOTE
TEST OFF AUTO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAN ARRET AUTO

AVANT ARRET ARRIERE
HAUTE ARRET BASSE
HAUT ARRET BAS
VITE ARRET LENT
OUVRIR ARRET FERMER
LOCAL HORS A DIST.
ESSAI ARRET AUTO
2-position selector switch

2 position selector switch
maintained
1 N.O.

spring return
1 N.O.

key operated
maintained
1 N.O.
3-position selector switch

maintained
2 x 1 N.O.

1 spring return
from both sides
2 x 1 N.O.

key operated
maintained
2 x 1 N.O.

key operated
spring return
from both sides
2 x 1 N.O.
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
2 pushbuttons & 3-position selector switch

maintained
c/w
START STOP pushbuttons
momentary green
2 x 1 N.O.
1/12
4
T (U)
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Pilot Devices Indicators

Append to Catalogue Number i.e.: V4AB15K1E5R05C _ _ _
Pilot Lights
Description
First
Suffixa
Enclosure Type
1/4/12
Full Voltage c/w legend plate(s)

120V incandescent
1 (2)
1/12
4
Full Voltage
24V incandescent
3 (4)
1/12
4
LED c/w legend plate(s)

120V extended lfie
5 (6)
1/12
4
LED c/w legend plate(s)

24V extended life
7 (8)
1/12
4
Full Voltage without legend plate(s)

120V incandescent
1/12
4
Full Voltage without legend plate(s)

24V incandescent
1/12
4
LED without legend plate(s)

120V extended life
1/12
4
LED without legend plate(s)

24V extended life
1/12
4
No Pilot Lights
a When
ordering French legend plates use the first suffix in brackets.
7-22
HAND OFF AUTO

for selector switch
and
START STOP fotpushbutton
MAN ARRET AUTO

for selector switch
and
MARCHE ARRET for pushbuttons
Pilot Device Options
Selection
Pilot Lights
Legend Plates and Lens Colours
Table A - One Pilot Light
LEGEND PLATES
LEGEND COLOURS
English
French
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Other
Specify
RUN
ON
OFF
O/L TRIPPED
READY
Other Legend Plates Specify
MARCHE
EN CIRCUIT
ARRT
SURCHARGE
PRT
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
9C
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
9D
1E
2E
3E
5E
9E
5F
9F
19
29
39
49
59
99
Suffix
Table B - Two Pilot Lights

LEGEND PLATES
English
French
RUN n OFF
ON n OFF
RUN n O/L TRIPPED
ON n O/L TRIPPED
FORWARD n REVERSE
FAST n SLOW
UP n DOWN
HIGH n LOW
MARCHE n ARRT
EN CIRCUIT n ARRT
MARCHE n SURCHARGE
EN CIRCUIT n SURCHARGE
AVANT n ARRIERE
VITE n LENTEMENT
EN HAUT n EN BAS
HAUT n BAS
LEGEND COLOURS
Suffix
Red
Red
Green
Green
Red
Yellow
Red
Green
Green
Red
Green
Yellow
Other
Specify
B1
C1
D1
E1
91
B2
C2
D2
E2
92
83
A3
93
64
74
B4
C4
D4
E4
94
65
75
85
A5
B5
C5
D5
E5
95
86
A6
96
69
79
89
A9
B9
C9
D9
E9
99
Table B - Three Pilot Lights

LEGEND PLATES
RUN n OFF n O/L TRIPPED

ON n OFF n O/L TRIPPED
FORWARD n REVERSE n OFF
FAST n SLOW n OFF
UP n DOWN n OFF
HIGH n LOW n OFF
FORWARD n REVERSE n O/L TRIPPED
FAST n SLOW n O/L TRIPPED
UP n DOWN n O/L TRIPPED
HIGH n LOW n O/L TRIPPED
MARCHE n ARRT n SURCHARGE

EN CIRCUIT n ARRT n SURCHARGE
AVANT n ARRIERE n ARRT
VITE n LENTEMENT n ARRT
EN HAUT n EN BAS n ARRT
HAUT n BAS n ARRT
AVANT n ARRIERE n SURCHARGE
VITE n LENTEMENT n SURCHARGE
EN HAUT n EN BAS n SURCHARGE
HAUT n BAS n SURCHARGE
Suffix
Red
Red
Green
Green
Green
Red
Red
Red
Yellow
Green
Green
Yellow
Red
Green
Yellow
Green
Red
Yellow
Other
Specify
HK
JK
KK
LK
9K
HJ
JJ
KJ
LJ
MJ
NJ
PJ
RJ
9J
ML
NL
PL
RL
9L
MM
NM
PM
RM
9M
FN
GN
MN
NN
PN
RN
9N
FP
GP
MP
NP
PP
RP
9P
F9
G9
H9
J9
K9
L9
M9
N9
P9
R9
99
7-23
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
French
English
LEGEND COLOURS
Pilot Device Options
Selection
Miscellaneous Options:
Specify by suffix and description as required.
Append to Catalogue No i.e.: V4AB15K1E5R05C165-Z _ _ _ _ _ _
Description
Suffix
Disconnect Devices
Auxiliary Contacts, not wired
Fusible or Non-Fusible
Disconnect Switch
Circuit Breaker
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.

2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
AX
AY
1 SPDT
2 SPDT
1 SPDT & 1 Alarm SPDT
AW
AX
AY
Meteringa
Installed & wired, EEMAC Type 1 & 12
Ammeter, 3-1/2 Panel Type
c/w one 5A sec. CT
One extra CT
Two extra CTs
MA
M0
MT
Voltmeter, 3-1/2 Panel Type

c/w One 0-750V Pt fused
3-Phase Selector Switch
Elapsed Time Meter ME
Phase Failure and Phase Sequence
Monitoring Relay
Control Relays and Timers
4 Pole Relay, A600
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
MV
MS
ME
MD
3 N.O. & 1 N.C.

4 N.O.
Time Delay Relaysa
1-SPDT, B300, max 240V AC coil
ON-Delay adj. up to 100s
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
OFF - Delay adj. up to 100s

Thermistor Tripping Unit
max. 240V AC coil,
installed and wired
not wired
wired
not wired
wired
not wired
wired
K2
K5
K3
K6
K4
K7
not wired
wired
not wired
wired
S1
S2
S3
S4
Auto Reset
Manual Reset
HA
HM
Surge Suppressors
for Contactors and Control Relays
Wire Markers
Description
Cover Gasket
available for hinged cover
enclosures only (V2, V3, V4)
Drip Shield
DS
Space Heater
SH
Identification Name Plate

Lamacoid
1-25 characters
25-50 characters
N1
N2
EEMAC Type 4 Enclosure

change 4th digit in Starter Type No.
from B to D
EEMAC Type 4X Enclosure

change 4th digit in Starter Type No.
from B to F and
add to EEMAC Type 1 price
Stainless Steel (specify)
Fiberglass (specify)
Fuse Clips:
All Fusible Disconnect Combination
Starters are supplied with Form II C
fuse clips as standard.
Fuse Clip Size
Form IJ
Suffix
30A
60A
100A
200A
PJ
Terminal Blocks
SX
Description
WM
Wired 3 point terminal

Un-wired 3 point terminal
a Option
may require larger enclosure.

Consult Siemens.
7-24
Suffix
Class
All
Suffix
T3
T6
T9
TC
TF
TI
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies

Gold, Silver and Bronze Starter Packages
Siemens SIRIUS
Pre-assembled starter packages are the
simple way to order starters:
Selection
b 50HP, 600V max, combination and

non-combination
b Standard 1NO contact up to 10HP,
2NO+2NC contacts from 15-50 HP
b Ambient 60C on contactors
b Fast and simple 3-prong overload/
contactor connection: no coil extension
required
b Standard primary and secondary fusing
on control transformers
b Standard Metal 22mm
SIRIUS Control Devices
SIRIUS GOLD, SILVER AND BRONZE
Starter Packages offer these standard
features:
GOLD
b 50 VA 600/120V control transformer
b 3 pos. selector switch H.O.A.
b Pilot light 120V red
SILVER
b 50 VA 600/120V control transformer
b Start/Stop pushbuttons
b Pilot light 120V red
BRONZE
b No control transformer
b No pilot devices
Saves Time
No more lengthy navigating through product catalogues!
GOLD, SILVER and BRONZE starters offer and easy 2 step
approach to selecting your starter.
1. Select the starter based on
Horsepower (HP) and Line Voltage.
2. Select the appropriate overload relay.
Then its ready to install. All this convenience is now available
off your distributors shelves.
Saves Hassle
Ease of selection. Off the shelf availability. Competitive pricing.
Its easy to see why GOLD, SILVER and BRONZE pakages
are the ideal solution. For serious performance and serious
convenience, take a SIRIUS approach to starters.
7-25
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
Saves Money
This unique solution for the industrys most popular full voltage
non-reversing starters is competitively priced compared to
other custom-engineered starters.
Siemens modular line of quality Motor Control Products

meets and exceeds international standards and are built to
serve global markets. Heres why choosing a pakage is the
smarter way to select a starter:

Selection
Non-Combination Starter Package

Selection EEMAC Type 1 Enclosed
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
Catalogue Number
Pilot Devices
Control Transformer
w/ Primary and
Secondary fuses
CSA Maximum HP Rating

3 phase
208V
240V
480V
600V
Contactor
Reference
Number
Enclosure
Reference
Number
GOLD3R-5-600
GOLD3R-3-480
GOLD3R-2-240
GOLD3R-1.5-208
3 Position Selector
Switch & Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
11/2
15
V0
GOLD3R-7.5-600
GOLD3R-5-480
GOLD3R-3-240
GOLD3R-2-208
3 Position Selector
Included 120V sec.
71/2
16
V0
GOLD3R-10-600
GOLD3R-7.5-480
GOLD3R-3-240
GOLD3R-3-208
3 Position Selector
Included 120V sec.
71/2
10
17
V0
GOLD3R-15-600
GOLD3R-10-480
GOLD3R-5-240
GOLD3R-5-208
3 Position Selector
Included 120V sec.
10
15
25
V1
V1AB26K005R0G111C
V1AB33K005R0G111C
V1AB34K005R0G111C
V1AB35K005R0G111C
V1AB36K005R0G111C
3 Position Selector
Included 120V sec.
20
25
30
40
50
26
33
34
35
36
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
SILVER3R-5-600
SILVER3R-3-480
SILVER3R-2-240
SILVER3R-1.5-208
Start/Stop
Pushbuttons
& Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
11/2
15
V0
SILVER3R-7.5-600
SILVER3R-5-480
SILVER3R-3-240
SILVER3R-2-208
Start/Stop
Pushbuttons
& Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
71/2
16
V0
SILVER3R-10-600
SILVER3R-7.5-480
SILVER3R-3-240
SILVER3R-3-208
Start/Stop
Pushbuttons
& Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
71/2
10
17
V0
SILVER3R-15-600
SILVER3R-10-480
SILVER3R-5-240
SILVER3R-5-208
Start/Stop
Pushbuttons
& Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
10
15
25
V1
V1AB26K005R05D11C
V1AB33K005R05D11C
V1AB34K005R05D11C
V1AB35K005R05D11C
V1AB35K005R05D11C
Start/Stop
Pushbuttons
& Pilot Light
Included 120V sec.
20
25
30
40
50
26
33
34
35
36
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
None
None
11/2
2
3
5
2
3
3
5
3
5
71/2
10
5
71/2
10
15
15
16
17
25
V0
V0
V0
V1
None
5
71/2
71/2
10
10
15
5
71/2
10
10
15
15
10
15
20
25
30
40
15
20
25
30
40
50
25
26
33
34
35
36
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
BRONZE3R-5-600
BRONZE3R-7.5-600
BRONZE3R-10-600
BRONZE3R-15-600
V1AB25K00600
V1AB26K00600
V1AB33K00600
V1AB34K00600
V1AB35K00600
V1AB36K00600
7-26
None

Selection
Fusible Combination Starter Package

Selection EEMAC Type 1 Enclosed
Catalogue Number
V4AB17K005R0G111CP
V4AB26K005R0G111CP
V4AB34K005R0G111CP
V4AB35K005R0G111CP
V4AB36K005R0G111CP
3 Position Selector
V4AB17K005R05D11CP
V4AB26K005R05D11CP
V4AB34K005R05D11CP
V4AB35K005R05D11CP
V4AB36K005R05D11CP
2 Push Buttons
& Pilot Light
V4AB15K006000
V4AB15K006000PD
V4AB16K006000
V4AB16K006000PD
V4AB17K006000
V4AB17K006000PD
V4AB25K006000
V4AB25K006000PD
V4AB26K006000
V4AB26K006000PD
CSA Maximum HP Rating
Control Transformer
w/ Primary and
Secondary fuses
Pilot Devices
Contactor
Reference
Number
Enclosure
Reference
Number
50
17
26
34
35
36
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
10
20
30
40
50
17
26
34
35
36
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
5
5
15
15
16
16
17
17
25
25
26
26
V0
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
3 phase
208V
Included 120V sec.
240V
480V
600V
10
20
30
40
Included 120V sec.
2
2
3
3
3
7 1/2
5
5
7 1/2
7 1/2
3
3
5
5
None
11/2
11/2
2
2
3
71/2
5
5
1/2
7
1/2
7
None
71/2
71/2
10
10
15
15
71/2
71/2
10
10
15
15
20
20
Overload Relay Selection Chart

FLA
Adjustment
Range Amps
Catalogue Number
33/34/35/36
0.11-0.16
3RU1116-0AB0
0.14-0.2
3RU1116-0BB0
0.18-0.25
3RU1116-0CB0
0.22-0.32
3RU1116-0DB0
0.28-0.4
3RU1116-0EB0
0.35-0.5
3RU1116-0FB0
0.45-0.63
3RU1116-0GB0
0.55-0.8
3RU1116-0HB0
0.7-1
3RU1116-0JB0
0.9-1.25
3RU1116-0KB0
1.1-1.6
3RU1116-1AB0
1.4-2
3RU1116-1BB0
1.8-2.5
3RU1116-1CB0
3RU1126-1CB0
2.2-3.2
3RU1116-1DB0
3RU1126-1DB0
2.8-4
3RU1116-1EB0
3RU1126-1EB0
3.5-5
3RU1116-1FB0
3RU1126-1FB0
4.5-6.3
3RU1116-1GB0
3RU1126-1GB0
5.5-8
3RU1116-1HB0
3RU1126-1HB0
3RU1136-1HB0
7-10
3RU1116-1JB0
3RU1126-1JB0
3RU1136-1JB0
9-12
3RU1116-1KB0
9-12.5
3RU1126-1KB0
3RU1136-1KB0
11-16
3RU1126-4AB0
3RU1136-4AB0
14-20
3RU1126-4BB0
3RU1136-4BB0
17-22
3RU1126-4CB0
18-25
3RU1136-4DB0
20-25
3RU1136-4DB0
22-32
3RU1136-4EB0
28-40
3RU1136-4FB0
36-45
3RU1136-4GB0
40-50
3RU1136-4HB0
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
25/26
15/16/17
7-27
Dimensions

Selection
Magnetic Starters
Non-Combination Starter EEMAC Type 1 (Lift-Off Cover)
Width
Height
Depth
MM
161.70
244.7
146
110.3
174
25.7
INCH
6.37
9.64
5.75
4.34
6.85
1.01
MM
241.5
320.9
178.3
187.3
268.1
24
INCH
9.51
12.64
7.02
7.38
10.55
0.95
Figure 1
V0
Figure 1
V1
Mfg.-Holes
No. of
Holes
3
Non-Combination/Combination Starter EEMAC Type 1

MM
264
610
210
140
548
127
28
57
INCH
10.39
24
8.25
5.5
21.58
1.1
2.25
MM
410
640
209.6
280
578
28
60
INCH
16.14
25.2
8.25
11
22.76
1.1
2.36
MM
510
900
279.6
380
838
28
60
INCH
20.08
35.43
11.01
14.96
32.99
1.1
2.36
203.2
203.2
323.85
93.53
25.46
V2
V3
Figure 2
V4
Non-Combination Starter EEMAC Type 12
MM
254
304.8
S
INCH
10
12
12.75
0.38
Figure 3
Non-Combination/Combination Starter EEMAC Type 12

MM
254
610
209.6
165
648
127
12
44.5
INCH
10
24
8.25
6.5
25.51
0.47
1.75
MM
400
640
209.6
311
678
200
12
44.5
INCH
15.75
25.2
8.25
12.24
26.69
7.87
0.47
1.75
MM
500
900
280
411
955.35
25
44.5
INCH
19.69
35.43
11.02
16.18
37.61
0.98
1.75
LOW VOLTAGE
MOTOR STARTERS
H2
H3
H5
Figure 4
Note: All dimensions shown for reference purpose only.

Not to be used for construction purposes.
7-28
POWER PRODUCT
Switchboards
Contents
Sentron SMP, FCI, FCII Switchboards
Type SMP
Features 8-2
Construction Details
Specification
Type FCI, FCII
Features
8-8
Specifications
Protective Devices
8-16
8-17
Solid State SensitripTM Molded Case Circuit Breakers
8-18
SentronTM
Fusible Switches
8-19
HCP Disconnect Switches
8-20
WL Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
8-21
Metering Data
8-23
Type IPS - Integrated Power Systems Switchboard

Features
8-24
8
SWITCHBOARDS
Sentron SMP Switchboards

Simplified system design.

A typical SMP switchboard consist of
a floor mounted, wall supported service section, and a distribution section.
The wireway can also be added where
required by the local utility or if additional cable termination space is required.
Wireways are modular to allow
flexibility
The wireway is available in 2 depths to
suit customer needs. Wireway has split
front doors as standard with optional
hinged doors. The lug pads are standard
NEMA hole pattern and accept up to 5
mechanical lugs or 6 compression lugs.
Service Entrance Sections house a
variety of equipment.
b Service Entrance Sections.
Service sections can be fed directly from
overhead by cable.
SWITCHBOARDS
Service entrance sections equipped

for bottom feed will accept cable from
underground directly into the service
section.
Distribution Sections have ample

wiring room and front accessibility.
Generous top or bottom gutters have
been created by locating the bus-link in
the top or bottom of the distribution
section, so theres ample room to run
cables into the distribution section and
make connections.
Standard bolted covers allow complete
access to load conductors. Future
flexibility comes standard in the
Siemens SMP switchboard. The
distribution section can accommodate
any combination of panel mounted
devices, including MCCBs and fusible
disconnect switches.
Operating temperatures are in
accordance with CSA Standards
Bus bars are available in standard
tin-finished aluminum or optional
silver-finished copper. Standard bus is
sized on the basis of heat rise criteria,
in accordance with CSA C22.2 #31. All
bus bars are sized to limit heat rise to
65C above an ambient temperature of
40C.
b Utility Metering
In addition to the main device, the
service section contains utility metering
provisions. Cold metering provisions
(CTs on the load side of the main
device) are furnished. The CTs are
provided by the utility company. The
compartment will be built to utility
company standards, with hinged doors
and provisions for utility metering
equipment.
b User Metering
The service section provides space for
the Siemens Digital Meter with remote
display, and its associated components.
b Main protective device
The MCCB is mounted individually
so that it can be located quickly in an
emergency. SMP switchboards will
accommodate different types of main
circuit breakers. Selection depends on
the characteristics of your individual
electrical system.
8-2
Construction
Bus-Link Connections are accessible
from the front.
The Bus-Link can be bolted from the
front of the switchboard. Each bus-link
is attached by grade five bolts to assure
solid joints between sections, and to
maintain full bus ampacity through the
joint.
To make installation and servicing of the
bus-link easier, all phase and neutral
busses are stacked one above the other.
Cable Terminals
Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are
provided as standard equipment.

SMP Switchboard Introduction
Whether the design is for a 240V AC, 400 ampere
system; a 600V AC, 1200 A ampere system; or
something in between, Siemens Sentron Switchboards
should be considered. Every aspect of design has
been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing
installation costs, and minimizing the impact and
cost of system changes. These switchboards provide
the space saving construction and service flexibility
necessary in systems for light industrial plants, retail
strip malls, and commercial buildings.
Service entrance sections of the SMP accepts a wide
range of Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers as
main disconnect devices.
The SMP switchboard is designed for special
configurations. It can be equipped with incoming and
outgoing cable/conduit connections, supplied with
metering and other special features.
The distribution sections of all Sentron Switchboards
are designed with improved wiring space and
greater accessibility. Theyre also designed for easier
installation and maintenance. Conveniently located
bus-link without compromising useful wiring gutter
space, and standard bolted gutter covers offer
complete access to load conductors. Front accessibility
to bus and protective devices makes adding or
replacing circuit breakers or switches quick and easy.
SMP Switchboard Features and Ratings

b Main bus rated up to 1200 ampere.
b Rear of all sections aligned so that
switchboard can be floor mounted and
secured against the wall.
b Front connected and front accessible.
b Main devices individually mounted.
Molded Case Breaker: 400-1200 amps.
b Branch Devices panel mounted.
Molded Case Breaker: 151200 amps fixed.
Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible Switch: 30 - 600A
General
SMP Specifications (Table 1)
SMP Switchboard
Enclosure Type
EEMAC 1
Dripshield (option)
Dimensions
Main or Distribution
Wireway
38 W x 90H x 12.75 Dp
24 W x 90 H x 12.75 Dp or 25.5 Dp
Volts
600V Max
Amperes
400-1200A
Bus Type
Aluminum (tin plated)

Copper (silver finished) optional
Bus Bracing
50 KA

65 KA (optional)
Interrupting Capacity
50 KA

65 KA (optional)
Entry
Cable only (top or bottom)
Main Device
MCCB 400-1200A
b 80% Rated
b 100% Rated (option)
Branch Devices
(Unit Space)
22.5 in MUD Section or

60 in Distribution Section
Metering Devices
Siemens Digital Meter with Remote Display

SADU (option) Feeder Breakers Only
Other Options
SPD Units
Sill Channels (1.5)
Lifting Hooks
Main and Distribution Section Dimensions (Table 2)

Switchboard Type
Access
SMP
Front

H
90 (2286)
38 (965)
12.75 (324)
8
SWITCHBOARDS
600 Volts AC Maximum

1200 Ampere Mains
CSA Short Circuit Rating
65,000A IR Maximum
CSA Certified To: CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 31-M89
CSA File #LR 1544659 (49454)
a Only
available as a Wireway.
8-3
SND6
their current-limiting range.
SN
65
50
25
900, 1000, 1200
on (Table 2)
Mounting Height
Inches (mm)
Rating (KA)
Twin
Single
Gutters 240V
480V 600V
Distribution
Power
and
3.75" (95)
A
10
Protective Devices
- Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3.75" (95)
A
10
Standard
3.75"are
(95)designed
for commercial,
A
10
and other
Breakers
industrial,
institutional
heavy 3.75"
duty(95)
applications.
They
are
rated
up
to
600V
AC
and
250V DC. Their
A
22
0, 90, 100
0, 90, 100
interrupting ratings
are higher than normal duty breakers.
3.75" (95)
22
High Interrupting
Breakers
where the
3.75"are
(95)designed
for heavy
A duty applications
65
10 interrupting
requirements
exceed the
ratings of heavy duty breakers. They are rated up to
3.75" (95)
3.75" (95)
B
10
600V AC.
0, 90, 100
0, 90, 100, 110, 125Current
3.75"
(95)
3.75" (95)
Limiting
B
65
18
Molded
case
the exclusive
I-T-E
blow-apart
interruption
3.75"
(95)breakers
3.75" (95)
B
100
18
18
requirements for current-limiting breakers.

principle.
the(95)
CSA
3.75"They
(95) meet
3.75"
B
100
42 2 18
incorporate
Current-limiting circuit breakers

can limit the let-through I t to a value less than
F
200
200
100
the I2t
of one-half 3.75"
cycle(95)
wave
of the symmetrical prospective current without
3.75"
(95)
F
100
any fusible elements when operating within their current-limiting range.
0, 90, 100
0, 175, 200, 225

5" (127) 5" (127) C
0, 175, 200, 225
5" (127) 5" (127) C
0, 175, 200, 225 Main Breaker
5" (127) Selection
5" (127) (Table
C 3)
10
22
42
Breaker Catalogue
75, 200, 225, 250 Ampere
5" (127)
5" (127) ICD(KA) Max
65
35
75, 200, 225, 250 Rating Type

5" (127) Number
5" (127) 240V
D 480V 600V
100 Available
65 Trip Values
75, 200, 225, 250

JXD6 JX
5" (127) 65
G 35 25
200 200, 225,
200250, 300,
350, 400

0
0
0
0
JD6

400
8
SWITCHBOARDS
65
LD6
L6
65
100
HLD6 HL
H
CL
200
CLD6
H
SLD6 SL
8.75(222) 65
SHLD6 S6
I
100
200
SCLD6 C6
H
MD6
65
8.75 (222)100
L
HMD6 M6
800
HM
8.75 (222)200
L
CMD6
CM
SMD6 SM
65
J

SHMD6 S8
100

200
SCMD6 C8
J
10 (254) 65

ND6 N6
J
1200
HND6 HN
100
K
CND6 CN
200

SND6
SN
65
J

SHND6 SI
100
SCND6 CI
J

200
10 (254)
0, 600

600
J6
HJD6
8.75"
(222) HJ
8.75" (222) 100
H
CJD6 CJ
200
8.75"
(222)
8.75"
(222)
H
SJD6 SJ
65
8.75"
(222) SH
8.75" (222) 100
H
SHJD6
SCJD6 SC
8.75" (222) 200
I
LXD6 LX
8.75" (222) 65
H
35
25
65
35
65
150 100
35
25
100
65
35
150 100
200
35
25
65
35
25
65
35
65
150 100
100
35
25
200
65
35
150 100
65
50
65
100
50
65
100
50
65
100
50
65
100
ate with blank cover plate. Provision includes all necessary

reaker, and includes housing frame cover plate with breaker
25
65
50
100
65
25
65
50
65
100
25
200
50
65
65
25
65
50
100
65
200
65
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

200, 225,
250, 300,
350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
35
25
200, 300, 400
65 400 35
200, 300,
200, 300,
150400 100
450, 500,
35 600 25
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300,
35 350, 400,
25 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
65
35
300, 400, 500, 600
150
100
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400,
35 500, 600
25
500, 600, 700, 800
50
25
500, 600, 700, 800
65 700, 80050
500, 600,
600, 700, 800
35 800 25
600, 700,
500, 600,
65 800 35
Branch Breaker Gutter Dimensions

For 38W Distribution Section (Table 5)
14.0 (356)
10.0 (254)
150
35
Also
7.925 (201)
7.615 (193)
11.769 (299)
13.425 (341)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
8.75 (222)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
G
H
5.00 (127)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.956 (227)
13.0 (330)
12.0 (305)
13.0 (330)
fault is not available on branch Sensitrip breakers.

10KA at 600Y/347 Volts.
8.25 (210)
100
25
Ground
8.75 (222)
800, 900,
1200
1501000, 100
800, 900, 1000, 1200
35
25
900, 1000, 1200
900, 1000,
50 120025
800, 900, 1000, 1200
65 1000, 35
800, 900,
1200
.75 (95) of unit space

n three pole breakers require 6 (152) of unit space.
8-4
Selection
10.00 (254)
10.00 (254)
8.75 (222)

Selection
Branch Circuit Breaker Selectiona (Table 4)

Mounting Height - Inches (mm)
Max IC Rating (KA)
Breaker
Type

Ampere Ratings
BL
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
3.75 (95)
10
BLF (GFCI)
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
3.75 (95)
10
BLE (GFCI) 15, 20, 30
3.75 (95)
10
BLH
3.75 (95)
22
3.75 (95)
22
Twin
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
BLH (GFCI) 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Single
Gutterf
240V
480V
600V
3.75 (95)
65
ED2
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) B
10
10
ED4
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75 (95) 3.75 (95) B
65
18
ED6
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75 (95) 3.75 (95)

3.75 (95) 3.75 (95)
B
B
100
100
18
42
18
18
CED6
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
110, 125
3.75 (95) 3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
F
F
200
200
100
100
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
C
C
C
10
22
42
FXD6
HFD6
CFD6
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
D
D
G
65
100
200
35
65
200
JXD2
JXD6, JD6
HJD6
CJD6
SJD6
SHJD6
SCJD6
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
E
E
E
I
H
H
I
65
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
150
35
65
150
25
35
100
25
35
100
LXD6, LD6
HLD6
CLD6
SLD6
SHLD6
SCJD6
450, 500, 600

250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
H
H
I
H
H
I
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
150
35
65
150
25
35
100
25
35
100
LMD6
HLMD6
500, 600, 700, 800

500, 600, 700, 800
8.75 (222
8.75 (222
M
M
65
100
50
65
25
50
MD6
HMD6
CMD6
SMD6
SHMD6
SCMD6
500, 600, 700, 800

500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
500, 600, 800
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
J
J
J
K
H
I
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
150
35
65
100
25
35
100
25
50
65
ND6
HND6
CND6
SND6
SHND6
SCND6
800, 900, 1000, 1200

800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
J
J
J
K
H
I
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
150
35
65
100
25
35
100
25
50
65
Breaker
Type

Ampere Ratings
NGB
Mounting Height - Inches (mm)
Max IC Rating (KA)
Twin
Single
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75 (95)
13.98" (355)
NEB
HEB
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75 (95)
NDG
LDG
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150
5.00 (127)
NFG
LFG
100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250

100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
5.00 (127)
NJG
250, 300, 350, 400
Space
includes housing frame plate with blank cover

plate. Provision includes all necessary mounting hardware, less circuit breaker, and includes housing frame
cover plate with breaker handle opening.
480/277V
480V
100
25
14
11.62 (295)
85
100
35
65
22
25
10.90 (276)
65
200
35
100
18
25
10.90 (276)
65
200
35
100
18
25
13.42" (341)
65
35
25
6.25 (158.75) 6.25 (158.75)
Gutter (mm) 240V
1 to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75 (95) of unit space

Accessories such as shunt trips on three pole breakers
require 6.25 (159) of unit space.

Ground fault is not available on branch Sensitrip breakers.
e
f
600/347V 600V
Also 10KA at 600Y/347 Volts.

Refer to Table 5 for layout dimensions.
8-5
SWITCHBOARDS
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70
BQD6e

Selection
Protective Devices - Fusible Disconnects

Fuse Selection
The Proper Fuse Type for the Application
is Selected Using the Following
Parameters:
b Voltage Requirements
b Conductor Ampacity
b Horsepower Requirements
b Maximum Available RMS Fault Current
b CSA Fuse Class
Branch Switch Gutter Dimensions
For 38W Distribution Section (Table 8)
1/1 7/28/2004 2:54 PM GRID MATRIX Switches REV2 DIMENSIONS SMP SWITCHES
7.5" (191)
30/30A VK Switch
6.25" (159)
7.5" (191)
60/60A VK Switch
6.25" (159)
7.5" (191)
100/100A VK Switch
5.0" (127)
10.0" (254)
10.0" (254)
10.0" (254)
8.0" (203)
9.25" (235)
10.25" (260)
7.5" (191)
60/60A VB Switch
100/100A VB Switch
Volts
Amp
3 Phase
Single Phase
Rating 240 480 600

30
7.5
15
20
60 15 30 50
100 30 60 75
200 60 125 150
400 50 50 50
600 50 50 50
240
3
10
15
Maximum VK HP Ratings (Table 9)

3 Phase
(1)#14#4 AWG (Cu or Al)

(1)#14#4 AWG (Cu or Al)
(1)#10#1/0 AWG (Cu or Al)
200
400

600

(1)#6 AWG-350kcmil (Cu or Al)

(1)#1/0 AWG-750 MCM OR
(2)#1/0 AWG-250 MCM (Cu or Al)
(1)#1/0 AWG-750 MCM OR
(2)#1/0 AWG-250 MCM (Cu or Al)

End Gutters
Ampere Minimum -
Rating
Inches (mm)
Single Phase
Rating 240 480 600

30
7.5
15
20
60 1.5 30 50
100 30 50 75
200 60 125 150
Wire and Cable Range
30
60
100
Gutters (Table 12)
Volts
Amp
Switch
Ampere
Rating
240
3
10
15
15
Side Gutters
Minimum Inches (mm)
400
12 (305)
7.9 (201)
600
12 (305)
7.9 (201)
Branch Switches 600V Maximum (Table 11)
7.5" (191)
7.5" (191)
7.5" (191)
200/200A VB Switch
10.0" (254)
400A thru 600A

VB Switch
800A
HCP Switch
Branch Switch Connectors (Table 10)d
10.0" (254)
200/200A VK Switch
30/30A VB Switch
Maximum VB HP Ratings (Table 6)
15.0" (381)
Switch Accessories (Table 13)

Rating
Max
Fusing
Mounting Height
Ampere Voltage
38W
Fuse Pullers (VK) Cat. No.
30/30A & 60/60A (VK)e

100/100A (VK)e

200/200A (VK)e
30/30A & 60/60A (VB)

100/100A (VB)

200/200A (VB)
400A & 600A (VB)
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
Class J, C, R
Class J, C, T
Class J, C, T
Class J
Class J
Class R,J, T
Class J,R,H,T
6.25 (159)
7.5 (190)
10.0 (254)
7.5 (190)
7.5 (190)
10.0 (254)
15.0 (381)
30 or 60 Amp
FP2
100 Amp
FP3
200 Amp
FP4
16.25" (413)
CSA Fuse Classes (Table 14)
SWITCHBOARDS

Class
Amperes
Volts (AC)
Less than
10,000A available
K a

Fast Acting
1-600A
(One time)
250 and 600V

50,000A

or less
Fast Acting
1-600A
600V or less
To 200,000A
and Time Delay
Ip and I2t-Low
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
RK1

Fast Acting
1/10-600A
and Time Delay
600V or less
To 200,000A
250V or less
I2t-Slightly > J
Ip-Slightly > J
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
RK5

Fast Acting
1/10-600A
and Time Delay
600V or less
To 200,000A
250V or less
I2t- > RK-1

Ip- > RK-1
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
Moderate
2-600A
600V or less
To 200,000A
Delay
I2t- < RK-5

Ip- < RK-5
Motor circuits
I2t-Low
Ip-Low
Non-motor loads
I2t-Low
motor loads
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
300 and 600V

To 200,000A
or less
Fast Acting
601-5000A
600V or less
and Time Delay
clips do not prohibit the use of Class H type fuse

in switch.
to Siemens for single phase and DC horsepower
requirements.
8-6
Circuits
250 and 600V

10,000A
or less
T
Fast Acting
1-600A

Refer
I2t, Ip (Let-Thru)
H
Standard Code
1-600A

(FORM II)
Fuse
Interrupting
Ratings
Ratings
are based on UL test procedure.

range applies to VB Switches only.
suitable for use in distribution space in main section.
d
Connector
5 Not
To 200,000A
Ip-Low
Feeder circuits

Selection
Replacement or Modification Components

for Circuit Breakers or Fusible Switchesg
Special Construction, Additions and Accessories
Connecting Strap Kits For Use With Circuit

Breakers
In Distribution Sectionsdh (Table 15)

When required, special constructions

or additions to standard Switchboards
may be specified for all factoryassembled Power and Distribution
Switchboards. Listed below are those
available for Type SMP Switchboards.

Breakers
Height -
Catalogue
Inches (mm) Number
BQ, BQH, HB
BL, BLH, HBL

ED2, ED4, ED6,
HED4
CED6
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
5 (127)
5 (127)
6BL2Cc
6E62c
6CLE2
6QJ2
6F62
CFD6 5 (127)
6CLF1C
JXD2, JXD6, JD2, 8.75 (222)
JD6, HJD6
8.75 (222)
6JJ62
SJD6, SHJD6
8.75 (222)
CJD6, SCJD6
8.75 (222)
6CLJ1C
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, 8.75 (222)
SLD6, SHLD6
8.75 (222)
6LL61C
CLD6
8.75 (222)
6CLL1C
SCLD6
8.75 (222)
6SCL61C
MD6, HMD6,
10 (254)
CMD6, SCMD6
10 (254)
6M61C
ND6, HND6, CND6 10 (254)
SND6, SHND6,
10 (254)
6N61C
SCND6
10 (254)
Connecting Strap Kits For Use With Circuit
Breakers in S5 and SPP6 Series Panels
Breaker Type
Height
(mm)
Mounting
3.75
(95)
3.75
NEB, HEB
(95)
NDG, HDG, LDG 5.00
(127)
5.00
NFG, HFG, LFG
(127)
6.25
NJG, HJG, LJG (158.75)
6.25
NJG, HJG, LJG (158.75)
NGB
Catalogue
Number
SNBDj
SEBDj
SDGDj
SFGD
SJG2Dj
SJG1Dj
Connecting Strap Kits For Use With VB, VK or HCP

dh
(Table 16)
Switches in Distribution Sections
1. Enclosure Type
38 Enclosure EEMAC Types
Type 1 (Indoor or Drip-proof)
Type 1A (Front Gasketed)
2. Wireway Options
are aluminum connectors. If copper is required

please add suffix C.
3.75 (95) plate accommodates six 1-pole breakers.
10 (254) plate accommodates eighteen 1-pole breakers.
Connector kits also accommodate S5, F2, CDP
Panelboards, FCRS, FCI and FCII distribution interiors or
CDP6/SPP6 Series Panels.
BQDHBD
E2HBL
FD6HB1
Breaker Type
5. Bus-Link (One Set Per Panel)
400-1200

Consult Factory
QLD3
BQ, BQH, HBQ, B6, BQXD
Nameplate - laminated and engraved
Unit Space Occupied in MUD Inches (mm)
Cat. Number
BL, BLH, HBL,
Ampere
Rating
One pole, BL, BLF, BE, BAF
PLD1
Two-pole, BL, BLF, and BE
PLD2
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
HL9419
BQD, CQD
BQDPLD
ED2HPL
FD6PL1
JXD6, JD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, JD6HPL

LXD6, LD6, HLD6, CLD6, SLD6
6. Grounding of SMP Switchboard
MD6, HMD6, CMD6, SMD6,

ND6, HND6, CND6, SND6
Non-Insulated Equipment Ground Bus

Continuous Solid Copper Ground
(optional)
Breaker Type
8. Lugs
For Main Device and Neutral
For Main Breakers please see SpeedFax
section #6
Neutral - please consult factory
9.SPD Modules
MN6PLD
Handle Extensions - For replacement

(one extension shipped with breaker)
7. Main Bus
Standard Main bus and Neutral bus are
tin plated aluminum or silver finished
copper (option).
MN6BL
Padlocking Device - Padlocks in OFF

position. Available for:
Touch-Up Paint (ASA61, Light Grey)

12 oz. aerosol can, Cat. # TUP-61
Cat. Number

EX11
round Fault Sensing Relay Kit

G
Equipment Protection (30 mA)
For Use with Number
Breaker Types of Poles
Catalogue Number
Description
ED4, ED6,
See breaker section
HED4
1, 2, 3
of this catalogue.

Shunt Trip on Main and Branches
Sentron TPS3 05
150KA
QJHS1
BQD, CQD, NGG

3. Painted Finish
100KA
These
Hinged Door
Door Covers
Hinged Door
Door Covers
24W x 90H x 25.5 Dp
Height - Catalogue
Number
Inches (mm)
1.25 (32) 6FPB01
2.50 (64) 6FPB02
3.75 (95) 6FPB03
5.00 (127) 6FPB05
10.00 (254)
6FPB10
15.00 (381)
6FPB15
QL1
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
JXD6, JD6, HJD6, CJD6, SJD6, JD6HBL

LXD6, LD6, HLD6, CLD6, SLD6
24W x 90H x 12.75 Dp
For use with SMP Switchboards.
Cat. Number
BL, BLH, HBL,

Description
Cat.
Number
BL, BQD6 (branch only)
See breakQJ2, QJ2H, QJH2, ED2, ED4, HED4 er section

(branch only)
of this
catalogue.
All others through 1200A
200KA
250KA
300KA
Options: Surge Counter
Remote Monitor
hese connectors are available in copper only.
T
Blank (Circuit Breaker or Switch) Cover Plates can also be
used in FCI and FCII distribution interiors or CDP6/SPP6
Series Panels.
g Please refer to the Siemens Speedfax for detailed circuit
breaker or switch information.
ounting kits include connector straps and covers (breakM

ers or switches are not included).
Refer to Siemens for units equipped with auxiliary
switches.
j Consult Sales for mounting in FCI/FCII Switchboards.
h
i
8-7
SWITCHBOARDS
Blank Cover Plates For Distribution Switch or

Circuit Breakerf (Table 17)
Breaker Type
Rating VB Switch VK Switch HCP Switch

Amperes Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
30/30
N/A
VK6-57
N/A
60/60
VB6-71
VK6-57
N/A
100/100 N/A
VK6-58
N/A
100
VB6-71
N/A
N/A
200/200 N/A
VK6-72
N/A
200
VB6-71
VK6-71i N/A
400-600 VB6-150 N/A
N/A

800
N/A N/A F6162DCAN
10. Circuit Breaker Accessories

Blocks handle in either the ON or
SWITCHBOARDS
A. Scope
Furnish and install, as shown on the plans,
a secondary distribution switchboard, as
specified herein, for the system indicated
below:
120/208V 3-phase 3-wire
347/600V
4-wire
600V
B. Configuration
The switchboard enclosure shall be of
bolted construction:
EEMAC 1 indoor.
EEMAC 1 with dripshield (optional).
EEMAC 1 with Front Gasketed
(optional).
Switchboard shall be bolted together to
form one metal enclosed rigid switchboard.
Switchboard shall include all protective
devices and equipment as listed on
drawings with necessary interconnections,
instrumentation and control wiring.
All groups of control wires leaving the
switchboard shall be provided with terminal
blocks with suitable numbering strips.
The switchboard shall have space or
provisions for future expansion as noted on
the plans. Switchboard shall be constructed
and certified in accordance with CSA
22.2.31 standards and shall be Siemens
type (SMP) or approved equal. Individual
sections shall be front accessible, not less
than 12.75 (324) deep, and the rear of all
sections shall align.
Distribution sections shall be designed to
accommodate the intermixing of Molded
Case Breakers and Fusible Disconnects in
the same distribution interior.
C. Bus Requirements
The bus shall be tin-finished aluminum
silver-finished copper (option) of
sufficient size to limit the temperature
rise to 65C. The bus shall be braced for
50,000 or 65,000 (option) amperes
symmetrical and supported to withstand
mechanical forces exerted during short
circuit conditions when directly connected
to a power source having the indicated
available short circuit current.
D. Incoming Service
Overhead or Underground Service:
Cable Entry
This section shall be bussed and
sealable per local utility requirements.
Screw-type mechanical lugs,
compression lugs to terminate,
aluminum, copper cable, shall be
__________ kcmil, and ___ cables per
phase. Main breaker standard aluminum
mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or
copper. (No wireway)
E. Metering Service Section
The service section shall be designed
for the system parameters indicated in
section A above. The metering service
section shall have a Utility Metering
compartment per utility requirements.
Ground
8-8
User metering as indicated below and

as shown on plans.
Main (service) section:
Siemens Digital metering with
remote display
_______ current transformer(s)
_______ /5 or suitable rating
Branch circuits (Sensitrip III only):
SADU Meter Display (option)
Ground fault Protection (3-Phase, 4-Wire):
Furnish and install on the service
equipment and/or switchboard a Ground
Fault protection system and indication
equipment as specified herein and as
shown on drawings in accordance with
CEC Section 14-102.
All new Ground Fault Protection and
Indication equipment shall be factory
installed, wired and tested by the
switchboard manufacturer.
F. Switchboard SMP Guide Specification
The complete switchboard shall be finished
with light grey, ASA-61 paint.
Each switchboard main section shall have a
metal nameplate permanently affixed to it,
listing the following information:
b Name of manufacturer
b System voltage
b Ampacity
b Type
b Manufacturers shop order number and
date
b Each section of switchboard shall bear a
CSA certification mark and a short circuit
rating label.
The switchboard shall be per the
arrangement below.
F1. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted,
Front Accessible.
Switchboard shall be of Siemens SMP
type, or approved equal. Individual sections
shall be front accessible, floor mounted
rear supported, not less than 12.75 (324)
deep, and rear, of all sections shall align.
Incoming line termination, main device
connection and all bolts used to join
current-carrying parts shall be installed so
as to permit servicing from the front only
so that no rear access is required. The
branch devices shall be front removable
and panel mounted with line and load side
connections front accessible.
G. Main Protective Devices
The main protective device, to be installed
in the main device section, shall be as
indicated below:
G1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Molded case circuit breaker shall be of the
quick-make, quick-break, trip-free,
(standard) (High Interrupting)
(Current Limiting) (solid state
Sensitrip III) type.
It shall be _______ frame (3-pole)
(240V) (600V) breaker with a trip
current rating of:
400A, 600A, 800A, 1000Aa,
fault protection required, per CEC section 14-102 when the current is O 1000A at 600 volts.
Specification
1200 Aa of an interrupting capacity
of not less than _______ amperes RMS
symmetrical at the system voltage.
The following accessory options are to be
included:
Shunt trip
Ground fault relay
Long time (Sensitrip III only)
Long time delay (Sensitrip III only)
Short time (Sensitrip III only)
Short time delay (Sensitrip III only)
Integral ground fault (Sensitrip III only)
Other_______ (list)
H. Branch Protective Devices
(Select as necessary)
All molded case circuit breakers, and
fusible disconnect units used as a
protective device in a branch circuit will
meet the requirements of the appropriate
paragraph below
H1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Molded case circuit breakers shall be
of quick-make, quick-break, trip-free
(thermal magnetic type) (current limiting)
(solid state) with frame, trip and voltage
rating, either 2-pole or 3-pole, as
indicated on the plans. All breakers shall
have an interrupting capacity of not less
than _______ amperes RMS symmetrical
at the system voltage. All breakers shall
be removable from the front of the
switchboard without distributing adjacent
units. The switchboard shall have space or
provisions for future units shown on the
plans.
H2. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Current limiting circuit breakers shall
provide inverse time delay, instantaneous
circuit protection, and also limit the letthrough I2t to a value less than I2t of
one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any fusible
elements. Breakers shall have an
interrupting capacity of not less than
_______ ampere RMS symmetrical at the
system voltage.
H3. Fusible Disconnect
Fusible disconnects shall be quick-make,
quick-break units utilizing the double-break
principle of circuit rupturing to minimize
arcing and pitting and shall conform to the
ratings shown on the plans.
Each disconnect shall have an individual
door over the front, equipped with a
voidable interlock that prevents the door
from being opened when the switch is
in the ON position unless the interlock
is purposely defeated by activation of
the voiding mechanism. All disconnects
shall have externally operated handles.
Disconnects shall be equipped with
Class J (standard), Class R rejection
type, Class L (standard), Class T fuse
holders as indicated on the plans suitable
for application on system with _______
amperes symmetrical available fault
current.

Fault-Current Calculation on Low- Voltage AC Systems

In order to determine the maximum interrupting rate of the
circuit breakers in a distribution system it is necessary to
calculate the current which could flow under a three-phase
bolted short circuit condition. For a three-phase system the
maximum available fault current at the secondary side of the
transformer can be obtained by use of the formula:
SquareRootSymb.pdf
lsc =
7/13/04
5:30:22 PM
Application
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Ratings
The term Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating refers
to the application of series connected circuit breakers in a
combination that allows some breakers to have lower individual
interrupting ratings than the available fault current. This is
permitted as long as the series combination has been tested
and certified by UL & CSA.
Series ratings must be specified on order at time of entry. For
more information on series ratings please consult your local
Siemens sales representative.
kVA x 100
KV x 3 x % Z
C
CM
MY
CY
CMY
lsc = Symmetrical RMS amperes of fault current.

kVA = Kilovolt-ampere rating of transformers.
KV = Secondary voltage in kilovolts.
%Z = Percent impedance of primary line and transformer.
Normal load and Fault Currents of Three Phase Transformers (Table 18)
Trans-
Maximum
Short-Circuit
former
Rating Kva
3 Phase Available
Kva and from
imped- Primary
ence %a System
300
5%

208 Volts, 3 Phase

240 Volts, 3 Phase
480 Volts, 3 phase
600 Volts, 3 Phase
Rated
Short-Circuit Current
Rated
Rated
Rated
RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load
RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load
RMS Symmetrical Amps.
Load RMS Symmetrical Amps. Load
Contin- Trans- 50% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Comuous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined
Current,
Alone Load
Current,
Alone Load
Current, Alone Load
Current, Alone Load
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
16600 722
17400
17700
18000
18200
18400
25900 1203
28000
28800
29500
30000
30600
32900 1804
36200
37500
38600
39400
40400
41500 2406
46800
48900
50800
52300
53900
12900 2900
13600
13900
14100
14300
14400
20000 4800
21900
22500
23100
23600
24100
24900 7200
27800
28900
29800
30600
31400
31000 9600
35600
37500
39100
40400
41800
15800 361
16500
16800
17000
17200
17300
24800 601
26700
27300
27900
28400
28900
32100 902
35000
36100
37000
37800
38600
40600 1203
45200
47100
48700
50000
51400
6400 1400
6800
6900
7000
7100
7200
10000 2400
10900
11300
11600
11800
12000
12400 3600
13900
14400
14900
15300
15700
15500 4800
17800
18700
19600
20200
20900
7800 289
8200
8300
8400
8500
8600
12400 481
13300
13700
14000
14200
14400
16000 722
17500
18000
18500
18900
19300
20300 962
22600
23500
24400
25000
25700
5200 1200
5500
5600
5600
5700
5800
8000 1900
8700
9000
9300
9400
9600
10000 1900
11100
11600
11900
12200
12600
12400 3900
14300
15000
15600
16200
16700
6400
6700
6800
6800
6900
7000
9900
10600
10900
11200
11300
11500
12900
14000
14500
14800
15100
15500
16300
18200
18900
19500
20100
20600
Short
circuit currents are calculated with impedences

and kVA shown in this table.
circuit current contributions are calculated on the
basis of motor characteristics that will produce four
times normal current. 50% motor load contribution is
assumed for 208V and 100% motor load contribution is
assumed for 240V, 480V and 600V.
This Table has been prepared to list the symmetrical
RMS fault current which is available at the secondary
terminals of the transformer.
Short
8-9
SWITCHBOARDS
14900 1700
15700
16000
16300
16500
16700
21300 2800
25200
26000
26700
27200
27800
28700 4200
32000
33300
34400
35200
36200
35900 5600
41200
43300
45200
46700
48300
50000
834
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
500
50000
1388
5%
100000

150000

250000

500000
Unlimited
750
50000
2080
5.75% 100000

150000

250000

500000
Unlimited
1000
50000
2780
5.75% 100000

150000

250000

500000
Unlimited
Sentron FCI, FCII Switchboards
SWITCHBOARDS
General
Whether the design is for a 240V

AC, 400 ampere system; a 600V AC,
6000 ampere system; or something
in between, Siemens Sentron
Switchboards should be considered.
Every aspect of design has been
aimed at improving layout convenience,
reducing installation costs, and
minimizing the impact and cost of
system changes. These switchboards
provide the rugged construction and
service flexibility necessary in systems
for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes,
hospitals, and commercial buildings,
and are built to NEMA and CSA, C22.2
#31 and EEMAC, G8.2 standards.
FCI Switchboard
b Branch Devicespanel mounted.
b Rear of all sections aligned so that
switchboard can be installed against
wall.
b Front connected and front accessible.
b Main devicesindividually mounted or
panel mounted. Molded Case Breaker:
400-1200 amps fixed.
b Quick-Make Quick-Break Fusible
Switch: 800-1200 amps., fixed.
b Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch:
8002000 amps., fixed.
b Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker:
400-2000 amps fixed.
b Branch Devices: panel mounted only.
Molded Case Breaker: 151200 amp.,
fixed.
Switch: 301200 amps., fixed.
8-10
FCII Switchboard
b Branch Devices rear connected
individually mounted.
b Front and rear of all sections align.
Design for mounting away from wall.
b Free Standing
b Rear connected and rear accessible.
b Main Devicesindividually mounted.
Molded Case Breaker: 400-1200
amps., fixed.
b Quick-Make Quick-Break Vacu-Break
Fusible Switch: 400-1200 amps., fixed.
Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch:
8004000 amps., fixed.
800-5000 amps., fixed or drawout.
b Branch Devices: individually mounted
Molded Case Breaker: 1002000
amp., fixed (or plug in).
Switch: 1001200 amp., fixed.
Bolted Pressure Switch: 8004000
amp., fixed.
8005000 amps., fixed, or drawout.
* 6000 amps - Consult Sales Office

Versatility simplifies system design.

Service Sections
Typical switchboards consist of a
service section, and one or more
distribution sections. Service sections
can be fed directly from overhead by
either cable or bus duct.
When fed from underground, a
separate pull section is usually added.
The service section is then fed from the
adjacent pull section.
Low Voltage Power circuit breakers
and Vacu-Break Switches equipped for
bottom feed will accept cable directly
from underground into the service
section
Choose bussed or non-bussed
pull sections.
With FCI and FCII switchboards, a nonbussed pull section, or a cross-bussed
pull section for underground feed can
be selected. The unique cross-bussed
section permits cable to be run straight
from underground to the bus bars at
the top of the section.
Non-bussed pull sections have openings
for carrying the underground feed
cables to the service section bus.
Main Section house a variety of
equipment.
Standard bolted gutter covers give

complete access to load conductors.
As an option, hinged doors can be
furnished where quick access to load
connectors is desired.
Heavy channels form a rigid ring at the
base and top of each section and heavy
gauge structural members are used for
the vertical corner posts so theres no
encroachment of additional bracing into
the top and bottom gutter areas.
To provide additional room for load cable
routing where needed, pull box
extensions are available in heights of
10 (254), 15 (381), 20 (508), 25 (635)
and 30 (762) inches to mount on any
standard distribution section.
Operating temperatures are in

accordance with CSA Standard C22.2
#31 and UL Standard 891.
Bus cars are available in standard
tin-finished aluminum or optional
tin-finished copper. Standard bus is
sized on the basis of heat rise criteria,
in accordance with CSA C22.2 #31 and
UL891. All bus bars are sized to limit
heat rise to 65C above an ambient
temperature of 40C.
Modular, bolted frame construction
saves labour.
Modular construction of all service
and distribution sections allows the
switchboard to be designed into the
building, rather than designing the
building around the switchboard.
FCI and FCII switchboards can even
be continued around corners where
necessary. Rigid, bolted frames can
be shipped individually and moved into
the building in sections that are easy to
maneuver without special equipment,
then quickly assembled in place.
Top plates on all sections are easily

removed in the field for drilling,
punching, and cutting conduit entry
holes.
SWITCHBOARDS
User Metering
The main section often provides space
for many user instrument requirements.
Ammeters, voltmeters, and their
associated selector switches can be
mounted in the main section along with
the main disconnect. Only if a very
large instrument or an unusual number
of instruments are required, would a
separate section be required.
Distribution Sections have expanded

wiring room and exceptional
accessibility.
Generous top and bottom gutters have
been created by locating through-bus in
the rear centre of the distribution
section. No obstructions are less than
8 (203) above the floor, and no live bus
bars are located less than 10 (254 off
the floor. So theres plenty of room to
run cables into the distribution section
to make connections.
General
To make additional distribution
sections easier to install when they
are necessary the through-bus in each
distribution section is extended, and the
end is pre-drilled to accept splice plate
bolts. To add a section to an existing
FCI or FCII switchboard, set the new
section flush against the side of the
existing distribution section, and bolt
together the bus bar splice plates.
Utility Metering
In addition to the main disconnect, the
main section usually contains utility
metering provisions. Cold metering
provisions (CTs on the load side of
the main disconnect) are normally
furnished. When utility metering is
required, the CTs provided by the
utility company will be mounted in a
completely separate compartment.
The compartment will be built to
utility company standards, with hinged
doors and provision for utility metering
equipment.
Main protective devices can be

mounted individually so that they can
be located quickly in an emergency.
FC switchboards will accommodate
different types of main protective
devices. Selection depends on the
characteristics of your individual
electrical system.
Distribution sections are designed

with the future in mind.
Because all distribution sections
can accommodate any combination
of panel-mounted branch devices,
including molded case circuit breakers,
Vacu-Break fusible switches, future
system modifications are easier to
handle without adding switchboard
sections.
8-11

FCI, FCII Switchboards
Service sections of the FCI and FCII accept a wide range of

Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Vacu-Break Fusible
Switches, or WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers as main
disconnect devices.
The FCII switchboard is designed for special configurations.
It can be equipped with incoming and outgoing busway
connections, automatic transfer schemes and many other
custom engineered applications. The FCII can also be supplied
with special metering provisions, current transformers,
potential transformers, panelboards and many other special
features.
The distribution sections of all Sentron Switchboards are
designed with improved wiring space and greater accessibility.
Theyre also designed for easier installation and maintenance.
Conveniently located through-bus creates useful wiring gutter
space, and standard bolted gutter covers offer complete
access to load conductors.
General

FCI
Enclosure Type

FCII
EEMAC 1, Dripshield,
Gasketted
EEMAC 1, Sprinklerproof,
Dripshield, Gasketted
Section
38 W x 90H x 28 Dp
Dimensions
20, 24 W Pull Box

20, 25, 32, 46, 54

W x 70, 90 H x
28, 38, 48, 58, Dp.
20, 24 W Pull Box
Volts
600V Max
600V Max
Amperes 400-2000A
400-5000A
Entry
Cable only

Cable, Duct
Hydro trough
Main Devices
MCCB 400-1200A

VB 800-1200A

Pringle 800-2000A

WL ICCB 800-2000A

MCCB 400-1200A
VB 400-1200A
Pringle 800-4000A
WL ACB 800-5000A (option)
WL ICCB 800-5000A
S5-22.5, 45, 65
S5-22.5, 30, 45, 65, 75
CDP-7, P2 2-21 (MUD)
Branch Devices

Metering Devices Siemens

Digital Meter

Relays

Siemens Digital Meter

other manufactures
Analog
VB Meter centres
Single Phase,
All Types
GFR3, MGFR, GFR
Other Options

Transfer switch provisions,

Power Transformer
Connections, Dist.
Transformer Provisions
Bus Duct Connections
Distribution Sections
Switch-
Height
Width
board
Type
Access Std. Opt. Std. Opt.
Depth
FCI
Rear 90 38
28
FCII
Rear
38
70
SWITCHBOARDS
90
Distribution
section with two high 800 or 1200A VacuBreak is 28 in. deep.
8-12
Distribution
section with two high bolted pressure

switch is 38 in. deep minimum.
38
32 or 46
Std. Opt.
28, 48, or 58

Even the front, back and side covers of the FCI and FCII are
light, easy-to-handle, formed steel pieces that fit flush to the
cabinet sides. No heavy, unwieldy flat plate must be removed
to gain interior access.
Bus location saves wiring time.
All through-bus to adjoining sections are located in the rear
centre of distribution section. This design provides large,
unobstructed wiring gutters at the top and bottom of each
section. Wiring takes less time, and costs less to install.
Splice plates are accessible from the front.
All splice plates can be bolted and unbolted from the front of
the switchboard to make connection of adjacent sections easy.
Each splice plate is attached by grade 5 bolts to assure solid
joints between sections, and to maintain full bus ampacity
through the splice joint.
General/Guide
To make installation and servicing of the splice plates easier, all

phase and neutral through-busses are stacked one above the
other, eliminating the need to stuff bolts in between bus bars
that are stacked one behind the other in the same horizontal
plane.
Two types of cable terminals are available.
Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are provided as standard
equipment on all devices. However, compression connectors
are available as an option on all main lugs, main bolted pressure
switches, main power circuit breakers, and main insulated case
circuit breakers.
8
SWITCHBOARDS
8-13

Specifications
A. Scope
Furnish and install, as shown on
the plans, a secondary distribution
switchboard, as specified herein, for the
system indicated below:
120/208V 3-phase 3-wire
277/480V
4-wire
480V
347/600V
600V
SWITCHBOARDS
B. Configuration
The switchboard enclosure shall be:
EEMAC 1 indoor of a bolted
construction design.
Sprinkler Proof Gasketted
Switchboard shall be of the required
number of vertical sections bolted
together to form one metal enclosed
rigid switchboard. The sides, top and rear
shall be covered with removable bolted
code gauge steel plates. Switchboard
shall include all protective devices
and equipment as listed on drawings
with necessary interconnections,
intrumentation and control wiring. All
groups of control wires leaving the
switchboard shall be provided with
terminal blocks with suitable numbering
strips.
The switchboard shall have space or
provisions for future expansion as noted
on the plans.
Switchboard shall be constructed in
accordance with the latest EEMAC G8.2
and CSA 22.2 #31 standards and shall
be Siemens type (FCI) (FCII) or approved
equal. Individual sections shall be front
and rear accessible, not less than 28
deep, and the rear of all sections shall
align.
Distribution sections shall be designed
to accommodate the intermixing of
Molded Case Breakers and fusible
devices in the same distribution interior.
8-14
C. Bus Requirements
The bus shall be (tin-finished aluminum)
(silver-flash copper) of sufficient size
to limit the temperature rise to 65C.
The bus shall be braced for (50,000)
(75,000) (100,000) (200,000) amperes
symmetrical and supported to withstand
mechanical forces exerted during
short circuit conditions when directly
connected to a power source having the
indicated available short circuit current.
The through-bus on the end section shall
be extended and pre-drilled to allow the
addition of future sections with standard
splice plates.
Grade 5 bolts will be used at bus joints.
D. Incoming Service
1. Underground Service:
To isolate incoming underground
service conductors, an underground
cable pull or auxiliary section shall be
used. This section shall be of the
non-bussed, bussed type and
shall be sealable per local utility
requirements, screw-type
mechanical lugs, compression lugs
to terminate, aluminum, copper
cable, shall be furnished as detailed
on the plans.
2. Overhead Service:
A. Cable Entry
screw-type mechanical lugs
compression lugs to terminate
aluminum copper cable shall
be furnished as detailed on the
plans. Where necessary provide
top cable pull box which shall be
sealable per local utility
requirements.
B. Busway Entry
Switchboard to be fed by Siemens
Bus duct copper, aluminum,
____ ampere as detailed on plans,
and other sections of the
specification. The switchboard
manufacturer shall be responsible
for coordination, proper phasing
and internal bussing to the
incoming busway.
General/Guide
C. Transformer Coupling
The switchboard shall be directly
connected to the adjacent
transformer section, including all
necessary bus bars and flexible
connectors.
E. Metering Service Section
The service section shall be designed for
the system parameters indicated in
section A. The metering service
section shall have a metering
compartment per utility requirements,
user metering as indicated below and
as shown on plans.
Main bus:
Voltmeter with _______ -phase
transfer switch
Ammeter, with _______ -phase
transfer switch
Digital metering
_______ current transformer(s)
_______ /5 or suitable rating
_______ potential transformer(s), of
suitable rating.
Branch circuits:
Ammeter(s), with _______ -phase
transfer switch
Ground fault Protection:
Furnish and install on the service
equipment and/or switchboard a Ground
Fault protection system and indication
equipment as specified herein and as
shown on drawings in accordance with
The Canadian Electrical Code Section
14-102.
All new Ground Fault Protection and
Indication equipment shall be factory
installed, wired and tested by the
switchboard manufacturer.

F. Switchboards FCI, FCII

Guide Specification
The complete switchboard shall be
phosphatized and finished with light grey,
ASA-61 paint.
Each switchboard section shall have a
metal nameplate permanently affixed to
it, listing the following information:
b
b
b
b
b
Name of manufacturer
System voltage
Ampacity
Type
Manufacturers shop order number
and date
b Each section of switchboard shall

bear a CSA listing mark and a short
circuit rating label.
b The switchboard shall be per the
arrangement below (Select 1 of ITEM F)
Guide Specifications
F3. Switchboard Type Individually

Mounted, Rear Accessible
(Fixed mounted devices).
Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCII
type, or approved equal. All sections
shall align front and rear. All disconnect
devices, main and feeders, shall be
mounted individually at the front of the
switchboard and shall be rear accessible.
The load terminals of each feeder device
shall be extended by means of insulated
bus bars through the bus compartment in
to the rear cable compartment.
Optional
barriers shall be provided between bus
and cable compartment.
barriers shall be provided between
vertical sections.
devices and bus compartment.
primary and secondary disconnects are

engaged. In the test position, the
primary disconnect terminals are
disengaged; however, the secondary
disconnects are maintained to permit the
operation of the circuit breaker. In the
disconnect position, the primary and
secondary disconnects are disengaged
and separated a safe distance from the
corresponding stationary terminals. In the
fully withdrawn position, both primary
and secondary contacts are disconnected
and the circuit breaker may be inspected
as it can be removed for more
complete accessibility.
The load side of each feeder breaker shall
have bus bars extending from the rear
of the primary disconnect through the
bus compartment in to the rear cable
compartment.
Optional
F1. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted,

Front Accessible.

individual devices.
barriers shall be provided between bus

and cable compartment.
Switchboard shall be of Siemens FCI

type, or approved equal. Individual
sections shall be front accessible, not
less than 28 deep, and rear of all
sections shall align. Incoming line
termination, main device connection
and all bolts used to join current-carrying
parts shall be installed so as to permit
servicing from the front only so that
no rear access is required. The branch
devices shall be front removable and
panel mounted with line and load side
connections front accessible.
F4. Switchboard Type Individually

Mounted Rear Accessible
(Drawout Power Circuit Breaker).

vertical sections.
F2. Switchboard Type Panel-Mounted

Rear Accessible

devices and bus compartment.
individual devices.
8
SWITCHBOARDS

type, or approved equal. Individual
sections shall be front and rear
accessible, not less than 38 deep, and
both the front and rear of all sections
shall align. The branch devices shall be
front removable and panel mounted
with line and load side connections front
accessible. The bus and main device
connections shall be rear accessible.

type or approved equal. All sections shall
be aligned front and rear. Each vertical
section forming part of switchboard
lineup shall have one or more individual
breakers or instrument compartments, a
centralized main bus compartment and
a rear cabling compartment. Drawout
power circuit breakers shall be individually
mounted in their own compartments.
Metal barriers shall be provided at the
sides and rear of each compartment
and a horizontal metal barrier between
breakers in the same vertical section.
The breaker shall be accessible through
a hinged metal door on each breaker
compartment.
The drawout mechanism of power circuit
breaker shall be such that it can be
moved from connect through test to
disconnect position without opening the
door. In the connect position, both the
8-15
SWITCHBOARDS
G. Main Protective Devices

(Select one of Item G)
The main protective device, to be
installed in the main device section, shall
be as indicated below:
G1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Molded case circuit breaker shall be of
the quick-make, quick-break, trip-free,
(standard) (High Interrupting) (Current
Limiting) (solid state Sensitrip III) type. It
shall be _______ frame (2-pole) (3-pole)
600-volt breaker with a trip current rating
of:
400 A
1600 A
600 A
2000 A
800 A
1000 A
1200 A
of an interrupting capacity of not less
at the system voltage.
The following accessory features are to
be included:
Shunt trip
Electrical Operator
Ground fault relay
Long time (Sensitrip III only)
Long time delay (Sensitrip III only)
Short time (Sensitrip III only)
Short time delay (Sensitrip III only)
Integral ground fault (Sensitrip III only)
Other_______ (list)
G2. Fusible Switch
Fusible switch of the quick-make, quickbreak type. It shall be a (2-pole) (3-pole)
(240V) (600V) Vacu-Break unit with a
continuous current rating of (400) (600)
(800) (1200) amperes and with _______
ampere Class _______ fuses, suitable
for application on a system with _______
current.
G3. Bolted Pressure Switch
Bolted pressure switch of the quickmake, quick-break type. It shall be a
(2-pole) (3-pole) (240V) (600V) unit with a
continuous current rating of:
800 A
2500 A
1200 A
3000 A
1600 A
4000 A
2000 A
_______ A
and with _______ ampere Class L fuses
suitable for application on a system with
_______ amperes symmetrical available
fault current.
be included:
Shunt trip
Ground fault relay
Other _______ (list)
G4. Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
Insulated case circuit breaker with a
stationary frame. Frame size to be
8-16
_______ ampere 3-pole, 600-volt with a

trip current rating of:
400 A
2000 A
600 A
2500 A
800 A
3000 A
1000 A
_____ A
1200 A
1600 A
It shall be a manually operated breaker
with a solid state trip device, and an
_______ amperes RMS symmetrical at
the system voltage.
be included:
Short time delay
Integral ground fault trip
Fault trip indicator
G5. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Low voltage power circuit breaker with a
(stationary) (drawout) frame and a current
rating of:
800 A
3200 A
1600 A
4000 A
2000 A
_____ A
It shall be (manually) (electrically)
operated power circuit breaker with a
Electronic Trip Unit and an interrupting
capacity of _______ amperes RMS
symmetrical at the system voltage.
be included:
Short time delay
Integral ground fault trip
Fault trip indicator
H. Branch Protective Devices
(Select as necessary)
All molded case circuit breakers,
fusible switches, insulated case circuit
breakers, bolted pressure switches, low
voltage power circuit breaker, and/or
motor starter units used as a protective
device in a branch circuit will meet
the requirements of the appropriate
paragraph below.
H1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Molded case circuit breakers shall be of
quick-make, quick-break, trip-free
(thermal magnetic type) (current limiting)
(solid state) with frame, trip and voltage
rating, either 2-pole or 3-pole, as
indicated on the plans. All breakers shall
at the system voltage. All breakers shall
be removable from the front of the
switchboard without distributing adjacent
units. The switchboard shall have space
or provisions for future units shown on
the plans.
Guide
H2. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Current limiting circuit breakers shall
provide inverse time delay, instantaneous
circuit protection, and also limit the letthrough I2t to a value less than I2t of
one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any fusible
elements. Breakers shall have an
_______ ampere RMS symmetrical at the
system voltage.
H3. Fusible Switch
Fusible switches shall be quick-make,
quick-break units utilizing the doublebreak principle of circuit rupturing to
minimize arcing and pitting and shall
conform to the ratings shown on the
plans.
Each switch shall have an individual door
over the front, equipped with a voidable
interlock that prevents the door from
being opened when the switch is in the
ON position unless the interlock is
purposely defeated by activation of
the voiding mechanism. All switches
shall have externally operated handles.
Switches shall be equipped with (Class
R rejection type) fuse holders and Class
(J) (R) or (L) fuses of ampere rating and
type as indicated on the plans suitable
for application on system with _______
current.
H4. Bolted Pressure Switch
Each bolted pressure switch shall be the
quick-make, quick-break type, equipped
with Class L fuses suitable for application
on a system with _______ amperes
symmetrical available fault current.
Ampere rating to be as shown on the
plans.
H5. Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
FCII Switchboards only
Each insulated case circuit breaker shall
be manually operated with solid state trip
device. Frame sizes and trip ratings to be
as shown on the plans. All breakers to
than _______ amperes symmetrical at the
rated voltage.
H6. Low Voltage Power Air Circuit
Breaker
FCII Switchboards only
Each low voltage power air circuit breaker
shall be (stationary mounted) (drawout
mounted) stored energy type, trip free,
(manually operated) (electrically operated)
with solid-state trip device. Frame sizes
and trip ratings to be as shown on the
plans. All breakers to have an interrupting
capacity of no less than _______amperes
symmetrical at the rated voltage.
Protective Devices - Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Standard
Breakers are designed for commercial, industrial, institutional
and other heavy duty applications. They are rated up to 600V ac
and 250V dc. Their interrupting ratings are higher than normal
duty breakers.
High Interrupting
Breakers are designed for heavy duty applications where the
interrupting requirements exceed the ratings of heavy duty
breakers. They are rated up to 600V ac and 250V dc.
General
Current Limiting
Breakers are molded case breakers that incorporate the
exclusive I-T-E blow-apart interruption principle. They meet the
US-NEC requirements for current-limiting breakers. Currentlimiting circuit breakers can limit the let-through I2t to a value
less than the I2t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any fusible elements when
operating within their current-limiting range.

Breaker
Mounting Height
(inches)
Maximum Interrupting Rating (KA)
BL
BLF (GFCI) 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

BLE (GFI)
15, 20, 30
BLH

Type
600Y/347
480V
600V
10
250V DC

10

10
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
22
BLH (GFCI) 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100

22
BQD6

65
10
10
14
ED2
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75
3.75
10

ED 6
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75
3.75
65

18
30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Single
240V
18
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
3.75 200
200 100 30
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
900, 1000, 1200
5
5
5
5

8.75
8.75
8.75

5
5
5
5
5
8.75
8.75
8.75
8.75
8.75

8.75

8.75
8.75

10

10

35

30
65

30
200 30

30
35
25
30
65
35
30
150 100 30
35
25
35
25
30
65
35
30
150 100 30
35
25
50
25
30
65
50
30
35
25
30
65
35
30
150 100 30
35
25
50
25
30
65
35
30
150 100 30
35
25
to 6 poles may be mounted in 3.75 of unit space.

1
Accessories such as shunt trips on three pole breakers
require 6 of unit space.
10

42

65

100

200
65

100

200
65

65

100

200
65

65

100

65

100

200
65

65

100

200
65

round fault is not available on branch Sensitrip

G
breakers.
8-17
SWITCHBOARDS
Twin
CED6

QJ2
QJ2-H
FXD6
HFD6
CFD6
JXD2
JXD6
HJD6
CJD6
SJD6
LXD6
HLD6
CLD6
CLD6
LMD6
HLMD6
MD6
HMD6
CMD6
SMD6
ND6
HND6
CND6
SND6
Available Trip Value Ampere Ratings
SWITCHBOARDS
Protective Devices - Solid State Sensitrip Molded Case Circuit Breakers
General
Digital Electronics Allow Shaping of

Sensitrip III
Time Current Curves
Maximum Interrupting Capacity
Frame
For the ultimate in application flexibility,
(Sym, RMS, Amps)
Size
Breaker
Sensitrip III Suffix
Sentron Series with Sensitrip electronic
(Amps)
Frame Type
Indicator
Letter
240V ac 480V ac 600V ac
tripping incorporate solid state

SFD6 Standard
9
G, NT, NGT
65,000
35,000
22,000
capabilities that allow even more precise
250
SHFD6 Hi-lc
9
G, NT, NGT
100,000
65,000
25,000

SCFD6
C.L.
9
G,
NT,
NGT
200,000
200,000
100,000
control of overload current. These

SJD6 Standard
9
G, NT, NGT
65,000
35,000
25,000
breakers actually accept a programmed
400
SHJD6 Hi-lc
9
G, NT, NGT
100,000
65,000
35,000
time current characteristic curve that will

SCJD6 C.L.
9
G, NT, NGT
200,000 150,000
100,000
meet any protective requirements.

SLD6 Standard
9
G, NT, NGT
65,000
35,000
25,000
These circuit breakers offer adjustable
600
SHLD6 Hi-lc
9
G, NT, NGT
100,000
65,000
35,000

SCLD6 C.L.
9
G, NT, NGT
200,000 150,000
100,000
settings for such functions as continuous
current, instantaneous trip points, short
SMD6 Standard
9
G, NT, NGT 65,000 50,000 25,000
800
SHMD6 Hi-lc
9
G, NT, NGT 100,000 65,000 50,000
time delay pickup, ground fault pickups

SCMD6 C.L.
9
G, NT, NGT 200,000 100,000 65,000
and ground fault time delays. That means
SND6 Standard
9
G, NT, NGT 65,000 50,000 25,000
superior repeatable accuracy, adjustability
1200
SHND6 Hi-lc
9
G, NT, NGT 100,000 65,000 50,000
and precision.

SCND6 C.L.
9
G, NT, NGT 200,000 100,000 65,000
True RMS sensing, the ability to
measure the actual shape of the current

Continuous Long
waveform, ensures that the Sensitrip III
Suffix
Current
Time
Adjustable Short Short Short
Ground Ground
line will perform reliably, time and time
Letter
Adjustment Delay
Instantaneous Time
Time Time
Fault
Fault
again. Sensitrip digital circuit breakers
Code
(standard) (standard) Setting
Pick-Up Delay I2T Pick-Up Pick-Up Delay
have proven performance in using this
No Letter
X X
X - -
- -
ability to bring trip/dont trip margins
Letter-G X X X - - - X
X
closer than ever before.
Letter-NT X X X X X X -
A microcomputer in Sensitrip digital
Letter-NGT X X
X X X X X
X
circuit breakers senses true RMS current
by sampling the current waveform 41.7

Long Time (Ir)
Instantaneous
Short Time
Ground Fault
times per cycle. It reads this data and

Frame
Sensor
Delay Sec.
compares it to what has been
Size Rating Pick-up

select
Pick up
Pick up
Delay Sec.
pre-programmed into the circuit breakers

Pick up
Delay Sec.
(Amps) (In) Ir = % x In
6 x Ir
x In
x Ir
Stnd
I2T
Ir = % x In
I2T
operating logic. Once this data is
acquired, the microcomputer informs the
250
150, 250 .20, .35, .50, .60
6, 30
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 4, 7, 10 .05 .05
.20, .30, .40
.1
circuit breaker when to trip.

.70, .80, .90, 1.00
6, 7, 8, 9, 10
.10
at 6 x .40, .55, .70
.2
.20
Ir
.4
The true RMS ability of Sensitrip III

at .7 x Ig
helps ensure that nuisance tripping is

.05
.20, .25, .30
.1
minimized.

200, 300 .20, .30, .40, .50
3, 25
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2, 4, 7, 10
.05
at 6 x .40, .55, .70
.2
400
400
.65, .80, .90, 1.00
6, 7, 8, 9, 10
.10
Ir
.4
Accuracy of 5% means a finely tuned

.20
at .7 x Ig
electrical protection scheme. Sensitrip III

.05
.1
solid state circuit breakers give precise

300, 400 .20, .30, .40, .50
3, 25
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2, 4, 7, 10
.05
at 6 x .20, .25, .30
.2
control for a wide variety of application
600
500, 600 .65, .80, .90, 1.00
6, 7, 8, 9, 10
.10
Ir
.40, .55, .70
.4
requirements.

.20
at .7 x Ig
Accessories for Sentron Series Molded
.05
.18 .1

600, 700 .20, .25, .30, .40
2.2, 4
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
.10 .22
.20, .25, .30
.2
Case Circuit Breakers
800
800
.50, .65, .70,
7, 12
6, 7, 8, 9, 10 6, 7, 8, 9
.20 .28
.40, .55, .70
.4
b Alarm Switch: for remote indication

.80, .90, 1.00
22, 27
10, off
.30 .36
at .7 x Ig
.50
.45
and/or pilot device operation when

at 6 x Ir
breaker is tripped automatically.

.05 .18
.1
b Shunt Trip (electric open-manual close):

800, 1000 .20, .25, .30, .40
2.2, 4
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
.10 .22
for remote tripping of breaker. Includes 1200
1200
.50, .65, .70,
7, 12
6, 7, 8, 9, 10 6, 7, 8, 9
.20 .28
.20, .25, .30
.2
cut-off switch. Specify Control Voltage.

.80, .90, 1.00
22, 27
10, off
.30 .36
.40, .55, .70
.4
b Undervoltage Trip: automatically trips

.50 .45
at .7 x Ig

at 6 x Ir
breaker when voltage is reduced

35%-70% of coil rating. Specify
Control Voltage.
For 100% rated circuit breaker, add the suffix H to the catalogue number.
b Auxiliary Switch: 1A and 1B, 2A and
For SFD6, SHFD6 and SCFD6 frames, the instantaneous trip will be fixed.
2B, etc.
b Telemand motor operator (electric
open and close): F-250 Amp, J-400
Amp, L-600 Amp, M-800 Amp, N-1200
Amp. Operating Voltage: 120V ac.
b Ground fault relay (requires shunt trip).
8-18

Protective Devices - Fusible Switches
VK and VB (Vacu-Break) Fusible
Switches
Class
All VK and Vacu-Break fusible switches

include voidable cover interlock;
quick-make, quick-break operation;
positive ON-OFF action; padlockable
(at ON or OFF) handle design; VacuBreak arc control (i.e., enclosed arc
chamber, double-break magnetic arc
blowout); clampmatic pressure spring
force on closed contacts; springreinforced fuse holders. The VK switch
is a true visible contact design.
Accessory devices and modifications
available for 250-volt switches (30
amps to 600 amps): Class R and
class J rejection type fuse holders
are available for all units. For 600-volt
switches (30 amps to 600 amps): Class
R rejection type fuse holders, Class J
fuse holders; (100 amps to 600 amps)
Class T fuse holders.
Bolted Pressure Switches
These switches are suitable for use on
systems capable of delivering fault
current up to 200,000 amps
symmetrical RMS when equipped
with Class L fuses. All bolted pressure
switches include fuse door interlock;
quick-make, quick-break operation;
bolted pressure force on closed
contact; padlockable (in the open
position only) handle.
Amperes
Interrupting
Ratings
Volts (AC)
I2t, Ip (LetThru)
Circuits
Standard Code
1-600A
250 and
600V or less
10,000A
Less than
10,000A available
Fast Acting
(One time)
1-600A
250 and
600V or less
50,000A
Feeder circuits
Fast Acting
and Time Delay
1-600A
600V or less
To 200,000A
Ip and I2t-Low
(motor load
small %)
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
RK1
Fast Acting
and Time Delay
1/10-600A
600V or less
250V or less
To 200,000A
I2t-Slightly > J
Ip-Slightly > J
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
RK5
Fast Acting
and Time Delay
1/10-600A
600V or less
250V or less
To 200,000A
I2t- > RK-1

Ip- > RK-1
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
Moderate
Delay
2-600A
600V or less
To 200,000A
I2t- < RK-5

Ip- < RK-5
Motor circuits
Fast Acting
1-600A
300 and
600V or less
To 200,000A
I2t-Low
Ip-Low
Non-motor
loads
Fast Acting
and Time Delay
6015000A
600V or less
To 200,000A
Ip-Low
I2t-Low
motor loads
Feeder circuits
Motor circuits
H
Ka
(FORM II)
Branch Switches 600V Maximum

Ampere
Maximum
Fusing

Rating
Voltage
Mounting Height
F2
38 W
30 / 30A
600V
J, C, R
6.25 (159)
60 / 60A
600V
J, C, R
6.25 (159)
100 / 100A
600V
J, C, R, T
7.5 (190)
200A
600V
J, C, R, T
10 (254)
200 / 200A
600V
J, T
10 (254)
400A
600V
J, C, R, T
15 (381)
600A
600V
J, C, R, T
15 (381)

Refer
to Siemens for Form II Class C applications.
Interrupting Ratings of Bolted Pressure Switches

Max.
System
Ampere
Voltage
Rating
Class L
Fuse Rating
(Amps)
800
601, 700, 800
240
to
600

1200
1600
1000, 1200
1500, 1600
3000 3000
4000
3500, 4000
Fuse Interrupting
Rating
(Sym. RMS Amps)
200,000
2000
1800, 2000
2500 2500
SWITCHBOARDS
Accessories and modifications

available: shunt trip (electrical open
manual close). 120V ac standard
control voltage: electrical operator
(electrical open and close), specify
system voltage; ground fault relay
(requires shunt trip); blown fuse trip
(switch opens when any one fuse
blowsrequires shunt trip); blown fuse
indicating lights; phase failure relay
with capacitor trip (detects failure of
any one phase and opens switch
requires shunt trip) specify system
voltage; auxiliary contacts.
General
CSA Fuse Classes
Application Note: Lower rated fuses may be installed within any switch rating i.e.: 2000-amp fuse in 4000-amp switch.
8-19
Protective Devices - HCP Switchboard Unit Disconnect Switches
General
Features
b

b
b
b

b

b
Mixes with other 30A through 600A .

switches, and 100 through 1200 amp
frame breakers.
Allows 800A and 1200A switches in .
standard 38 wide distribution sections
in either main or branch configurations.
16 14 mounting height is the smallest
1200A design in the industry, allowing
up to 4 units in one vertical section.
b Field reversible horizontal mounting .
design for left or right hand cabling.
CSA Certified / UL Listed under file . .

number E6849
800A-1200A switch design.
Visible contacts.
Field installable shunt trip and auxiliary
switch accessory kits.
Installs in existing Siemens
. . . . .
switchboards and power panelboards.
Suitable for use on systems with up to
200,000A available fault current,
RMS symmetrical when equipped with
Class J or Class L fuses.
b

b

b
3-Pole, Horizontal Mount

Maximum Maximum
Dimensions (inches)
Ampere Voltage Fuse
Rating
Rating
Class H
L
D
Catalogue
Number
Horsepower Rating
240V
Std
480V
600V
250V
Std Max Std Max DC
Max
HCP327HT
1800
240
16.25 17.22 7.38
100
250
HCP367H
1800
600
16.25 17.22 7.38
100
250
200 500
250 500

50
50
HCP328HT
1200
240
16.25 17.22 7.38
100
250
HCP368H
1200
600
16.25 17.22 7.38
100
250
200 500
250 500
50
50
50
3-Pole, Vertical Mount

HCP327VT
1800
240
17.00 16.25 7.38 100
250
HCP367V
1800
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 100
250
200 500
250 500
50
HCP328VT
1200
240
17.00 16.25 7.38 100
250
50
HCP368V
1200
600
17.00 16.25 7.38 100
250
200 500
250 500
Accessories
Terminal Connectors (one lug per kit)
T Fuse Adapter Kits
Ampere

Rating
Catalogue
Number
Connector
Wire Range
Catalogue
Number Description
800A
TA3K500
TFAK72
1800A, 300V AC
800A
TC3K350
TFAK75
1800A, 600V AC
800-1200A
TA4H500
TFAK82
1200A, 300V AC
800-1200A
TA3H750
(3) 250750 kcmil (Cu or AI)
SWITCHBOARDS

Maximum
Contact
Voltage
Ampere
Rating
AC
DC
Switch
Mounting Contacts
Catalogue
Number
15A
480
125
Left Pole
1NO/1NC
A01HCPL4
15A
480
125
Right Pole
1NO/1NC
A01HCPR4
10A
240
125
Left Pole
2NO/2NC
A01HCPL2
Shunt Trip Kit

Control Voltage
Switchboard Connection
Strap Kit
AC
Catalogue
DC Number
120
HCPST120
Switch Catalogue
Ampere Rating
Number
240
HCPST240
8001200A
277
HCPST277
480
HCPST480
148
HCPST48
125 HCPST125

see Application Data Section.
8-20
F6162DCAN
For
horizontal mounting only in either 38 wide min

switchboards or S5/F2 power panelboards.
kits required for 3 phase switch
3
Compression Lug Adapter Kit

The use of this kit provides for the
mounting of up to four lugs per
phase. Each kit accepts lugs with (2)
3/8 diameter mounting holes on 1
centres. One kit per pole line or load is
required. Lugs are not provided.
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
8001200A
HCPCLP
50

WL Circuit Breaker CSA 22.2 #5/UL489
Frame Size II
Frame Rating
Rating Class
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
Interrupting Current Ics

(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
240V
480V
600V
65
65
65
100
100
85
150
150
100
65
65
65
100
100
85
150
150
100
65
65
65
100
100
85
150
150
100
65
65
65
100
100
85
150
150
100
100
100
85
150
150
100
100
100
85
150
150
100
Short-time Withstand
Current Icw (kA RMS)
50/60 Hz
0.5 s
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
85
100
85
100
240-480V
600V
65
65
100
85
150
100
65
65
100
85
150
50
65
65
100
85
150
100
65
65
100
85
150
100
100
85
150
100
100
85
150
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
85
100
85
100
Extended Instantaneous
Protection (kA RMS)
Close and Latch Ratings
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
Rating Plug Range

Minimum switchboard
cubicle dimensions
(fixed or draw-out
version)
width (in.)
height (in.)
depth (in.)
200A to 800A
200A to 1200A
200A to 1600A
200A to 2000A
200 to 2500A
200 to 3000A
22.0
22.5
19.5
22.0
22.5
19.5
22.0
22.5
19.5
22.0
22.5
19.5
22.0
22.5
19.5
22.0
22.5
19.5
Frame Size III

Frame Rating
Rating Class
4000
5000

(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
240V
480V
600V
100
100
85
150
150
100
100
100
85
150
150
100
Current Icw (kA RMS)
50/60 Hz
0.5 s
85
100
85
100
240-480V
600V
100
85
150
100
100
85
150
100
85
100
85
100
Protection (kA RMS)
Close and Latch Ratings
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
Rating Plug Range

Minimum switchboard
cubicle dimensions
(fixed or draw-out
version)
width (in.)
height (in.)
depth (in.)
800A to 4000A
800A to 5000A
32.0
22.5
19.5
32.0
22.5
19.5
8
SWITCHBOARDS
8-21

WL Circuit Breaker CSA 22.2 #5/UL489
Breaker Example: L 2 D 3 3 2 W V
Assembled Breaker Catalogue Numbering System
Primary Catalogue No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ppp ppppp
Interrupting Rating
S - Class: 65kA at 240V, 480V,600V
H - Class: 85kA at 240V, 480V 85kA at 600V (FSIII), 65kA at 600V (FSI & FSII)
L - Class: 100kA at 240V, 480V 85kA at 600V (FSII & FSIII), 65kA at 600V (FSI)
C - Class: 150kA at 240V, 480V 100kA at 600V
Frame Size
2 : Frame Size II (FSII)
3 : Frame Size III (FSIII)
Breaker Type
F : UL 489 Fixed Mount Breaker
D : UL 489 Drawout (Guide Frame not included)
Y : UL 489 Fixed Mount Non-Automatic Switch
Z : UL 489 Drawout Non-Automatic Switch (Guide Frame not included)
Number of Poles
SWITCHBOARDS
3 : 3-Pole
Frame Rating (as labeled on breaker)
(Amps/ 100 )
Rating Plug
Trip Unit Type
Common Accessoriesc
With
standard pressure wire terminal secondary connectors.

15 character spaces must be utilized for a valid catalogue number. An N should be used
when additional components are not required. All primary catalogue number characters must
be selected.
All
8-22
X X X X X X Z
Common Accessories
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 Z
p p p p p p p

Metering Data
User Metering
A full complement of switchboard instruments with appropriate
current transformers, potential transformers and selector
switches are available in all Siemens switchboards.
The meters and instrument switches are mounted on hinged
panels with potential transformers and fuses located behind
the door. Current transformers are mounted on the main bus
or, in the case of branch feeder metering, at the load terminals
of the branch protective device and normally do not require
additional unit space.
Siemens Digital Power Meters
The Siemens Digital Power Meters are provided as an option
for FCI & FCII switchboards. Please refer to the Power
Monitoring Section in this catalogue for more information.
Selection
Ammeters and Voltmeters (Analog)

Ammeters are switchboard type with 1% accuracy, 0 to
6000 amperes maximum. The included instrument switch
will provide positions to read each phase and will include an
OFF position. Panel type ammeters with 3% accuracy, 800
ampere maximum, can be furnished for branch feeder metering
to conserve panel space.
Voltmeters are switchboard type with 1% accuracy, 0 to 600V
AC. The included instrument switch provides positions to read
each phase-to-phase voltage and each phase-to-neutral voltage
and has an OFF position.
Current Transformers / Potential Transformers
Potential transformers are recommended wherever the system
voltage exceeds 150 volts AC phase-to-neutral to lower voltage
levels for instrument switches and meters mounted on the
switchboard front panel.
Available CT Ratios Ampere Rating

100:5
150:5
200:5
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1500:5
2000:5
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
5000:5
6000:5
Number of CTs and or PTs required for Typical Meters Applied on Selected System Voltages

Watthour Meter

Ammeter Voltometer 2 Element 2.5 Element 3 Element
Wattmeter
Varmeter
System Volts AC C/T
P/T Scale C/T P/T C/T
P/T C/T P/T
C/T
P/T
C/T P/T
13W
120/240 2
0-300
2 2 2
33W 240
2
0-300 2

2
2
2
2
600
2 2
0-750
2 2 2 2 2 2
34W 120/240
3
0-300
3

3
2
3
2

120/208
3
0-300

3

3

3

3

347/600
3
3 0-750
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
2
Power
Factor Frequency
Meter
Meter
C/T P/T PT
1
1
2
1 2 1
1
2
1
2
1
2 1
Synchroscope
P/T
2
2
8
SWITCHBOARDS
8-23
Integrated Power Systems Switchboards

Type IPS
General
Product Description
Features & Benefits
Siemens integrated power systems (IPS) switchboards

integrate multiple pieces of electrical distribution equipment
into a single assembly. The design results in reduced
installation time, a reduced footprint and reduced labour risk
for installation.
Features
b All standard FC1, FC2 & SMP Switchboard features
b Lighting panelboards
b Distribution transformers
b Half high distribution switchboard chassis
b Individually mounted breakers (cable in & cable out)
b Auxiliary sections for surge devices, ACCESS power
monitoring, contactors, relays, time clocks
b Customer equipment, etc.
The modular design of the IPS switchboard allows it to be

combined with standard service entrance or distribution
switchboards if needed. Also, the IPS switchboard can be
added to an existing switchboard lineup.
IPS switchboards have a wide range of applications and are
commonly used in retail stores, offices, health care facilities
and retrofits.
Integrated Power Systems Switchboard

Commonly Mounted Equipment
Distribution sections
b Up to 2000A (full height)
b Up to 1200A (half height)
SWITCHBOARDS
Transformers
b Up to 300KVA (full height)
b Up to 150KVA (half height)
Panelboards
b P1 up to 250A
b P2 up to 600A
23
8-24
Integrated Power Systems Switchboards

Type IPS
Features & Benefits (continued)
Standards and Certifications
Reduced Installation Time

IPS switchboards arrive at a jobsite with the components
factory installed and wired. The result is significantly reduced
installation time. The realized savings on installation result in
lower labour costs which drops directly to the bottom line.
b
b

b
Reduced Space Requirements

By integrating components that are typically individually
mounted, the IPS switchboard can reduce the space
requirements for typical electrical equipment installation
by up to 40%. This smaller footprint frees up valuable square
footage that can be utilized by the building owner for other
profitable uses.
General
CSA C22.2 No.31

Mounted panelboards built to UL67, NEMA PB-1 and
CSA C22.2 No. 29
Other equipment is CSA listed as applicable
Additional Information
For complete application and pricing information contact
your local Siemens sales office.
Reduced Installation Risk.

IPS switchboards are assembled at Siemens manufacturing
plants with meticulous attention to details reinforced with
strict testing procedures. This focus on quality ensures that
problems encountered with traditional installations such as
misinterpretation of drawings or field installation errors are
eliminated. Utilizing IPS switchboards eliminates risks, enabling
projects to come in on time and on budget.
Integrated Power Systems Switchboard

Optimized Electrical Room Layout
8
SWITCHBOARDS
8-25
Notes
SWITCHBOARDS
8-26
POWER PRODUCT
Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Contents
Siemens Surge Protection Innovations
9-2
Recommending Surge Protection 9-3
TPS3 External or Wall Mounted SPDs

TPS3 03 and TPS3
09 9-4

TPS3 11 9-5

TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12
9-6
TPS3 15 and TP3S L15
9-7
SPD4home, SPD4tel, SPD4coax
Integrally Mounted SPDs
9-8 9-9
External or Wall Mounted SPDs
Residential SPDs
Also see 4-16 and 4-17 (Loadcentres)
Features
b Per Phase Surge Current Capacity
ranging from 100 kA to 1000 kA
b Industry best VPRs
b In = 20 kA (most models)
b Across the board UL 96A compliance
(most models)

b Ground Integrity Monitoring (GIM)
diagnostics
Features
ranging from 50 kA to 1000 kA
b Industry best VPRs
b In = 20 kA (most models)
b Across the board UL 96A compliance
(most models)

diagnostics (excluding TPS3 03 & TPS3 09)
Features
of 40 kA or 50 kA
b Complete Service Protection for
- Power
- Telephone
- Coax
diagnostics
9
SPD

Siemens Surge Protection Innovations
Introduction
In todays electronic world, home and business

electrical systems just arent complete unless they
incorporate surge protection. Stopping Surges
Before They Get In to these systems is best
accomplished through the installation of appropriately
sized hard-wired Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
beginning at the incoming service followed by
installations at other key surge entry points.
When Siemens first developed the Transient
Protection System (TPS) family of surge protectors,
we knew early on that hard-wired surge protectors
needed fully coordinated safety controls. This led
to the adoption of a number of SPD industry safety
control firsts including the patented Ceramgard and
TranSafe circuitry, coordinated fusing and thermal
cutouts, dielectric isolation, mechanical reinforcing
taping resulting in a design that ensures the highest
possible electrical system protection and reliability.
Selection
Protection Ratings (VPRs), Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) and

20kA I-nominal ratings (for most models), with surge
current ratings from 50kA to 1000kA.
Electrical disturbances will always occur, but they
dont have to cause surge protectors to fail in an
unsafe manner. Safer surge protection means
uncompromised electrical system protection, safety,
and reliability.
The following pages provide additional technical and
ordering information concerning our TPS3 family of
Surge Protective Devices (SPDs).
Our next generation UL 1449 3rd Edition TPS3 SPDs

carry on this same legacy. Every TPS3 is infused with
Siemens engineering and safety and performance
know-how. Siemens SPDs have the highest
degree of safety while delivering the industys best
performance ratings - some of the lowest Voltage
Surge Protector Per Phase Surge Current Capacities

Wall Mounted Standard Mode
TPS3 03
TPS3 09
TPS3 11
10 Mode SPDs
TPS3 12
Per Phase
Surge
Current
TPS3L 12
Per Phase
Surge
Current
50kA
150kA
100kA
300kA
150kA
450kA
200kA
600kA
250kA
900kA
300kA
SPD
TPS3 15
400kA
500kA
600kA
800kA
1000kA
9-2
TPS3L 15

Recommending Surge Protection
Selection
SOLID Protection
Either at home or in the work place,

nearly every electrical load is electronic
infused. With todays power quality
being the same as it was 50 years ago,
equipment is more susceptible to surge
damage and/or disruption generated by
normal electrical distribution interactions.
Places where lightning activity is minimal
are now experiencing more electronic failures due to surges generated by the dayto-day operations of equipment like wash-
Service
Entrance
Outside loads
like Parking
Lot Lighting
powered from
distribution
panels
ers and dryers, copiers, chillers, etc. Just

a few years ago, designers never gave
thought to incorporating surge protection
into their designs. They are now reconsidering this practice. Government studies
suggest that the most efficient way to
protect electrical systems from surges is
through the installation and application of
hardwired SPDs at key points throughout
the distribution system.
Lower voltage
distribution
panels
powering
computers
and other
electronics
The illustration to the right shows

SOLID locations that are typically present in a schools electrical sysytem. Each
letter from the word SOLID stands for
the location on the distribution system
where surge protection is to be installed.
For each location, we list the most common integral or wall mounted specified
Siemens TPS3.
Individual
critical
equipment
like servers
Surge Arrestor Style Alternative

When UL 1449 3rd Edition went into effect
in 2009, low voltage surge and lightning
arrestors became obsolete in the US. This
limits the number of CSA compliant suppliers. Arrestors have been replaced by
Type 1 SPDs, but at the time of this publishing CSA has not recognized Type 1
SPDs as a lighting arrestor replacement.
Until Type 1 SPDs are recognized,
Siemens dual listed the TPS3 03 as a
CSA recognized Type 2 cUL listed SPD.
We suggest using this SPD as a Surge
Arrestor Alternative that must be installed
on the load side of the main overcurrent
disconnect switch or breaker or at down
stream locations.
Data,
telephone,
and coaxial
cables
Discrete or True 10 Mode Style SPDs

For mission critical or high profile
applications, a growing number of end
users prefer the assurance of discrete
or true 10-mode SPDs.
When surges traverse the electrical
system via phase to phase conductors,
standard SPDs indirectly protect via the
line to neutral or line to ground modes
of protection. Siemens integral or wall
mounted 10-mode SPDs address L-L
surges by incorporating directly connected line to line surge protection elements. This style of SPD provides the
Just in Case assurance mission critical or high profile projects require.
TPS3 03
Type 1 (Type 2 cUL)
SPD with In = 20kA
To ensure complete electrical system

surge protection, Siemens recommends
implementing a SOLID surge protection
installation. SOLID systems incorporate
hardwired SPDs at the incoming electrical
service to stop surges originating from
the utility service. This is followed by hardwiring additional SPDs at other distribution system surge entry points.
SPD
9-3

TPS3 03
TPS3 03 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL 50 kA Type 1 (Type

2 cUL) compact Surge Protective Device. For cUL applications, the TPS3 03 can be used as a secondary surge or
lighting arrestor alternative when installed on the load side
of the main disconnect.
TPS3 03 Key Features
b U
L 1449 3rd Edition, cUL Listed
b T
ype 1 (Type 2 cUL) Rated SPD
b 5
0kA Per Phase Surge Current
b 2
0kA In (Most models)
b 2
00kA SCCR (Most models
b U
L 96A Lightning Protection Master Labeling compliant
(@ 20kA)
b E
very MOV is monitored
b M
ounting Chase Nippled, bracket, or DIN RAIL
b S
tandard compact NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure
b M
odes of Protection: L-N or L-G and L-L
b S
tandard Monitoring: LED Indicator
b D
imensions: 3.25 x 3.25 x 3.3 (82.6 mm x 82.6 mm
x 83.8 mm)
b W
eight: 2 lb. (0.9 kg)
b 2
Year Product Warranty
Available Options:
b D
ry contacts & audible alarm (option D)
TPS3 03
TPS3 01 DIN RAIL Mounting
Catalogue Number
TPS3
03
Voltage Code
Surge Current (kA)
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
D = 240V, 3, 3W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
F = 480V, 3, 3W
G = 600V, 3, 3W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W
05 = 50kA per phase
Options
D = Dry contact
& aidible alarm
Example - TPS3C0305D = Type 1(Type 2 cUL)

SPD for a 208/120V application with a surge
current capacity of 50kA per phase, in a standard NEMA 4X enclosure with dry contacts and
audible alarm option.
When an option is not selected, include a zero
(0) in the field.
Available Accessories: Ordered Separately
RMSIE - Remote monitor
TPS3 09
SPD
TPS3 09 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL 100kA Type 1 (Type

2 cUL) compact multi-mode surge protective device that
can be installed on either the line or load side of the electrical service.
b U
L 1449 3rd Edition, cUL Listed
b T
b 1
00kA Per Phase Surge Current
b 2
b 2
00kA SCCR (Most models)
b U
(@ 20kA)
b E
very MOV is monitored, including N-G
b M
ounting: External or Wall Mounted
b S
tandard compact NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure
b M
odes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
b S
tandard Monitoring: LED Indicators
b D
imensions: 8 x 3 x 3 (203 mm x 76 mm x 76 mm)
b W
b 1
0 Year Product Warranty
Available Options:
b D
b E
xtended indicator light (option E)
b Internal mounting in P1, P2 Panels (option I), requires
TPS9IKITP1 or TPS9IKITP2 mounting bracket accessory.
9-4
TPS3 09
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
D = 240V, 3, 3W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
F = 480V, 3, 3W
G = 600V, 3, 3W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
09
Surge Current (kA)

10 = 100kA per phase
Example: TPS3C0910D00
= Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) SPD for
a 208/120V panel-board with a
surge current capacity of 100kA
per phase with standard NEMA
4X enclosure, dry contacts and
audible alarm option.
2
Options
E = Extended
indicator light
I = Internal
mounting in P1,
P2 panels
D = Dry
contact &
audible alarm
Available for field retrofit in P1 panels

When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in
the field

b RMSIE = Remote monitor
b FMKITC = Flush mount plate
b TPS9IKITP1 = Mounting bracket for installation in P1 panels
b TPS9IKITP2 = Mounting bracket for installation in P2 panels

TPS3 11
TPS3 11 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL Multi-mode Type 1 (Type
2 cUL) Surge Protective Device with a per phase surge current
capacity that can be increased to 200kA. In addition, this unit
provides UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering (Sine Wave Tracking) that will
condition low energy L-N coupled noise.
Standard monitoring includes protection status Ground Integrity
Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostic indicators. Complete protection
is intact when the status indicators are illuminated. When protection is lost, the status indicator will extinguish and the red
service light will illuminate.
Ground Integrity Monitoring or (GIM) diagnostics monitor the
health of the electrical systems neutral to ground bond. If voltage is seen across neutral and ground, the phase indicators
will remain illuminated while the red service light begins to
flash, alerting the end user that the electrical system grounding
needs to be checked. This feature can be remotely monitored
when the optional dry contacts are included.
b U
L 1449 3rd Edition, cUL and UL 1283 Listed
b T
b 1
00, 150, 200kA Per Phase Surge Current
b 2
b 2
b U
(@ 20kA)
b E
b M
b S
tandard NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure (UL 746C (f1),
UL 94-5VA)
b M
odes of Protection: L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
b S
tandard Monitoring: LED Indicators and Ground Integrity
Monitoring diagnostics
b W
ire size: #8 AWG to #10 AWG
b D
b W
b 1
TPS3 11
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
D = 240V, 3, 3W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
F = 480V, 3, 3W
G = 600V, 3, 3W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
11
Surge Current (kA)

2
Options
D = Dry Contacts
& audible alarm
Example: TPS3C1110D = Type 1 (Type 2 cUL)

SPD for a 208/120V application with a surge
current capacity of 100kA per phase, in a standard NEMA 4X enclosure with dry contacts
and audible alarm option
When an option is not selected, include a zero
(0) in the field

b RMSIE = Remote monitor
b FMKITC = Flush mount plate
Available Options:
b D
9
SPD
9-5

TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 (True or Discrete 10-Mode)

TPS3 12 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL replaceable module,
multi-mode Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) Surge Protective Device with
a per phase surge current capacity that can be increased to
500kA (TPS3 L12 to 450kA). For mission critical or high profile
applications, our TPS3 L12 True or Discrete 10-mode style
SPD provides the Just in Case assurance of directly connected L-L MOVs.
Both TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 include UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering
(Sine Wave Tracking) that will condition low energy L-N coupled
noise.
SPD

health of the electrical systems neutral to ground bond. If voltage is seen across neutral and ground, the phase indicators
will remain illuminated while the red service light begins to
flash, alerting the end user that the electrical system grounding
needs to be checked. This feature can be remotely monitored
when the optional dry contacts are included.
TPS3 12 and TPS3 L12 Key Features
b U
b T
b T
PS3 12: 100 500kA Per Phase Surge Current
b T
PS3 L12: 150, 300, 450kA Phase Surge Current
b 2
b 2
b U
(@ 20kA)
b E
b M
b S
tandard NEMA 1/12/3R/04 ANSI 61 steel enclosure
b T
PS3 12 Modes of Protection L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
b T
PS3 L12 Modes of Protection L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L (directly connected L-L elements)
b S
tandard Monitoring:
- LED Indicators
- Ground Integrity Monitoring diagnostics
- Dry contacts
- Audible alarm with silence switch and test button
b W
ire size: #8 AWG to 1/0
b D
imensions: 12 x 12 x 7 (305 mm x 305 mm x 178 mm)*
b W
eight: 20 lb. (9.07 kg)*
b 1
*Other
NEMA ratings may increase enclosure size and weight
Available Options:
b Internal rotary disconnect
b T
hru-door disconnect
b S
urge counter
9-6
TPS3 12
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
D = 240V*, 3, 3W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
F = 480V*, 3, 3W
G = 600V**, 3, 3W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
Surge Current (kA)

12
Enclosure
0 = Standard NEMA
1/12/3R/4 Steel
V = NEMA 4X non-metallic
S = NEMA 4X stainless steel
F = NEMA 1 flush mount
P = NEMA 1 screwcover pullbox
with extended display on 6ft
cable for line side mounting
in SWBD/SWGR
Options
D = Internal
rotary
disconnect
T = Thru-door
disconnect
X= Surge
Counter
Example: TPS3C12100XD = Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) SPD for a

208/120V application with a surge current capacity of 100kA per
phase, in a standard NEMA 1/12/3R/4 enclosure with a surge
counter and internal rotary disconnect option
When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field

- RMSIE = Remote monitor
Notes:
* Not available in 500kA
** Available in 100kA, 150kA, 200kA, 250kA only
True or Discrete
10-Mode SPD
TPS3 L12
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
Surge Current (kA)

L12
Enclosure
0 = Standard NEMA
1/12/3R/4 Steel
in SWBD/SWGR
Options
D = Internal
rotary
disconnect
T = Thru-door
disconnect
X= Surge
Counter
Example: TPS3C12100XD = Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) SPD for a

208/120V application with a surge current capacity of 100kA per
phase, in a standard NEMA 1/12/3R/4 enclosure with a surge
counter and internal rotary disconnect option

TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 (True or Discrete 10-Mode)

TPS3 15 is a UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL dual replaceable module,
multi-mode Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) Surge Protective Device with
a per phase surge current capacity that can be increased to
1000kA (TPS3 L15 to 900kA). For mission critical or high profile
applications, our TPS3 L15 True or Discrete 10-mode style
SPD provides the Just in Case assurance of directly connected L-L MOVs.
Both TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 include UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering
(Sine Wave Tracking) that will condition low energy L-N coupled
noise.
health of the electrical systems neutral to ground bond. If voltage is seen across neutral and ground, the phase indicators will
remain illuminated while the red service light begins to flash,
alerting the end user that the electrical system grounding needs
to be checked. This feature can be remotely monitored when
the optional dry contacts are included.
TPS3 15
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
D = 240V, 3, 3W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
F = 480V, 3, 3W*
G = 600V, 3, 3W**
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
Surge Current (kA)

1K = 1000kA per phase
Available Options:
b T
hru-door disconnect
b S
urge counter
RMSIE = Remote monitor
* 600kA or 800kA only

** 400kA or 500kA only
True or Discrete
10-Mode SPD
TPS3 L15
Catalogue Number
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W
TPS3
Surge Current (kA)

L15
Enclosure
0 = Standard NEMA
1/12/3R/4 Steel
in SWBD/SWGR
2
Options
T = Thru-door
disconnect
X= Surge
Counter
Example: TPS3CL15600X0 = 10 Mode, Type 1 (Type 2 cUL)

SPD for a 208/120V application with a surge current capacity of
600kA per phase, in a standard NEMA 1/12/3R/4 enclosure with
a surge counter option

SPD
NEMA ratings may increase enclosure size and weight
Options
T = Thru-door
disconnect
X= Surge
Counter
*Other
Enclosure
0 = Standard NEMA
1/12/3R/4 Steel
in SWBD/SWGR
Example: TPS3C1560SX0 = Type 1 (Type 2 cUL) SPD for a

208/120V application with a surge current capacity of 600kA
per phase, in a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure with a surge
counter option and standard disconnect switch
TPS3 15 and TPS3 L15 Key Features

b U
b T
b T
PS3 15: 600 1000kA Per Phase Surge Current (most models)
b T
PS3 L15: 600 and 900kA Phase Surge Current
b 2
0kA In (most models)
b 2
00kA SCCR (most models)
b U
(@ 20kA)
b E
b M
b S
tandard NEMA 1/12/3R/04 ANSI 61 steel enclosure
b T
PS3 15 Modes of Protection L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L
b T
PS3 L15 Modes of Protection L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L (directly connected L-L elements)
b Internal rotary disconnect switch included
b S
tandard Monitoring:
- LED Indicators
- Ground Integrity Monitoring diagnostics
- Dry contacts
- Audible alarm with silence switch and test button
b W
ire size: #8 AWG to 1/0
b D
b W
eight: 64 lb. (29 kg) *
b 1
15
9-7

Selection
SPD4home
b cUL Listed
b Rated for single phase panels up to 400 amps

b Installation Flexibility
b LED Indicators
b Audible alarm
b Ground Integrity Monitoring (GIM) circuit
b 10 year product warranty*
* Contact
Siemens SPD4home stops power surges from entering your

home when installed at the main incoming service loadcenter
and connected via a 20A breaker. An additional power quality feature we include within this unit is the Ground Integrity
Monitoring circuit, which monitors the health of the electrical
systems neutral to ground bond.
Surge Type
SPD
To Protected Loads
Catalogue Number
SPD4home
5kA
Type 2
Yes
40kA
120/240 1 Phase 50/60 Hz
700V
150V
<1 nanosecond
NEMA 4X Enclosure
Standard
UL/cUL Listings
Product Warranty
1449 SPD
10 years
SPD
AC Surge Protection
Inominal (In) Rating
SPD Type Rating
Thermal Fusing
Single Current Rating per Phase
Line Voltage
UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR
MCOV
Response Time
9-8
SPD4home
Siemens at 1-888-333-3545 for warranty terms and conditions.
BREAKER
Use closest breaker to SPD

Locate SPD close to intended
breaker
Keep leads as short as possible
Avoid sharp bends
Rotate SPD4home
such that LED indicator is most visible
Outdoor installation requires

appropriate weather sealing at
nipple (sealing conduit, etc.)

Selection
SPD4tel & SPD4telkit

b cUL listed
b Hardwired Telephone/Modem/Fax/DSL protection

b Exceptionally fast response time
b Low insertion loss
b Available with or without enclosure
b 5 Year product warranty*
* Contact
SPD4tel
SPD4telkit
Siemens at 1-888-333-3545 for warranty terms and conditions.
SPD4tel is a 2-pair hardwired telephone service entrance

surge protector designed to stop surges from entering your
home via your incoming telephone service. The SPD4tel is
designed for indoor applications or can be mounted outside
when housed within the weatherproof SPD4telkit.
When combined with the SPD4home and SPD4coax, all primary surge entries into the home providing comprehensive
whole house protection.
AC Surge Protection
Yes
Spike Capacity
200 Amps
Let Through Voltage
<270V
Yes
Response Time
<1 nanosecond
Environmentally Sealed
Yes
UL/cUL Listings
497A
Meets Telcordia (formallly Bellcore) GR-974-CORE

Requirements for Telecommunications Line
rotectors
Yes
Product Warranty
5 years
Surge Type
Catalog Number
Telco
Telco
SPD4tel
SPD4telkit

SPD4coax
b cUL listed
b Rated for CATV, DSS, TV, VCR, and Cable Modem
b Easy to install
b Standard Female to Female F connector
b Low insertion loss
b Automatic recovery
b 5 Year product warranty*
*
SPD4coax
Contact Siemens at 1-888-333-3545 for warranty terms and conditions..
DC thru 1.5 GHz

Yes
5000 Amps, 8/20 Sec
75 Ohms
Yes
30dB @ 1 GHz
<0.1dB
UL/cUL Listings
497B
Meets IEEE C62.41.1 Requirements

Product Warranty
Yes
5 Years
Surge Type
Catalog Number
Coaxial
SPD4coax
9-9
SPD
When combined with the SPD4home and SPD4tel, all

primary surge entries into the home providing comprehensive whole house protection.
AC Surge Protection
Frequency Range
Spike Capacity
Impedance
Return Loss
Insertion Loss
SPD4coax is a coaxial service entrance surge protector designed to stop surges from entering your home
via your incoming coax TV service. SPD4coax includes
a section of coaxial cable with female to female splice
for line side application.
Notes
SPD
9-10
POWER PRODUCT
Power Monitoring
Contents
Power Monitoring Systems Overview 10-2
Intelligent Metering and Control Devices 10-3
Sentron PAC 3100,3200,4200 Meters 10-4
9340/9360 Power Meter Web-Enabled 10-5
9510/9610 Power Quality Meter Power Meters
10-6 10-7
Branch Circuit Monitoring/Embedded Metering
10-8
9510 RTU Data Concentrator 10-9

WinPM.Net Software 10-10
Current Transformers 10-11
Services 10-13

Siemens recognizes that high performance facilities make for high performance business. Energy is the lifeline of
your business, and better efficiency and sustainability can have a large positive impact on your bottom line.
Energy Management and Control Systems from Siemens are complete enterprise solutions that help you manage the
energy costs and availability of your business. With our advanced meters and controls, you can be sure to use only the
energy you need, when you need it. Siemens meters and software give you information and information is power. With
the correct information you can make the correct decisions to ensure cost control and high system availability.
Siemens Power Distribution Solutions contribute toward achieving LEED certification and provides the needed energy
metering data for federal/local government energy reduction programs.
Features and Benefits of Siemens Power Distribution Solutions:

b Power Quality Reliability & Analysis
b Utilities Cost Allocation & Billing
b Utilities Usage Aggregation
b Load Monitoring and Load Shedding
b Equipment Monitoring
b Trending
b Event Recording
b Asset Management
b Demand and Power Factor Control
10
POWER
MONITORING
Totally Integrated Power
POWER
MONITORING
10
System Overview
1. P
ower Meters
Siemens ACCESS power monitors combine the best of new
technologies and proven practices. Monitor critical loads,
power quality, and demand via the web directly from the
meters.
2. Power Monitoring Software
WinPM.Net web-enabled software facilitates easy, enterprisewide connection to power monitoring equipment, circuit
breakers, and other devices from Siemens and third parties.
Access information via the web with unlimited no-cost clients
using built-in WebReachTM via your web browser.
3. Communications Networks
Utilize existing Ethernet or RS-485 communications networks
to extract the information you need and get it where it needs
to go.
4. Components
Current Transformers (CTs), Voltage/Potential Transformers
(PTs), Power Supplies, Ethernet Switches, Protocol Converters.
Siemens can provide everything required for your system.
5. Intelligent I/O
Our S7 I/O enables plug-n-play communications with Modbus
devices and expands digital and analog input and output
functionality of ACCESS Systems.
6. Billing and Load Allocation Software
ACCESSEnergy Manager is the low-cost, simplified solution
for cost allocation, billing & load/demand analysis using your
web browser.
10-2
General
7. Engineering Services
PDS Application Engineers can help from design through
commissioning of even the most demanding power quality
and monitoring systems.
8. Motor Control Centres
Monitor mains and feeders for critical or power-intensive loads.
Communicate with breakers (StaticTrip III, SBEC), SAMMS,
SIMOCODE, I/O and devices from other manufacturers. Use
ACCESS power meters to web-enable new as well as existing
MCCs.
9. Low & Medium Voltage Switchgear
Web-enable switchgear by having ACCESS monitor power
as well as breaker status and upload the information to a
corporate Intranet or to the Internet. Use MeterMailTM
directly from meters for alarm conditions or simple reporting.
10. Facility Management Systems
Tie into building automation systems to provide the required
power and energy information. Lots of communications
options are available ranging from legacy protocols to XML
directly from the power monitors.
11. Distributed Control Systems, Automation, and
SCADA/Human Machine Interface
ACCESS power monitors and/or software can talk to all major
vendors systems.
Intelligent Metering and Control Devices
General
PAC3100
PAC3200
PAC4200
9340
9360
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
9510 ADR
9510
9610/9610H
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Power, energy and demand

Voltage/current: per phase, average
Voltage/current: unbalance
Power: real (kW), reactive (kVAR),
apparent (kVA), power factor, frequency (Hz)
Energy (kWh): bi-directional, import, export
Energy (kWh): total, net
Demand: block, sliding window
Demand: thermal predicted
Power quality analysis

Sag/swell monitoring
Symmetrical components: zero, negative, positive
63rd
256
17 s @ 60 Hz,
(20 s @ 50 Hz)
127th/256th
512/1024
n
n
n
n
n
n
800
n
n
n
n
800
n
Transient detection, microseconds

Harmonics (individual, even, odd, total) up to
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle
Flicker, harmonics to EN50160, IEC 6100-4-7 / 4-15
Configurable for IEEE 519-1992, IEEE 1159, SEMI/ITIC
Number of nines uptime data (3 nines=99.9%)
64
THD only
64
31st
170
31st
128
63rd
128
Data and waveform logs

Triggered by setpoint, schedule, or external signal
Sequence-of-event logs, variable log depth
Minimum/maximum logs
Historical logs / maximum # of channels
Waveform recording
Time-stamps, resolution in seconds
Event Log
GPS time synchronization
n
n
1
n
n
1
0.1
n
n
n
3
n
800
0.1
0.001
0.001
0.001
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
(1)
1
(1)
1
1
(1)
1
(1)
2
(1)
1
2
(1)
1
2
(1)
1
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Communication ports & I/O ( ) = Optional

RS-232/485 ports
RS-485-only ports
Ethernet ports
Infrared optical ports
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET ports
IEC61850 & Comtrade
Modbus RTU Slave on serial, modem or infrared ports
(If equipped with modem or infrared port)
Modbus RTU Master on serial ports
Modbus/TCP on Ethernet ports
DNP 3.0 on serial, modem, infrared ports
Ethernet Gateway: 31 other meters accessible via RS-485
Multiple masters over Ethernet
Email alarming
On-board web server
XML
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Digital status/counter inputs (standard/optional add-ons)
Digital relay outputs (control/pulse)
2
2
n
n
n
n
(42)
(42)
(2)
(2)
(2)
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
(2)
(2)
1 / (6)
1 / (2)
(2)
(2)
1 / (6)
1 / (2)
(4)
(4)
8/8
7
(4)
(4)
8/8
7
(4)
(4)
8/8
7
n
n
n
n
cycle
cycle
cycle
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
1
1
2
2
Setpoints, alarming and control

Setpoints, minimum response time
Math, logic, trig, log, linearization formulas
Single- and multi-condition alarms
Call-out on alarm
and/or, > <
and/or, > <
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
0.5S
0.2S
0.5S
0.5S
0.2S
0.2S
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Revenue metering
1S
POWER
MONITORING
Some features are optional. Refer to datasheets for allowable port configurations. Products meet or exceed the accuracy requirements of the standards listed;
due to form factors, not all ANSI/IEC compliance tests may apply. Some products certified by third-party laboratory.
10
ANSI C12.16 accuracy compliant

ANSI C12.20
EN50160
IEC 60687 0.2S compliant
IEC 60687 accuracy class 0.5S compliant
ANSI class 10 (5A nominal, 10A max)
ANSI class 2, IEC 1/10 (1A nominal, 10A max)
ANSI class 20, IEC 5/20 (5A nominal, 20A max)
MV-90 on serial; Ethernet ports
Time-of-use
Transformer/line loss compensation
10-3
Strong Partners for Industry and Trade
General
Function Overview
PAC3100
PAC3200
PAC4200
>30
> 50
> 200
Number of variables
Number of
metered values
Voltage, current, power, power values,

frequency, power factor (min./max. values)
Basic measurements
THD, unbalance for current and voltage
Phase angle, phase displacement angle,

harmonics for voltage and current
Power flow
Meters (import and export) for

apparent, active, reactive power
Measuring accuracy class IEC 62053

active, reactive power
Additional functions
0.5 S
Max. number setpoints
12
Ethernet interface (Modbus TCP)
10/100 Mbit/sec
10 Mbit/sec
Integrated
Optional
Optional
PROFIBUS DP (V1)
Optional
Optional
Integrated gateway:
Ethernet <-> RS485 (Modbus)
RS485 (Modbus RTU)
Number of digital inputs / digital outputs
W x H x D mm (inches)
96 x 96 x 56
(3.78 x 3.78 x 2.20)
Installation depth:
PAC / PAC with expansion module W x H x D mm (inches)
51
(2.01)
96 x 96 x 56
(3.78 x 3.78 x 2.20)
51
(2.01)
73
(2.87)
96 x 96 x82
(3.78 x 3.78 x 3.23)
77
(3.03)
99
(3.89)
Access to meter data from separate systems via

Ethernet at the same time
None
Customizable displays
Select values to be displayed on meter display
No
No
Yes
Simultaneous protocol
communications
Ability to speak multiple protocols via different

interfaces at the same time.
Masters via Ethernet
0.2 S
Load profile recording with time stamp
Event recording with time stamp
Dimensions
Operating hours counter

Boolean logic for setpoints / inputs
System integration
and communication
Selection data
Power monitoring devices
UAUX
SENTRON PAC3100
with AC/DC wide-voltage power supply unit and screw terminals
100 240 V AC 10 %, 50/60 Hz

110 250 V DC 10 %
7KM3133-0BA00-3AA0
SENTRON PAC3200
95 240 V AC 10 %, 50/60 Hz
110 340 V DC 10 %
7KM2112-0BA00-3AA0
SENTRON PAC3200
with DC extra-low-voltage power supply unit and screw terminals
22 65 V DC 10 %
7KM2111-1BA00-3AA0
SENTRON PAC4200
95 240 V AC 10 %, 50/60 Hz
110 340 V DC 10 %
7KM4212-0BA00-3AA0
Sentron PAC Profinet Module
Profinet I/O Up to 10/100 Mbit/sec
7KM9300-0AE00-0AA0
PAC PROFIBUS DP (for PAC3200, PAC4200)
DPV1: Up to 12 Mbit/sec
7KM9300-0AB00-0AA0
PAC RS485 (for PAC3200, PAC4200)
Modbus RTU up to 38.4 kBd
7KM9300-0AM00-0AA0
Catalogue Number
Expansion modules
POWER
MONITORING
10
Compact and high-performance, the SENTRON PAC meter family

measure power values for electrical systems or individual loads.
They provide important information for assessing the system
state and the power quality. With integrated communication
interface a standard, these power monitoring devices represent
the perfect choice for efficient power management.
The advantages at a glance:
b Easy mounting and commissioning
b Easy operation, four function keys and plain text displays
b Multiple and global applicability (IP65, multi-lingual text
displays, international approvals)
b Easy connection to various systems using integrated or
optional communication interface
b Various monitoring and control functions communicated
through digital inputs and outputs
b Compact design
10-4
The power monitoring devices, SENTRON PAC, show when,

where and how much energy is being used.
SENTRON PAC3100 The cost effective, full function digital power
meter with built-in Modbus RTU communications.
SENTRON PAC3200 The digital power meter for precise power and
energy measurement with built-in Modbus TCP communication
(optional PROFIBUS and Modbus RTU communication).
SENTRON PAC4200 The digital power meter with power quality
monitoring and advanced communication with built-in Modbus
TCP communication (optional PROFIBUS and Modbus
RTU communication).
PAC4200 Power Meter has advanced metering, logging, and I/O
where required. This meter can be served as Modbus Gateway.
9340 / 9360 Power Meter Web-Enabled

Reliable and Precise Monitoring of Electrical Power Systems
The Siemens ACCESS 9340/9360 series power meters combine accurate, 3-phase
energy and power measurement with data logging, power quality analysis, alarm,
and I/O capabilities not typically available in a compact meter. The meters are ideally suited to local and remote monitoring of low or high voltage electrical installations in industrial facilities, commercial buildings, utility networks or critical power
environments. Facility and operations personnel will benefit in energy related costs
while avoiding power quality conditions that can reduce equipment life and productivity.
ACCESS 9340/9360 series meters are easy to install and use, offering integrated
or remote high-visibility displays. A choice of two models and a range of expansion modules help match features to the application and support field-upgrading of
meters as required. Serial and Ethernet communication options enable the meters
to be used within a Siemens power management system or with third-party automation systems.
Precision
Energy Management
Reliability
n ANSI
n Energy
n Economical Measurement
Commercial
Industrial
n Degree of Protection
Front IP52
Rear IP30
n 600V Connected Voltage
n Customizable Displays
n Email Alarms through Ethernet
n Field Addable Modules
n Simple Retrofit Installation
n Integration with Existing Systems
C12.20 Class 0.5s

Energy Measurement
Voltage +/- .1%
Current +/- .1%
Power Factor +/- .5%
Sampling Rate 128/per cycle
9340 Individual Harmonics up to 31st
9360 Individual Harmonics up to 63rd
9360 Sags / Swells Detection
Programmable Math / Logic Function
n Revenue Accurate
Sub Billing
Cost Allocation
Consumption
n 9360 Waveform Capture
n Customizable Webpages
n Min/Max and Event Logs
9340 Storage Capacity 80kb
9360 Storage Capacity 800kb
n Demand Control
n Automation Integration
n Solution for LEED credit
n Monitors Critical Equipment
n Modbus Gateway
n Modbus TCP/RTU
n Industrial Systems
Order information
Meter with remote display

ACCESS 9340 meter with remote display, basic instrumentation, THD, alarming, 80 kb logging
ACCESS 9360 meter with display, THD, alarming, 800 kb logging, configurable waveform
sag, swell detection
Catalogue Number
9340RC
9360RC
Meter without display

ACCESS 9340 meter without display, THD, alarming, 80 kb logging
ACCESS 9360 meter without display, THD, alarming, 800 kb logging, configurable waveform
Catalogue Number
9340TC
9360TC
Remote display, adapter and accessories

ACCESS 9340 display adapter kit
ACCESS 9360 display adapter kit
ACCESS 9340 and 9360 display adapter
ACCESS 9340/60 gasket analog meter round
ACCESS 9340/60 I/O module, 2 relay output, 6 digital input
ACCESS 9340/60 I/O module, 2 relay output, 2 digital input, 2 analog input, 2 analog output
ACCESS 9340/60 ethernet communication card
ACCESS 9340/60 RJ11 extender kit
Catalogue Number
9340-DISPKIT
9360-DISPKIT
9340-60-DISPADA
9340-60-GASKET
9340-60-I/O26
9340-60-I/O2222
9340-60-ETHER
9340-60-RJ11EXT
POWER
MONITORING
Catalogue Number
9340DC
9360DC
10
Meter with integrated display

ACCESS 9340 meter with display, THD, alarming, 80 kb logging
ACCESS 9360 meter with display, THD, alarming, 800 kb logging, configurable waveform
10-5

9510 / 9610 Power Quality Meter
Power Quality Meter with Web Server Technology

These high power quality meters are packed with features such as the ability to determine the location of a disturbance quickly and accurately and determine the direction of
the disturbance relative to the meter. Analysis results are captured in the event log, along
with a time-stamp and confidence level indicating level of certainty. The 9510/9610 base
meter includes 8 digital inputs capable of providing 1 millisecond time stamping and 7
digital outputs. The 9510/9610 meters support numerous protocols including IEC61850
and Comtrade.
Fast sampling rates and extensive memory make this the perfect choice for critical power
systems making analysis of issues possible for correction and prevention. As a data accumulator, the 9510 and 9610 meters can also save money and time by simplifying wiring
and networking. Information from the meter and downstream devices can be displayed
on the large LCD display, on customizable web pages in reports and screens.
Applications for the 9510 and 9610 meters range from critical power applications such as
data centres to industrial, commercial and government power and power quality monitoring systems. The 9510 and 9610 meters are offered in a number of forms from single
meter enclosures integrated into Siemens switchgear, switchboard and panelboards.
Place these high end power quality meters throughout the power distribution system
where critical information is desired. Know what is happening in your facility and get
maximum efficiency.
Precision
Energy Management
Reliability
n ANSI
n Energy
n Economical Measurement
Commercial
Industrial
n 600V Connected Voltage
n Transformer Line Loss
Compensation
n Email Alarms
n Customizable Displays
Event / Alarm Log
Trending
Phasor Diagrams
n Password Protected
n Hardware Lockable
n Supports Copper or Fiber Ethernet
n Integration with Existing Systems
C12.20 Class .2s

Measurement
Voltage +/- .01%
Current +/- .01%
Power Factor +/- .5%
9510 Sampling Rate 256/per cycle
9610 Sampling Rate 512/per cycle
9610 XH Sampling Rate
1024/per cycle
9510 Individual Harmonics
up to 127th
9610 Individual Harmonics
up to 256th
Sags / Swells Detection
Programmable Math /
Logic Function
n Revenue Accurate
Sub Billing
Cost Allocation
n Energy
Consumption
Capture
n Transient Capture 17 s @ 60 Hz
n Disturbance Direction Detection
(DDD)
n Customizable Webpages
n Min/Max and Event Logs
Storage Capacity up to 3.3 years at
15 min intervals
Event Logging up to 20,000
Waveform Captures up to 390
n Demand Control
n Automation Integration
n Monitors Critical Equipment
n Modbus Master / Gateway
n Supports Multiple Protocols
n Supports Multiple Master via
Ethernet
n Waveform
Meter with integral display dimensions
POWER
MONITORING
10
Meter transducer unit (w/o display) dimensions
Front view
10-6
Side view
Front view,
TRAN model
Back View
Side view,
TRAN model
Rear view,
TRAN model

9510 / 9610 Power Quality Meter
Order Information for 95/9610 Power Meters

Catalogue Number
9
Description
Meter base unit and display options
Meter with integrated display and 5MB logging memory
Meter with integrated display and 10MB logging memory
Meter without display (Tran version) and 5MB logging memory
Meter without display (Tran version) and 10MB logging memory
Sampling rate
Standard sampling (256 for 9510) ( 512 for 9610) per cycle maximum
1024 Samples per cycle (9610 only)
Power Supply
85-240 Vac / 110-300 Vdc
20-60 Vdc
Input Voltage
120 to 347 L-N / 208 to 600 L-L V AC
Input Current
1A Nominal (10 Amp full scale)
5A Nominal (20 Amp full scale)
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
Communication Cards
RS232/RS485
(Selectable)
RS485
Infrared
(Note 1)
Modem
(Notes 1 & 2)
10/100
Base-T
10/100
Base-FX
A
C
G
H
J
Auxiliary I/O Cards

None (base meter includes 8 digital in and 7 digital out)
8 Binary Inputs; 4 Analog Inputs 0 to 20 mA and 4 Analog Outputs 0 to 20 mA
8 Binary Inputs; 4 Analog Inputs 0 to 1 mA and 4 Analog Outputs -1 to 1 mA
Tropicalization Option
None
Yes
A
B
C
D
POWER
MONITORING
Note 1 The infrared and modem connections cannot be operated simultaneously. The connection type is configurable.
Note 2 The listed modems are not suitable for European applications. Contact Siemens for special versions.
10
Specials
None
Password protected and hardware lockable (lock enabled/disabled via jumper on comm card)
EN50160 Compliance Monitoring (available on 9610 only)
EN50160 Compliance Monitoring with password protected and hardware lockable (lock enabled/disabled via jumper on comm)
(available on 9610 only)
10-7
Power Distribution Solutions
Branch Circuit Monitoring / Embedded Metering

Space Savings, Convenience, and Reliability with Siemens Branch Circuit Monitoring
In a world where tenant square
footage is a premium in commercial
building designs, the area for electrical
metering is being drastically reduced,
and critical power is being relied upon
in data centres applications, Siemens
Branch Circuit Monitoring provides the
solution.
POWER
MONITORING
10
The Siemens Branch Circuit

Monitoring Solution utilizes the
metering and monitoring technology
integrated into the space saving
panelboards from Siemens. When
compared to the typical external
wall mounted metering installations,
considerable savings in space,
installation costs, and data collection
are realized with the Siemens Branch
Circuit Monitoring Solution.
Siemens Branch Circuit Monitoring /
Embedded Metering Solution
n Saves you money A tenant billing system improves cash
flow, allows immediate pass-on of electric rate increases
and helps building owners control costs. Tenants are confident they are paying their fair share for energy use and are
saving money through energy conservation.
n Fast, low-cost installation The embedded Siemens solution
provides a faster and lower cost installation compared to
other external systems.
n Lower space requirements The embedded panelboard construction design requires no additional wall space to provide
tenant metering. Conventional metering requires an external
metering enclosure and possibly a current transformer transition cabinet.
n Reliable and accurate Many Siemens systems are already
in operation in large commercial and residential buildings
around the country. Their accuracy exceeds utility industry
and government standards like EPact 2005 for revenue
grade meters.
n LEED certification Provides the energy monitoring and logging required to achieve additional LEED points.
n Automated billing With automated billing services the
responsibility to acquire the data, store the data and bill the
tenants is removed from the property management company, thus saving manpower and time.
n Responsive service With remote monitoring, continuous
24/7 monitoring can be done by the property management
company or tenants. The service can also relay consumption
changes to the owners for immediate investigation.
To meet the sub-metering challenges

of designers, contractors and property
management companies, Siemens
offers a proven cost-effective solution
for Branch Circuit Monitoring/Embedded
Metering .This solution combines a fully
integrated metering system factory
installed into the Siemens P series
panel boards and switchboards, which
along with the required local or remote
sub-billing software, provides a Total
sub-metering system.
Designer and contractor benefits include:

n Much smaller footprint versus the traditional socket meter
combo units
n Factory pre-wired less installation time
n Drastically less installation wiring
n No CT installation required in the field
n All equipment fits into the standard Siemens panel design
n Additional utilities like water, air and gas can be easily integrated into the system for a comprehensive monitoring system
n Hardwire and wireless communication options
n All components factory calibrated to meet revenue metering
requirements
n Additional meters can be added in the field
n UL and CSA-us listed
Branch Circuit Monitoring applications include:
n Mixed Tenant & Retail
n Industrial Manufacturing
n Higher Ed
n Strip Malls
n Critical Power
n Goverment
n LEEDS buildings
n Airports
Please Contact Your Siemens Sales Engineer for additional information

regarding Branch Circuit Monitoring / Embedded Metering
10-8
In addition, contractor labor costs for

installation of sub-metering systems
continues to increase. Still, building
owners and property management
companies must face the challenges of
how to cost effectively provide tenant
sub-metering in the constrained spaces.

9510 RTU Data Concentrator
Siemens Advanced Data Recorder and Central Display
The 9510-RTU unit can serve many

uses through out a facility. This low-cost
central display - data recorder can provide HTML web pages and customizable displays to allow easy access to
the data and provide E-mail alarming for
critical information. This multi-functional
unit supports communications to any
Modbus RTU device and digital / analog
I/O, allowing the 9510-RTU to provide
solutions for many different applications.
Features
n Monitor breaker status changes with
1ms resolution
n Collect, log, and scale pulse inputs
from water, air, gas, electricity, or
steam meters
n Act as an Ethernet gateway for serial
devices
n Display Modbus slave information and
make available as a web page
n Log and e-mail down stream Modbus
device date
n Display trip unit data from WL, VL,
Static Trip III and SB-EC devices
n Trigger and email alarms based on setpoint conditions
n Display feeder energy information for
LEED certification
n Engineering service required to setup
the 9510-RTU features
9510-RTU as a master display / web server
COM1
IP Address: XXX.XXX.XX
COM 1: Modbus Master

RS 485
Baud: 19200
RS 485
WL Trip Units (max 16 devices)
Modbus
VL Breakers (max 16 devices)
Catalogue Number
9
Description
Meter base unit and display options

Option #1 Meter with integrated display and 5MB logging memory
Option #2 Meter with integrated display and 10MB logging memory
Option #3 Meter without display, with a 5MB logging memory (TRAN version)
Option #4 Meter without display with a 10MB logging memory (TRAN version)
D
E
T
U
Communications
ION / Modbus RTU - Factory configured for ION
Power Supply
85-240 Vac / Vdc
20-60 Vdc
1
2
No Display Option
Remote transducer option
Communication Cards
RS232/RS485
(Selectable)
RS485
Infrared
(Note 1)
Modem
(Notes 1 & 2)
10/100
Base-T
10/100
Base-FX
A
C
Auxiliary I/O Cards

None (base meter includes 8 digital in and 7 digital out)
8 binary inputs; 4 Analog Inputs 0 to 20 mA and 4 Analog Outputs 0 to 20 mA
8 binary inputs; 4 Analog Inputs 0 to 1 mA and 4 Analog Outputs -1 to 1 mA
G
H
J
K
Z
T
Specials
Standard (password protected, no locking or sealing)
Note 1 The infrared and modem connections cannot be operated simultaneously. The connection type is configurable.
Note 2 The listed modems are not suitable for European applications. Contact Siemens for special versions.
10-9
POWER
MONITORING
Tropicalization Option
None
Yes
10
Z
F
G

WinPM.net
WinPM.net is a complete energy information management solution for

your business allowing you to process, analyze, store and share energy
usage and power quality data across your entire enterprise. It offers
control capabilities, comprehensive power quality and reliability analysis
and can help you reduce energy-related costs. WinPM.net allows you to
manage intelligent metering and protective devices, analyze data, and
decide on new courses of action to help you save money and keep your
business up and running.
Its cutting-edge flexibility and compatibility means you can add one piece
at a time, at your own pace, while still maintaining your original investments. Interface to your existing systems through industry-standard protocols and choose newer components as they become available.
Cost allocation and sub-billing
Track energy-related costs by building,
feeder, or tool. Match virtually any billing structure and use comprehensive
multi-year scheduling and time-of-use
activity profiles.
Load studies and asset management
Trend power usage data to take full
advantage of your electrical distribution
system capacity and avoid over-design.
Create usage profiles so you can distribute loads and avoid demand peak.
Demand and power factor control
Eliminate penalties through automated
power factor correction, load shedding,
or peak shaving.
POWER
MONITORING
10
Equipment monitoring and control

Meter all your utilities including gas,
steam, air and water. Set up alarms
for pending problems, pre-alarm on
impending or imminent conditions.
Interface with other energy management and SCADA systems through
multiple communication channels and
protocols.
Preventative maintenance
Base your maintenance schedule on
actual operating history.
10-10
The WinPM.net software:

n Provides detailed analysis of the power quality and overlays waveforms
to correlate phase-to-phase relationships between voltages and currents and cascading failures
n Pinpoints the sources of transients, harmonics, or sags, whether external or internal to your facility, allowing you to decide on the right corrective actions. By monitoring circuits 24 hours a day, you can develop
strategies to avoid interruptions
n Provides a comprehensive graphics utility as standard to build and edit
any graphical screen whether it is a standard screen or a customized
one. These custom screens can display real-time and historical data,
alarms, status indications, meter, relay and third party equipment information
n Supports Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, ION, XML, OPC, FTP, and PQDIF
compliant systems, so you can unify your diverse operations into one
system. Interface to other energy management software, or include
transducers, PLCs, and RTUs in a WinPM.net network. OPC can
extract values from other software databases then combine these
values with up-to-date readings from WinPM.net to perform real time
calculations
n Offers easy, cost effective and fast system expansion. The system
grows as your needs grow. Add one piece at a time, at your own pace,
within your own budget
Ordering Information:
WinPM.Net is packaged based on the number of devices (power
monitors, circuit breakers, protective relays, etc.) that will be
monitored. Consult factory for pricing and configuration
recommendations.
Email: Access.Support@sea.siemens.com
Toll-free: 1-800-427-2256

Low Voltage Current Transformers
Comprehensive metering grade CT offering spilt-core, flexible and solid core designs
Split core Rectangular Window
Siemens Instrument Grade Current Transformers
(CT) have a split-core construction and provide
a safe 5A secondary output. These split-core
current transformers allow for easy installation,
retrofit, and service. CTs come with 4 leads
(18 gauge). Use on low voltage applications of
600V or less.
Accuracy 0.5%.
200A 300A
A = 3.75 (95mm)
B = 1.51 (38mm)
C = 1.25 (32mm)
D = 1.13 (29mm)
E = 4.20 (107mm)
F = 4.75 (121mm)
400A 800A
A = 4.90 (124mm)
B = 2.89 (73mm)
C = 2.45 (62mm)
D = 1.13 (29mm)
E = 5.57 (141mm)
F = 5.91 (150mm)
1000A 1200A
A = 4.90 (124mm)
B = 5.50 (140mm)
C = 2.45 (62mm)
D = 1.13 (29mm)
E = 8.13 (207mm)
F = 5.92 (150mm)
Amps
100A
200A
300A
400A
600A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
Window
(C x B)
1.25x1.15
1.25x1.51
1.25x1.51
2.45x2.89
2.45x2.89
2.45x2.89
2.45x5.50
2.45x5.50
2.45x5.50
Catalogue Number
PDS-CTSC-011
PDS-CTSC-021
PDS-CTSC-031
PDC-CTSC-042
PDS-CTSC-062
PDS-CTSC-083
PDS-CTSC-013
PDS-CTSC-123
PDS-CTSC-163
2000A
3000A
2.45x5.50
2.75x6.625
PDS-CTSC-200
PDS-CTSC-03R
Split-core Round Window

Split-core round rubber insulated flexible CTs with
12 heavy duty leads (18 AWG) and 5A secondary
output for use on low voltage applications of 600V.
Accuracy is 4% for 200/400A, 3% for 400A, and
2% for 600A and above.
200A 1200A
A = 4.00
B = 1.25
C = 1.50
D = 6.50
3000A 4000A
A = 6.00
B = 1.25
C = 1.50
D = 8.50
Amps
200A
300A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
2000A
3000A
4000A
Window
(A)
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
Catalogue Number
PDS-CTHC-024
PDS-CTHC-034
PDC-CTHC-044
PDS-CTHC-064
PDS-CTHC-084
PDS-CTSC-123
PDS-CTHC-206
PDS-CTHC-306
PDS-CTHC-406
10
POWER
MONITORING
10-11

Low Voltage Current Transformers
Comprehensive metering grade CT offering spilt-core, flexible and solid core designs
Solid-core Round with Round Window
Solid-core Square with Round Window
The small size

solid core Current
Transformer (CT) are
designed for tight
locations and new
installations providing
a safe 5 amp secondary for use on voltage
applications of 600V
or less.
Accuracy is 0.3%.
Siemens Instrument
Grade Current
Transformers (CT) are
designed as solid-core
construction and provide
a safe 5A secondary
output. Solid-core CTs
come with terminals for
attaching leads. Use on
low voltage applications
of 600V or less.
Accuracy is 0.3%.
Example: 100 to 300A size
Solid core Round metering grade, 600V

Catalogue
Number
Primary
Size
SMU-CT-011
100A
1.75 x 2.47, 1 Window
SMU-CT-021
200A
1.75 x 2.47, 1 Window
SMU-CT-025
250A
1.75 x 2.47, 1 Window
SMU-CT-031
SMU-CT-041
SMU-CT-061
SMU-CT-081
SMU-CT-123
300A
400A
600A
800A
1000A
1.75 x 2.47, 1 Window

1.1 x 3.56, 1.56 Window
1.1 x 3.56, 1.56 Window
1.1 x 3.56, 1.56 Window
1.1 x 3.56, 1.56 Window
SMU-CT-02R
2000A
1.15 x 5.73, 3.25 Window
Amps
200:5
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
100:5
200:5
300:5
400:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1600:5
2000:5
3200:5
4000:5
Dimension (A x B x C x D)
1.25 x 4.88 x 2.19 x 4.68
1.25 x 4.88 x 2.19 x 4.68
1.25 x 4.88 x 2.19 x 4.68
1.25 x 5.10 x 3.00 x 5.50
1.25 x 5.10 x 3.00 x 5.50
1.25 x 5.10 x 3.00 x 5.50
1.25 x 5.10 x 3.00 x 5.50
2.25 x 6.31 x 3.00 x 5.82
2.25 x 6.31 x 3.00 x 5.82
2.25 x 6.31 x 3.00 x 5.82
2.25 x 6.31 x 3.00 x 5.82
4.00 x 6.44 x 3.25 x 3.25
4.00 x 6.44 x 3.25 x 3.25
4.00 x 6.44 x 3.25 x 3.25
4.00 x 6.44 x 3.25 x 3.25
4.00 x 6.44 x 3.25 x 3.25
6.50 x 9.88 x 7.00 x 7.00
6.50 x 9.88 x 7.00 x 7.00
Catalogue Number
PDS-CTRC-021
PDS-CTSC-031
PDS-CTRC-041
PDC-CTRC-051
PDS-CTRC-061
PDS-CTRC-081
PDS-CTRC-101
PDS-CTRC-012
PDS-CTRC-022
PDS-CTRC-032
PDS-CTRC-042
PDS-CTRC-084
PDS-CTRC-104
PDS-CTRC-124
PDS-CTRC-164
PDS-CTRC-204
PDS-CTRC-326
PDS-CTRC-426
Shorting Block
All low voltage current transformers should be installed with a
shorting block to allow for easy removal of the metering unit
and to provide a safe method for disconnecting the CT signal.
One shorting block is required per meter. Various size shorting
blocks are available; 4, 6, and 8 pole configurations are available with four slotted shorting screws and cover. Wire size is
18-10 AWG.
Catalogue
Number
IKU4SC
IKU6SC
IKU8SC
IKU12SC
Ckts.
4
6
8
12
10
POWER
MONITORING
D min.
2.88
4.12
5.38
7.88
Typical electrical meter CT and shorting

block installation
This example
shows a common
three phase, three
wire installation
where three CTs
and one shorting
block are used.
10-12
Mounting
L
3.25
4.50
5.75
8.25
D max.
3.00
4.25
5.50
8.00
Power Distribution Solutions

Services
Advantages to You...
Technical experts
Single source supplier
n Available 24/7,
365 days a year
n Reduced total cost of ownership (TCO)
n Avoid unscheduled downtime with
preventive maintenance
n
n
SIEPRO Service Products

Modular SIEPRO service products
enable you to customize a technical service agreement to meet your
organizations maintenance needs
over the entire life cycle of your
installation. Including SIEPRO products in your TSA will provide the following benefits:
Substantial savings versus on
demand purchases
Optimized scaling of your maintenance organization
Assurance that your installation is
operating at maximum performance
and availability
Telephone and Internet
Priority support
When you need help right now, choose
the support coverage that fits your business:
24 hours x 7 days a week
8 hours x 5 days a week
cialists directly access your system

for real-time troubleshooting to provide
maximum uptime.
Technical account liaison
A technical account liaison provides
consulting and guidance on all aspects
of support through familiarity with the
application, your business goals and
processes, and your maintenance and
engineering staff.
In addition to a site visit to assess your
installation and support requirements,
the technical account liaison will conduct monthly reviews with your staff
to ensure you are receiving maximum
payback on your investment.
available for:
System performance checks
Run diagnostics
Analyze power quality
Visual inspections of key system components
Database trim and backup
Training
Operation and maintenance
Siemens training offers a broad range of
educational services, providing quality
and excellence to the automation industry. Targeted product and system training provides the student with practical,
hands-on experience.
Customized on-site training
Field services
Full-time, on-site support from a certified Siemens professional.

Emergency support
Software update service
Purchase emergency service hours in

40 hour increments to ensure the
fastest possible response time.
The software update service enables

you to take advantage of enhancements to the most current software
versions. A site evaluation is conducted to determine necessary upgrade
requirements prior to the Software
Update Service.
Remote service
Remote service provides support and
diagnostics via data line to save you
time and money. Technical support spe-
Maintenance programs
Packaged maintenance programs
10-13
POWER
MONITORING
Embedded engineer
With extended support, you can

request blocks of support hours for
specific projects and tasks. We can
customize this support service to meet
your individual needs.
10
Extended support
On-site training is excellent for large

groups or when individual, one-on-one
instruction is needed. When the trainer
visits your facility, product training will
be conducted on your specific installation. Classroom lectures, and troubleshooting techniques specific to your
installation are covered in detail during
the training session.
Block of hours
Purchase field service hours in 40 hour
increments for preventative, predictive
or emergency services.
Notes
POWER
MONITORING
10
10-14
POWER PRODUCT
Renewable Energy Products

11
Contents

VersiCharge Features
11-2
VersiCharge EVSE and Accessories
11-3
Contact your local Siemens representative for details
RENEWABLE
ENERGY PRODUCTS
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE)

VersiCharge Features and Benefits
RENEWABLE
ENERGY PRODUCTS
11
Load Control Compatible

Inputs
to remotely turn unit on or off

b
Allows
for control by home

b
automation system or utility company
Easy, 2 Button Controls
Indicating
Halo for easy status check

b
Left
Button
stops and restarts

b
charging
b Right Button sets 2, 4, 6, or 8 hour
Charge Delay
b LED Indicators for each
b
b
b
Cord Management
All VersiCharge units come standard
with 20 foot long cord
Enclosure is designed for cord to be
looped when not in use
Built in J-Plug Holster stores and
protects plug from weather, debris,
and damage
Hinged Lid for Speed and Ease

b Hinged cover stays in place for easy
maintenance
b No components in cover mean no risk
of damage

b Ample spacing to work inside device
b One hand open / close
b Cover uses only 4 screws compared
to up to 12 for competitors
b
b
b
Amperage adjustment
Adjustable Amperage
b Allows for changing charge rate based
on customer preference
NEMA 4 Rated Enclosure

Rated for direct water spray by
sprinklers, hoses, or any weather
~50% recycled plastic content
Glass impregnated plastic for strength
and fire safety
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
VC
30
BLK
CA
Product System
VC = Versicharge
Output Amperage
30 = 30 A
Colour
BLK = Black
Feed Location
B = Bottom
R = Rear
Built to meet Canadian requirements
11-2
Contact your local Siemens representative for details

VersiCharge EVSE and Accessories
Hardwired via bottom
fed circuit
240 V Plug External
240 V Plug from behind

(Plug is hidden)
11
Hardwired from behind
RENEWABLE
ENERGY PRODUCTS
Flexible
Install
Options
Technical Data
Electrical
Input voltage
208 240 VAC
Circuit requirement
40 Amperes
Output power
Up to 7.2 kW
Input power connections
Line 1, Line 2, Earth Ground
Mechanical
16.5 (419) x 16.5 (419) x 6.5 (165)
Wall weight - lbs (kg)
21 (9.53)
Enclosure
NEMA 4
Connector
J1772
Safety and Operational

Standards Compliance
UL and cUL listed under file E348556
Operating Temperature
-30 C to +50 C
Storage Temperature
-40 C to +60 C
Operating Humidity
Maximum 95%
non-condensing
EMC compliance
FCC Part 15 Class B
Electric Vehicle Chargers

Catalogue Number Model
Output amperage
Color
Feed Location
VC30BLKRCA
VersiCharge
30
Black
Rear
VC30BLKBCA
VersiCharge
30
Black
Bottom
Accessories
Catalogue Number Model
VCMNTGBRK
Mounting Bracket for VersiCharge
11-3
Notes
RENEWABLE
ENERGY PRODUCTS
11
11-4
12POWER PRODUCT
Switchgear
Contents
Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Secondary Unit Substations
12-2
12-20
12
SWITCHGEAR
Type WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
SWITCHGEAR
12
General
Siemens Type WL low voltage General Information

metal-enclosed switchgear is designed,
constructed and tested to provide
superior power distribution, power
monitoring and control. At the heart
of the Type WL low voltage switchgear
Siemens Type WL low voltage metalenclosed
switchgear is designed,
is the World Class Siemens WL
breaker.
constructed and tested to provide
Siemens Type WL low voltagesuperior power distribution, power
monitoring and control. At the heart
switchgear can be utilized in the
of the Type WL low voltage switchgear
following applications:
is the World Class Siemens WL breaker.
b Industrial
Siemens Type WL low voltage switch Heavy assembly
gear can be utilized in the following
applications:
Semiconductor
Industrial
Petrochemical
Heavy assembly
Semiconductor
Automotive
Petrochemical
Biotech
Automotive
Biotech
Pharmaceutical
Pharmaceutical
b Institutional
Institutional
Water treatment
Water treatment
Airports
Airports
Universities
Medical facilities
Universities
Correctional facilities
Medical facilities
Critical Power
Correctional facilities
Data Processing
Continuous industrial process
b Critical Power
Industry Standards
ANSI C37.13 Low Voltage AC Power
Hospitals
Type WL switchgear with power circuit
Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
Data Processing
Industry Standards
b ANSI
C37.16 Preferred Ratings,
Utility and co-generation
breakers are designed, tested and conANSI C37.16 Preferred Ratings,
Continuous industrial processCommercial
structedwith
in accordance
with:
Type WL switchgear
power
circuit
Related
Requirements,
and
Related Requirements,
and Application
Large office buildingsbreakers are designed,
for Low Voltage for
Power
CircuitVoltage
Breakers Power
Hospitals
UL 1558 tested
Metal-Enclosed
Low
and

Application
Low
Distribution centers
and AC Power Circuit Protectors
Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
b Utility and co-generation Large warehouses constructed in accordance
Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
Switchgear with:
ANSI C37.17 Trip Devices for AC
b Commercial
Product Scope:
b UL 1558 Metal-Enclosed
Low
Protectors
and General Purpose DC Low-Voltage
ANSI C37.20.1 Metal-Enclosed
Power Circuit
Breakers
Equipment ratings Voltage Power Low
Voltage
Power Circuit Breaker
Large office buildings
Circuit
Breaker
b
ANSI
C37.17
Trip Devices for AC
635VAC Maximum
Switchgear
NEMA SG3 - Low Voltage Power
Distribution centres
Switchgear

and
General
1 Phase 3 Wire, 3 Phase 3 Wire,
Circuit Breakers Purpose DC Low-Voltage
ANSI C37.50 Test Procedure for
3 Phase 4 Wire
Large warehouses
Voltage AC Power Circuit
b ANSI C37.20.1 Low
Metal-Enclosed
Power Circuit Breakers
50/60 Hz
Features and modifications required by
Breakers Used in Enclosures
Product Scope:
6000 amp maximum horizontal
bus
Low Voltage
Power
Circuit Breaker
b NEC
NEMA
SG3 - when
Lowthe
Voltage
are incorporated
assemblyPower
ANSI C37.51 Conformance
5000 amp maximum vertical bus
designated
as Service Equipment.
b Equipment ratings
Switchgear
is Circuit
Breakers
Testing of Metal-Enclosed Low
Enclosure options
Power Circuitfor
Breaker
635VAC Maximum
b ANSI C37.50 Voltage
Test AC
Procedure
Features
modifications
required by
Optional CSAand
compliance
and certification
NEMA 1 Indoor
Switchgear Assemblies
is available.
NEMA 3R Outdoor Walk-In
1 Phase 3 Wire, 3 Phase 3 Wire,
Low Voltage ACNEMA
Power
Circuit
NEC
are
incorporated
when
the
SG5 - Power Switchgear
NEMA 3R Outdoor Non Walk-in
3 Phase 4 Wire
Breakers Used Assemblies
in Enclosures
assembly
UL Listing is designated as Service
Underwriters Laboratories
listing mark
Siemens WL breakersbcan
be manually
50/60 Hz
requirements of the
ANSI
C37.51 Applicable
Conformance
Equipment.
(UL) is supplied for each vertical section

or electrically operated, fused or unNational Electric Code (NEC)
6000 amp maximum horizontal
bus
inTesting
of Metal-Enclosed Low
CSA
compliance
and
certification is
provided
all devices within
a vertical
fused
and are available
the following
section are UL Listed or UL Recognized
on Page
5000 amp maximum vertical rating
bus classes. Refer to Tables
Voltage
AC
Power
Circuit
Breaker
available.
WL
drawout
circuit
breakers
are
and suitable for the intended use. All
13 for interrupt and withstand ratings
designed for continuous operation at
b Enclosure options
circuit
breaker drawout elements are
for each rating class. Switchgear Assemblies
UL
Listing
100% of their current rating without
UL Listed.
N-Class
NEMA 1 Indoor (Sprinklerproof

b
NEMA
SG5
Power
Switchgear
Underwriters
Labouratories listing mark
the
need
for
external
heat
sinks,
and
S-Class
Seismic
Qualification
H-Class
available)
Assemblies are in accordance with:
(UL)
is supplied
for each vertical section
Seismic qualification to all major seismic
UL 1066 Lowof
Voltage
AC and
NEMA 3R Outdoor Walk-In L-Class
b Applicable requirements
the
provided
all
devices
construction
standards
(UBC,within
CBC, IBC,a vertical
F-Class
DC Power Circuit Breakers Used
SBC, BOCAare
and UL
IEEE 693)
is available.
NEMA 3R Outdoor Non Walk-in
National Electric
Code (NEC)
section
Listed
or UL Recognized
in Enclosures
Siemens WL breakers can be 2manually
WL drawout circuit breakers are
and suitable for the intended use. All
or electrically operated, fused or unfused
designed for continuous operation at
circuit breaker drawout elements are
and are available in the following rating
100% of their current rating without
UL Listed. cUL Listed as per Standard
classes. Refer to Tables on Page 12-4 for
the need for external heat sinks, and
for Switchgear Assemblies, CSA C22.2
interrupt and withstand ratings for each
are in accordance with:
No.31
rating class.
b UL 1066 Low Voltage AC and
Seismic Qualification
N-Class
DC Power Circuit Breakers Used
Seismic qualification to all major seismic
S-Class
in Enclosures
construction standards (UBC, CBC, IBC,
H-Class
b ANSI C37.13 Low Voltage AC
SBC, BOCA and IEEE 693) is available.
L-Class
Power Circuit Breakers Used in
F-Class
Enclosures
12-2
Type Construction
WL LowDetails
Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

General
12
Assembly Construction
Within the front compartment, each
Siemens Type WL metal-enclosed low
breaker is barriered and compartmented
The Siemens Type WL switchgear
voltage switchgear is constructed of a
from all other breakers in the front
assembly consists of one or more metalrigid internal frame structure that
compartment.
enclosed vertical sections. The end
(2) Bus compartment containing horiGeneral
Standard finish color is light gray ANSI 61.
minimizes
the
possibility
of
damage
This design
alsoand
isolates
sections are
designed
to
allow
zontal
verticalthe
busbreakers in
The standard painting process is a UL
The Siemens Type WL switchgear assembly
installationconsists
of future
and supports
multiple
compartment
from thecontaining
bus
(3) Rear
cable compartment
approved electrostatic
powder
coat paint the front
of sections.
one or more metal-enclosedduring
ver- shipment
Each vertical
section
consists
up to are designed
installation
methods
rolling
or lifting.
the load side runbacks connecting
system
utilizing
a polyester
powder coat compartment.
tical
sections.
The endof
sections
the load side of the breaker to the
paint.are
The
completedinto
finish
to allow
installation
of future
four individually
enclosed
breaker
or sections.Lifting eyes
integrated
thehas a nominal
cablecan
terminals
mils dry
film thickness.
auxiliary compartments which are sized
internal 2frame
design
and ensure the
Optional load
barriers
be supplied to
Each
vertical
section
consists
of
up
to
four
to provide uniform height.
structural integrity of the lifting assembly
isolate the bus compartment from the
enclosed
Assembly
Construction
Withincompartment.
the front compartment,
each breaker
Included inindividually
each assembly
are breaker
variousor auxiliary
is always
adequate
for the weight of the
rear cable
Other optional
compartments which are sized to provide
Siemens Type WL metal-enclosed low
is barriered and compartmented from all
components
such as
circuit breakers,
total structure.
include:
uniform
height.
voltage switchgear is constructed of a barriers
other
breakers in the front compartment.
instrumentation and control equipment,
If requested
in advance,
switchgear
depth
section
barriersthe
tobreakers
isolate in
rigid internal
framethe
structure
that mini- b FullThis
design
also isolates
transformers,
relays,
bus
can the
be shipped
the unit
from the adjacent

Included
in three-phase
each assembly
are various structure
mizes
possibilitysoofthat
damage
during one
thesection
front compartment
from the
bus
work, and all
internal wiring,
ontoand
its back
during
components
such asconnectors,
circuit breakers, can be tilted
shipment
supports
multiple instal- section(s).
compartment.
instrumentation
and control equipment,
lation
methods
rolling
or lifting.
and other supporting
equipment.
installation.
This
is an option
that
must Lifting b Barriers to isolate the incoming
transformers,
three-phase
eyes are
integrated
into the internal frame line
Optional
barriers can to
be the
supplied
In accordance
with ANSIrelays,
C37.20.1,
the bus be specified
at order
entry.
side connections
mainto isolate
work, and all internal
wiring,
design and
ensure
the structural
integrity breaker(s)
the bus compartment
rear
cable
maximum temperature
for parts
that connectors,
Each complete
vertical
section
contains
from the loadfrom
sidethe
bus
and

and other supporting equipment.
of the lifting assembly is always adequate
compartment. Other optional barriers
are handled is 50C. The main bus
three compartments.

connections
in
the
switchgear
section.

for the weight of the total structure.
include: (1) Full depth section barriers to
maximum temperature
65C
(Line/load
barriers
are
provided
as a secIn accordance rise
withisANSI
C37.20.1, theb Front compartment containing
isolate one
section
from
the adjacent
above 40Cmaximum
ambient.temperature
The temperature
and/or auxiliary
equipment
for to
service
for parts that breakers
If requested
in advance,
the switchgear standard
tion(s). feature
(2) Barriers
isolate
the incoming
rise of the are
air surrounding
theThe
cable
b Bus compartment
containing
main breakers.)
handled is 50C.
main bus maxistructure can be
shipped so
that the unit equipment
line side connections
to the main breaker(s)
temperature
is 65C above 40C
can be
tilted
onto its
back during instalfrom the load side bus and connections
connectionmum
points
is limited rise
to 45C
horizontal
and
vertical
bus
The temperature rise of the air
lation.compartment
This is an optioncontaining
that must be
in the switchgear section. (Line/load barriers
above 40Cambient.
ambient.
b Rear cable
surrounding the cable connection points
specified
at order entry.
are provided as a standard feature for
Finish
the load
side runbacks
connecting
is limited to 45C above 40C ambient.
service equipment main breakers.)
During construction, the structural steel
the load side of the breaker to the
Each complete vertical section contains
parts, panels,
and
compartments
are
all

load
cable
terminals
three compartments.
Finish
prepared for
painting
by a five-stage
(1) Front compartment conDuring
construction,
the structural steel
1
wash system.
taining breakers and/or
parts, panels, and compartments are all
auxiliary equipment
prepared
forispainting
by aANSI
five-stage
Standard finish
colour
light grey
2
wash system.
61.
The standard painting process is a UL
approved electrostatic powder coat paint
system utilizing
a polyester powder coat
1 Breaker Hoist and Track
paint. The completed
has aStructure
3
2 Ventilationfinish
and Lifting
6
nominal 2 mils
dry film
3 Quarter
Turnthickness.
Door Latch
SWITCHGEAR
Secondary Disconnect Access Door

Channel Sill Base (Optional)
1 Breaker 6Hoist
andCompartment
Track
Breaker
7 Auxiliary
2 Ventilation
and Lifting
Structure
Instrument
Compartment
8 Secondary
Disconnect
3 Quarter Turn
Door Latch
9 Breaker
Cradle (Guide
Frame)
4 Secondary
Disconnect
Access
Door
10 Breaker Drawout Rail
5 Channel Sill Base (Optional)
11 TOC Switch Operator
4
6 Breaker Compartment
7 Auxiliary Instrument Compartment
11
10
12-3
Low Voltage Switchgear
Specifications
Features &Benefits
Control and communication termination area located in front

of equipment and segregated from power cable termination
area that is located in rear of equipment
n Front accessible vertical and horizontal wiring channels
n No heat sinks on breaker or bus
n No front-breaker door ventilation
n 100kA bus bracing standard - 150kA and 200kA optional
n Insulated/isolated bus through 6000 amps
n Three levels of horizontal bus through 5000 amps
n Modular design for maximum configuration flexibility
n Breaker racking handle integral to the breaker
n All breaker settings and displays clearly visible with breaker
door closed
Field installable drop in place accessories and trip units

Same accessories work for entire breaker line
n ModBus, ProfiBus and Ethernet communication
n Field installable ground fault protection and zone selective
interlock
n Rogowski coil current sensors provide high metering accuracy
and prevent saturation at high current levels
n Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry (DAS) and EIP (Extended
Instantaneous Protection) are patent pending features from
Siemens that greatly reduce Arc Flash Energy
n Optional arc resistant metal-enclosed low voltage
switchgear designed and tested to provide an additional
degree of protection for personnel performing normal
operating duties in proximity to the energized equipment.
SWITCHGEAR
12
n
n
Breaker Ratings
Frame Rating
Rating Designation
Frame Size II
1600
800
2000
3200
N S H L F N S H L F S H L F S H L

254VAC
50 65 85 100 200
50 65 85 100
200 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
508VAC 50
65
85
100 200 50
65
85
100 200
65
85 100 200
65
85 100

635VAC
50 65 65 85 200
50 65 65 85 200 65 65 85 200 65 65 85
Current lcw
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
0.5s 50 65 65 85 20 50 65 65 85 20 65 65 85 20 65 65 85
285-
Protection
508VAC
50 65 85 100 200
50 65 85 100
200 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kA RMS - 0% to 20+%) 635VAC 50
65
65
85
200
50
65
65
85
200
65
65
85
200
65
65
85
Close & Latch Ratings

(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz 50 65 65 85 75 50 65 65 85 75 65 65 85 75 65 65 85
Rating Plug Range
200A to 800A
200A to 1600A
200A to 2000A
200A to 3200A
Endurance Rating
(switching operations
Mech.
with maintenance) Elec.
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
15,000
Frame Size III

Frame Rating
Rating Designation
3200
4000
5000
M F H L M F H L M F

254VAC
150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz
508VAC 150
200
85
100
150
200
85
100
150
200

635VAC
85 200 85 85 85 200 85 85 85 200
Current lcw
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
0.5s
100
40
85
100b 100 40
85 100b 100
40
Extended Instantaneous 254VAC

Protection
508VAC
150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
(kA RMS - 0% to 20+%) 635VAC
85
200
85
85
85
200
85
85
85
(kA RMS) 50/60 Hz
100
40
85
Rating Plug Range
800A to 3200A
800A to 4000A
800A to 5000A
10,000
10,000
10,000
200
Close & Latch Ratings

100b 100b 40
85 100b 100
40
Endurance Rating
(switching operations
Mech.
with maintenance)a Elec. 10,000
10,000
a Maintenance
means: Replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions).
Main contacts in breakers with Rating Designation M can only be replaced by Siemens
personnel.
12-4
b Do
10,000
not apply breaker at 635V AC on a system with available fault current > 85kA RMS.
Vertical bus ratings available are 1600,

2000, 3200, 4000 and 5000 amperes
continuous current. Horizontal bus
ratings available are 1600, 2000, 3200,
4000, 5000 and 6000 amperes. A neutral
bus is furnished when specified, and can
be rated 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000, 5000 or
6000 amperes continuous current.
For devices not having screw-type

terminals, pressure terminals are used.
Circuit Breaker Compartments

Typical circuit breaker compartments
include primary disconnects, drawout
rails, secondary disconnects, vertical
wireway, horizontal wireway and, if
applicable, TOC switch operator, MOC
switch operator and associated interlocks. Drawout rails allow the breaker
to be withdrawn from the compartment
without additional extensions or adapters.
Up to six (2 sets of three) current
transformers for metering or relaying can
be mounted in each compartment.
Insulation
The insulation used is a UL recognized
thermoset material that has excellent
heat resistance, flame retardance,
dimensional stability and low moisture
absorption.
1
A standard copper ground bus extends

through all sections. Cable lugs are
mounted to the ground bus in each
section.
Standard short-circuit withstand (4 cycle)
and short-time withstand (60 cycle) bus
bracing is 100,000 amperes. Higher shortcircuit withstand bus bracings (150kA and
200kA) are available.
Load side runbacks for feeder circuits
are copper construction, are insulated
with sleeve tubing in the main bus area,
and are supported by high-strength
bus bracing.
5
1
2
3
4
TOC Switch Operator

Breaker Compartment Rear Barrier
Secondary Disconnect
Vertical Wireway
Interference Interlock
Drawout Rails
7 Primary Disconnect
5
Circuit Breaker Cell Interior
12-5
SWITCHGEAR
The main three phase horizontal bus

is arranged vertically one phase above
the other with edge-to-edge alignment
to provide high, short circuit strength.
Insulated main bus with isolated vertical
bus is optional.
Control and Communication Wiring

Standard control and communication
wiring is #14 AWG extra-flexible, stranded
copper type SIS. Terminations are made
with compression-type, insulated
terminals. Control and communication
wiring is installed and accessed from the
front of the switchgear structure. Each
breaker compartment has a dedicated
horizontal and vertical wireway.
12
Main and Ground Bus

The standard main bus is silver-plated
copper. Tin-plated copper bus is optionally available. Vertical and horizontal
bus bar utilize a channel shape design
to maximize short circuit withstand
capability and minimize heat rise. All
bus joints include Grade 5 bolts and
conical spring washers. Provisions
for future extension of the main bus
include plated joints and high tensile
strength steel hardware.
SWITCHGEAR
12
Options
Siemens High Resistance Grounding
System
(1) The HRG section can be 22" or 32"
wide. The HRG instrument
compartment is 45" high and either
19" or 24" deep depending on
whether the circuit breakers are fused.
The HRG instrument compartment
will house all of the high resistance
grounding system components either
on the door or in the device bucket
except for the grounding resistors.
(2) The grounding resistor assembly will
mount in the rear cable compartment
of the switchgear on the runback
support posts. It will typically mount
behind the HRG instrument
compartment where it cannot
interfere with feeder breaker
runbacks.
(3) In a typical Siemens HRG application
with a close coupled main breaker
section, a general purpose instrument
compartment takes up the A
compartment, the main breaker goes
in the B compartment and the HRG
instrument compartment takes up the
C & D compartments. An alternate
HRG main breaker section can have
the HRG instrument compartment in
the A & B compartments, main
breaker in the C compartment and a
general instrument compartment in
the D compartment.
Switchgear Mounted Hoist
The integrally mounted hoist, standard
on walk-in outdoor and optional on
indoor switchgear enclosures, travels
along rails on top of the switchgear to
assist in breaker handling.
TOC and MOC Switches
The Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch
provides interlocking control or remote
indication of the breaker racking
position. The cubicle mounted auxiliary
switch or Mechanism Operated Cell
(MOC) switch provides interlocking
control or remote indication based on
the main contact position (open or
closed).
Shutters
These provide protection against accidental contact with primary disconnects
in a compartment when the breaker is
removed. Shutters automatically close
when the breaker is withdrawn and are
padlockable and field installable.
Key Interlock
This provides a mechanical means for
operating circuit breakers and other
devices only when predescribed conditions are met.
12-6
Test Set
A portable breaker test set is available as
an option and supports testing the full
range of functions and protective
settings supplied with the breaker trip
unit.
Metering and Auxiliary Compartments
Compartments are available to house
devices such as voltage transformers,
metering, control power transformers,
and supervisory devices.
Instrument and Control Transformers
Voltage transformers and control power
transformers are mounted in auxiliary
compartments. These transformers
are protected by primary pull-out type
current-limiting fuses and secondary
fuses. Current transformers are
normally mounted on the compartment
primary disconnect studs where they
are readily accessible.
Miscellaneous
n Each switchgear lineup includes a
breaker lifting device that is adjustable for use with Size II and Size III
breakers
n An optional portable breaker hoist
is available if the integrated breaker
hoist and track is not specified
n A test cabinet is also available as an
option. The test cabinet is wall mounted
necessary equipment for testing
electrically-operated breakers that
have been removed from the breaker
compartment. The test cabinet doesnt
include or replace a breaker trip unit
tester
n 4" high formed steel channel sills
are available for indoor switchgear
enclosures
Outdoor Switchgear
Type WL switchgear is available in two
outdoor (NEMA 3R) enclosures. Walk-in
and non walk-in versions are available
to meet your particular application.
General
without exposure to the elements.
An access door equipped with an
emergency bar release is located at
each end of the aisle.
The following features are standard
with walk-in outdoor enclosures.
(1) Space heaters in breaker compart-
ment and bus compartment.
(2) Screens and filters for exterior
door ventilation louvers.
(3) Incandescent lighting receptacle
with three-way switch at each aisle
access door.
(4) Duplex receptacle with ground fault
protection at each aisle access door.
(5) Loadcentre for power distribution
to lights, receptacles, switches and
heaters.
For non walk-in outdoor enclosures,
space heaters and screens/filters for
ventilation louvering are standard
with lighting, receptacles, switches
and loadcentres offered as options.
Side View
For protection from snow, rain and

other foreign matter, both outdoor
enclosures rest on a six-inch high,
formed steel base which provides
rigid support and a tight bottom
seal. A heavy duty protective undercoating is applied to the underside
of all outdoor enclosures to protect
against moisture and corrosion.
Shielded ventilation housings permit
proper air circulation while excluding
dirt and foreign matter.
In the walk-in outdoor enclosure a
lighted, unobstructed service aisle is
provided at the front of the switchgear
allowing inspection and maintenance
Rear View

Indoor Front Elevation View
Dimensions
Indoor Floor Plan and Cable Space Details
1.25
(32)
typ.
4.42 (112)
.75 (19) typ.
.86
(22)
12
1.50
(38)
.75 (19) typ.
.86
(22)
4.82
(122)
SWITCHGEAR
5.86
(149) 7.88
(200)
4.00
(102)
Transformer
Throat
Liquid filled &
outdoor dry type
transformers only
CL
Maximum available
space in top or bottom
of unit for customer's
power cables
1.00 End Trim Panel (typ.)

(25) Required on left and
right end of switchgear
lineup adds 2
to total lineup width
(4) Holes for

.50 (12mm)
Grade 5
anchor bolts
Space for
secondary
leads from
above
14.9
(378)
4.00
(102)
5.00
(127)
2.12
(54)
3.00 (76)
2.00 (51)
Space for
secondary
leads from
below
7.00
(179)
4.40 (112)
2.37 (60)
1.00 (25)
2.00 (51)

1.00 (25)
W
W = 22 (559) or 32 (813)

Equipment Depth Direction of Cables
60" Non-Fused with

(N, S, H or L-Rating Breakers)
OR
65" Fused with (F-Rating Breakers)
70" Non-fused with
OR
75" Fused with (F-Rating Breakers)
Below
21.50 (546) 12
13.88 (353)
32.59 (828)
Above
21.25 (540) 1
18.88 (480)
37.59 (955)
Below
31.50 (800) 1 2
13.88 (353)
32.59 (828)
Above
31.25 (794) 1
18.88 (480)
37.59 (955)
Below
41.50 (1054) 1 2
80" Non-fused with
13.88 (353)
32.59 (828)
Above
41.25
(1048) 1

80" Fused with
Below
36.50 (927) 1 2

18.88 (480)
37.59 (955)
(F-Rating Breakers)
Above
36.25 (921) 1
Note: Dimensions shown in inches and (mm).

1 Reduce by 7.88" if upper neutral is present with cables above or if a lower neutral is present with cables below.
2 Reduce by 4.00" if an 800-3200A breaker is located in the bottom compartment.
Reductions per notes 1 & 2 are additive. Example: cables below + lower neutral + 2000A breaker in bottom compartment = B-11.88.
3 Reduce cable space by 4.00" x 4.82" if Neutral Riser is present. (Consult Factory).
4 4.10 (104) if W=22; 4.60 (117) if W=32.
12-7
SWITCHGEAR
12

General Notes:
n Any 22" wide section can be 32" wide if more
conduit working room is needed
n For bus duct connections if incoming is top,
Compartment A must be blank/instrument, if
incoming is bottom, Compartment D must be
blank/instrument
n Bused transition section is 22" wide
n For close coupled transformer connections,
Compartment A must be blank/instrument
n Utility metering is always in a separate
section. Section width is dependent on utility
Note 1 If a 4000 amp feeder breaker is
installed in Compartment C, Compartment D
must be a Blank or Instrument Compartment.
Note 2 If a 4000 amp breaker is installed in
Compartment B, Compartment A must be a
Blank or Instrument Compartment.
Note 3 Contact Sales for application guidelines
related to this design.
Compartment B, the middle level through bus is
not available.
Compartment D, the lower level through bus is
not available.
Note 6 If incoming is bottom, feeder breakers
can mount in compartments A and/or B.
Note 7 If a 3200 amp breaker is installed
in Compartment B, Feeder Breaker in
Compartment A is limited to 1600 amp.
Note 8 If a 3200 amp breaker is in
Compartment BC, the maximum breaker in
Compartment A is 1600 amp and if a 4000 amp
breaker is in Compartment BC, the maximum
breaker in Compartment A is 800 amp.
Section
Compartment
Arrangement
MainSections Non-Fused Breakers
MainSections Fused Breakers
Switchgear Depth Dimensional Information

(Dimensions below are for internal frames not
total structure depth)
n Non-fused indoor 60" standard, 70" and 80"
optional
n Fused indoor 65" standard, 75" and 80"
optional
n Non-fused non-walk-in outdoor 60" standard
and 75" optional
n Fused non-walk-in outdoor 65" standard and
75" optional
n Non-fused walk-in outdoor 60" standard and
75" optional
n Fused walk-in outdoor 65" standard and 75"
optional
n Walk-in outdoor aisle is 42" deep
n Sections with cable connected main, tie and/or
feeder breakers that are 3200 amp or greater
must be minimum depth of 70" for unfused
breakers and 75" for fused breakers.
12-8
Selection

TieSections Non-Fused Breakers
Selection
TieSections Fused Breakers
12
SWITCHGEAR
Main and TieSections Non-Fused Breakers
FeederSections Non-Fused Breakers
Main and TieSections Fused Breakers
Feeder Sections Fused Breakers
12-9

Type WL Circuit Breakers
SWITCHGEAR
12
Rogowski Coil CT Technology

A Rogowski coil is an air-core toroidal
coil placed round the conductor. The
alternating magnetic field produced by
the current induces a voltage in the coil
which is proportional to the rate of
change of current.
The direct output from the coil is given
by Vout=M dI/dt Where M is the mutual
inductance of the coil and dI/dt is the
rate of change of current. To complete
the transducer the voltage is integrated
electronically so that the output from the
integrator is a voltage that accurately
reproduces the current waveform.
Coil and Integrator:

The combination of a coil and an
integrator provides an exceptionally
versatile current-measuring system
which can be designed to accommodate
a vast range of frequencies, current
levels and conductor sizes. The output is
independent of frequency, has an
accurate phase response and can
measure complex current waveforms
and transients.
Linearity:
One of the most important properties of
a Rogowski coil measuring system is
that it is inherently linear. The coil
contains no saturable components and
the output increases linearly in
proportion to current right up to the
operating limit determined by voltage
breakdown. The integrator is also
inherently linear up to the point where
the electronics saturates. Linearity
makes Rogowski coils easy to calibrate
12-10
because a transducer can be calibrated

at any convenient current level and the
calibration will be accurate for all
currents including very large ones. Also,
because of their linearity, the
transducers have a very wide dynamic
range and an excellent transient
response.
Coil Winding
With a Rogowski coil it is important to
ensure that the winding is as uniform as
possible. A non-uniform winding makes
the coil susceptible to magnetic pickup
from adjacent conductors or other
sources of magnetic fields. We have
developed special machines for making
accurate windings. Coils come in a range
of styles including rigid and flexible coils
but we have developed several other
variations to meet specific needs.
Output Indication
The output from the integrator can be
used with any form of electronic
indicating device that has an input
impedance greater than about 10kohm
such as a voltmeter, oscilloscope,
transient recorder or protection system.
Split Coils
Some designs of coil can be fitted on
the conductor without the need to
disconnect the conductor. Most flexible
coils can be fitted this way and it is also
possible to build split rigid coils. Split
iron-cored devices such as current
transformers are subject to appreciable
amplitude and phase errors if the halves
are misaligned by even a small amount.
Rogowski coils do not have this
problem. Misalignment of the joining
faces of a split Rogowski coil has only a
small effect on the amplitude and no
effect on the phase.
Electronic Trip Unit

Selection Criteria for WL Circuit
Breakers
The basic criteria for selecting circuit
breakers is:
Maximum Available Short Circuit at the
installation point. This value determines
the short circuit current interrupting
General
rating or short circuit current withstand
rating of the circuit breaker.
Rated Current In which is to flow
through the respective circuit breaker
continuously. This value may not be
greater than the maximum rated current
of the circuit breaker. The rated current
for the WL is determined by the rating
plug, up to the maximum frame rating.
Ambient Temperature of the circuit
breaker. This is usually the temperature
inside the cubicle.
Design of the circuit breaker.
Protective Functions of the circuit
breaker.These are determined by the
selection of the appropriate trip unit.
Dynamic Arc-Flash Sentry (Patent
Pending) A unique feature of the WL
trip unit allows the system designer to
achieve lower levels of arc flash energy
and delayed tripping for selective trip
coordination purposes.
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug is a replaceable module
that enables users to reduce the rated
device current for optimum adaptation to
the system; e.g., during startup of a plant
section. The Rating Plug should be
selected so that it corresponds to the
rated current of the system.
Switch-selectable I2t or I4t Characteristic
Curve Improved Overload Protection.
The best possible protection is assured
when all protective devices in the system
are optimally coordinated. To achieve
optimum selectivity and coordination, the
long-time characteristic can be switched
between l2t and l4t, to improve
coordination with fuses or inverse relays.
Switchable Parameter Sets
To allow the protection to adapt to
changes in system needs such as
switching between utility and generator
feeds, WL Circuit Breakers support ETUs
with two independent parameter sets.
Switching between the parameter sets
occurs in less than 100 ms and can be
done remotely or via a contact input to an
optional CubicleBUS module.

Selection
Trip Unit Functions
12
SWITCHGEAR
Basic Protective Functions

ETU745 ETU748 ETU776
Long-time overcurrent protection
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Neutral protection
Ground fault protection
L
S
I
N
G
--
--
U
U
Additional Functions
Selectable neutral protection
Defeatable short-time delay
Defeatable instantaneous protection
Selectable thermal memory
Zone selective interlocking
Selectable I2t or fixed short-time delay
Adjustable instantaneous pick-up
Selectable I2t or I4t long-time delay
Adjustable short-time delay and pick-up
Selectable and adjustable neutral protection
Dual protective setting capability (DAS)*
Extended instantaneous protection
--
--
--
U
U
U
U
U
U
Parameterization and Displays

Parameterization by rotary switches (10 steps)
Parameterization by communication (absolute values)
Parameterization by menu/keypad (absolute values)
Remote parameterization of the basic functions
Remote parameterization of the additional functions
Alphanumeric LCD
Graphical LCD
--
--
--
--
--
Metering Function
Metering function Plus

-U
---
--
--
-
---
U
U
-U
Communication
U
CubicleBUS
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP

Communication via the MODBUS

Communication via the Ethernet (BDA)

standard
-- not available
optional
* DAS- Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry, Siemens patent pending protective feature
1 Fixed short-time delay only
12-11

General
WL Communication Overview
Connection Diagram
SWITCHGEAR
12
1 Breaker Data Adapter

(BDA)
13
13
2 Browser-capable input
WinPM.Net
Server
and output device

(e.g. notebook)
WinPM.Net
Web Client
Ethernet / Internet / Intranet
3 WL Circuit Breaker
4 COM 16 MODBUS
Ethernet
module or COM 15
PROFIBUSmodule
5 Breaker Status Sensor

(BSS)
6 Electronic Trip Unit
9510 Meter*
(Ethernet
Gateway)
MODBUS Master
PLC or Supervisory
Software
Optional
7 Metering function PLUS

8 Zone Selective
MODBUS
8
10
11
12
Interlocking (ZSI) module
9 Digital output module

with relay or optocoupler
outputs
15
BDA Plus*
14
4
2
10 Digital output module
BDA
with relay or optocoupler

outputs, remotely
configurable
5
6
7
WL Circuit Breaker
with COM 16
* The Siemens BDA Plus or meters, 9330, 9350, 95/9610 can

be used as a gateway to enable Ethernet communication
to the WL Circuit Breaker.
11 Analog output module

12 Digital input module
13 WinPM.Net on PC
14 PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7)
15 BDA Plus
Features
n Industry standard MODBUS or
PROFIBUS communication available on
all WL breakers from 200A to 5000A
n The high modularity of the WL Circuit
Breakers and accessories allows
simple retrofitting of all communication
components
n The ability to connect additional input
and output modules to the breakerinternal CubicleBUS of the WL opens
up a range of opportunities to reduce
secondary device count and wiring and
to increase functionality implemented
in switchgear
n Innovative software products for local
configuration, operation, monitoring
and diagnostics of WL Circuit Breakers
using MODBUS, PROFIBUS or via
Ethernet/Intranet/Internet
12-12
Complete integration of WL Circuit

Breakers in all Totally Integrated Power
and Totally Integrated Automation
Solutions
Metering Function/Metering
Function PLUS
The integrated metering function can
be installed on all ETU745, ETU748,
and ETU776 trip units and provides
a viable alternative to external multifunction measuring instruments in
many applications.
Metering Function can measure the
following:
n Currents
n Voltages
n Power
n Energy
n Power Factor
n Frequency
n
All metered quantities are delivered as

real time values with min/max
recording. The metering module also
contains additional alarm setpoint and
protective relay functions (e.g. trip on
overfrequency or undervoltage, and
alarm on reverse power or over ampere
demand).
The Metering Function PLUS has
two additional wave form buffers and
supports harmonic analysis. With the
two independent wave form buffers,
the current and voltage waveforms
can be recorded, and allows detailed
diagnostic triggering on events.
If the Metering Function /Metering
Function PLUS is ordered together with
the circuit breaker, it is already installed
and ready for operation. As a retrofit
part, the metering function is simply
attached to the ETU and connected to
the CubicleBUS.
TPS3 Family of Hardwired Surge Protective Devices
Product Overview
TPS3 Integral or Internally Mounted SPDs for Switchgear
12
Siemens Integral TPS3 06 and L6 are UL 1449 3rd Edition SPDs that can be factory
installed in Siemens WL low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear, utilizing optimal
electrical system connections to minimize impedance losses. This results in the
some of the industrys best installed Voltage Protection Ratings. These SPDs
share the following features:
SWITCHGEAR
TPS3 Features
n UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283
n UL Type 1 (consult factory) or Type 4
tested as Type 1 or 2 SPDs
n 20 kA In (most models)
n 200 kA SCCR (most models)
n UL96A Lightning Protection Master Label
Compliant
n 100 500 kA surge current capacity per
phase
n EMI/RFI filtering or Sine Wave tracking
n Monitoring LEDs, Audible Alarm, Dry
Contacts, and Ground Integrity Monitoring
Diagnostics
TPS3 06
Catalogue #
TPS3
Voltage Code
A = 120/240 V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240 V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208 V, 3, 4W
D = 240 V, 3, 3W
E = 277/480 V, 3, 4W
F = 480 V, 3, 3W
G = 600 V, 3, 3W
K = 380/220 V, 3, 4W
L = 600/347 V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230 V, 3, 4W
06
Surge Current (kA)

10 = 100 kA per phase
X= Surge counter
-- Example: TPS3C0640X0 = SPD for a 208/120 V low voltage switchgear with a

surge current capacity of 400 kA per phase and a surge counter option
-- When an option is not selected, include a zero (0) in the field
True 10 Mode SPD

Catalogue #
TPS3
Voltage Code
A = 120/240 V, 1, 3W
B = 120/240 V, 3, 4W
C = 120/208 V, 3, 4W
E = 277/480 V, 3, 4W
K = 380/220 V, 3, 4W
S = 400/230 V, 3, 4W
L6
Surge Current (kA)

X= Surge counter
-- Example: TPS3CL645XO = 10 mode SPD for a 208/120 V low voltage switchgear

with a surge current capacity of 450 kA per phase and a surge counter option
Please consult the factory for applications

requiring SPDs with larger per phase
surge current capacities and/or 10-mode
style configurations.
12-13

Arc Flash Solutions
General
Arc Resistant Switchgear

Insulated and isolated bus
Separation barriers and top venting
n Breaker shutters
n
SWITCHGEAR
12
Arc resistant metal-enclosed low voltage switchgear is an

optional product offering that contains and channels internal
arcing fault energy. This new switchgear construction provides
an additional degree of protection to the personnel performing
normal operating duties in close proximity to the equipment
while the equipment is operating under normal conditions. In
each of the descriptions below, additional design features are
indicated, all of which aid in directing faults upward away from
personnel or reduce the chances of a fault by insulating and
isolating live parts.
Front view
Door gaskets and sealing trims
Type 2B accessibility rating

allows auxiliary/control
compartment door to be open
and still maintain arc resistant
rating
Extra hinges
Thumb screw latches added
One piece breaker door
Enhanced sill channel with
internal plenum for arc venting
Breaker sealing frame

maintains arc resistant rating
with breaker in Connect, Test
or Disconnect position.
Rear view
Pressure release vent in rear top cover

Extra bolts and pressure dams in rear
covers/doors
Rear vent covers extended for vent flaps
Extra bolts on
end trim sheets
12-14

Arc Flash Solutions
General
GRID
GRID
BUS 1
BUS 1
Dynamic Arc Sentry
TX-4
TX-4
or just by being in proximity to energized equipment is an

effective way to minimize arc flash dangers. If one is concerned about the effects of temporarily inhibiting selectivity,
then rest assured that with the ETU 776 single step changes
are possible giving engineers the ability to clear faults faster
with minimum effect on coordination. In the example below
the effects of the DAS system may be seen.
One of the trip units available for the Siemens WL Family of

breakers is the ETU 776. It offers dual parameter sets that
enable the trip unit to automatically lower the instantaneous
setting and thereby lower the available energy in a fault condition. Commonly referred to as maintenance mode, making a
breaker trip faster while engaged in any form of maintenance
GEN 1
GEN 1
BUS 3
Vs:480 V
BUS 2
BUS 3
Vs:480 V
BUS 2
WL
800
600
SWGR 1
PPE: 0
AHE: 0.74 cal/cm^2(100%)
AFB: 17.38 in
WD: 24 in
1600
1600
WL
800
600
WL
800
WL
800
WL
WL
800
800
600
WL
1600
1600
WL
800
600
WL
800
600
WL
800
WL
800
WL
800
1000
WL
800
600
WL
PANEL 2
PANEL 3
POWER PANEL 1
POWER PANEL 2
POWER PANEL 3
PANEL 1
PANEL 3
PANEL 2
POWER PANEL 1
POWER PANEL 2
POWER PANEL 3
Time in Seconds
10
100
PANEL 1
DLA: 1600
Man.: SIEMENS
Type: WLL
Size: WLL 1600A
Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Max A/Plug/Setting: 1600 / 1600
SWGR 1
.1
DLA: 1600
Man.: SIEMENS
Type: WLL
Size: WLL 800A
Trip: ETU 776 LSIG
Max A/Plug/Setting: 800 / 800
.01
PANEL 1
.5
480 Volt Phase
10
100
Current in Amperes X 100
1000
Time-Current Characteristic Curves
10000
02-15-2010
TCC 2
13:48:48
Parameter Set B
C:\EDSA2005\Projects\DAS SWGR whitepaper.PDC
Parameter set "A"
WL Breaker with ETU 776
Parameter set "B"
Dual Parameter
sets enable
maintenance
mode - can be
set remotely via
software or
automatically via
digital input.
12-15
SWITCHGEAR
SWGR 1
PPE: 3
AHE: 10.6 cal/cm^2(100%)
AFB: 105.68 in
WD: 24 in
12
Example 1
SWITCHGEAR
12
Arc Flash Solutions
Under normal conditions, the switchgears calculated arc flash

energy will require PPE level 3 protection for anyone within
the arc flash boundary. Incorporating the features built into
the DAS system, and using the ETU776 trip unit, the system
changes to parameter set B. In the second figure the
instantaneous has been changed to a lower setting and the
calculation shows a reduction of arc flash energy. The
General
resultant PPE level has been reduced to 0.
Below is another example of the benefit of the DAS, or even
manual switching, of breaker parameter set. The reduced
settings set available in the ETU 776 can also be used to
reduce the arc flash energy at downstream equipment. In the
first figure on the left with normal settings the arc energy at
panel 1 requires PPE level 2. After switching to the parameter
B settings, the PPE level at Panel 1 is reduced to 0.
Example 2
SWGR 1
WL 1600
1600
WL 800
800
PANEL 1
PPE: 2
AHE: 5.9 cal/cm^2(85%)
AFB: 47.36 in
WD: 17.9 in
Arc Flash in parameter A

Arc Flash in parameter A
12-16
Arc Flash in parameter B

Arc Flash Solutions
Remote operation and monitoring

n
Remote Monitoring is an effective way to maintain separation

between personnel and energized electrical equipment. With
the latest equipment from Siemens, this is now easier and
more cost effective than ever. Maintenance personnel and
engineers can now view real-time electrical parameters, operating conditions (like temperature in the breaker and number
In addition, WL breakers with appropriate electrical controls

and communication components, can be opened and closed
through communications directly or with the use of interposing relays.
Unit sub #5 elevation
Real-time data from WL

breakers with remote
open/close capability
12-17
SWITCHGEAR
of operations), and open and close breakers remotely. The

WinPM.Net software with its Web Enabled interface allows
multiple users to access only the information they are interested in from the convenience of their desks. Accountants
can access cost allocation and utility billing information to
enforce accountability for electrical resources and verify utility bills. Trip settings and other parameters for the LV power
breakers can be modified and monitored remotely as well.
12
Remote Monitoring for temperature, metering and

maintenance data.
Remote Control via communications with or without
interposing relays.
Remote Racking feature.
Remote Operation for opening and closing via local hand
held pendant station.
General

Arc Flash Solutions
General
SWITCHGEAR
12
Remote Racking Device

Although it is always preferable to work on equipment that
has been de-energized, in some cases it may not be practical. Siemens now offers the Remote Breaker Racking Device.
This product uses an integral torque overload sensing mechanism and allows users to safely rack our WL breakers into
the Connect, Test and Disconnect position from up to 30 feet
away.
This allows the operator to be outside the arc flash boundary
thereby providing additional personnel protection and reducing
the PPE requirements. This system can be retrofitted to existing Siemens WL switchgear lineups.
Remote Racking Device
Remote Operator Pendant

This hand held pendant allows a user to remotely operate (open/close) a WL breaker without being in front of the
switchgear. Standard cable lengths are 30 feet with other
lengths available. This pendant, along with the Remote
Racking device, can be used to improve personnel safety by
putting operators outside the arc flash boundary. Maintenance
personnel can remotely open breakers and close breakers,
without being in front of the equipment. The Remote Operator
Pendant can be used in combination with the Remote Racking
Device for added personnel safety.
Remote Operator Pendant
12-18
Control port on WL Switchgear

Arc Flash Solutions
General
Other protection options

n
n
n
Infrared Viewing ports

Zone Selective Interlocking
High Resistance Grounding
12
SWITCHGEAR
Infrared Viewing Ports

Infrared viewing ports allow maintenance personnel to monitor temperatures of the cable and bus connection points
in the rear of the gear while it is energized and under load.
Excessive temperatures can be an indication of a problem
with a connection.
Infrared viewing ports

Zone Selective Interlocking eliminates any intentional time
delay in the event a fault occurs between two breakers in
adjacent zones. In the schematic to the right, representative
time delay values are shown for the breakers in each zone.
If a fault occurs on the load side of the downstream breaker,
the ZSI system enables the upstream breakers delay and
allows the downstream device more time to independently
clear the fault. If the fault occurs on the line side of the
downstream breaker (between two zones), the delay in the
upstream breaker will not occur. This allows the fastest
tripping time for faults and will reduce the amount of arc
energy which may be released. The ZSI function is available for
short time delays and ground fault delays.
High Resistance Grounding
Research has shown that a high percentage of arc faults start
as a phase to ground fault. High resistance grounding systems minimize the available phase to ground arcing current.
A high resistance grounding system reduces the magnitude of

phase to ground faults. This will reduce the mechanical stress
on equipment for the most common of faults and will reduce
the magnitude of energy released.
PH1
PH2 PH3
PH1
3-CLF
NEUT
PH2
ROD
2-CLF
TEST
RELAY
PULSE
RELAY
RES
TEST
RELAY
TEST
RESISTOR
PULSE
RELAY
SYSTEM
SWITCH
RES
NORMAL
FAULT
PULSE
TEST
RESISTOR
RES
RES
METER
RELAY
SYSTEM
SWITCH
PULSE
RES
METER
RELAY
RES
AM
WIRE LOOP FOR

PORTABLE DETECTOR
RES
AM
NORMAL
FAULT
WIRE LOOP FOR PORTABLE DETECTOR
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
RES
SW
PULSE
PULSE
SW
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
12-19
Secondary Unit Substations
SWITCHGEAR
12
Overview
Siemens offers a wide variety of unit

substation designs to meet customer
requirements. A unit substation
consists of one or more transformers
mechanically and electrically
connected to and coordinated in
design with one or more switchgear or
switchboard assemblies. A secondary
unit substation is defined as a unit
substation whose outgoing section is
rated below 1000 volts.
A typical secondary unit substation
consists of three sections:
n Primary: an incoming section that
accepts incoming high voltage (2400 to
13,800 volts) line
n Transformer: section that transforms
incoming voltage down to utilization
voltage (600 volts or less)
n Secondary: an outgoing section that
distributes power to outgoing feeders
and provides protection for these
feeders (600 volts and less)
Standard secondary unit substations
consist of:
n Medium Voltage Primary
n Transformer
n Low Voltage Secondary
Siemens also offers low voltage unit
substations with:
n Low Voltage Primary
n Transformer
n Low Voltage Secondary
The primary reason for using a secondary
unit substation is to bring power as close
as possible to the center of the loads.
Another reason is that it provides a
system design concept incorporating a
wide variety of components that permits
tailoring equipment to the needs of the
application. A secondary unit substation
provides
n Reduced power losses
n Better voltage regulation
n Improved service continuity
n Increased functional flexibility
n Lower installation cost
n Efficient space utilization
Every component and assembly of
secondary unit substations are designed
and engineered as an integral part of a
complete system.
Primary Switch
General
Liquid Filled Transformer
Dry Type Transformer
Type FC2 Switchboard with

Fusible Switches
Primary Switch
Liquid Filled Transformer

Primary Switch
For more information, please contact your local sales office.

12-20
Switchboard with WL Encased

Systems Breakers
Type WL Low Voltage

Switchgear
Siemens Unit Substation Solutions

Indoor Dry Type Transformer
Sketch Page
Plan view
38.0
38.0
12
Top and bottom

conduit
58.0
48.4
19.7
Restricted
Area
Front view
19.7"
(500 mm)
38"
(965 mm)
Type FC2
switchboard
digital meter
type SPD module
38"
(965 mm)
Unit space
100.4"
(2,550 mm)
90"
(2,286 mm)
Section #1
Section #2
Primary Switch requires front access for top cable entry terminations.
Transformer requires access from the front and 12 (305 mm) on the back side for ventilation space.
12-21
SWITCHGEAR
Transformer
Siemens Unit Substation Solutions

Indoor Liquid Filled Transformer
Sketch Page
Plan view
22.0
(559 mm)
22.0
(559 mm)
31.5
(800 mm)
Maximum available
for customer's cables.
X0
31.5
(800 mm)
Maximum available
H3
Maximum available
SWITCHGEAR
12
32.0
(813 mm)
31.5
(800 mm)
Transformer
D
70.0
(1,778 mm)
X3
48.4
(1,229 mm)
H2
X2
X1
H1
Space for secondary

leads from above.
Space for secondary

leads from above.
Space for secondary

leads from above.
Space for secondary

leads from below.
Space for secondary

leads from below.
Space for secondary

leads from below.
19.7
(500 mm)
Front view
32.0
(813 mm)
22.0
(559 mm)
22.0
(559 mm)
Metering/SPD
Main breaker
100.4
(2,550 mm)
Liquid filled
transformer
102.2
(2,596 mm)
Section #1
Section #2
Section #3
Switch
access
for entry
top cable
entry terminations. Transformer requires access from the front and 12" (305 mm)
Primary Switch Primary
requires
frontrequires
access front
for top
cable
terminations.
on the back side for ventilation space.
Transformer requires access from the front and 12 (305 mm) on the back side for ventilation space.
12-22
POWER PRODUCT
Busway Systems
Contents

13-2
13-3
Sentron
Busway, Aluminum / Copper
Busway, Accessories
13-4
13-5
13-6
Sentron II Bus Plugs

Fusible Bus Plugs
Circuit Breakers

13-7 13-8

13-9

13-14
13-10 13-16
Sentron Miscellaneous
Meter Center Taps
13-17 13-20

13-21
Sentron
Busway
System - Reference Information
13-22 13-43
BD, Plug-in
Busway, Aluminum and Copper
13-44 13-45
XL-U, Feeder
Busway, Aluminum
Busway, Copper
13-46 13-47
13-48 13-49
XJ-L HD Busway Systems

Busway Introduction
Busway Overview
Busway Specifications
Plug-In, Feeder Sections
Elbows
Tees and Crosses
Tap Boxes
Flanged Ends
Accessories
Bus Plugs
Plug-In Units
XL-X, XL-U, BD Plug-In Units
Cubicles
XL-X, XL-U, BD Cubicles

13-50

13-51

13-52
13-53 13-54

13-55

13-56
13-57 13-58

13-59

13-60
13-61 13-62
13-63 13-64

13-65
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Sentron SPD Bus Plugs
13
General Pricing Notes

Busway Selector
Busway Systems Overview
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Pricing Notes
A. Footage Pricing
1. Sentron and XL-U base pricing is
listed on a per foot charge. When
calculating the footage charge,
fractions are figured to the next
larger number of whole feet (i.e., a
linear run totaling 663 would be
priced at 67 feet.
2. BD, XJ-L and ITD base pricing is
listed on a per section charge.
B. Accessories
Some busway accessories are
listed as complete device prices
while others are listed under accessory charges.
1. Complete device price includes all
material and accessory charges
for a standard device. (Busway
footage included if applicable).
2. Accessory Charge includes fabrication and any miscellaneous fittings for the standard device. (No
busway footage included).
C. End Cable Tap Boxes are designed
to be installed at the beginning or
end of a busway run. The busway rating determines the tap box list price.
Mechanical lugs are standard. For
compression lugs add 30% to tap
box list price.
D. Elbows whose angle is other than 90
degrees, the accessory charge is to
be doubled.
E. Flange Ends (Switchboard
Connections / Stubs) accessory
prices are for connection to Siemens
equipment. For connection to other
manufacturers equipment, multiply the flange end list price by 2.5.
Standard list price includes eight
inches of bus extension into equipment from mounting flange,
if more than 8 inches required
consult factory for pricing. Sentron
Switchboards can be assembled
with the Busway Flanged End
pre-installed, eliminating the labour
to connect the Busway to the switchboard at the job site.
F. Service Heads are specially constructed tap boxes suitable for outdoor use and are equipped to accept
service cables through a removable
insulated bottom plate. The busway
should be priced through the end of
the run.
13-2
G. P
hase Transpositions can be built
into a busway section to provide better voltage balance on long runs.
To price, use the Expansion Section
accessory charge for the appropriate
ampere rating.
H. Hangers
Sentron and XL-U busway are UL listed for standard hanger spacing of ten
feet (on center). Purchasing busway
hangers for horizontal installations is
optional.
Unistrut / Kindorf is commonly used by
contractors as an approved alternative.
Two hangers are furnished free of charge
with every straight section of BD and
XJ-L. For ITD refer to pricing section. Self
compensating Spring hangers required
for vertical installations are designed to
be field installed by the installer and are
shipped separately. These are also used
as intermediate supports where floor-tofloor height is greater than 16 feet.
I. Ceiling, Floor And Wall Flanges are
used when busway passes through
a floor or wall and are intended to
cover that portion of the opening
around the outside of the busway.
They are not to be used to support
the busway.
J. Reducers price is determined by the
rating of the larger busway. Fused
reducers do not include fuses.
K. Special Paint Busway Sections,
Accessories And Bus Plugs
Standard finish is ASA #61 light grey.
For other than standard color, add
20% and consult factory for availability.
L. For Silver Finishing of Copper Bus
Bars, add 10%.
M. Roof Flanges are specially constructed
collars and plates built onto a section of
3R busway which passes through a flat
or angled roof. Roof pitch must be given
for angled roof.
General
N. C
ircuit Breaker Type Bus Plugs
for Sentron Busways are priced as
complete devices with circuit
breakers factory installed.
Circuit Breaker plugs for XJ-L, BD,
XL-U and XL-X busways are priced
enclosure only. When ordered with
breaker, standard procedure is to
individually ship both the enclosure
and circuit breaker. When ordering bus plugs with breaker factory
installed, add 20% to the list price of
the plug and add the price of the circuit breaker, specify when ordering
and allow time for assembly.
O. Fusible Type Bus Plugs do not
include fuses. Adaptor kits for Class
J and Class R fuses are available for
field installation.
P. Cubicle list prices include labour and
material for a single frame device
with enclosure including line side
internal bussing for connection to
busway and protective device.
Fuses and load side bussing are not
included in the base price.
Q. Sentron Busway has been tested in
accordance with UL1479 and offers a
certified two hour fire rating for gypsum wall board construction,
and a three hour fire rating for concrete slab or block penetrations.
These ratings were achieved using
standard busway installed with
SpecSeal sealant from
Specified Technologies Inc.
This material is available through
Electrical Distribution.
R. Joint Bolt Torque Requirements
Sentron
50 Ft-lbs
XL-X
55 Ft-lbs
XL-U
35 Ft-lbs
BD
25 Ft-lbs
BD neutral
20 Ft-lbs
LO-X
30 Ft-lbs
LO-X Plug-In
30 Ft-lbs
S. Refer to the following publications
for additional technical information
and physical parameters.
Sentron Busway
BUSA-05500
XL-U Busway
5.3.2-1C
BD Busway
BUSA-5331E
XJ-L Busway
BUPC-XJL-010502
TROL-E-DUCT
5.2-1D
Busway Systems Overview
Busway Selector Chart (100-6500 Ampere)

I-T-E (then known as Bulldog Electric) was the first
manufacturer to make a Busway System. Since its
introduction in 1932, Busway Systems have improved
and expanded into several designs to meet the ever
General
changing needs of the electrical industry. The Busway

Selection Chart below will help you in selecting the
proper product to fit your requirements.
Busway Selector Chart

100-6500 Ampere
600 Volts or Less

Product
Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Sentron
XL-U
Plug-in/Feeder
Plug-in/Feeder
XJ-L HD
Plug-in
a Meets
most applicable provisions of this foreign

standard.
b Consult
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS

100
u

150

200

225
u
u
u

400
u
u
u
Ampere
600
u
u

Rating
800
u
u

1000
u
u

1200
u
u

1350
u
u

1600
u
u

2000
u
u

2500
u
u

3000
u
u

3200
u

4000
u
u

5000
u
u

6000, 6500
u

Copper
u
u
u
Conductor

Aluminum
u
u

Indoor
u
u
u
Use

Outdoor
u
u

2W

13W
u
AC Service
33W
u
u
u
50-60 Hz
34W FN
u
u
u
34W 200% N
u

u
400Hzb
Voltage
600 volts or less
u
u
u

Ventilated
u
Construction

Non-Ventilated
u
u
u

UL 857
u
u
u
Meets
NEMA BU1
u
u
u
Electrical
CSA/CUL C22.2 NO 27
u
u
u
Standard
ANCE
NMX-J-148ANCE
u
u
u
a
a
a

60439-1, 60439-2
IEC
a
a
a

60529

BD
Plug-in
13

Feature

u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
a
a
factory for information.
13-3
Sentron Busway Systems

Selection
Suffix part of Catalogue Numbers
S X
0 2
Sentron
SX = US Lengths
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Configuration
3 = 3, 3W
4 = 3, 4W 100% Neutral
5 = 3, 4W 200% Neutral
Ampere Rating
02 = 225A

04 = 400A

06 = 600A

08 = 800A

10 = 1000A

12 = 1200A

13 = 1350A

16 = 1600A

20 = 2000A

25 = 2500A

30 = 3000A
32 = 3200A
40 = 4000A
50 = 5000Aa
Bus Bar Material

C = Copper
M = 1000 Amps/In2 Copper
A = Aluminum
L = 750 Amps/In2 Aluminum
Ground
1 = Integral (Housing)
2 = Internal Bus Bar b
3 = Isolated Ground b
IP Rating
0 = IP40f
4 = IP55f
6 = IP66cgh
9 = NEMA3Rdgh
Copper only
b Copper or aluminum ground bar
c IEC Markets
d NEMA Markets
e For odd degree angle (other than 90) specify the degree angle of the turn.
f Indoor only (Plug-in and Feeder)
g Outdoor use (Feeder only)
h Elbow Stack (IP40 and IP55 only)
a
Catalogue Numbers for Hangers can be found on page 13-39 - 13-41.

Specials must be ordered by description (drawing must be included). Contact factory
for pricing.
Feeder
Length in Inches, ex.: 2'3" = 027
Feeder lengths available from 2'0"
(024 Inches) up to 10'0" (120 inches)
L
Length
04 = 4'0"
Plug-in

06 = 6'0"

08 = 8'0"

10 = 10'0"
Riser
I
Length
04 = 4'0"

06 = 6'0"

08 = 8'0"

10 = 10'0"
S = Stackh
L = 90
Edge
Up
O = Odd Down
e
degree angle

Flat
Right

Left
Elbows

Tees
E
Edge
Up

Down
Flat
Right

Left
Offsets
F
Edge
Up

Down
Flat
Right

Left
Combinations
O Edge Up Flat Left
Edge Down Flat Left
Edge Up Flat Right
Edge Down Flat Right
Flat Left Edge Up
Flat Left Edge Down
Flat Right Edge Up
Flat Right Edge Down
EXpansion P
Fittings
Center Cable
T
B
Tap Boxes
Standard
EXpanded
End Cable
T
Tap Boxes
Vertical
Standard
Horizontal EXpanded
End Closers
L S
FlanGe
Roof F L
Wall
Joint Stacks

Standard
Isolation
S T
SerVice Heads
1 = 1-Phase
3 = 3-Phase
T = Throat
Tranformer
Reducers

Utility
Florida Pwr/Light
Houston Pwr/Light
Commonwealth ED
Pacific Gas/Electric
Detroit Edison
Other
Fused
Non-fused
R F
R
N
Flanged End
E = Intl Standard N D
R = U.S. Standard N
D
O = Other
Transposition
R
PG = Phase & Ground
PO = Phase only
GO = Ground only
13-4
Sentron Straight Section Busway
Copper (225-5000 Ampere) and Aluminum (225-4000 Ampere)
Selection
Copper (225 - 5000Ampere)

Base Catalogue Number Guide
4- Pole
SX402C1
SX404C1
SX406C1
SX408C1
SX410C1
SX412C1
SX413C1
SX416C1
SX420C1
SX425C1
SX430C1
SX432C1
SX440C1
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
SX502C1
SX504C1
SX506C1
SX508C1
SX510C1
SX512C1
SX513C1
SX516C1
SX520C1
SX525C1
SX530C1
SX532C1
SX540C1
4-Pole
Internal
Ground
SX402C2
SX404C2
SX406C2
SX408C2
SX410C2
SX412C2
SX413C2
SX416C2
SX420C2
SX425C2
SX430C2
SX432C2
SX440C2
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
Internal
Ground
SX502C2
SX504C2
SX506C2
SX508C2
SX510C2
SX512C2
SX513C2
SX516C2
SX520C2
SX525C2
SX530C2
SX532C2
SX540C2
4-Pole
Isolated
Ground
SX402C3
SX404C3
SX406C3
SX408C3
SX410C3
SX412C3
SX413C3
SX416C3
SX420C3
SX425C3
SX430C3
SX432C3
SX440C3
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
Isolated
Ground
SX502C3
SX504C3
SX506C3
SX508C3
SX510C3
SX512C3
SX513C3
SX516C3
SX520C3
SX525C3
SX530C3
SX532C3
SX540C3
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
SX502A1
SX504A1
SX506A1
SX508A1
SX510A1
SX512A1
SX513A1
SX516A1
SX520A1
SX525A1
SX530A1
SX532A1
SX540A1
4-Pole
Internal
Ground
SX402A2
SX404A2
SX406A2
SX408A2
SX410A2
SX412A2
SX413A2
SX416A2
SX420A2
SX425A2
SX430A2
SX432A2
SX440A2
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
Internal
Ground
SX502A2
SX504A2
SX506A2
SX508A2
SX510A2
SX512A2
SX513A2
SX516A2
SX520A2
SX525A2
SX530A2
SX532A2
SX540A2
4-Pole
Isolated
Ground
SX402A3
SX404A3
SX406A3
SX408A3
SX410A3
SX412A3
SX413A3
SX416A3
SX420A3
SX425A3
SX430A3
SX432A3
SX440A3
4-Pole 200%
Neutral
Isolated
Ground
SX502A3
SX504A3
SX506A3
SX508A3
SX510A3
SX512A3
SX513A3
SX516A3
SX520A3
SX525A3
SX530A3
SX532A3
SX540A3
Aluminum (225 - 4000Ampere)

Base Catalogue Number Guide
Ampere
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
3-Pole
SX302A1
SX304A1
SX306A1
SX308A1
SX310A1
SX312A1
SX313A1
SX316A1
SX320A1
SX325A1
SX330A1
SX332A1
SX340A1
3-Pole
Internal
Ground
SX302A2
SX304A2
SX306A2
SX308A2
SX310A2
SX312A2
SX313A2
SX316A2
SX320A2
SX325A2
SX330A2
SX332A2
SX340A2
3-Pole
Isolated
Ground
SX302A3
SX304A3
SX306A3
SX308A3
SX310A3
SX312A3
SX313A3
SX316A3
SX320A3
SX325A3
SX330A3
SX332A3
SX340A3
4- Pole
SX402A1
SX404A1
SX406A1
SX408A1
SX410A1
SX412A1
SX413A1
SX416A1
SX420A1
SX425A1
SX430A1
SX432A1
SX440A1
Suffix Numbers
Busway Type
Feeder
Plug-in
Riser
Base Catalogue Number Suffix

IP40
IP55
0F
4F
0P
4P
0R
4R
Nema 3R
9F
13-5
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
3-Pole
SX302C1
SX304C1
SX306C1
SX308C1
SX310C1
SX312C1
SX313C1
SX316C1
SX320C1
SX325C1
SX330C1
SX332C1
SX340C1
3-Pole
Isolated
Ground
SX302C3
SX304C3
SX306C3
SX308C3
SX310C3
SX312C3
SX313C3
SX316C3
SX320C3
SX325C3
SX330C3
SX332C3
SX340C3
13
Ampere
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
3-Pole
Internal
Ground
SX302C2
SX304C2
SX306C2
SX308C2
SX310C2
SX312C2
SX313C2
SX316C2
SX320C2
SX325C2
SX330C2
SX332C2
SX340C2

Busway Accessories
Selection
The following table identifies the feeder footage that is included in busway fittings.
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13

Ampere
Elbow
Tap Box
Tap Box
Rating
Stack
Elbow
Tee
Cross
End
Center
2251350 Al
2251600 Cu
1'
16003200 Al
20004000 Cu
2'
4000 Al
5000 Cu
3'
Expansion
Section
Reducer
Fusible
Reducer
Unfused
4' 4'
3' 5' 6' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4'
4' 4'
4' 6' 8' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4'
4' 4'
L" Rating / Standard

Rating Conversion Table
1000/A Square Inch

M Rating
750/A Square Inch

L Rating
Standard 55C Rating

Sentron
600
800
1200
1350
1600
2000
2000
2500
4000
4000
4000
5000
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
Sway Brace Bracket

Catalogue Number SXSB
Busway Assembly Tool

Catalogue Number SXBAT
13-6
XFMR
Throat
2' 3' 4' 1' 4' 1' 4' 4'
M Rating / Standard
Rating Conversion Table
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
Flanged
End
Swbd.
Conn.
Standard 55C Rating

Sentron
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2000
2500
3000
4000
4000
Lifting Kit
Catalogue Number SXLK
Fusible Cubicles, Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles

Fusible Cubicles
3-Pole, 600V/4-Pole, 480/277V
Ampere Ratings:
200
400
600
800
1200
Solid State Molded Case Circuit

Breaker Cubicles
3-Pole, 600V or 4-Pole 480/277V
Breaker
Frame
Ampere Ratings:
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
SJD6
SJD6G
SJD6NT
SJD6NGT
200400
SLD6
SLD6G
SLD6NT
SLD6NGT
300600
SMD6A
SMD6AG
SMD6ANT
SMD6ANGT
600800
SND6A
SND6AG
SND6ANT
SND6ANGT
8001200
SPD6
SPD6G
SPD6NT
SPD6NGT
14001600
Breaker
Frame

Ampere
Rating
JD6 200400
LD6 300600
MD6 600800
ND6 8001200
PD6 14001600
RD6 18002000
Current-Limiting
3-Phase, 600V AC or 120/280V AC,
277/480V AC
Breaker
Type
CJD6
CLD6
CMD6
CPD6
CRD6
Ampere
Rating
150225
250400
450600
400800
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
a Fuses
For
not included.
electrically operated, specify control voltage.
and IP55
IP40
13-7
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS

3-Pole 480V, 4-Pole 480V,
3-Pole 600V or 4-Pole 600V
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles

3-Pole, 600V or 4-Pole 480/277V
13
Ampere
Rating
Selection
Sentron Bus Plugs
Selection / Application
Sentron Bus PlugsCircuit Breaker (Installed)

S L
0 1 5
E D 2
Plug Type
SL = Sentron II
Circuit Breaker Frame
13
E = 15125A
F = 70250A
J = 200400A
L = 250600A
M = 500800A
Enclosure Type
C = Circuit Breaker Enclosure
L = Current Limiting Enclosure
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Cradle Designation

S = 33W, 34W>400A
200%N>200A only
Configuration
3 = 3, 3W
4 = 3, 4W
5 = 3, 4W 200% neutralcd
Breaker
Voltage

2 = 240V e
4 = 480V f
6 = 600V
Ampere Trip Rating
IP Rating
0 = IP40
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
IG = Isolated Ground
Circuit Breaker Frame Identification
Sentron SLVB Bus PlugsFusible

S L
V B
Plug Type
SL = Sentron II
Heavy Duty Fusible Switch
VB
Orientation
R = Riser
H = Horizontal
Configuration (Poles/Wires)

3 = 33W
4 = 34W
5 = 34W 200% Neutral c
Voltage
2 = 240V
6 = 600V
Max Ampere Rating
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
6 = 600A
IP Rating
0 = IP40
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
IG = Isolated Ground
13-8
a The
S digit is only used on 3- and 4-wire (100%N) plugs that are greater
than 400A and 200%N plugs greater than 200A. Lower amperage plugs
do not require this digit. (Ex. SLID3610, SLEC32060ED2)
b The G and IG digits are used to specify internal and isolated ground
respectively. Integral (housing) ground plugs do not require this digit.
(Ex. SLID3610, SLEC360150ED6)
c Available through 400A only.
d Available with E, F and J Frame breakers only.
e Available with ED2 breakers only.
f Available with ED4 and HHED6 breakers only.
Sentron SLVB Bus Plugs

Bus Plugs / Fusible Plugs
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Selection
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
30A

60A

100A

200A

400Ab

600Ab

SLVB*3210
SLVB*3210G
SLVB*3210IG
SLVB*3220
SLVB*3220G
SLVB*3220IG
SLVB*3230
SLVB*3230G
SLVB*3230IG
SLVB*3240
SLVB*3240G
SLVB*3240IG
SLVB*3250
SLVB*3250G
SLVB*3250IG
SLVB*3260
SLVB*3260G
SLVB*3260IG
30A

60A

100A

200A

400Ab

600Ab

SLVB*4210
SLVB*4210G
SLVB*4210IG
SLVB*4220
SLVB*4220G
SLVB*4220IG
SLVB*4230
SLVB*4230G
SLVB*4230IG
SLVB*4240
SLVB*4240G
SLVB*4240IG
SLVB*4250
SLVB*4250G
SLVB*4250IG
SLVB*4260
SLVB*4260G
SLVB*4260IG
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
3-Pole, 600 Volt a
4-Pole, 600 Volt,a
30A

60A

100A

200A

400Ab

600Ab

30A

60A

100A

200A

400Ab

600Ab

SLVB*3610
SLVB*3610G
SLVB*3610IG
SLVB*3620
SLVB*3620G
SLVB*3620IG
SLVB*3630
SLVB*3630G
SLVB*3630IG
SLVB*3640
SLVB*3640G
SLVB*3640IG
SLVB*3650
SLVB*3650G
SLVB*3650IG
SLVB*3660
SLVB*3660G
SLVB*3660IG
200% Neutrala

SLVB*5210
SLVB*5210G
SLVB*5210IG
SLVB*5220
SLVB*5220G
SLVB*5220IG
SLVB*5230
SLVB*5230G
SLVB*5230IG
SLVB*5240
SLVB*5240G
SLVB*5240IG
SLVB*5250
SLVB*5250G
SLVB*5250IG

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
4-Pole, 250 Volt,a
13
3-Pole, 250 Volt a
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
200% Neutrala
SLVB*4610

SLVB*4610G
SLVB*4610IG
SLVB*4620

SLVB*4620G
SLVB*4620IG
SLVB*4630

SLVB*4630G
SLVB*4630IG
SLVB*4640

SLVB*4640G
SLVB*4640IG
SLVB*4650

SLVB*4650G
SLVB*4650IG
SLVB*4660

SLVB*4660G

SLVB*4660IG
SLVB*5610
SLVB*5610G
SLVB*5610IG
SLVB*5620
SLVB*5620G
SLVB*5620IG
SLVB*5630
SLVB*5630G
SLVB*5630IG
SLVB*5640
SLVB*5640G
SLVB*5640IG
SLVB*5650
SLVB*5650G
SLVB*5650IG

Note: Replace * in catalogue number with H for horizontal applications and R for riser applications.
Ground Detector And

Potentializer Plug

Description
Catalogue
Number
For 2 or 3-pole
240 and 480 volt
service.
(IP40 construction
only)
SLPGR3140G
Note: Available in IP40 construction only.

Description
Catalogue
Number
Spring Kit
SXSK
Note: Used on 400A and larger bus plugs that

require auxiliary support and that are mounted
on vertical/riser busway. Kit contains two springs
(part number 32-9909-04). One kit required per
bus plug.
Fuse Adapter Kits

Switch
Std Fuse
Rating
Class
Class R
Catalogue
Number
Class T
Catalogue
Number
Class J
Catalogue
Number
250V
30A
60A
100A
200A
400Ab
600Ab
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
K
K
K
K
K, J
K, J
SLR2030
SLR2060
SLR2100
SLR2200
SLR2400
SLR2600
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
K,
K,
K,
K,
K,
K,
SLR6030
SLR6060
SLR6100
SLR6200
SLR6400
SLR6600

SLT2100
SLT2200
SLT2400
SLT2600
SLJ2600
600V
30A
60A
100A
200A
400Ab
600Ab
J
J
J
J
J
J

SLT6100

SLT6200

SLT6400

SLT6600
SLJ6600
plugs shown are rated IP40; if IP55 rating is desired,

All
substitute a 4 for 0 in position 8.
b 400A and larger bus plugs require auxiliary support. See
also SXSK Spring Kit.
a
13-9
Sentron Bus Plugs
Bus Plugs with Standard Circuit Breakers abcd
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
Selection
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
E Frame 3-Pole, 240 Volt, ED2 Breaker

15-60A

70-100A

15-60A

70-100A

SLEC32***0ED2
SLEC32***0GED2
SLEC32***0IGED2
SLEC32***0ED2
SLEC32***0GED2
SLEC32***0IGED2
SLEC42***0ED2
SLEC42***0GED2
SLEC42***0IGED2
SLEC42***0ED2
SLEC42***0GED2
SLEC42***0IGED2

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

SLEC34***0ED4
SLEC34***0GED4
SLEC34***0IGED4
SLEC34***0ED4
SLEC34***0GED4
SLEC34***0IGED4
SLEC34***0ED4
SLEC34***0GED4
SLEC34***0IGED4
SLEC44***0ED4
SLEC44***0GED4
SLEC44***0IGED4
SLEC44***0ED4
SLEC44***0GED4
SLEC44***0IGED4
SLEC44***0ED4
SLEC44***0GED4
SLEC44***0IGED4

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

SLEC46***0ED6
SLEC46***0GED6
SLEC46***0IGED6
SLEC46***0ED6
SLEC46***0GED6
SLEC46***0IGED6
SLEC46***0ED6
SLEC46***0GED6
SLEC46***0IGED6
F Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, FXD6 Breaker

70-225A

250A

70-225A

250A

SLFC36***0FXD6
SLFC36***0GFXD6
SLFC36***0IGFXD6
SLFC362500FXD6
SLFC362500GFXD6
SLFC362500IGFXD6
SLFC46***0FXD6
SLFC46***0GFXD6
SLFC46***0IGFXD6
SLFC462500FXD6
SLFC462500GFXD6
SLFC462500IGFXD6
J Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, JXD6 Breaker

200-400Ad

200-400Ad

SLJC36***0JXD6
SLJC36***0GJXD6
SLJC36***0IGJXD6
SLJC46***0JXD6
SLJC46***0GJXD6
SLJC46***0IGJXD6
L Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, LXD6 Breaker

450-600Ad

450-600Ad

SLLCS36***0LXD6
SLLCS36***0GLXD6
SLLCS36***0IGLXD6
SLLCS46***0LXD6
SLLCS46***0GLXD6
SLLCS46***0IGLXD6
M Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, MXD6 Breaker
M Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, MXD6 Breaker

500-800Ad

500-800Ad

SLMCS36***0MXD6
SLMCS36***0GMXD6
SLMCS36***0IGMXD6
a Replace
c For
b All
*** with breaker trip rating.

Example: SLEC36060ED6, for 60A trip.
plugs shown have an IP40 rating, if IP54/55 is desired
substitute 4 for 0 in position 10 (or 11 for cradle
plugs):
E Frame: Ex. SLEC360604ED6
F Frame: Ex. SLFC360704FXD6
J Frame: Ex. SLJC36100JXD6
L Frame: Ex. SLLCS365004LXD6
M Frame: Ex. SLMCS368004MXD6
13-10
SLMCS46***0MXD6
SLMCS46***0GMXD6
SLMCS46***0IGMXD6
the following breaker charges, change the catalog

number suffix:
15-60A: HHED6 Ex. SLEC36***0HHED6
F Frame: FD6
Ex. SLFC36***0FD6
F Frame: HFD6 Ex. SLFC36***0HFD6
J Frame: JD6
Ex. SLJC36***0JD6
J Frame: HJD6 Ex. SLJC36***0HJD6
L Frame: LD6
Ex. SLLCS36***0LD6
L Frame: HLD6 Ex. SLLCS36***0HLD6
M Frame: MD6
Ex. SLMCS36***0MD6
M Frame: HMD6 Ex. SLMCS36***0HMD6
SLFC56***0FXD6
SLFC56***0GFXD6
SLFC56***0IGFXD6
SLFC56***0FXD6
SLFC56***0GFXD6
SLFC56***0IGFXD6
J Frame 200% Neutral

200Ad

225-400Ad

L Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, LXD6 Breaker
SLEC56***0ED6
SLEC56***0GED6
SLEC56***0IGED6
SLEC56***0ED6
SLEC56***0GED6
SLEC56***0IGED6
SLEC56***0ED6
SLEC56***0GED6
SLEC56***0IGED6
F Frame 200% Neutral

70-200A

225-250A

J Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, JXD6 Breaker
SLEC54***0ED4
SLEC54***0GED4
SLEC54***0IGED4
SLEC54***0ED4
SLEC54***0GED4
SLEC54***0IGED4
SLEC54***0ED4
SLEC54***0GED4
SLEC54***0IGED4
E Frame 200% Neutral

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

F Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, FXD6 Breaker
SLEC52***0ED2
SLEC52***0GED2
SLEC52***0IGED2
SLEC52***0ED2
SLEC52***0GED2
SLEC52***0IGED2

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A


SLEC36***0ED6
SLEC36***0GED6
SLEC36***0IGED6
SLEC36***0ED6
SLEC36***0GED6
SLEC36***0IGED6
SLEC36***0ED6
SLEC36***0GED6
SLEC36***0IGED6

15-60A

70-100A

Catalogue
Number
SLJC562000JXD6
SLJC562000GJXD6
SLJC562000IGJXD6
SLJCS56***0JXD6
SLJCS56***0GJXD6
SLJCS56***0IGJXD6

Description
Catalogue
Number
Spring Kit
SXSK
NOTE: Used on 400A and larger bus plugs that require

auxiliary support and that are mounted on vertical/riser
busway. Kit contains two springs (part number 32-990904). One kit required per bus plug.
d 400A
and larger bus plugs that require auxiliary support.

See also SXSK Spring Kit.
Sentron Bus Plugs
Bus Plugs with Current Limiting Circuit Breakers ab

Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Selection
Ampere
Rating
E Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CED6 Breaker
E Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CED6 Breaker

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

15-60A

70-100A

110-125A

SLEL36***0CED6
SLEL36***0GCED6
SLEL36***0IGCED6
SLEL36***0CED6
SLEL36***0GCED6
SLEL36***0IGCED6
SLEL36***0CED6
SLEL36***0GCED6
SLEL36***0IGCED6
SLEL46***0CED6
SLEL46***0GCED6

15-60A
SLEL46***0IGCED6
SLEL46***0CED6
SLEL46***0GCED6

70-100A
SLEL46***0IGCED6
SLEL46***0CED6
SLEL46***0GCED6

110-125A
SLEL46***0IGCED6

100-225A

250A

SLFL36***0CFD6
SLFL36***0GCFD6
SLFL36***0IGCFD6
SLFL362500CFD6
SLFL362500CGFD6
SLFL362500ICGFD6
SLFL46***0CFD6
SLFL46***0GCFD6

70-200A
SLFL46***0IGCFD6
SLFL462500CFD6
SLFL462500GCFD6

225-250A
SLFL462500IGCFD6
J Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CJD6 Breaker
J Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CJD6 Breaker
SLJL36***0CJD6
200-400Ac
SLJL36***0CGJD6

SLJL36***0ICGJD6

200-400Ac

L Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CLD6 Breaker
L Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CLD6 Breaker

450-600Ac

450-600Ac

a
b
SLLLS36***0CLD6
SLLLS36***0GCLD6
SLLLS36***0IGCLD6
Replace *** with breaker trip rating.

Example: SLEC36060ED6, for 60A trip.
ll plugs shown have an IP40 rating, if IP54/55 is
A
desired, substitute 4 for 0 in position 10
(or 11 for cradle plugs):
E Frame: Ex. SLEC360604ED6
F Frame: Ex. SLFC360704FXD6
J Frame: Ex. SLJC361004JXD6
L Frame: Ex. SLLCS365004LXD6
M Frame: Ex. SLMCS368004MXD6
SLJL46***0CJD6
SLJL46***0GCJD6
SLJL46***0IGCJD6

200Ac

225-400Ac

SLEL56***0CED6
SLEL56***0GCED6
SLEL56***0IGCED6
SLEL56***0CED6
SLEL56***0GCED6
SLEL56***0IGCED6
SLEL56***0CED6
SLEL56***0GCED6
SLEL56***0IGCED6
F Frame 200% Neutral

SLFL56***0CFD6
SLFL56***0GCFD6
SLFL56***0IGCFD6
SLFL56***0CFD6
SLFL56***0GCFD6
SLFL56***0IGCFD6
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
F Frame 4-Pole, 600 Volt, CFD6 Breaker

100-225A

250A

13
F Frame 3-Pole, 600 Volt, CFD6 Breaker
Catalogue
Number
J Frame 200% Neutral

SLJL562000CJD6
SLJL562000GCJD6
SLJL562000IGCJD6
SLJLS56***0CJD6
SLJLS56***0GCJD6
SLJLS56***0IGCJD6
SLLLS46***0CLD6
SLLLS46***0GCLD6
SLLLS46***0IGCLD6
00A and larger bus plugs that require auxiliary

4
support. See also SXSK Spring Kit.
13-11
Sentron Bus Plugs
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights
Selection
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs, Dimensions and Weights (Enclosure only)

A
B
15.13 (384)
10.18 (259)
20.25 (514)
10.18 (259)
21.75 (552)
16.75 (425)
41.50 (1054)
19.75 (502)
41.50 (1054)
19.75 (502)
C
9.75 (248)
9.75 (248)
11.75 (298)
15.75 (400)
15.75 (400)
D max.
1.60 (41)
1.60 (41)
1.60 (41)
2.31 (59)
2.31 (59)
E
2.50
2.50
5.75
7.00
7.00
(64)
(64)
(146)
(178)
(178)
F
2.50
2.50
5.75
7.75
7.75
(64)
(64)
(146)
(197)
(197)
J
3.50 (89)
3.25 (83)
4.00 (102)
K
2.25 (57)
3.25 (83)
3.25 (83)
Weight
lbs (kg)
35 (15.87)
50 (22.68)
83 (37.64)
130 (58.97)
177 (80.29)
125 400A Bus Plugs
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Ampere
Rating
125
250
400
600
800
600 800A Bus Plugs
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs, Load Lugs and Knockouts

Frame
Size
E Frame
F Frame
J Frame
13-12
Ground
Lug Cu/Al
#14-2
#14-2
#14-2
Neutral Lug
Cu/AI
#14-2
#6-350 kcmil
(2) #4-500 kcmil
Phase Lug
Cu/AI
#14-1/0
#6-350 kcmil
(2) 3/0-500 kcmil
Knockout Sizes
In. (mm)
7/8 (22), 1 1/8 (29), 1 3/8 (35), 1 3/4 (44), 2 (51), 2 1/2 (64)
2 (51), 2 1/2 (64), 3 (76), 3 5/8 (92), 4 1/8 (105)
7/8 (22), 1 1/8 (29), Pilot
Sentron Bus Plugs
Wall Clearance and Circuit Breaker Bus Plug Dimensions
Selection
600A and 800A Cradle Mounted
30A 400A
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Dim.
Legend
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J1
K1
Circuit Breaker Plugs No Cradle

E Frame
F Frame
Current
Current
Standard
Limiting
Standard
17.00 (432)
22.00 (559)
22.00 (559)
10.25 (260)
10.25 (260)
10.25 (260)
9.75 (248)
9.75 (248)
9.75 (248)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
24.00 (610)
29.00 (737)
29.00 (737)
11.25 (286)
11.25 (286)
11.25 (286)
3.50 (89)
3.50 (89)
3.25 (83)
2.25 (57)
2.25(57)
3.25 (83)
Limiting
27.00 (686)
10.25 (260)
9.75 (248)
12.25 (311)
2.50 (64)
2.50 (64)
29.00 (737)
11.25 (286)
3.25 (83)
3.25 (83)
Legend:
A = Length of enclosure including handle
B = Height of enclosure
C = Depth of enclosure
D = Height of enclosure including optional handle location
E = Extension of plug above top of busway
F = Extension of plug below bottom of busway
G = Cover (depth) clearance for enclosure
H = Depth of enclosure from handle to edge of busway
J = Knockout/ pilot hole location (horizontal)
K = Knockout/ pilot hole location (vertical)
J Frame
Current
Standard
23.50 (597)
16.75 (425)
11.75 (298)
18.75 (476)
5.75 (146)
5.75 (146)
32.50 (826)
13.50 (343)
4.00 (102)
3.25 (83)
Limiting
30.50 (775)
16.75 (425)
11.75 (298)
18.75 (476)
5.75 (146)
5.75 (146)
39.50 (1003)
13.50 (343)
4.00 (102)
3.25 (83)
Circuit Breaker Plugs w/Cradle

L Frame
M Frame
Current
Current
Standard
Limiting
Standard
41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054)
19.75 (502)
19.75 (502)
19.75 (502)
15.75 (400)
15.75 (400)
15.75 (400)
20.25 (514)
20.25 (514)
20.25 (514)
7.75 (197)
7.75 (197)
7.75 (197)
7.00 (178)
7.00 (178)
7.00 (178)
41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054) 41.50 (1054)
18.00 (457)
18.00 (457)
18.00 (457)
Limiting
41.50 (1054)
19.75 (502)
15.75 (400)
20.25 (514)
7.75 (197)
7.00 (178)
41.50 (1054)
18.00 (457)
200%N Applications
- for F-Frame Rated <200A use L-Frame Dims.
- for J-Frame Rated <400A use L-Frame Dims.
- for 400A Fusible switch use 600A Switch Dims.
13-13
Sentron Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights
Selection
Horizontal Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions and Weighs (Enclosure Only)

BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Ampere
Rating
30
A
13.13
(333)
B
13.86
(352)
C
7.96
(202)
D
max.
2.60
(66)
E
6.18
(156)
F
2.66
(67)
J
2.65
(67)
K
2.06
(52)
9.81
(249)
6.22
(157)
5.30
(134)
8.63
(219)
60
13.13
(333)
14.86
(377)
7.96
(202)
2.60
(66)
7.18
(182)
2.66
(67)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
9.81
(249)
6.22
(157)
5.30
(134)
9.63
(244)
25.5 (11.56)
100
13.13
(333)
15.86
(402)
7.96
(202)
2.60
(66)
8.18
(207)
2.66
(67)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
9.81
(249)
6.22
(157)
5.30
(134)
10.53
(267)
28.0 (12.70)
200
14.88
(377)
22.86
(580)
10.58
(268)
2.60
(66)
15.88
(403)
2.66
(67)
3.40
(86)
3.06
(78)
9.81
(249)
7.95
(201)
5.30
(134)
17.62
(447)
49.0 (22.22)
400
18.63
(473)
25.36
(644)
15.67
(398)
5.50
(140)
12.67
(322)
7.67
(195)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
11.80
(299)
9.43
(239)
11.90
(302)
15.15
(384)
100.0 (254)
600
18.63
(473)
25.36
(644)
15.67
(398)
5.50
(140)
12.67
(322)
7.67
(195)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
11.80
(299)
9.43
(239)
11.90
(302)
15.15
(384)
100.0 (254)
13-14
Weight
lbs (kg)
23.5 (10.66)
Sentron Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs Dimensions and Weights
Selection
Riser Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions and Weighs (Enclosure Only)

Ampere
Rating
30
C
7.96
(202)
D
max.
5.25
(133)
E
2.74
(69)
F
2.36
(59)
J
2.65
(67)
K
2.06
(52)
Weight
lbs (kg)
23.5 (10.66)
8.06
(204)
5.08
(129)
7.83
(198)
6.09
(154)
60
10.13
(257)
14.86
(377)
7.96
(202)
5.25
(133)
2.74
(69)
2.36
(59)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
8.06
(204)
2.08
(52)
7.83
(198)
7.09
(180)
25.5 (11.56)
100
11.13
(282)
15.86
(402)
7.96
(202)
5.25
(133)
7.74
(196)
3.36
(85)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
8.06
(204)
6.08
(154)
7.83
(198)
8.09
(205)
28.0 (12.70)
200
14.88
(377)
22.86
(580)
10.58
(268)
5.90
(149)
5.11
(129)
4.74
(120)
3.40
(86)
3.06
(78)
10.42
(264)
7.35
(186)
9.08
(230)
13.84
(351)
49.0 (22.22)
400
18.63
(473)
25.36
(644)
15.67
(398)
5.50
(140)
6.60
(167)
7.10
(180)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
11.97
(304)
9.25
(234)
13.56
(344)
13.49
(342)
100.0 (2540)
600
18.63
(473)
25.36
(644)
15.67
(398)
5.50
(140)
6.60
(167)
7.10
(180)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
11.97
(304)
9.25
(234)
13.56
(344)
13.49
(342)
100.0 (2540)
Fusible Switch Plug, Load Lugs, and Knockouts

Ampere
Rating
30
60
100
200
400
Ground Lug
Cu/Al
#14-1/0
#14-1/0
#14-1/0
#14-1/0
#6-350MCM
600
#6-350MCM
Neutral Lug
Cu/Al
#14-2
#14-1/0
#14-1/0
#6-300MCM
(2) 1/0-250MCM or
(1) 1/0-750MCM
(4) 1/0-250MCM or
(2) 1/0-750MCM
Phase Lug
Cu/Al
#14-2
#14-2
#14-1/0
#6-300MCM
(2) 1/0-250MCM or
(1) 1/0-750MCM
(4) 1/0-250MCM or
(2) 1/0-750MCM
Knockout Sizes - Inches (mm)

7/8 (22, 1 1/8 (29), 1 3/8 (35), 1 3/4 (44, 2 (51), 2 1/2 (64)
7/8 (22, 1 1/8 (29), 1 3/8 (35), 1 3/4 (44, 2 (51), 2 1/2 (64)
7/8 (22, 1 1/8 (29), 1 3/8 (35), 1 3/4 (44, 2 (51), 2 1/2 (64)
1 3/8 (35), 1 3/4 (44), 2 (51), 2 1/2 (64), 3 (76)
7/8 (22), 1 1/8 (29)
7/8 (22), 1 1/8 (29)
13-15
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
B
13.86
(352)
13
A
10.13
(257)
Sentron Bus Plugs
Wall Clearance and Fusible Bus Plug Dimensions

Wall Clearance and Bus Plug Dimensions
Horizontal (Inches/mm)
Dim.
A
B
C
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
No Cradle
30
60
13.13
13.13
(333)
(333)
13.86
14.86
(352)
(377)
7.96
7.96
(202)
(202)
15.89
16.68
(403)
(423)
6.19
7.19
(157)
(182)
2.67
2.67
(67)
(67)
20.39
20.39
(517)
(517)
13.09
13.09
(332)
(332)
2.65
2.65
(67)
(67)
2.06
2.06
(52)
(52)
2.65
2.65
(67)
(67)
15.07
15.07
(382)
(382)
100
13.13
(333)
15.86
(402)
7.96
(202)
17.68
(449)
8.19
(208)
2.67
(67)
20.39
(517)
13.09
(332)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
2.65
(67)
15.07
(382)
200
14.88
(377)
22.86
(580)
10.58
(268)
24.66
(626)
15.19
(385)
2.67
(67)
24.76
(628)
16.55
(420)
3.40
(86)
3.06
(78)
2.65
(67)
16.82
(427)
400
18.63
(473)
27.00
(686)
15.67
(398)
20.00
(508)
12.67
(322)
7.67
(195)
33.75
(857)
21.17
(538)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
2.65
(67)
21.00
(533)
600
18.63
(473)
27.00
(686)
15.67
(398)
20.00
(508)
12.67
(322)
7.67
(195)
33.75
(857)
21.17
(538)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
2.65
(67)
21.00
(533)
Wall Clearance and Bus Plug Dimensions

Riser (Inches/mm)
Dim.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
13-16
No Cradle
30
60
10.13
10.13
(237)
(257)
13.86
14.86
(352)
(377)
7.96
7.96
(202)
(202)
15.89
16.68
(403)
(423)
2.74
2.74
(69)
(69)
2.36
2.36
(59)
(59)
17.39
17.39
(441)
(441)
13.09
13.09
(332)
(332)
2.65
2.65
(67)
(67)
2.06
2.06
(52)
(52)
3.55
3.55
(90)
(90)
12.07
12.07
(306)
(306)
100
11.13
(282)
15.86
(402)
7.96
(202)
17.68
(449)
7.74
(196)
3.36
(85)
18.39
(467)
13.09
(332)
2.65
(67)
2.06
(52)
3.55
(90)
13.07
(331)
200
14.68
(372)
22.86
(580)
10.58
(268)
24.66
(626)
5.11
(129)
4.74
(120)
24.76
(628)
16.55
(420)
3.40
(86)
3.06
(78)
3.55
(90)
16.82
(427)
400
18.63
(473)
27.00
(686)
15.67
(398)
20.00
(508)
6.60
(167)
7.10
(180)
33.75
(857)
21.17
(538)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
2.65
(67)
21.00
(533)
600
18.63
(473)
27.00
(686)
15.67
(398)
20.00
(508)
6.60
(167)
7.10
(180)
33.75
(857)
21.17
(538)
12.15
(309)
3.06
(78)
2.65
(67)
21.00
(533)
Dimensions
Fusible Cubicles, Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles

Fusible
Cubicles
Ampere
Rating
3-Pole, 600V
4-Pole, 480/277V
IP40
IP40
200
400
600
800
1200
Consult Sales
Molded Case Circuit Breaker

JD6
LD6
MD6
ND6
PD6
RD6
200400
300600
600800
8001200
14001600
18002000
3-Pole, 600V
4-Pole, 480/277V
IP40
IP40
Consult Sales
Consult Sales

Ampere
Rating
480 Volt
3-Pole
4-Pole, 480/277V
IP40
Ampere
Rating
SJD6
SJD6G
SJD6NT
SJD6NGT
200400
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
SLD6
SLD6G
SLD6NT
SLD6NGT
300600
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
SMD6A
SMD6AG
SMD6ANT
SMD6ANGT
600800
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
SND6A
SND6AG
SND6ANT
SND6ANGT
8001200
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
SPD6
SPD6G
SPD6NT
SPD6NGT
14001600
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
600 Volt
4-Pole
3-Pole
4-Pole
Consult
Sales
Consult
Sales
800
1200
1600
2000
Consult
Sales
Consult
Sales
2500
3000
4000
Fuses
For
For
not included.
IP55 rating add 12% to list price.
electrically operated. Specify control voltage.
13-17
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Ampere
Rating
Cubicles
3-Pole, 600V
IP40
Breaker
Frame
13
Breaker
Frame
Consult Sales
Selection
Molded Case Digital Circuit Breaker Cubicles
Sentron Bus Plugs
NEW
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
The Siemens advantage...

Siemens history of innovation and
safety continues with our line of UL
1449 3rd Edition SPDs. The TPS Series
utilizes thermally protected MOVs
specifically designed for safe operation
in high fault current or sustained
overvoltage conditions that can cause
other SPDs to fail in an unsafe manner
and damage other equipment in the
distribution system. Every MOV,
including N-G, is monitored. Indicator
lights for each phase provide indication
of loss of protection and phase loss
protection. The direct bus, integral
design reduces circuit impedance
resulting in the lowest possible letthrough voltages providing maximum
protection to facility equipment and
systems.
All TPS Series SPDs:
n UL 1449 3rd Edition Listed, CUL, CE
Mark
n Designed, tested, manufactured to
ANSI/IEEE C62.42.1 2002, C62.41.2
2002, C62.45 2002
n Provide indication of loss of
protection on each phase and phase
loss
n Include all UL-required over current
protection and safety coordination
inside
n Prevent internally generated surges
from propagating throughout a facility
and externally generated surges from
reaching sensitive loads
Technical
High Exposure Applications TPS6
n 400kA 500kA per phase
n 200kA SCCR
n 20kA nominal discharge current
n Indicator lights, audible alarm and
dry contacts standard
n Individually fused, thermally
protected MOVs
n EMI/RFI filtering
n Surge counter optional
Medium Exposure Applications TPS1

n 100kA 300kA per phase
n 200kA SCCR
n Indicator lights, audible alarm and
dry contacts standard
protected MOVs
n EMI/RFI filtering
n Surge counter optional
Low Exposure Applications TPS9

n 100kA per phase
n 200kA SCCR
n Indicator lights standard
protected MOVs
n Dry contacts and audible alarm
optional
13-18
Sentron Bus Plugs

Technical
Horizontal SPD bus plugs dimensions and weights

Plug type

A
B
D max.
Weight lbs. (kgs)
TPS 9
13.25 (336)
13.86 (352)
7.96 (202)
2.60 (66)
6.18 (156)
2.66 (67)
30 (13.63)
TPS 1
TPS 6
13.25 (336)
13.25 (336)
15.86 (402)
19.86 (504)
7.96 (202)
7.96 (202)
2.60 (66)
2.60 (66)
8.18 (207)
12.18 (372)
2.66 (67)
2.66 (67)
35 (15.90)
38 (17.27)
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Riser SPD bus plugs dimensions and weights

Plug type
TPS 9

A
B
10.25 (260)
13.86 (352)
C
7.96 (202)
D max.
5.25 (133)
E
2.74 (69)
F
2.36 (59)
Weight lbs. (kgs)

25 (11.36)
TPS 1
TPS 6
11.25 (286)
15.00 (381)
7.96 (202)
10.58 (268)
5.25 (133)
5.25 (133)
7.74 (196)
5.11 (129)
3.36 (85)
4.74 (120)
35 (15.90)
45 (20.45)
19.36 (492)
22.86 (580)
13-19
Sentron Bus Plugs

Numbering System
Catalogue Number Logic

STP
Plug Type
STP = Sentron SPD VBII
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Orientation
H = Horizontal
R = Riser
Configuration (Poles/Wires)
3 = 3x 3W
4 = 3x 4W
IP Rating
4 = IP55
Ground Designation
G = Internal Ground
(Isolated ground available as custom)
Voltage Code
A = 120/240V 1x 3W
B = 240/120V 3x 4W
D = 240V 3x 3W
E = 480Y/277V 3x 4W
F = 480V 3x 3W
G = 600V 3x 3W a
L = 600Y/347V 3x 4W
TPS Model Number
01 = TPS 1d
1L = TPS1L (10 Mode) b d
06 = TPS 6 d
6L = TPS6L (10 Mode) b d
09 = TPS 9 c
Surge Current (kA)
10 = 100kA per Phase
25 = 250KA per Phase
TPS1, TPS9
TPS1L
TPS1
TPS1
TPS1, TPS1L
TPS6
TPS6L
TPS6
Options
TPS1 and TPS6:
R = Remote Monitor
X = Surge Counter
TPS 9:
D = Dry Contact & Audible Alarm
Notes:
a Available in 100kA & 150kA for TPS1 and 100kA, 150kA, 200kA & 250kA for TPS6.
b The 10 mode devices provide additional circuit protection for Line to Neutral and Neutral to Ground. The 10 modes of protection are:
L1-G, L2-G, L3-G, L1-L2, L2-L3, L1-L3, L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, N-G.
c Standard features: indicator lights.
d Standard features: indicator lights, dry contacts, audible alarm with silence switch, test button.
13-20
06
24

Meter Centres
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Cubicles

with Meter Tap Stack Provisions
Aluminum Busway
600A - 1200A
1350A - 1600A
2000A - 3000A
Copper Busway
L Frame Breaker
Consult
Sales
L Frame Breaker
Meter Center Tap StacksIP40
2000A
5000A
Consult
Sales
4-Pole
Internal
Ground
4-Pole
Isolated
Ground
13-21
N Frame Breaker
Consult
Sales
N Frame Breaker
800A - 1600A
2500A - 4000A
Selection
Consult
Sales
Amps
3-Pole
3-Pole
Internal
Ground
3-Pole
Isolated
Ground
4-Pole
100
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Consult
Sales
Note: Prices do not include meter centers.
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Sentron Busway Systems Reference Information

Sentron Busway Overview
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Sentron Busway for Global

Power Distribution Applications
Building on a solid foundation of
advanced products for the construction
industry, the Siemens Sentron name is
recognized worldwide as synonymous
with quality and consistent performance.
Sentron Busway delivers impressive
features and benefits that make it ideal
for many types of industrial and
construction implementations.
Engineered to ensure the safe and
efficient distribution of power in
industrial, commercial and institutional
environments world-wide, Sentron
ampacities range from 225A to 5000A
UL and IEC. Thanks to an innovative
design, you benefit from labour-saving
installation and a flexible, compact bus
system that is an ideal fit for most
applications. In fact, Sentron Busway
is one of the industrys least labourintensive systems.
Sentron Busway installs with minimal
hardware and often costs less than
cable and conduit installations. The
lightweight aluminum housing acts as an
integral ground, joint stacks connect
with splice plates featuring a single-bolt
design, and bus plugs and cable tap
boxes offer the industrys largest wire
bending space. An optional 200%
neutral within the bus bar housing
accommodates harmonics common in
todays power systems.
Sentron Busway conductors are
insulated with a state-of-the-art epoxy
insulation system, which is applied using
an electrostatic spray process for
optimal insulation integrity.
Exemplifying the spirit of continuing
innovation, Sentron Busway is now
available with economical and
convenient elbow stacks for changing
left, right, up or down directions at 90
degrees.
And, of course, Sentron Busway is
certified to design standards worldwide,
including UL, NEMA, IEC, CSA, VDE
and BS.
Siemens Busway Business uses
industry leading technology in all its
manufacturing processes. From bus bar
fabrication to Electrostatic Spray Epoxy
insulation, all the processes used in the
manufacturing of Siemens Sentron
Busway are electronically controlled to
provide for consistent, high quality
results, making Sentron Busway
products best in its class.
13-22
Housing
Sentron Busway incorporates an all
aluminum housing. This lightweight
totally enclosed, non-ventilated housing
resists rust and other elements,
distributes heat away from the
conductors, and provides an excellent
ground path. The totally enclosed design
also eliminates the need for derating of
the system regardless of installation
orientation. The housing is covered with
an electrostatically applied light grey
ANSI 61 polyester urethane powder
paint that is scratch resistant and has a
1,000-hour salt spray resistance rating.
Conductors
Sentron Busway conductors have a
compact construction and can be
configured as 3-phase 3-wire, 3-phase
4-wire or 3-phase 4-wire with 200%
neutral. The conductors may be ordered
in copper (98% conductivity), 1000A/in2
M-Rated Copper, Aluminum (58%
conductivity) and 750A/in2 L-Rated
Aluminum. The optional 200% neutral
helps to handle harmonic conditions that
may exist. This system is especially
useful with discharge lighting
(fluorescent) and computer installations.
This will help to minimize overheating
and prolong the life cycle of your power
distribution equipment.
Ground
Sentron Busway offers ground options
to meet your specifications: standard
integral aluminum housing ground and
optional internal grounding bars. An
optional isolated ground is also available
which is especially useful in applications
where a clean ground is needed.
Overview
Plating
All bus bars are electroplated with tin.
This unique tin plating provides excellent
conductivity and resists outside
elements from attaching to the bars.
Optional silver plating is also available.
Insulation
Sentron Busway is insulated with an
Epoxy Powder Coating system designed
by Siemens Engineers, Epoxy System
Engineers and Epoxy Powder
Specialists, specifically for Siemens
Busway products.
The Siemens exclusive Electrostatic
Spray insulation process produces
uniform application of Epoxy powder
over the entire conductor bar. This is
further enhanced by the inline filter
process and magnetic separator
that helps to eliminate contaminants
common to fluidized bed systems. The
electrostatic application also provides
a better coating consistency than that
of the older fluidized bed process. The
combination of electrostatic spray and
lower oven temperatures produces
a consistent coverage with fewer
impurities and pinholes in the insulation.
The lower oven temperatures reduce the
risk of bar annealing, which affects the
overall quality of the system.
Sentron Busway insulation is Class B,
130C Rated. Every bus bar and
completed assembly is dielectric
tested to ensure the insulation is free
of defects.

Sentron Busway Overview
Overview
Standards
All Sentron Busway products meet the
following standards:
UL 857
NEMA BU1
CSA C22.2
IEC 439-1(1993), IEC 439-2 (1993),
IEC 529 (1989)
BS EN 60529
BS EN 60439-1, 60439-2
UL 1479
DIN 4102 Parts 9&12
BS 6387 Parts 11.1 and 11.2
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Plug-in Opening
Sentron Busway offers plug-in style
busway which feature plug-in openings
rated for finger safety to IP2X in
accordance with IEC 529 and BS EN
60439-1, -2 and BS EN 60529.
Each plug-in opening has a reversible
hinged dead front designed to protect
the contact surfaces from dirt, dust or
moisture. Gasketing is used where
applications require a splash proof
(IP55) rating.
IP Ratings
Sentron Busway is available in a variety
of IP ratings. Use the chart below to
determine the IP rating that best fits
your application needs.
Testing
Each piece of Sentron Busway is factory
tested before shipping. Tests performed
include dielectric tests, which are used
to insure integrity of insulation. In
addition, Sentron Busway is tested in
accordance with both UL and IEC
standards. All Sentron Busway is
manufactured and inspected in an ISO
9001:2000 registered facility.
Plug-In Opening and Cover
Joint Assembly
Levels of Protection Description

Sentron Busway
Code
IP 2X
Description
Plug-In outlet protects against access to live parts by .472 in. (12 mm) test probe, even with cover
opened. Finger Safe
13
Joint Stack
Each Sentron Busway piece is shipped
with a joint stack and joint covers
installed at one end of the busway and a
shipping end protector at the other end.
The joint stacks feature a single bolt
design and a special, torque indicating,
double headed break-off bolt. This
eliminates the need for torque wrenches
and assures proper torque at installation
of 50 ft.-lbs.(68 N-m).
When the proper torque value is
achieved, the top bolt head will shear
off. Each joint stack allows for +/- .625
inches (15.8mm) adjustability at each
joint. Over adjustment is prevented by
the joint covers, which will only allow a
.625 inch (15.8mm) adjustment when
the knockouts on the joint cover are
removed.
It is possible to remove any joint
connection assembly to allow electrical
isolation or removal of a busway length
without disturbing adjacent busway
lengths. Isolation joint stacks are
available and used to electrically isolate
a busway section(s) within a busway
run. For easy visual identification,
isolation joint stack assemblies are
painted white.
Feeder
Plug-In
Sentron Bus Plugs
IP 40
Enclosure protects against entry of .039 in. (1.0 mm) test probe. Indoor (Typical UL Designation)
IP 55
Enclosure protects against entry of dust and water jets. Splash Proof
IP 66
Enclosure is dust tight and protects against powerful water jets. Outdoor (International Only)
NEMA 3R
Enclosure protects against rain, sleet and damage from ice formation. Outdoor - NAFTA
13-23
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Sentron Bus Plug Overview
SENTRON Bus Plugs are engineered

with the installer and end user in mind.
The installer will benefit from the
numerous features, such as factory
installed circuit breakers, compact
footprint, generous wirebend space, and
dual interlocks. The end user will
appreciate the visible position indicator,
as well as the spring loaded pad lockable
latch which prevents access to
unauthorized personel.
SENTRON Bus Plugs are designed with
an interlock device to prevent the door
from being opened when the disconnect
is on. This also prevents the disconnect
from being turned on while the door is
open. The interlock ensures that the
protective device is OFF prior to
installation or removal of the bus plug.
Once the bus plug is properly installed,
a spring - loaded, padlock latch provides
additional security by preventing
unauthorized access to the unit.
Alignment and interlock stabs are
features of the Sentron Bus Plugs
engineered to prevent improper
installation of the unit. Guide stabs

prevent installing the bus plug 180
degrees out of rotation. In addition, the
stabs provide vertical support for vertical
applications. The bus plug ground stabs
are designed to ensure positive contact
with both the integral and optional
internal busway grounds before the bus
plug fingers contact the phase and
neutral bars. Sentron Bus Plugs also
feature bolt-on mounting to the busway
housing for secure attachment.
Sentron Bus Plugs can be configured for
horizontal or vertical applications. The
following Bus Plugs can be mounted
(side by side) five (5) per busway side
channel (Total 10 per 10 Section).
a
30-600 SLVBH Fusible (Horizontal)
b
a
30-200 SLVBR Fusible (Riser)
b
a
30-400 Circuit Breaker
b
Sentron SLVB Fusible Bus Plugs feature
a direct drive mechanism. The operating
handle mounts directly to the switch
mechanism for fewer moving parts.
Overview
Enclosure Ratings:
IP40
b
IP55
b
Conductors:
3-phase, 3-wire
b
3-phase, 4-wire
b
3-phase, 4-wire 200% neutral (400A
b
and below)
Grounding:
Integral (Housing)
b

b Internal
Isolated
b
Note: SLVBH Horizontal Application Shown.
a Contact Siemens for 200% Neutral Applications.
13-24

Technical Data
Technical
R, X, Z and Ohms, Voltage Drop
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
1.75 (44.5) 2.34 1.13 2.60 0.69 0.77 0.84 0.90 0.95 0.99 1.01 0.91
1.75 (44.5) 2.44 1.13 2.69 1.26 1.40 1.52 1.64 1.74 1.82 1.86 1.69
1.75 (44.5) 2.58 1.16 2.83 1.96 2.18 2.39 2.58 2.74 2.87 2.94 2.68
1.75 (44.5) 2.71 1.17 2.95 2.67 2.98 3.28 3.55 3.78 3.97 4.08 3.76
2.25 (67.2) 2.12 0.98 2.30 2.58 2.88 3.17 3.44 3.67 3.86 3.98 3.67
2.88 (73.2)
1.66
0.77
1.83
2.56
2.85
3.11
3.35
3.56
3.72
3.80
3.45
3.50 (88.9) 1.30 0.64 1.45 2.34 2.59 2.82 3.03 3.20 3.33 3.39 3.04
4.50 (114.3) 1.06 0.56 1.20 2.37 2.60 2.66 3.01 3.17 3.29 3.32 2.94
6.00 (152.4) 0.77 0.44 0.89 2.27 2.48 2.50 2.83 2.96 3.05 3.07 2.66

8.50 (215.9) 0.55 0.35 0.65 2.15 2.34 2.50 2.64 2.75 2.82 2.81 2.39
4.75 (120.7) 0.49 0.27 0.56 2.07 2.28 2.46 2.62 2.76 2.86 2.89 2.54
5.50 (139.7) 0.44 0.30 0.53 2.33 2.51 2.67 2.80 2.90 2.96 2.93 2.44
6.50 (165.1)
0.36
0.15
0.39
1.76
1.97
2.17
2.35
2.51
2.63
2.71
2.49
8.50 (215.9)
0.30
0.21
0.37
2.49
2.69
2.86
3.00
3.11
3.17
3.15
2.63
Notes:
For plug-in distributed loads, divide voltage drop
values by 2.
To determine voltage drop line-to-neutral, multiply lineto-line values by 0.577.
Actual voltage drop for different lengths and at
loadings less than full rated current can be calculated
using the formula:
Vd (actual) = Vd (table) x actual load x actual length (ft)
rated load
100 feet
or 50 Hz, multiply reactance (X) by 0.85 and resistance

F
values do not change. For 400 Hz, multiply reactance
by 3.75 and multiply resistance by 1.4. Calculate new
voltage drop:
Vd = amps load x E3(Rcos + X sin ) per 100 ft,
where cos = Power Factor.
For metric conversion R, X, Z values in Ohms per
meters Line to Neutral
R x .0328
X x .0328
Z x .0328
or metric conversion Line to Line per meter at 25 C

F
ambient in mV/A/m (Vd 32.8) / A. Divide Vd by 2 for
distributed loads.
Voltage Drop will decrease in lower ambient
temperature. Contact Siemens for Voltage Drop in
other ambient conditions.
13-25
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
M-Rated c
225
400
600
800 400
1000

1200
600
1350
800
1600
1000
2000
1200,1350

1600
2500
2000
3000

3200

4000
2500,3000,3200
5000
4000
13

Voltage Drop - Concentrated Loads, Line-to-Line per 100 feet at 100%
Rated Load, 35C Ambient

Bus Bar Width
Ohms x 103 per 100 feet

x 0.25 in.
Line to Neutral
Power Factor
Ampere Rating
(6.4mm) Thick
R
X
Z
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
AL
L-Rated c
225
1.75 (44.5) 3.94 1.13 4.10 0.88 1.02 1.15 1.27 1.39 1.49 1.57 1.54
400
1.75 (44.5) 4.08 1.23 4.26 1.66 1.91 2.15 2.38 2.58 2.77 2.91 2.83
600
1.75 (44.5) 4.26 1.32 4.46 2.64 3.03 3.40 3.75 4.08 4.37 4.58 4.43
800 400
2.38 (60.5) 3.42 1.06 3.58 2.82 3.24 3.64 4.02 4.36 4.67 4.90 4.74
1000
600
3.25 (82.6) 2.45 0.74 2.56 2.50 2.88 3.24 3.57 3.89 4.17 4.38 4.24
1200
800
4.38 (111.3) 1.86 0.59 1.95 2.32 2.66 2.99 3.29 3.58 3.82 4.01 3.87
1350
1000
5.38 (138.7) 1.39 0.24 1.41 1.50 1.81 2.10 2.39 2.67 2.93 3.17 3.25
1600
1200
6.50 (165.1) 1.21 0.48 1.29 2.19 2.48 2.75 3.00 3.23 3.43 3.56 3.35
2000
1350,1600
8.75 (222.3) 0.91 0.35 0.98 2.11 2.38 2.64 2.87 3.08 3.26 3.37 3.16
2500
2000
(2) 5.63 (143.0) 0.68 0.29 0.74 2.09 2.34 2.57 2.78 2.97 3.12 3.21 2.95
3000
2500
(2) 6.75 (171.5) 0.54 0.28 0.61 2.24 2.47 2.67 2.85 3.01 3.12 3.16 2.80
3200
2000
(2) 7.50 (190.5)
0.48
0.33
0.58
2.53
2.73
2.91
3.06
3.17
3.23
3.20
2.68
4000
3000,3200
(2) 9.00 (228.6) 0.62 0.21 0.51 2.34 2.61 2.85 3.08 3.27 3.43 3.51 3.20

Technical Data
Technical
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Ground Capacity

Bus Bar
Bars

Width -
per
Ampere Rating
Inches (mm) Pole
A
L-Rated
225
1.75 (44.5)
1
400
1.75 (44.5)
1
600
1.75 (44.5)
1
800 400
2.38 (60.5)
1
1000 600
3.25 (82.6)
1
1200 800
4.38 (111.1) 1
1350 1000
5.38 (136.5) 1
1600 1200
6.50 (165.1) 1
2000 1350,1600
8.75 (222.3) 1
2500 2000
5.63 (142.9) 2
3000 2500
6.75 (171.5) 2
3200 2000
7.50 (190.5) 2
4000 3000,3200
9.00 (228.6) 2
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
1.75 (44.5)
1.75 (44.5)
1.75 (44.5)
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.88 (73.0)
3.50 (88.9)
4.50 (114.3)
6.00 (152.4)
6.50 (165.1)
8.50 (215.9)
4.75 (120.7)
5.50 (139.7)
6.50 (165.1)
8.50 (215.9)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Effective Current
Carrying Capacity Grd. Circuit Characteristics under Fault
of Housing
Conditions Ohms x 103 per 100 ft
Min. CSA for

Ground Bus
per UL 857
Table 14
In2 (mm2)
Sectional
Area 50%
Integral
Internal
(Hsg.)
Ground Bar Ground
In2 (mm2)
In2 (mm2)
% of % of
Internal Ground
UL Req Phase Bar R
X
Z
Housing Ground
R
X
Z
0.08 (53.5)
0.17 (107.1)
0.17 (107.1)
0.17 (107.1)
0.20 (126.5)
0.23 (146.5)
0.29 (189.7)
0.29 (189.7)
0.35 (227.7)
0.52 (332.3)
0.59 (380.0)
0.81 (522.6)
0.81 (522.6)
0.22 (141.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.30 (191.9)
0.41 (262.1)
0.55 (352.8)
0.67 (433.5)
0.81 (524.2)
1.09 (705.6)
1.41 (907.3)
1.69 (1088.7)
1.88 (1209.7)
2.25 (1451.6)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.40 (1550.1)
2.54 (1639.9)
2.72 (1756.6)
2.88 (1859.8)
3.06 (1975.4)
3.42 (2207.7)
3.85 (2480.7)
4.20 (2711.9)
4.44 (2866.8)
4.92 (3176.5)
1333
667
667
688
607
552
446
467
425
320
301
229
250
253
253
253
192
147
115
9
84
69
59
53
51
50
10.267
10.267
10.267
8.063
7.208
6.358
5.561
4.837
3.735
3.169
2.848
2.648
2.446
9.037
9.037
9.037
7.333
6.628
5.852
5.115
4.489
3.467
2.955
2.683
2.493
2.339
4.872
4.872
4.872
3.351
2.833
2.487
2.182
1.801
1.390
1.145
0.954
0.894
0.715
14.200
14.200
14.200
11.150
9.202
7.625
6.478
5.687
4.565
4.129
3.835
3.614
3.500
12.963 5.797
12.963 5.797
12.963 5.797
10.000 4.932
8.442 3.662
6.926 3.189
5.883 2.713
5.206 2.289
4.267 1.623
3.837 1.526
3.635 1.221
3.428 1.144
3.378 0.916
0.05 (33.5)
0.11 (67.7)
0.11 (67.7)
0.11 (67.7)
0.13 (85.2)
0.18 (114.2)
0.24 (152.3)
0.24 (152.3)
0.29 (189.7)
0.29 (189.7)
0.35 (227.7)
0.41 (265.8)
0.59 (380.0)
0.59 (380.0)
0.71 (456.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.22 (141.1)
0.28 (181.5)
0.36 (231.9)
0.44 (282.3)
0.56 (362.9)
0.75 (483.9)
0.81 (524.2)
1.06 (685.5)
1.19 (766.1)
1.38 (887.1)
1.63 (1048.4)
2.13 (1371.0)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.30 (1485.1)
2.38 (1536.7)
2.48 (1601.8)
2.58 (1665.8)
2.74 (1769.0)
2.98 (1923.8)
3.06 (1975.4)
3.38 (2181.9)
3.56 (2290.0)
3.80 (2453.9)
4.12 (2660.3)
4.76 (3073.2)
2128
1054
1054
1054
860
661
510
534
457
467
421
376
277
296
278
261
261
261
261
207
166
140
113
90
84
70
66
60
54
50
7.380
7.380
7.380
7.380
6.715
6.186
5.704
4.719
3.507
4.837
2.294
2.117
1.938
1.688
1.360
6.330
6.330
6.330
6.330
5.993
5.676
5.267
4.323
3.181
4.489
2.020
1.874
1.691
1.500
1.218
3.803
3.803
3.803
3.803
3.029
2.460
2.188
1.893
1.476
1.801
1.087
0.984
0.947
0.773
0.606
11.338
11.338
11.338
11.338
10.194
8.996
8.000
7.411
6.422
5.687
3.072
4.859
4.353
3.334
1.989
10.083 5.183
10.083 5.183
10.083 5.183
10.083 5.183
9.191 4.409
8.212 3.674
7.492 2.807
6.880 2.756
6.032 2.205
5.206 2.289
5.419 1.764
4.631 1.470
4.129 1.378
3.060 1.323
1.783 0.882
Note: Bus bar thickness = .25 in. (6.4mm), Ground bar thickness = .125 in.(3.18mm)
UL Short Circuit Ratings
UL Series Connected with Fuse

RMS Symmetrical (kA)
Ampere Rating
6 cycle
1 sec.
3 sec.
AL L-Rated
225

85
28
16
400

85
28
16
600

85
28
16
800
400
100
47
27
1000
600
100
50
29
1200
800
125
60
35
1350
1000
150
75
43
1600
1200
150
90
52
2000
1350,1600
150
110
64
2500
2000
200
130
75
3000
2500
200
160
92
3200
2000
200
160
92
4000
3000,3200
200
200
115
Maximum Fuse Size for 200kA

RMS Symmetrical Rating
Class R
Class J & T
Class L
600
600
600

600
600
600
800

J & T
J & T
J & T
T
1200
3000
3000
3000
3000
5000
5000
600
600
600

600
600
600
800

J&T
J & T
J & T
T
1600
3000
3000
3000
4000
5000
3000
5000
CU M-Rated
225

400

600

800
400
1000

1200
600
1350
800
1600
1000
2000
1200,1350

1600
2500
2000
3000

3200

4000
2500,3000,3200
5000
4000
13-26
85
85
85
85
100
100
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
200
200
40
40
40
40
50
65
80
95
115
90
130
175
175
200
200
23
23
23
23
29
38
46
55
66
52
75
101
101
115
115
Sentron Busway has UL

approved Series Ratings. By
using the appropriate line side
fuse, short circuit ratings can be
enhanced to 200kA for lower
amperage busway.

Straight Sections Plug-In, Riser and Feeder
Straight Sections
Plug-In Sections
Sentron Riser sections are designed

with plug-in openings centered on 24 in.
(610mm) intervals on one side of the
busway only. This eliminates unusable
plug-in outlets in vertical applications.
Riser busway is available in standard
lengths of 4 ft. (1.22m), 6 ft. (1.83m), 8
ft. (2.44m) and 10 ft. (3.05m). Sentron
Riser Busway is available in IP40 (indoor)
and IP55 (splash proof). One joint stack
assembly is provided with each riser
section.
Plug-In Outlet Features
The plug-in outlet molded guard design
prevents incidental finger contact with
live conductors. Sentron plug-in outlets
Feeder Sections
Feeder busway carries the current of the
busway system from the supply source.
Feeder busway does not have plug-in
outlets. Sentron Feeder busway is
available in custom lengths from 2 ft.
(.61m) to 10 ft. (3.05m). Feeder sections
are rated as IP40 (Indoor), IP55 (Splash
Proof), NEMA 3R (Outdoor), and IP66
(Severe Outdoor). One joint stack
assembly is provided with each feeder
section.
Standard Plug-In Section (Standard plug-in outlets on both sides on 24 in. centers)
Suffix PL04 (4 ft.), PL06 (6 ft.), PL08 (8 ft.), PL10 (10 ft.)
Standard Riser Section (Standard Plug-In outlets on one side on 24 in. centers)
Suffix RI04 (4 ft.), RI06 (6 ft.), RI08 (8 ft.), RI10 (10 ft.)
Standard Feeder Section

Suffix F024 - 120 (last 3 digits = length in Inches, 024=24 in., 120=120 in.)
13-27
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Sentron plug-in sections are designed

with plug-in openings centered on 24 in.
(610mm) intervals, and are located on
both sides of the busway for optimum
utilization. Plug-in sections are available
in standard lengths of 4 ft. (1.22m), 6 ft.
(1.83m), 8 ft. (2.44m) and 10 ft. (3.05m).
Sentron plug-in sections meet IP40
Riser Sections
Selection
are IP 2X rated (with the outlet cover

open) which means a .472 in. (12mm) or
larger probe is unable to enter a plug-in
outlet. The outlet is IP40 Rated with the
cover closed and IP55 Rated when
configured with gaskets.
13
Sentron Busway can be ordered with

Aluminum or Copper bus bars.
Aluminum bars are available in 225-4000
ampere sections. Copper bars are
available in 225-5000 ampere sections.
Sentron Busway includes an integral
housing ground, and is available with an
internal ground bar or an isolated ground
bar in all ampere ratings. Sentron
Busway housing is a four-piece
aluminum design.
(indoor) and IP55 (splash proof)

requirements. One joint stack assembly
is provided with each plug-in section.

Selection
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Sentron Busway, Widths and Weights

Approximate Weight - lbs per ft. (kg per meter)

3, 3-Wire
3, 4-Wire
3, 4-Wire

Dimension -
with Internal
with Internal 200%
Ampere Rating
Inches (mm)
3, 3-Wire
Ground
3, 4-Wire
Ground
Neutral
AL
L-Rated
225

W1
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
6 (9)
6 (9)
7 (10)
400

W1
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
6 (9)
6 (9)
7 (10)
600

W1
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
6 (9)
6 (9)
7 (10)
800
400
W1
4.6 (117)
6 (9)
6 (9)
7 (10)
7 (10)
7 (11)
1000
600
W1
5.4 (137)
7 (10)
7 (11)
8 (12)
8 (12)
9 (13)
1200
800
W1
6.6 (168)
8 (12)
9 (13)
9 (14)
10 (15)
11 (16)
1350
1000
W1
7.6 (193)
9 (13)
10 (15)
11 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
1600
1200
W1
8.7 (221)
10 (15)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
14 (21)
2000
1250,1600
W1 10.9 (277)
13 (19)
14 (21)
15 (23)
16 (24)
18 (26)
2500
2000
W2 13.7 (348)
15 (22)
17 (25)
8 (27)
20 (30)
22 (33)
3000
2500
W2 15.8 (402)
17 (25)
19 (28)
21 (31)
23 (34)
25 (37)
3200
2000
W2 17.3 (439)
18 (27)
20 (30)
23 (34)
25 (37)
27 (40)
4000
3000,3200
W2 20.3 (516)
22 (33)
25 (37)
27 (40)
30 (44)
32 (48)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
13-28
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2
W2
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
4.4
5.1
5.7
6.7
8.2
10.9
10.7
11.8
13.3
15.3
19.3
(99)
(99)
(99)
(99)
(112)
(130)
(145)
(170)
(208)
(277)
(272)
(300)
(335)
(389)
(491)
9 (13)
9 (13)
9 (13)
9 (13)
10 (15)
12 (18)
14 (21)
17 (26)
22 (32)
13 (19)
30 (44)
33 (49)
37 (55)
43 (64)
56 (83)
10 (14)
10 (14)
10 (14)
10 (14)
11 (17)
14 (20)
16 (24)
19 (29)
25 (37)
14 (21)
34 (50)
37 (55)
2 (63)
50 (75)
4 (95)
10 (16)
10 (16)
10 (16)
10 (16)
12 (19)
15 (23)
17 (26)
22 (32)
28 (41)
5 (23)
38 (56)
42 (63)
48 (72)
56 (83)
72 (107)
11
11
11
11
14
16
19
24
30
16
42
47
53
62
80
(17)
(17)
(17)
(17)
(20)
(24)
(29)
(35)
(45)
(24)
(62)
(70)
(79)
(92)
(119)
12
12
12
12
15
18
21
26
33
18
46
51
58
68
89
(18)
(18)
(18)
(18)
(22)
(26)
(31)
(38)
(50)
(26)
(68)
(76)
(86)
(101)
(132)
3, 4-Wire
200% Neutral
with Internal
Ground
7 (10)
7 (10)
7 (10)
8 (11)
9 (14)
11 (17)
13 (19)
15 (22)
19 (28)
23 (34)
27 (40)
29 (43)
35 (52)
13
13
13
13
16
19
23
28
36
19
50
56
64
75
97
(19)
(19)
(19)
(19)
(23)
(29)
(34)
(42)
(54)
(28)
(74)
(83)
(95)
(112)
(145)

Elbows
Selection
Sentron Busway elbows provide a simple, convenient

method of changing the direction (left, right, up or
down) of a busway run. Two elbow styles are offered:
elbow stack and elbow section.
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.12
.25
2.00
2.50
3.25
4.62
4.50
5.00
5.75
6.75
8.87
Flatwise elbow stacks are used for left and right directional
changes. When the busway system is mounted flatwise in the
horizontal plane (bus bars run parallel to the floor).
Flat
Suffix ESFR/ESFL
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Flatwise Elbow Stacks
13
Flatwise Elbow Stacks, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
AL
L-Rated
225

1.00 (25)
400

1.00 (25)
600

1.00 (25)
800
400
1.12 (28
1000
600
2.00 (51)
1200
800
2.50 (64)
1350
1000
3.00 (76)
1600
1200
3.50 (89)
2000
1350,1600
4.62 (117)
2500
2000
5.75 (146)
3000
2500
7.00 (178)
3200
2000
7.75 (197)
4000
3000,3200
9.35 (237)
(25)
(25)
(25)
(25)
(28)
(33)
(50)
(64)
(83)
(117)
(114)
(127)
(146)
(171)
(225)
Note: Flatwise elbow stacks can be ordered as either right-hand (ESFR) or lefthand (ESFL) to follow the same nomen-clature as an elbow section. The
construction is identical and interchangeable.
Edgewise Elbow Stacks, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
AL
L-Rated
225

4.25 (108)
400

4.25 (108)
600

4.25 (108)
800
400
4.25 (108)
1000
600
4.25 (108)
1200
800
4.25 (108)
1350
1000
4.25 (108)
1600
1200
4.25 (108)
2000
1350,1600
4.25 (108)
2500
2000
4.25 (108)
3000
2500
4.25 (108)
3200
2000
4.25 (108)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
4.25
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
(108)
Edgewise Elbow Stacks

Edgewise elbow stacks create up and down directional changes.
The A phase is on the inside of the bend for edge up elbow
stacks. The A phase is on the outside of the bend for edge down
elbow stacks.
Edge Down
Edge Up
Suffix ESED
Suffix ESEU
Note: Edge up and edge down elbow stacks are not interchangeable.
13-29
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Elbows
Flatwise Elbow Sections, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
B
AL
L-Rated
225

12 (305)
12 (305)
400

12 (305)
12 (305)
600

12 (305)
12 (305)
800
400
12 (305)
12 (305)
1000
600
12(305)
12 (305)
1200
800
12 (305)
12 (305)
1350
1000
12 (305)
12 (305)
1600
1200
18 (457)
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
18 (457)
2500
2000
18 (457)
18 (457)
3000
2500
18 (457)
18 (457)
3200
2000
18 (457)
18 (457)
4000
3000,3200
24 (610)
24 (610)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
18
24
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(610)
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
18
24
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(610)
Edgewise Elbow Sections, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
B
AL
L-Rated
225

10 (254)
10 (254)
400

10 (254)
10 (254)
600

10 (254)
10 (254)
800
400
10 (254)
10 (254)
1000
600
10 (254)
10 (254)
1200
800
10 (254)
10 (254)
1350
1000
10 (254)
10 (254)
1600
1200
10 (254)
10 (254)
2000
1350,1600
10 (254)
10 (254)
2500
2000
10 (254)
10 (254)
3000
2500
10 (254)
10 (254)
3200
2000
10 (254)
10 (254)
4000
3000,3200
10 (254)
10 (254)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Flatwise elbow sections are used for left and right directional
changes when the busway system is mounted in the horizontal plane
(bus bars run parallel to the floor). The joint stack assembly may be
moved to the opposite leg to change the orientation from left to
right/right to left.
Flat Left
Suffix ELEF
Flat Right
Suffix ELFR
Edgewise Elbow Sections

Edgewise elbow sections create up and down directional changes.
The Aphase bus bar lies on the inside of the bend for edge up
elbows. The A phase bus bar lies on the outside of the bend for
edge down elbows. The joint stack assembly on edgewise elbows
can not be moved in order to change orientation from up to
down/down to up. Sentron Busway elbow sections are shipped with
a joint stack assembly on one end for direct connection to the
busway system.
Edge Up
Edge Down
Suffix ELEU
Suffix ELED
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
Note : Odd angle elbow flatwise and edgewise elbow sections are available
for angles 95 - 175 in 5 increments.
13-30
Selection
Flatwise Elbow Sections

Offsets
Selection
Offsets can be utilized to solve difficult contour

problems and save space. In applications where space
does not allow for two connected elbows, a single
offset can bypass an obstruction. All offsets are
supplied with one joint stack assembly.
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
Edgewise Offsets, Dimensions

Ampere Rating
AL
L-Rated
225

400

600

800
400
1000
600
1200
800
1350
1000
1600
1200
2000
1350,1600
2500
2000
3000
2500
3200
2000
4000
3000,3200
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
5 (127)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
18
18
18
18
24
5
5
5
5
8
18
18
18
18
24
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(610)
(127)
(127)
(127)
(127)
(203)
Suffix OFFR
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Flat Right
13
Flatwise Offsets, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
*A
B
C
AL
L-Rated
225

12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
400

12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
600

12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
800
400
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
1000
600
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
1200
800
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
1350
1000
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
1600
1200
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
2500
2000
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
3000
2500
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
3200
2000
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
4000
3000,3200
24 (610)
8 (203)
24 (610)
Flat Left
Suffix OFFL
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(610)
(standard/min.)
*A
B
C
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
Edge Up
Suffix OFEU
Edge Down
Suffix OFED
*Note: Leg Dimensions A and C have been reversed from prior publications.
13-31

Combinations
Combinations are used to create edge to flat and flat

to edge changes in the busway run. One joint stack
assembly is shipped with combination.
Flat Right - Edge Up
Flat Left - Edge Up
Suffix CORU
Suffix COLU
Edge Up - Flat Left
Edge Up - Flat Right
Suffix COUL
Suffix COUR
Flat Right - Edge Down
Flat Left - Edge Down
Suffix CORD
Suffix COLD
Edge Down - Flat Left
Edge Down - Flat Right
Suffix CODL
Suffix CODR
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
See drawings for minimum dimensions. Consult

Busway Order Service for information on custom
lengths.
Combinations, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
*A
B
C
AL
L-Rated
225

10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
400

10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
600

10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
800
400
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
1000
600
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
1200
800
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
1350
1000
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
1600
1200
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
2500
2000
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
3000
2500
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
3200
2000
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
4000
3000,3200
10 (254)
16 (406)
24 (610)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
16 (406)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
24 (610)
*Note: Leg Dimensions A and C have been reversed from prior publications.
13-32
Selection

Center Tap Boxes
Selection
Center tap boxes are non-fusible devices utilized to feed to or take off power from the busway
run. When loads served by the busway run do not require over-current protection, center tap
boxes may be used. If the application requires additional wiring bending space, extended
center tap boxes are available. One joint stack assembly is provided with each center tap box.
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,
3200
4000
25
25
25
25
25
29
29
29
29
33
33
33
33
(635)
(635)
(635)
(635)
(635)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
37 (940)
40(1016)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
20
20
20
24
24
24
(406)
(406)
(406)
(406)
(406)
(406)
(406)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(610)
(610)
(610)
3.9
3.9
3.9
4.2
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.3
6.1
6.3
7.3
7.9
7.9
(99)
(99)
(99)
(107)
(107)
(114)
(122)
(135)
(155)
(160)
(185)
(201)
(201)
28 (711) 9.4 (239)

34 (863) 11.7(297)
29
29
29
29
29
33
33
33
33
37
37
37
37
(737)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
17
17
17
17
18
22
21
21
20
20
23
20
20
(432)
(432)
(432)
(432)
(457)
(559)
(533)
(533)
(508)
(508)
(584)
(508)
(508)
41 (1041) 20 (508)
44 (1118) 19 (483)
21
21
21
21
22
26
25
25
24
24
17
24
24
(533)
(533)
(533)
(533)
(559)
(660)
(635)
(635)
(610)
(610)
(432)
(610)
(610)
24 (610)
23 (584)
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
5
8
9
9
b 1
12
15
b 3
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000

5000
13
Standard and Extended Center End Tap Boxes, Dimensions

Cable Lugs

Per Phase &

Wire Bend Space
Neutral
Ground
Ampere Rating
AStd. B
D
A Ext.. C Std. C Ext. Qty.
Size Lugsa
AL
L-Rated
a 1
225
25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1
b 1
225
25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1
b 1
400
25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 1
b 1
600
25 (635) 16 (406) 3.9 (99)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 2
b 1
800 400
25 (635) 16 (406) 4.2 (107)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 3
b 1
1000 600
25 (635) 16 (406) 4.6 (117)
29 (737) 17 (432) 21 (533) 4
b 1
1200 800
29 (737) 16 (406) 5.2 (132)
33 (838) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4
b 1
1350 1000
29 (737) 16 (406) 5.7 (145)
33 (838) 20 (508) 24 (610) 4
b 1
1600 1200
33 (838) 20 (508) 6.3 (160)
37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 5
b 2
2000 1350,1600 33 (838) 20 (508) 7.4 (188)
37 (940) 20 (508) 24 (610) 6
b 2
2500 2000
37 (940) 24 (610) 8.7 (221)
41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 8
b 2
3000 2500
37 (940) 24 (610) 9.7 (246)
41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9
b 2
3200 2000
37 (940) 24 (610) 9.7 (246)
41 (1041) 20 (508) 24 (610) 9
b 3
4000 3000,3200 45 (1143) 28 (711) 11.9 (302)
49 (1245) 20 (508) 24 (610) 12
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 4
Center Tap Box

Suffix CTBS (Standard)
Suffix CTBX (Extended)
a #6
b
AWG -350 kcmil, Cu/AI.

#4 AWG -600 kcmil, Cu/AI.
(610mm) for isolated ground.
c 24.0"
13-33

In-Line Disconnect Cubicles and Expansion Fittings
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
In-Line Disconnect Cubicle, Dimensions

Description
of Unit
Type of Disconnect
Fusible Switch

Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Digital Sentron
Series MCCBs
Power
Circuit Breaker
Bolted Pressure
Switch

ACCESS compatible
Selection
In-Line Disconnect Cubicles
400-600A FK Visible Blade

800-1200A Vacu-Break
JD6, LD6, MD6, ND6
PD6, RD6
SJD6, SLD6, SMD6, SND6
SPD6 1600A Frame
Cubicles provide a means of mounting switches or circuit breakers

where power feeds to or pulls from the busway system. When bolted
connections are preferred, cubicles may be used in place of plugin units. Cubicles can also be used at ampere ratings that exceed
standard plug-in unit ratings. Modifications to cubicles can be made in
order to accommodate key inter-locks, ground fault detector systems
and power monitoring systems.
200-5000A WL
800A
1200-2500A
3000A
4000A
In-Line Disconnect Cubicle
Consult your local Siemens sales office for details on WLbreakers.

Consult factory for dimensions.
Horizontal
Expansion Fittings, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
AL
L-Rated
225

13 (330)
400

13 (330)
600

13 (330)
800
400
13 (330)
1000
600
13 (330)
1200
800
18 (457)
1350
1000
18 (457)
1600
1200
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
2500
2000
23 (584)
3000
2500
23 (584)
3200
2000
23 (584)
4000
3000,3200
25 (635)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
a 24.0"
13-34
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
18
18
18
18
23
23
23
25
Vertical
Expansion Fittings
Expansion fittings accommodate for expansion and contraction of a
busway run and building movement. Expansion fittings typically are
installed in the center of long busway runs, and at the beginning of
riser runs to minimize stress on the lower most device or where a
busway run crosses an expansion joint of a building.
Qty (1) Expansion Section should be used for every 200ft of
continuous Busway run length and for each building expansion joint.
The Busway run must be positioned accordingly to accommodate the
Expansion Section(s).
Expansion Fitting
Suffix XPFT
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(584)
(584)
(584)
(635)

Tees
Selection
Tees are used to simplify directional and plane

orientation changes in a busway system. Tees can
make 90 bends left or right, and up and down along
the busway run. All tees are supplied with two joint
stack assemblies.
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
18
24
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(305)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(610)
Edgewise Tees, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
D
AL
L-Rated
225

13 (330)
400

13 (330)
600

13 (330)
800
400
13 (330)
1000
600
13 (330)
1200
800
18 (457)
1350
1000
18 (457)
1600
1200
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
2500
2000
27 (686)
3000
2500
27 (686)
3200
2000
27 (686)
4000
3000,3200
29 (737)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
a 12.0"
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
Flatwise tees are used to create left and right branches.

Flat Right
Suffix TEFR
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Flatwise Tees
13
Flatwise Tees, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A, B, C
AL
L-Rated
225

12 (305)
400

12 (305)
600

12 (305)
800
400
12 (305)
1000
600
12 (305)
1200
800
12 (305)
1350
1000
12 (305)
1600
1200
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
2500
2000
18 (457)
3000
2500
18 (457)
3200
2000
18 (457)
4000
3000,3200
24 (610)
Flat Left
Suffix TEFL
Edgewise Tees
Edgewise tees are used to create branches that stem up or down
from the busway run.
Edge Up
Edge Down
Suffix TEEU
Suffix TEED
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
18
18
18
18
27
27
27
29
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(686)
(686)
(686)
(737)
(305mm) For Isolated Ground.
13-35

End Tap Boxes
Selection
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
End tap boxes are non-fusible devices used to connect cable and conduit to the end of a
busway run or where busway runs connect without the need for over-current protection. End
tap boxes may be installed at the end or beginning of a run. Vertical end tap boxes and
horizontal end tap boxes can be installed in both horizontal and vertical applications. Extended
end tap boxes are available if the application requires additional wire bending space. One joint
stack assembly is shipped with each end tap box.
Standard and Extended Horizontal End Tap Boxes, Dimensions

Wire Bend Space
Ampere Rating
A
B Std. B Ext.
C Std. C Ext.
AL
L-Rated
225
13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863)
17 (432) 21 (533)
400
13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863)
17 (432) 21 (533)
600
13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863)
17 (432) 21 (533)
800 400
13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863)
17 (432) 21 (533)
1000 600
13 (330) 30 (762) 34 (863)
17 (432) 21 (533)
1200 800
18 (457) 32 (813) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
1350 1000
18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
1600 1200
18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
2000 1350,1600
18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
2500 2000
27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
3000 2500
27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
3200 2000
27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
4000 3000,3200
29 (737) 33 (838) 37 (940)
20 (508) 24 (610)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

13

13

13
400
13

13
600
13
800
13
1000
18
1200,1350
18
1600
18
2000
18

27

27
2500,3000,3200 27
4000
29
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(686)
(686)
(686)
(737)
30
30
30
30
30
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
(762)
(762)
(762)
(762)
(762)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
(838)
34
34
34
34
34
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
(863)
(863)
(863)
(863)
(863)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
(940)
17
17
17
17
17
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
(432)
(432)
(432)
(432)
(432)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
21
21
21
21
21
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
(533)
(533)
(533)
(533)
(533)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
Standard and Extended Vertical End Tap Boxes, Dimensions

Wire Bend Space
Ampere Rating
A
B Std. B Ext.
C Std. C Ext.
AL
L-Rated
225
13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737)
17 (432) 21 (533)
400
13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737)
17 (432) 21 (533)
600
13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737)
17 (432) 21 (533)
800 400
13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737)
17 (432) 21 (533)
1000 600
13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737)
17 (432) 21 (533)
1200 800
18 (457) 32 (813) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
1350 1000
18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
1600 1200
18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
2000 1350,1600
18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
2500 2000
27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
3000 2500
27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
3200 2000
29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
4000 3000,3200
29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813)
20 (508) 24 (610)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
a #6
M-Rated

13

13

13
400
13

13
600
13
800
13
1000
18
1200,1350
18
1600
18
2000
18

27

27
2500,3000,3200 27
4000
29
AWG -350 kcmil, Cu/AI.
13-36
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(686)
(686)
(686)
(737)
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
(635)
(635)
(635)
(635)
(635)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
(711)
29
29
29
29
29
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
(737)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(737)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
(813)
b
17
17
17
17
17
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
(432)
(432)
(432)
(432)
(432)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
(508)
21
21
21
21
21
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
(533)
(533)
(533)
(533)
(533)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
(610)
#4 AWG -600 kcmil, Cu/AI.
Horizontal End Tap Box

Cable Lugs
Per Phase & Neutral Ground
Qty.
Size
Lugsa
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
6
6
8
9
9
12
a 1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
5
8
9
9
12
15
a 1
Suffix ETHS (Standard)

Suffix ETHX (Extended)
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 4
Vertical End Tap Box

Cable Lugs
Per Phase & Neutral Ground
Qty.
Size
Lugsa
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
6
6
8
9
9
12
a 1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
5
8
9
9
12
15
a 1
Suffix ETVS (Standard)

Suffix ETVX (Extended)
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 4
c 24.0"

Reducers and Phase Rotation Fittings
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10.4
10.4
10.4
10.4
10.4
11.0
11.6
12.6
14.1
14.6
16.6
17.9
18.9
20.9
31.5
(264)
(264)
(264)
(264)
(264)
(280)
(296)
(321)
(359)
(372)
(423)
(455)
(480)
(531)
(800)
Phase Rotation Fittings, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
AL
L-Rated
225

7.9 (200)
400

7.9 (200)
600

7.9 (200)
800
400
8.5 (216)
1000
600
9.4 (239)
1200
800
10.5 (267)
1350
1000
11.5 (293)
1600
1200
12.6 (321)
2000
1350,1600
14.9 (376)
2500
2000
17.6 (447)
3000
2500
19.8 (503)
3200
2000
21.3 (541)
4000
3000,3200
24.3 (617)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
Suffix RFRF
Non-Fused Reducers
Non-fused reducers are used in conjunction with the following
exception to the Fused Reducer in the National Electric Code: For
industrial establishments only,omission of over current protection
shall be permitted at points where busways are reduced in ampacity,
provided that the length of the busway having the smaller ampacity
does not exceed 50 ft. and has an ampacity of at least equal to onethird the rating or setting of the over current device next back on the
line, and provided that such busway is free from contact with
combustible material. Special joint stack connections are provided
for non-fused reducer connections. Consult factory for specific design
guidelines.
Phase-Rotation Fittings
Phase-rotation fittings can be used when the application requires a
phase rotation in the power supply. Phase rotation fittings can be
ordered for phase and ground, phase only and ground only
rotations.
Phase Rotation Fitting
Suffix T
RPG, Phase and Ground
TRPO, Phase Only
TRGO, Ground Only
Phase Rotation Examples
7.9 (200)
7.9 (200)
7.9 (200)
7.9 (200)
8.4 (213)
9.0 (229)
9.6 (245)
10.6 (270)
12.1 (372)
12.6 (321)
14.6 (200)
15.8 (402)
17.3 (439)
19.3 (490)
23.3 (592)
13-37
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Fused Reducer
13
Fused Reducers, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
A
AL
L-Rated
225

11.4 (289)
400

11.4 (289)
600

11.4 (289)
800
400
11.4 (289)
1000
600
11.4 (289)
1200
800
12.5 (318)
1350
1000
13.5 (343)
1600
1200
14.6 (372)
2000
1350,1600
16.9 (429)
2500
2000
19.6 (498)
3000
2500
21.3 (541)
3200
2000
22.9 (582)
4000
3000,3200
31.5 (800)
Selection
Fused Reducers
The National Electric Code requires over current protection when
busway systems are reduced in ampacity. A fused reducer is used to
reduce the allowable ampere rating in those sections of the busway
that do not require a higher rating (i.e. at branch circuit junctures).

Service Heads
Selection
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Service Heads are used to connect busway to a service entrance. In the Sentron Busway line, 3 single-phase service heads and
3-phase service head connections are available. The standard service entrance connection is the 3-phase service head which
consists of one service head for all three phases. 3 single-phase service heads consist of three heads one for each phase and
may be used to meet the requirements of certain applications. To ensure ease of installation of incoming cables, both types of
Sentron service heads are constructed so that the lugs face the Glastic bottom of the box. The Glastic bottom provides
insulation and protection to the incoming cables.
Single-Phase Service Heads, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
Single-Phase A
AL
L-Rated
225
13 (330)
400
225
13 (330)
600

13 (330)
800
400
13 (330)
1000
600
13 (330)
1200
800
18 (457)
1350
1000
18 (457)
1600
1200
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
20 (508)
2500
2000
27 (686)
3000
2500
29 (737)
3200
2000
29 (737)
4000
3000,3200
29 (737)
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
8
9
9
12
a 1
CU M-Rated
225
400
600
800
400
1000

1200
600
1350
800
1600
1000
2000
1200,1350

1600
2500
2000
3000

3200

4000
2500,3000,3200
5000
4000
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
5
8
9
9
12
15
a 1
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
18
20
18
20
27
27
27
29
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(508)
(457)
(508)
(686)
(686)
(686)
(737)
Cable Lugs per

Phase and Neutral
Qty.
Size
Ground
Lugsa
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 4
Three-Phase Service Heads, Dimensions (standard/min.)

Ampere Rating
Three-Phase B
AL
L-Rated
225
13 (330)
400
225
13 (330)
600

13 (330)
800
400
13 (330)
1000
600
13 (330)
1200
800
18 (457)
1350
1000
18 (457)
1600
1200
18 (457)
2000
1350,1600
18 (457)
2500
2000
27 (686)
3000
2500
27 (686)
3200
2000
27 (686)
4000
3000,3200
29 (737)
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
8
9
9
12
a 1
CU M-Rated
225
400
600
800
400
1000

1200
600
1350
800
1600
1000
2000
1200,1350

1600
2500
2000
3000

3200

4000
2500,3000,3200
5000
4000
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
6
5
8
9
9
12
15
a 1
a #6
AWG - 350 kcmil, Cu / Al.
13-38
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
18
18
18
18
27
27
27
29
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(330)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(457)
(686)
(686)
(686)
(737)
b #4
Three Single-Phase Service Heads

Suffix V1TX
Cable Lugs per

Phase and Neutral
Qty.
Size
Ground
Lugsa
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 1
b 2
b 1
b 2
b 2
b 2
b 3
b 4
AWG - 600 kcmil, Cu / Al.
Three-Phase Service Head

Suffix V3TX

Hangers
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
13.5
13.5
13.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
23.0
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(343)
(343)
(343)
(470)
(470)
(470)
(584)
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH1
SXTH2
SXTH2
SXTH2
SXTH3
SXTH3
SXTH3
SXTH4
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
13
Trapeze Hanger, Dimensions and Catalogue Numbers

A Dimensions Flat Mounted
Ampere Rating
Inches (mm)
Catalogue Numbera
AL
L-Rated
225

10.0 (254)
SXTH1
400

10.0 (254)
SXTH1
600

10.0 (254)
SXTH1
800
400
10.0 (254)
SXTH1
1000
600
10.0 (254)
SXTH1
1200
800
10.0 (254)
SXTH1
1350
1000
13.5 (343)
SXTH2
1600
1200
13.5 (343)
SXTH2
2000
1350,1600
13.5 (343)
SXTH2
2500
2000
13.5 (343)
SXTH3
3000
2500
13.5 (343)
SXTH3
3200
2000
13.5 (343)
SXTH3
4000
3000,3200
23.0 (584)
SXTH4
Selection
Trapeze Hanger
A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron
Busway in both vertical and horizontal applications. Standard
trapeze hangers support Sentron Busway in horizontal applications
on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers. Additional hangers may be used if
structural requirements mandate their use. The contractor must
supply drop rods to complete assembly for trapeze hangers.
Use SXTH1 for Edge Mounted.
Flat Mounted
Spring Hanger, Catalogue Numbers

Catalogue
Ampere Rating
10ft.
AL
L-Rated
225

SXSH4
400

SXSH4
600

SXSH4
800
400
SXSH4
1000 600
SXSH4
1200 800
SXSH4
1350 1000
SXSH4
1600 1200
SXSH4
2000 1350,1600
SXSH4
2500 2000
SXSH4
3000 2500
SXSH4
3200 2000
SXSH4
4000 3000,3200
SXSH4
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
Assembly floor to ceiling height

12 ft.
14 ft.
16 ft.
18 ft.
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH8
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH6
SXSH8
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH4
SXSH2
SXSH6
SXSH8
SXSH8
SXSH8
SXSH6
SXSH8
SXSH8
SXSH10
SXSH10
SXSH6
SXSH8
SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH12
SXSH6 SXSH8 SXSH10 SXSH12 SXSH12
SXSH6 SXSH10 SXSH12 SXSH14 SXSH14
Edge Mounted
Spring Hanger
Spring hangers and floor support hangers must be
used to provide secure mounting of the busway run
in vertical applications. Spring hangers support the
weight of the busway on each floor and also
compensate for minimal building movement and
thermal expansion. Maximum distance between
spring hangers may not exceed 16 ft. (4.88m). When
ordering 18 ft. (5.49m) floor to ceiling height
assemblies, intermediate support hangers are
necessary.
*Note: Flanges do not offer support to the busway. Flanges provide a

means of covering the hole created in the existing structure.
13-39
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Hangers
Structural Steel Hanger, Dimensions and Catalogue Numbers

A Dimensions Catalogue
Ampere Rating
Inches (mm) Number
AL
L-Rated
225

10.0 (254)
SXSS1
400

10.0 (254)
SXSS1
600

10.0 (254)
SXSS1
800
400
10.0 (254)
SXSS1
1000
600
10.0 (254)
SXSS1
1200
800
10.0 (254)
SXSS1
1350
1000
13.5 (343)
SXSS2
1600
1200
13.5 (343)
SXSS2
2000
1350,1600
13.5 (343)
SXSS2
2500
2000
18.5 (470)
SXSS3
3000
2500
18.5 (470)
SXSS3
3200
2000
18.5 (470)
SXSS3
4000
3000,3200
23.0 (584)
SXSS4
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
23.0
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(254)
(343)
(343)
(343)
(343)
(343)
(343)
(584)
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS1
SXSS2
SXSS2
SXSS2
SXSS2
SXSS2
SXSS2
SXSS4
Single Drop Rod Hanger, Catalogue Numbers

Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
AL
L-Rated
225

SXDRA1
400

SXDRA1
600

SXDRA1
800
400
SXDRA2
1000
600
SXDRA3
1200
800
SXDRA4
1350
1000
SXDRA5
1600
1200
SXDRA6
2000
1350,1600
SXDRA7
2500
2000
3000
2500
3200
2000
4000
3000,3200
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
13-40
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
SXDRC1
SXDRC1
SXDRC1
SXDRC1
SXDRC2
SXDRC3
SXDRC4
SXDRC5
SXDRC6
SXDRC6
SXDRC7
Selection
Structural Steel Hanger

A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron Busway in
both vertical and horizontal applications. Structural Steel hangers support
Sentron Busway in horizontal applications on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers.
Additional hangers may be used if structural requirements mandate their
use.
Single Drop Rod Hanger

A complete offering of hangers is available to support Sentron Busway in
both vertical and horizontal applications. Single drop rod hangers support
Sentron Busway in horizontal applications on 10 ft. (3.05m) centers.
Additional hangers may be used if structural requirements mandate their
use. The contractor must supply drop rods to complete assembly for single
drop rod hangers.
Note: Drop rod hangers can only be used when

phase arrows are pointing up.

Hangers and End Closers
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
16.3
16.3
16.3
20.8
20.8
20.8
25.3
(311)
(311)
(311)
(311)
(311)
(311)
(311)
(311)
(413)
(413)
(413)
(527)
(527)
(527)
(641)
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
10.4
10.4
10.4
12.6
(156)
(156)
(156)
(156)
(156)
(156)
(156)
(156)
(206)
(206)
(206)
(264)
(264)
(264)
(321)
4.2
4.2
4.2
3.8
3.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
4.4
3.9
2.8
3.6
2.5
1.8
2.5
(107)
(107)
(107)
(97)
(97)
(72)
(72)
(72)
(111)
(98)
(70)
(92)
(64)
(46)
(64)
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH1
SXWH2
SXWH2
SXWH2
SXWH3
SXWH3
SXWH3
SXWH4
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Wall Mounted Hanger ensures the minimum clearance

between the wall and the busway run.
13
Wall Mounted Hanger, Dimensions and Catalogue Numbers

Catalogue
Ampere Rating
A
B
C
Number
AL
L-Rated
225

12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
400

12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
600

12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 4.2 (107) SXWH1
800
400
12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1
1000
600
12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 3.8 (97) SXWH1
1200
800
12.3 (311) 6.1 (156) 2.8 (72) SXWH1
1350
1000
16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 4.4 (111) SXWH2
1600
1200
16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 3.9 (98) SXWH2
2000
1350,1600
16.3 (413) 8.1 (206) 2.8 (70) SXWH2
2500
2000
20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 3.6 (92) SXWH3
3000
2500
20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 2.5 (64) SXWH3
3200
2000
20.8 (527) 10.4 (264) 1.8 (46) SXWH3
4000
3000,3200
25.3 (641) 12.6 (321) 2.5 (64) SXWH4
Selection
Wall Mounted Hanger

Wall Mounted Hangers are used for horizontal
applications close to a wall. The busway can be mounted
either edgewise or flatwise to the wall.
End Closers
End closers safely terminate a busway run and protect the
bus bar ends. End closers may be removed easily in order
to extend a busway run. End closers are shipped with
Glastic insulation pieces, however, joint stacks and
inspection covers are not included.
End Closers
(Joint stack and covers not included)
Suffix ECLS
13-41

Roof and Wall Flanges
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Roof, wall and floor flanges are available for Sentron Busway.
When the busway run passes thorough a roof, wall or ceiling,
a flange should be used. Flanges do not offer support to the
busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole created
Roof Flanges, Dimensions

Ampere Rating A
B
AL
L-Rated
225

12 (305)
18 (457)
400

12 (305)
18 (457)
600

12 (305)
18 (457)
800
400
12 (305)
18 (457)
1000
600
12 (305)
18 (457)
1200
800
12 (305)
18 (457)
1350
1000
16 (406)
22 (559)
1600
1200
16 (406)
22 (559)
2000
1350,1600
16 (406)
22 (559)
2500
2000
20.5 (521) 22 (559)
3000
2500
20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
3200
2000
20.5 (521) 26.5 (673)
4000
3000,3200
25 (635)
31 (787)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
20.5 (521)
20.5 (521)
20.5 (521)
25 (635)
13-42
M-Rated

400

600
800
1000
1200,1350
1600
2000

2500,3000,3200
4000
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
11 (279)
12 (305)
12 (305)
13 (330)
15 (381)
15 (381)
17 (432)
18 (457)
19 (483)
21 (533)
26 (660)
Roof Flanges
Roof flanges are available for Sentron Busway. When the busway run passes
thorough a roof, a flange should be used. Flanges do not offer support to the
busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole created in the existing
structure. Additional sealant may be required to meet fire codes and all other
local requirements. No caulking or gasketing is provided with Sentron flanges.
Roof flanges provide a watertight seal for use with NEMA 3R and IP66 rated
busway. Roof pitch must be indicated on drawings when ordering roof flanges.
Roof Flanges
Suffix GRFL
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457))
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
22 (559)
22 (559)
22 (559)
26.5 (673)
26.5 (673)
26.5 (673)
31 (787)
Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges, Dimensions

Ampere Rating A
B
AL
L-Rated
225

11 (279)
7 (178)
400

11 (279)
7 (178)
600

11 (279)
7 (178)
800
400
11 (279)
7 (178)
1000
600
12 (305)
8 (203)
1200
800
13 (330)
9 (229)
1350
1000
14 (356)
10 (254)
1600
1200
15 (381)
11 (279)
2000
1350,1600
17 (432)
13 (330)
2500
2000
20 (508)
16 (406)
3000
2500
22 (559)
18 (457)
3200
2000
24 (610)
20 (508)
4000
3000,3200
26 (660)
22 (559)
CU
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000

2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
Selection
in the existing structure. Additional sealant may be required to

meet fire codes and all other local requirements. No caulking or
gasketing is provided with Sentron flanges.
Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges

Wall/Floor flanges are available for Sentron Busway. When the busway run
passes thorough a wall or ceiling, a flange should be used. Flanges do not
offer support to the busway. Flanges provide a means of covering the hole
created in the existing structure. Additional sealant may be required to meet
fire codes and all other local requirements. No caulking or gasketing is
provided with Sentron flanges.
Wall, Ceiling and Floor Flanges
Suffix GWFL
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
7 (178)
8 (203)
8 (203)
9 (229)
11 (279)
11 (279)
13 (330)
14 (356)
15 (381)
17 (432)
22 (559)

Siemens Sentron Busway Quick Reference
General
Critical Dimensions:

Busway that passes through a wall, ceiling or floor:

b centerline of a joint to the wall, ceiling or floor = 7 in. min.
b centerline of a joint (above a floor support) to a floor = 16 in. min.
b joints cannot be positioned inside a wall, ceiling or floor (joints must be accessible for maintenance)
Feeder Busway clearances:

b from the top of the busway to a ceiling/floor/wall or other busway = 6 in. min.
b from the side of the busway to a ceiling/floor/wall or other busway = 4 in. min

Plug-in Busway clearances:

b plug-In busway clearances depend on the configuration of bus plugs (see bus pug clearance charts in the Sentron
Selection and Application Guide)

b otherwise, clearances for feeder busway apply

b note orientation of the operating handle and provide clearance for access & operation
13
Feeder Busway length:

b minimum length = 14.38 in.
b maximum length = 10 ft.
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Plug-In & Riser length:

b available only in 4, 6, 8 and 10 ft. lengths
Flat Elbow section:
b maximum leg length = 4 ft.
b minimum leg length: Varies according to amperage and bus bar material
Edge Elbow section:

b maximum length = 4 ft.
b minimum leg length = 10 in.
Combination and Offset Elbows:

b maximum leg lengths = 4 ft.
b minimum leg lengths: varies according to amperage and bus bar material (See Sentron Selection and Application Guide)
Elbow - Stub Combinations:

b maximum leg length = 4 ft.
b minimum leg length = 2.50 in. + (case size x .5)
Critical Details:

b busway DRAWINGs must include all relevant dimensions

b CENTERLINE dimensions are expected (please note any dimensions that are not center line dimensions)

b WALLs and FLOORs must be located (wall & floor thickness must be included)

b locate the FRONT of all switchboards and provide the phasing of any existing boards (advise if any PADs are located
under boards)

b when using RISER plug-in busway please note the desired direction of the load side of bus plugs (G,A,B,C,N from left
to right will position the load side to the bottom and UP is On handle operation)

b TRANSFORMER THROAT connections require complete details.

b Horizontal plug-in busway must be oriented with the A phase on top (bolt head on top).

b In-Line Disconnect CUBICLEs are engineered to order. The FRONT of the cubicle and Breaker information must be
specified.

b Panels - panel type and size / if a certain panel or breaker height is required (those dimensions)

b Curb height
Intermediate Hangers

b Add qty (1) Intermediate Hanger for floor to ceiling height greater than 16ft. Consult factory if greater than 32 ft.
Expansion Sections:

b Qty (1) Expansion Section should be used for every 200ft of continuous Busway run length and for each building
expansion joint. The Busway run must be positioned accordingly to accommodate the Expansion Section(s).
Outdoor Busway:

b route busway to minimize outdoor busway run length

b call factory before quoting outdoor busway runs over 50 ft.
b avoid installing busway near exhaust pipes that may generate steam or caustic vapors
13-43
Busway Power Distribution

BD Plug-In (225 1600 Ampere)
Selection
2251600 Amperes
Ampere
Rating
Plug In
10 0
Straight
Length
Catalogue
Number
Case
Dimensions
(inches)
Ground
Bus
Add
Suffix
Shipping
Weight Lb./Ft.
90 Elbow Prefix
Catalogue Number
Switchboard
Connection
Prefix
Building Expansion
Fitting

Catalogue Number
ALD302
ALD304
ALD306
ALD308
ALD310
ALD312
FEA302
FEA304
FEA306
FEA308
FEA310
FEA312
EPA302
EPA304
EPA306
EPA308
EPA310
EPA312
ALD4024
ALD4044
ALD4064
ALD4084
ALD4104
ALD4124
FEA4024
FEA4044
FEA4064
FEA4084
FEA4104
FEA4124
LDP302
LDP304
LDP306
LDP308
LDP310
LDP313
LDP316
FEP302
FEP304
FEP306
FEP308
FEP310
FEP313
FEP316
LDP4024
LDP4044
LDP4064
LDP4084
LDP4104
FEP4024
FEP4044
FEP4064
FEP4084
FEP4104
Aluminum
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
3 Phase, 3 Wire
600V or Less
225
400
ABD302
ABD304
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
600
800
ABD306
ABD308
6116 x 878
6116 x 878
1000
1200
ABD310
ABD312
12 8 x 8 8
1218 x 878
1
9
10
13
14
22
28
GK
GK
GK
3 Phase, 4 Wire Full Capacity Neutral

225
400
ABD4024
ABD4044
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
600
800
1000
1200
ABD4064
ABD4084
ABD4104
ABD4124
6116 x 878
818 x 878
1218 x 878
1218 x 878
1012
12
1512
27
31
38
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
6116 x 878
6116 x 878
1218 x 878
1218 x 878
09
1212
1312
1812
22
28
29

GK
GK
GK
GK
277/480V
EPA4024
EPA4044
EPA4064
EPA4084
EPA4104
EPA4124
Copper
3 Phase, 3 Wire
225
400
600
BDP302
BDP304
BDP306
800
1000
1350
1600
BDP308
BDP310
BDP313
BDP316

GK
GK
GK
GK
GK

225
400
600
BDP4024
BDP4044
BDP4064
800
1000
BDP4084
BDP4104
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
4116 x 878
818 x 878
818 x 878
600V or Less
EJP302
EJP304
EJP306
EJP308
EJP310
EJP313
EJP316
12
1412
1512
28
32
GK
GK
GK
GK
277/480V
EJP4024
EJP4044
EJP4064
EJP4084
EJP4104
M Rating / Standard Rating

Conversion Table
1000/A Square Inch
M Rating
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Standard 55C Rating

BDP
0600
0800
0800
1000
1350
1600
Right Edgewise
Elbow (-2)
Left Edgewise
Elbow (-4)
Suffix
Description
-1
Right Flatwise
-2
Right Edgewise
For inches / millimeters conversion, see page 583.
-3
Left Flatwise
Consult
-4
Left Edgewise
local sales office for five foot length.

List prices are for standard construction, for higher
short circuit ratings add an H after the D or P
(ABDH302 or BDPH302) and add 20% to the list price.
Consult sales office for ratings.
GK is an internal ground bus. For any other ground
configuration, consult local sales office. List price is
per foot. Please use following footage for fittings:
Elbow - 3 foot
SWB - 1
End Cable Tap Box - 1
Center Cable Tap Box - 10
Building Expansion - 10
13-44
Switchboard
stub includes flange to cover cutout in

top of indoor switchboard and 6 of bus inside switchboard. Connecting hardware supplied by switchboard
manufacturer.
Appropriate suffix must be

added to Elbow Catalogue
Number to order.

BD Plug-In (225 1600 Ampere)
Selection
2251600 Amperes
Cable Tap Box

End Catalogue Number
End Closure
Center Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Hangers
Catalogue Number
Aluminum
E
T
E
L
O
S
B
O
3 Phase, 3 Wire
600V or Less
EBA302
CBA302
ECP6
EBA304
CBA304
ECP6
EBA306
CBA306
ECP10
EBA308
CBA308
ECP10
EBA310
CBA310
ECA10
EBA312
CBA312
ECA10
EBA4024
CBA4024
ECP6
EBA4044
CBA4044
ECP6
EBA4064
CBA4064
ECP10
EBA4084
CBA4084
ECA8
EBA4104
CBA4104
ECA10
EBA4124
CBA4124
ECA10
CTB302
ECP6
CTB304
ECP6
CTB306
ECP6
CTB308
ECP10
CTB310
ECP10
CTB313
ECA10
CTB316
ECA10
ETB4024
CTB4024
ECP6
ETB4044
CTB4044
ECP6
ETB4064
CTB4064
ECP6
ETB4084
CTB4084
ECA8
BDH12
ETB4104
CTB4104
ECA8
BDH12
BDH10
BDH10
BDH12
BDH12
3 Phase, 3 Wire
ETB302
ETB304
ETB306
ETB308
ETB310
ETB313
ETB316
600V or Less
BDH10
BDH10
BDH10
BDH12
277/480V
BDH10
BDH10
Rod-Hanger Adaptor Packaged 10 per carton (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UJ100
Fusible Feed-In Switch

Rating
Volts
240 AC or
250 DC
600 AC
Includes
3 Phase, 3 Wire
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Amperes
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400
600
FTS3042
FTS3062
FTS4042
FTS4062
400
600
FTS3046
FTS3066
FTS4046
FTS4066
busway stub. Total length added to run is 2

for 225A and 400A aluminum or 225A600A copper;
3 for all others. Box is designed to connect to offset
bus-bar ends. When it is to be connected to straight
bus-bar ends, adaptor will be furnished upon request.
Must be factory-assembled to busway. Complete
device includes 10 busway. For aluminum catalogue
number, change ABD to CBA for copper change
BDP to CTB.
Two
hangers included free of charge with each busway section, elbow, tee and cross.
FTS is designed to connect to the offset bus
bar ends. Arrangements contrary to this must
be specified.
When ordering the fusible feed-in switch, add to the
catalogue number -C for use with copper and -A
for use with aluminum busway.
The
13-45
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Copper
277/480V
13
BDH12

XL-U Aluminum (225 5000 Ampere)
Selection
2255000 Amperes / 600 Volts or Less

Non-Ventilated 225600 Amperes
Busway Catalogue Number
Ampere
Rating
Basic
Catalogue
Number
Case
Shipping
Dimensions Weight
Feeder Plug-In
(inches)
Lb./Ft.
Busway Busway
Ground
Bus
Adder
UH302AB
UH304AB
UH306AB
412 x 10
412 x 10
512 x 10
8
9
10
412 x 10
412 x 10
512 x 10
8
9
10
90
Elbow
Tee
SwitchBoard
Connection
Cross
TransTrans- former
former Tap
Throat 1-3 Phase
Transformer
Tap
3-1 Phase
Roof
Flange
3-Pole
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
225
400
600
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
4-Pole Full Neutral

225
400
600
UH502AB
UH504AB
UH506AB
Note: For non-ventilated 225-600A busway with PVC bars add 15%.
Ventilated 8005000 Amperes With Ground Bus

Busway Sections Complete
Ampere Rating
Edgewise
Flatwise
Basic
Catalogue
Number
Case
Shipping
Outdoor
Dimensions Weight
Feeder
Plug-In Feeder
90
(inches)
Lb./Ft.
Busway Busway Adder
Elbow
Tee
Cross
Switch
Board
TransConnec- Transformer
tion
former Tap
Throat 1-3 Phase 3-1 Phase
Transformer
Tap
Flange
3-Pole
800
1000
800
800
UH308AV
UH310AV
412 x 10
412 x 10
10
11
1200
1350
1000
1200
UH312AV
UH313AV
5 2 x 10
512 x 10
12
13
1600
2000
1350
1600
UH316AV
UH320AV
7 2 x 10
712 x 10
16
19
2500
2000
UH325AV
912 x 10
23
3000
3000
UH330AV
712 x 2058
32
4000
5000
3500
4000
UH340AV
UH350AV
912 x 2058
912 x 2058
41
45
Consult Sales
4-Pole Full Neutral

800
1000
800
800
UH508AV
UH510AV
412 x 10
412 x 10
11
12
1200
1350
1000
1200
UH512AV
UH513AV
512 x 10
512 x 10
14
15
1600
2000
1350
1600
UH516AV
UH520AV
7 2 x 10
712 x 10
18
21
2500
2000
UH525AV
9 2 x 10
26
3000
3000
UH530AV
712 x 2058
35
4000
5000
3500
4000
UH540AV
UH550AV
912 x 2058
912 x 2058
47
52
For inches / millimeters conversion, see Application Data

Section.
Note: To form complete catalogue number, use basic
catalogue number and substitute suffix of required
item. Example: Basic busway Catalogue Number
U316AV accessory switchboard stub with ground
bus U316AVSG.
To price complete device, add the following feeder busway
footage to the labour charges shown:
XL-U Elbow 2 XLU-EXP Section 4
XL-U Tee 3
XL-U SWBD Stub 1
XL-U Cross 4
XL-U Reducer 4
List
prices are for standard construction for higher short

circuit rating add an HH after the U (UHH302ABP)
and add 45% to the list price. Consult sales office for
available ratings.
13-46
For
elbows other than 90, accessory charge is doubled.

stub includes flange to cover cutout in
top of indoor switchboard and 8 of bus inside switchboard. Connecting hardware supplied by switchboard
manufacturer.
Ventilated XL-U busway has two ratings; see above for
edgewise or flatwise mounting.
XL-U also comes in nonventilated housing; consult local
sales office.
Transformer throat connection includes gasketed box
sized to match throat plus flexible straps and bolts.
No Busway footage is included. For connection to transformers not manufactured by Siemens,
consult factory.
Switchboard
Consult Sales
Roof

XL-U Aluminum (225 5000 Ampere)
Selection

Non
Ampere Fusible Fusible
Rating
Reducer Reducer
Expansion Tap Box

Section
End
Center
Suffix J
Suffix B Suffix M
Wall Flange
Catalog
Number
Floor Support
Catalog
Number
End Closure
Catalog
Number
Hangers
Draft
Weather Catalog
Barrier Stop
Number
3-Pole
225
400
600
Consult Sales
UF145
UF145
UF145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS155
UE145
UE145
UE155
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH155
UF145
UF145
UF155
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UE145
UE145
UE155
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH155
Wall Flange
Floor Support
End Closure
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
UF145
UF145
UF155
UF155
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UE145
UE145
UE155
UE155
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
225
400
600
13
4-Pole Full Neutral
Ventilated 8005000 Amperes with Ground Bus

Ampere
Rating
Non
EdgeFusible Fusible
wise
Reducer Reducer
Expansion Tap Box

Section
End
Center
Suffix J
Suffix B Suffix M
Hangers
Draft
Weather Catalog
Barrier Stop
Number
3-Pole
800
1000
1200
1350
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
1600
2000
Consult Sales
UF175
UF175
UFS179
UFS179
UE175
UE175
Consult Sales
UH175
UH175
2500
Consult Sales
UF195
UFS179
UE195
Consult Sales
UH195
3000
Consult Sales
UF275
UFS279
UE275
Consult Sales
UH275
4000
5000
Consult Sales
UF295
UF295
UFS279
UFS279
UE295
UE295
Consult Sales
UH295
UH295
UF145
UF145
UF155
UF155
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UE145
UE145
UE155
UE155
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH155
UH155
Consult Sales
UH175
UH175
Consult Sales
UH195
UH275
UH295
UH295
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH155
UH155
4-Pole Full Neutral

800
1000
1200
1350
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
1600
2000
Consult Sales
UF175
UF175
UFS179
UFS179
UE175
UE175
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
J
J
B
B
M
M
Consult Sales
UF195
UF275
UF295
UF295
UFS179
UFS279
UFS279
UFS279
UE195
UE275
UE295
UE295
2500
3000
4000
5000
Ampere
Rating
of Center
Tap Box
0600
01350
Width
(Inches)
Minimum
Gutter
(Inches)
Lugs
Per
Phase
25
30
16
19
(2) 600 M kcmil

(4) 600 M kcmil

Section.
Busway Ampere
System Rating
XL-U
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Phase Bar Ground Bus Material

Material Copper Aluminum
0225600A
100%
08002500A
50%
AI
and
Cu
3000A
50%
40006500A
50%
100%
50%
50%
50%
Note: Ventilated busway has aluminum ground bus as

standard.
For
reducer, consult page 13-2 (J). On fusible reducers no

fuses are supplied.
Tap boxes furnished with standard pressure wire grip
connectors. For compression lugs add 30% to list price.
Floor and ceiling flanges are ordered by description.
Price the same as wall flanges.
For rod-hanger adaptor UJ100 see page 13-27.
13-47

XL-U Copper (225 6500 Ampere)
Selection

Busway Catalog Number
SwitchBoard
Connection
Ampere
Rating
Basic
Catalog
Number
Case
Shipping
Dimensions Weight
Feeder
(inches)
Lb./Ft.
Busway
Plug-In
Busway
Ground
Bus
Adder
90
Elbow
Tee
Cross
TransTrans- former
former Tap
Throat 1-3 Phase
Transformer
Tap
3-1 Phase
Roof
Flange
3-Pole
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
225
400
600
UH302CB
UH304CB 412 x 10
UH306CB
8
12
13
Consult Sales
9
13
15
Consult Sales
4-Pole Full Neutral

225
400
600
UH502CB
UH504CB 412 x 10
UH506CB
Ventilated 8006500 Amperes With Ground Bus

Busway Sections Complete
Ampere Rating
Edgewise
Flatwise
Basic
Catalog
Number
Case
Shipping
Dimensions Weight
Feeder
(inches)
Lb./Ft.
Busway
Plug-In
Busway
Outdoor 90
Feeder
Elbow
Tee
Cross
Switch
Board
TransConnec- former
tion
Throat
Transformer
Tap
1-3 Phase
Transformer
Tap
Roof
3-1 Phase Flange
3-Pole
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
800
1000
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
4000
4500
UH308CV
UH310CV
UH312CV
UH313CV
UH316CV
UH320CV
UH325CV
UH330CV
UH340CV
UH350CV
412 x 10
412 x 10
412 x 10
412 x 10
512 x 10
512 x 10
712 x 10
912 x 10
712 x 2058
712 x 2058
12
15
16
19
23
26
34
41
57
70
6000
6500
5000
5500
UH360CV
UH365CV
9 2 x 20 8
912 x 2058
85
98
412 x 10
412 x 10
412 x 10
412 x 10
512 x 10
512 x 10
712 x 10
712 x 10
712 x 2058
712 x 2058
912 x 2058
912 x 2058
14
18
19
23
28
30
42
61
70
86
105
122
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
F
F
P
P
W
W
L
L
T
T
X
X
S
S
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
F
F
P
P
W
W
L
L
T
T
X
X
S
S
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
4-Pole Full Neutral

800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
6500
800
1000
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
4000
4500
5000
5500
UH508CV
UH510CV
UH512CV
UH513CV
UH516CV
UH520CV
UH525CV
UH530CV
UH540CV
UH550CV
UH560CV
UH565CV
M Rating / Standard Rating

Conversion Table
1000/A Square Inch
M Rating
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Standard 55C Rating

XL-U
800
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
2500
3000
4000
5000
Note: To form complete catalog number, use basic catalog

number and substitute suffix of required item.
Example: Basic busway Catalog Number U316CV
accessory switchboard stub with ground bus
U316CVSG.
To price complete device, add the following feeder busway
footage to the labour charges shown:
XL-U Elbow 2 XLU-EXP Section 4
XL-U Tee 3
XL-U SWBD Stub 1
XL-U Cross 4
XL-U Reducer 4
List
prices are for standard construction for higher short

circuit rating add an HH after the U (UHH302CBP and
add 45% to the list price. Consult sales office for
available ratings.
For elbows other than 90, accessory charge is doubled.
Switchboard stub includes flange to cover cutout in top
of indoor switchboard and 8 of bus inside switchboard.
Connecting hardware supplied by switchboard manufacturer.

Section.
13-48
Ventilated
XL-U busway has two ratings; see above for

edgewise or flatwise mounting. XL-U also comes in nonventilated housing; consult local sales office.
Transformer throat connection includes gasketed box
sized to match throat plus flexible straps and bolts.
No Busway footage is included. For connection to transformers not manufactured by Siemens, consult factory.
For copper ground bus multiply footage price by 1.05.

XL-U Copper (225 6500 Ampere)
Selection

Non
Ampere Fusible Fusible
Rating
Reducer Reducer
Expansion Tap Box

Section
End
Center
Suffix J
Suffix B Suffix M
Wall Flange
Floor Support
End Closure
Hangers
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
UF145
UF145
UF145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UE145
UE145
UE145
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH145
UF145
UF145
UF145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UE145
UE145
UE145
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH145
Wall Flange
Floor Support
End Closure
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Draft
Weather Catalogue
Barrier Stop
Number
3-Pole
225
400
600
4-Pole Full Neutral
13
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
225
400
600
Ventilated 8005000 Amperes with Ground Bus

Ampere
Rating
EdgeNon
wise
Fusible Fusible
Reducer Reducer
Expansion Tap Box

Section
End
Center
Suffix J
Suffix B Suffix M
Hangers
Draft
Weather Catalogue
Barrier Stop
Number
3-Pole
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
6500
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
J
J
B
B
M
M
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
J
J
B
B
M
M
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
UF145
UF145
UF145
UF145
UF155
UF155
UF175
UF195
UF275
UF275
UF295
UF295
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS179
UFS179
UFS279
UFS275
UFS279
UFS279
UE145
UE145
UE145
UE145
UE155
UE155
UE175
UE195
UE275
UE275
UE295
UE295
UF145
UF145
UF145
UF145
UF155
UF155
UF175
UF195
UF275
UF275
UF295
UF295
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS145
UFS179
UFS179
UFS279
UFS279
UFS279
UFS279
UE145
UE145
UE145
UE145
UE155
UE155
UE175
UE195
UE275
UE275
UE295
UE295
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH145
UH145
UH155
UH155
UH175
UH195
UH275
UH275
UH295
UH295
4-Pole
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
6500
Ampere
Rating
of Center
Tap Box
Width
(Inches)
Minimum
Gutter
(Inches)
Lugs
Per
Phase
0600
01350
25
30
16
19
(2) 600 M kcmil

(4) 600 M kcmil

Section.
Busway Ampere
System Rating
XL-U
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
Consult Sales
UH145
UH145
UH145
UH145
UH155
UH155
UH175
UH195
UH275
UH275
UH295
Phase Bar Ground Bus Material

Material Copper Aluminum
225600A
100%
8002500A
50%
AI and Cu 50%
3000A
40006500A
25%
100%
50%
25%
25%
Note: Ventilated busway has aluminum ground bus as

standard.
For
reducer, consult page 13-2 (J). On fusible reducers no

fuses are supplied.
boxes furnished with standard pressure wire grip
connectors. For compression lugs add 30% to list price.
Floor and ceiling flanges are ordered by description.
Price the same as wall flanges.
For rod-hanger adaptor UJ100 see page 13-27.
Tap
13-49
XJ-L HD Busway System

XJ-L HD Busway Introduction
Competitive Advantages
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
XJ-L HD Busway is available up to 400A. First introduced

in 1960, XJ-L Busway continues to be the leading power
distribution solution for demanding applications that require
reliable, high quality power. XJ-L HD Busway is the optimal
choice for both contractors and users concerned with
designing superior electrical systems that require a high plug
density and optimal space utilization.
Competitive advantages:
n Compact size small cross section for applications where
busway routing is constrained
n Joint Connection dual spring clamp assemblies ensure
reliable, maintenance-free joints
n Safety plug-in outlets are IP2X finger safe (optional XOC
outlet covers increase system to IP40)
n Reliability fundamental design has a 60 year history of
reliability
n Service simple snap together installation, maintenance
free joints, factory stock of critical components and large
distribution inventory of bus plugs ensure quick and easy
serviceability
n Fittings elbow, tee, crosses, flanged end, and tap boxes
are offered in standard and custom configurations
n Compatibility the full range of XJ-L HD bus plugs are
interchangeable between 100A, 225A and 400A busway
13-50
Key features:
to twelve 100A bus plugs can be installed per 10 of
plug-in busway. Plug-in busway can be configured with six
plug-in openings per side (standard) or twelve on one side
(high density).
n Bus plugs are readily installed on energized busway and
are fully interchangeable between 100, 225 and 400A
configurations.
n Bus plugs are available with fusible or circuit breaker
disconnects, configured with a wide variety of optional
receptacles, branch circuit breakers, drop cords, power
monitoring, indicator lights, etc.
n Bus bars are solid copper (98% conductivity) and tin plated
for superior electrical performance and corrosion resistance
(optional silver plating is also available). The solid bus bar
design provides superior short circuit strength (up to 35 kA)
compared to channel style conductors and cable.
n Totally enclosed steel housing is robust, guarding against
incidental contact and contamination of live parts. Enclosed
box design will not twist or distort during bus plug
installation.
n Installation is fast and easy. Joint connections simply snap
together without special tools, housing couplers, or bus
connectors.
n Suitable for horizontal and vertical mounting and under-the
floor applications.
n Up

XJ-L HD Busway Overview
XJ-L HD Busway
With XJ-L HD Busway, you get an

exclusive, optional isolated ground
design that ensures clean power.
Unlike bonded ground designs that
may convey surges from one electrical
device to another, the XJ-L HD optional
isolated ground system is well suited
for high-tech computer intensive
environments. The ground bar is the
same size as the phase bars, with the
same ampere rating. Installation is easy,
Cost
Siemens XJ-L HD Busway offers a
lower cost solution, compared to cable
and conduit, sandwich style busway
or even light duty track busway. Snap
together installation requires no special
tools and is fast, easy and maintenance
free. Solid, highly conductive bus bars
minimize electrical losses and ensure
long-term energy savings.
Equipment protection
Dependability
With over one million feet in service,
XJ-L HD Busway has a proven track
record. The busway joints are easy
to install and maintenance free. Solid
copper bus bars and totally enclosed
steel housings are designed for
decades of dependable service.
Flexibility
Siemens XJ-L HD Busway is available
in a wide variety of straight lengths,
elbows, tees, crosses, and tap boxes
that can be installed and then readily
expanded or reconfigured to meet
changing requirements. Custom
fittings and straight lengths can be
engineered to tailor the busway
Critical equipment is protected via

fuse or circuit breaker plugs. Due to
their proximity, the plugs provide a
localized method of protection and
disconnection.
Space
Space in critical power/data center
facilities is at a premium. XJ-L HD
Busway requires less space than
conventional power distribution
methods such as cable and conduit.
Availability
XJ-L HD Busway and plugs are stocked
to meet your quick-ship requirements.
Once you factor in all the advantages,
XJ-L HD is clearly the best choice for
reliable, flexible, and economical power
distribution for data centers, light
industrial, and high tech applications.
13-51
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
As a result, XJ-L HD Busway is an

intelligent choice for contractors
and users concerned with designing
superior electrical distribution systems
The compact design is ideal for
limited working areas in computer
manufacturing, labouratory or test
facilities, schools, hospitals, and
machine shops.
Time to add on busway for new or

expanded facilities? The XJ-L Busway
you installed years ago matches the
XJ-L HD Busway you specify today
and years from now the new busway
sections, components or systemcompatible bus plugs will still fit.
system to application-specific
customer requirements. Bus Plugs
can be installed, then relocated as
required without de-energizing the
busway. All XJ-L HD Bus Plugs are
fully interchangeable with all XJ-L HD
Busway configurations.
13
XJ-L HD Busway is well known for its

outstanding performance, providing
convenient, cost-effective power
distribution for high-tech environments,
data centers, labouratories, and other
applications requiring consistent,
quality power distribution. Key XJ-L
HD design features include optional
isolated ground or 200% neutral across
entire product range. For maximum
availability, XJ-L HD Busway is
maintained as a stock product to meet
your quickship requirements.
joining one XJ-L HD Busway section

to another is as simple as matching
ends and snapping them together.
Bus bars are held securely in place by
spring pressure clips located in the joint
insulator. The joint is secured when
the external housing plate is attached
with captive screws. Thanks to built-in
flexibility and a low initial cost, you also
benefit from future savings when you
need new equipment.

XJ-L HD Busway Specifications
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
XJ-L HD Busway is available in 100A,

225A and 400A ratings making it the
right choice for light industrial and
commercial applications where low
initial startup and maintenance costs
are prerequisites. XJ-L HD Busway is
the most logical choice for high tech,
data intensive environments, especially
when isolated ground is required.
Housing
XJ-L HD Busway features a totally
enclosed, non-ventilated, steel
housing. The housing is covered with
an electrostatically applied polyester
urethane powder paint. Choice of
colors: ASA#61 Grey or Graphite Grey.
The paint is scratch resistant and has a
500 hour salt spray rating.
Note: the 200% neutral bar can be

utilized as Isolated Ground.
The internal ground bus is 100% rated
for 100A, 60% rated for 225A, and 50%
for 400A busway. Isolated ground is
rated at 100% for both amperages.
Plating
The entire length of the bus bar is tin
plated to ensure good electrical
contact at all joint and plug tap-off
points. The plating also serves to
protect the bars from corrosion.
Optional silver plating is available.
Plug-in base
The conductors are fabricated from

98% conductivity copper. The bars
are spaced-in-air and held securely
in the housing by the plug-in outlets
and joints.
XJ-L HD Busway features multiple plugin locations. The plastic, non-tracking

outlets are located on 20 inch centers
and support the bus bars providing
bracing during short circuit conditions.
The plug-in outlets are IP2X (finger
safe). Optional plug-in base covers
(XOC) are available separately or they
can be factory installed.
Neutral
Joint connection
100% neutral is available for standard 4

wire applications. A second neutral bar
can be added for 200% neutral capacity.
Busway sections are connected via a

maintenance-free, spring pressure joint.
The busway ends are easily aligned and
Conductors
bus bar ends are held securely in place

by spring pressure clips located in
the joint insulator. The housings are
connected via external housing plates
and captive screws.
Bus plugs
There are twleve plug-in outlets on
each 10 foot (3.048 m) section, six
openings on 5 foot (1.524 m) sections
and two outlets on 2 foot (.616 m)
sections. Bus plugs are available with
amperages ranging from 15A to 200A.
Bus plugs feature circuit breakers or
fusible switch disconnects.
Testing
Each piece of XJ-L HD Busway is
factory tested prior to shipment. A
dielectric test is performed to ensure
product integrity. XJ-L HD Busway
is manufactured and inspected in
accordance to an ISO 9001 registered
Quality Management System.
Standards
XJ-L HD Busway products meet the
following standards:
UL 857
NEMA BU1
CSA C22.2
Ratings
R,X,Z and voltage drop

Ampere
rating
100
225
400
13-52
Bus bar width

x .125 in. (3.2 mm)
thick
0.50 (13.0)
1.00 (25.4)
2.13 (54.1)
Ohm x 10-3 per 100 ft.

Line to neutral
R
X
Z
1.67
8.71
1.88
8.20
4.08
9.16
4.27
3.01
5.23
Amperage:
100A, 225A and 400A
Voltage:
600 VAC max
Short circuit:
100A 10kAIC

225A 22kAIC
Voltage drop concentrated loads, line-to-line
per 100 ft. 400A 35kAIC
at 100% rated load,

0.3
0.4
2.30
2.54
2.48
2.74
2.88
3.10
35C ambient power

0.5
0.6
2.75
2.94
2.98
3.19
3.29
3.44
factor
0.7
3.10
3.37
3.56
0.8
3.21
3.51
3.62
0.9
3.25
3.57
3.57
1.0
2.89
3.20
2.96

Straight Sections
Plug-in section
Prefix
BW
Type
Plug-in Busway Only

Fitting Type
J P 1 2 0
Length:
024 = 24 inches
060 = 60 inches
120 = 120 inches
XJ-L HD
Amp
Configuration
6
1 = 3
2 = 3 + Internal Grd
3 = 3 + Isolated Grd
4 = 3 + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
5 = 3 + Neutral
6 = 3 + Neutral + Internal Grd
7 = 3 + Neutral + Isolated Grd
8 = 3 + Neutral + Internal Grd + Isolated Grd
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
0 = 3 + 200% Neutral + Internal Ground
Plug-in
Plug-In Location
Plug-In Spacing
A = Graphite L = Left Side Only

1 = 20 Dual Sidea
G = ANSI 61 R = Right Side Only 2 = 9.75 Single
X = Other
S = Dual Side
Sideb
X = Otherc
Notes:
a Use for Plug-in Length = S
b Use for Plug-in Length = L or R
c Other custom spacing must be pre-approved
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Plug-in sections
Available in 10 foot (3.048 m), 5 foot (1.524 m) or 2 foot (.616 m) standard plug-in lengths, XJ-L HD
Busway offers layout flexibility to meet custom requirements. Plug-in busway can be configured with
six plug-in openings per side or twelve on one side.
Feeder Section
Prefix
BW
Type
Fitting Type
J F 1 2 0
XJ-L HD
Feeder
Length in inches,
Ex. 2 3 = 024
Feeder lengths
available from
16 (016) up to
10 0 (120)
Amp
Configuration
Colour
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
Feeder Sections
Feeder busway carries the current of the busway system from the supply source. Feeder busway does
not have plug-in outlets. Feeder busway is available in custom lengths from 16.00 in (406mm) to 120.00 in
(3048mm). Feeder sections are available as Indoor.
XJ-L HD Busway also features an exclusive rotating cover plate to facilitate inspection of the joints. The light
weight design of the busway and plugs makes the installation of XJ-L HD Busway quick and trouble-free.
13
1
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
Color
13-53

Straight Sections
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Plug-in Section (Dual Side)
Plug-in Section (Single SideRight hand configuration shown)

9.75 in
(248 mm)
9.75 in
(248 mm)
9.75 in
(248 mm)
Top
10.0 ft
(3.05 m)
4.0 in
(102 mm)
7.0 in
(178 mm)
9.75 in
(248 mm)
9.75 in
(248 mm)
Insulator
End
Inspection
window
Plug-in Section
Ampere
Rating
100
100
100
225
225
225
400
400
400
Bus Bar
Material
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Bar
Thickness
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
.125 (3.2)
Bar
Width
.5 (13)
.5 (13)
.5 (13)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
2.12 (54)
2.12 (54)
2.12 (54)
Housing
Width
2.0 (51)
2.0 (51)
2.0 (51)
2.5 (64)
2.5 (64)
2.5 (64)
3.6 (92)
3.6 (92)
3.6 (92)
Housing
Height
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
6.13 (156)
Max
Voltage
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
Short
Circuit
Rating
10kA
10kA
10kA
22kA
22kA
22kA
35kA
35kA
35kA
Length
Ft (M)
10.0 (3.05)
5.0 (1.52)
2.0 (.61)
10.0 (3.05)
5.0 (1.52)
2.0 (.61)
10.0 (3.05)
5.0 (1.52)
2.0 (.61)
3 Pole
Catalogue
Number
XC1003
XC10035
XC10032
X2003
X20035
X20032
X4003
X40035
X40032
Model Number
BWJP12011GS1
BWJP06011GS1
BWJP02411GS1
BWJP12021GS1
BWJP06021GS1
BWJP02421GS1
BWJP12041GS1
BWJP06041GS1
BWJP02441GS1
Wgt.
(lb)
42
21
8
56
28
10
69
35
15
4 Pole
Catalogue
Number
XC1004
XC10045
XC10042
X2004
X20045
X20042
X4004
X40045
X40042
Model Number
BWJP12015GS1
BWJP06015GS1
BWJP02415GS1
BWJP12025GS1
BWJP06025GS1
BWJP02425GS1
BWJP12045GS1
BWJP06045GS1
BWJP02445GS1
Wgt.
(lb)
45
23
9
62
30
12
79
40
17
Model Numbers Effective Aug 2011
Feeder Section
Ampere Bus Bar Bar
Bar
Rating
Material Thickness Width
Housing
Width
Housing
Height
100
Copper
.125 (3.2)
.5 (13)
2.0 (51)
6.13 (156) 600V
10kA
225
Copper
.125 (3.2)
1.0 (26)
2.5 (64)
6.13 (156) 600V
22kA
400
Copper
.125 (3.2)
2.12 (54)
3.6 (92)
6.13 (156) 600V
35kA
13-54
3 Pole
10'
Catalogue
Number
XC1003Spec
X200316.0-120.0
(406 - 3048) Spec
X4003
-Spec
Short
Max
Circuit Length
Voltage Rating In. (mm)
10' Model
Number
BWJF12011GS1
BWJF12021GS1
BWJF12041GS1
4 Pole
Wgt. 10'
(lb/ Catalogue
ft)
Number
XC10044.2
Spec
X20045.6
Spec
X40046.9
Spec
10' Model
Number
Wgt.
(lb/
ft)
BWJP12015GS1 4.5
BWJP12025GS1 6.2
BWJP12045GS1 7.9

Elbows
Fittings
Prefix
Type
BW
XJ-L HD
Fitting Type
Amp
Configuration
Colour
E = Edge
L = Left
F = Flat
R = Right
Elbow
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
13
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
Edge elbows
Right hand or left hand XJ-L HD Busway system 90 degree

flat elbows are available. When specifying be sure to use the
proper catalogue number suffix to identify the required fitting.
Right hand or left hand XJ-L HD Busway system 90 degree

edge elbows are available. When specifying, be sure to use
the proper catalogue number suffix to identify the required
fitting.
Flat Elbow
Edge Elbow
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue
Number
XC1003L1
XC1004L1
X2003L1
X2004L1
X4003L1
X4004L1
Model
Number
BWJELFR11G
BWJELFR15G
BWJELFR21G
BWJELFR25G
BWJELFR41G
BWJELFR45G
Catalogue
Number
XC1003L3
XC1004L3
X2003L3
X2004L3
X4003L3
X4004L3
Model
Number
BWJELFL11G
BWJELFL15G
BWJELFL21G
BWJELFL25G
BWJELFL41G
BWJELFL45G
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue
Number
XC1003L2
XC1004L2
X2003L2
X2004L2
X4003L2
X4004L2
Model
Number
BWJELER11G
BWJELER15G
BWJELER21G
BWJELER25G
BWJELER41G
BWJELER45G
Catalogue
Number
XC1003L4
XC1004L4
X2003L4
X2004L4
X4003L4
X4004L4
Model
Number
BWJELEL11G
BWJELEL15G
BWJELEL21G
BWJELEL25G
BWJELEL41G
BWJELEL45G
Edge right
Flat right elbow shown
elbow shown
Insulator
end
IG
A
B
C
N
G
IG A B C N G
Insulator end
IG A B C N G
13-55
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Flat elbows

Tees and Crosses
Fittings
Prefix
Type
BW
XJ-L HD
Fitting Type
E = Edge
Colour
Cross
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
Crosses are fittings used to interconnect

two busway runs which are located at
right angle to each other.
Cross
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue
Number
X1003CR2
XC1003CR2
X2003CR2
X2004CR2
X4003CR2
X4004CR2
Model
Number
BWJCRE211G
BWJCRE215G
BWJCRE221G
BWJCRE225G
BWJCRE241G
BWJCRE245G
22.0
(559 mm)
Cross Type 2
Fittings
Prefix
Type
BW
XJ-L HD
Fitting Type
Amp
E = Edge
Tee
2,4
1
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
Tee
Tees permit a second run of busway to extend
at right angles to a straight busway run.
Tees
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Configuration
Colour
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
4.0"
(102 mm)
22.0"
(559 mm)
18.0"
(457 mm)
CL
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue
Number
XC1003T2
XC1004T2
X2003T2
X2004T2
X4003T2
X4004T2
Model Number
BWJTEE211G
BWJTEE215G
BWJTEE221G
BWJTEE225G
BWJTEE241G
BWJTEE245G
Catalogue
Number
XC1003T4
XC1004T4
X2003T4
X2004T4
X4003T4
X4004T4
Top
Model Number
BWJTEE411G
BWJTEE415G
BWJTEE421G
BWJTEE425G
BWJTEE441G
BWJTEE445G
Insulator End
18.0"
(457 mm)
Tee Type 2
4.0"
(102 mm)
18.0"
(457 mm)
22.0"
(559 mm)
Insulator End
Tee Type 4
Top
18.0"
(457 mm)
4.0"
(102 mm)
13-56
4.0"
(102 mm)
CL
Insulator End
Right Hand Shown
Insulator End
13
Configuration
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
Cross
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Amp

Tap Boxes
Center Tap Boxes

Prefix
Type
BW
Tap Box Onlyb

Fitting Type
XJ-L HD
T
T
L
L = Left
(rear)
R = Right
(front)
N
N
Amp
Config.
Colour
Tap Box Steel
Lug opt.
Meter
Meter Surface
N = None
1 = PAC3200
2 = PAC3100
X = Other
N = None / NA
L = Left
R = Right (Inspection
Cover Side)
X = Other
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
Center Tap Box
Center Cable Tap Box

Center tap boxes are non-fusible devices utilized to feed to or
take off power from the busway run. When loads served by
the busway run do not require over-current protection, center
tap boxes may be used. If the application requires additional
wiring bending space, extended center tap boxes are
available. Center tap boxes are an actual part of the busway
run and require a space of 32 in. (810 mm) for installation.
3.5
(89 mm)
Figure 1
Right
4.0
(102 mm)
3.5
(89 mm)
4.0
(102 mm)
13.0
(330 mm)
12.0
(305 mm)
Figure 2
Left
3.5
(89 mm)
Right Hand Shown
4.0
(102 mm)
6.13
(156 mm)
Center Tap Box

Ampere
Rating
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
Catalogue Number
Front Connected
Fig 1
X2003M
X2004M
X4003M1
X4004M1
Model Number
Right Connected
Fig 1
BWJCTRN21GSANN
BWJCTRN25GSANN
BWJCTRN41GSANN
BWJCTRN45GSANN
Catalogue Number
Rear Connected
Fig 2
X2003M
X2004M
X4003M2
X4004M2
Model Number
Left Connected
Fig 2
BWJCTLN21GSANN
BWJCTLN25GSANN
BWJCTLN41GSANN
BWJCTLN45GSANN
Teminals Provided
Qty/Pole and Size
Cu/Al wire
(1) 350MCM - #6
(1) 350MCM - #6
(2) 350MCM - #6
(2) 350MCM - #6
13-57
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
1 = 3
A = Std Mech Lug
B = 1.75 Dual Hole (No Lug)
X = Custom / Othera
5 = 3 + Neutral
D = Extended Box with 500MCM Mechanical
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
13
Notes:
Use X for Tap Box Steel
Not required for Flanged End. Leave fields blank
S = Standard
X = Custom /
Other

Tap Boxes
End Tap Boxes
Tap Box Onlyb
Prefix
Type
BW
Fitting Type
XJ-L HD
B
B
Amp
Config.
Colour
Tap Box Steel
Lug opt.
Meter
Meter Surface
N = None
1 = PAC3200
2 = PAC3100
X = Other
N = None / NA
L = Left
R = Right (Inspection
Cover Side)
X = Other
R
L=
Left
R=
Right
13
End Tap Box
S = Standard
X = Custom /
Other
1 = 3
A = Std Mech Lug
B = 1.75 Dual Hole (No Lug)
X = Custom / Othera
5 = 3 + Neutral
D = Extended Box with 500MCM Mechanical
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
Notes:
Use X for Tap Box Steel
Not required for Flanged End. Leave fields blank
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
End Tap Box

End tap boxes are devices used to connect cable and conduit
to the end of a busway run or where busway runs connect
without the need for over-current protection. End tap boxes
may be installed at the end or beginning of a run.
Tap boxes can be configured with surge protection and
current monitoring devices.
End Tap Box
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue Number
X1003ETVB
X1004ETVB
X2003ETVB
X2004ETVB
X4003ETVB
X4004ETVB
Teminals Provided
Qty/Pole and Size Cu/Al
wire
(1) 1/0 - #14
(1) 1/0 - #14
(1) 350MCM - #6
(1) 350MCM - #6
(2) 350MCM - #6
(2) 350MCM - #6
Model Number
BWJETBR11GS
BWJETBR15GS
BWJETBR21GS
BWJETBR25GS
BWJETBR41GS
BWJETBR45GS
5.2"
(132.1 mm)
16.5"
(419.1 mm)
26.0"
(660.4 mm)
16.0"
(406.4 mm)
5.2"
(132.1 mm)
2.8"
(71.1 mm)
Right Hand Shown
9.2"
(233.7 mm)
13-58

Flanged Ends
Flanged End
Prefix
Type
BW
Fitting Type
E = Std.
XJ-L HD
F
Flanged
End
R = Nema
X = Other
Amp
Config.
Colour
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
13
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Flanged end
Flanged ends are used to connect busway to
switchboards. Flanged ends come complete with bus
bar extensions to facilitate the making of electrical
connections.
Flanged end
Ampere
Rating
100
100
225
225
400
400
Poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
Catalogue
Number
XC1003FE
XC1004FE
X2003FE
X2004FE
X4003FE
X4004FE
Model Number
BWJFENN11GS
BWJFENN15GS
BWJFENN21GS
BWJFENN25GS
BWJFENN41GS
BWJFENN45GS
13-59

Accessories
Busway hanger
Hangers
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
XH2 and XH3 hangers are used to support

XJ-L HD Busway and can be used with
customer supplied rods up to 3/8 inch in
diameter. Hangers are adaptable for wall
mounting or ceiling suspension arrangements,
either edge or flat. Custom mounting solutions
available upon request.
Busway Hanger
Ampere
Rating
100
225
400
Catalogue
Number
XH2
XH2
XH3
Model
Number
BWJH0011G
BWJH0012G
BWJH0014G
Dimn A
in. (mm)
2.25 (57)
2.75 (69)
4 (101)
Prefix
Type
BW
Fitting Type
001 = Singe Drop Rod (XH style)

002 = Side Mount for strut channela
003 = Saddle Mount for strut channela
004 = Pole Mounta
005 = Dual Drop Rod Saddlea
006 = Dual/Single Drop Rod Frame
XXX = Othera
XJ-L HD
H
Hanger
Amp
Colour
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
Amp
Colour
Notes:
a MTO-E Custom Product
Tip: Bus plug access may be restricted by hangers or drop

rods. This should be considered in the system layout.
End Closer
End closer
An end closer is used to
terminate busway runs. To
extend the run, simply remove
the end closer and add new
sections as needed.
Prefix
Type
BW
XJ-L HD
Fitting Type
End Closer
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
End Closer
Ampere
Rating
100
225
400
Catalogue
Number
XE100
XE200
XE400
Model
Number
BWJXENN1G
BWJXENN2G
BWJXENN4G
Dimn. A
in (mm)
2.06 (52)
2.31 (59)
3.44 (87)
Dimn. B
in (mm)
0.94 (24)
1.44 (37)
2.5 (64)
Tip: Utilization of the busway plug-in opening adjacent to the End

Closer may be limited to XQ45 bus plugs. This applies only if the End
Closer is located to the Right-hand of the bus plug.
XOC outlet covers

Optional outlet covers are available
for closing off the plug-in outlets
when desired.
Outlet Cover
Ampere
Rating
100
225
400
Catalogue
Number
XOC
XOC
XOC
Model Number
BWJXOCN1G
BWJXOCN2G
BWJXOCN4G
Outlet Cover
Prefix
Type
BW
XJ-L HD
Fitting Type
1 = 100
2 = 225
4 = 400
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
Plug-in Cover
Colour
13-60
Amp
Bus Plugs / XJ-L HD Power Modules (XPMs)

Bus plugs for XJ-L Busway are available
from 15A to 200A, with molded case circuit
breakers or Vacu-Break fusible switches. All
XJ-L bus plugs are fully interchangeable with
all XJ-L Busway configurations.
Lightweight and portable, plugs can be
installed or relocated as required without
de-energizing the busway. Pre-engineered
plug-in opening locations ensure no
interference for greater density and
maximum flexibility. This is especially
important in high tech areas requiring
frequent movement of equipment.
XJ-L HD Power Modules are

available with 3, 6, or 12 branch
circuit protection in both single and
3-phase configurations, ranging
from 15 200 amps for maximum
power density and flexibility.
13
A wide variety of NEMA and IEC

receptacles or cord connections
are available for the XPM. Integral
current monitoring and surge
protection are available upon
request.
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
Selection Guide
Enclosure Type
A = 3 Circuit - XQ Series
Plug-in Spacing
20.00 & 9.75
B = 3 Circuit - XQR Series
20.00 & 9.75
C = 3 Circuit HD XPM
E = 6 Circuit HD XPM
F = 12 Circuit XPM
20.00 & 9.75

20.00 & 9.75
9.75 only
G = XLEC
20.00 & 9.75
H = XEC
J = Plug-in Tap Box
K = XLVB Fusible
20.00 & 9.75

20.00
20.00 & 9.75
Breaker Type
BQ, BQH, HBQ

QP, QPH, HPQ
BL, BLH, HBL,

BQD
ED2,ED4,ED6
na
na
Application
XQ style No receptacle
XQR style with duplex receptacle provision. May be used for
custom receptacles or when additional wiring space is required
Use for applications that require
factory installed breakers and
receptacles
Cover operable handle. Uses
heavy duty
E-Frame Breakers
Uses heavy duty E-Frame breakers
Plug-in tap off device - lugs only
Cover operable Vacu-Break Switch
Tip: Type C & E XPMs will install on all plug-in busway. Type F will not install on dual side plug-in busway.
Use For Breaker Group = A, B, Xk
Siemens XJ-L HD Bus Plugs and Power Modules

Prefix
Type
Enclosure
System Config.
Colour
Breaker Group
Ampere Rating or
Breaker/Receptacle
Arrangementghij
BP
E D 4 6 0
A = Graphite
G = ANSI 61
X = Other
A = Non-Mixed Factory

Installed Breakersa
B = Mixed Factory

Installed Breakers
E = Enclosure Only

(no Breaker)ak
X = Other / Fusiblef
Bus
Plug
XJ-L HD
A = 3 Circuit

XQ Series

No Receptacle
B = 3 Circuit

XQR Series
Receptacle
Provision
C = 3 Circuit HD XPM
E = 6 Circuit HD XPM
F = 12 Circuit XPM
G = XLECbh
H = XECch
J = Plug-in Tap
Boxdfj
K = XLVB Fusibleefi
See Notes below

for information
Custom
Features
NN = None / NA
XX = Otherk
1 = 3
5 = 3 + Neutral
9 = 3 + 200% Neutral
Notes:
a Use A or E for XLEC and XEC
b Available in System Configs: 1,2,5,6
c Available in System Configs: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
d Available in System Configs: 1,2,5,6
e Available in System Configs: 1,2,5,6
For non-breaker style plug use X for Breaker Grouping field. (Fusible & Plug-in Tap Box)
For Enclosure = C,E,F see Breaker / Receptacle Arrangement Schedule for Details
h For XEC and XLEC Ampere Rating field use ED2xx, ED4xx,ED6xx where xx = 15 to 00 trip rating (100A max).
i For XLVB Ampere Rating field use 02xxx for 240V & 06xxx for 600V where xxx = 030, 060, 100 ampere
j For Plug-in Tap Box Ampere Rating field use PBxxx where xxx = 100, 200 ampere
k Ampere Rating and Customer Features fields not required for Breaker Group = E
. Leave fields blank.
l Custom metering available upon request.
Requires two plug-in openings for 9.75 spacing.
Installs on 9.75 single side plug-in spacing only.
200A Tap Box installs on 20.0 dual side plug-in spacing only. Requires two plug-in openings.
f
g
13-61

Bus Plugs
XQ and XQR Series

XQ and XQR bus plugs accept QP (plug-in) or BQ (bolt-on) circuit
breakers. The plugs feature knockouts to facilitate quick installation.
The XQR has added wiring space to allow receptacle installation.
XQ Series Bus plug (60A max)
Breaker
Type
Volts
No. of
Spaces
Catalogue
Number
Model
Number
Catalogue
Number
Model
Number
QP and BQ
120/240
XQ35
BPJA1GE
XQ45
BPJA5GE
Model
Number
Catalogue
Number
Model
Number
BPJB1GE
XQ45R
BPJB5GE
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Enclosure Only
XQR Series Bus plug (60A max)

Breaker
Type
Volts
No. of
Spaces
QP and BQ
120/240
Catalogue
Number
XQ35R
Enclosure Only
Accessories for XQ and XQR Series

XEQH
Floor Operating Handle (not for 1 pole or 2 pole breakers)
W62890
Bonded Ground Kit
W68101
Isolated Ground Kit
W68101
W62890
XEQH
13-62

XL-X, XL-U and BD Plug-In Units
Selection
XQ Circuit Breaker Enclosures

Front Operable
3 Phase, 3 Wire
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Enclosure Only
Breaker
Type
AC
Ampere
Volts Rating
ED2
240
1560
70100
ED4
480
1560
70100
Enclosure Only
Catalogue
Number
XL-X
Catalogue
Number
XL-U
Catalogue Number
BD
Plug-In
Catalogue
Number
XL-X
Catalogue
Number
XL-U
Catalogue Number
BD
Plug-In
REC3100G
UEC3100G
BEC3100
REC4100G
UEC4100G
BEC4100
RFC3250G
UFC3250G
BFC3250
RFC4250G
UFC4250G
BFC4250
FD6, FXD 600
70250
13
1560
70100
ED6
200400
JXD6
200400
RJC3400G
UJC3400G
BJC3400
RJC4400G
UJC4400G
BJC4400
JD6
200400
LXD6
450600 RLC3600G
ULC3600G
BLC3600
RLC4600G
ULC4600G
BLC4600
LD6
250600
UMC3800G
BMC3800
RMC4800G
UMC4800G
BMC4800
600
MD6
400600 RMC3800G
700800
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
240
JXD2
I-T-E Fusible Vacu-Break Switch Plugs Floor-Operable with Line Terminal Protection
Ampere
Rating
030
060
100
200
400
600
030
060
100
200
400
400
600
Volts
250 AC
or
250 DC
600 AC
3 Phase, 3 Wire
Horsepower
Ratings
Catalogue
Standard
Maximum
(NEC)
(Time Delay)
003
00712
00712
015
015
030
025
060
050
125
075
200
1
007 2
020
015
050
030
075
060
150
125
350
125
350
200
500
XL-X
RV321G
RV322G
RV323G
RV324G
RV325G
RV326G
RV361G
RV362G
RV363G
RV364G
RV365G
RV365SG
RV366G
Fuse Adaptor Kits RV and UV

240V AC/250V DC
Class J
Amper- Catalogue
age
Number
30
60
100
200
400
600
W49813
Class T
Catalogue
Number
TFAK32
TFAK42
TFAK52
TFAK62
Class R
Catalogue
Number
W56626
W56628
W55365
W55366
W55367
W55368
600V
30
60
100
200
400
600
TFAK35
TFAK45
W56627
W56629
W55365
W55366
TFAK55
TFAK65
W55367
W55368
W49813
Grounding
Finger See table.

available from stock. When ordering circuit
breaker bus plugs complete with breaker, factoryinstalled, allow time for assembly and SPECIFY enclosure frame size, phase and ampere rating.
Example: One UEC3100ED43P70Afactory assembled For factory installed breakers, add enclosure and
breaker prices together and add 20% to the total.
Bus plugs 400A and smaller require one plug-in opening.
600800A require two plug-in openings.
Enclosures
Catalogue
Number
BD
Plug-In
BOS14321
BOS14322
BOS14323
BOS14324
BOS14325
BOS14326
BOS14351
BOS14352
BOS14353
BOS14354
BOS14355
BOS14356
Catalogue Number
XL-U
UV321G
UV322G
UV323G
UV324G
UV325G
UV326G
UV361G
UV362G
UV363G
UV364G
UV365G
UV365SG
UV366G
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Horsepower
Ratings, AC
Standard
Maximum
(NEC)
(Time Delay)
003
00712
00712
015
015
030
025
060
050
125
075
200
005
015
015
030
025
060
050
125
100
150
100
150
150
400
Field Addable Ground Kits for

BD Bus Plugs
Fusible
Ampere
Rating
3060
100
200
400
600
Catalogue
Number
W63231
W63232
W63233
W63234
W63234
Circuit Breaker
BEC
W63553
BFC
W63554
BJC
W63238
BLC
W63238
BMC
W73534
Note: These are for use on busway with internal ground
bus manufactured after March, 1986. For ground kits
prior to this date, consult local sales office.
To
order 400A fusible plug with increased wire space,

add S to the catalog number.
Example: UV365S, UV465S.
Channel Spacers Must be used with bus plugs mounted on 600, 800, or 1000 ampere ABD busway or on 800
or 1000 ampere BDP busway. Catalog Number W37940.
Catalogue
Number
BD
Plug-In
BOS16421
BOS16422
BOS16423
BOS16424
BOS16425
BOS16426
BOS16451
BOS16452
BOS16453
BOS16454
BOS16455
BOS16456
Catalogue Number
XL-X
RV421G
RV422G
RV423G
RV424G
RV425G
RV426G
RV461G
RV462G
RV463G
RV464G
RV465G
RV465SG
RV466G
XL-U
UV421G
UV422G
UV423G
UV424G
UV425G
UV426G
UV461G
UV462G
UV463G
UV464G
UV465G
UV465SG
UV466G
Fuse Adaptor Kits BOS

240V AC/250V DC
Amperage
30
60
100
200
400
600
Class J
Catalogue
Number
Class T
Catalogue
Number
W49827
W49819
W49814
W49813
TFAK32
TFAK42
TFAK52
TFAK62
Class R
Catalogue
Number
W56626
W56628
W55365
W55366
W55367
W55368
600V
30
60
100
200
400
600
W49832
W49830
W49828
W49818
W49816
W49815
TFAK35
TFAK45
TFAK55
TFAK65
W56627
W56629
W55365
W55366
W55367
W55368
When
BD busway capacity exceeds 400A for aluminum

or 600A for copper, capacity must be specified to obtain
proper number and arrangement of neutral fingers.
Not required.
13-63

XL-X, XL-U and BD Plug-In Units
Shipping Weights Pounds
For Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Only
3 Phase, 3 Wire
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
Enclosure
Only
3 Phase, 4 Wire
Complete
Assembly
Enclosure
Only
Complete
Assembly
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
XL-U
XL-X
BD,
XL-U
LO-X XL-X
BD,
XL-U
LO-X XL-X
BD,
XL-U
LO-X XL-X
BD,
LO-X
ED2,
ED4,
ED6
15100
12
14
13
13
15
14
10
FD6
70250
27
51
37
45
28
55
38
JXD6
JXD2
JD6
200400 90
200400 90
200400 95
35
35
39
102
102
117
57
57
61
95
95
100
36
36
40
107
107
122
58
58
62
LXD6
LD6
450600 140
450600 140
39
39
175
175
691
61
147
147
40
40
182
182
62
62
MD6
400800 140
79
175
114
147
80
182
115
For Fusible Switch Bus Plugs Only

3 Phase, 3 Wire 3 Phase, 4 Wire
XL-X
XL-U
BD, LO-X
XL-X
XL-U
BD, LO-X
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Prefix
RV,
UV,
XLVB
Prefix
BOS
Prefix
RV,
UV,
XLVB
Prefix
BOS
30,60
100
200
400
600
17
17
36
165
165
15
18
34
111
111
19
19
38
160
170
12
18
36
112
112
Special Bus Plugs

Catalogue Number
Description
Ground Detector and Potentializer
For 2- or 3-pole 240 and 480 Volt service.
XL-U
XL-X
BD, LO-X
UPGR314G RPGR314G
PGR6314
Accessories
Description
Channel SpacersMust be used with Bus Plugs or Plug-in
Branch-Run Adaptors mounted on 600-, 800- or 1000-ampere
ABD Busway or on 800- or 1000-ampere BDP Busway.
4 per package
ON-OFF Bus Plug Stickers
Pressure sensitive, per pair.
Minimum
480V
order quantity of 5 per catalog number.

ratings.
13-64
Catalogue
Number
W37940
W47185

Section.
Selection

XL-X, XL-U and BD Cubicles
Selection
Cubicles
(For Use With All Types of Busway)
With Breaker
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
3 Phase, 4 Wire
120/280V AC
277/480V AC
3 Phase
600V AC
ET Heavy Duty
JD6
200400
MD6
400600
700800
1800
2000
Consult Sales
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
RD6
13
PD6
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Current-Limiting
150225
250400
CJD6
CLD6
450600
CMD6
400800
CPD6
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
CRD6
1800
2000
Consult Sales
Note: Additional molded case circuit breakers may be used.

Fusible Switch Vacu-Break
3 Phase
3 Phase, 4 Wire
250
Volts AC
600
Volts AC
120/208
Volts AC
277/480
Volts AC
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
200
400
600
800
1200
FC3022
FC3042
FC3062
FC3025
FC3045
FC3065
FC3085
FC3125
FC4022
FC4042
FC4062
FC4025
FC4045
FC4065
FC4085
FC4125
Ampere 480 Volt

Rating
3-Pole
4-Pole
600 Volt
3-Pole
4-Pole
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
No fuses supplied with fusible cubicles.
Cubicle
pricing includes labour and material for:

1. Single cubicle frame section complete with required
busway openings.
2. Circuit breaker or fusible switch.
3. Mounting of circuit breaker or fusible switch and
line-side connections.
For
electrically operated, (specify control voltage).
igure busway footage through cubicle to compensate

F
for load-size connections.
For other options, consult local sales office.
13-65
Notes
BUSWAY
SYSTEMS
13
13-66
POWER PRODUCT
Motor Control Centres
Contents
tiastarTM Motor Control Centre
Overview
14-2
14-3 14-4
14-15 14-17
tiastarTM Dynamic Arc Sentry
14-18 14-20
Specification Checklist
14-21 14-25
8PX3 Motor Control Centres

Product Overview
14-26
14-27 14-29
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
tiastarTM Type 2 Arc Resistant
14
Technical
14-5
Wiring Classifications
14-6
Incoming Cable Space, Wiring Troughs, Wiring Terminations
14-7
Components Overview
SIRIUS Contactors
14-8
Overload Relays
14-9
SIRIUS Soft Starters
14-10
Variable Frequency Drives
14-11
Power Monitoring
14-12
14-13
Product History
14-14
tiastarTM Motor Control Centres

Overview of tiastar
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Motor Control Centre

@ Siemens
Motor control centres (MCC) have
come a long way since they were
introduced in 1937 as a way to save
floor space by placing several starters
in a single cabinet. Modern processes
and facilities now dictate that motor
control centres should display a high
level of intelligence as well. They must
deliver vital operating information;
plus provide automation features,
optimal control, and critically fast
communications to meet even the
most demanding applications. Ideally,
the best-of the-best must also save
installation time and money. Siemens
MCCs are designed as self-contained
modular units. They come with
rear-mounted, self-aligning copper
stabs that firmly grasp onto the bus.
Brackets also guide the placement
of units, further assuring positive
engagement with the bus.
tiastar MCC
Siemens tiastar MCC is based on the
Furnas System/89TM MCC introduced
in 1980 and represent the state-of-theart motor control technology, with a
modular, open architecture design. High
performance and quality expectations
have been researched at the planning
stage and throughout the construction
stage. The Siemens tiastar MCC has
many features and options to meet
your specific needs. Requirements
such as the standard isolated vertical
bus to fully insulated vertical bus
and standard 22mm to 30mm pilot

devices. Heavy gauge steel is used for
framing and side panel; sections are
separated by 14 gauge steel barriers
that are formed to provide rigidity and
durability. The modular units implement
all the motor protection and control
functions, determine operational,
diagnostic and statistical data, and
organize communications data between
the automation system and the motor
feeder.
tiastar SMART MCC
Siemens tiastar Smart MCC with
PROFIBUS-DP Communications
combines heavy-duty construction and
user friendly features. These intelligent
units deliver detailed diagnostics by
communicating with starter units,
variable frequency drives, reduced
voltage soft-start units, circuit breakers,
or power meters via PLC/DCS. This
means overload relays, linked to
the PLCs, can now deliver detailed
motor management data at speeds
previously unheard of. PROFIBUS-DP,
the backbone of the system, greatly
simplifies I/O wiring.
Domestic Design Standards
The following are the principal domestic
standards which apply to motor control
centre design, testing, construction and
application. The tiastar motor control
centre complies fully with the latest
version of all these standards.
NEMA
b AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
b ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial
Control
b ICS 2 Standard for Industrial Control ..
Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
ICS 18 Standard for motor control ......
centres
CSA
b CSA 22.2 No.254-05 Motor Control
Centres
tiastar Motor Control Centre
14-2
UL
b 845 Motor Control Centres
b 508 Industrial Control Equipment
b 94 Test for Flammability of Plastic
Materials for Parts, Devices, and
Appliances
CSA 22.2 No.5 Molded Case Circuit ...
Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures
Product Overview
NFPA National Fire Protection
Association
b 70 National Electrical Code
Low Voltage Seismic

Compliance
Today, strict seismic requirements
are not limited to areas prone to
earthquakes. Engineers in all locations
must be aware of, and comply with,
earthquake protection regulations.
In addition to construction materials
and techniques, these regulations
cover nonstructural building systems,
including electrical components. In
critical applications, such as healthcare
facilities, these components must be
designed to go beyond surviving an
earthquake, to remain in operation after
the event is over.
At Siemens, we are committed to
making it easier for you to comply with
all building requirements, including
seismic ratings.
Please contact your Siemens
representative for complete details on
seismic rating compliance for specific
products and configurations.
The purpose of this compliance
assessment is to document the seismic
compliance of tiastar motor control
centre to the following building codes:
Building code
Uniform Building Code (UBC)
BOCA National Building Code
(BOCA)
Standard Building Code (SBC)
California Building Code (CBC)
International Building Code (IBC)
Edition
1997
1999
1999
2010
2009
Earthquake loading compliance tests (shake

tests) were performed at Clarke Dynamic
Test Laboratories in accordance with ICC-ESAC 156 and ASCE 7-10.
Notes:
1. tiastar motor control centres are certified to the stringent seismic requirements of California OSHPD (Office
of Statewide Health Planning and Development).
Approval # OSP-0074-10. For details, refer to: http://
www.oshpd.ca.gov/FDD/Pre-Approval/.
2. The codes and standards referenced in this document
are published by independent organizations, institutes,
or agencies. All copyrights and trademarks related
to such codes and publications and the use thereof
belong to the entities owning rights to the same.
3. These test results indicate third-party analysis of the
Siemens product for compliance to the referenced
codes and editions. Nothing in this publication should
be taken as endorsements, official approvals, or official test results provided by the publishers of the referenced codes or any code enforcement authorities.
tiastar Motor Control Centres

Product Overview
Quality Features Exceed Standards

Siemens tiastar motor control centres
are composed of a number of vertical
sections bolted together. That allows
for future addition of MCC vertical units
so the equipment can expand with
customer needs. The standards structure
is 90 in. (2286 mm) high, plus a 1.125 in.
(29 mm) high channel sill. Front-only

structures can be either 15 in. (381 mm)
or 20 in. (508 mm) deep. Back-to-back
mounted structures are 30 in. (762 mm)
or 40 in. (1016 mm) deep, and consist of
two horizontal and vertical buses. This
allows for correct bus phasing on the

front or rear. Siemens provides a 21 in.
back-to-back design, consisting of a
common horizontal and vertical bus
structure, for applications where
available footprint is limited.
14
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
b
h
c
i
k
14-3

For ease in wiring and inspection,

terminal blocks are mounted on a
swing-out side barrier.
A racking lever on all plug-in units

ensures that they are fully engaged
with the vertical bus. An interlock
with the disconnect device ensures
that a plug-in unit is not inserted or
removed from the vertical bus when
the unit is energized.
A positive stop in the TEST

position indicates that a plug-in
unit is fully withdrawn from the
vertical bus.
Pilot devices are mounted on a

sturdy formed-metal panel attached
with two captive screws to the
MCC unit door for easy access
to internal components. For unit
removal and test, the pilot device
panel is easily removed from the
door and mountd on the unit.
A positive stop mechanism prevents

the unit from falling out of the
structure during unit removal.
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Product Overview
The horizontal bus compartment

is isolated from the horizontal
wireways by a crystal clear
polycarbonate barrier that makes
visible and infrared maintenance
inspection a breeze. The barrier is
easily removed when access to the
horizontal bus is required.
Horizontal bus design keeps the bus

in the top 12" of the structure, never
behind units, for easy maintenance
and accessibility.
A copper clip on plug-in units

engages and grounds units at
all times.
The unit disconnect operating

handle features a simple, rugged
design. ON and OFF are clearly
indicated by position, colour and
word. The TRIP indication is
clearly displayed on circuit breaker
equipped units.
A screwdriver operated defeater

mechanism allows access to
an energized unit by
authorized personnel.
All doors swing open a minimum

of 110 for easy unit access
and removal.
Important Additional Features:

b All wiring and components meet or exceed the requirements
of UL, CSA, NEMA, EEMAC, NEC and CEC
b Pre-wired components are professionally harnessed to
industrial terminal blocks
b Full depth wire tie rods are standard in each vertical wireway
b White interior increases visibility for easy wiring, maintenance
and inspection
b Modular units are fully interchangeable
b Each tiastar MCC is designed to satisfy your most exacting
specifications
b White on black base operating handle is easy to identify
14-4
Plug-in unit stab assemblies include

self-aligning stab clips with spring
steel backup springs. Wires from
the stab clips to the line-side of the
circuit breaker or disconnect switch
are contained in the stab housing
and are isolated phase-to-phase until
the wires enter the MCC.

Bus
Dimensions
(508 mm)
(762 mm)
(533 mm)
(1829 mm)
(102 mm)
(254 mm)
(972 sq. mm.)
(305 mm)
(178 mm)
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Outdoor (Non
walk-in)
Cu
Silver plating available by request (Cu only)

Incoming Line Terminations
Incoming line arrangements are available in many configurations from 600A to 2000A
Structural Gauge Chart
Side Barrier Plate

Angles
Doors
Vertical (A)*
300A
* Available with motor ground terminations
Plating
All power bus, tin plated is Standard
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
(152 mm)
(381 mm)
(508 mm)
(762 mm)*
(1016 mm)*
Pull Box (Top Hat)

Height
12 in.
18 in.
24 in.
Width
20 in.
30 in.
Depth
15 in.
20 in.
Structural Parts
Divider Sheets
Side Sheets
Centre Bottom Cross Ties
Rear Channel (FO)
Channel Sills
Centre-Top Channel
Vertical Bus Mounting Angles
Lifting Angles
Rear Covers
Top Plates
End Covers
Separator Angles
Shelf Brackets
Unit Parts
Top and Bottom Unit Barriers
Back Pan
600A
Cu
800A
Cu
1200A
Cu
1600A
Cu
2000A
Cu
Vertical Bus (A)
300A
Cu
600A
Cu
Neutral Bus (Bottom Mounted) (A) 600A
Cu
800A
Cu
1200A
Cu
1600A
Cu
Options
Full Neutral Cu
Neutral Landing Pad
Bus Bracing (KA Sym)
42KA
65KA
100KA*
* Cu Only
Barriers
Isolation Barrier
Grounded sheet steel with stab openings
Insulated & Isolated Barrier
Glass filled polyester sandwich that isolates
and insulates each phase from the others and
the bus from the front and rear compartments
Removable covers
Inserts to cover unused openings in V-bus
barrier
Automatic shutter mechanism
Option available for the stab in location of
each plug-in unit and requested future space
Ground Bus
Horizontal (Bottom Mounted) (A)
300A
Cu
Required for UL labeling
600A
Cu
Horizontal Bus (A)
(2315 mm)
(FO)
(508 mm)
(610 mm)
(762 mm)
(381 mm)
(508 mm)
14
Structure
Height
91.125 in.
Front Mounted Only Structure
Width
20 in.
24 in.
30 in.
Depth
15 in.
20 in.
Back to Back Structure (BTB)
Width
20 in.
30 in.
Depth
21 in.
Vertical Wireway
Height
72 in.
Width
4 in.
Depth
10 in.
Cross Section 38.25 sq. in.
Top Horizontal Wireway
Height
12 in.
Depth
7 in.
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
Height
6 in.
Depth
15 in.
20 in.
30 in.*
* BTB
40 in.*
Enclosure Types
NEMA 1
NEMA 1A
Gasketed
NEMA 2
Drip proof
NEMA 12
Dust tight
NEMA 3R
Rainproof
Technical
Weight Table
14
14
12
13
7
13
14
7
16
13
16
12
10
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
14
13
14
18
14
13
14
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
ga.
Finish (Ext.)
ANSI 61 Light Gray
Electrostatically applied dry powder paint in
Standard

H
W
91.125 (2315)
20 (508)
20 (508)
30 (762)
30 (762)
20 (508)
30 (762)
D
15
20
15
20
21
21
(381)
(508)
(381)
(508)
(533)
(533)
Type
FO
FO
FO
FO
BTB
BTB
Shipping weight per

Section in lbs (Kg)
550 (250)
650 (295)
700 (318)
850 (386)
670 (304)
880 (400)
Wiring Specifications
Control on Units
Interconnection
control wiring
between Units
Power wiring
Sized to suit
maximum HP
rating of unit
16 ga.
19 strand bonded copper
105C
600V
14 ga.
19 strand copper
105C
600V
14 ga. to 2 ga.
1 ga. to 500 MCM
19 strand copper
105C
600V
19 strand to 37 strand copper
105C
600V
14-5

Wiring Classifications
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Siemens MCCs are available as either

Class I or Class II assemblies utilizing
either Type A, Type B, or Type C wiring
as defined in NEMA ICS18-2001(3.1) and
NEMA ICS18-2001(3.3). Below are the
NEMA class and type definitions:
Class I Independent Units (NEMA
ICS18-2001(3.2.1))
Class I motor control centres shall consist
of mechanical groupings of combination
motor control units, feeder tap units, other
units, and electrical devices arranged in a
convenient assembly. The manufacturer
shall furnish drawings that include:
a. Overall dimensions of the motor control
centre, identification of units and their
location in the motor control centre,
locations of incoming line terminals,
mounting dimensions, available conduit
entrance areas, and the location of the
master terminal board if required (Type C
wiring only).
b. Manufacturers standard diagrams
for individual units and master terminal
boards (Type C wiring only) consist of one
or more drawing(s) that:
1. Identify electrical devices.
2. Indicate electrical connections.
3. Indicate terminal numbering
designations.
Note: When a combination schematic
and / or wiring diagram for a unit is
supplied showing optional devices, the
manufacturer shall provide information
to indicate which devices are actually
furnished.
IA
Technical
Class II Interconnected Units (NEMA

ICS18-2001(3.2.2))
Class II motor control centres shall
be the same as Class I motor control
centres with the addition of manufacturer
furnished electrical interlocking and
wiring between units as specified in
overall control system diagrams supplied
by the purchaser. In addition to the
drawings furnished for Class I motor
control centres, the manufacturer shall
furnish drawings that indicate factory
interconnections within the motor control
centre.
Class I-S and II-S Motor Control
Centres With Custom Drawing
Requirements (NEMA ICS182001(3.2.3))
Class I-S and II-S motor control centres
shall be the same as Class I and II except
custom drawings shall be provided in lieu
of standard drawings as specified by the
user. Examples of custom drawings are:
b Special identifications for electrical
devices
b Special terminal numbering designations
b Special sizes of drawings
The drawings supplied by the
manufacturer shall convey the same
information as drawings provided with
Class I and II motor control centres,
additionally modified as specified by the
user.
Types of Wiring NEMA ICS182001(3.3.1)
Type A (NEMA ICS18-2001 (3.3.1.1))
User field wiring shall connect directly to
device terminals internal to the unit and
shall be provided only on Class I motor
control centres.
14-6
Type C (NEMA ICS18-2001(3.3.1.3))

User field control wiring shall connect
directly to master terminal blocks
mounted at the top or bottom of those
vertical sections that contain combination
motor control units or control assemblies
which shall be factory wired to their
master terminal blocks. User field load
wiring for combination motor control
units, size 3 or smaller, shall connect
directly to master terminal blocks
mounted at the top or bottom of vertical
sections. Motor control unit load wiring
shall be factory wired to the master
terminal blocks. User field load wiring for
combination motor control units
larger than size 3, and for feeder tap units,
shall connect directly to unit device
terminals.
IB-T
IIB
IB-D
Type B (NEMA ICS18-2001(3.3.1.2))

a. Type B user field load wiring for
combination motor control units size 3 or
smaller shall be designated as B-D or B-T,
according to the following:
b B-D connects directly to the device
terminals, which are located
immediately adjacent and readily
accessible to the vertical wireway.
b B-T connects directly to a load terminal
block in, or adjacent to, the unit.
b. Type B user field load wiring for
combination motor control units larger
than size 3, and for feeder tap units, shall
connect directly to unit device terminals.
c. Type B user field control wiring
shall connect directly to unit terminal
block(s) located in, or adjacent to, each
combination motor control unit.
IC
IIC
Incoming Cable Space, Wiring Troughs, Wiring Terminations

CSA 22.2 No. 254-05 Motor Control
Centre CSA 22.2 No. 0.12M1985 (R203)
Wiring Space and Wire Bending Space in
Enclosure for Equipment Rated 750V or
less establishes very specific guidelines
for minimum cable bending space
within motor control centres. Figures
1 through 5 below describe the most
common arrangements for terminating
main incoming power cables in the
MCC. Consult Siemens for incoming
line compartment braced for 100,000
amperes symmetrical, short circuit.
Technical
Incoming Cable Space

Description of
Incoming Service
Top or Bottom
Incoming Section
Cable Entry
Top or Bottom
Space Requirements
in Inches (mm)
Notes
350 kcmil
Two per Phase
Top Directly
on Main Bus
Either
None
See Figure 3
See Figure 1
See Figure 1
600 kcmil One or

Two per Phase
Top
Either
Top Wireway plus

12.0 (305) or
18.0 (457)
600 kcmil Three or

Four per Phase
Top
Top
Top Wireway plus

18.0 (457)
Top
Top Wireway plus

24.0 (607)
750 kcmil One or

Two per Phase
Top
350 kcmil One or

Two per Phase
Bottom
Bottom
600 kcmil One or

Two per Phase
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom Wireway plus

18.0 (457)
Bottom Wireway plus
24.0 (610)
750 kcmil, up to eight per phase

500 kcmil One or Two per Phase
750 kcmil One per Phase to
Main Breaker
500 kcmil One to
Four per Phase
750 kcmil One per Phase to
Main Breaker
Busway or Cable Feed
to Line Reactor
Top or Bottom
Either
Full Structure
Top
Bottom
See
Breaker / Disconnect
See Figure 4
Top
Top
See
Breaker / Disconnect
See Figure 5
Top or Bottom
Either
Consult Siemens
Consult Siemens
600 A Maximum
See Figure 2
600 A Maximum
See Figure 2
Consult Siemens
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Main Lugs at Top with Top Cable Entry

Can accommodate up to two 600 kcmil
cables per phase when using Siemens
standard mechanical lugs. A total height
of 24 in. (610 mm). This includes 12 in.
(305 mm) for the top wireway plus 12 in.
(305mm) of unit space. Compression lugs
require extra vertical space or the addition
of a top hat.
Main Lugs at Bottom with

Bottom Cable Entry
Lugs are bolted directly to the bottom of the
vertical bus. Can accommodate up to two
350 kcmil per phase in 24 in. (610 mm) high
compartment. This includes 6 in. (152 mm)
for the bottom wireway plus 18 in. (457 mm)
of unit space. Can accommodate up to two
600 kcmil per phase in 30 in. (762 mm) high
compartment. This includes 6 in. (152 mm)
for the bottom wireway plus 24 in. (610 mm)
of unit space.
Main Lugs at Top with

Top or Bottom Cable Entry
In this arrangement the lugs mount
directly on the horizontal bus,
eliminating the need to use unit
mounting space. The limitation here is
350 kcmil cable per phase.
Figure 4
Main Disconnect with Bottom Cable Entry
Figure 5
Main Disconnect with Top Cable Entry
If bottom entry is used, cables must be properly laced and supported based upon the available short circuit
current. See dimensional requirements for molded case breakers and fused switches, consult local sales office.
14-7
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Note: All standard Siemens termination schemes shown herein do comply with applicable cable bending requirements of UL and the NEC.
14
Siemens MCCs are equipped with a 12 in. (305 mm) high, full-width horizontal wireway in the top and 6 in. (152 mm) in the
bottom of each structure. A separate vertical wireway connects the top and bottom wiring areas in each vertical section. This
wireway is 4 in. (102 mm) wide by 10 in. (254 mm) deep.

SIRIUS Contactors
SIRIUS Contactors
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
SIRIUS high - performance contactors offer a high degree of

protection while offering reduced mounting space. Ratings up
to 400 hp at 600V are covered by only 6 sizes; auxiliary contact blocks and coil surge suppressors are within the envelope
dimensions of the contactors.
The SIRIUS contactors are rated to meet both horsepower
and NEMA requirments.
14-8
Components Overview
The operating reliability of the SIRIUS contactors is especially
high. With the ability to achieve 10 million-mechanical-operations, they have an extremely long service life, require little
maintenance and are rugged.
Along with having a long service life. SIRIUS contactors rated
above 100 hp are also available with remaining life-time indicators for contact wear monitoring.

Overload Relays
SIMOCODE Pro C (Compact)

The compact motor management system
can be used for Full Voltage Nonreversing (FVNR) starters, Full Voltage
Reversing (FVR) starters, and base
overload functionality.
SIMOCODE Pro C
CT Module
Application
Keypad
(Door Mounted)
Industries
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload
relays are suitable for customers from
all industries who want to guarantee
optimun inverse-time delayed protection
or their electrical loads (e.g. motors)
under normal and heavy starting
conditions (Class 5 to Class 30), minimize
project completion times, inventories
and power consumption, and optimize
plant availability and maintenance
management.
Application
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload
relays have been designed for the
protection of induction motors in
sinusoidal 50/60Hz voltage networks.
The relays are not suitable for the
protection of single-phase AC or DC
loads.
SIMOCODE Pro V (Variable)

The variable motor management system
has an even greater range of functions,
including voltage and power monitoring
and expandable modules for additional
I/O, as well as temperature and ground
fault protection.
CT Module
SIMOCODE Pro V
Expandable Module
Keypad
(Door Mounted)
Note: For detailed information on the SIMODE Pro please

contact the local Siemens Sales Office.
The 3RU11 thermal overload relay or the

3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relay
can be used for single-phase AC loads.
For DC loads we recommend the 3RU11
thermal overload relay.
SIMOCODE Pro
SIMOCODE Pro is the latest generation
of Motor Management System
(Smart Overload) bringing a new level
of flexibility and functionality within the
Siemens smart motor control centre.
By means of a PROFIBUSDP interface,
it can easily be linked to higher-level
automation systems. SIMOCODE Pro
implements all motor protection and
control functions, determines operational,
diagnostic and statistical data and
organizes the communication between
the automation system and MCC bucket.
14-9
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays up to 630A with internal
power supply have been designed for
The SIMOCODE Pro consists of two

device series with different levels of
functionality:
14
(1) Connection for mounting onto

contactors:
Optimally adapted in electrical,
mechanical and design terms to the
contactors and soft starters, these
connecting pins can be used for
direct mounting of the overload
relays. Stand-alone installation is
possible as an alternative (in some
cases in conjunction with a stand-
alone installation module).
(2) Selector switch for manual/auto-
matic RESET and RESET buttons:
With the slide switch you can
choose between manual and auto matic RESET. A device set to manu-
al RESET can be reset locally by
pressing the RESET button. On
the 3RB21 a solid-stste remote
RESET is integrated.
(3) Switch position indicator and
TEST function of the wiring:
Indicates a trip and enables the wir-
ing test.
(4) Solid-state test (device test):
Enables a test of all important
device components and functions.
(5) Motor current settings:
Setting the device to the rated
motor current is easy with large
rotary knob.
(6) Trip class setting/internal
ground-fault detection (only 3RB21):
Using the rotary switch you can set
the required trip class and activate
the internal ground-fault detection
dependent on the start-up conditions.
(7) Connecting terminals (removable
joint block for auxiliary circuits):
The generously sized terminals per mit connection of two conductors
with different cross-sections for the
main and auxiliary circuits. The auxil-
iary circuit can be connected with
screw terminals and altnatively with
spring-loaded terminals.
inverse-time delayed protection of loads

with normal and heavy starting against
excessive temperature rise due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure.
An overload, phase unbalance or phase
failure result in an increase of the motor
current beyond the set rated motor current. This current rise is detected by the
current transformers integrated into the
devices and evaluated by corresponding
solid-state circuits which then output a
pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load
by means of a contactor. The break time
depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is
stored in the form of a long-term stable
tripping characteristic.

Components Overview
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Overview
The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance:
b Soft starting and soft stop
b Stepless starting
b Reduction of current peaks
b Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting
b Reduced load on the power supply
network
b Reduction of the mechanical load in
the operating mechanism
b Considerable space savings and
reduced wiring compared with
mechanical reduced voltage starters
b Maintenance-free switching
b Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular
system
SIRIUS 3RW44
In addition to soft starting and soft stopping, the solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starters provide numerous functions for
higher-level requirements. They cover a
rating range up to 900Hp at 460 V in the
inline circuit.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are
characterized by a compact design
for space-saving and clearly arranged
control cabinet layouts. For optimized
motor starting and stopping, the innovative SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an
attractive alternative with considerable
savings potential compared to applications with a frequency converter. The
new torque control and adjustable current limiting enable these high feature
soft starters to be used in nearly every
conceivable task. They reliably mitigate
the sudden torque applications and current peaks during motor starting and
stopping. This creates savings potential
when calculating the size of the controlgear and when servicing the machinery installed. Be it for inline circuits or
inside-delta circuits the SIRIUS 3RW44
soft starter offers savings especially in
terms of size and equipment costs.
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down possibilities ensure
an optimum adaptation to the applicationspecific requirements. Operating and
commissioning can be performed by
means of the user-friendly keypad and
14-10
a menuprompted, multi-line graphic display with background lighting. The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down
can be effected by means of just a few
settings with a previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text
displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the
parameterization and operation.
Applicable standards
b IEC 60947-4-2
b UL/CSA #E143112
Application areas
b Fans
b Pumps
b Building/construction machines
b Presses
b Escalators
b Transport systems
b Air conditioning systems
b Ventilators
b Assembly lines
b Operating mechanisms
Application areas, e.g.

b Pumps
b Mills
b Ventilators
b Saws
b Compressors
b Crushers
b Water transport
b Mixers
b Conveying systems and lifts
b Centrifuges
b Hydraulics
b Industrial cooling and refrigerating
systems

Variable Frequency Drives
Components Overview
14
MICROMASTER
family of products
Application
The MICROMASTER 440 inverter
is suitable for a variety of variable-speed
drive applications. Its flexibility provides
for a wide spectrum of applications.
These also include cranes and hoisting
gear, high-bay warehouses, production machines for food, beverages and
tobacco, packaging machines etc.; i.e.
applications which require the
frequency inverter to have a higher
functionality and dynamic response than
usual. The inverter is especially characterized by its customer-oriented
performance and easeof- use. Its large
mains voltage range enables it to be
used all over the world.
Design
The MICROMASTER 440 inverter
has a modular design. The operator
panels and modules can be easily
exchanged.
International standards
b The MICROMASTER 440 inverter
complies with the requirements of
the EU lowvoltage guideline
b The MICROMASTER 440 inverter has
the marking
b acc. to and c certified
b c-tick
Main characteristics
b Easy, guided start-up
b Modular construction allows maximum configuration flexibility
b Six programmable isolated digital
inputs
b Two scaleable analog inputs (0 V to
10 V, 0 mA to 20 mA) can also be
used as a 7th/8th digital input
b Two programmable analog outputs (0
mA to 20 mA)
b Three programmable relay outputs (30
V DC/5 A resistive load; 250 V AC/2A
inductive load)
b Low-noise motor operation thanks
to high pulse frequencies, adjustable
(observe derating if necessary)
b Complete protection for motor and
inverter.
Options (overview)
b EMC filter, Class A/B
b LC filter and sinusoidal filter
b Line commutating chokes
b Output chokes
b Gland plates
b Basic Operator Panel (BOP) for parameterizing the inverter
b Plain text Advanced Operator Panel
(AOP) with multilanguage display
b Communication modules
PROFIBUS
DeviceNet
CANopen
b Pulse encoder evaluation module
b PC connection kits
b Mounting kits for installing the operator panels in the control cabinet doors
b PC start-up tools executable under
Windows 98 and NT/2000/ME/XP
Professional
b TIA integration with Drive ES
14-11
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
MICROMASTER 440

Power Monitoring
Components Overview
Power Monitoring
Siemens line of power meters provides
market leading technology for power
quality measurement. These products
continually change to meet growing
needs for power quality and energy
monitoring. Siemens tiastar MCCs
are fully capable of installing any of
Siemens power meters for your needs.
PAC3200
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
PAC3100
The SENTRON PAC3100 is a powerful compact power monitoring device
that is suitable for use in industrial,
government and commercial applications, where basic metering and energy
monitoring is required. The meter may
be used as a stand alone device monitoring over 25 parameters or as part of
an industrial control, building automation or global power monitoring system.
Metering and monitoring applications
range from simple analog volt and amp
meter replacements to stand-alone subbilling or cost allocation installations.
The PAC3100 has many features not
usually found in this price class of
meters. A large graphical display supports multiple languages and easy to
use menus that can be used to set up
the meter. The meter also has built
in Modbus RTU communications via
a RS485 interface. The meter comes
standard with two digital inputs and outputs. One output is suitable for pulse
output for export/import real and reactive energy. The other output is controllable from an outside source by way of
a Modbus register.
14-12
PAC4200
PAC3200
PAC4200
The SENTRON PAC3200 is a powerful compact power monitoring device

that is suitable for use in industrial,
government and commercial applications where basic metering and energy monitoring is required. The meter
may be used as a stand alone device
monitoring over 50 parameters or as
part of an industrial control, building
automation or global power monitoring system. Metering and monitoring
applications range from simple analog
volt and amp meter replacements to
stand-alone sub billing or cost allocation
installations with multiple tariffs.
The SENTRON PAC4200 is a feature

packed power monitoring device that
is suitable for use in industrial, government and commercial applications
where basic to advanced metering, logging, and I/O is required. The meter may
be used as a stand alone device monitoring over 200 parameters or as part of
an industrial control, building automation
or global enterprise wide monitoring
system.
The SENTRON PAC3200 provides open

communications using Modbus RTU/
TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, and PROFINET
protocols for easy integration into any
local or remote monitoring system.
Simple configuration of the meter can
be done from the front display.
Advanced power quality monitoring and

logging applications range from single
low voltage breaker / building metering
to sub-station main feeder monitoring,
sub-billing or cost allocation installations
with multiple tariffs. Whether your goal
is to reduce operation cost, reduce your
carbon footprint or to maintain your
power assets, the PAC 4200 meter
should be an important part of your
power monitoring system.
The SENTRON PAC4200 provides open
communication using the standard builtin Ethernet Modbus TCP and has the
capability of communicating through
Optional Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS-DP,
and PROFINET protocol modules simultaneously. This allows for easy integration into any local or remote monitoring
system. The gateway functionality of
this device reduces installation cost by
replacing other gateway devices and
simplifying wiring.
TPS3 Family of Hardwired Surge Protective Devices
Product Overview
TPS3 Integral or Internally Mounted SPDs for MCCs

Siemens Integral TPS3s are UL 1449 3rd Edition, factory installed SPDs within
our MCCs, utilizing optimal electrical system connections to minimize impedance
losses. This results in the some of the industrys best installed Voltage Protection
Ratings. This SPD has the following features:
14
TPS3 01 Features
b UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283
CSA Attestation
b UL Type 1 (consult factory) or Type 4
tested as Type 1 or 2 SPDs
b 20 kA In (most models)
b 100 - 300 kA per phase surge current
capacity
b EMI/RFI filtering or Sine Wave
tracking
b LED, Audible Alarm, Dry Contacts,
and Ground Integrity Monitoring
Diagnostics
b 200 kA SCCR (most models)
b UL96A Lightning Protection Master
Label Compliant
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
TPS3 01 Module
TPS3 01 MCC Installation
Catalogue Number
TPS3
01
Options
Voltage Code
Surge Current (kA)
A = 120/240V, 1, 3W (Fig 1)
B = 120/240V, 3, 4W (Fig 3)
C = 120/208V, 3, 4W (Fig 2)
D = 240V, 3, 3W (Fig 4)
E = 277/480V, 3, 4W (Fig 2)
F = 480V, 3, 3W (Fig 4)
G = 600V, 3, 3W (Fig 4)*
K = 380/220V, 3, 4W (Fig 2)
L = 600/347V, 3, 4W (Fig 2)
S = 400/230V, 3, 4W (Fig 2)

B =
M=
W=
X =
Busway Application
MCC Application
Terminal Lug
Surge Counter
-- Example: TPS3C0120X00 = SPD for a 208/120V panelboard with a surge current capacity of 200
kA per phase and a surge counter option
* Availiable 100kA & 150kA only
-- Available Accessories: Must be Ordered Separately
Note: 600V, 3, 3W
Surge Current (kA) for 200 and 250kA use TPS3_06 model
TPS3 G 06 20 _ _ _ for 200kA
TPS3 G 06 25 _ _ _ for 250kA
14-13

Product History
Aftermarket
Starters
240V, 480V, 575V
FVNR
NEMA size
1-6
Standard options
Amp meter + CT
Surge suppression
FVR
1-5
CT
Under voltage CB
2S1W-CT
1-5
Voltage monitor
Shunt trip
2S1W-VT
1-5
2S2W-CT
1-5
Vac. contactor
Ground stab
2S2W-VT
1-5
Transducer
High density bucket
RVAT
2-6
Fuse puller
Special paint
RVSS
Consult factory
Bypass
Timer
VFD
Consult factory
ASI
4P relay
Ground fault
Extra unit space
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Elapse time meter
14-14
14
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Innovative protection for your most

valuable asset: your personnel.
The Siemens tiastar arc resistant Motor Control Centre
(MCC) is the industrys first MCC tested to the ANSI/IEEE
C37.20.7 testing guide, with representatives of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) present to observe the testing
procedures. The tiastar Motor Control Centre has been
designed with more advanced features to control arc flash
exposure. Thus users experience superior arc resistance
that meets a high standard in protecting people, capital
investments and operations.
14-15

Arc Resistant
Managing Hazards and

Reducing Risk are Top Priorities
Manufacturers in all segments of industry are constantly
seeking methods to improve the safety of their workforce.
One area of focus is the reduction of hazards associated with
arc flash events. Siemens arc resistant tiastar Motor Control
Centre significantly reduces risk for workers entering areas
with arc flash potential by containing and directing the arc flash
incident energy away from personnel and maintaining the units
physical integrity.
The arc resistant tiastar was developed to meet applicable safety codes and standards, while NFPA 70E and IEEE C37.20.7
provided the guidance to design and manufacture features that

are capable of ensuring Type 2 accessibility of the motor control centre.
The ability to provide Type 2 accessibility, as defined by IEEE
C37.20.7, helps shield personnel on the front, rear and sides
of the equipment from the damaging effects of arc flash incidents. Robust structural and bus designs, isolated horizontal
and insulated vertical bus designs are critical to withstand the
mechanical forces released during an arc flash event.
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
The Benefits of a Superior Arc Resistant Design

A HIGHER
STANDARD
With UL observing and validating the testing of our arc resistant design, the design innovations
of the Siemens tiastar Motor Control Centre have set a new industry benchmark.
INCREASED
PROTECTION
FOR PERSONNEL
Your people are, and always will be, your most valuable asset. Improve workplace safety and
protect your work force by lowering the risk of electrical shock and harmful exposure to arc flash
incident energy.
PRESERVED ASSETS
Arc flash events endanger equipment and operations. Enhanced arc resistance reduces damage
to nearby assets, which in turn cuts repair and replacement costs.
SMARTER,
PASSIVE DESIGN
Passive designs do not rely on secondary devices to mitigate arc flash energies. Siemens arc
resistant tiastar Motor Control Centres are manufactured to contain the energy created during
an arcing event for 50ms.
IMPROVED
SPECIFICATIONS
The lack of formal arc flash resistance standards for MCCs poses a challenge for engineers wanting to specify safer solutions. By meeting ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 testing guides for Metal Enclosed
Switchgear, Siemens has raised the bar for MCC designs and created a specifiable standard.
ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.20.7-2007
Additional Safety Options Available
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7, IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed

Switchgear Rated Up to 38kV for Internal Arcing Faults,
provides guidelines to test the resistance to the effects of
arcing due to an internal fault in metal enclosed equipment;
equipment that successfully meets this standard demonstrates
greater protection against arc flash hazards, as long as all safety
protocols are followed. Note that use of Siemens arc resistance
features do not substitute for proper safety procedures
in compliance with OSHA and other government safety
regulations. They do mean more advanced safety features
that can keep your people and facility better protected against
electrical dangers and hazards of arc flashes.
Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry allows the setting of dual

parameters for the circuit protective device. These dual
parameters, normal and lower arc flash settings, are designed
to enhance the safety of personnel who may work on or near
energized equipment.
14-16
A normal setting optimizes the WL circuit breaker to provide

the most efficient selective trip coordination.
Lower Arc Flash Energy setting enables a reduced operating
time, allowing the instantaneous trip function via remote
switches, key lock or other inputs.
Smart MCC Technology utilizes built-in networks and
pre-configurations to control, monitor and troubleshoot the
equipment remotely to minimize the need for personnel to
enter the arc flash boundary.

Arc Resistant
Key Innovations in Arc Resistance

CONTAIN AND CHANNEL THE ARC FLASH INCIDENT ENERGY:
By meeting ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 Type 2 Arc Resistance, the new
tiastar arc resistant design protects personnel at the front, back
and sides of the equipment by directing the energy through the top.
MODIFIED PULL-BOX WITH

PRESSURE FLAPS FOR
PRESSURE RELIEF IN CASE
OF AN ARC FLASH EVENT
14
REINFORCED ENCLOSURE AND

FRONT DOORS
Extra hinges, stronger latching systems
and reinforced cabinet ensure the equipment can withstand and contain pressure
from internal arcing faults.
INTERNAL VENTING SYSTEM

The vertical wireway is perforated
with holes that channel the gasses to
the back and out the top of the MCC.
AUTOMATIC SHUTTERS IN PLUG-IN

UNIT COMPARTMENTS
The barrier automatically opens and closes
to allow insertion or removal of units.
Isolates the vertical bus to prevent inadvertent contact lowering the risk to personnel.
NEW PROTECTION PLATE FOR VENTED

DOORS ALLOWS THE INCLUSION OF
ELECTRONIC STARTERS IN THE ARC
RESISTANT MCC.
INSULATED BUS BAR SYSTEM

Isolate energized components and
prevent accidental contact and arcing faults from propagating.
14-17
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
6" UNITS AVAILABLE

IN SIEMENS tiastar ARC
RESISTANT MCC
14
New technology for reducing arc flash

hazards in motor control centers
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry is now

available in tiastar TM motor control
centers from Siemens.
Heres how the innovation reduces arc
flash hazards and optimizes efficiency:
Unique dual trip setting technology
reduces the energy available in an
arc flash event.
Remote switching enables you to
automate trip function settings.
tiastar Motor Control Centre

14-18

Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry
Arc Flash: A Growing Concern

The risk of arc flashes is a growing concern in the industry.
Current research shows that up to 80% of reported electrical
injuries are caused by an electrical arc. This fact has spawnednew requirements and standards, including NFPA 70E and
NEC, designed to protect personnel on and around energized
electrical equipment.
To fulfill these enhanced standards, Siemens has developed
new technologies to address the critical issue of arc flash.
Our unique Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry (DAS) system is now
available in tiastar Motor Control Centres. The DAS anchors a
suite of standard and optional features, specifically designed to
enhance arc flash protection. DAS is also currently available in
Siemens low voltage switchgear.
14
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Dual protective settings

The dual protection setting capability of ETU776 electronic trip
units form the basis of the Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry technology. The ETU776 is placed within a WL Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breaker and allows two separate control parameters to
be set.
What is Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry?

Siemens strongly recommends that all systems be de-energized when personnel are working on electrical equipment.
However, in some circumstances, qualified professionals may
need to access and work near energized equipment.
Under these conditions, the Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry provides
additional arc flash protection without sacrificing operational
efficiency. DAS is based on the electronic trip unit (ETU776),
available with the Siemens WL circuit breaker. Using the WL
as the main breaker a tiastar motor control centre enables the
system to provide two trip level settings. In normal operation
mode, trip coordination is optimized for efficiency and reduced
nuisance tripping. The second setting is designed to lower arc
flash energy using the WL breakers instantaneous trip function.
The dual protective settings, combined with the ability to toggle
between normal and lower arc flash parameters, are designed
to enhance the safety of personnel who must work on or near
energized equipment. With a range of options, from fully automated switching to manual key operation, Siemens DAS technology combines enhanced arc flash protection with maximum
operational flexibility.
A normal operation parameter (A) optimizes the WL breaker

to provide the most efficient selective trip coordination. The
second parameter (B) optimizes the system for lower arc flash
energy. Since arc flash energy is most affected by the available
fault current and operating time of the WL, the instantaneous
trip function is a key to the reduction in arc flash energy provided by parameter B.
Remote switching
Siemens Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry can be controlled through
a dry contact input. This ability to toggle between trip unit settings allows for remote communications.
Key lock protection
A simple, yet effective way to control trip unit parameter
switching from a remote location is by placing a key lock on
the entry door of the energized equipment room. Unlocking the
door triggers the WL to switch to Parameter B, ensuring this
setting is employed when anyone is present in the room.
With Siemens Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry, your facility can have
the best of both worlds: reduced arc flash energy and maximum operational efficiency. For more information on DAS, contact your Siemens representative.
14-19

Benefits of Siemens Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry Technology

By reducing the potential arc flash energy that can accompany
an electrical fault, the Dynamic Arc Flash Sentry offers:
b Creates an improved work environment. By decreasing the
amount of energy available in an arc flash, Dynamic Arc
Flash Sentry makes the area surrounding the motor control
centre less susceptible to arc flash damage.
b Promotes operational efficiency. Trip coordination is opti mized when personnel are not near energized equipment
and arc flash energy is reduced when they are.
.5 .6.5.8
.6 1.8 1 2
1000
1000
CURRENT
IN AMPERES
X 10
ATAT
480
VOLTS
CURRENT
IN AMPERES
X 10
480
VOLTS
9 8100
5 65 7687981000
10000
23 43 546 57 8
697 10
8 9 10 2 2 3 34 54 657687
9 100 2 2 3 34 4
9 10002 2 3 34 45 56 7
6 8798 9
10000
1000
1000
CURRENT IN AMPERES
AMPERES XX10
10 AT
AT480
480VOLTS
VOLTS
33 44 55 66 7 8 9 10
100 22 33 44 55667788991000
1000 22 33 44556 67 7
8 910000
10000
2 3 44 55 66 778899 100
89
1000
1000
500
500
400
400
300
300
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
7070
5050
4040
3030
70
70
50
50
40
40
30
30
7070
5050
4040
3030
20 20
2020
20
20
10 10
7 7
1010
77
10
10
77
TIME IN SECONDS
70 70
50 50
40 40
30 30
5
4
3
2
1
.7
BL-4 BL-4
Siemens
Siemens
(Std)(Std)
HFD6
HFD6
Frame
= 250A(225-250A)
Frame
= 250A(225-250A)
Trip =Trip
225= 225
= Fixed
(1800A)
Inst =Inst
Fixed
(1800A)
5
4
3
55
44
33
.7
.5
.5 .4
.4
.3
.3
.2
.2
.1
.07
BL-5
BL-5Siemens ETU 776 L(SIG)
Siemens
ETU
776 L(SIG)
Frame
= 800(I^2T)
Frame
= 800(I^2T)
Plug
= 800
Plug Cur
= 800
Set = 0.8 (640A)
Cur Set
= 0.8=(640A)
LT Band
5 sec
LT Band
=5
STPU
= sec
4000 (4000A)
STPU
4000 (4000A)
ST= Delay
= 0.097
ST Delay
STPU =It0.097
= Out
STPU It = Out
.1
.1
.1
.07
.07
.05
.05
.04
.04
.03
.03
.02
.02
Normal Operation
Normal Operation
Parameter A
Parameter A
.01
.5 .6 .8 1
.01
.5 .6 .8 1
2
.7
.7
.5
.5.4
.4
.3
.3
.2
.2
.07
.05
.05 .04
.04 .03
.03
.02
.02
.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9.01
10000
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10CURRENT
2 3 IN4 AMPERES
5 6 7 8 9 100
2 480
3 VOLTS
4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10000
X 10 AT
700
700
BL-4
BL-4
Siemens (Std)
(Std)
Siemens
HFD6
HFD6
Frame == 250A(225-250A)
250A(225-250A)
Frame
Trip == 225
225
Trip
Inst = Fixed (1800A)
Inst
= Fixed (1800A)
b
b
b
b
b

Automatic Shutters
Isolated and insulated vertical bus
Assembly open bus covers
Vertical ground bus
55
44
3
3
2
2
BL-5
BL-5
Siemens ETU 776 L(SIG)
Siemens
776 L(SIG)
Frame = ETU
800(I^2T)
Frame
800(I^2T)
Plug = =
800
Plug
= 800
Cur Set
= 0.8 (640A)
Cur
Set ==0.8
(640A)
LT Band
5 sec
LT
Band
= 5 sec
STPU
= 4000
(4000A)
STPU
= 4000
(4000A)
ST Delay
= 0.097
ST
Delay
0.097
STPU
It == Out
STPU It = Out
1
1
.7
.7
.5
.5.4
.4
.3
.3
.2
.2
.1
.1
.07
.07
.05
.05
.04
.04
.03
.03
.02
.02
Maintenance Operation
Maintenance Operation
Parameter B
Parameter B
.01
.01 .5 .6 .8 1
.5 .6 .8 1
2
2
Voltage indicator
.01
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10000
.01
3 4 5 6 7 8 9CURRENT
10
2 IN
3 AMPERES
4 5 6 7 8 9X 100
2 VOLTS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10000
10 AT 480
CURRENT IN AMPERES X 10 AT 480 VOLTS
14-20
High resistance ground

Phase isolated horizontal bus
Voltage indicator
Infrared inspection ports
Smart MCC Technology featuring Profibus DP
Blown fuse indicators
Automatic shutters
1
.7
.7
.5
.4.5
.4
.3
.3
.2
.2
Optional features:
b
b
b
b
b
b
200
200
1010
77
Siemens Arc Sentry tiastar Motor Control Centre

Required features:
500
500
400
400
300
300
2020
55
44
33
.1
.1
.07
.07
.05
.05
.04
.04
.03
.03
.02
.02
CURRENT IN AMPERES X 10 AT 480 VOLTS
BL-1
BL-1
Siemens
SiemensETU
ETU776
776L(SIG)
L(SIG)
Frame
Frame= =1600(I^2T)
1600(I^2T)
Plug
Plug= =1600
1600
Cur
CurSet
Set= =1 1(1600A)
(1600A)
LT
LTBand
Band= =3 3sec
sec
STPU
STPU= =6510
6510(6510A)
(6510A)
ST
STDelay
Delay= =0.32
0.32
STPU
STPUItIt= =Out
Out
Inst
Inst= =10000A
10000A
BL-2
BL-2
Siemens (Std)
(Std)
Siemens
LXD6
LXD6
Frame == 600A(500-600T)
600A(500-600T)
Frame
Trip==600
600
Trip
Inst ==33 (3800A)
(3800A)
Inst
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
100 100
TIME IN SECONDS
22
700
700
BL-1
BL-1
Siemens
ETU
L(SIG)
Siemens
ETU
776776
L(SIG)
Frame
= 1600(I^2T)
Frame
= 1600(I^2T)
Plug
= 1600
Plug
= 1600
1 (1600A)
CurCur
SetSet
= 1=(1600A)
Band
= 15
LT LT
Band
= 15
secsec
STPU
= 6510
(6510A)
STPU
= 6510
(6510A)
Delay
= 0.32
ST ST
Delay
= 0.32
STPU
= Out
STPU
It It
= Out
= 65000A
InstInst
= 65000A
TIME
TIMEININSECONDS
SECONDS
14
.5.5.6.6 .8
.8 11
1000
1000
500
500
400
400
300
300
BL-2 BL-2
Siemens
(Std)(Std)
Siemens
LXD6LXD6
Frame
= 600A(500-600T)
Frame
= 600A(500-600T)
Trip =Trip
600= 600
= 3 (3800A)
Inst =Inst
3 (3800A)
200 200
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
b Offers enhanced flexibility. The DAS has the features

required to allow remote communication to alter trip param eters or to fully automate the system.
700
700
500 500
400 400
300 300
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
700 700
b Provides a clear competitive advantage. Unlike other arc

flash circuit breakers, the DAS allows modification of the
parameters in the trip unit, instead of utilizing potentially
compromising trip coordination at all times.
Isolated/insulated
vertical bus assembly

Customer:
Prepared By:
Check boxes and fill in blanks as required.
STANDARDS
CSA
NEMA
Service Entrance
Hydro Utility Company _________________________________________________
INCOMING POWER
* System Voltage:
* Power System
Configuration:
* Available Fault
Current:
208/120V 3p4w
380V 3p3w
480V 3p3w
600V 3p3w
380V 3p4w
480/277V 3p4w
600/347V 3p4w
Wye
Delta
High Resistance Ground
Other _________________________________
18 000A
25 000A
42 000A
85 000A
22 000A
35 000A
65 000A
100 000A
STRUCTURE
Pullbox:
Type 1 - Indoor (Std.)
Type 2/1 - Indoor, Drip Proof
Type 1A - Indoor, Gasketed
Type 2/1A - Indoor, Drip Proof/Gasketed
Type 12 - Indoor, Industrial
Type 2/12 - Indoor, Drip Proof/Industrial
15" Deep, Front Only
20" Deep, Front Only
21" Deep, Back to Back
12"
18"
24"
Incoming Section Only
All Sections
150 W Space Heater:
None
Power Source:
120V
240V
External
Internal
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
* Depth:
14
* Enclosure:
Thermostat Every Shipping Split

Options:
Modifications:
Paint:
2 Piece Backplate (20W)
Removable Bottom Plates
Automatic Shutters
Seismic Zone 4 (UBC)
Gray ANSI 61 (Std)
Custom Color - describe ___________________________
BUS
* Power Bus Bracing
(amperes rms symmetrical):
45 kA STD
65 kA
100 kA
600A STD
800A STD
1200A STD ______________________________________
50C Copper:
600A
600A
600A
Main Vertical Bus:
300A F.O.B. STD
600A B.T.B. STD
Option F.O.B. 600A
65C Copper:
* Horizontal Bus:
Rating:
1200A
1600A STD
2000A STD
Vertical Bus:
Insulated Barriers c/w Fish-Tape Barrier(s)
* Ground Bus:
Horizontal Ground Bus:
300A 1/4 x 1
600A 1/4 x2
Ground Bus Location:
Top Mounted
Bottom Mounted
Note: 3 phase 3 wire (3p3w) - standard ground bus location bottom

Ground Bus Plating:
Bare Copper STD
Tin Plated Copper
Vertical Ground Bus:
Not required
Required w/ Motor Terms
Silver Plated Copper- describe
* = Required Field
14-21

BUS - continued
Rating:
Neutral Bus:
Location:
Full Rated:
600A
800A
1200A
Half Rated:
600A
800A
1200A
Incoming Section Only
1600A
All Sections
INCOMING LINE TERMINATION

* INCOMING
Located in Section No. ____________________________________________
Top
Bottom
Copper
Alum
600A Inc. 2 x 350 MCM inside wireway "no loss of space"

Main Lug (MLO):
No. of cables per phase: _______________ Cable Size:_________________

Mechanical Lugs
( Please check Tiastar MCC Instruction Guide for lugs detail)
Compression Lugs (Provision for NEMA 2 holes pattern)
Main Circuit Breaker (MCB):
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
Notes: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Located in Section No.__________________________________________
Breaker Rating, Frame:__________________________________________
Top
Breaker Rating, Trip:________________

Mechanical Lugs
Bottom
Copper
Alum
( Please check Tiastar MCC Instruction Guide for lugs detail)
Notes: ____________________________________________________________________________________________
Breaker Option:
Main Fusible Disconnect (MFD):
Alarm Contact
Internal Ground Fault
Shunt Trip
Internal Aux. Switch
Kirk Key
Located in Section No. ____________________________________________
Top
Bottom
Copper
Alum
Ampere Rating: _____________________________
Factory Supplied and Installed

Supplied & Installed by Others
Fuse Clip:
Class J Current limiting, time delay
Fuse Rating: ________________________________

Class L "for 800A and 1200A only"
Mechanical Lugs
Notes: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Modification Option:
Door Padlock Hasp
Lighting Arrester
Ground Detection Lights
Phase Monitor
9200A Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)

9200B Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)
9200C Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)
PAC3200 Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)
* Metering Options
9330 Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)

9350 Power Meter, 3p4w, 2000A (3CT, 3PT)
CT for Metering, 2000:X
PT for Metering, Including fuses, 575V, 60Hz
Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter or Voltmeter
Extra Fuses (with Switch \-or\-Shorting Terminal Block)
* = Required Field
14-22
Surge Capacitor

INCOMING LINE TERMINATION - continued

Surge Protection Device
Surge Current:
*Disconnect:
Options:
None
150 kA
250 kA
100 kA
200 kA
300 kA
Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Direct Connection (12")
Fusible Disconnect
Surge Counter
Remote Monitor ( External to MCC) (RMSIE)
FEEDER UNITS
Fused Switch:
Class J Clips for "Current Limiting Time Delay" Fuse

Single Mounted (30a, 60A)
Dual Mounted (30A, 60A)
Quantity _______________________________
100
200
400
600
Fuse Rating: ________________________________
14
Interrupting Rating: ________________________________
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Circuit Breaker
(Thermal Magnetic):
Other Options: _____________________________________________________________________________________
Dual Mounted
Dual Mounted
ED, 125A Frame Max 18 kA
CED, 125A Frame Max 100 kA
Quantity _______________________________
250A F frame
400A J frame
800A M frame
1200A N frame
600A L frame
Other Options: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Breaker Option:
External Option:
Internal Aux. Switch
Alarm Contact
Shunt Trip
Other Options: ______________________________________
Ground Fault Indication
Ground Fault Trip
COMBINATION CONTACTOR/STARTER UNITS

* Wiring:
NEMA Wiring Class:

NEMA Wiring Type:
IS
II
IIS
BD - Unit Terminal Block

BT - Unit Terminal Block Load connected thru size 3
C - Mater Terminal Block:
Top 12" Wireway
Bottom 6" Wireway
Master Control Section
Pull-apart Control Terminal STD

Stationary Control Terminal
Contactor/Starter Types:
FVC
FVNR
FVR
2S1W
2S2W
Other: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Disconnecting Means - Fusible:
Class J Clips for "Current Limiting Time Delay" Fuse

Fuses:
Disconnecting Means - Circuit Breaker:
Factory Supplied and Installed
Motor Circuit Protector (magnetic/instantaneous only)
Supplied and Installed by Others

Circuit Breaker (thermal-magnetic)
Accessories: _____________________________________________________________________________________
* = Required Field
14-23

COMBINATION CONTACTOR/STARTER UNITS - continued

* Overload Relays:
3RB20 STD
Simocode Pro V
Option Electronic 3RB21 c/w ground fault

Note: Max 30 Simocodes per network segment
Secondary Voltage:
120 VAC (std)
Other: ___________________________________________
Factory wired with Profibus

Options: _____________________________________________________________________________________________
CT Module
PT/CT Module in place of CT Module
No Operator Control Panel/Door push button (label) Reset

Operator Control Panel w/o LCD
Simocode Expansion Modules
Operator Control Panel with LCD
4I/2O 110-240VAC Monostable Module

1I/1O Analog Module
14
Decoupling Module use with PT/CT module
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Temperature Module
Summation Current Transfomer
4I/2O 110-240VAC Bistable Module
Earth Fault Module
Options: _____________________________________________________________________________________________
* Unit Nameplate:
* Control Power:
Self Adhesive STD
Screw
1200A N frame
Colours
Black letters on white
White letters on black
Other: _________________
STD
Individual Control Transformer (CPT)
Secondary Voltage:
120 VAC (std)
None
Standard Capacity
Other: _________________
100 VA extra
Option:
No Interlock on Handle
Interlock on Handle 1 NO, 1 NC
Interlock Auxiliary Switch 1 NO, 1 NC
Option:
Mater Control Transformer
Secondary Voltage:
120 VAC (std)
Factory Wiring
Other: _________________
Control Fuses Inside Starter
Standard:
Option:
Internal Auxiliary Switch 1 NO, 1 NC
Option:
Separate Source (remote to MCC)
Secondary Voltage:
120 VAC (std)
Other: _________________
Control Fuses Inside Starter
* Starter Options:
Standard:
Option:
Internal Auxiliary Switch 1 NO, 1 NC
Starter Auxiliary Option - Qty._________________________N.O. Qty.____________________________N.C.

Pilot Devices
Pushbuttons, Describe Function (such as start/stop): ____________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________
Selector Switches, Describe Function (such as off-on, hand-off-auto): ______________
_____________________________________________________________________________
22 mm
Pilot Lights
30 mm
Push-to-test
STD Bulb
Qty. ____________ Colour(s): ____________
LED
Qty. ____________ Colour(s): ____________
Relays or Timers, Describe: _________________________________________________________________________

Others, Describe: __________________________________________________________________________________
* = Required Field
14-24

OTHER UNIT/APPARATUS
Voltage: __________________________ Phase: ___________________________ Wire: ________________________
IC Rating: __________________________
Panelboard:
Main Lug
Main Breaker
Quantity and Pole Configuration: ___________________________________________________________________

Soft Starters:
Keypad
Communication
External Bypas
Input Isolation
Reset
Describe: _________________________________________________________________________________________
Drives
MM440
6SE70
Keypad
Communication
Contactor Type:
Input Isolation
Output Isolation
Bypass
Reactor Type:
Line
Load
Filter Type:
DV/DT Filter
RFI Filter
Contactors and Reactors:
14
Describe: _________________________________________________________________________________________
Additional Notes/Comments:
14-25
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Extra Space for Future Units:
14
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Siemens: a standard in
quality and performance
based on experience
Designed and manufactured in Canada, the Siemens 8PX3 Motor Control
Center (MCC) exceeds market requirements for modularity, reliability and interchangeability in a SIRIUS horsepower or NEMA size world, where industry cannot
afford costly downtime.
The globally recognized SIRIUS contactor offers modularity without compromising
horsepower requirements.
Siemens reliable, leading edge components complement the SIRIUS overload,
the heart of the 8PX3 MCC.
Siemens 8PX MCC draw-out unit interchangeability offers the advantage
of adding to the existing 8PX line-ups without costly transition sections.
Flexibility of the 8PX3 MCC allows direct connection to the incoming power
supply through a main/utility incoming section.

14-26
Made in Canada.
Siemens 8PX3 Motor Control Centres

Product development at Siemens

is virtually a continuous process.
New products are being developed and existing products are
Product Overview
Todays complex commercial buildings and increasingly sophisticated manufacturing

plants have one thing in common they depend on motor control centres to keep
them operating at peak efficiency. The motor control centres that drive these
operations must be reliable, flexible and technologically excellent if they are to meet
the stringent tests required.
The Siemens 8PX3 motor control centre meets these demands with leading edge
technology. It encompasses the best protective package available in the electrical
industry today and its new features respond to the needs of the most demanding
applications.
being improved by Siemens to
Siemens 8PX3 Motor Control Centres Feature:
meet diverse industry challenges
b Draw-out units that are completely

compatible with all previous 8PX
offerings
and increasing customer demands.
b Global product availability and support

for SIRIUS products
b SIRIUS 3RU thermal overload relays,

built with single-phase protection as
a standard
b Horizontal main bus ratings up to
3000A
b 100kA combination starter interrupting
ratings
b Precisely designed stab-in devices,

assuring proper alignment and
extended life
b Spacious wireways, providing room
for a large number of control and power
circuits
b Heavy duty visible blade switches that
have positive action movement
b Siemens 8WA quality terminal blocks
with insulated terminals
Draw-Out Units
The operating unit handles up to 6
SIRIUS 3SB3 pilot devices and the
reset button is mounted directly on
the draw-out unit facilitating wiring and
maintenance.
The draw-out units are precisely
designed assuring a very smooth sliding
motion on the buffer plate and provide
proper alignment of stab and grounding
of the draw-out unit prior to engaging
the vertical bus bar.
These features, along with a positive
locking of the unit in the engaged
position, guarantee one of the highest
safety standards in the industry.
All starter units up to and including
EEMAC size 4 are draw-out type
complete with a full complement of

either breaker combination or switch
type disconnecting devices.
High quality current-carrying
components within the starter unit
are world-renowned. Our 10-millionmechanical-operations SIRIUS
contactors, together with the closecoupled ambient-compensated overload
relays, offer maximum motor protection
from slight overloads to damaging
single-phasing conditions.
Space saving components, along with
the high contrast pilot device panel that
pivots out of the way, allow ample work
space within each unit for ease of wiring
and mounting of auxiliary equipment.
14-27
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
b SIRIUS 3RB electronic overload relays

offering extremely accurate motor
protection
b Metal pilot devices, type 3SB3,

standard in the 8PX3 MCC
14
b SIRIUS contactors both NEMA and

horsepower rated
b U
nit operating handles manufactured
with a built-in safety interlock
preventing the units from being
removed or installed with the
disconnect device in the ON position

Structure
Removable buffer plates allow fast and

easy modification of existing spaces to
suit different sizes of starter units. Wide
and deep wireways are designed to
facilitate control and power cable routing
while being completely isolated from
the main busway.
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
The structural framework is fully CSA

approved and its steel members give
the structure an incomparable rigidity
that makes the use of channel sills
unnecessary. A full range of tin plated
copper main and vertical buses are
available with short circuit bracing of
22kA, 42kA, 65kA and 100kA.
Product Overview
SIRIUS Contactors
SIRIUS high-performance contactors
offer a high degree of protection
while offering reduced mounting
space. Ratings up to 400 hp at
600 V are covered by only 6 sizes;
auxiliary contact blocks and coil surge
suppressors are within the envelope
dimensions of the contactors.
The SIRIUS contactors are rated to
meet both horsepower and NEMA
requirements.
The operating reliability of the SIRIUS

contactors is especially high. With the
ability to achieve 10 million-mechnicleoperations, they have an extremely long
service life, require little maintenance
and are rugged.
Along with having a long service life,
SIRIUS contactors rated above 100 hp
are also available with remaining life-time
indicators for contact wear monitoring.
SIRIUS Overload Relays

The heart of every Siemens motor
control centre is the world-renowned
SIRIUS 3RU or 3RB overload relay.
4:1 current setting range allowing use of

one overload over multiple motor load
applications.
Siemens electronic 3RB overload relay

is now a standard in our EEMAC size
5 & 6 starter units offering the latest
technology in the protection of sensitive
motor loads.
The SIRIUS 3RU type of thermal bimetal

overload relays installed in our smaller
starter units also include as a standard
feature, phase unbalance protection,
class 10 tripping characteristics, manual
and automatic reset and visual trip
indication. Heater elements are factory
sealed and calibrated for the most
accurate motor protection package
available today.
The SIRIUS 3RB self-supplying electronic

overload relays are designed for the
current dependent protection of loads
with normal and heavy starting (tripping
classes 10 and 20) against impermissible
overheating. The 3RB overload has a
14-28

Product Overview
Instantaneous
Trip Circuit Breakers
The high interrupting capacity ETI
breakers offer todays solution to circuit
breaker trip coordination for maximum
motor load protection. Available in a
wide range of trip ratings, each circuit
interrupter can easily be adjusted to
provide optimum protection from
damaging fault currents. Refined
manufacturing and design
techniques allow this motor protector to

safely interrupt high-level fault currents
while protecting downstream control
devices. A built-in Push-To-Trip feature
permits easy testing of the unit and all
additional auxiliary devices. Sensitive
ground fault detection can be field
mounted to add a flexibility rarely seen
on this type of device.
14
The vertical motion, unit-mounted,

operating handle is adaptable to both the
breaker and the visible blade switch type
of disconnecting device. The smooth
and positive motion of the mechanism
ensures correct position indication of
the disconnect device even with the
door opened. Mechanical interlocks
prevent the opening of the unit door if
the handle is in the ON position.
However, a defeater mechanism can be
used by trained personnel to bypass
the door interlock by turning a screw

located to the right of the operator.
With the unit door opened, the new
interlock mechanism prevents accidental
withdrawal or insertion of the starter unit
if the handle mechanism is in the
ON position.
To ensure that the starter units are not
accidentally energized, a padlocking
provision is provided, allowing up to 3
padlocks to be used at the same time
when the handle is in the off position.
Visible Blade Switch

For operation where a visible means
of disconnect status is required,
Siemens offers its line of field proven
FK switches. A positive quick-break and
quick-make device ensures dependable
operation in the most rigorous
environments. Together with standard
anti-single-phasing protection built in
each of our 3RB overload relays, the FK
switch offers a maximum of protection
whenever essential motor loads are at

stake. Whether HRC I-J, II-C or RHS
current limiting fuses are used, there
are no realistic short-circuit levels this
disconnect device cannot handle. To
complete the package these switches
include provision for auxiliary position
switches as a standard.
14-29
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
Handle Mechanism
Notes
MOTOR
CONTROL CENTRES
14
14-30
POWER PRODUCT Application Data

Contents
15-2
General
Types of Power Distribution Systems
15-3
System Analysis
15-6
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology
15-7
Overcurrent Protection and Coordination
15-8
Ground Fault Protection
15-9
Series-Connected Combination Ratings
15-15
Harmonics / K-factor Ratings
15-16
Table 1A:
Motor Full-Load Currents of
Three Phase AC Induction Type Motors
15-18
Table 1B:
Motor Full-Load Currents in Amperes,
Single Phase AC
15-18
Table 1C:
Motor Full-Load Currents in Amperes, DC
Table 2:
Electrical Formulas for Finding Amperes,
Horsepower Kilowatts, and kVA
15-18
APPLICATION
DATA
15-19
15
Conversion Tables
15-18
Application Data

APPLICATION
DATA
15
General
In the application of fusible switches and
circuit breakers, consideration should be
given to the following factors:
1. Voltage of circuit.
2. Ampacity of circuit.
3. Frequency of power source.
4. Operating conditions.
5. Fault current available.
Voltage of Circuit The system
voltage should not exceed the listed
voltage rating of the circuit breaker,
fuse or switch.
Ampacity of Circuit The listed
continuous current rating of the fuse or
circuit breaker should not exceed the
allowable ampacity of the conductors.
Where the allowable ampacity of the
conductor does not correspond to
listed current ratings for fuses or circuit
breakers, the next larger rating of fuse
or circuit breaker is permitted providing it
does not exceed the conductor ampacity
by more than 25%. An exception to this
rule is permitted for motor circuits or
other circuits where high inrush currents
may persist for an appreciable time.
Frequency of Power Source Circuit
breakers and fusible switches are
calibrated for use on direct current or
4868-Hertz alternating current. For
frequencies above 62-Hertz, some fuses,
switches and circuit breakers must be
derated. The derating varies with each
type and size of protective device.
Consult your local representative for
specific information.
Operating Conditions Molded case
circuit breakers and fuses are calibrated
without any enclosure as specified by
the UL and CSA. Sound engineering
practice dictates that continuous loads
should not exceed 80% of the breaker
or fuse current rating for most types of
enclosures.
15-2
Reference Guide
Electrical Connections Molded Case
Circuit Breakers are to be connected
with 60 or 75C wire for breakers having
a rated ampacity of 125 amperes or
less. For circuit breakers having a rated
ampacity greater 125 amperes, only 75C
cable shall be used unless otherwise
indicated on the circuit breaker label.
Note: Exceptions to this rule are outlined
in the Canadian Electric Code.
Conductors should be derated in
accordance with the Canadian Electrical
Code for both ambient temperature and
continuous loading. Conductors which are
loaded continuously should be derated to
80% of their allowable current- carrying
capacity except when supplied by an
assembly including its overcurrent device
that is listed for continuous operation at
100% of its rating.
When the type of load is unusual,
intermittent, or one which involves
momentary peak currents such as motor
loads, consideration should be given
to the heating effect on the protective
device over a period of time. The duty
cycle of a motor which is started and
stopped frequently may require a circuit
breaker or fuses with a higher rating than
an infrequently started motor.
Fault Current Available The

interrupting rating of the circuit breaker
or fused switch should be greater than
the available short circuit current at the
point of application. The short circuit
current from some power sources, such
as engine driven generators, is limited,
and the protective device characteristics
should be selected to clear such faults
without delay.
Some systems require a study of
protective device characteristics to assure
proper protection and coordination for
any possible value of fault current. Your
representative is available to assist in
making coordination studies.
The presence of excessive dust,

moisture, corrosive fumes, or
explosive atmosphere requires the
use of enclosures suitable for such
atmospheres. For applications in regions
where fungus growth may occur, some
circuit breakers should be treated with a
fungus and moisture resistant material.
Note: Please consult with local regulations.
Technical
Figure 1. Radial Systems
Figure 2. Expanded Radial SystemSingle

Primary Feeder
A fault in a primary feeder in the

arrangement shown in Figure 2 will cause
the main protective device to operate and
interrupt service to all loads. If the fault
were in a transformer, service could be
restored to all loads except those served
from that transformer. If the fault were in
a primary feeder, service could not be
restored to any loads until the source of
trouble had been eliminated. Since it is to
be expected that more faults will occur on
the feeders than in the transformers, it
becomes logical to consider providing
individual circuit protection on the primary
feeders as shown in Figure 3. This
arrangement has the advantage of
Figure 3. Expanded Radial Systems

individual Primary Feeder Protection
making it possible to limit outages due to

a feeder or transformer fault to the loads
associated with the faulted equipment. If
circuit breakers are used for primary
feeder protection, the cost of this system
will be high. Even if fused switches are
used, the cost of the arrangement of
Figure 3 will exceed the cost of the
arrangement of Figure 2.
Primary Selective System
The circuit arrangement of Figure 4
provides means of reducing both the
extent and duration of an outage caused
by a primary feeder fault. This operating
feature is provided through the use of
duplicate primary feeder circuits and load
interrupter switches that permit
connection of each secondary substation
transformer to either of the two primary
feeder circuits. Each primary feeder circuit
must have sufficient capacity to carry the
total load in the building.
Figure 4. Primary Selective Systems
15-3
APPLICATION
DATA
Radial System
If power is brought into a building at
utilization voltage, the simplest and the
lowest cost means of distributing the
power is to use a radial circuit
arrangement. The radial system is the
simplest that can be used, and has the
lowest system investment. It is suitable for
smaller installations where continuity of
service is not critical.
Selection
The low voltage service entrance circuit

comes into the building through service
entrance equipment and terminates at a
main switchgear assembly, switchboard or
panelboard. Feeder circuits are provided to
the loads or to other subswitchboards,
distribution cabinets, or panelboards.
Figure 1 shows the two forms of radial
circuit arrangements most frequently
used. Under normal operating conditions,
the entire load is served through the
single incoming supply circuit, and in the
case of high voltage service, through the
transformer. A fault in the supply circuit,
the transformer, or the main bus will
cause an interruption of service to all
loads. A fault on one of the feeder or
branch circuits should be isolated from the
rest of the system by the circuit protective
device on that circuit. Under this
condition, continuity of service is
maintained for all loads except those
served from the faulted circuit.
The need for continuity of service often
requires multiple paths of power supply as
opposed to the single path of power
supply in the radial system.
15
There are several basic considerations

which must be included by the system
design engineer to select and design the
best power distribution system which will
supply power to both present and future
loads most economically. Among these
are:
b Safety
b Reliability
b Maintenance
b Flexibility
b Voltage Regulation
b Initial Investment
b Simplicity of Operation
The characteristics of electrical service
available at the building site, the types of
loads, the quality of service required, and
the size and configuration of building are
also important factors that will influence
system design and circuit arrangement.
Four basic circuit arrangements are used
for the distribution of electric power. They
are the radial, primary selective, secondary
selective, and secondary network circuit
arrangements. The following discussion of
these circuit arrangements covers both
the high-voltage and low-voltage circuits.
The reader should recognize that the highvoltage circuits and substations may be
owned by either the utility company or the
building owner, depending upon the
electric rates, the practice, and
requirements of the particular electric
utility serving the specific building site.
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
15

Under normal operating conditions, the
appropriate switches are closed in an
attempt to divide the load equally
between the two primary feeder circuits.
Then, should a primary feeder fault occur,
there is an interruption of service to only
half of the load. Service can be restored to
all loads by switching the deenergized
transformers to the other primary feeder
circuit. The primary selective switches are
usually manually operated and outage
time for half the load is determined by the
time it takes to accomplish the necessary
switching. An automatic throwover
switching arrangement could be used to
avoid the interruption of service to half the
load. However, the additional cost of the
automatic feature may not be justified in
many applications. If a fault occurs in a
secondary substation transformer, service
can be restored to all loads except those
served from the faulted transformer.
The higher degree of service continuity
afforded by the primary selective
arrangement is realized at a cost
somewhat higher than a simple radial
system due to the extra primary cables
and switchgear.
Secondary Selective System
Under normal conditions, the secondary
selective arrangement of Figure 5 is
operated as two separate radial systems.
The secondary tie circuit breaker in each
secondary substation is normally open.
The load served from a secondary
selective substation should be divided
equally between the two bus sections. If a
fault occurs on a primary feeder or in a
transformer, service is interrupted to all
loads associated with the faulted feeder or
transformer. Service may be restored to all
secondary buses by first opening the main
secondary switch or circuit breaker
associated with the faulted transformer
and primary feeder, and then closing the
tie breaker. The two transformer
secondary circuit breakers in each
substation should be interlocked with the
secondary tie breaker in such a manner
that all three cannot be in the closed
position simultaneously. This prevents
parallel operation of the two transformers
and thereby minimizes the interrupting
duty imposed on the secondary switching
devices. It also eliminates the possibility of
interrupting service to all loads on the bus
when a fault occurs in either a primary
feeder or a transformer.
The cost of the secondary selective
system will depend upon the spare
capacity in the transformers and primary
feeders. The minimum transformer and
primary feeder capacity will be determined
15-4
Selection
Figure 5. Secondary Selective System

Using Close-Coupled Double-Ended
Substation
Figure 6. Secondary Selective System

Using Two Single-Ended Substations
With Cable or Bus Tie
by essential loads that must be served

under emergency operating conditions. If
service is to be provided for all loads
under emergency conditions, then each
primary feeder should have sufficient
capacity to carry the total load, and each
transformer should be capable of carrying
the total load in each substation.
This type of system will be more
expensive than either the radial or primary
selective system, but it makes restoration
of service to all essential loads possible in
the event of either a primary feeder or
transformer fault. The higher cost results
from the duplication of transformer
capacity in each secondary substation.
This cost may be reduced by shedding
nonessential loads.
A modification of the secondary selective
circuit arrangement is shown in Figure 6.
In this arrangement there is only one
transformer in each secondary substation,
but adjacent substations are
interconnected in pairs by a normally open
low voltage tie circuit. When the primary
feeder or transformer supplying one
secondary substation bus is out of service,
the essential loads on that substation bus
can be supplied over the tie circuit. The
operating aspects of this system are
somewhat complicated if the two
substations are separated by distance.
The best arrangement is to use closecoupled, double-ended substations.
distributed network or a spot network. If

the building demand is in the order of 750
kVA or higher, a spot network will often be
established to serve the building. In
buildings where a high degree of service
reliability is required, and where spot
network supply may not be available, the
distributed secondary network system is
often used. This is particularly true of
institutional buildings such as hospitals.
The network may take the form of several
secondary substations interconnected by
low voltage circuits. However, the most
common practice is to use some form of
the spot network circuit arrangement.
Secondary Network System

Many buildings with radial distribution
systems are served at utilization voltage
from utility secondary network systems.
The network supply system assures a
relatively high degree of service reliability.
The utility network may take the form of a
Figure 7. Simple Spot Network System
A simple spot network, such as shown in

Figure 7, consists of two or more identical
transformers supplied over separate
primary feeder circuits. The transformers
are connected to a common low voltage
Technical
Figure 8. Secondary Network System
The spare transformer capacity, the

network protectors, and the higher
interrupting duty will make the secondary
network arrangement much more
expensive than the other arrangements.
At the same time, these elements make
the reliability of the network system
greater than for the other system
configurations.
The secondary network may also
take the form shown in Figure 8.
In this arrangement there is only
one transformer in each secondary
substation, and the substations are
interconnected by normally closed
low voltage tie circuits. The tie circuits
permit interchange of power between
substations to accommodate unequal
loading on the substations and to provide
Figure 9. Primary Selective Secondary

Network System
multiple paths of power flow to the

various load buses. In normal operation,
the substations are about equally loaded
and the current flowing in the tie circuits
is relatively small. However, if a network
protector opens to isolate a transformer
on a primary feeder fault, the load on the
associated bus is then carried by the
adjacent network units and is supplied
over the tie circuits. This arrangement
provides for continuous power supply to
all low voltage load buses, even though a
primary feeder circuit or a transformer is
taken out of service.
In the network arrangement in Figure 9,
if there were three incoming primary
feeder circuits and three transformers,
the combined capacity of two of the
transformers should be sufficient to carry
the entire load on the three substations
on the basis that only one feeder is out
of service at one time. Generally, these
transformers would all have the same
ratings. With this arrangement, as with
the spot network arrangement, a
reduction in spare transformer capacity
can be achieved, if a primary selective
switching arrangement is used at each
substation transformer. However, if three
or more primary feeder circuits are
available, the reduction in transformer
capacity achieved through the use of a
primary selective arrangement may be
small.
Cable ties or busway ties, as shown in
Figures 8 and 9, will require careful
consideration of load distribution during
contingencies and of the safety aspects
with regard to backfeeds. Key or other
mechanical interlocking of switches or
circuit breakers may be essential.
15-5
APPLICATION
DATA
Selection
selective switching arrangement with

each transformer, or by using three or
more transformers. If the primary
selective switching arrangement is used,
the total load can be about 160 percent
of the nameplate rating of one of the
transformers. This produces an overload
on one transformer until such time as
the remaining transformer can be
switched to the other feeder in the case
of a primary feeder fault.
The interrupting duty imposed on the
low voltage protective devices in a spot
network substation is higher than in
radial, primary selective, or secondary
selective substations having the same
load capability because of the spare
transformer capacity required in the spot
network substation and because the
transformers are operated in parallel.
15
bus through network protectors and are

operated in parallel. A network protector
is an electrically operated power circuit
breaker controlled by network relays in
such a way that the circuit breaker
automatically opens when power flows
from the low voltage bus toward the
transformer. When voltages in the
system are such that power would flow
toward the low voltage bus from the
transformer, it will close automatically.
Network protectors are normally
equipped with relays which operate for
faults in the network transformer or high
voltage feeder only. The network is often
operated on the assumption that
network failure will burn open.
Network protectors without
supplementary protection do not meet
the requirements of the NEC for
overcurrent, ground fault, or short circuit
protection. Protection of the network or
collector bus may be added by providing
sensing devices, including ground fault
detection, with tripping of the network
protectors. The most common use of the
network protector, however, has been by
utilities in vaults where failure of the
network devices could cause damage
limited to the vault. High integrity design
involving wide phase separation and the
use of catastrophe fusing minimize the
danger and extent of a network failure. A
conventional circuit breaker with time
overcurrent and instantaneous trip
devices plus network relays can meet
the NEC requirements. However, the full
reliability of the network may be
compromised since selectivity between
these devices is difficult to obtain.
Under normal operating conditions, the
total load connected to the bus is shared
equally by the transformers. Should a
fault occur in a transformer or on a pri
mary feeder, the network protector
associated with the faulted transformer
or feeder will open on reverse power
flow to isolate the fault from the low
voltage bus. The remaining transformer
or transformers in the substation will
continue to carry the load and there will
be no interruption of service to the loads,
except for a voltage dip during the time
that it takes for the protective equipment
to operate.
If only two transformers are used in a
spot network substation, each
transformer must be capable of carrying
the total load served from the low
voltage bus. The amount of spare
transformer capacity in the substation
can be reduced by using a primary
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
15
System Analysis
General
Proper system design requires that the
system be coordinated so the interrupting
capacity and / or short circuit withstand
capabilities of the various components in
the system are not exceeded for any
operating situation. Good practice also
requires that the system be selective, that
is, that the minimum portion of the
system be interrupted on occurrence of a
fault. The need for selectivity must always
be balanced against the requirements of
economics and coordination with the
overall process needs.
At the conceptual phase of a project,
several distribution system alternatives
should be considered, and examined both
technically and economically. This study
should include sufficient detail for a
thorough understanding of the system
alternatives. The conceptual study should
determine the optimal distribution system
configuration for the project, on which
definitive design can proceed.
At all stages of design, the principal
objectives of personnel safety, equipment
protection, process continuity, fault
clearing, and service continuity should be
considered.
In designing a new or modified
distribution system, the following types of
system studies may be needed:
1. Short Circuit Studies: three phase,
line-to-line, and line-to-ground faults
can be calculated for both close-and latch and interrupting conditions,
necessary for checking interrupting
device and related equipment ratings,
and setting protective devices.
2. Circuit Breaker Application Studies:
consider the AC and DC decrements
in the fault current, and the speed of
the various medium voltage circuit
breakers, to determine close-and-latch
and interrupting duties.
3. Protective Device Coordination
Studies: determine characteristics
and settings of protective devices,
e.g., relays, trip devices, fuses, etc.
The coordination study should provide
a balance between protection of
system equipment and continuity
of service.
4. Load Flow Studies: calculate volt ages, phase angles, real and reactive
power, line and transformer loadings
under simulated conditions to aid in
determining the performance of a
new or revamped system during the
planning stage.
Selection
5. Motor Starting Studies: determine
severity of voltage dips and adequacy
of load accelerating torque when start ing large motors on a weak system.
Today, most studies are performed using
computers. Some specialized studies
require large computing resources, but
many studies can now be performed on
personal computers. A wide variety of
software packages are available. In
addition, many specialty firms exist which
provide engineering service to perform
such studies.
Short Circuit Calculations
The single-line diagram serves as the
starting point for the system study and
selection of equipment ratings. The
single-line must be modified to show all
power sources and capacities, and
system impedances. Sources of short
circuit current include utility connections,
local generation, and all rotating machines
connected to the system at the instant
the fault occurs. The system study should
consider various fault types (line-to-line
and line-to-ground) and fault locations.
The value of normal load current in a
circuit depends on the load connected,
and is essentially independent of the
capacity of the power system. On the
other hand, the short circuit current
depends almost entirely on the capacity
of the power system, not the size of the
load.
The total fault current consists of a
symmetrical AC component,
superimposed on a DC (offset)
component. Hence, the total fault current
is asymmetric with respect to the current
axis. The value of the DC component
depends on the point of the voltage wave
at which the fault was initiated. For
system studies, it is assumed that the
fault is initiated at the worst point, to
produce a fully offset fault current.
This is illustrated in Figure 10.

Short circuit currents are determined by
the system impedance, including both
reactance and resistance. The effect of
the reactance is to cause the initial fault
current to be high, with the fault current
declining as time proceeds. This is
represented as the summation of a DC
component which decays relatively
rapidly over time, and an AC component,
which decays at a slower rate. The rate of
decay of the components depends on the
system X / R ratio.
Since the reactance of rotating machines
varies with the time from fault initiation,
the short circuit calculations must use the
appropriate machine reactance values.
Subtransient reactance (Xd) governs
current flow for approximately the first 6
cycles of a fault. Then, transient
reactance (Xd) determines current flow
up to around 30-120 cycles, depending on
the machine. After this, synchronous
reactance (Xd) applies, but studies
seldom use this value as faults are not
usually allowed to persist for this length
of time.
For transformers, the actual tested value
of the transformer impedance is used. If
this is not available, use design
impedance adjusted to the minimum
value allowed by manufacturing tolerance
of + 7.5%. For example, a 5.75% design
unit has a tolerance range of 5.32-6.18%,
and 5.32% would be used in a system
study prior to manufacture.
Figure 10. Structure of Asymmetrical Current Wave (Fully Offset)
15-6
Technical
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology
Selection
The Sentron circuit breakers use the
blow-apart contact principle to
accomplish current limitation. This
principle is based on the electro-magnetic
repulsion of adjacent conductors which
carry current in opposite directions.
The contact arms are arranged to create
opposing magnetic fields. As fault current
rises, magnetic repulsion forces the
contacts to separate completely. The
higher the fault current, the faster this
blow-apart action occurs.
As figure 12 illustrates, the energy letthrough with the current limiting Sentron
circuit breaker is decreased significantly.
This provides better protection for
downstream equipment, and reduces
damage.
Figure 11. Reduction of l2t Let-Through

with Current-Limiting Technology
Figure 12. Current Limitation
Figure 12 illustrates how the Sentron

circuit breaker limits the energy under
fault conditions. The upper curve
illustrates the first half-cycle wave of
prospective fault current. To qualify as
truly current limiting, the circuit breaker
must prevent the current value from
reaching the maximum value that it
would reach if the circuit breaker were
not connected in the circuit.
15-7
APPLICATION
DATA
Applications and Ratings

Sentron current limiting circuit breakers
are designed for use in load centers,
power panelboards, distribution
switchboards, secondary unit
substations, and all types of individual
enclosures where the available fault
currents exceed the interrupting ratings
of heavy duty and extra-heavy duty
molded case circuit breakers.
Sentron circuit breakers have ratings of
15 through 1600 amperes, 240 through
600 volts AC, with up to 200,000
symmetrical amperes interrupting rating.
15

Circuit Breakers
The technology of Siemens Sentron
fuseless current limiting circuit breakers
was developed to meet the demands of
modern distribution systems. It is
not uncommon for todays systems to
have prospective short circuit currents
approaching 200,000 amperes. Users
demanded the protection and flexibility
afforded by circuit breakers, without
the nuisance and expense of fuse
replacement.
A fuseless current limiting circuit breaker
as one that does not employ a fusible
element, and that when operating within
its current-limiting range, limits the letthrough l2t to a value less than the l2t
of a half-cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current.
l2t is an expression which allows
comparison of the energy available as a
result of fault current flow. As used in
current limiting discussions, l 2t refers to
the energy released between the initiation
of the fault current and the clearing of the
circuit.
Figure 11 relates the prospective l2t to
the energy allowed by a Sentron current
limiting circuit breaker, or let-through
l2t. The upper curve represents the
maximum I2 the circuit can produce,
unaltered by the presence of any
protective device. The lower curve
illustrates the reduction in energy
allowed when Sentron current limiting
circuit breakers are used.
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
15
Overcurrent Protection and Coordination

Coordination of a power distribution
system requires that circuit protective
devices be selected and set so that
electrical disturbances, such as over-loads
or short circuits, will be cleared promptly
by isolating the faulted equipment with
minimum service disruption of the
distribution system. Time / Current
Characteristic Curves are available for
circuit protective devices, such as circuit
breakers and fuses, which show how
quickly they will operate at various values
of overload and short circuit current.
Coordination can be obtained by
comparing these curves for each device in
series in the system.
In developing the system, it will be noted
that many compromises must be made
between the various objectives:
1. System reliability.
2. Continuity of service.
3. Equipment and system protection.
4. Coordination of protective devices.
5. System cost.
Preliminary steps in Coordination study:
A) One-line diagram: used as a base on
which to record pertinent data and
information regarding relays, circuit
breakers, fuses, current transformers, and
operating equipment while at the same
time, providing a convenient
representation of the relationship of circuit
protective devices with one another.
B) Short-circuit study: record all applicable
impedances and ratings; using these
values, a short-circuit study is made to
determine currents available at any
particular point in the system.
C) Determine maximum load currents
which will exist under normal operating
conditions in each of the power-system
circuits, the transformer magnetizing
inrush currents, and times, and the
starting currents, and accelerating times of
large motors. These values will determine
the maximum currents which circuit
protective devices must carry without
operating. The upper boundary of current
sensitivity will be determined by the
smallest values resulting from the
following considerations:
1) Maximum available short-circuit
current obtained by calculation.
2) Requirements of applicable codes
and standards for the protection of
equipment such as cable, motors,
and transformers.
3) Thermal and mechanical limitations
of equipment.
D) Time / current characteristic curves of
all the protective devices to be coordi
nated must be obtained. These should be
15-8
plotted on standard log-log coordination

paper to facilitate the coordination study.
Mechanics Of Achieving Coordination:
The process of achieving coordination
among protective devices in series is
essentially one of selecting individual units
to match particular circuit or equipment
protection requirements, and of plotting
the time/current characteristic curves of
these devices on a single overlay sheet of
log-log coordination paper.
The achievement of coordination is a trialand-error routine in which the various
time / current characteristic curves of the
series array of devices are matched one
against another on the graph plot.
When selecting protective devices one
must recognize ANSI and CEC
requirements and adhere to the limiting
factors of coordination such as load
current, short-circuit current, and motor
starting. The protective devices selected
must operate within these boundaries
while providing selective coordination
Selection
where possible. Selective coordination is
usually obtained in low voltage systems
when the log-log plot of time / current
characteristics displays a clear space
between the characteristics of the
protective devices operating in series,
that is, no overlap should exist between
any two time/current characteristics if
full selective coordination is to be
obtained. Allowance must be made for
relay overtravel and for relay and fuse
curve accuracy. Quite often the
coordination study will stop at a point
short of complete selective coordination
because a compromise must be made
between the competing objectives of
maximum protection and maximum
service continuity.
Computer Aided Coordination:
The philosophy discussed above applies
to the classical practice of performing
coordination studies manually. Today,
however, there are numerous personal
computer software programs available
for performing coordination studies.
Figure 13. Coordination of Example System
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
Selection
15
The term low magnitude arcing ground

fault is a deceptive description of this
type fault. What is meant by this is
that the fault current magnitude is low
compared to that of a bolted fault. Even
so, the arc energy released at the point
of the fault can cause much damage and
may result in a fire. A ground fault is an
insulation failure between an energized
conductor and ground. A phase-to-ground
arcing fault, unlike a phase-to-phase
bolted fault, is a high-impedance type
fault. The factors that contribute to this
high impedance are the resistance of the
arc and the impedance of the return path.
This return path is usually metal conduit,
raceway, busway housing or switchboard
frames. Another contributing factor is the
spasmodic nature of the arc. The circuit
breaker or fuse protecting the circuit
detects the fault current, but the actual
ground fault current magnitude is ever
changing due to arc elongating blowout
effects, self-clearing attempts and arc
reignition.
These current limiting effects make the
circuit breaker or fuse incapable of
detecting the actual damage that is
occurring. This is not to imply that these
devices are inadequate. The problem is
one of system protection because the
circuit breaker must be adjusted (or fuse
size selected) so as to hold without
tripping under momentary overload
conditions, such as motor starting current
or transformer inrush current. Therefore,
the circuit breaker or fuse cannot open
quickly enough under relatively low
magnitude faults to limit the arcing
damage.
Figure 14 illustrates the basic problem.
Shown is a typical distribution system
with a 1600 ampere main service
entrance unit with a circuit breaker
(single line a) or fused service
protector (single line b). A ground fault
of 1500 amperes on the bus would affect
but would not open either device. A 4000
ampere ground fault would be cleared in
approximately 35 seconds by the circuit
breaker and in 230 seconds by the fuse.
To allow a fault of this magnitude to
persist for this length of time would
create more than 92,000 kW seconds of
arc energy. As a result of tests made, it
has been determined that an arc with a
value of 1050 kW seconds of energy
would vaporize about 1.0 cubic in. of
copper or 2.5 cubic in. of aluminum.
Obviously a fault of the magnitude
shown in Figure 14 could cause a
considerable amount of damage.
The nature of low-level arcing ground
faults makes impractical their detection
Figure 14. Ground Fault Protection
by a traditional overcurrent devices. To

complete total protection of the system
against all possible types of faults, other
means are utilized to detect ground fault
currents, including:
b Zero sequence method
b Source ground current (or ground
return) method

b Residual connection method
Zero Sequence Method
This is commonly used when ground
fault protection is provided for equipment
employing electromechanical trip
devices. The scheme uses a core balance
type current transformer (ground sensor)
which encircles all phase conductors (and
neutral on four wire system) to detect
ground faults.
The operation of this system is such that
under normal operating conditions (eg.,
no ground fault on the system) there is
no output from the ground sensor to the

tripping relay because the vector sum of
all the currents through the sensor
window is zero.
(Ia + lb + Ic + In = 0)
If a ground fault occurs on the system,
there is now an additional current (Ig)
seen by ground sensor which returns to
the source by a path other than through
the sensor window. The sensor now
sees an unbalance caused by Ig and
operates the ground relay which trips the
circuit protector.
(Ia + lb + lc + In = Ig)
The ground sensor is located
downstream from the point at which the
system is grounded and can be mounted
either on the line side or load side of the
main disconnect device. This method can
be used on incoming main disconnect or
on feeders.
15-9
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
15
Source Ground Current (or Ground

Return) Method
This method of detecting the ground
fault current Ig locates the ground
sensor on the neutral connection to
ground at the service entrance. This
means that the ground sensor only
detects ground fault current. This type of
detection has some limitations because
it is detecting the ground fault return
current. On multiple source systems
with multiple connections to ground, this
ground fault current can return by more
than one path, therefore, some
sensitivity in detecting these faults
would be lost.
Residual Connection Method
Current sensors, one on each of the
phase conductors and on the neutral
conductors, are connected in common.
This common (or residual connection)
measures the vector summation of the
phase currents and the neutral current.
Under normal conditions, this vector
summation will be zero, and no current
will be applied to the ground relay.
If a fault involving ground occurs, the
current summation is not equal to zero.
Current flows into common connection
which is applied to the relay. This
method of detecting ground fault current
is used in circuit breakers with electronic
trip device.
Selection
Figure 15. Schematic for Zero Sequence
Figure 16. Schematic for Source Ground Current
GFS = Ground Fault Sensor

GFP = Ground Fault Protection
(Relay or Trip Unit)
Residual Ground Current

Sensing
3-Wire System
This system is used with electronic trip
units, and always includes three current
sensors mounted on the circuit breaker.
A trip element is connected in series
with each sensor to provide phase
overcurrent protection. By adding a
ground trip element in the residual
(neutral) circuit of the three current
sensors, it will sense ground fault current
only, and not load current. This permits
more sensitive settings to protect
against low magnitude ground faults.
This scheme is shown in Figure 18.
Under normal conditions, the vector sum
of the current in all of the phases equals
zero. No current would flow in the GND
element, which is also true under the
condition of a phase-to-phase fault.
A phase-to-ground fault would cause a
current to flow in the GND trip element.
If the magnitude of this current exceeds
the pickup setting for the required time,
the trip unit will operate to trip the
breaker.
15-10
Figure 17. Schematic for Residual Method
Figure 18. Schematic for Ground Protection on 3-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing
Technical
Selection
Figure 19. Schematic for Ground Protection on 4-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing
fault current returns via the ground bus

and bypasses the neutral. If the
magnitude of the phase-to-ground
current exceeds the pickup setting of the

GND element for the required time, the
trip unit will operate to open the breaker.
APPLICATION
DATA
Types Of Coordinated Ground Fault Tripping Systems

There are two types of Coordinated
Ground Fault Systems:
b Time / Current Selective
b Zone Selective (Zone Interlock)
Time / Current Selective
In this system the time / current
characteristics of the Ground Fault
Protection (GFP) devices used with each
disconnect are coordinated so that the
nearest disconnect supplying the ground
fault location will open. Any upstream
disconnects remain closed and continue
to supply the remaining load current. Each
set of GFP devices should have a
specified time-current operating
characteristic. When disconnects are
connected in series, each downstream
device should use a time-current setting
that will cause it to open and clear the
circuit before any upstream disconnect
tripping mechanism is actuated. The timecurrent bands of disconnects in series
must not overlap and must be separated
from each other sufficiently to allow for
the clearing time of each disconnecting
means used. The time / current selective
system is recommended for applications
where damage levels associated with the
time / current settings used are tolerable.
This type of system does not require
interlocking wiring between the GFP

devices associated with main feeder and
branch disconnecting devices.
Figure 20, on the next page, illustrates
time / current selective coordination in a
system involving a 4000 ampere main
circuit breaker and a 1600 ampere feeder
circuit breaker in an incoming service
switchboard. These feed a distribution
switchboard with a 600 ampere sub
feeder to a 100 ampere branch breaker.
The system is coordinated so that only
the circuit breaker nearest the location of
the ground fault trips.
Zone Selective (Zone Interlock)
In this system each disconnecting means
should open as quickly as possible when
a ground fault occurs in the zone where
this disconnect is the nearest supply
source.
The GFP device for an upstream
disconnecting means should have at least
two modes of operation. If a ground fault
occurs between it and the nearest
downstream disconnect, it should operate
in its fast tripping mode.
When a ground fault occurs beyond the
downstream disconnect, the downstream
GFP device should open in its fast
tripping mode and simultaneously
15
4-Wire System
To avoid false tripping, a fourth current
sensor is connected in the neutral
conductor to sense normal neutral
current. This fourth sensor is connected
so that it cancels the normal neutral
current which is developed in the residual
circuit as shown in Figure 19.
Under normal conditions, the vector sum
of the current in all phases equals the
neutral current. Disregarding the effects
of the neutral sensor connection, the
neutral current would flow through the
GND element. Since this is normal
neutral current, pickup of the GND
element is not desired. Therefore, the
neutral sensor is added to sense the
same neutral current as the GND sensor
but opposite in polarity. The result is a
circulating current between the phase
sensing current sensors and the neutral
sensor, with no current flowing through
the GND sensor. This is similar to a
differential relay circuit. When a phase-toground fault occurs, the vector sum of
the phase currents will no longer equal
the neutral current because the ground
send a restraining signal to the upstream

device and transfer that device to a timedelay tripping mode. The upstream timedelay tripping characteristic selected
should be such that the downstream
disconnect will open and clear the circuit
before the upstream disconnect tripping
mechanism is actuated. The time-current
characteristic of the upstream device
should be such as to offer backup
protection in the event of malfunction of
the downstream equipment.
Alternatively, a restraining signal from a
downstream device may be used to
prevent the tripping of an upstream
disconnect on ground fault instead of
causing it to operate in the time-delay
tripping mode. This may be done where
backup protection is less important than
continuity of service to critical loads
supplied by the upstream unit. There are
very few instances in which this is
justified, and a careful study of the entire
system should be made before using this
type of interlocking.
For a zone selective system, the timecurrent bands of disconnects in series,
although used only for backup protection,
should not overlap and should be
separate from each other sufficiently to
allow for the opening time of each
disconnecting means used.
15-11
Technical
Selection
Time/Current Selective Ground Coordination
APPLICATION
DATA
15
Figure 21. Zone Interlocking Scheme
Figure 20. Fully Coordinated Multizone GFP System
he zone selective or zone interlock

T
system provides fast tripping of the
nearest disconnect upstream of the
ground fault. The damage level is the
lowest that is possible because the
ground fault is cleared as quickly as the
protective equipment can respond and
the disconnect can open. Additional
interlocking wiring and circuity for
sending and receiving the restraining
signals are required.
15-12
The zone selective or zone interlock

scheme is for those few special
applications where exceptionally fast
tripping is necessary for all feeders
throughout the entire system to reduce
damage. Note that although the relay
time can be reduced appreciably, the
circuit breaker mechanism and arcing
time (plus safety margin) will still be
present.
Zone Selective Operation (Figure 21):

a)
Relay-1 will sense a ground fault at
A when it exceeds 10 amperes. It
will instantly initiate tripping of the
Branch breaker and send restraining
signals (transfer from instantaneous
operation to time-delayed operation)
to Relay-2 and Relay-3 (Relay-2 and
Relay-3 will then back up Relay-1 on
a time coordinated basis). Relay-4
will be restrained by Relay-2 if
ground fault exceeds 100 amperes.
b) Relay-2 will sense a ground fault at
B when it exceeds 100 amperes. It
Sub-Feeder breaker and send
restraining signals to Relay-3 and
Relay-4.
c)
Relay-3 will sense a ground fault at
C when it exceeds 400 amperes. It
Feeder breaker and send a
restraining signal to Relay-4.
d) Relay-4 will sense a ground fault at
D when it exceeds 800 amperes. It
Main breaker.
A.1
Typical Ampere
Setting
Restrained
Time Delay
800
400
100
10
0.4 SEC.
0.3 SEC.
0.2 SEC.
0.1 SEC.
Technical

Typical Application Diagrams
Figures 22 through 27 on this and the
facing page show the basic methods of
applying ground fault protection (GFP).
Other types of distribution systems will
require variations of these methods to
satisfy other system conditions.
These diagrams show circuit breakers as
the disconnects. Any disconnecting
Table A.2
Selection
means can be utilized, providing it is
suitable for use with a ground fault
protection system as indicated in the
scope of this application guide. The
examples do not show protection against
a ground fault on the supply side of the
main disconnect.
Sensing device and disconnect locations
define zones of protection. Source side
and ground return sensors provide

protection only on the load side of
associated disconnects. If a vector
summation method is used and its
sensors are located on load side of a
disconnect, the zone between a source
and actual sensor location becomes
the responsibility of the next upstream
protective device.
Recommendations for Figures 22-27
Ground Fault
Protection
On Main
Disconnect Only
On Main and
Feeder
Disconnects
Additional Ground Points
22
Vector
Summation
Must not be downstream.

May be upstream
23
Ground Return
None
24
Main and Feeders

Vector Summation
Must not be downstream of

main ground fault sensor.
Improved service continuity
May be upstream.
is required
25
Main Ground Return

Feeders Vector Summation
None
26
Main and feeders 1-3

Vector Summation
MCC branch feeder A
Zero Sequence
Improved service continuity

Must not be downstream of and minimum arcing fault
main ground fault sensor.
damage are required and
May be upstream.
protection is needed on
branch circuits.
27
Main and Tie Ground

Return
Feeders Vector Summation
Recommended Use
Selectivity
Minimum protection only per

Section 230-95 for the
National Electric Code
Limited selectivity depends

on location of fault and rating
of overcurrent devices on the
upstream side of fault.
Double-ended systems with

ground fault protection on
tie disconnect where
maximum continuity of
service is essential.
None
Main will allow feeder to trip

for faults downstream of
feeder sensors, but main will
trip if feeder fails to operate.
Main and feeder 1-3 will
provide delayed backup
protection if fault is
downstream of MCC branch
feeder A. Main will provide
delayed backup protection if
fault is downstream of sensors
for feeders 1-3. Main will trip
on fastest curve if fault is
upstream of sensors for
feeders 1-3.
When operating with tie
disconnect open, main will
provide delayed backup
protection if fault is
downstream from feeder
sensors. When operating
with the tie disconnect
closed, the tie will trip before
the main, thus sectionalizing
the bus.
Ground Fault Protection on Main Disconnects Only
Figure 22
Figure 23
15-13
APPLICATION
DATA
Double-Ended
System with
Protection on
Main and on Tie
and Feeder
Disconnects
Sensing Method
15
On Main, Feeder,
and Selected
Branch
Disconnects with
Zone Selective
Interlocking
Figure
Technical
Selection
Ground Fault Protection on Main and Feeder Disconnects
Figure 25
Ground Fault Protection on Main, Feeder and Selected

Branch Disconnects with Zone Selective Interlocking
Double-Ended System with Ground Fault Protection on

Main and on Tie and Feeder Disconnects
APPLICATION
DATA
15
Figure 24
Note: Interlocking
Supplementary interlocking is
required but will vary depending
on equipment used.
Figure 27
Figure 26
15-14
Technical
Series-Connected Combination Ratings

Series-Connected Rating
A series-connected rating can be assigned
to a combination of components
typically circuit breakers which has
been tested in combination to a higher
interrupting rating than that of the lowest
rated protective device of the
combination. These ratings must be
substantiated by extensive CSA testing.
Figure 29 Series-Connected Protective Scheme With Current

Limiting Main Circuit Breaker
15-15
APPLICATION
DATA
Figure 28 Without Current Limiting
With the advent of fuseless current

limiting circuit breakers such as Sentron,
another important development in seriesconnected combinations has emerged.
Because of the fuseless current limiting
circuit breakers extremely fast interrupting
capability, this device provides more
control over high prospective fault
currents than traditional series-connected
systems.
The concept behind using fuseless current
limiting circuit breakers as a component in
a series-connected system is twofold: (1)
higher interrupting ratings, and (2)
increased control over peak current (ip) and
energy let-through (I2t).
For example, a current limiting circuit
breaker is placed at the side closest to the
source of power and rated according to
the prospective fault current available at
the line-side terminals. In effect, doing this
places a shroud of protection over the
downstream components. Because of the
inherent high interrupting capability of the
current limiting circuit breaker, the breaker
itself meets or exceeds the prospective
short circuit current. Because of its current
limiting action the prospective I2t never
reaches downstream components. This is
illustrated in Figure 29.
It is important to recognize that the
current limiting circuit breaker be an
individual component in a CSA tested
combination, and that it is the combination
itself current limiting circuit breaker
plus other circuit breakers that forms
entity specified in day-to-day applications.
For specific series-connected
combinations that have met CSA
requirements please refer to the breaker
section of this catalogue or contact your
local Siemens Sales Office.
15
General
Equipment intended to interrupt current
at fault levels shall have an interrupting
rating not less than the nominal circuit
voltage and the current that is available
at the line terminals of the equipment.
Equipment intended to interrupt current
at other than fault levels shall have an
interrupting rating at nominal circuit
voltage not less than the current that
must be interrupted.
The difference between the phrases at
fault levels and at other than fault
levels is the part of the Code which
makes series-connected systems
possible. For example, the traditional
method of satisfying the Code was to
select each breaker in the series with an
interrupting rating equal to or greater than
the prospective fault current. The
interrupting rating of a circuit breaker
stated in RMS symmetrical amperes is
the amount of short circuit current the
device can safely interrupt and continue to
function as a circuit breaker.
Thus, if the prospective fault current at the
line terminals of a panelboard is 100,000A
RMS symmetrical, this traditional method
would require that all the circuit breakers
within the panelboard be rated at
100,000A RMS symmetrical or greater
interrupting capacity. This is illustrated in
Figure 28. In the traditional system, both
Selection
the main and the feeder breaker are

subjected to several short circuit peaks.
In a series-connected system, however,
the individual components (or circuit
breakers) have already been tested in
series and the combination has been
given an interrupting rating equal to or
greater than various prospective fault
currents which are available. The
combination, therefore, acts as a single
entity, and performs the same protective
function as individual circuit breakers in
the traditional method. The difference is
that combinations in series-connected
systems contain devices with lower
interrupting ratings.
Siemens circuit breakers used in series
combinations which have passed
extensive tests required by CSA.
Using the previous example, if the
prospective fault current at the line
terminals of the panelboard is 100,000
amperes RMS symmetrical, the seriesconnected method would involve
selecting a specific combination with
a rating of 100,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical or greater interrupting
capacity. That combination might include
individual components which have lower
individual interrupting ratings than 100,000
amperes RMS symmetrical.
However, all the components in the
combination have been tested together
and form an entity that will safety interrupt
the prospective fault current of the
particular situation being examined as long
as the interrupting rating listed matches
the prospective fault current.
Technical
APPLICATION
DATA
15

Non-Linear Loads
When a sinusoidal voltage is applied to a
linear load, the resultant current
waveform takes on the shape of a sine
wave as well. Typical linear loads are
resistive heating and induction motors.
In contrast, a non-linear load either:
b Draws current during only part of the
cycle and acts as an open circuit for
the balance of the cycle,
or
b Changes the impedance during the
cycle, hence the resultant waveform is
distorted and no longer conforms to a
pure sine wave shape
In recent years, the use of electronic
equipment has mushroomed in both
offices and industrial plants. These
electronic devices are powered by
switching power supplies or some type
of rectifier circuit. Examples of these
devices used in offices are: computers,
fax machines, copiers, printers, cash
registers, UPS systems, and solid-state
ballasts. In industrial plants, one will find
other electronic devices such as variable
speed drives, HID lighting, solid-state
starters and solid-state instruments. They
all contribute to the distortion of the
current waveform and the generation of
harmonics. As the use of electronic
equipment increases and it makes up a
larger portion of the electrical load, many
concerns are raised about its impact on
the electrical power supply system.
Harmonics
As defined by ANSI / IEEE Std. 519-1992,
harmonic components are represented
by a periodic wave or quantity having a
frequency that is an integral multiple of
the fundamental frequency. Harmonics
are voltages or currents at frequencies
that are integer multiples of the
fundamental (60 Hz) frequency: 120 Hz,
180 Hz, 240 Hz, 300 Hz, etc. Harmonics
are designated by their harmonic number,
or multiple of the fundamental frequency.
Thus, a harmonic with a frequency of 180
Hz (three times the 60 Hz fundamental
frequency) is called the 3rd harmonic.
Harmonics superimpose themselves on
the fundamental waveform, distorting it
and changing its magnitude. For instance,
when a sine wave voltage source is
applied to a non-linear load connected
from a phase-leg to neutral on a 3-phase,
4-wire branch circuit, the load itself will
draw a current wave made up of the
60 Hz fundamental frequency of the
voltage source, plus 3rd and higher order
odd harmonic (multiples of the 60 Hz
fundamental frequency), which are all
15-16
Selection
Voltage of Current Waveform for Linear Loads (Sine Wave)
Typical Current Waveform of Switching Power Supply
A Non-Linear Current and Its Fundamental, Plus 3rd and 5th Harmonic Components
Figure 30 Effect of Harmonics on Current Waveform
generated by the non-linear load. Total

Harmonic Distortion (THD) is calculated
as the square root of the sum of the
squares of all harmonics divided by the
normal 60 Hz value.
Therefore, it is the percentage amount of

odd harmonics (3rd, 5th, 7th ,..., 25th,...)
present in the load which can affect the
transformer, and this condition is called a
Non-Linear Load or Non-Sinusoidal
Load. To determine what amount of
harmonic content is present, a K-Factor
calculation is made instead of using the
THD formula. The total amount of
harmonics will determine the percentage
of non-linear load, which can be specified
with the appropriate K-Factor rating.
This yields an RMS value of distortion as

a percentage of the fundamental 60 Hz
waveform.
Technical

Typical Symptoms of Harmonic
Problems
b Distribution / lighting transformers
overheating even when measured load
current is within transformer rating

b Neutral cable / bus overheating even
with balanced load

b Fuses blowing and circuit breakers
tripping at currents within rating
Type
Linear
Load
K4
100%
NonLinear
Load
50%
Total
K-Factor
Load Valve
4.0
K13
100%
100%
13.0
K20
100%
125%
20.0
K30
100%
150%
30.0
For existing installations, the extent of

the harmonics can be measured with
appropriate instruments commonly
referred to as Power Harmonic
Analyzers. This service is offered by
many consulting service organizations.
For new construction, such information
may not be obtainable. For such
situations, it is best to assume the worse
case condition based on experience with
the type and mix of loads.
Calculating K-Factor Loads

1. List the kVA value for each load
category to be supplied. Next, assign a
K-factor designation that corresponds
to the relative level of harmonics
drawn by each type of load. Refer to
Table A.4.
Table A.4
Estimating K-Factor Loadsa
Description
Incandescent Lighting
Electric Resistance Heating
Motors (without solid state drives)
Control Transformers / Electromagnetic Control Devices
Motor-Generators (without solid state drives)
Standard Distribution Transformers
Electric Discharge Lighting (HID)
UPS with Optional Input Filter
Welders
Induction Heating Equipment
PLCs and Solid State Controls
Telecommunications Equipment (PBX)
UPS without Input Filtering
Multiwire Receptacle Circuits in General Care Areas of Health Care Facilities,
Schools, etc.
Multiwire Receptacle Circuits Supplying Testing Equipment on an Assembly Line
Main-Frame Computer Loads
Solid State Motor Drives (variable speed drives)
Multiwire Receptacle Circuits in Critical Care Areas in Hospitals
Multiwire Receptacle Circuits in Industrial, Medical and Educational Laboratories
Multiwire Receptacle Circuits in Commercial Office Spaces
Small Main-Frames (mini and micro)
a
K-Factor
ILK
K1
0.00
K4
25.82
K13
57.74
K20
80.94
K30
123.54
Typical loads and K-Factor values for estimating purposes only.
15-17
APPLICATION
DATA
Measurement of Harmonics
Table A.3 K-Factor Ratings
K-Factors
K-Factor is a ratio between the additional
losses due to harmonics and the eddy
losses at 60 Hz. It is used to specify
transformers for non-linear loads. Note
that K-Factor transformers do not
eliminate harmonic distortion; they
withstand the non-linear load condition
without overheating.
2. Multiply the kVA of each load or load

category times the Index of Load
K-rating (ILK) that corresponds to the
assigned K-factor rating. This result is
an indexed kVA-ILK value.
KVA x ILK = kVA-ILK.
3. Tabulate the total connected load kVA
for all load categories to be supplied.
4. Next, add-up the kVA-ILK values for all
loads or load categories to be supplied
by the transformer.
5. Divide the grand total kVA-ILK value by
the total kVA load to be supplied. This
will give an average ILK for that combi nation of loads. Total kVA-ILK/ Total
kVA = average ILK.
6. From Table A.4 find the K-factor rating
whose ILK is equal to or greater than
the calculated ILK.
15
Effect Of Harmonics On Transformers

Non-sinusoidal current generates extra
losses and heating of transformer coils
thus reducing efficiency and shortening
the life expectancy of the transformer.
Coil losses increase with the higher
harmonic frequencies due to higher eddy
current loss in the conductors.
Furthermore, on a balanced linear power
system, the phase currents are 120
degrees out of phase and offset one
another in the neutral conductor. But with
the Triplen harmonics (multiple of 3)
the phase currents are in phase and they
are additive in this neutral conductor. This
may cause installations with non-linear
loads to double either the size or number
of neutral conductors.
Selection
Sizing Transformers for Non-Linear
Loads
ANSI / IEEE C57.110-2008 has a
procedure for de-rating standard
distribution transformers for non-linear
loading. However this is not the only
approach. A transformer with the
appropriate K-Factor specifically designed
for non-linear loads can be specified.
Application Data

Table 1A
Table 1B
Table 1C
Motor Full-Load Currents of Three

Phase AC Induction Type Motors
Motor Full-Load Currents

In Amperes, Single-Phase, AC
Motor Full-Load Currents

In Amperes, DC
Motor
Rating
Horsepower
15

1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4

1
112
APPLICATION
DATA
General

2

3
5
712
10
15

20

25

30
40
50
60
75
100

125
150

200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Current in Amperes
208V 230V 460V
575V
1.11 .96
1.34 1.18
2.4 2.2
3.5 3.2
4.6 4.2
.48 .38
.59 .47
1.1
.9
1.6
1.3
2.1 1.7
6.6
6
7.5 6.8
10.6
9.6
16.7 15.2
24.2 22.0
30.8 28.0
46.2 42.0
59.4
54
74.8
68
88 80
114 104
143 130
169 154
211 192
273 248
343 312
396 360
528 480
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
3 2.4
3.4 2.7
4.8 3.9
7.6
6.1
11.0 9.0
14.0 11.0
21.0 17.0
27 22
34 27
40 32
52
41
65
52
77
62
96
77
124 99
156 125
180 144
240 192
302 242
361 289
414 336
477 382
515 412
590 472
E = Volts I = Amperes
% EFF = Per Cent Efficiency
pf = Power Factor
Values
may vary depending on manufacturer, type of

motor and NEMA design.
For full load currents of 200 volt motors, increase the
corresponding 230 volt motor full-load current by
15 percent.
15-18
Horsepower
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
1/3
1
11/2
2
3
5
71/2
10
115V
4.4
5.8
7.2
9.8
13.8
16
20
24
34
56
80
100
230V
2.2
2.9
3.6
4.9
6.9
8
10
12
17
28
40
50
Horsepower
120V
3.1
4.1
5.4
7.6
9.5
13.2
17
25
40
58
76
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
11/2
2
3
5
71/2
10
240V
1.6
2.0
2.7
3.8
4.7
6.6
8.5
12.2
20
29
38
Table 2
Electrical Formulas for Finding Amperes, Horsepower, Kilowatts and kVA
Single-Phase
Alternating Current
Two-Phase , Four-Wire
Three-Phase
Direct
Current
I x E x pf
1000
I x E x 2 x pf
1000
I x E x 1.73 x pf
1000
IxE
1000
IxE
1000
IxEx2
1000
I x E x 1.73
1000
Horsepower
(Output)
I x E x % EFF x pf
746
I x E x 2 x % EFF x pf
746
I x E x 1.73 x % EFF x pf
746
I x E x % EFF
746
Amperes
when
Horsepower
is Known
HP x 746
E x % EFF x pf
HP x 746
2 x E x % EFF x pf
HP x 746
1.73 x E x % EFF x pf
HP x 746
E x % EFF
Amperes
when
Kilowatts is
Known
KW x 1000
E x pf
KW x 1000
2 x E x pf
KW x 1000
1.73 x E x pf
KW x 1000
E
Amperes
when kVA is
Known
kVA x 1000
E
kVA x 1000
2xE
kVA x 1000
1.73 x E
To Find
Kilowatts
kVA
Average Efficiency and Power Factor

Values of Motors
When the actual efficiencies and power
factors of the motors to be controlled are
not known, the following approximations
may be used.
Efficiencies:
DC motors, 35 horsepower
and less
80% to 85%
DC motors, above
35 horsepower
85% to 90%
Synchronous motors
(at 100% power factor)
92% to 95%
Apparent Efficiencies
( = Efficiency x Power Factor);
Three-phase induction motors,
25 horsepower and less
85%
Three-phase induction motors
above 25 horsepower
90%
These figures may be decreased slightly
for single-phase and two-phase
induction motors.
Fault-Current Calculation on
Low-Voltage AC Systems
In order to determine the maximum
interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers
in a distribution system it is necessary
to calculate the current which could flow
under a three-phase bolted short circuit
condition. For a three-phase system the
maximum available fault current at the
secondary side of the transformer can be
obtained by use of the formula:
ISC =
kVA x 100
KV x 3 x % Z
where:
ISC = Symmetrical RMS amperes of fault
current.
kVA = Kilovolt-ampere rating of
transformers.
KV = Secondary voltage in kilovolts.
% Z = Percent impedance of primary line
and transformer.
Table 5 on page 15-4 has been prepared
to list the symmetrical RMS fault current
which is available at the secondary
terminals of the transformer.
Fraction, Decimal and Millimeter Equivalents

Fractions to Decimals to Millimeters

Millimeters
0.397
0.794
1.191
1.588
1.984
2.381
2.778
3.175
3.572
3.969
4.366
4.763
5.159
5.556
5.953
6.350
6.747
7.144
7.541
7.938
8.334
8.731
9.128
9.525
9.922
10.319
10.716
11.113
11.509
11.906
12.303
12.700
13.097
13.494
13.891
14.288
14.684
15.081
15.478
15.875
16.272
16.669
17.066
17.463
17.859
18.256
18.653
19.050
19.447
19.844
20.241
20.638
21.034
21.431
21.828
22.225
22.622
23.019
23.416
23.813
24.209
24.606
25.003
25.400
Millimeters to
Millimeters
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
Inches
0.0039
0.0079
0.0118
0.0157
0.0197
0.0236
0.0276
0.0315
0.0354
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
0.0394
0.0787
0.1181
0.1575
0.1969
0.2362
0.2756
0.3150
0.3543
0.3937
0.4331
0.4724
0.5118
0.5512
0.5906
0.6299
0.6693
0.7087
0.7480
0.7874
0.8268
0.8661
0.9055
0.9449
0.9843
1.0236
1.0630
1.1024
1.1417
1.1811
1.2205
1.2598
1.2992
1.3386
1.3780
1.4173
1.4567
1.4961
1.5354
1.5748
1.6142
1.6535
1.6929
1.7323
1.7717
Millimeters
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Inches
1.8110
1.8504
1.8898
1.9291
1.9685
2.0079
2.0472
2.0866
2.1260
2.1654
2.2047
2.2441
2.2835
2.3228
2.3622
2.4016
2.4409
2.4803
2.5197
2.5591
2.5984
2.6378
2.6772
2.7165
2.7559
2.7953
2.8346
2.8740
2.9134
2.9528
2.9921
3.0315
3.0709
3.1102
3.1496
3.1890
3.2283
3.2677
3.3071
3.3465
3.3858
3.4252
3.4646
3.5039
3.5433
3.5827
3.6220
3.6614
3.7008
3.7402
3.7795
3.8189
3.8583
3.8976
3.9370
APPLICATION
DATA
Decimals
0.015625
0.03125
0.046875
0.0625
0.078125
0.09375
0.109375
0.1250
0.140625
0.15625
0.171875
0.1875
0.203125
0.21875
0.234375
0.2500
0.265625
0.28125
0.296875
0.3125
0.328125
0.34375
0.359375
0.3750
0.390625
0.40625
0.421875
0.4375
0.453125
0.46875
0.484375
0.500
0.515625
0.53125
0.546875
0.5625
0.578125
0.59375
0.609375
0.6250
0.640625
0.65625
0.671875
0.6875
0.703125
0.71875
0.734375
0.7500
0.765625
0.78125
0.796875
0.8125
0.828125
0.84375
0.859375
0.8750
0.890625
0.90625
0.921875
0.9375
0.953125
0.96875
0.984375
1.000
15
Fractions
1/64
1/32
3/64
1/16
5/64
3/32
7/64
1/8
9/64
5/32
11/64
3/16
13/64
7/32
15/64
1/4
17/64
9/32
19/64
5/16
21/64
11/32
23/64
3/8
25/64
13/32
27/64
7/16
29/64
15/32
31/64
1/2
33/64
17/32
35/64
9/16
37/64
19/32
39/64
5/8
41/64
21/32
43/64
11/16
45/64
23/32
47/64
3/4
49/64
25/32
51/64
13/16
53/64
27/32
55/64
7/8
57/64
29/32
59/64
15/16
61/64
31/32
63/64
1
Conversion Tables
Inches
0.001
= 0.0254 mm
1 mm = 0.03937
15-19
All product designations may be trademarks or

product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own
purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Printed in Canada.
2012 Siemens Canada Limited
Order No.: 2.0_09/12_A&D-1440
Siemens Canada Limited

Infrastructure & Cities Low Voltage & Products
1577 North Service Road East
Oakville, ON L6H 0H6
siemens.ca/powercat
Customer Interaction Centre

(888) 303-3353
cic.ca@siemens.com
Bur
naby
39352ndAvenue
Bur
naby
,BCV5C3W9
T
el
:6042924800
Cr
anbr
ook
Uni
tA#800I
ndus
t
r
i
alRoad.#2
Cr
anbr
ook,BCV1C4C9
T
el
:2504894591
Daws
onCr
eek
110197t
hAvenue
Daws
onCr
eek,BCV1G1N5
T
el
:2507824896
Langl
ey
#101-20550DuncanWay
Langl
ey
,BCV3A7A3
T
el
:6045331275
Kaml
oops
B983Camos
unCr
es
cent
Kaml
oops
,BCV2C6G1
T
el
:2503743191
For
tNel
s
on
POBox3266-501648t
hAvenue
For
tNel
s
on,BCV0C1R0
T
el
:2502338570
Ri
chmond
12360Vi
cker
sWay
Ri
chmond,BCV6V1H9
T
el
:6042731981
Pent
i
ct
on
401OkanaganAvenue
Pent
i
ct
on,BCV2A3K1
T
el
:2504924032
Ki
t
i
mat
622Commer
ci
alAvenue
Ki
t
i
mat
,BCV8C2C5
T
el
:2506323774
Sur
r
ey
1305580t
hAvenue
Sur
r
ey
,BCV3W 3B1
T
el
:6045967111
Ver
non
520324t
hSt
r
eet
Ver
non,BCV1T8X7
T
el
:2505452191
Pr
i
nceGeor
ge
2255S.Qui
nnSt
r
eet
Pr
i
nceGeor
ge,BCV2N2X4
T
el
:2505630575
Wi
l
l
i
amsLake
527S.MacKenz
i
eAvenue
Wi
l
l
i
amsLake,BCV2G1C8
T
el
:2503927795
T
er
r
ace
5000Pohl
eAvenue
T
er
r
ace,BCV8G4S8
T
el
:2506356379
Campbel
lRi
ver
1030B-9t
hAvenue
Campbel
lRi
ver
,BCV9W 4C2
T
el
:2502879265
Cour
t
enay
2615Mor
ayPl
ace
Cour
t
enay
,BCV9N8A9
T
el
:2503340338
Duncan
5286Pol
keyRoad
Duncan,BCV9L6W3
T
el
:2507483377
Uni
t9,722368Avenue,
Edmont
on,Al
ber
t
a T6B3T6
Pr
oces
s
,Aut
omat
i
on&
Cont
r
ol
sGr
oup
T
el
:7785459916
Pr
oj
ect
sGr
oup
T
el
:6045967111
Dat
aCommuni
cat
i
onsGr
oup
T
el
:7785459916
Li
ght
i
ngSpeci
al
i
s
t
T
el
:7785459916
Par
ks
vi
l
l
e
#105-425E.St
anf
or
dAvenue
Par
ks
vi
l
l
e,BCV9P2N4
T
el
:2509541797
HeadOf
f
i
ce
1929525t
hAvenue
Sur
r
ey
,BCV3Z3X1
T
el
:7785459916
Fax:7785453099
T
ol
lFr
ee:18884677626

Customer Ebhoso Documents Catalogues Siemens PowerProducts

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Customer Ebhoso Documents Catalogues Siemens PowerProducts

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

pr

Power Product Catalogue

Reliable Products From

1 Safety & Disconnect Switches

11 Renewable Energy Products

14 Motor Control Centres

Detailed Table of Contents

Safety & Disconnect Switches

Contents - Safety Switches

Cross Reference and Replacement Parts for SE and ID Switches

SAFETY & DISCONNECT

Air Conditioning Disconnects 1-3

SAFETY & DISCONNECT

Safety & Disconnect Switches

Contents - Disconnect Switches

Non-Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects

240V Non-Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure

6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00

6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00

Wire Range Table

LOAD Bonded LOAD

* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

240V Fused Disconnect cUL listed, Type 3R enclosure

Fused Air Conditioning Disconnects

6x @ 0.50 x @ 0.75 x @ 1.00

6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00

* For inches/millimeters conversion, multiply inches by 25.4.

Wire Range Table

6x @ 0.50 @ 0.75 @ 1.00

Type VBII Safety Switches

General Duty Switches are intended for

Heavy Duty Switches are intended for use in

Double throw switches are intended to

4. A Type 12 or 4/4X enclosure is required.

Suitable for use on systems capable of

Fusible switches will accept the following CSA

Fusible switches will accept the following CSA

Fusible switches will accept the following CSA

30 LF - 30A max plug Fuses

30-600A HD Class H & K, Class R with kit

30-200A DT - Class H & K, Class R with kit

Voidable cover interlocks on switches prevent

Voidable dual cover interlocks standard on all

Dual cover interlocks standard on all double

CSA certified under file #24563 as enclosed

Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 for type GD

Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 type HD for

Meet NEMA standard KS-1-2001 for type HD

Fusible switches have groundable neutral blocks

All switches (both Fusible and Non-Fusible) are

All 2-3 pole DT will accept field addable

Padlockable cover latch. OFF padlock

Padlockable cover latch and multipleOFF

Padlockable cover latch and multipleOFF

HP & Load

(All neutrals are

protective device can either be a fuse installed in a

T kit available for 240V max. applications on

Siemens Canada Limited Power Product Catalogue 2014

30 thru 600 Amps

800 and 1200 Amps

Double-break visible blade design

Handle design for hook stick operation

Highly visible ON/OFF handle indication

4. A Type 12 or 4/4X enclosure is required.

HP & Load